G60man v1

Title Page
g
G60 revision: 5.8x Manual P/N: 1601-0110-V1 (GEK-113553) Copyright 2010 GE Multilin
GE Multilin
G60 Generator Protection System

UR Series Instruction Manual
830715A2.CDR
E83849
RE
T GIS ERE
GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 Internet: http://www.GEmultilin.com
LISTED IND.CONT. EQ. 52TL
ISO9001:2000
EM
U LT I L
GE Multilin's Quality Management System is registered to ISO9001:2000 QMI # 005094 UL # A3775
*1601-0110-V1*
Addendum
g
ADDENDUM
GE Multilin
This addendum contains information that relates to the G60 Generator Protection System, version 5.8x. This addendum lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-113553 (revision V1) but are not included in the current G60 operations. The following functions and items are not yet available with the current version of the G60 relay: Signal sources SRC 5 and SRC 6. Version 4.0x and higher releases of the G60 relay includes new hardware (CPU and CT/VT modules). The new CPU modules are specified with the following order codes: 9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R, and 9S. The new CT/VT modules are specified with the following order codes: 8F, 8G, 8H, 8J 8L, 8M, 8N, 8R. The following table maps the relationship between the old CPU and CT/VT modules to the newer versions:
MODULE CPU OLD 9A 9C 9D ----------------CT/VT 8A 8B 8C 8D ----NEW 9E 9G 9H 9J 9K 9L 9M 9N 9P 9R 9S 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R DESCRIPTION RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP) RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP) RS485 and redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP) RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and 10/100Base-T RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive ground 8CT Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with the new CPUs (9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R, and 9S), and the old CT/VT modules can only be used with the old CPU modules (9A, 9C, 9D). To prevent any hardware mismatches, the new CPU and CT/VT modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating Attn.: Ensure CPU and DSP module label colors are the same!. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed. All other input/output modules are compatible with the new hardware. With respect to the firmware, firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only compatible with the new CPU and CT/VT modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older CPU and CT/VT modules.
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED
1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................................................. 1-4 PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 1-5 CONFIGURING THE G60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS .................................... 1-7 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE....................................................... 1-9 CONNECTING TO THE G60 RELAY .............................................................. 1-15 MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-16 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 1-16 FACEPLATE DISPLAY .................................................................................... 1-16 FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-17 MENU NAVIGATION ....................................................................................... 1-17 MENU HIERARCHY ........................................................................................ 1-17 RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-17 RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-18 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-18 COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-19
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.5 USING THE RELAY
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.13 2.2.14 2.2.15 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1 ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-3 REPLACEMENT MODULES ............................................................................. 2-7 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................. 2-10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 2-14 MONITORING .................................................................................................. 2-15 METERING ...................................................................................................... 2-15 INPUTS ............................................................................................................ 2-16 POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 2-17 OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................ 2-18 FIELD AND STATOR GROUND MODULES ................................................... 2-19 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 2-21 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-22 ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-22 TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-23 PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-23 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-24 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-24
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
3. HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION ..................................................... 3-6 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-8 TYPICAL WIRING............................................................................................ 3-10 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ............................................................................... 3-12 CONTROL POWER ......................................................................................... 3-12 CT/VT MODULES ............................................................................................ 3-13 PROCESS BUS MODULES ............................................................................ 3-15
3.2 WIRING
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.2.9 3.2.10 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 3.3.8 3.3.9 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS................................................................3-15 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS.................................................................3-23 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ..............................................................................3-24 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS.....................................................................3-24 IRIG-B ...............................................................................................................3-27 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-28 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-30 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-30 G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-31 RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-34 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-36 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-36 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-37 C37.94SM INTERFACE ...................................................................................3-39 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................3-41 FIELD GROUND LOW-VOLTAGE PROTECTION SYSTEM ...........................3-42 FIELD GROUND HIGH-VOLTAGE PROTECTION SYSTEM ..........................3-45 STATOR GROUND PROTECTION SYSTEM ..................................................3-52 UPGRADING FIRMWARE ...............................................................................3-59 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................3-62 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE..............................3-62 MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS .........................................................3-63 CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE .................3-63 UPLOADING G60 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE.........................................3-66 ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS...................................................3-68
3.3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS MODULES
3.4 FIELD AND STATOR GROUND MODULES
3.5 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
4. HUMAN INTERFACES
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 4.3.7 4.3.8 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................4-1 CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW ................................................................4-1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW..........................................................4-3 SETTINGS TEMPLATES ...................................................................................4-4 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS ................................4-8 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY.....................................................................4-10 FACEPLATE .....................................................................................................4-13 LED INDICATORS............................................................................................4-14 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS .......................................................................4-17 DISPLAY...........................................................................................................4-23 KEYPAD ...........................................................................................................4-23 BREAKER CONTROL ......................................................................................4-23 MENUS .............................................................................................................4-24 CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-26
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
5. SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-4 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5 SECURITY..........................................................................................................5-8 DISPLAY PROPERTIES ..................................................................................5-12 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS ..............................................................................5-14 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................5-15 MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................5-37 REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-38
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
vi
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.2.11 5.2.12 5.2.13 5.2.14 5.2.15 5.2.16 5.2.17 5.2.18 5.3.1 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7 5.5.8 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.6.10 5.6.11 5.6.12 5.6.13 5.6.14 5.6.15 5.6.16 5.6.17 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5 5.7.6 5.7.7 5.7.8 5.7.9 5.7.10 5.7.11 5.7.12 5.8.1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT ................................................... 5-39 OSCILLOGRAPHY .......................................................................................... 5-40 DATA LOGGER ............................................................................................... 5-42 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS..................................................................... 5-43 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS......................................................... 5-46 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ........................................................................... 5-47 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS ................................................... 5-48 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 5-53 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ....................................................................... 5-54 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ........................................................................... 5-56 TELEPROTECTION......................................................................................... 5-64 INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 5-64 REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION ................................................... 5-66 AC INPUTS ...................................................................................................... 5-67 POWER SYSTEM............................................................................................ 5-68 SIGNAL SOURCES ......................................................................................... 5-69 BREAKERS...................................................................................................... 5-72 DISCONNECT SWITCHES ............................................................................. 5-76 FLEXCURVES ................................................................................................. 5-79 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT.................................................................... 5-86 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC ............................................................. 5-102 FLEXLOGIC RULES .................................................................................. 5-113 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION........................................................................ 5-113 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE ............................................................................. 5-114 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR ............................................................. 5-118 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS................................................................................. 5-118 FLEXELEMENTS ....................................................................................... 5-119 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ........................................................................... 5-123 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-124 SETTING GROUP ......................................................................................... 5-124 DISTANCE ..................................................................................................... 5-125 POWER SWING DETECT ............................................................................. 5-133 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL .............................................................................. 5-141 PHASE CURRENT ........................................................................................ 5-144 NEUTRAL CURRENT.................................................................................... 5-155 GROUND CURRENT..................................................................................... 5-162 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT ............................................................. 5-169 GENERATOR UNBALANCE ......................................................................... 5-173 SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION ....................................................................... 5-175 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................. 5-179 LOSS OF EXCITATION ................................................................................. 5-189 ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION .................................................................... 5-191 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER............................................................. 5-193 STATOR GROUND........................................................................................ 5-196 FIELD GROUND FAULT PROTECTION ....................................................... 5-205 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-211 TRIP BUS....................................................................................................... 5-211 SETTING GROUPS ....................................................................................... 5-213 SELECTOR SWITCH..................................................................................... 5-214 UNDERFREQUENCY.................................................................................... 5-220 OVERFREQUENCY ...................................................................................... 5-221 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE................................................................ 5-222 FREQUENCY OUT-OF-BAND ACCUMULATION ......................................... 5-224 SYNCHROCHECK......................................................................................... 5-226 DIGITAL ELEMENTS..................................................................................... 5-231 DIGITAL COUNTERS .................................................................................... 5-234 MONITORING ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-236 CONTACT INPUTS........................................................................................ 5-237
5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
GE Multilin
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.4 5.8.5 5.8.6 5.8.7 5.8.8 5.8.9 5.8.10 5.8.11 5.8.12 5.8.13 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 5.9.4 5.10.1 5.10.2 5.10.3 5.10.4 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..........................................................................................5-239 CONTACT OUTPUTS ....................................................................................5-240 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ......................................................................................5-242 REMOTE DEVICES........................................................................................5-243 REMOTE INPUTS ..........................................................................................5-244 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS ...............................................5-245 REMOTE OUTPUTS ......................................................................................5-245 RESETTING ...................................................................................................5-246 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS..................................................................5-247 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ..............................................5-250 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS ......................................................................5-252 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS .....................................................................5-253 DCMA INPUTS ...............................................................................................5-254 RTD INPUTS ..................................................................................................5-255 RRTD INPUTS................................................................................................5-257 DCMA OUTPUTS ...........................................................................................5-261 TEST MODE ...................................................................................................5-265 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS...........................................................................5-266 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS.......................................................................5-267 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT TEST VALUES .........................................5-268
5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
5.10 TESTING
6. ACTUAL VALUES
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.11 6.2.12 6.2.13 6.2.14 6.2.15 6.2.16 6.2.17 6.2.18 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.3.9 6.3.10 6.3.11 6.3.12 6.3.13 6.3.14 6.3.15 6.3.16 6.3.17 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU .........................................................................6-1 CONTACT INPUTS ............................................................................................6-4 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-4 REMOTE INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-4 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS ...................................................6-5 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS .............................................................................6-5 CONTACT OUTPUTS ........................................................................................6-5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ..........................................................................................6-6 REMOTE DEVICES............................................................................................6-6 DIGITAL COUNTERS.........................................................................................6-7 SELECTOR SWITCHES ....................................................................................6-7 FLEX STATES ....................................................................................................6-7 ETHERNET ........................................................................................................6-7 DIRECT INPUTS ................................................................................................6-8 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS ..............................................................................6-8 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS .........................................................................6-9 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS................................................................................6-9 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS...........................................................6-10 ETHERNET SWITCH .......................................................................................6-10 METERING CONVENTIONS ...........................................................................6-11 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL.................................................................................6-14 SOURCES ........................................................................................................6-14 SYNCHROCHECK ...........................................................................................6-19 TRACKING FREQUENCY................................................................................6-20 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE ..................................................................6-20 FREQUENCY OUT-OF-BAND ACCUMULATION............................................6-20 FLEXELEMENTS ..........................................................................................6-21 IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES ...........................................................6-22 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER ...............................................................6-22 STATOR GROUND ..........................................................................................6-22 SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND .............................................................6-23 FIELD GROUND...............................................................................................6-23 VOLTS PER HERTZ.........................................................................................6-23 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT......................................................................6-23 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ....................................................................6-24 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................6-25
6.2 STATUS
6.3 METERING
viii
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS 6.4 RECORDS

6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS ................................................ 6-26 EVENT RECORDS .......................................................................................... 6-26 OSCILLOGRAPHY .......................................................................................... 6-26 DATA LOGGER ............................................................................................... 6-27 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS................................................. 6-27 MODEL INFORMATION .................................................................................. 6-28 FIRMWARE REVISIONS ................................................................................. 6-28
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
7. COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.1 COMMANDS
7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.6 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 COMMANDS MENU .......................................................................................... 7-1 VIRTUAL INPUTS.............................................................................................. 7-1 CLEAR RECORDS ............................................................................................ 7-2 SET DATE AND TIME ....................................................................................... 7-2 RELAY MAINTENANCE .................................................................................... 7-3 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ONE-SHOT.................................................. 7-4 TARGETS MENU............................................................................................... 7-6 TARGET MESSAGES ....................................................................................... 7-6 RELAY SELF-TESTS......................................................................................... 7-6
7.2 TARGETS
8. SECURITY
8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY

8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 8-1 PASSWORD SECURITY MENU ....................................................................... 8-2 LOCAL PASSWORDS ....................................................................................... 8-2 REMOTE PASSWORDS ................................................................................... 8-3 ACCESS SUPERVISION ................................................................................... 8-3 DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS ....................................................... 8-4 SETTINGS TEMPLATES ................................................................................... 8-6 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS ............................. 8-10 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY .................................................................... 8-12 OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 8-15 ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ................................. 8-15 ADDING A NEW USER ................................................................................... 8-15 MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES ................................................................... 8-16
8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY
8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
9. THEORY OF OPERATION
9.1 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

9.1.1 9.1.2 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................... 9-1 EXAMPLE .......................................................................................................... 9-4
10. APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
10.1 SETTING EXAMPLE

10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 10.1.4 10.1.5 10.1.6 10.1.7 10.1.8 10.1.9 10.1.10 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 10-1 SYSTEM SETUP ............................................................................................. 10-1 POWER SYSTEM............................................................................................ 10-2 SIGNAL SOURCES ......................................................................................... 10-2 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL ................................................................................ 10-3 GENERATOR UNBALANCE ........................................................................... 10-3 LOSS OF EXCITATION ................................................................................... 10-4 REVERSE POWER ......................................................................................... 10-4 SYSTEM BACKUP OVERCURRENT .............................................................. 10-5 BACKUP DISTANCE ....................................................................................... 10-6
GE Multilin
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
10.1.11 10.1.12 10.1.13 10.1.14 10.1.15 10.1.16 10.2.1 10.2.2 STATOR GROUND FAULT ..............................................................................10-7 OVEREXCITATION ........................................................................................10-10 INPUTS/OUTPUTS ........................................................................................10-11 FREQUENCY .................................................................................................10-12 ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION .....................................................................10-12 FLEXLOGIC ................................................................................................10-13 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................10-14 EXAMPLE .......................................................................................................10-15
11. COMMISSIONING
11.1 TESTING
11.1.1 TESTING UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY ELEMENTS .......11-1
A. FLEXANALOG AND FLEXINTEGER PARAMETERS
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

A.1.1 A.1.2 FLEXANALOG ITEMS ....................................................................................... A-1 FLEXINTEGER ITEMS .................................................................................... A-24
B. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

B.1.1 B.1.2 B.1.3 B.1.4 B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3 B.2.4 B.2.5 B.2.6 B.3.1 B.3.2 B.4.1 B.4.2 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... B-1 PHYSICAL LAYER ............................................................................................ B-1 DATA LINK LAYER ........................................................................................... B-1 CRC-16 ALGORITHM ....................................................................................... B-2 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ................................................................... B-3 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ........... B-3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)........................................... B-4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)....................................... B-4 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................ B-5 EXCEPTION RESPONSES............................................................................... B-5 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS........................................................ B-6 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION ............................................................... B-7 MODBUS MEMORY MAP ................................................................................. B-8 DATA FORMATS............................................................................................. B-65
B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
C. IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONS
C.1 OVERVIEW
C.1.1 C.1.2 C.2.1 C.2.2 C.2.3 C.2.4 C.2.5 C.2.6 C.2.7 C.3.1 C.3.2 C.3.3 C.3.4 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... C-1 COMMUNICATION PROFILES ......................................................................... C-1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... C-2 GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES ................................................................. C-2 GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES.............................................................. C-2 GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE DATAC-2 GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES......................................... C-2 MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES .......................................................... C-3 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES............................................... C-3 BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING........................................................ C-5 FILE TRANSFER ............................................................................................... C-5 TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING ....................................................................... C-5 LOGICAL DEVICE NAME ................................................................................. C-5
C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION
C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
C.3.5 C.3.6 C.3.7 C.3.8 C.3.9 C.4.1 C.4.2 C.4.3 C.4.4 C.4.5 C.4.6 C.5.1 C.5.2 C.5.3 C.5.4 C.5.5 C.5.6 C.6.1 C.6.2 C.6.3 C.7.1 LOCATION.........................................................................................................C-5 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES ..................................................................C-6 CONNECTION TIMING .....................................................................................C-6 NON-IEC 61850 DATA ......................................................................................C-6 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES .....................................................C-6 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................C-7 GSSE CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................C-7 FIXED GOOSE ..................................................................................................C-7 CONFIGURABLE GOOSE.................................................................................C-7 ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE...........................................C-9 GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS ............................................................C-10 OVERVIEW......................................................................................................C-11 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS...........................................................C-12 ABOUT ICD FILES...........................................................................................C-13 CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP ..............................C-17 ABOUT SCD FILES .........................................................................................C-17 IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP ...........................C-20 ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT.................................................C-22 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ............................................C-22 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT .........................................C-23 LOGICAL NODES TABLE ...............................................................................C-26
C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE
C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP
C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE
C.7 LOGICAL NODES
D. IEC 60870-5-104 COMMUNICATIONS
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104

D.1.1 D.1.2 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT ...................................................................D-1 IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LIST ...........................................................................D-9
E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

E.1.1 E.1.2 E.2.1 E.2.2 E.2.3 E.2.4 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE ..........................................................................E-1 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE ...............................................................................E-4 BINARY INPUT POINTS....................................................................................E-8 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT ......................................................E-9 COUNTERS .....................................................................................................E-10 ANALOG INPUTS ............................................................................................E-11
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
F. MISCELLANEOUS
F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.1.1 F.1.2 F.2.1 F.3.1 REVISION HISTORY ......................................................................................... F-1 CHANGES TO THE G60 MANUAL ................................................................... F-2 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... F-8 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY ............................................................................. F-10
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS F.3 WARRANTY
INDEX
GE Multilin
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
xii
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay.
1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
WARNING
CAUTION
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in this manual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/or downtime. 1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
1. 2.
Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage. View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.
G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin
Technical Support: Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
http://www.GEmultilin.com
RATINGS:
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A 360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break 4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
Made in Canada
Model: Mods: Wiring Diagram: Inst. Manual: Serial Number: Firmware: Mfg. Date:
G60D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A 000 830721A3 GEK-113274 MAZB98000029 D 2005/01/05
830742A1.CDR
Figure 11: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE) 3. Ensure that the following items are included: Instruction manual. GE EnerVista CD (includes the EnerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format). Mounting screws. For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEmultilin.com. If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE Multilin immediately.
NOTE
GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT: GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 TELEPHONE: FAX: E-MAIL: HOME PAGE: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America only) (905) 201-2098 [email protected] http://www.GEmultilin.com
GE Multilin
1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2UR OVERVIEW
1 GETTING STARTED 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR
Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the singlefunction approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxiliary equipment to produce functioning systems. Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equipment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and auxiliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using electronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device). It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more functions within the IEDs. Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly. High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and monitoring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 3 milliseconds. This has been established by the IEC 61850 standard. IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available, enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control systems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.
1-2
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
a) UR BASIC DESIGN The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or another UR device.
Input Elements
Contact Inputs Virtual Inputs Analog Inputs CT Inputs VT Inputs Remote Inputs Direct Inputs
Input Status Table
CPU Module
Protective Elements Pickup Dropout Output Operate
Status
Output Elements
Contact Outputs Virtual Outputs Analog Outputs Remote Outputs -DNA -USER Direct Outputs
Logic Gates
Table
LAN Programming Device Operator Interface

827822A2.CDR
Figure 12: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as programmable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features. Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into logic signals used by the relay. Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used to control field devices. b) UR SIGNAL TYPES The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both wet and dry contacts are supported. The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations. The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs). The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines. The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs. The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic operands inserted into IEC 61850 GSSE and GOOSE messages. The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series IEDs over a dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are connected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilotaided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.
GE Multilin
1-3
1.2 UR OVERVIEW c) UR SCAN OPERATION
1 GETTING STARTED
The UR-series devices operate in a cyclic scan fashion. The device reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the logic program (FlexLogic equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.
Read Inputs
Protection elements serviced by sub-scan
Protective Elements
Solve Logic
PKP DPO OP
Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR
Figure 13: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION 1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as required. This is achieved with object-oriented design and programming (OOD/OOP) techniques. Object-oriented techniques involve the use of objects and classes. An object is defined as a logical entity that contains both data and code that manipulates that data. A class is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept, one can create a protection class with the protection elements as objects of the class, such as time overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent, current differential, undervoltage, overvoltage, underfrequency, and distance. These objects represent completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for metering, input/output control, hmi, communications, or any functional entity in the system. Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the G60 achieves the same features as the hardware architecture: modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any UR-series device (for example, feeder protection, transformer protection, distance protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes. This results in a common look and feel across the entire family of UR-series platform-based applications. 1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS As described above, the architecture of the UR-series relays differ from previous devices. To achieve a general understanding of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in elements. A description of the UR-series elements can be found in the Introduction to elements section in chapter 5. Examples of simple elements, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Control elements section of chapter 5. An explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the Introduction to AC sources section in chapter 5. A description of how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to FlexLogic section in chapter 5.
1-4
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS
The faceplate keypad and display or the EnerVista UR Setup software interface can be used to communicate with the relay. The EnerVista UR Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format. The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista UR Setup software to properly operate on a PC. Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended) Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher 128 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended) 200 MB of available space on system drive and 200 MB of available space on installation drive Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in high-color mode (16-bit color) RS232 and/or Ethernet port for communications to the relay
The following qualified modems have been tested to be compliant with the G60 and the EnerVista UR Setup software. US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686 US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2 PCTEL 2304WT V.92 MDC internal modem 1.3.2 INSTALLATION After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup are met (see previous section), use the following procedure to install the EnerVista UR Setup from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD. 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge EnerVista software. When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application. Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
GE Multilin
1-5
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 5.
1 GETTING STARTED
In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the G60 Generator Protection System from the Install Software window as shown below. Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release, or select CD if you do not have a web connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the G60.
6. 7. 8. 9.
EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the software from the Web or CD and automatically start the installation program. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista UR Setup will be installed. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu. Click Finish to end the installation. The UR-series device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad window, as shown below.
1-6
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.3 CONFIGURING THE G60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS
a) OVERVIEW The user can connect remotely to the G60 through the rear RS485 port or the rear Ethernet port with a PC running the EnerVista UR Setup software. The G60 can also be accessed locally with a laptop computer through the front panel RS232 port or the rear Ethernet port using the Quick Connect feature. To configure the G60 for remote access via the rear RS485 port(s), refer to the Configuring Serial Communications section. To configure the G60 for remote access via the rear Ethernet port, refer to the Configuring Ethernet Communications section. An Ethernet module must be specified at the time of ordering. To configure the G60 for local access with a laptop through either the front RS232 port or rear Ethernet port, refer to the Using the Quick Connect Feature section. An Ethernet module must be specified at the time of ordering for Ethernet communications.
b) CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected to the RS485 terminals on the back of the device. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is not described in this section; see the Using the Quick Connect Feature section for details on configuring the RS232 port. A GE Multilin F485 converter (or compatible RS232-to-RS485 converter) is will be required. Refer to the F485 instruction manual for additional details. 1. 2. 3. 4. Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEmultilin.com). See the Software Installation section for installation details. Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use Location 1 as the site name. Click the OK button when complete. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window. Click the Add Device button to define the new device. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
5. 6. 7.
GE Multilin
1-7
1 GETTING STARTED
Select Serial from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper serial communications.
Figure 14: CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 9.

MUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS
Enter the relay slave address, COM port, baud rate, and parity settings from the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMmenu in their respective fields.
10. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the G60 device and upload the order code. If an communications error occurs, ensure that the EnerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values. 11. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window. The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the G60 section to begin communications. c) CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site. 1. 2. 3. 4. Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEmultilin.com). See the Software Installation section for installation details. Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use Location 2 as the site name. Click the OK button when complete. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window. Click the Add Device button to define the new device. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
5. 6. 7.
1-8
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 8.
Select Ethernet from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
Figure 15: CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS 9.

ADDRESS)
Enter the relay IP address specified in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP in the IP Address field.
10. Enter the relay slave address and Modbus port address values from the respective settings in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL menu. 11. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the G60 device and upload the order code. If an communications error occurs, ensure that the three EnerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay setting values. 12. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window. The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the G60 section to begin communications. 1.3.4 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE a) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE FRONT PANEL RS232 PORT Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected from the laptop computer to the front panel RS232 port with a straight-through 9-pin to 9-pin RS232 cable. 1. 2. Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEmultilin.com). See the Software Installation section for installation details. Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
GE Multilin
1-9
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 3. Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
1 GETTING STARTED
4. 5.
Select the Serial interface and the correct COM Port, then click Connect. The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named Quick Connect with a corresponding device also named Quick Connect and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly from the G60 device.
Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to the G60. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the G60 model number. b) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE REAR ETHERNET PORTS To use the Quick Connect feature to access the G60 from a laptop through Ethernet, first assign an IP address to the relay from the front panel keyboard. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS menu is displayed. Navigate to the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting. Enter an IP address of 1.1.1.1 and select the ENTER key to save the value. In the same menu, select the SUBNET IP MASK setting. Enter a subnet IP address of 255.0.0.0 and press the ENTER key to save the value.
Next, use an Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the laptop to the rear Ethernet port. The pinout for an Ethernet crossover cable is shown below.
2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8
END 1 Pin Wire color 1 White/orange 2 Orange 3 White/green 4 Blue 5 White/blue 6 Green 7 White/brown 8 Brown Diagram END 2 Pin Wire color 1 White/green 2 Green 3 White/orange 4 Blue 5 White/blue 6 Orange 7 White/brown 8 Brown Diagram
842799A1.CDR
Figure 16: ETHERNET CROSS-OVER CABLE PIN LAYOUT Now, assign the laptop computer an IP address compatible with the relays IP address.
1-10
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.
From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network connections window.
2.
Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.
3.
Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
4.
Click on the Use the following IP address box.
GE Multilin
1-11
1 GETTING STARTED
Enter an IP address with the first three numbers the same as the IP address of the G60 relay and the last number different (in this example, 1.1.1.2). Enter a subnet mask equal to the one set in the G60 (in this example, 255.0.0.0). Click OK to save the values.
6. 7.
Before continuing, it will be necessary to test the Ethernet connection. 1. 2. Open a Windows console window by selecting Start > Run from the Windows Start menu and typing cmd. Type the following command:
C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
3.
If the connection is successful, the system will return four replies as follows:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data: Reply Reply Reply Reply from from from from 1.1.1.1: 1.1.1.1: 1.1.1.1: 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 bytes=32 bytes=32 bytes=32 time<10ms time<10ms time<10ms time<10ms TTL=255 TTL=255 TTL=255 TTL=255
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), Approximate round trip time in milli-seconds: Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
4.
Note that the values for time and TTL will vary depending on local network configuration.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data: Request Request Request Request timed timed timed timed out. out. out. out.
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss), Approximate round trip time in milli-seconds: Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Verify the physical connection between the G60 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure. If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data: Hardware Hardware Hardware Hardware error. error. error. error.
Verify the physical connection between the G60 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure. If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
1-12
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data: Destination Destination Destination Destination host host host host unreachable. unreachable. unreachable. unreachable.
Verify the IP address is programmed in the local PC by entering the ipconfig command in the command window.
C:\WINNT>ipconfig Windows 2000 IP Configuration Ethernet adapter <F4FE223E-5EB6-4BFB-9E34-1BD7BE7F59FF>: Connection-specific IP Address. . . . . Subnet Mask . . . . Default Gateway . . Connection-specific IP Address. . . . . Subnet Mask . . . . Default Gateway . . C:\WINNT> DNS . . . . . . DNS . . . . . . suffix. . . . . . . . . . . . . suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : : 0.0.0.0 : 0.0.0.0 : : : 1.1.1.2 : 255.0.0.0 :
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
It may be necessary to restart the laptop for the change in IP address to take effect (Windows 98 or NT). Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port, it is necessary to disable any configured proxy settings in Internet Explorer. 1. 2. 3. Start the Internet Explorer software. Select the Tools > Internet Options menu item and click on Connections tab. Click on the LAN Settings button to open the following window.
4.
Ensure that the Use a proxy server for your LAN box is not checked.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the laptop has been disconnected from the G60 relay. 1. 2. Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE enerVista CD or online from http://www.GEmultilin.com). See the Software Installation section for installation details. Start the Internet Explorer software.
GE Multilin
1-13
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 3. Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup. Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
1 GETTING STARTED
4.
5. 6.
Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the G60, then click Connect. The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named Quick Connect with a corresponding device also named Quick Connect and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly from the G60 device.
Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to the G60. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the G60 model number. When direct communications with the G60 via Ethernet is complete, make the following changes: 1. 2. 3. 4. From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network connections window. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item. Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button. Set the computer to Obtain a relay address automatically as shown below.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the laptop has been disconnected from the G60 relay. AUTOMATIC DISCOVERY OF ETHERNET DEVICES The EnerVista UR Setup software can automatically discover and communicate to all UR-series IEDs located on an Ethernet network. Using the Quick Connect feature, a single click of the mouse will trigger the software to automatically detect any UR-series relays located on the network. The EnerVista UR Setup software will then proceed to configure all settings and order code options in the Device Setup menu, for the purpose of communicating to multiple relays. This feature allows the user to identify and interrogate, in seconds, all UR-series devices in a particular location.
1-14
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.5 CONNECTING TO THE G60 RELAY
1.
Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:
Quick action hot links
Expand the site list by double-clicking or selecting the +/ box.
Communications status indicators: Green = OK Red = No communications UR icon = report is open
842743A3.CDR
2. 3.
The Display Properties window will open with a status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window. If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier). If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, than a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open. Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.
4.
The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications. Refer to chapter 4 in this manual and the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.
NOTE
QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS The EnerVista UR Setup software has several new quick action buttons that provide users with instant access to several functions that are often performed when using G60 relays. From the online window, users can select which relay to interrogate from a pull-down window, then click on the button for the action they wish to perform. The following quick action functions are available: View the G60 event record. View the last recorded oscillography record. View the status of all G60 inputs and outputs. View all of the G60 metering values. View the G60 protection summary.
GE Multilin
1-15
1.4 UR HARDWARE 1.4UR HARDWARE
1 GETTING STARTED 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS carefully. 1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ethernet ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard straight-through serial cable is used. The DB-9 male end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described in the CPU communications ports section of chapter 3.
Figure 17: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS To communicate through the G60 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a straight-through serial cable. A shielded twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the G60 rear communications port. The converter terminals (+, , GND) are connected to the G60 communication module (+, , COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU communications ports section in chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (that is, 120 , 1 nF) as described in the chapter 3. 1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY All messages are displayed on a 2 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.
1-16
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED 1.5USING THE RELAY
1.5 USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets. The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups. The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad. The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values. 1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages: Actual values. Settings. Commands. Targets. User displays (when enabled). 1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted
SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP 1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION The relay is defaulted to the Not Programmed state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Service LED off. The relay in the Not Programmed state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain until the relay is explicitly put in the Programmed state. Select the menu message SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed
GE Multilin
1-17
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1 GETTING STARTED
To put the relay in the Programmed state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press ENTER. The faceplate Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually (refer to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the EnerVista UR Setup help file) via the EnerVista UR Setup software interface. 1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING: 1. COMMAND The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following operations: change state of virtual inputs clear event records clear oscillography records operate user-programmable pushbuttons
2. SETTING The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values. Refer to the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level passwords.
NOTE
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION FlexLogic equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the FlexLogic section in Chapter 5 for additional details.
1-18
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.5 USING THE RELAY 1.5.7 COMMISSIONING
The G60 requires a minimum amount of maintenance when it is commissioned into service. Since the G60 is a microprocessor-based relay, its characteristics do not change over time. As such, no further functional tests are required. Furthermore, the G60 performs a number of continual self-tests and takes the necessary action in case of any major errors (see the Relay Self-tests section in chapter 7 for details). However, it is recommended that G60 maintenance be scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance may involve the in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance. In-service maintenance: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Visual verification of the analog values integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices on the corresponding system). Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications. LED test. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
Out-of-service maintenance: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check wiring connections for firmness. Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated test equipment is required. Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against relay settings schedule). Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the system functional testing. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust. Event recorder file download with further events analysis. LED Test and pushbutton continuity check.
Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption: 1. View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.
If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin for prompt service.
GE Multilin
1-19
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1 GETTING STARTED
1-20
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The G60 Generator Protection System is a microprocessor based relay that provides protection, monitoring, control, and recording functions for AC generators driven by steam, gas, or hydraulic turbine. Current, voltage and frequency protection are provided along with fault diagnostics. Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor). Diagnostic features include an event recorder capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events, oscillography capable of storing up to 64 records with programmable trigger, content and sampling rate, and data logger acquisition of up to 16 channels, with programmable content and sampling rate. The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIGB signal or via the SNTP protocol over the Ethernet port. This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic equations) to trigger oscillography data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a personal computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault. A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual values. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules include a 10Base-F Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments. Another option provides two 10Base-F fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports IEC 61850, Modbus/ TCP, and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (G60 web pages). The IEC 608705-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. DNP 3.0 and IEC 60870-5-104 cannot be enabled at the same time. The G60 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following Single line diagram illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Standards Institute) device numbers. Table 21: ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS
DEVICE NUMBER 21P 24 25 27P 27TN 27X 32 40 46 49 50G 50N 50P 50SP 50/27 51G 51P FUNCTION Phase distance backup Volts per hertz Synchrocheck Phase undervoltage Third harmonic neutral undervoltage Auxiliary undervoltage Sensitive directional power Loss of excitation Generator unbalance Thermal overload (RTD) Ground instantaneous overcurrent Neutral instantaneous overcurrent Phase instantaneous overcurrent Split phase protection Accidental energization Ground time overcurrent Phase time overcurrent DEVICE NUMBER 59N 59P 59X 59_2 64F 64S 64TN 67_2 67N 67P 68/78 81A 81O 81R 81U 87G 87S FUNCTION Neutral overvoltage Phase overvoltage Auxiliary overvoltage Negative-sequence overvoltage Field ground protection Sub-harmonic stator ground protection 100% stator ground Negative-sequence directional overcurrent Neutral directional overcurrent Phase directional overcurrent Power swing detection Frequency out-of-band accumulation Overfrequency Rate of change of frequency Underfrequency Restricted ground fault Stator differential
GE Multilin
2-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
52
Close Trip 24 27P 59P 59_2 59N 81O 81U 81R 25
32 49
40
50/27 21P
50P 50N 51P 51N
46
67P 67_2 67N
68
78
EX
GPM-F
64F
Metering 87S
87G 50G 51G 27TN 27X

R
59X 64TN
64S

830710B1.CDR
Figure 21: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM Table 22: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION Breaker control Contact inputs (up to 96) Contact outputs (up to 96) Control pushbuttons Data logger Digital counters (8) Digital elements (48) Direct inputs and outputs (32) Disconnect switches DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 protocol Ethernet Global Data protocol (optional) Event recorder FlexLogic equations FUNCTION FlexElements (16) Generator unbalance IEC 61850 communications (optional) Metering: current, voltage, power, frequency Oscillography Modbus communications Modbus user map Non-volatile latches Non-volatile selector switch RTD protection Remote RTD protection Setting groups (6) FUNCTION Stator differential Synchrophasors Time synchronization over SNTP Transducer inputs and outputs Trip output User-definable displays User-programmable fault reports User-programmable LEDs User-programmable pushbuttons User-programmable self-tests Virtual inputs (64) Virtual outputs (96) VT fuse failure
2-2
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.1.2 ORDERING
a) OVERVIEW The G60 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount or reduced-size () vertical unit and consists of the following modules: power supply, CPU, CT/VT, digital input and output, transducer input and output, and inter-relay communications. Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations specified at the time of ordering. The information required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following tables (see chapter 3 for full details of relay modules). Order codes are subject to change without notice. Refer to the GE Multilin ordering page at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/order.htm for the latest details concerning G60 ordering options.
NOTE
The order code structure is dependent on the mounting option (horizontal or vertical) and the type of CT/VT modules (regular CT/VT modules or the HardFiber modules). The order code options are described in the following sub-sections.
GE Multilin
2-3
2.1 INTRODUCTION b) ORDER CODES WITH TRADITIONAL CTS AND VTS
The order codes for the horizontal mount units with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below. Table 23: G60 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS)
BASE UNIT CPU G60 G60 * | E G H J K L M S ** | | | | | | | | | 00 01 03 04 06 07 - * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | H A * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | C D R A P G S B K M Q U L N T V * - F | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | H H L L ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R - H ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F - M ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F - P ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F - U ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H | | 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W W/X ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | RH | RL | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 2S 2T 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W Full Size Horizontal Mount Base Unit RS485 and RS485 RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch No Software Options Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Phasor measurement unit (PMU) IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit (PMU) Horizontal (19 rack) Horizontal (19 rack) with harsh environmental coating English display French display Russian display Chinese display English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with English display Enhanced front panel with French display Enhanced front panel with Russian display Enhanced front panel with Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply 125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply 24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics No Module 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed) 8 RTD inputs 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed) 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs 8 dcmA inputs C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, single channel Bi-phase, dual channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC) Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply (48 V DC) 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels
2
SOFTWARE MOUNT/COATING FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY (redundant supply must be same type as main supply) CT/VT MODULES
DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS (select a maximum of 3 per unit) INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS (select a maximum of 1 per unit)
2-4
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with traditional CTs and VTs are shown below. Table 24: G60 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS)
BASE UNIT CPU G60 G60 * | E G H J K L M ** | | | | | | | | 00 01 03 04 06 07 - * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | V B * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | F D R A K M Q U L N T V * - F | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | H L ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R - H ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F - M ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F P/R ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below) Base Unit RS485 and RS485 RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX No Software Options Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Phasor measurement unit (PMU) IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit (PMU) Vertical (3/4 rack) Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating English display French display Russian display Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display Enhanced front panel with French display Enhanced front panel with Russian display Enhanced front panel with Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics No Module 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed) 8 RTD inputs 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed) 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs 8 dcmA inputs C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, single channel Bi-phase, dual channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels
SOFTWARE
MOUNT/COATING FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY CT/VT MODULES
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS (select a maximum of 1 per unit For the last module, slot P is used for digital and transducer input/output modules; slot R is used for inter-relay communications modules.
GE Multilin
2-5
2.1 INTRODUCTION c) ORDER CODES WITH PROCESS BUS MODULES
The order codes for the horizontal mount units with the process bus module are shown below. Table 25: G60 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
BASE UNIT CPU G60 G60 * | E G H J K L M ** | | | | | | | | 00 01 03 04 06 07 - * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | H A * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | C D R A P G S B K M Q U L N T V * - F | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | H H L L ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX - H ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 81 - M ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX - P ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V - U ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W W/X ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | RH | RL | XX | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W Full Size Horizontal Mount Base Unit RS485 and RS485 RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX No Software Options Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Phasor measurement unit (PMU) IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit (PMU) Horizontal (19 rack) Horizontal (19 rack) with harsh environmental coating English display French display Russian display Chinese display English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with English display Enhanced front panel with French display Enhanced front panel with Russian display Enhanced front panel with Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply 125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply 24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply Eight-port digital process bus module No Module 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, single channel Bi-phase, dual channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels
2
SOFTWARE MOUNT/COATING FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY (redundant supply must be same type as main supply) PROCESS BUS MODULE DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS (select a maximum of 1 per unit)
2-6
GE Multilin
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units with the process bus module are shown below. Table 26: G60 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS WITH PROCESS BUS)
BASE UNIT CPU G60 G60 * | E G H J K L M ** | | | | | | | | 00 01 03 04 06 07 - * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | V B * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | F D R A K M Q U L N T V * - F | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | H L ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX - H ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 81 - M ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX P/R ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below) Base Unit RS485 and RS485 RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX No Software Options Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Phasor measurement unit (PMU) IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit (PMU) Vertical (3/4 rack) Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating English display French display Russian display Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display Enhanced front panel with French display Enhanced front panel with Russian display Enhanced front panel with Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply Eight-port digital process bus module No Module 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, single channel Bi-phase, dual channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels
SOFTWARE
MOUNT/COATING FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY PROCESS BUS MODULE DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS (select a maximum of 1 per unit For the last module, slot P is used for digital input/output modules; slot R is used for inter-relay communications modules.
2.1.3 REPLACEMENT MODULES Replacement modules can be ordered separately as shown below. When ordering a replacement CPU module or faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit. Not all replacement modules may be applicable to the G60 relay. Only the modules specified in the order codes are available as replacement modules.
NOTE
Replacement module codes are subject to change without notice. Refer to the GE Multilin ordering page at http:// www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/order.htm for the latest details concerning G60 ordering options.
NOTE
GE Multilin
2-7
2.1 INTRODUCTION The replacement module order codes for the horizontal mount units are shown below. Table 27: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, HORIZONTAL UNITS
POWER SUPPLY (redundant supply only available in horizontal units; must be same type as main supply) CPU UR | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | ** 1H 1L RH RH 9E 9G 9H 9J 9K 9L 9M 9N 9S 3C 3D 3R 3A 3P 3G 3S 3B 3K 3M 3Q 3U 3L 3N 3T 3V 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 2S 2T 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
2
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY
DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
CT/VT MODULES (NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
125 / 250 V AC/DC 24 to 48 V (DC only) redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC redundant 24 to 48 V (DC only) RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0) RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and 10/100Base-T RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch Horizontal faceplate with keypad and English display Horizontal faceplate with keypad and French display Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Russian display Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Chinese display Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display Enhanced front panel with French display Enhanced front panel with Russian display Enhanced front panel with Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, single channel Bi-phase, dual channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC) Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply (48 V DC) 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed) 8 RTD inputs 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed) 4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs 8 dcmA inputs
2-8
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The replacement module order codes for the reduced-size vertical mount units are shown below. Table 28: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, VERTICAL UNITS
POWER SUPPLY CPU UR | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | ** 1H 1L 9E 9G 9H 9J 9K 9L 9M 9N 3F 3D 3R 3K 3K 3M 3Q 3U 3L 3N 3T 3V 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 6V 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC 24 to 48 V (DC only) RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0) RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and 10/100Base-T Vertical faceplate with keypad and English display Vertical faceplate with keypad and French display Vertical faceplate with keypad and Russian display Vertical faceplate with keypad and Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display Enhanced front panel with French display Enhanced front panel with Russian display Enhanced front panel with Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 digital inputs Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, single channel Bi-phase, dual channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed) 8 RTD inputs 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed) 4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs 8 dcmA inputs
2.1 INTRODUCTION
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY
CT/VT MODULES (NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)
GE Multilin
2-9
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE 2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using FlexLogic to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts. RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT
mho (memory polarized or offset) or quad (memory polarized or non-directional), selectable individually per zone 3 forward, reverse, or non-directional per zone 0.02 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 5% including the effect of CVT transients up to an SIR of 30 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Pickup: Dropout: Slope: Pickup delay: Dropout delay: Operate time: Current: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: for 0.1 to 2.0 CT: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 30 to 90 in steps of 1 0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01 60 to 90 in steps of 1 0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01 60 to 90 in steps of 1 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater line-to-line current 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1 all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers Reset type: Timing accuracy: Curve multiplier: for > 2.0 CT: Curve shapes: 0.5% of reading or 0.4% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading > 2.0 CT rating IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/ Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves (programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s base curve) Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) Operate at > 1.03 actual pickup 3.5% of operate time or cycle (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading or 0.4% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading <2% 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 <16 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz (Phase/Ground IOC) <20 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz (Neutral IOC) Operate at 1.5 pickup 3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.005 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0 to 100% in steps of 1% 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 <1 power system cycle Phasor or RMS 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97% to 98% of pickup
NOTE
PHASE DISTANCE
Characteristic:
Number of zones: Directionality: Reach (secondary ): Reach accuracy: Distance: Characteristic angle: Directional supervision: Characteristic angle: Limit angle: Reach: Characteristic angle: Left Blinder (Quad only): Reach: Characteristic angle: Time delay: Timing accuracy: Current supervision: Level: Pickup: Dropout: Memory duration: VT location: CT location:
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC
Comparator limit angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1
Right blinder (Quad only):
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: > 2.0 CT rating Overreach: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Operate time:
Voltage supervision pickup (series compensation applications): 0 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Operation time: Reset time: Pickup: Slope 1 and 2: Break 1: Break 2: Operate time: 1 to 1.5 cycles (typical) 1 power cycle (typical) 0.050 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.01 1 to 100% in steps of 1 1.00 to 1.50 pu in steps of 0.01 1.50 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01 < cycle at Idiff > 5 pickup
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
Timing accuracy:
2-10
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

Relay connection: Quadrature voltage: 90 (quadrature) ABC phase seq.: phase A (VBC), phase B (VCA), phase C (VAB); ACB phase seq.: phase A (VCB), phase B (VAC), phase C (VBA)
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS GENERATOR UNBALANCE

Gen. nominal current: Stages: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: 0.1 to 2 x CT rating: > 2.0 x CT rating: Time dial (K-value): Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Operating quantity: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Measured power: Number of stages: Characteristic angle: Calibration angle: Minimum power: Pickup level accuracy: Hysteresis: Pickup delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Curve shapes: Curve multiplier: Timing accuracy: 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading 0.00 to 100.00 in steps of 0.01 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 50 ms at 60 Hz split phase CT current biased by generator load current 0.020 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 5 cycles, whichever is greater < 5 cycles at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz 3-phase, true RMS 2 0 to 359 in steps of 1 0.00 to 0.95 in steps of 0.05 1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001 1% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater 2% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater 50 ms 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V GE IAV Inverse; Definite Time (0.1s base curve) Time dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Operate at < 0.90 pickup 3.5% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V GE IAV Inverse, Definite Time Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 3% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 2 (I2t with linear reset and definite time) 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01 97 to 98% of pickup
Polarizing voltage threshold: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Current sensitivity threshold: 0.05 pu Characteristic angle: Angle accuracy: 0 to 359 in steps of 1 2
Operation time (FlexLogic operands): Tripping (reverse load, forward fault):< 12 ms, typically Blocking (forward load, reverse fault):< 8 ms, typically
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

Directionality: Polarizing: Polarizing voltage: Polarizing current: Operating current: Level sensing: Restraint, K: Characteristic angle: Limit angle: Angle accuracy: Offset impedance: Pickup level: Dropout level: Operation time: Directionality: Polarizing: Polarizing voltage: Operating current: Level sensing: Zero-sequence:|I_0| K |I_1| Negative-sequence:|I_2| K |I_1| Restraint, K: Characteristic angle: Limit angle: Angle accuracy: Offset impedance: Pickup level: Dropout level: Operation time: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001 0 to 90 in steps of 1 40 to 90 in steps of 1, independent for forward and reverse 2 0.00 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01 0.015 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.01 97 to 98% < 16 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz Co-existing forward and reverse Voltage, Current, Dual V_0 or VX IG I_0 3 (|I_0| K |I_1|), IG 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001 90 to 90 in steps of 1 40 to 90 in steps of 1, independent for forward and reverse 2 0.00 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01 0.002 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.01 97 to 98% < 16 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz Co-existing forward and reverse Voltage V_2 I_2
SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Curve shapes: Curve multiplier: Timing accuracy:
GE Multilin
2-11
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS THIRD HARMONIC NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE

Operating quantity: Undervoltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Accuracy: Power: Pickup level: Dropout level: Accuracy: Undervoltage Inhibit Level: Accuracy: Pickup delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Voltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Operate time: Timing accuracy: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Timing accuracy: Operate time: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Timing accuracy: Operate time: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 pu 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz Phasor only 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz 3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 (definite time) or user-defined curve 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 20 ms (whichever is greater) < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz Operating quantity: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: 0.000 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 5% or 0.01 pu, whichever is greater TD Multiplier: Reset delay: Timing accuracy: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 2% of reading from 1 to 120 V 3rd harmonic of auxiliary undervoltage
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION VOLTS PER HERTZ

Voltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Timing curves: Phasor only 0.80 to 4.00 in steps of 0.01 pu V/Hz 97 to 98% of pickup 0.02 pu Definite Time; Inverse A, B, and C, FlexCurves A, B, C, and D 0.05 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 3% or 15 cycles (whichever is greater) for values greater than 1.1 pickup V _neutral_3rd --------------------------------------------------------------------------V _neutral_3rd + V _zero_3rd 0.000 to 0.900 pu in steps of 0.001
100% STATOR GROUND
97 to 98% of pickup 2% of reading from 1 to 120 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
3rd harmonic supervision level: 0.0010 to 0.1000 pu in steps of 0.0001 Time accuracy: Operate time: 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz
SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND

Stator ground resistance pickup accuracy: 5% of reading from 1 to 10 k, 10% of reading from 10 to 20 k Total stator capacitance to ground: 200 nF to 2 F Sub-harmonic voltage metering accuracy: 2% of reading or 0.2 V from 0.5 to 25 V AC Sub-harmonic current metering accuracy: 2% of reading or 5 mA from 5 to 200 mA Sub-harmonic element operating time: 0.6 to 1.2 s Sub-harmonic element dropout level accuracy: 102 to 103% of pickup Time delay accuracy: 3% of time delay setting or 4 ms, whichever is greater
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
FIELD GROUND
Measured field ground resistance: 1 k to 20 M Ground resistance accuracy:5% of reading 250 from 1 to 500 k Field winding capacitance: 1 to 10 F Maximum field voltage: 600 V DC rated field voltage / 1000 V ripple peak for single box option; 800 V DC rated field voltage / 2000 V ripple peak for external resistor box option
Operate time when 20 Hz injection is performed: 8 power system cycles
Field voltage measurement range: 15 to 800 V Field voltage measurement accuracy: 1 V or 3% of reading (for GPM-F-L); 1 V or 5% of reading (for GPM-F-H) Field ground RMS current accuracy: 5% of reading Fault location accuracy: 5% of reading Field ground resistance typical operating time: 1.1 s + (1 / injection frequency) Field ground element dropout level accuracy: 102 to 103% of pickup Time delay accuracy: 3% of time delay setting or 4ms, whichever is greater
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE

Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz
2-12
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION FIELD CURRENT

Field current measurement (dcmA) accuracy: 0.2% of full scale Field overcurrent and undercurrent operating time: 1 power system cycle Field current element dropout level accuracy: 102 to 103% of pickup for undercurrent and 97 to 98% of pickup for overcurrent Time delay accuracy: 3% of time delay setting or 4 ms whichever is greater
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS TURBINE FREQUENCY OUT-OF-BAND (OOB) ACCUMULATED OPERATING TIME

Frequency OOB accumulation: 7 sets; 20 to 70 Hz in steps of 0.01 Frequency OOB accumulation pickup: 1 to 65536 s in steps of 1 Frequency OOB accumulator preset: 1 to 65536 s in steps of 1 Level accuracy: 0.01 Hz Minimum volt/amp supervision: 0.1 to 1.25 pu of V_1 or I_1 Timing accuracy of accumulation: 1% or 1 second, whichever is greater
UNDERFREQUENCY
Minimum signal: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Time delay: Timer accuracy: Operate time: 0.10 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 pickup + 0.03 Hz 0.001 Hz 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater typically 4 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change typically 3.5 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change typically 3 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change
SYNCHROCHECK
Max voltage difference: 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1 Max angle difference: Max freq. difference: Dead source function: 0 to 100 in steps of 1 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1 or DV2, DV1 xor DV2, DV1 & DV2 (L = Live, D = Dead) Power swing block, Out-of-step trip Mho or Quad Positive-sequence Early or Delayed 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup
Hysteresis for max. freq. diff.: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01
POWER SWING DETECT

Functions: Characteristic: Measured impedance: Tripping mode: Current supervision: Pickup level: Dropout level:
Typical times are average operate times including variables such as frequency change instance, test method, etc., and may vary by 0.5 cycles.
OVERFREQUENCY
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Time delay: Timer accuracy: Operate time: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 pickup 0.03 Hz 0.001 Hz 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater typically 4 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change typically 3.5 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change typically 3 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change
Blocking / tripping modes: 2-step or 3-step
Fwd / reverse reach (sec. ): 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Left and right blinders (sec. ): 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Impedance accuracy: Angle accuracy: Timers: Timing accuracy: Operating condition: Arming condition: Overcurrent: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Undervoltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Operate Time: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 0.5% of reading 10 to 208 V < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating 5% 2 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater Overcurrent Undervoltage and/or Machine Offline Fwd / reverse angle impedances: 40 to 90 in steps of 1 Characteristic limit angles: 40 to 140 in steps of 1
Typical times are average operate times including variables such as frequency change instance, test method, etc., and may vary by 0.5 cycles.
RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY

df/dt trend: df/dt pickup level: df/dt dropout level: df/dt level accuracy: Overvoltage supv.: Overcurrent supv.: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: increasing, decreasing, bi-directional 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01 96% of pickup 80 mHz/s or 3.5%, whichever is greater 0.100 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater typically 6.5 cycles at 2 pickup typically 5.5 cycles at 3 pickup typically 4.5 cycles at 5 pickup
ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION
95% settling time for df/dt: < 24 cycles
GE Multilin
2-13
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS LOSS OF EXCITATION

Operating condition: Characteristic: Center: Radius: Reach accuracy: Positive-sequence impedance 2 independent offset mho circles 0.10 to 300.0 (sec.) in steps of 0.01 0.10 to 300.0 (sec.) in steps of 0.01 3% 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater <50 ms
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION RTD PROTECTION

Pickup: Dropout level: Timing accuracy: Elements: Pickup level: Dropout level: Time delay: Elements: Number of elements: Number of inputs: Operate time: Time accuracy: 1 to 249C in steps of 1 2C of pickup <1 s trip and alarm 1 to 200C 2C of pickup <10 s trip and alarm 6 16 <2 ms at 60 Hz 3% or 10 ms, whichever is greater
REMOTE RTD PROTECTION
Undervoltage supervision Level: Accuracy: Pickup delay: Timing accuracy: Operate time:
TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC)
2.2.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS FLEXLOGIC

Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization (keypad programmable) Lines of code: Internal variables: Supported operations: 512 64 NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs), NAND (2 to 16 inputs), latch (reset-dominant), edge detectors, timers any logical variable, contact, or virtual input 32 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 4 (A through D) 40 (0 through 1 of pickup) 80 (1 through 20 of pickup) 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 up to 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses any logical variable, contact, or virtual input 16 any analog actual value, or two values in differential mode level, delta over, under 90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1 20 ms to 60 days
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type: Number: Output: Execution sequence: set-dominant or reset-dominant 16 (individually programmed) stored in non-volatile memory as input prior to protection, control, and FlexLogic 48 plus trip and alarm from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input self-reset or latched from any digital input or user-programmable condition 3, interruptible at any time approximately 3 minutes all LEDs on all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s 16 2 20 alphanumeric characters up to 5, any Modbus register addresses keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
Number: Programmability: Reset mode:
Inputs: Number of timers: Pickup delay: Dropout delay:
LED TEST
Initiation: Number of tests: Duration of full test: Test sequence 1: Test sequence 2: Test sequence 3: Number of displays: Lines of display: Parameters: Invoking and scrolling:
FLEXCURVES
Number: Reset points: Operate points: Time delay:
FLEX STATES
Number: Programmability:
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
FLEXELEMENTS
Number of elements: Operating signal:
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 7 Operation: drive FlexLogic operands
Operating signal mode: signed or absolute value Operating mode: Comparator direction: Pickup Level: Hysteresis: Delta dt:
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)

Number of pushbuttons: 12 (standard faceplate); 16 (enhanced faceplate) Mode: Display message: Drop-out timer: Autoreset timer: Hold timer: self-reset, latched 2 lines of 20 characters each 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
2-14
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SELECTOR SWITCH

Number of elements: Upper position limit: Selecting mode: Time-out timer: Control inputs: Power-up mode: 2 1 to 7 in steps of 1 time-out or acknowledge 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1 step-up and 3-bit restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or synch/ restore mode
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIGITAL ELEMENTS

Number of elements: Operating signal: Pickup delay: Dropout delay: Timing accuracy: 48 any FlexLogic operand 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater
2
2.2.3 MONITORING DATA LOGGER
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum records: Sampling rate: Triggers: 64 64 samples per power cycle any element pickup, dropout, or operate; digital input change of state; digital output change of state; FlexLogic equation AC input channels; element state; digital input state; digital output state in non-volatile memory 1024 events to 1 microsecond any element pickup, dropout, or operate; digital input change of state; digital output change of state; self-test events in non-volatile memory 2 any FlexLogic operand any FlexLogic operand 32 (any FlexAnalog value)
Number of channels: Parameters: Sampling rate: Trigger: Mode: Storage capacity:
1 to 16 any available analog actual value 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1 any FlexLogic operand continuous or triggered (NN is dependent on memory) 1-second rate: 01 channel for NN days 16 channels for NN days 60-minute rate: 01 channel for NN days 16 channels for NN days
Data: Data storage:
EVENT RECORDER
Capacity: Time-tag: Triggers:
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT

Output format: Number of channels: TVE (total vector error) Triggering: Reporting rate: Number of clients: AC ranges: per IEEE C37.118 standard 14 synchrophasors, 8 analogs, 16 digitals <1% frequency, voltage, current, power, rate of change of frequency, user-defined 1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second One over TCP/IP port, two over UDP/IP ports As indicated in appropriate specifications sections
Data storage: Number of elements: Pre-fault trigger: Fault trigger: Recorder quantities:
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
Network reporting format: 16-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating point numbers Network reporting style: rectangular (real and imaginary) or polar (magnitude and angle) coordinates Post-filtering: Calibration: none, 3-point, 5-point, 7-point 5
2.2.4 METERING RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND

Accuracy at 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: > 2.0 CT rating: 0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.0% of reading 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
REAL POWER (WATTS)

Accuracy: 1.0% of reading at 0.8 < PF 1.0 and 0.8 < PF 1.0 1.0% of reading at 0.2 PF 0.2 1.0% of reading
REACTIVE POWER (VARS)

Accuracy: Accuracy:
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy:
APPARENT POWER (VA)
GE Multilin
2-15
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Accuracy: Range: Parameters: Update rate: Accuracy: Range: Parameters: Update rate: Harmonics: 2.0% of reading 0 to 1 106 MWh three-phase only 50 ms 2.0% of reading 0 to 1 106 Mvarh three-phase only 50 ms 2nd to 25th harmonic: per phase, displayed as a % of f1 (fundamental frequency phasor) THD: per phase, displayed as a % of f1 1. f1 > 0.4pu: (0.20% + 0.035% / harmonic) of reading or 0.15% of 100%, whichever is greater 2. f1 < 0.4pu: as above plus %error of f1 1. f1 > 0.4pu: (0.25% + 0.035% / harmonic) of reading or 0.20% of 100%, whichever is greater 2. f1 < 0.4pu: as above plus %error of f1 THD: Accuracy: HARMONICS:
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE HARMONICS

Harmonics: 2nd to 25th harmonic: per phase, displayed as a % of f1 (fundamental frequency phasor) THD: per phase, displayed as a % of f1 1. f1 > 0.4pu: (0.20% + 0.035% / harmonic) of reading or 0.15% of 100%, whichever is greater 2. f1 < 0.4pu: as above plus %error of f1 1. f1 > 0.4pu: (0.25% + 0.035% / harmonic) of reading or 0.20% of 100%, whichever is greater 2. f1 < 0.4pu: as above plus %error of f1
VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
CURRENT HARMONICS FREQUENCY

Accuracy at V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu: I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu: I > 0.25 pu:
Accuracy: HARMONICS:
0.001 Hz (when voltage signal is used for frequency measurement) 0.05 Hz 0.001 Hz (when current signal is used for frequency measurement)
THD:
2.2.5 INPUTS AC CURRENT

CT rated primary: CT rated secondary: Nominal frequency: Relay burden: 1 to 50000 A 1 A or 5 A by connection 20 to 65 Hz < 0.2 VA at rated secondary
CONTACT INPUTS
Dry contacts: Wet contacts: Selectable thresholds: Tolerance: Recognition time: Debounce time: 1000 maximum 300 V DC maximum 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V 10% < 1 ms 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
Conversion range: Standard CT: 0.02 to 46 CT rating RMS symmetrical Sensitive Ground CT module: 0.002 to 4.6 CT rating RMS symmetrical Current withstand: 20 ms at 250 times rated 1 sec. at 100 times rated continuous at 3 times rated 150000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250 V maximum (primary current to external CT) 50.0 to 240.0 V 1.00 to 24000.00 20 to 65 Hz < 0.25 VA at 120 V 1 to 275 V continuous at 260 V to neutral 1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral
Contacts per common return: 4
Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized)
CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING

Dry contacts: Wet contacts: Selectable thresholds: Tolerance: Recognition time: Debounce time: 1000 maximum 300 V DC maximum 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V 10% < 1 ms 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
Short circuit rating:
AC VOLTAGE
VT rated secondary: VT ratio: Nominal frequency: Relay burden: Conversion range: Voltage withstand:
Contacts per common return: 2
Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized) Auto-burnish impulse current: 50 to 70 mA Duration of auto-burnish impulse: 25 to 50 ms
DCMA INPUTS
Current input (mA DC): Input impedance: Conversion range: Accuracy: Type: 0 to 1, 0 to +1, 1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable) 379 10% 1 to + 20 mA DC 0.2% of full scale Passive
2-16
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION RTD INPUTS

Types (3-wire): Sensing current: Range: Accuracy: Isolation: Wire type: Sensor type: RTD sensing current: Range: Accuracy: Lead resistance: Isolation: 100 Platinum, 100 & 120 Nickel, 10 Copper 5 mA 50 to +250C 2C 36 V pk-pk three-wire 100 platinum (DIN 43760), 100 nickel, 120 nickel, 10 copper 3 mA 40 to 200C 2C 25 maximum for Pt and Ni type; 3 max. for Cu type 36 Vpk 1 to 10 V pk-pk TTL 22 k 2 kV
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIRECT INPUTS

Number of input points: 32 No. of remote devices: Ring configuration: Data rate: CRC: 16 Yes, No 64 or 128 kbps 32-bit Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
REMOTE RTD INPUTS
CRC alarm: Responding to: Rate of messages failing the CRC Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1 Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1 Unreturned message alarm: Responding to: Rate of unreturned messages in the ring configuration Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1 Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
TELEPROTECTION
Number of input points: 16 No. of remote devices: Ring configuration: Data rate: CRC: 3 No 64 or 128 kbps 32-bit Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude modulation: DC shift: Input impedance: Isolation:
REMOTE INPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs Number of remote devices: 16 Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On Number of remote DPS inputs: 5
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY LOW RANGE

Nominal DC voltage: Minimum DC voltage: Maximum DC voltage: Voltage loss hold-up: 24 to 48 V 20 V 60 V 20 ms duration at nominal
ALL RANGES
Volt withstand: Power consumption: 2 Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms typical = 15 to 20 W/VA maximum = 50 W/VA contact factory for exact order code consumption
NOTE: Low range is DC only.
HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage: Minimum DC voltage: Maximum DC voltage: Nominal AC voltage: Minimum AC voltage: Maximum AC voltage: Voltage loss hold-up: 125 to 250 V 88 V 300 V 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz 88 V at 25 to 100 Hz 265 V at 25 to 100 Hz 200 ms duration at nominal
INTERNAL FUSE RATINGS

Low range power supply: 8 A / 250 V High range power supply: 4 A / 250 V
INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC: DC: 100 000 A RMS symmetrical 10 000 A
GE Multilin
2-17
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.7 OUTPUTS
FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Carry continuous: 6A
CURRENT
1A 0.5 A 0.3 A 0.2 A
SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY

Operate and release time: <100 s Maximum voltage: Make and carry: for 0.2 s: for 0.03 s Breaking capacity:
UL508 Utility application (autoreclose scheme) 5 ops / 0.2 s-On, 0.2 s-Off within 1 minute Industrial application
265 V DC
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
Maximum continuous current: 5 A at 45C; 4 A at 65C 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 300 A
VOLTAGE
24 V 48 V 125 V 250 V
Operate time: Contact material:
< 4 ms silver alloy

Operations/ interval 5000 ops / 1 s-On, 9 s-Off 1000 ops / 0.5 s-On, 0.5 s-Off Break capability (0 to 250 V DC) 3.2 A L/R = 10 ms 1.6 A L/R = 20 ms 0.8 A L/R = 40 ms
LATCHING RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Carry continuous: Break at L/R of 40 ms: Operate time: Contact material: Control: Control mode: Applicable voltage: Trickle current: Threshold current: 6A 0.25 A DC max. < 4 ms silver alloy separate operate and reset inputs operate-dominant or reset-dominant
10000 ops / 0.2 s-On, 30 s-Off
10 A L/R = 40 ms
10 A L/R = 40 ms
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR

approx. 15 to 250 V DC approx. 1 to 2.5 mA approx. 80 to 100 mA
IRIG-B OUTPUT
Amplitude: Maximum load: Time delay: Isolation: 10 V peak-peak RS485 level 100 ohms 1 ms for AM input 40 s for DC-shift input 2 kV
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY

Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Carry continuous:
VOLTAGE
24 V 48 V 125 V 250 V
8A
CURRENT
1A 0.5 A 0.3 A 0.2 A
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT (FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)

Capacity: Isolation: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC 300 Vpk
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Standard output points: 32 User output points: 32 32 1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA 12 k for 1 to 1 mA range 12 k for 0 to 1 mA range 600 for 4 to 20 mA range 0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range 0.5% of full-scale for 1 to 1 mA range 0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range 1.5 kV any FlexAnalog quantity
DIRECT OUTPUTS
Output points:
Operate time: Contact material: Make and carry:

INPUT VOLTAGE 250 V DC 120 V DC 48 V DC 24 V DC
< 8 ms silver alloy 0.1 A max. (resistive load)

IMPEDANCE 2 W RESISTOR 20 K 5 K 2 K 2 K 1 W RESISTOR 50 K 2 K 2 K 2 K
DCMA OUTPUTS
Range: Max. load resistance:
FAST FORM-C RELAY

Minimum load impedance:
Accuracy:
99% Settling time to a step change: 100 ms Isolation: Driving signal:
Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: 90 to 90 pu in steps of 0.001
Operate time:
< 0.6 ms
Internal Limiting Resistor: 100 , 2 W
2-18
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ETHERNET SWITCH (HIGH VOLTAGE, TYPE 2S)

Nominal DC voltage: Minimum DC voltage: Maximum DC voltage: Input Current: Nominal AC voltage: Minimum AC voltage: Maximum AC voltage: Internal fuse: 110 to 240 V DC 88 V DC 300 V DC 0.9 A DC maximum 100 to 240 V AC, 0.26 to 0.16 A/26 to 39 VA at 50/60 Hz 85 V AC, 0.31 A/22 VA at 50/60 Hz 265 V AC, 0.16 A/42 VA at 50/60 Hz 3 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO BLO; Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number: SCD-A 003
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS ETHERNET SWITCH (LOW VOLTAGE, TYPE 2T)

Nominal voltage: Minimum voltage: Maximum voltage: Internal fuse: 48 V DC, 0.31 A/15 W 30 V DC, 0.43 A/16 W 60 V DC 5 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO BLO; Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number: SCD-A 005
2.2.8 FIELD AND STATOR GROUND MODULES GPM-F MODULE CONTACT INPUTS
Internal wetting: External contact: Debounce time: Make and carry: Continuous carry: 24 V DC dry 10 ms 30 A for 0.2 s as per ANSI C37.90 8A Input comparator threshold: 6 V DC Output ratings: Current when energized: < 10 mA
GPM-S-G MODULE
Power supply: 100 to 240 V AC at 50/60 Hz and 110VA 125 to 250 V DC at 110W 26 V rectangular at 20 Hz, load capability 80 VA 80VA maximum 30 V rectangular at 20 Hz
GPM-S-B MODULE
Power rating: Input ratings:
GPM-F MODULE CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY
GPM-F-R MODULE
Current limiting resistor: 12.5 4 Voltage divider resistor: 5 3
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms): 1 A at 24 V, 0.5 A at 48 V, 0.3 A at 125 V, 0.2 A at 250 V Operate time: Contact material: GPM-F-L: GPM-F-HM: < 8 ms silver alloy 100 to 240V AC at 50/60Hz and 10 VA 125 to 250V DC at 10W 100 to 240V AC at 50/60Hz and 10 VA 125 to 250V DC at 10W
STATOR GROUND PROTECTION CT

Part number: Turns ratio: Rating factor (RF): Frequency: Voltage insulation: 204-SD-43737 400:5A 3.0 20 Hz 600 V
GPM-F MODULE POWER SUPPLY
Basic impulse level (BIL): 10 kV
GE Multilin
2-19
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS GPM-F-HM, GPM-F-L, GPM-F-R, GPM-S-B, AND GPM-S-G MODULE TYPE TESTS
TEST Dielectric voltage withstand Impulse voltage withstand Insulation REFERENCE STANDARD EN60255-5 EN60255-5 EN60255-5 IEC61000-4-18IEC60255-22-1 EN61000-4-2/IEC60255-22-2 EN61000-4-3/IEC60255-22-3 EN61000-4-4/IEC60255-22-4 EN61000-4-5/IEC60255-22-5 EN61000-4-6/IEC60255-22-6 IEC60255-11 CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC60255-25 IEC60255-21-1 IEC60255-21-2 IEC60255-21-3 IEC61000-4-8 IEC61000-4-9 IEC61000-4-10 IEC61000-4-11 IEC61000-4-17 IEC60529 IEC60068-2-1 IEC60068-2-2 IEC60068-2-30 IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 IEEE/ANSIC37.90.2 IEEE/ANSIC37.90.3 UL508 UL C22.2-14 TEST LEVEL GPM-F TYPES 2.3 kV AC / 4.6 kV DC 5 kV 500 V DC 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM Level 4 20 V/m Class A and B Level 4 Level 3 15% ripple, 1 ms to 5 s interrupts Class A Class 2 Class 2 Class 2 Level 5 Level 4 Level 4
GPM-S TYPES 2.3 kV AC / 3.3 kV DC 5 kV 500 V DC 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM Level 4 20 V/m Class A and B Level 4 Level 3 15% ripple, 1 ms to 5 s interrupts Class A Class 1 Class 1 Class 1 Level 5 Level 4 Level 4 0%, 40%, 70%, 80% dips; 250/300 cycle interrupts 15% ripple IP10 40C, 16 hrs 85C, 16hrs 6 day, variant 1 2.5 kV,1 MHz 4 kV 2.5 kHz 20 V/m 15 kV air / 8 kV contact e83849 NKCR2 e83849 NKCR8
Damped oscillatory Electrostatic discharge RF immunity Fast Transient Disturbance Surge Immunity Conducted RF Immunity Voltage interruption and ripple DC Radiated and conducted emissions Sinusoidal vibration Shock and Bump Seismic Power magnetic immunity Pulse magnetic immunity Damped magnetic immunity Voltage dip and interruption Voltage ripple Ingress protection Environmental (cold) Environmental (dry heat) Relative humidity cyclic SWC oscillatory SWC transients RF immunity ESD Safety
0%, 40%, 70%, 80% dips; 250/300 cycle interrupts 15% ripple IP10 40C, 16 hrs 85C, 16hrs 6 day, variant 1 2.5 kV,1 MHz 4 kV 2.5 kHz 20 V/m 15 kV air / 8 kV contact e83849 NKCR2 e83849 NKCR8
2-20
GE Multilin
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.9 COMMUNICATIONS
RS232
Front port: 19.2 kbps, Modbus RTU Up to 115 kbps, Modbus RTU, isolated together at 36 Vpk 1200 m 2 kV
ETHERNET SWITCH FIBER OPTIC PORTS

Maximum fiber segment length calculation: The maximum fiber segment length between two adjacent switches or between a switch and a device is calculated as follows. First, calculate the optical power budget (OPB) of each device using the manufacturers data sheets. OPB = P T ( MIN ) P R ( MIN ) where OPB = optical power budget, PT = transmitter output power, and PR = receiver sensitivity.
FIBER TYPE 10MB MULTIMODE 100MB MULTI- 100MB SINGLEMODE MODE 1310 nm ST 20 dBm 30 dBm 10 dB 14 dBm 2 km full/half yes 1310 nm SC 15 dBm 30 dBm 15 dB 7 dBm 15 km full/half yes
RS485
1 or 2 rear ports: Typical distance: Isolation:
ETHERNET (FIBER)
PARAMETER
Wavelength Connector Transmit power Receiver sensitivity Power budget Maximum input power Typical distance Duplex Redundancy
820 nm ST 20 dBm 30 dBm 10 dB 7.6 dBm 1.65 km full/half yes
The worst case optical power budget (OPBWORST) is then calculated by taking the lower of the two calculated power budgets, subtracting 1 dB for LED aging, and then subtracting the total insertion loss. The total insertion loss is calculated by multiplying the number of connectors in each single fiber path by 0.5 dB. For example, with a single fiber cable between the two devices, there will be a minimum of two connections in either transmit or receive fiber paths for a total insertion loss of 1db for either direction: Total insertion loss = number of connectors 0.5 dB = 2 0.5 dB = 1.0 dB The worst-case optical power budget between two type 2T or 2S modules using a single fiber cable is: OPB WORST = OPB 1 dB (LED aging) total insertion loss 10 dB 1 dB 1 dB = 8 dB To calculate the maximum fiber length, divide the worst-case optical power budget by the cable attenuation per unit distance specified in the manufacturer data sheets. For example, typical attenuation for 62.5/125 m glass fiber optic cable is approximately 2.8 dB per km. In our example, this would result in the following maximum fiber length: OPB WORST (in dB) Maximum fiber length = -----------------------------------------------------cable loss (in dB/km) 8 dB = -------------------------- = 2.8 km 2.8 dB/km The customer must use the attenuation specified within the manufacturer data sheets for accurate calculation of the maximum fiber length.
The UR-2S and UR-2T only support 100 Mb multimode
ETHERNET (10/100 MB TWISTED PAIR)

Modes: Connector: 10 MB, 10/100 MB (auto-detect) RJ45
SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)
ETHERNET SWITCH 10/100BASE-T PORTS

Connector type: RJ45 MAXIMUM 10 MBPS ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS Unshielded twisted pair: 100 m (328 ft.) Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.) MAXIMUM STANDARD FAST ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS 10Base-T (CAT 3, 4, 5 UTP): 100 m (328 ft.) 100Base-TX (CAT 5 UTP):100 m (328 ft.) Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)
GE Multilin
2-21
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.10 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS

INTERFACE TYPE RS422 G.703 TYPICAL DISTANCE 1200 m 100 m
TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE

EMITTER TYPE 820 nm LED, multimode 1300 nm LED, multimode 1300 nm ELED, single mode 1300 nm Laser, single mode 1550 nm Laser, single-mode CABLE TYPE 62.5/125 m 62.5/125 m 9/125 m 9/125 m 9/125 m CONNECTOR TYPE ST ST ST ST ST TYPICAL DISTANCE 1.65 km 3.8 km 11.4 km 64 km 105 km
2
NOTE
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and does not take into consideration the clock source provided by the user.
LINK POWER BUDGET

EMITTER, FIBER TYPE 820 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm ELED, Singlemode 1300 nm Laser, Singlemode 1550 nm Laser, Singlemode TRANSMIT POWER 20 dBm 21 dBm 23 dBm 1 dBm +5 dBm RECEIVED SENSITIVITY 30 dBm 30 dBm 32 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm POWER BUDGET 10 dB 9 dB 9 dB 29 dB 35 dB
NOTE
Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As actual losses will vary from one installation to another, the distance covered by your system may vary.
2 dB 3 dB/km 1 dB/km 0.35 dB/km 0.25 dB/km One splice every 2 km, at 0.05 dB loss per splice.
CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)

ST connector
NOTE
These power budgets are calculated from the manufacturers worst-case transmitter power and worst case receiver sensitivity. The power budgets for the 1300nm ELED are calculated from the manufacturer's transmitter power and receiver sensitivity at ambient temperature. At extreme temperatures these values will deviate based on component tolerance. On average, the output power will decrease as the temperature is increased by a factor 1dB / 5C.
FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode 1300 nm multimode 1300 nm singlemode 1550 nm singlemode Splice losses:
NOTE
SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for all other losses. Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER

EMITTER, FIBER TYPE 820 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm ELED, Singlemode 1300 nm Laser, Singlemode 1550 nm Laser, Singlemode MAX. OPTICAL INPUT POWER 7.6 dBm 11 dBm 14 dBm 14 dBm 14 dBm
2.2.11 ENVIRONMENTAL AMBIENT TEMPERATURES

Storage temperature: 40 to 85C Operating temperature: 40 to 60C; the LCD contrast may be impaired at temperatures less than 20C
OTHER
Altitude: Pollution degree: Overvoltage category: Ingress protection: 2000 m (maximum) II II IP20 front, IP10 back
HUMIDITY
Humidity: operating up to 95% (non-condensing) at 55C (as per IEC60068-2-30 variant 1, 6days).
2-22
GE Multilin
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.12 TYPE TESTS
G60 TYPE TESTS

TEST Dielectric voltage withstand Impulse voltage withstand Damped oscillatory Electrostatic discharge RF immunity Fast transient disturbance Surge immunity Conducted RF immunity Power frequency immunity Voltage interruption and ripple DC Radiated and conducted emissions Sinusoidal vibration Shock and bump Seismic Power magnetic immunity Pulse magnetic immunity Damped magnetic immunity Voltage dip and interruption Damped oscillatory Conducted RF immunity, 0 to 150 kHz Voltage ripple Ingress protection Cold Hot Humidity Damped oscillatory RF immunity Safety Safety Safety REFERENCE STANDARD EN60255-5 EN60255-5 IEC61000-4-18 / IEC60255-22-1 EN61000-4-2 / IEC60255-22-2 EN61000-4-3 / IEC60255-22-3 EN61000-4-4 / IEC60255-22-4 EN61000-4-5 / IEC60255-22-5 EN61000-4-6 / IEC60255-22-6 EN61000-4-7 / IEC60255-22-7 IEC60255-11 CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC60255-25 IEC60255-21-1 IEC60255-21-2 IEC60255-21-3 IEC61000-4-8 IEC61000-4-9 IEC61000-4-10 IEC61000-4-11 IEC61000-4-12 IEC61000-4-16 IEC61000-4-17 IEC60529 IEC60068-2-1 IEC60068-2-2 IEC60068-2-30 IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2 UL508 UL C22.2-14 UL1053 TEST LEVEL 2.3 kV 5 kV 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM Level 3 Level 3 Class A and B Level 3 and 4 Level 3 Class A and B 12% ripple, 200 ms interrupts Class A Class 1 Class 1 Class 1 Level 5 Level 4 Level 4 0, 40, 70, 80% dips; 250 / 300 cycle interrupts 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM Level 4 15% ripple IP40 front, IP10 back 40C for 16 hours 85C for 16 hours 6 days, variant 1 2.5 kV, 1 MHz 20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz e83849 NKCR e83849 NKCR7 e83849 NKCR
2.2.13 PRODUCTION TESTS THERMAL

Products go through an environmental test based upon an Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.
GE Multilin
2-23
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.14 APPROVALS
APPROVALS
COMPLIANCE CE compliance APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE Low voltage directive EMC directive North America ------ACCORDING TO EN60255-5 EN60255-26 / EN50263 EN61000-6-5 UL508 UL1053 C22.2 No. 14
2.2.15 MAINTENANCE MOUNTING

Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (2 inch-pounds) of torque.
CLEANING
Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used. Units that are stored in a de-energized state should be powered up once per year, for one hour continuously, to avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors.
NOTE
2-24
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION a) HORIZONTAL UNITS
3.1 DESCRIPTION 3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT
The G60 Generator Protection System is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable faceplate. The faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains additional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators. The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communications port. The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment. The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws supplied with the relay.
11.016 [279,81 mm] 9.687 [246,05 mm]
17.56 [446,02 mm]
7.460 [189,48 mm] 6.995 [177,67 mm] 6.960 [176,78 mm]
19.040 [483,62 mm]

842807A1.CDR
Figure 31: G60 HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)
GE Multilin
3-1
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
18.370 [466,60 mm] 0.280 [7,11 mm] Typ. x 4 CUT-OUT
4.000 [101,60 mm]
17.750 [450,85 mm]
842808A1.CDR
Figure 32: G60 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING (ENHANCED PANEL)
Figure 33: G60 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL) b) VERTICAL UNITS The G60 Generator Protection System is available as a reduced size () vertical mount unit, with a removable faceplate. The faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains additional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators. The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communications port. The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment.
3-2
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws supplied with the relay.
7.482 11.015 1.329
15.000
14.025
13.560
4.000
9.780
843809A1.CDR
Figure 34: G60 VERTICAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)
GE Multilin
3-3
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
UR SERIES
Figure 35: G60 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL) For details on side mounting G60 devices with the enhanced front panel, refer to the following documents available online from the GE Multilin website. GEK-113180: UR-series UR-V side-mounting front panel assembly instructions. GEK-113181: Connecting the side-mounted UR-V enhanced front panel to a vertical UR-series device. GEK-113182: Connecting the side-mounted UR-V enhanced front panel to a vertically-mounted horizontal UR-series device.
For details on side mounting G60 devices with the standard front panel, refer to the figures below.
3-4
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
Figure 36: G60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION (STANDARD PANEL)
GE Multilin
3-5
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
Figure 37: G60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING REAR DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL) 3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed from the unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal injury, damage to the unit or connected equipment, or undesired operation! Proper electrostatic discharge protection (for example, a static strap) must be used when coming in contact with modules while the relay is energized!
WARNING
WARNING
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with like modules in their original factory configured slots. The enhanced faceplate can be opened to the left, once the thumb screw has been removed, as shown below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal. The new wide-angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel opens completely and allows easy access to all modules in the G60.
3-6
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
842812A1.CDR
Figure 38: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (ENHANCED FACEPLATE) The standard faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
Figure 39: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION (STANDARD FACEPLATE) To properly remove a module, the ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. Modules with current input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits. To properly insert a module, ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/ inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted. All CPU modules except the 9E are equipped with 10/100Base-T or 100Base-F Ethernet connectors. These connectors must be individually disconnected from the module before it can be removed from the chassis.
NOTE
GE Multilin
3-7
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
The 4.0x release of the G60 relay includes new hardware modules.The new CPU modules are specified with codes 9E and higher. The new CT/VT modules are specified with the codes 8F and higher.
NOTE
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with new CPUs; similarly, old CT/VT modules can only be used with old CPUs. To prevent hardware mismatches, the new modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating Attn.: Ensure CPU and DSP module label colors are the same!. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed. All other input and output modules are compatible with the new hardware. Firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only compatible with the new hardware modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older hardware modules. 3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
3
GE Multilin
Technical Support: Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
http://www.GEIndustrial.com/Multilin
RATINGS:
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A 360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break 4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
Made in Canada
Model: Mods: Wiring Diagram: Inst. Manual: Serial Number: Firmware: Mfg. Date:
G60D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A 000 ZZZZZZ D MAZB98000029 D 1998/01/05
S
c
R
b a
P
c
N
b
M
a
K
c
J
b a
H
c
G
b a
b
Tx1
a 1 2
CH1
b 1 2
Tx1
a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
Rx1
3
Tx1
3 4
CH1 Tx Rx CH2
3 4 5 6
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
IN
Tx2
7 8
Tx2
OUT
Rx2
Optional Ethernet switch
Optional direct input/output module
Optional Optional contact CT/VT or input/output contact module input/output module
Optional contact input/output module
CT/VT module
CPU module (Ethernet not available when ordered with Ethernet switch)
CH2
Power supply module

830720A3.CDR
Figure 310: REAR TERMINAL VIEW Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.
3-8
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
Figure 311: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS
GE Multilin
3-9
3.2 WIRING 3.2WIRING
3 HARDWARE 3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE
POSITIVE WATTS
OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION (ABC)
A B C
3
F 5a F 6a F 7a F 5c F 6c
M1a
M2a
M1b
M2b
M3a
M3b
M4a
M4b
M1c
M2c
M3c
M4c
F 7c
F6a
F5a
F7a
F8a
F4a
F1a
F1b
F2a
F2b
F3a
F3b
F5c
F6c
F7c
F3c
F1c
F4b
IG
F8c
F2c
VB
VB
VC
VA
VA
VC
VX
VX
IG5
IG5
IG1
IC5
IC5
IC1
IB5
IB1
IC1
IB5
IA5
IA1
IB1
IG1
VB
VC
VA
VB
VA
VC
IG
IA5
IA1
IB
IB
IA
IC
IA
IC
F4c
CURRENT INPUTS 8F/8G or 8H/8J
VOLTAGE INPUTS
VOLTAGE INPUTS 8F / 8G
CURRENT INPUTS
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT SUPERVISION

TC 2
V I
H7a H7c H8a H8c H7b

H8b
( DC ONLY )
CONTACT INPUT H7a CONTACT INPUT H7c CONTACT INPUT H8a CONTACT INPUT H8c COMMON H7b SURGE
H3
V I
H4
AC or DC
CONTROL POWER SURGE FILTER
POWER SUPPLY
DC
B1b B1a B2b B3a B3b B5b HI B6b LO B6a B8a B8b
CRITICAL FAILURE 48 V DC OUTPUT
GE Consumer & Industrial Multilin
G60 GENERATOR MANAGEMENT RELAY

RS-232 (front) DB-9
CPU
9E
IRIG-B Output
RS485 COM 1
RS485 COM 2
IRIG-B Input
CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER
com
com
BNC
D1b D2b D3b D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a
BNC
No. 10AWG minimum
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
X
GROUND BUS
N
8
M
CT
J
6
G
8
D
9 CPU
B
1 Power Supply
25 PIN CONNECTOR
Inputs/ VT/CT outputs (Rear View)
Shielded twisted pairs
Co-axial *
Co-axial
Co-axial
Co-axial * - For IRIG-B Input only use one terminal as input
COMPUTER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 3 RXD 2 TXD 20 7 SGND 6 4 5 22
Ground at Remote Device
This diagram is based on the following order code: G60-H00-HCH-F8F-H6G-M8H-PXX-UXX-WXX This diagram provides an example of how the device is wired, not specifically how to wire the device. Please refer to the Instruction Manual for additional details on wiring based on various configurations.
SGND
TXD RXD
MODULES MUST BE GROUNDED IF TERMINAL IS PROVIDED
830721A4.CDR
Figure 312: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
3-10
9 PIN CONNECTOR
UR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GE Multilin
VOLTAGE SUPERVISION
H5a H5c H6a H6c H5b
CONTACT INPUT H5a CONTACT INPUT H5c CONTACT INPUT H6a CONTACT INPUT H6c COMMON H5b
6G H1
V
H2
H1a H1b H1c H2a H2b H2c H3a H3b H3c H4a H4b H4c
TC 1
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
Figure 313: TYPICAL WIRING WITH GPM-F AND GPM-S MODULES
GE Multilin
3-11
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE 3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
The dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware is shown in the following table: Table 31: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR-SERIES MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE TYPE 1 1 1 2 3 MODULE FUNCTION FROM Power supply Power supply Power supply Reserved Reserved Reserved Analog inputs/outputs Digital inputs/outputs G.703 RS422 CT/VT CPU High (+); Low (+); () 48 V DC (+) and () Relay terminals N/A N/A N/A All except 8b All All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a All except 6a, 7b, 8a All All TERMINALS TO Chassis Chassis Chassis N/A N/A N/A Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis DIELECTRIC STRENGTH (AC) 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute N/A N/A N/A < 50 V DC 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute < 50 V DC 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute
4 5 6 7 8 9
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one minute. 3.2.3 CONTROL POWER CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY OCCUR! The G60 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the relays up once a year.
CAUTION
NOTE
The power supply module can be ordered for two possible voltage ranges, with or without a redundant power option. Each range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical specifications section of chapter 2 for additional details): Low (LO) range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal. High (HI) range: 125 to 250 V nominal.
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections. The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the Typical wiring diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a form-C device that will be energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a critical failure (see the Self-test errors section in chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize. For high reliability systems, the G60 has a redundant option in which two G60 power supplies are placed in parallel on the bus. If one of the power supplies become faulted, the second power supply will assume the full load of the relay without any interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate it is functional. The critical fail relay of the module will also indicate a faulted power supply.
3-12
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE An LED on the front of the control power module shows the status of the power supply:
LED INDICATION CONTINUOUS ON ON / OFF CYCLING OFF POWER SUPPLY OK Failure Failure
3.2 WIRING
AC or DC
NOTE: 14 gauge stranded wire with suitable disconnect devices is recommended.
AC or DC
Heavy copper conductor or braided wire
3
GND
B8b B8a B6a B6b B5b
FILTER SURGE
LOW
HIGH
CONTROL POWER
OPTIONAL ETHERNET SWITCH
Switchgear ground bus
UR-series protection system
827759AA.CDR
Figure 314: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION 3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels 1 and 5 are intended for connection to phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Likewise, channels 2 and 6 are intended for connection to phase B, and channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to phase C. Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single-phase source. For voltage inputs, these channel are labelled as auxiliary voltage (VX). For current inputs, these channels are intended for connection to a CT between system neutral and ground, and are labelled as ground current (IG). Verify that the connection made to the relay nominal current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.
CAUTION
CT/VT modules may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current input. Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used. CT/VT modules with a sensitive ground input are also available. The ground CT input of the sensitive ground modules is ten times more sensitive than the ground CT input of standard CT/VT modules. However, the phase CT inputs and phase VT inputs are the same as those of regular CT/VT modules. The above modules are available with enhanced diagnostics. These modules can automatically detect CT/VT hardware failure and take the relay out of service. CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical wiring diagram. The exact placement of a zero-sequence core balance CT to detect ground fault current is shown below. Twisted-pair cabling on the zero-sequence CT is recommended.
GE Multilin
3-13
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
UNSHIELDED CABLE
Source B C
Ground connection to neutral must be on the source side
SHIELDED CABLE
Source
A B C
G
Ground outside CT
Stress cone shields
3
LOAD
To ground; must be on load side
LOAD
996630A5
Figure 315: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as input for the synchrocheck and volts-per-hertz features. Substitute the tilde ~ symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figure.
NOTE
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 3a
~ 3b
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 5a
~ 6a
~ 7a
~ 8a
VX
~ 1c
~ 2c
~ 3c
~ 4c
~ 5c
~ 6c
~ 7c
VC
VB
VA
IG5
IG1
IA1
IC1
IB1
IA5
Current inputs Voltage inputs 8F, 8G, 8L, and 8M modules (4 CTs and 4 VTs)
~ 1a
~ 1b
~ 2a
~ 2b
~ 3a
~ 3b
IC5
IB5
~ 4a
~ 4b
~ 5a
~ 5b
~ 6a
~ 6b
~ 7a
VC
VB
VA
~ 7b
~ 8a
VX
IG
IA
IC
IB
~ 8c ~ 8b
IG
~ 1c
~ 2c
~ 3c
~ 4c
~ 5c
~ 6c
~ 7c
IG
IG1
IG5
Current inputs 8H, 8J, 8N, and 8R modules (8 CTs)

842766A3.CDR
Figure 316: CT/VT MODULE WIRING
3-14
IG5
IA5
IA5
IC5
IC5
IB5
IB5
IG1
IA
IA
IC
IA1
IC
IA1
IC1
IC1
IB
IB
IB1
IB1
~ 8c
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING 3.2.5 PROCESS BUS MODULES
The G60 can be ordered with a process bus interface module. This module is designed to interface with the GE Multilin HardFiber system, allowing bi-directional IEC 61850 fiber optic communications with up to eight HardFiber merging units, known as Bricks. The HardFiber system has been designed to integrate seamlessly with the existing UR-series applications, including protection functions, FlexLogic, metering, and communications. The IEC 61850 process bus system offers the following benefits. Drastically reduces labor associated with design, installation, and testing of protection and control applications using the G60 by reducing the number of individual copper terminations. Integrates seamlessly with existing G60 applications, since the IEC 61850 process bus interface module replaces the traditional CT/VT modules. Communicates using open standard IEC 61850 messaging.
For additional details on the HardFiber system, refer to GE publication GEK-113500: HardFiber System Instruction Manual. 3.2.6 CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Every contact input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as three terminals per row, with eight rows in total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for form-C relay outputs, the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a form-A output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered. The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications. The contact inputs are grouped with a common return. The G60 has two versions of grouping: four inputs per common return and two inputs per common return. When a contact input/output module is ordered, four inputs per common is used. The four inputs per common allows for high-density inputs in combination with outputs, with a compromise of four inputs sharing one common. If the inputs must be isolated per row, then two inputs per common return should be selected (4D module). The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot position, row number, and column position. Some form-A / solid-state relay outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open, and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to logic On = 1 when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to On = 1 when the current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to On = 1 when the current exceeds about 80 to 100 mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. Block diagrams are shown below for form-A and solid-state relay outputs with optional voltage monitor, optional current monitor, and with no monitoring. The actual values shown for contact output 1 are the same for all contact outputs.
GE Multilin
3-15
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
~#a I ~#b V ~#c a) Voltage with optional current monitoring Voltage monitoring only
If Idc 1mA, Cont Op 1 = VOn otherwise Cont Op 1 = VOff
~#a I ~#b V ~#c
If Idc 80mA, Cont Op 1 = IOn otherwise Cont Op 1 = IOff If Idc 1mA, Cont Op 1 = VOn otherwise Cont Op 1 = VOff
Load
Load
Both voltage and current monitoring

If Idc 80mA, Cont Op 1 = IOn otherwise Cont Op 1 = IOff If Idc 1mA, Cont Op 1 = VOn otherwise Cont Op 1 = VOff
~#a V V I ~#b ~#c b) Current with optional voltage monitoring Current monitoring only
If Idc 80mA, Cont Op 1 = IOn otherwise Cont Op 1 = IOff
~#a I ~#b ~#c
Load
Load
Both voltage and current monitoring (external jumper a-b is required)
~#a ~#b Load ~#c c) No monitoring
+
827862A3.CDR
Figure 317: FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE CONTACT OUTPUTS WITH VOLTAGE AND CURRENT MONITORING The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (CONT OP # VON, CONT OP # VOFF, and CONT OP # ION) which can be used in protection, control, and alarm logic. The typical application of the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the control command. Refer to the Digital elements section of chapter 5 for an example of how form-A and solid-state relay contacts can be applied for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring. Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay contacts need to be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customers responsibility to ensure proper insulation levels! USE OF FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE RELAY OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
NOTE
WARNING
For form-A and solid-state relay output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as an impedance. The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the formA contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a source, a 500 , 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output. Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module; wherever a number sign # appears, substitute the contact number
NOTE
NOTE
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the form-A and solid-state relay contact outputs, the FlexLogic operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup value).
3-16
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
Table 32: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

~6A MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6B MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6C MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C ~6D MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1a, ~1c ~2a, ~2c ~3a, ~3c ~4a, ~4c ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c OUTPUT 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6E MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6F MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C
~6G MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6H MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6K MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C
~6L MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6M MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6N MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6P MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6R MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6S MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6T MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
GE Multilin
3-17
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
~6U MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~6V MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C 2 Outputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs
~67 MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A
~4A MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State
3
~4B MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State ~4C MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State ~4D MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1a, ~1c ~2a, ~2c ~3a, ~3c ~4a, ~4c ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c OUTPUT 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~4L MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs Not Used
3-18
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
842762A2.CDR
Figure 318: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)
GE Multilin
3-19
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
~7
~8
~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b
CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE
~ 5a DIGITAL I/O ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b
DIGITAL I/O
~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c ~ 7a ~ 7b ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8b ~ 8c
~1
~2
~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b
6K
6L
~1
V I
~2
V I
~3
~3
~4
~4
~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c
~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b
CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b
6M
~1
V I
~2
V I
~3
~4
~5
~5
~6
~6
~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c
6N
~1
V I
~2
V I
~3
V I
~4
V I
~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c
~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b
6P
~1
V I
~2
V I
~3
V I
~4
V I
~5
V I
~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b
6R
~1
~2
~3
~4
~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c
~6
V I
~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b
6S
~1
~2
~3
~4 ~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b
6T
~1
~2
~3
~4
~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c
~5
~6
~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b
~ 7a DIGITAL I/O ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b
6U
~1
~2
~3
~4
~5
~6
842763A2.CDR
Figure 319: CONTACT INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2) CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT AND SOLID STATE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS FOR PROPER FUNCTIONALITY.
CAUTION
3-20
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE CONTACT INPUTS:
3.2 WIRING
A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit. A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC. The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as 17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
(Dry) DIGITAL I/O ~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 7b COMMON ~ 8b SURGE 6B ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b (Wet) DIGITAL I/O 6B ~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7a ~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c ~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~ 8b SURGE
24-250V
B 1b CRITICAL B 1a FAILURE B 2b B 3a 48 VDC OUTPUT B 3b + B 5b HI+ CONTROL B 6b LO+ POWER B 6a B 8a SURGE B 8b FILTER
POWER SUPPLY
827741A4.CDR
Figure 320: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE
Contact outputs may be ordered as form-a or form-C. The form-A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervision. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the form-A contact closes. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts. There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recommend using an external DC supply.
NOTE
GE Multilin
3-21
3.2 WIRING USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING:
3 HARDWARE
The contact inputs sense a change of the state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When external devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be exposed to various types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or contaminates on the surface of the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of the state. This film must be removed to establish circuit continuity an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish this. The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this oxidation layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state current. The impulse will have a 5 second delay after a contact input changes state.
current 50 to 70 mA
3
3 mA time 25 to 50 ms
842749A1.CDR
Figure 321: CURRENT THROUGH CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs with autoburnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed. Then, within 25 to 50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the contacts, allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the auto-burnishing starts when external device contact bouncing is over. Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only two contact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (refer to the Contact Input and Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate voltage sources. Consequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs. The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is a DIP switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = ON
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = ON

842751A1.CDR
Figure 322: AUTO-BURNISH DIP SWITCHES The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, the auto-burnish functionality can be checked using an oscilloscope.
NOTE
3-22
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING 3.2.7 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Transducer input modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance temperature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard dcmA ranges. Software is provided to configure virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs. Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three terminals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a" having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/ output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number. Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b. The current outputs require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The figure below illustrates the transducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay. Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE
Figure 323: TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING
GE Multilin
3-23
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE 3.2.8 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT
A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the G60 faceplate for programming with a personal computer. All that is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9-pin and 25-pin connectors. The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
NOTE
Figure 324: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION 3.2.9 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS a) OPTIONS In addition to the faceplate RS232 port, the G60 provides two additional communication ports or a managed six-port Ethernet switch, depending on the installed CPU module. The CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection.
NOTE
Table 33: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS

CPU TYPE 9E 9G 9H 9J 9K 9L 9M COM1 RS485 10Base-F and 10Base-T Redundant 10Base-F 100Base-FX Redundant 100Base-FX 100Base-FX Redundant 100Base-FX COM2 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485
3-24
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
Ground at remote device
D1b D2b D3b D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a
+
COMMON
Rx1 Rx2
RS485 COM1 RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input
Shielded twisted-pairs
Tx2
100Base-F
ALTERNATE RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input
+ +
COMMON
D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a
+
COMMON
+
BNC BNC
CPU
Co-axial cable Co-axial cable
BNC
IRIG-B output
Co-axial cable
IRIG-B output
COM1 9G
MM fiber optic cable Shielded twisted-pairs
Tx1
Rx1
10Base-FL 10Base-T
NORMAL
D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a
+
COMMON
RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input IRIG-B output CPU
+
BNC BNC
D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a
+
COMMON
RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input IRIG-B output
9S
CPU
BNC
Co-axial cable
COM1 9K
MM fiber optic cable
Tx1
100Base-FL
NORMAL
9E
+
BNC BNC
3
CPU CPU CPU 9L
Rx1
COM1 9H
Tx1 Tx2
10Base-FL
NORMAL ALTERNATE
SM fiber optic cable
100Base-FL
NORMAL COM1 RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input IRIG-B output
Rx2 10Base-F
10Base-T
D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a
+
COMMON
RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input IRIG-B output CPU
D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

+
COMMON
+
BNC BNC
+
BNC BNC
Rx1
D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

+
COMMON
RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input CPU IRIG-B output

100Base-F
ALTERNATE RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input
+
BNC BNC
D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a
+
COMMON
+
BNC BNC
IRIG-B output
842765A7.CDR
Figure 325: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING b) RS485 PORTS RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of these ports, continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer, SCADA system or PLC is possible. To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 + terminals connected together, and all RS485 terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely. Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.
GE Multilin
3-25
COM1 9M
9J
Tx1
100Base-FL
NORMAL COM1
SM fiber optic cable
100Base-FL
NORMAL
3.2 WIRING Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.
3 HARDWARE
Figure 326: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION c) 10BASE-FL AND 100BASE-FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
CAUTION
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps. Optical fiber may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nm in multi-mode or 1310 nm in multi-mode and single-mode. The 10 Mbps rate is available for CPU modules 9G and 9H; 100Mbps is available for modules 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, and 9R. The 9H, 9K, 9M, and 9R modules have a second pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy. The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 m, 62.5/125 m and 100/140 m for 10 Mbps. The fiber optic port is designed such that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 m or less in diameter, 62.5 m for 100 Mbps. For optical power budgeting, splices are required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair. When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or disengage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.
3-26
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING 3.2.10 IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION OPTIONAL
RELAY
4B IRIG-B(+) IRIG-B(-) RECEIVER BNC (IN) 4A RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE +
IRIG-B TIME CODE GENERATOR

(DC SHIFT OR AMPLITUDE MODULATED SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
BNC (OUT) REPEATER
TO OTHER DEVICES (DC-SHIFT ONLY)
827756A5.CDR
Figure 327: IRIG-B CONNECTION The IRIG-B repeater provides an amplified DC-shift IRIG-B signal to other equipment. By using one IRIG-B serial connection, several UR-series relays can be synchronized. The IRIG-B repeater has a bypass function to maintain the time signal even when a relay in the series is powered down.
Figure 328: IRIG-B REPEATER Using an amplitude modulated receiver will cause errors up to 1 ms in event time-stamping.
NOTE
NOTE
Using an amplitude modulated receiver will also cause errors of up to 1 ms in metered synchrophasor values. Using the IRIG-B repeater function in conjunction with synchrophasors is not recommended, as the repeater adds a 40 s delay to the IRIG-B signal. This results in a 1 error for each consecutive device in the string as reported in synchrophasors.
GE Multilin
3-27
3.3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS MODULES 3.3DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS MODULES
3 HARDWARE 3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The G60 direct inputs and outputs feature makes use of the type 7 series of communications modules. These modules are also used by the L90 Line Differential Relay for inter-relay communications. The direct input and output feature uses the communications channels provided by these modules to exchange digital state information between relays. This feature is available on all UR-series relay models except for the L90 Line Differential relay. The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration as shown below. The transmitter of one module is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then connected to the receiver of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure below illustrates a ring of four UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx to UR1-Rx. A maximum of sixteen (16) UR-series relays can be connected in a single ring
UR #1
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx
842006A1.CDR
UR #2
UR #3
UR #4
Figure 329: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION The interconnection for dual-channel Type 7 communications modules is shown below. Two channel modules allow for a redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The required connections are: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the first ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, UR4-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, and UR2-Tx2 to UR1-Rx2 for the second ring.
Tx1 Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1
UR #1
UR #2
Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1
UR #3
Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1
UR #4
Rx1 Tx2 Rx2

842007A1.CDR
Figure 330: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT DUAL CHANNEL CONNECTION The following diagram shows the connection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels. UR1 and UR3 have single type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication channels can be of different types, depending on the Type 7 modules used. To allow the direct input and output data to crossover from channel 1 to channel 2 on UR2, the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be Enabled on UR2. This forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.
3-28
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
UR #1
Tx Rx
Channel #1
Tx1
UR #2
Rx1 Tx2 Rx2
Channel #2 UR #3
Tx Rx
842013A1.CDR
Figure 331: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT SINGLE/DUAL CHANNEL COMBINATION CONNECTION The interconnection requirements are described in further detail in this section for each specific variation of type 7 communications module. These modules are listed in the following table. All fiber modules use ST type connectors. Not all the direct input and output communications modules may be applicable to the G60 relay. Only the modules specified in the order codes are available as direct input and output communications modules.
NOTE
Table 34: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS (Sheet 1 of 2)

MODULE 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 2S 2T 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M SPECIFICATION C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, 1 channel Bi-phase, 2 channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply 1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel 1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 2 channels Channel 1 - RS422; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser Channel 1 - G.703; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel 1300 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels Channel 1: RS422, channel: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
GE Multilin
3-29
3.3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS MODULES Table 34: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS (Sheet 2 of 2)
MODULE 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7V 7W SPECIFICATION Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser Channel 1: G.703, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser G.703, 1 channel G.703, 2 channels RS422, 1 channel RS422, 2 channels, 2 clock inputs RS422, 2 channels
3 HARDWARE
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Module: Connection Location: 7A / 7B / 7C Slot X 7H / 7I / 7J Slot X
RX1 TX1
RX1 TX1
RX2 TX2 1 Channel 2 Channels

831719A2.CDR
Figure 332: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES 3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Module: Connection Location: 72/ 7D Slot X TX1 RX1 73/ 7K Slot X TX1 RX1
TX2 RX2
1 Channel
2 Channels
831720A3.CDR
Figure 333: LASER FIBER MODULES When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver.
WARNING
3-30
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS MODULES 3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration. The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps. The SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to this module.
NOTE
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Connecting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if pin X1a or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
Shield
Inter-relay communications
G.703 channel 1
Tx Rx Tx + Rx +
Surge
Shield Tx Rx Tx + Rx +
G.703 channel 2
Surge
X 1a X 1b X 2a X 2b X 3a X 3b X 6a X 6b X 7a X 7b X 8a X 8b
7S
842773A2.CDR
Figure 334: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrangement of these pins, see the Rear terminal assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
7S
Tx Rx Tx + Rx + Tx Rx Tx + Rx +
G.703 CHANNEL 1
G.703 CHANNEL 1
SURGE
Shld. Tx -
SURGE
Shld. Tx Tx + Rx +
COMM.
Tx + Rx +
SURGE
SURGE
831727A3.CDR
Figure 335: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that A is equivalent to + and B is equivalent to .
NOTE
b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES 1. Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S). The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. Remove the module cover screw. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards. Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
2. 3. 4. 5.
GE Multilin
COMM.
G.703 CHANNEL 2
Rx -
Rx -
G.703 CHANNEL 2
7S
Shld.
Shld.
3-31
3.3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS MODULES 6.
3 HARDWARE
Re-insert the G.703 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 336: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING Table 35: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS
SWITCHES S1 S5 and S6 FUNCTION OFF octet timing disabled ON octet timing 8 kHz S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF loop timing mode S5 = ON and S6 = OFF internal timing mode S5 = OFF and S6 = ON minimum remote loopback mode S5 = ON and S6 = ON dual loopback mode
c) G.703 OCTET TIMING If octet timing is enabled (on), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to higher order systems. When G60s are connected back to back, octet timing should be disabled (off). d) G.703 TIMING MODES There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default). Internal Timing Mode: The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in the internal timing mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set for octet timing (S1 = OFF) and timing mode to internal timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF). Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (URto-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to octet timing (S1 = ON) and set timing mode to loop timing (S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF).
3-32
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown below:
842752A1.CDR
e) G.703 TEST MODES In minimum remote loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 line-side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs, passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer and then returns to the transmitter. The differential received data is processed and passed to the G.703 transmitter module after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and passes it to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
DMR
G7X
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter G7X = G.703 Transmitter G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMX
G7R
842774A1.CDR
Figure 337: G.703 MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE In dual loopback mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver/ transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 transmitter module to be returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the differential Manchester side of the interface.
DMR
G7X
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter G7X = G.703 Transmitter G7R = G.703 Receiver
DMX
G7R
842775A1.CDR
Figure 338: G.703 DUAL LOOPBACK MODE
GE Multilin
3-33
3 HARDWARE 3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION There are two RS422 inter-relay communications modules available: single-channel RS422 (module 7T) and dual-channel RS422 (module 7W). The modules can be configured to run at 64 kbps or 128 kbps. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair cable is recommended for external connections. These modules are protected by optically-isolated surge suppression devices. The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows: Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a or 7b or both. Site 2: Terminate shield to COM pin 2b.
The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.
Rx
Rx Tx + Rx + Shield Tx Rx Tx + Rx + Shield
Rx + Shield
Inter-relay comms.
Tx +
RS422
RS422 channel 1
Clock
COM
Surge
RS422 channel 2
Clock
COM
~ indicates the slot position
Surge
842776A3.CDR
Figure 339: RS422 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two single-channel RS422 interfaces installed in slot W. All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Figure 340: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES b) TWO-CHANNEL APPLICATION VIA MULTIPLEXERS The RS422 interface may be used for single channel or two channel applications over SONET/SDH or multiplexed systems. When used in single-channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two-channel applications, certain criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature. Terminal timing is a common feature to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the terminal timing feature, two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The send timing outputs from the multiplexer (data module 1), will connect to the clock inputs of the URRS422 interface in the usual fashion. In addition, the send timing outputs of data module 1 will also be paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2. By using this configuration, the timing for both data modules and both URRS422 channels will be derived from a single clock source. As a result, data sampling for both of the URRS422 channels will be synchronized via the send timing leads on data module 1 as shown below. If the terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.
3-34
Inter-relay communications
7W
Single-channel RS422 module
Dual-channel RS422 module
~ 3b ~ 3a ~ 2a ~ 4b ~ 6a ~ 7a ~ 8b ~ 2b ~ 8a
7T
Tx
~ 3b ~ 3a ~ 2a ~ 4b ~ 6a ~ 5b ~ 5a ~ 4a ~ 6b ~ 7b ~ 7a ~ 8b ~ 2b ~ 8a
Tx
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
Data module 1
Signal name
7W
Tx1(+) Tx1(-)
RS422 CHANNEL 1
Rx1(+) Rx1(-) Shld.
CLOCK
+ Tx2(+) Tx2(-)
RS422 CHANNEL 2
Rx2(+) Rx2(-) Shld. com
SURGE
W 2a W 3b W 4b W 3a W 6a W 7a W 8b W 4a W 5b W 6b W 5a W 7b W 2b W 8a
SD(A) - Send data SD(B) - Send data RD(A) - Received data RD(B) - Received data RS(A) - Request to send (RTS) RS(B) - Request to send (RTS) RT(A) - Receive timing RT(B) - Receive timing CS(A) - Clear To send CS(B) - Clear To send Local loopback Remote loopback Signal ground ST(A) - Send timing ST(B) - Send timing
Data module 2
Signal name TT(A) - Terminal timing TT(B) - Terminal timing SD(A) - Send data SD(B) - Send data RD(A) - Received data RD(B) - Received data RS(A) - Request to send (RTS) RS(B) - Request to send (RTS) CS(A) - Clear To send CS(B) - Clear To send Local loopback Remote loopback Signal ground ST(A) - Send timing ST(B) - Send timing 831022A3.CDR
Figure 341: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION Data module 1 provides timing to the G60 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also provides timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin numbers have been omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer. c) TRANSMIT TIMING The RS422 interface accepts one clock input for transmit timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz transmit timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window. Therefore, it is important to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation. For example, the following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit.
Tx Clock
Tx Data
Figure 342: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS d) RECEIVE TIMING The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI-MARK modulation code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture data. NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
GE Multilin
3-35
3 HARDWARE
To recover the Rx clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (digital phase lock loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is driven by an internal clock, which is 16-times over-sampled, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a data clock that can be used as the SCC (serial communication controller) receive clock. 3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74 modules are used in two-terminal with a redundant channel or three-terminal configurations where channel 1 is employed via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly.
When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed maximum optical input power to the receiver.
WARNING
Rx1 + Shield
Tx2
Rx2
Fiber channel 2 Surge
~ 8a
842777A1.CDR
Figure 343: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (data communications equipment) units. 3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus fiber interface configuration at 64 kbps. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75 modules are used in configurations where channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the shield to pin 1a at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See previous sections for additional details on the G.703 and fiber interfaces. When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver.
WARNING
Shield Tx Rx Tx + Rx +
G.703 channel 1
Surge
Tx2 Rx2
Fiber channel 2
842778A1.CDR
Figure 344: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION
3-36
7E, 7F, 7G, Inter-relay communications 7Q,75
~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 3a ~ 3b
Inter-relay comms.
~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 2b ~ 2a ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 4b ~ 6a
COM Tx1 + Rx1 Tx1
RS422 channel 1
7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 74
Clock (channel 1)
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS MODULES 3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (modules types 2G, 2H, 76, and 77) are designed to interface with IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input and output applications for firmware revisions 3.30 and higher. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication modules are either 64 kbps (with n fixed at 1) for 128 kbps (with n fixed at 2). The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps. The specifications for the module are as follows:. IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1 128 kbps optical fiber interface (for 2G and 2H modules) or C37.94 for 2 64 kbps optical fiber interface (for 76 and 77 modules). Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber. Fiber optic mode: multi-mode. Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km. Fiber optic connector: type ST. Wavelength: 830 40 nm. Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard, as shown below.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.
842753A1.CDR
GE Multilin
3-37
3 HARDWARE
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. therefore, the timing switch selection should be internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured. For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. The IEEE C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows: 1. Remove the IEEE C37.94 module (type 2G, 2H, 76, or 77 module): The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. 2. Remove the module cover screw. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards. Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above). Replace the top cover and the cover screw. Re-insert the IEEE C37.94 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Figure 345: IEEE C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
3-38
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS MODULES 3.3.9 C37.94SM INTERFACE
The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from 820 nm multi-mode fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,, 12. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps. The specifications for the module are as follows: Emulated IEEE standard: emulates C37.94 for 1 64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or 64 kbps). Fiber optic cable type: 9/125 m core diameter optical fiber. Fiber optic mode: single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T receiver. Fiber optic cable length: up to 10 km. Fiber optic connector: type ST. Wavelength: 1300 40 nm. Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports C37.94SM as shown below.
It can also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module as shown below.
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.
842753A1.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
GE Multilin
3-39
3 HARDWARE
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. The C37.94SM communications module cover removal procedure is as follows: 1. Remove the C37.94SM module (modules 2A or 2B): The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. 2. 3. Remove the module cover screw. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards. Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above). Replace the top cover and the cover screw. Re-insert the C37.94SM module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
4. 5. 6.
Figure 346: C37.94SM TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
3-40
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 3.4FIELD AND STATOR GROUND MODULES
3.4 FIELD AND STATOR GROUND MODULES 3.4.1 OVERVIEW
The field ground protection modules are used in the following protection sytems. Field low voltage protection system (order code GPM-F-L) for voltages up to 600 V DC. Field high voltage protection system (order code GPM-F-H) for voltages greater than 600 V DC. Stator protection system (order code GPM-S).
These systems are illustrated below for comparative purposes in the following figure.
GPM-F-L Field ground low-voltage protection system
GPM-F-L: Field ground low-voltage protection module
GPM-F-HM: Field ground high-voltage protection module GPM-F-H Field ground high-voltage protection system GPM-F-R: Field ground protection high-voltage resistor box
GPM-S-G: Stator ground 20 Hz generator module
GPM-S-B: Stator ground band pass filter module GPM-S Stator ground protection system
204-SD-43737: Stator ground protection CT
830755A2.CDR
Figure 347: GENERATOR GROUND PROTECTION COMPONENTS
GE Multilin
3-41
3 HARDWARE 3.4.2 FIELD GROUND LOW-VOLTAGE PROTECTION SYSTEM
The field ground low voltage protection system consists of one module: the field ground protection low-voltage module (GPM-F-L). The mounting and dimension diagrams are shown below (all dimensions are in inches).
10.270
10.142
2.160
12.270
9.090
830017A1.CDR
Figure 348: DIMENSIONS FOR GPM-F-L PANEL-MOUNTED UNIT
1.000
10.072 7.574
11.770
10.142
2.306
12.270
9.090
830016A1.CDR
Figure 349: DIMENSIONS FOR GPM-F-L WALL-MOUNTED UNIT
3-42
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
Screw 10-323/8 Pan HD Zinc GE P/N 1410-0006 QTY: 4
Washer flat Zinc #10 GE P/N 1430-0006 QTY: 4
Nut Nylock Zinc 10-32 GE P/N 1422-1032 QTY: 4
0.220
10.813
1.000 2.200
0.600
11.520
830018A1.CDR
Figure 350: MOUNTING DIAGRAM FOR GPM-F-L PANEL-MOUNTED UNIT
GE Multilin
3-43
3 HARDWARE
7.574
0.220 4
3
Nut Nylock Zinc 10-32 GE P/N 1422-1032 QTY: 4 Washer flat Zinc #10 GE P/N 1430-0006 QTY: 4 Screw 10-323/8, Pan HD Zinc GE P/N 1410-0006, QTY: 4
11.520
830013A1.CDR
Figure 351: MOUNTING DIAGRAM FOR GPM-F-L WALL-MOUNTED UNIT There are three connectors on the field protection low-voltage module as shown below.
Connector A Connector B Connector C
2 4 6 8 10 12 123 1 3 5 7 9 11 1 2 3 4
830023A1.CDR
Figure 352: REAR VIEW OF GPM-F-L MODULE SHOWING TERMINAL BLOCKS The pin assignments are described in the following tables. Table 36: GPM-F-L PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR A
PIN 1 2 3 LABEL L(+) N() GND DEFINITION AC-L (DC+) AC-N (DC) Ground
3-44
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
Table 37: GPM-F-L PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR B

PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 LABEL CH1(+) CH1() COM CH2(+) CH2() IN3 IN2 IN1 COM NC COM NO DEFINITION RS485 channel 1 positive RS485 channel 1 negative RS485 common RS485 channel 2 positive RS485 channel 2 negative Contact input 3 Contact input 2 Contact input 1 Contact input common Relay NC (normally closed) Relay common Relay NO (normally open)
Table 38: GPM-F-L PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR C

PIN 1 2 3 4 LABEL FGND F1 F() F(+) DEFINITION Field ground Injection to excitation positive Injection to excitation negative / excitation negative Excitation positive
The following diagram illustrates how to wire the GPM-F-L module for both single-point injection and double-point injection.
C1 Field ground protection module GPM-F-HM C2 C3 C4 Connection for single-point injection F(+) EX + F1 Field ground protection module GPM-F-HM
C1 C2 C3 C4 Connection for double-point injection F1 F() EX +
830759A2.CDR
Figure 353: CONNECTING THE FIELD GROUND PROTECTION MODULE 3.4.3 FIELD GROUND HIGH-VOLTAGE PROTECTION SYSTEM The field ground high-voltage protection system consists of two modules: the field ground protection high-voltage module (GPM-F-HM) and the field ground protection high-voltage resistor box (GPM-F-R). The mounting and dimension diagrams are shown below (all dimensions are in inches).
GE Multilin
3-45
3 HARDWARE
10.270
10.142
3
2.160
12.270
9.090
830017A1.CDR
Figure 354: DIMENSIONS FOR GPM-F-HM PANEL-MOUNTED UNIT
1.000
10.072 7.574
11.770
10.142
2.306
12.270
9.090
830016A1.CDR
Figure 355: DIMENSIONS FOR GPM-F-HM WALL-MOUNTED UNIT
3-46
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
7.000
6.500 5.000 5.875
3.500 7.000
2.500
2.750
8.600
830753A1.CDR
Figure 356: DIMENSIONS FOR GPM-F-R HIGH-VOLTAGE RESISTOR BOX
GE Multilin
3-47
3 HARDWARE
Screw 10-323/8 Pan HD Zinc GE P/N 1410-0006 QTY: 4
Washer flat Zinc #10 GE P/N 1430-0006 QTY: 4
0.220
10.813
1.000 2.200
0.600
11.520
830018A1.CDR
Figure 357: MOUNTING DIAGRAM FOR GPM-F-HM PANEL-MOUNTED UNIT
3-48
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
7.574
0.220 4
11.520
Nut Nylock Zinc 10-32 GE P/N 1422-1032 QTY: 4 Washer flat Zinc #10 GE P/N 1430-0006 QTY: 4 Screw 10-323/8, Pan HD Zinc GE P/N 1410-0006, QTY: 4
830013A1.CDR
Figure 358: MOUNTING DIAGRAM FOR GPM-F-HM WALL-MOUNTED UNIT

Washer flat Zinc #10 GE P/N 1430-0006 QTY: 4 Nut Nylock, Zinc 10-32 GE P/N 1422-1032 QTY: 4
3.500
0.220
5.938
Screw 10-323/8 Pan HD Zinc, GE P/N 1410-0006, QTY: 4
830019A1.CDR
Figure 359: MOUNTING DIAGRAM FOR GPM-F-R HIGH-VOLTAGE RESISTOR BOX There are three connectors on the field ground protection high-voltage module as shown below.
GE Multilin
3-49
3 HARDWARE
Connector A
Connector B
Connector C
2 4 6 8 10 12 123 1 3 5 7 9 11 1 2 3 4
830023A1.CDR
Figure 360: REAR VIEW OF GPM-F-HM MODULE SHOWING TERMINAL BLOCKS The pin assignments are described in the following tables. Table 39: GPM-F-HM PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR A
PIN 1 2 3
LABEL L(+) N() GND
DEFINITION AC-L (DC+) AC-N (DC) Ground
Table 310: GPM-F-HM PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR B

PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 LABEL CH1(+) CH1() COM CH2(+) CH2() IN3 IN2 IN1 COM NC COM NO DEFINITION RS485 channel 1 positive RS485 channel 1 negative RS485 common RS485 channel 2 positive RS485 channel 2 negative Contact input 3 Contact input 2 Contact input 1 Contact input common Relay NC (normally closed) Relay common Relay NO (normally open)
Table 311: GPM-F-HM PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR C

PIN 1 2 3 4 LABEL FGND F1 F() F(+) DEFINITION Field ground Injection to excitation positive Injection to excitation negative / excitation negative Excitation positive
There are three connectors on the field ground protection high-voltage resistor box as shown below.
3-50
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
Connector A
Connector B
Connector C
830026A2.CDR
Figure 361: GPM-F-R MODULE SHOWING TERMINAL BLOCKS The pin assignments are described in the following tables. Table 312: GPM-F-R PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR A
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LABEL A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 DEFINITION Not used Not used Injection secondary (F1) Not used Excitation secondary negative (F) Not used Excitation secondary positive (F+)
Table 313: GPM-F-R PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR B

PIN 1 2 3 LABEL B1 B2 B3 DEFINITION Excitation primary positive (F2+) Not used Injection to excitation positive (F2)
Table 314: GPM-F-R PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR C

PIN 1 2 3 LABEL C1 C2 C3 DEFINITION Injection to excitation negative / Excitation primary negative (F2) Not used Not used
GE Multilin
3-51
3 HARDWARE
The following diagram illustrates how to wire the GPM-F-HM module with the GPM-F-R resistor box for both single-point injection and double-point injection.
A1 A2 Field ground protection module GPM-F-HM C2 C3 C4 F1 F F+ A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Field ground protection high-voltage resistor box module GPM-F-R B1 B2 B3 F2 EX C1 C2 C3 F2 F2+ + Connection for single-point injection
C1
3
C1 Field ground protection module GPM-F-HM C2 C3 C4 F1 F F+ A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Field ground protection high-voltage resistor box module GPM-F-R B1 B2 B3
F2+ + F2 EX Connection for double-point injection
C1 C2 C3
F2
830758A6.CDR
Figure 362: CONNECTING THE FIELD GROUND PROTECTION MODULE TO THE HIGH-VOLTAGE RESISTOR BOX The connection between F1 (terminal C2) on the GPM-F-HM field ground protection module and terminal A3 on the GPM-F-R high-voltage resistor box module should be shielded. The length should be kept as short as possible and not exceed 10 meters. The connection between the F+ and F pair (terminals C3 and C4) on the GPM-F-HM field ground protection module and terminals A5 and A7 on the GPM-F-R high-voltage resistor box module should be shielded. The length should be kept as short as possible and not exceed 10 meters. Terminals C1 and C3 of the GPM-F-R high-voltage resistor box must be externally shorted for both singlepoint injection and double-point injection.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
3.4.4 STATOR GROUND PROTECTION SYSTEM In the 100% stator ground fault protection based on sub-harmonic injection, a 20 Hz voltage is injected to detect ground faults at any point across 100% of the winding. The stator ground module works in combination the G60 to provide 100% stator ground fault protection that is operational during generator start-up, running and stopped conditions. The stator ground protection system consists of three modules: the stator ground protection 20 Hz generator module (GPM-S-G), the stator ground band pass filter module (GPM-S-B), and the stator ground protection CT (204-SD-43737). The mounting and dimension diagrams are shown below (all dimensions are in inches).
3-52
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
17.760
8.451
3
5.250
19.160
7.250
830012A2.CDR
Figure 363: DIMENSIONS FOR GPM-S-G PANEL-MOUNTED UNIT

18.960
6.250
0.250
830754A2.CDR
Figure 364: DIMENSIONS FOR GPM-S-G WALL-MOUNTED UNIT
GE Multilin
3-53
3 HARDWARE
7.500
3
7.310
11.870 8.300
7.869
9.370
830020A1.CDR
Figure 365: DIMENSIONS FOR GPM-S-B BAND PASS FILTER MODULE
3-54
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
Washer flat Zinc #10 GE P/N 1430-0006 QTY: 4 Screw 10-323/8 Pan HD Zinc GE P/N 1410-0006 QTY: 4
18.710 0.220 4
6.250
830021A1.CDR
Figure 366: MOUNTING DIAGRAM FOR GPM-S-G PANEL-MOUNTED UNIT
GE Multilin
3-55
3 HARDWARE
Washer flat Zinc #10 GE P/N 1430-0006 QTY: 4 Screw 10-323/8 Pan HD Zinc GE P/N 1410-0006 QTY: 4
Nut Nylock Zinc 10-32 GE P/N 1422-1032 QTY: 4 18.498
4.000
5.375
18.000
830022A1.CDR
Figure 367: MOUNTING DIAGRAM FOR GPM-S-G WALL-MOUNTED UNIT

10.870 0.220 4
5.490
Screw 10-323/8 Pan HD Zinc GE P/N 1410-0006, QTY: 4 Washer flat Zinc #10 GE P/N 1430-0006, QTY: 4 Nut Nylock Zinc 10-32 GE P/N 1422-1032, QTY: 4
830015A1.CDR
Figure 368: MOUNTING DIAGRAM FOR GPM-S-B BAND PASS FILTER MODULE There are two connectors on the stator ground protection 20 Hz generator module as shown below.
3-56
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
A 1 2 3 4 5
B 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
6 7 8 9 10
830025A2.CDR
Figure 369: REAR VIEW OF GPM-S-G MODULE SHOWING TERMINAL BLOCKS The pin assignments for the stator ground 20 Hz generator module are described in the following tables. Table 315: GPM-S-G PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR A
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LABEL A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 DEFINITION Contact input 1 Contact input 2 Alarm relay NC (normally closed) Not used Output 1 Contact input common Alarm relay NO (normally open) Alarm relay common Not used Output 2
Table 316: GPM-S-G PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR B

PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LABEL B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 DEFINITION Not used Not used Ground Not used Not used Not used Not used Ground Power neutral / DC negative Power line / DC positive
There are two connectors on the stator ground protection band pass filter module as shown below.
GE Multilin
3-57
3 HARDWARE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
830024A2.CDR
Figure 370: GPM-S-B MODULE SHOWING TERMINAL BLOCKS The pin assignments are described in the following tables. Table 317: GPM-S-B PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR A
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LABEL A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 DEFINITION Input 1 Not used Input 2 Not used Reserved Divider out Divider low
Table 318: GPM-S-B PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR CONNECTOR B

PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LABEL B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 DEFINITION Output 1 Not used Output 2 Not used Reserved Divider high Divider low
The following diagram illustrates how to connect the stator ground 20 Hz generator module with the band pass filter module where the NGT secondary voltage is less than or equal to 240 V.
3-58
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
A1 A2 A3 Stator ground 20 Hz generator module GPM-S-G A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Stator ground band pass filter module GPM-S-B B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 Rn
to G60 auxiliary VT
830756A1.CDR
Figure 371: STATOR GROUND PROTECTION SYSTEM CONNECTIONS (NGT SECONDARY 240 V) The following diagram illustrates how to connect the stator ground 20 Hz generator module with the band pass filter module where the NGT secondary voltage is greater than 240 V.
A1 A2 A3 Stator ground 20 Hz generator module GPM-S-G A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 to G60 auxiliary VT A6 A7 Stator ground band pass filter module GPM-S-B B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
830757A2.CDR
Rn
Figure 372: STATOR GROUND PROTECTION SYSTEM CONNECTIONS (NGT SECONDARY > 240 V) 3.4.5 UPGRADING FIRMWARE a) UPGRADING THE GPM-F FIRMWARE The following procedure describes how the upgrade the firmware for the GPM-F modules.
GE Multilin
3-59
3.4 FIELD AND STATOR GROUND MODULES 1. Open the G60 device so that it appears in the online window.
3 HARDWARE
3-60
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE 2. Select the Maintenance > Update GPM-F Firmware tree node.
The following dialog will appear which allows the user to browse to the location of the firmware file.
3.
Click Open to start the firmware upgrade process will start.
Note that this process will also work for a serial-port device but will take a longer time to complete (approximately 5 minutes).
GE Multilin
3-61
3.5 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES 3.5MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES
3 HARDWARE 3.5.1 OVERVIEW
The type 2S and 2T embedded managed switch modules are supported by UR-series relays containing type 9S CPU modules with revisions 5.5x and higher. The modules communicate to the G60 through an internal Ethernet port (referred to as the UR port or port 7) and provide an additional six external Ethernet ports: two 10/100Base-T ports and four multimode ST 100Base-FX ports. The Ethernet switch module should be powered up before or at the same time as the G60. Otherwise, the switch module will not be detected on power up and the EQUIPMENT MISMATCH: ORDERCODE XXX self-test warning will be issued. 3.5.2 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE
NOTE
The type 2S and 2T managed Ethernet switch modules provide two 10/100Base-T and four multimode ST 100Base-FX external Ethernet ports accessible through the rear of the module. In addition, a serial console port is accessible from the front of the module (requires the front panel faceplate to be open). The pin assignment for the console port signals is shown in the following table. Table 319: CONSOLE PORT PIN ASSIGNMENT
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 to 9 SIGNAL CD RXD TXD N/A GND N/A DESCRIPTION Carrier detect (not used) Receive data (input) Transmit data (output) Not used Signal ground Not used
Two 10/100Base-T ports
Four 100Base-FX multimode ports with ST connectors
RS232 console port
Independent power supply. Options: 2S: high-voltage 2T: low-voltage
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
842867A2.CDR
Figure 373: MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCHES HARDWARE
3-62
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE The wiring for the managed Ethernet switch module is shown below.
Rx1 Rx2 Rx1 Rx1
MM fiber optic cable MM fiber optic cable MM fiber optic cable 100Base-T cable 100Base-T cable 110 to 250 V DC 100 to 240 V AC
Tx2 Tx1 Tx1
100Base-FX 100Base-FX 100Base-FX
Fiber ports
10/100Base-T 10/100Base-T
Copper ports CPU Power supply
+ W1a W2b W1a GROUND
842835A1.CDR
Figure 374: MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE WIRING 3.5.3 MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS The 10/100Base-T and 100Base-FX ports have LED indicators to indicate the port status. The 10/100Base-T ports have three LEDs to indicate connection speed, duplex mode, and link activity. The 100Base-FX ports have one LED to indicate linkup and activity.
2S / 2T
Tx1
100Base-FX
Connection speed indicator (OFF = 10 Mbps; ON = 100 Mbps) Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity) Duplex mode indicator (OFF = half-duplex; ON = full-duplex)
Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity)
842868A2.CDR
Figure 375: ETHERNET SWITCH LED INDICATORS 3.5.4 CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE A suitable IP/gateway and subnet mask must be assigned to both the switch and the UR relay for correct operation. The Switch has been shipped with a default IP address of 192.168.1.2 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. Consult your network administrator to determine if the default IP address, subnet mask or default gateway needs to be modified. Do not connect to network while configuring the switch module.
CAUTION
GE Multilin
3-63
3.5 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES a) CONFIGURING THE SWITCH MODULE IP SETTINGS
3 HARDWARE
In our example configuration of both the Switchs IP address and subnet mask must be changed to 3.94.247.229 and 255.255.252.0 respectively. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway can be configured using either EnerVista UR Setup software, the Switchs Secure Web Management (SWM), or through the console port using CLI. 1. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Configure IP menu item to open the Ethernet switch configuration window.
2.
Enter 3.94.247.229 in the IP Address field and 255.255.252.0 in the Subnet Mask field, then click OK. The software will send the new settings to the G60 and prompt as follows when complete.
3.
Cycle power to the G60 and switch module to activate the new settings.
b) SAVING THE ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS TO A SETTINGS FILE The G60 allows the settings information for the Ethernet switch module to be saved locally as a settings file. This file contains the advanced configuration details for the switch not contained within the standard G60 settings file. This feature allows the switch module settings to be saved locally before performing firmware upgrades. Saving settings files is also highly recommended before making any change to the module configuration or creating new setting files. The following procedure describes how to save local settings files for the Ethernet switch module. 1. 2. Select the desired device from site tree in the online window. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File > Retreive Settings File item from the device settings tree.
3-64
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.
3.
Enter an appropriate folder and file name and click Save.
All settings files will be saved as text files and the corresponding file extension automatically assigned. c) UPLOADING ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS FILES TO THE MODULE The following procedure describes how to upload local settings files to the Ethernet switch module. It is highly recommended that the current settings are saved to a settings file before uploading a new settings file. It is highly recommended to place the switch offline while transferring setting files to the switch. When transferring settings files from one switch to another, the user must reconfigure the IP address.
NOTE
1. 2.
Select the desired device from site tree in the online window. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File > Transfer Settings File item from the device settings tree. The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.
3.
Navigate to the folder containing the Ethernet switch settings file, select the file, then click Open.
The settings file will be transferred to the Ethernet switch and the settings uploaded to the device.
GE Multilin
3-65
3 HARDWARE 3.5.5 UPLOADING G60 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE
a) DESCRIPTION This section describes the process for upgrading firmware on a UR-2S or UR-2T switch module. There are several ways of updating firmware on a switch module: Using the EnerVista UR Setup software. Serially using the G60 switch module console port. Using FTP or TFTP through the G60 switch module console port.
It is highly recommended to use the EnerVista UR Setup software to upgrade firmware on a G60 switch module. Firmware upgrades using the serial port, TFTP, and FTP are described in detail in the switch module manual.
NOTE
b) SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION The latest switch module firmware is available as a download from the GE Multilin web site. Use the following procedure to determine the version of firmware currently installed on your switch 1. Log into the switch using the EnerVista web interface. The default switch login ID is manager and the default password is manager.
NOTE
The firmware version installed on the switch will appear on the lower left corner of the screen.
Version: 2.1 beta
842869A1.CDR
2.
Using the EnerVista UR Setup program, select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Firmware Upload menu item.
3-66
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
The following popup screen will appear warning that the settings will be lost when the firmware is upgraded.
It is highly recommended that you save the switch settings before upgrading the firmware.
NOTE
3.
After saving the settings file, proceed with the firmware upload by selecting Yes to the above warning. Another window will open, asking you to point to the location of the firmware file to be uploaded.
4.
Select the firmware file to be loaded on to the Switch, and select the Open option.
The following window will pop up, indicating that the firmware file transfer is in progress.
If the firmware load was successful, the following window will appear:
Note
GE Multilin
3-67
3.5 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES The switch will automatically reboot after a successful firmware file transfer.
NOTE
3 HARDWARE
5.
Once the firmware has been successfully uploaded to the switch module, load the settings file using the procedure described earlier. 3.5.6 ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS
The following table provides details about Ethernet module self-test errors. Be sure to enable the ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL setting in the PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS menu and the relevant PORT 1 EVENTS through PORT 6 EVENTS settings under the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS ETHERNET SWITCH menu.
Table 320: ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS

ACTIVATION SETTING (SET AS ENABLED) ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL EVENT NAME ETHERNET MODULE OFFLINE EVENT CAUSE No response has been received from the Ethernet module after five successive polling attempts. POSSIBLE CAUSES Loss of switch power. IP/gateway/subnet. Incompatibility between the CPU and the switch module. UR port (port 7) configured incorrectly or blocked Switch IP address assigned to another device in the same network. Ethernet connection broken. An inactive ports events have been enabled. The G60 failed to see the switch module on power-up, because switch wont power up or is still powering up. To clear the fault, cycle power to the G60.
PORT 1 EVENTS to PORT 6 EVENTS No setting required; the G60 will read the state of a general purpose input/output port on the main CPU upon power-up and create the error if there is a conflict between the input/ output state and the order code.
ETHERNET PORT 1 OFFLINE to ETHERNET PORT 6 OFFLINE EQUIPMENT MISMATCH: Card XXX Missing
An active Ethernet port has returned a FAILED status. The G60 has not detected the presence of the Ethernet switch via the bus board.
3-68
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 INTRODUCTION
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device. The alternate human interface is implemented via the devices faceplate keypad and display (refer to the Faceplate interface section in this chapter). The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (off-line) or connected (on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device. In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time. The EnerVista UR Setup software, provided with every G60 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista UR Setup software interface features. The EnerVista UR Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface. 4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST To start using the EnerVista UR Setup software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting EnerVista UR Setup with the G60 section in Chapter 1 for details. 4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW a) ENGAGING A DEVICE The EnerVista UR Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with the G60 relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected from the UR-series of relays. b) USING SETTINGS FILES The EnerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings: In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays. While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then save the settings to the relay. You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings: Device definition Product setup System setup FlexLogic Grouped elements Control elements Inputs/outputs Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes. The following communications settings are not transferred to the G60 with settings files. Modbus Slave Address Modbus IP Port Number RS485 COM1 Baud Rate RS485 COM1 Parity COM1 Minimum Response Time
GE Multilin
4-1
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE RS485 COM2 Baud Rate RS485 COM2 Parity COM2 Minimum Response Time COM2 Selection RRTD Slave Address RRTD Baud Rate IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number Network Address NSAP IEC61850 Config GOOSE ConfRev c) CREATING AND EDITING FLEXLOGIC
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
You can create or edit a FlexLogic equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically generated logic diagram.
d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters. e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified parameters, via one of the following: Event Recorder facility: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest. Oscillography facility: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.
f) FILE SUPPORT Execution: Any EnerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu. Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target. New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabetically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device. g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES The firmware of a G60 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The corresponding instructions are provided by the EnerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic Upgrading Firmware. Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified. The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.
NOTE
4-2
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW
The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view. Main window menu bar. Main window tool bar. Site list control bar window. Settings list control bar window. Device data view windows, with common tool bar. Settings file data view windows, with common tool bar. Workspace area with data view tabs. Status bar.
10. Quick action hot links.
3 10 4
842786A2.CDR
Figure 41: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW
GE Multilin
4-3
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4.2EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES
Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An example of this is a substation that has ten similar feeders protected by ten UR-series F60 relays. In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so they are not available to users. For example, these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate on the specific settings. The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers installing the devices. These will be settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios. The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings will be visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings templates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality is identical for both purposes. The settings template feature requires that both the EnerVista UR Setup software and the G60 firmware are at versions 5.40 or higher.
NOTE
a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings template for UR-series settings files. 1. 2. Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Right-click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing mode. Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process. 1. 2. Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Right-click on the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The software will prompt for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be at least four characters in length. 3. Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode. b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic equation editor settings are locked. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template editing mode. Enter the template password then click OK. Open the relevant settings windows that contain settings to be specified as viewable.
4-4
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of the settings window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
Figure 42: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED 5. Specify which settings to make viewable by clicking on them. The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below.
Figure 43: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE 6. 7. Click on Save to save changes to the settings template. Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.
c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE It is highly recommended that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security. The following procedure describes how to add password protection to a settings file template. 1. 2. Select a settings file from the offline window on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Selecting the Template Mode > Password Protect Template option.
GE Multilin
4-5
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The software will prompt for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.
3.
Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The settings file template is now secured with password protection. When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It does not need to be added after the template is created.
NOTE
d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE
Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature: Display only those settings available for editing. Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out.
Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing. 1. 2. 3. Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option. Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command. The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve settings be available.
842858A1.CDR
Figure 44: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND
4-6
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.
Typical settings tree view without template applied.
Typical settings tree view with template applied via the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
842860A1.CDR
Figure 45: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template. 1. 2. 3. Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View All Settings option. Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings will be shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via the Template Mode > View All Settings command. The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve settings be available.
842859A1.CDR
Figure 46: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE It may be necessary at some point to remove a settings template. Once a template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and it will be necessary to define a new settings template. 1. 2. 3. Select an installed device or settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Select the Template Mode > Remove Settings Template option. Enter the template password and click OK to continue.
GE Multilin
4-7
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4. Verify one more time that you wish to remove the template by clicking Yes.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The EnerVista software will remove all template information and all settings will be available. 4.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of critical FlexLogic applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within FlexLogic equations. Secured FlexLogic equations will remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device. a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATION ENTRIES
The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation. 1. 2. Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the settings template feature. Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item. By default, all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on the upper right of the window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. 3. Specify which entries to lock by clicking on them. The locked entries will be displayed against a grey background as shown in the example below.
Figure 47: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE 4. 5. 6. Click on Save to save and apply changes to the settings template. Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template. Apply a password to the template then click OK to secure the FlexLogic equation.
4-8
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the FlexLogic entries not locked by the template. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic entries in the above procedure is shown below.
Typical FlexLogic entries without template applied.
Typical FlexLogic entries locked with template via the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
842861A1.CDR
Figure 48: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES The FlexLogic entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.
Figure 49: SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number. Once the desired FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific serial number. 1. 2. Select the settings file in the offline window. Right-click on the file and select the Edit Settings File Properties item.
GE Multilin
4-9
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES The following window is displayed.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Figure 410: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW
3.
Enter the serial number of the G60 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic equations are now locked to the G60 device specified by the serial number. 4.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a G60 device have been changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transfered to a G60 device, the date, time, and serial number of the G60 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This information can be compared with the G60 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised. The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the G60 device or obtained from the G60 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability information to the settings file.
SETTINGS FILE TRANSFERRED TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date are stored in the UR-series device.
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer date are added to the settings file when settings files are transferred to the device. Compare transfer dates in the settings file and the UR-series device to determine if security has been compromised.
SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND ADDED TO SETTINGS FILE.
842864A1.CDR
Figure 411: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.
4-10
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 1. 2.
The transfer date of a setting file written to a G60 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup. Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future will indicate if any changes have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to an G60 device. The G60 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings file device definition
4
842863A1.CDR
Figure 412: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings report
842862A1.CDR
Figure 413: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA
GE Multilin
4-11
4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The G60 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in online device actual values page
842865A1.CDR
Figure 414: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW This infomormation if also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE
c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES
The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is removed from the settings file. If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file. If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed from the settings file. If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings file.
4-12
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3FACEPLATE INTERFACE a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.3.1 FACEPLATE
The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules.
Five column LED indicator panel
Display Keypad
4
Front panel RS232 port
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 16
Figure 415: UR-SERIES ENHANCED FACEPLATE b) STANDARD FACEPLATE
842810A1.CDR
The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following figure shows the horizontal arrangement of the faceplate panels.
LED panel 1 LED panel 2 LED panel 3
Front panel RS232 port
Display
Small user-programmable (control) pushbuttons 1 to 7
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 12
Keypad
827801A7.CDR
Figure 416: UR-SERIES STANDARD HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS
GE Multilin
4-13
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
The following figure shows the vertical arrangement of the faceplate panels for relays ordered with the vertical option.
DISPLAY
MENU
HELP
MESSAGE
ESCAPE
KEYPAD
ENTER
VALUE
+/-
LED PANEL 3
4
STATUS
LED PANEL 2
EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY OTHER PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C NEUTRAL/GROUND
IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP
RESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3
LED PANEL 1
Figure 417: UR-SERIES STANDARD VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS 4.3.2 LED INDICATORS a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE The enhanced front panel display provides five columns of LED indicators. The first column contains 14 status and event cause LEDs, and the next four columns contain the 48 user-programmable LEDs. The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS INPUT/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC. The USER keys are not used in this unit.
Figure 418: TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE The status indicators in the first column are described below. IN SERVICE: This LED indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal systems are OK, and that the device has been programmed.
827830A1.CDR
842811A1.CDR
4-14
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES TROUBLE: This LED indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. TEST MODE: This LED indicates that the relay is in test mode.
TRIP: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This indicator always latches; as such, a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset. ALARM: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. This indicator is never latched. PICKUP: This LED indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
The event cause indicators in the first column are described below. Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either Enabled or Latched. If a protection element target setting is Enabled, then the corresponding event cause LEDs remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting is Latched, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset. All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B or C LEDs. This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B or C LEDs. VOLTAGE: This LED indicates voltage was involved. CURRENT: This LED indicates current was involved. FREQUENCY: This LED indicates frequency was involved. OTHER: This LED indicates a composite function was involved. PHASE A: This LED indicates phase A was involved. PHASE B: This LED indicates phase B was involved. PHASE C: This LED indicates phase C was involved. NEUTRAL/GROUND: This LED indicates that neutral or ground was involved.
The user-programmable LEDs consist of 48 amber LED indicators in four columns. The operation of these LEDs is userdefined. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. Default labels are shipped in the label package of every G60, together with custom templates. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels. User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels. b) STANDARD FACEPLATE The standard faceplate consists of three panels with LED indicators, keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS INPUT/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC. The USER keys are not used in this unit.
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY OTHER PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C NEUTRAL/GROUND
IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP
RESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3
842781A1.CDR
Figure 419: LED PANEL 1
GE Multilin
4-15
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE STATUS INDICATORS:
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the relay has been programmed. TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode. TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always latches; the reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset. ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is never latched. PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS: Events cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either Enabled or Latched. If a protection element target setting is Enabled, then the corresponding event cause LEDs remain on as long as operate operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting is Latched, then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is asserted and remain on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset. All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B or C LEDs. This includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, etc. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B or C LEDs. VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved. CURRENT: Indicates current was involved. FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved. OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved. PHASE A: Indicates phase A was involved. PHASE B: Indicates phase B was involved. PHASE C: Indicates phase C was involved. NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates that neutral or ground was involved.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE INDICATORS: The second and third provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
842782A1.CDR
Figure 420: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE) DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2: The default labels are intended to represent:
4-16
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group.
SYNCHROCHECK NO1(2) IN-SYNCH: Voltages have satisfied the synchrocheck element. Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support six setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight setting groups. Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.
NOTE
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-programmable LEDs section of chapter 5. The LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained in the following section.
4
842785A1.CDR
Figure 421: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABELS) 4.3.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE The following procedure requires the pre-requisites listed below. EnerVista UR Setup software is installed and operational. The G60 settings have been saved to a settings file. The G60 front panel label cutout sheet (GE Multilin part number 1006-0047) has been downloaded from http:// www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur and printed. Small-bladed knife.
This procedure describes how to create custom LED labels for the enhanced front panel display. 1. Start the EnerVista UR Setup software.
GE Multilin
4-17
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 2.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Select the Front Panel Report item at the bottom of the menu tree for the settings file. The front panel report window will be displayed.
4
Figure 422: FRONT PANEL REPORT WINDOW 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter the text to appear next to each LED and above each user-programmable pushbuttons in the fields provided. Feed the G60 front panel label cutout sheet into a printer and press the Print button in the front panel report window. When printing is complete, fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels. Remove the G60 label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures. These tabs will be used for removal of the default and custom LED labels. It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below, with the printed side containing the GE part number facing the user.
NOTE
The label package shipped with every G60 contains the three default labels shown below, the custom label template sheet, and the label removal tool. If the default labels are suitable for your application, insert them in the appropriate slots and program the LEDs to match them. If you require custom labels, follow the procedures below to remove the original labels and insert the new ones. The following procedure describes how to setup and use the label removal tool. 1. Bend the tabs at the left end of the tool upwards as shown below.
4-18
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 2. Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown below.
The following procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the G60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels. 1. Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath. Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from the relay.
2.
Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will attach the label tool to the LED label.
GE Multilin
4-19
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 3. Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown below.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.
Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs, as shown below.
The following procedure describes how to remove the user-programmable pushbutton labels from the G60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels. 1. Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath, as shown below. Make sure the bent tab is pointing away from the relay.
4-20
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 2.
Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will attach the label tool to the user-programmable pushbutton label.
3.
Remove the tool and attached user-programmable pushbutton label as shown below.
GE Multilin
4-21
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Slide the new user-programmable pushbutton label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the buttons, as shown below.
4
b) STANDARD FACEPLATE Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur/ This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x) edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling. 1. Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin part number: 1501-0014).
F60
FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY
Push in and gently lift up the cover.

842771A1.CDR
2.
Pop out the LED module and/or the blank module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the plastic covers.
( LED MODULE )
( BLANK MODULE )
F60
FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY
842722A1.CDR
3. 4.
Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side. Put the clear Lexan front cover back into place.
4-22
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES The following items are required to customize the G60 display module: Black and white or color printer (color preferred). Microsoft Word 97 or later software for editing the template.
1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069), and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015).
The following procedure describes how to customize the G60 display module: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required. When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use. Print the template(s) to a local printer. From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide. Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates. 4.3.4 DISPLAY All messages are displayed on a 2 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display. 4.3.5 KEYPAD Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets. The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups. The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad. The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values. 4.3.6 BREAKER CONTROL a) INTRODUCTION The G60 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker, which can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually initiated from faceplate keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic operand. A setting is provided to assign names to each breaker; this user-assigned name is used for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided for two breakers; the user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1. For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1(2) BREAKER FUNCTION setting is "Enabled" for each breaker. b) CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING Installations may require that a breaker is operated in the three-pole only mode (3-pole), or in the one and three-pole (1pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as three-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as one-pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be in agreement to indicate the position of the breaker. For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1(2) BREAKER 1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is Enabled for each breaker.
GE Multilin
4-23
4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE c) FACEPLATE (USER KEY) CONTROL
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state. d) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS For the following example setup, the (Name) field represents the user-programmed variable name. For this application (setup shown below), the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker 1 and breaker 2. The USER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker. ENTER COMMAND PASSWORD This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a is required; i.e. if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no commands have been issued within the last 30 minutes.
COMMAND PASSWORD
Press USER 1 To Select Breaker
This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This message will be maintained for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again. This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per items (1), (2) and (3) below: If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to close breaker 1. If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to open breaker 1. If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1), (2) and (3). Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers. Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2 or 3 at any time aborts the breaker control function.
BKR1-(Name) SELECTED USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP

(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON To Close BKR1-(Name)

(2)
USER 3 OFF/ON To Open BKR1-(Name)

(3)
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
e) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker 1 only. Operation for this application is identical to that described above for two breakers. 4.3.7 MENUS a) NAVIGATION Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages: Actual values. Settings. Commands. Targets. User displays (when enabled).
4-24
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES b) HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
PASSWORD SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted
SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION ACTUAL VALUES STATUS SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE UP and DOWN keys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header. From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once to display the first sub-header (Password Security). ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted PASSWORD SECURITY DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: 25% To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader, repeatedly press the MESSAGE DOWN key. The last message appears as shown. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for Display Properties. Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key will display the second setting sub-header associated with the Product Setup header. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for Password Security. Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key repeatedly will display the remaining setting messages for this sub-header. Press the MESSAGE LEFT key once to move back to the first sub-header message. Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page contains settings to configure the relay. Press the MENU key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers.
PASSWORD SECURITY
GE Multilin
4-25
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3.8 CHANGING SETTINGS
a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define what values are acceptable for a setting. FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s MINIMUM: MAXIMUM: 0.5 10.0 Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the HELP key again to view the next context sensitive help message. For example, select the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH setting.
MESSAGE TIME
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available. 0 to 9 and decimal point: The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A number is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display. VALUE keys: The VALUE UP key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE UP key again will allow the setting selection to continue upward from the minimum value. The VALUE DOWN key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE DOWN key again will allow the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value. As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate numeric keys in the sequence 2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are being entered. Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press ENTER to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear as confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places will be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.
FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 2.5 s NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is comprised of two or more members. ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command", "Setting", and "Factory Service".
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE UP key displays the next selection while the VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection. ACCESS LEVEL: Setting NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing ENTER stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation of the storing process. If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selection is displayed. Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.
c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
4-26
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages. For example: to enter the text, Breaker #1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press the decimal to enter text edit mode. Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position. Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1. Press ENTER to store the text. If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store new values.
d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.
To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed. SETTINGS SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP PASSWORD SECURITY DISPLAY PROPERTIES
INSTALLATION 5. 6.
RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed
After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the selection to "Programmed". Press the ENTER key. RELAY SETTINGS: Programmed NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED
RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed 7.
When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the In Service LED will turn on.
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS The G60 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.
GE Multilin
4-27
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality. To enter the initial setting (or command) password, proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD or CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD message appears on the display. PASSWORD SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No ENCRYPTED COMMAND PASSWORD: --------ENCRYPTED SETTING PASSWORD: --------5. 6. 7. 8. After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE UP or DOWN key to change the selection to Yes. Press the ENTER key and the display will prompt you to ENTER NEW PASSWORD. Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the ENTER key. When the VERIFY NEW PASSWORD is displayed, re-type in the same password and press ENTER. CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: Yes ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ########## VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ########## NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED 9. When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will be active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered. In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding encrypted password from the PASSWORD SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding. g) INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY When an incorrect command or setting password has been entered via the faceplate interface three times within a 3-minute time span, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and the G60 will not allow settings or command level access via the faceplate interface for the next five minutes, or in the event that an incorrect Command Or Set-
4-28
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
ting password has been entered via the any external communications interface three times within a 3-minute time span, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and the G60 will not allow settings or command access via the any external communications interface for the next five minutes. In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the any external communications interface three times within a three-minute time span, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and the G60 will not allow Settings or Command access via the any external communications interface for the next ten minutes. The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to Off after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout.
GE Multilin
4-29
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4-30
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW
5.1 OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU
SECURITY DISPLAY PROPERTIES CLEAR RELAY RECORDS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS USER MAP REAL TIME CLOCK USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA LOGGER USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS FLEX STATE PARAMETERS USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS DIRECT I/O TELEPROTECTION INSTALLATION
See page 5-8. See page 5-12. See page 5-14. See page 5-15. See page 5-37. See page 5-38. See page 5-39. See page 5-40. See page 5-42. See page 5-43. See page 5-46. See page 5-47. See page 5-48. See page 5-53. See page 5-54. See page 5-56. See page 5-64. See page 5-64.
SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP
AC INPUTS POWER SYSTEM SIGNAL SOURCES
See page 5-67. See page 5-68. See page 5-69.
GE Multilin
5-1
5.1 OVERVIEW BREAKERS SWITCHES FLEXCURVES PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXELEMENTS NON-VOLATILE LATCHES SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 SETTING GROUP 2
5 SETTINGS
See page 5-72. See page 5-76. See page 5-79. See page 5-86.
See page 5-124.
SETTING GROUP 6 SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS TRIP BUS SETTING GROUPS SELECTOR SWITCH UNDERFREQUENCY OVERFREQUENCY FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATION SYNCHROCHECK DIGITAL ELEMENTS
See page 5-211. See page 5-213. See page 5-214. See page 5-220. See page 5-221. See page 5-222. See page 5-224. See page 5-226. See page 5-231.
5-2
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS DIGITAL COUNTERS MONITORING ELEMENTS SETTINGS INPUTS / OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS RESETTING DIRECT INPUTS DIRECT OUTPUTS TELEPROTECTION IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS RTD INPUTS RRTD INPUTS DCMA OUTPUTS
5.1 OVERVIEW
See page 5-234. See page 5-236.
See page 5-237. See page 5-239. See page 5-240. See page 5-242. See page 5-243. See page 5-244. See page 5-245. See page 5-245. See page 5-246. See page 5-246. See page 5-247. See page 5-247. See page 5-250. See page 5-252. See page 5-253.
GE Multilin
5-3
5.1 OVERVIEW SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE FUNCTION: Disabled TEST MODE INITIATE: On FORCE CONTACT INPUTS FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS PMU TEST VALUES
5 SETTINGS
See page 5-265. See page 5-265. See page 5-266. See page 5-267. See page 5-268.
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS In the design of UR relays, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The comparator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to determine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as setting the flag. A single comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an operate flag when the input current has been at a level above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators use analog parameter actual values as the input. The exception to the above rule are the digital elements, which use logic states as inputs.
NOTE
Elements are arranged into two classes, grouped and control. Each element classed as a grouped element is provided with six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a grouped element is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a control element is independent of the selected active setting group. The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the inputs, settings, fixed logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F). Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities: pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity) For current elements, the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT. Where the current source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the base quantity will be the common secondary or primary current to which the sum is scaled (that is, normalized to the larger of the two rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1 = 300 / 5 A and CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the base quantity will be 5 A secondary or 300 A primary. For voltage elements the base quantity is the nominal primary voltage of the protected system which corresponds (based on VT ratio and connection) to secondary VT voltage applied to the relay. For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with 14400:120 V delta-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be: 13800 --------------- 120 = 115 V 14400 For wye-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be: 13800 --------------- 120 --------- = 66.4 V 14400 3 Many settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:
(EQ 5.2) (EQ 5.1)
5-4
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as Enabled. The factory default is Disabled. Once programmed to Enabled, any element associated with the function becomes active and all options become available. NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element. SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored. PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup. PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the pickup and operate output states. RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range. BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or flag not set. The comparator remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control. TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled, no target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to Self-Reset, the target message and LED indication follow the operate state of the element, and self-resets once the operate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET command is received by the relay. EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the pickup, dropout or operate states are recorded by the event recorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to Enabled, events are created for: (Element) PKP (pickup) (Element) DPO (dropout) (Element) OP (operate) The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0. 5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES
a) BACKGROUND The G60 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations. In these applications, each of the two three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can be used as an input to a breaker failure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may be required for the circuit relaying and metering functions. For a three-winding transformer application, it may be required to calculate watts and vars for each of three windings, using voltage from different sets of VTs. These requirements can be satisfied with a single UR, equipped with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting the parameter to measure. A mechanism is provided to specify the AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some metering elements. Selection of the parameter(s) to measure is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or protection/control comparator by identifying the type of parameter (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical component, total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.) to measure. The user completes the process by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to use and some of the parameters calculated from these channels. The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the summed currents of phase, 3I_0, and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio before summation. A mechanism called a source configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems. Sources, in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source contains all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may contain all or some of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage from a single VT for checking for synchronism.
GE Multilin
5-5
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS
To illustrate the concept of sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. In this application, the current flows as shown by the arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to some other location or power equipment, and some current flows into transformer winding 1. The current into winding 1 is the phasor sum (or difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum or difference is used depends on the relative polarity of the CT connections). The same considerations apply to transformer winding 2. The protection elements require access to the net current for transformer protection, but some elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.
CT1
through current
CT2
Winding 1 current
UR-series relay
Winding 1
Power transformer
Winding 2
CT3
CT4
827791A3.CDR
Figure 51: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME
In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summation are applied internally via configuration settings. A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device; for example, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection features that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure. Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device. The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be given a specific name through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the above diagram, the user configures one source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this source as Wdg1 I. Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the protection elements and as metered quantities. b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage, phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module. A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group, hereafter called a bank, and all four are either current or voltage, as are channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6, 7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.
5-6
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER --> CT/VT MODULE 1 < bank 1 > < bank 2 > CT/VT MODULE 2 < bank 3 > < bank 4 > CT/VT MODULE 3 < bank 5 > < bank 6 >
The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM CT/VT Module CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel) VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel) MAXIMUM NUMBER 2 8 4
c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of channels in a given product. The bank naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5. For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels. Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1, F5, M1, M5, U1, and U5. The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes. The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An application example of the grouping of parameters in a source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is measured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.
GE Multilin
5-7
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2PRODUCT SETUP a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY
5 SETTINGS 5.2.1 SECURITY
SECURITY
MESSAGE
ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS ACCESS SUPERVISION DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting, Factory Service (for factory use only)
See page 59. See page 510. See page 511.

Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Two levels of password security are provided via the ACCESS LEVEL setting: command and setting. The factory service level is not available and intended for factory use only. The following operations are under command password supervision: Changing the state of virtual inputs. Clearing the event records. Clearing the oscillography records. Changing the date and time. Clearing energy records. Clearing the data logger. Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states.
The following operations are under setting password supervision: Changing any setting. Test mode operation.
The command and setting passwords are defaulted to 0 when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is set to 0, the password security feature is disabled. The G60 supports password entry from a local or remote connection. Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality. When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the G60, the remote password must be used. If the connection is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password must be used. The PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder. The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout. The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands. ACCESS LOC SETG OFF: Asserted when local setting access is disabled. ACCESS LOC SETG ON: Asserted when local setting access is enabled. ACCESS LOC CMND OFF: Asserted when local command access is disabled.
5-8
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS ACCESS LOC CMND ON: Asserted when local command access is enabled. ACCESS REM SETG OFF: Asserted when remote setting access is disabled. ACCESS REM SETG ON: Asserted when remote setting access is enabled. ACCESS REM CMND OFF: Asserted when remote command access is disabled. ACCESS REM CMND ON: Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The appropriate events are also logged in the Event Recorder as well. The FlexLogic operands and events are updated every five seconds. A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of all the remote and local security operands shown above.
NOTE
b) LOCAL PASSWORDS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS

MESSAGE
CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No ENCRYPTED COMMAND PASSWORD: ---------ENCRYPTED SETTING PASSWORD: ----------
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 9999999999 Note: ---------- indicates no password Range: 0 to 9999999999 Note: ---------- indicates no password
MESSAGE
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters. When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to Yes via the front panel interface, the following message sequence is invoked: 1. 2. 3. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a Restricted setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to Setting and then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. Accessibility automatically reverts to the Restricted level according to the access level timeout setting values. If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD. If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and settings.
NOTE
c) REMOTE PASSWORDS The remote password settings are only visible from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Password Security menu item to open the remote password settings window.
Figure 52: REMOTE PASSWORD SETTINGS WINDOW
GE Multilin
5-9
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access. A command or setting password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters and are initially programmed to 0. The following procedure describes how the set the command or setting password. 1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field. Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field. Click the Change button. This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password. If the original password is not 0, then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send Password to Device button.
5.
The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the ENCRYPTED PASSWORD item.
5
If a command or setting password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding Encrypted Password value. d) ACCESS SUPERVISION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION
ACCESS SUPERVISION
MESSAGE
ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3 PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: 5 min
Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1
Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1
MESSAGE
The following access supervision settings are available. INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operands are set to On. These operands are returned to the Off state upon expiration of the lockout. PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the G60 will lockout password access after the number of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting has occurred.
The G60 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
5-10
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS RESET UNAUTHORIZED ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The operand does not generate events or targets. If events or targets are required, the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed with event logs or targets enabled. The access level timeout settings are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS

MESSAGE
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: 5 min SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: 30 min
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled. COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from the command password level. SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from the command password level.
e) DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS

MESSAGE
LOCAL SETTING AUTH: On REMOTE SETTING AUTH: On ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: 30 min.
Range: selected FlexLogic operands (see below)
Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface. The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only. LOCAL SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision. Valid values for the FlexLogic operands are either On (default) or any physical Contact Input ~~ On value. If this setting is On, then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this setting is any contact input on FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the local setting password to gain setting access. If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message is displayed on the front panel. REMOTE SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision. If this setting is On (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is required). If this setting is Off, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access. ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except On. The state of the FlexLogic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer programmed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
GE Multilin
5-11
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
The Remote Settings Authorization setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision. If this setting is On (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is required). If this setting is Off, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access. The Access Authorization Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. This setting is applicable when the Remote Settings Authorization setting is programmed to any operand except On or Off. The state of the FlexLogic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorization Timeout setting value is started. When this timer expires, remote setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds. 5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES
DISPLAY PROPERTIES
MESSAGE
LANGUAGE: English FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: 300 s DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: 25 % SCREEN SAVER FEATURE: Disabled SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: 30 min CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: 0.020 pu VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: 1.0 V
Range: English; English, French; English, Russian; English, Chinese (range dependent on order code) Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% Visible only if a VFD is installed Range: Disabled, Enabled Visible only if an LCD is installed Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1 Visible only if an LCD is installed Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings. LANGUAGE: This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. The range is dependent on the order code of the relay. FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates. DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values.
5-12
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness. SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the G60 has a liquid crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is Enabled, the LCD backlighting is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD backlighting is turned on. CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The G60 applies a cutoff value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off. VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The G60 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.
The CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The power cut-off level is calculated as shown below. For Delta connections: 3 CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary 3-phase power cut-off = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary For Wye connections: CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary 3-phase power cut-off = 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary per-phase power cut-off = CURRENT --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
(EQ 5.3)
(EQ 5.4)
(EQ 5.5)
where VT primary = VT secondary VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary CT ratio. For example, given the following settings:
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: 0.02 pu VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: 1.0 V PHASE CT PRIMARY: 100 A PHASE VT SECONDARY: 66.4 V PHASE VT RATIO: 208.00 : 1" PHASE VT CONNECTION: Delta.
We have: CT primary = 100 A, and VT primary = PHASE VT SECONDARY x PHASE VT RATIO = 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V The power cut-off is therefore: power cut-off = (CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL CT primary VT primary)/VT secondary = ( 3 0.02 pu 1.0 V 100 A 13811.2 V) / 66.4 V = 720.5 watts Any calculated power value below this cut-off will not be displayed. As well, the three-phase energy data will not accumulate if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut-off.
GE Multilin
5-13
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
NOTE
Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of 0.02 pu for CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and 1.0 V for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended. 5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS

MESSAGE
CLEAR USER REPORTS: Off CLEAR EVENT RECORDS: Off CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? No CLEAR DATA LOGGER: Off CLEAR ENERGY: Off RESET UNAUTH ACCESS: Off CLEAR DIR I/O STATS: Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: FlexLogic operand. Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic operands. Assigning user-programmable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since the G60 responds to rising edges of the configured FlexLogic operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect. Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-programmable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programmable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required. For example, to assign User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be applied. 1. Assign the clear demand function to Pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
2.
SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.20 s
Set the properties for User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT menu:
5-14
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
MESSAGE
SERIAL PORTS NETWORK MODBUS PROTOCOL DNP PROTOCOL DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL TFTP PROTOCOL IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL SNTP PROTOCOL EGD PROTOCOL ETHERNET SWITCH
See below. See page 517. See page 517. See page 518. See page 521. See page 522. See page 533. See page 533. See page 534. See page 534. See page 535. See page 536.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
b) SERIAL PORTS The G60 is equipped with up to three independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is fixed at 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type is selected when ordering: either an Ethernet or RS485 port. The rear COM2 port be used for either RS485 or RRTD communications.
GE Multilin
5-15
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS
5 SETTINGS
SERIAL PORTS
MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 BAUD RATE: 19200 RS485 COM1 PARITY: None RS485 COM1 RESPONSE MIN TIME: 0 ms COM2 USAGE: RS485 RRTD SLAVE ADDRESS: 254 RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE: 19200 RRTD BAUD RATE: 19200 RS485 COM2 PARITY: None RS485 COM2 RESPONSE MIN TIME: 0 ms
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only active if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: None, Odd, Even Only active if CPU Type E is ordered Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10 Only active if CPU Type E is ordered Range: RS485, RRTD only, GPM-F only, RRTD & GPM-F Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1. Shown only if the COM2 USAGE is RRTD only or RRTD & GPM-F. Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Shown only if the COM2 USAGE is setting is RS485. Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200. Shown only if the COM2 USAGE is setting is RRTD. Range: None, Odd, Even.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
MESSAGE
It is important that the baud rate and parity settings agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. The RS485 ports may be connected to a computer running EnerVista UR Setup. This software can download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports. The baud rate for standard RS485 communications can be selected as 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps. If COM2 is used for both a field ground module (GPM-F) and remote RTD unit (RRTD), then the RS482 COM2 BAUD RATE is fixed at 19200 bps. For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after each transmission.
NOTE
If the COM2 USAGE setting is RRTD only, then the COM2 port is used to monitor the RTDs on a remote RTD unit. The remote RTD unit uses the Modbus RTU protocol over RS485. The RRTD device must have a unique address from 1 to 254. The baud rate for RRTD communications can be selected as 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, or 19200 bps. If the RS485 COM2 port is used for an RRTD, GPM-F, or RRTD and GPM-F, then there must not be any other devices connected in the daisy-chain for any other purpose. The port is strictly dedicated to RRTD or GPM-F usage when COM2 USAGE is selected as RRTD only, GPM-F only, or RRTD & GPM-F. The field ground module (GPM-F) has a fixed slave address of 1. Therefore, the RRTD SLAVE ADDRESS setting is applicable only to the RRTD unit and has a setting rage of 2 to 254 if the COM2 USAGE is set as RRTD & GPM-F. Power must be cycled to the G60 for changes to the COM2 USAGE setting to take effect.
NOTE
5-16
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS c) NETWORK
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
NETWORK
MESSAGE
IP ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0 SUBNET IP MASK: 0.0.0.0 GATEWAY IP ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0 OSI NETWORK ADDRESS (NSAP) ETHERNET OPERATION MODE: Full-Duplex
Range: Standard IP address format Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: Standard IP address format Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: Standard IP address format Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: Select to enter the OSI NETWORK ADDRESS. Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex Not shown if CPU Type E or N is ordered.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
These messages appear only if the G60 is ordered with an Ethernet card. The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols. The NSAP address is used with the IEC 61850 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a setting for the TCP/UDP port number. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should normally be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple UR-series relays behind a router). By setting a different TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER for a given protocol on each UR-series relay, the router can map the relays to the same external IP address. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) must be configured to use the correct port number if these settings are used. When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP port number, or any user map setting (when used with DNP) is changed, it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-on).
NOTE
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER, as this will result in unreliable operation of those protocols.
WARNING
d) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MESSAGE
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS: 254 MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER: 502
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 operation (see descriptions below). This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the G60 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485 ports each G60 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol. Changes to the MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting will not take effect until the G60 is restarted.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-17
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP e) DNP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL
5 SETTINGS
DNP PROTOCOL
MESSAGE
DNP CHANNELS DNP ADDRESS: 65519 DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES DNP TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER: 20000 DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION: Disabled DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT: 5 s DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES: 10 DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS: 1 DNP CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP POWER SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP PF SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP OTHER SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP POWER DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP ENERGY DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP PF DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP OTHER DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD: 1440 min
Range: see sub-menu below
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
5-18
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE: 240 DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION: 2 DNP OBJECT 2 DEFAULT VARIATION: 2 DNP OBJECT 20 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP OBJECT 21 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP OBJECT 22 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP OBJECT 23 DEFAULT VARIATION: 2 DNP OBJECT 30 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CONTROL POINTS: 0 DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT: 120 s
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, 9, 10
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The G60 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The G60 can be used as a DNP slave device connected to multiple DNP masters (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the G60 maintains two sets of DNP data change buffers and connection information, two DNP masters can actively communicate with the G60 at one time. The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be simultaneously. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION setting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).
NOTE
The DNP Channels sub-menu is shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL DNP CHANNELS
DNP CHANNELS
MESSAGE
DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT: NETWORK DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT: COM2 - RS485
Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP, NETWORK - UDP Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP, NETWORK - UDP
The DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can be used only in non-Ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to Network - TCP, the DNP protocol can be used over TCP/IP on channels 1 or 2. When this value is set to Network - UDP, the DNP protocol can be used over UDP/IP on channel 1 only. Refer to Appendix E for additional information on the DNP protocol. Changes to the DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings will take effect only after power has been cycled to the relay.
NOTE
The DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS settings can force the G60 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters. The settings in this sub-menu are shown below.
GE Multilin
5-19
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES

MESSAGE
CLIENT ADDRESS 1: 0.0.0.0 CLIENT ADDRESS 2: 0.0.0.0 CLIENT ADDRESS 3: 0.0.0.0 CLIENT ADDRESS 4: 0.0.0.0 CLIENT ADDRESS 5: 0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be Disabled for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the G60 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the G60 retransmits an unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of 255 allows infinite re-tries. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the G60 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message. The DNP scale factor settings are numbers used to scale analog input point values. These settings group the G60 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for all analog input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to 1000, all DNP analog input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (for example, a value of 72000 V on the G60 will be returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (that is, the value will be 10 times larger). The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data. These settings group the G60 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolicited responses from the G60 when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP analog input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the G60, the default deadbands will be in effect. The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the G60. Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required. The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels. When the DNP data points (analog inputs and/or binary inputs) are configured for Ethernet-enabled relays, check the DNP Points Lists G60 web page to view the points lists. This page can be viewed with a web browser by entering the G60 IP address to access the G60 Main Menu, then by selecting the Device Information Menu > DNP Points Lists menu item.
NOTE
The DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION to DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION settings allow the user to select the DNP default variation number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Refer to the DNP implementation section in appendix E for additional details. The DNP binary outputs typically map one-to-one to IED data points. That is, each DNP binary output controls a single physical or virtual control point in an IED. In the G60 relay, DNP binary outputs are mapped to virtual inputs. However, some legacy DNP implementations use a mapping of one DNP binary output to two physical or virtual control points to support the concept of trip/close (for circuit breakers) or raise/lower (for tap changers) using a single control point. That is, the DNP master can operate a single point for both trip and close, or raise and lower, operations. The G60 can be configured to
5-20
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
support paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs. The DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CONTROL POINTS setting allows configuration of from 0 to 32 binary output paired controls. Points not configured as paired operate on a one-to-one basis. The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the G60 on a DNP communications link. Each DNP slave should be assigned a unique address. The DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection will be aborted by the G60. This frees up the connection to be re-used by a client. Relay power must be re-cycled after changing the DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting for the changes to take effect.
NOTE
f) DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LISTS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS
DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS

MESSAGE
BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS
The binary and analog inputs points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol, can configured to a maximum of 256 points. The value for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning FlexLogic operands for binary inputs / MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs / MME points. The menu for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS
BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS

MESSAGE
Point: Off Point: Off
0 1
MESSAGE
Point: Off
255
Up to 256 binary input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The points are configured by assigning an appropriate FlexLogic operand. Refer to the Introduction to FlexLogic section in this chapter for the full range of assignable operands. The menu for the analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS
ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS

MESSAGE
Point: Off Point: Off
0 1
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
MESSAGE
Point: Off
255
Up to 256 analog input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is configured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. Refer to Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for the full range of assignable parameters.
GE Multilin
5-21
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
NOTE
The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first Off value. Since DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first Off point are ignored. Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists will not take effect until the G60 is restarted.
NOTE
g) IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

MESSAGE
GSSE / GOOSE CONFIGURATION SERVER CONFIGURATION IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES MMXU DEADBANDS GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION GGIO2 CONTROL CONFIGURATION GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION GGIO5 UINTEGER CONFIGURATION REPORT CONTROL CONFIGURATION XCBR CONFIGURATION XSWI CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The G60 Generator Protection System is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability. This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details. The IEC 61850 protocol features are not available if CPU type E is ordered.
The G60 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by IEC 61850. MMS is supported over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over ethernet. The G60 operates as an IEC 61850 server. The Remote inputs and outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-to-peer GSSE/GOOSE message scheme. The GSSE/GOOSE configuration main menu is divided into two areas: transmission and reception.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION
GSSE / GOOSE CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE
TRANSMISSION RECEPTION
The main transmission menu is shown below:
5-22
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE... TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
MESSAGE
GENERAL GSSE FIXED GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The general transmission settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GSSE/GOOSE... TRANSMISSION GENERAL
GENERAL
DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME: 60 s
The DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME sets the time between GSSE or GOOSE messages when there are no remote output state changes to be sent. When remote output data changes, GSSE or GOOSE messages are sent immediately. This setting controls the steady-state heartbeat time interval. The DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME setting is applicable to GSSE, fixed G60 GOOSE, and configurable GOOSE. The GSSE settings are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GSSE/GOOSE... TRANSMISSION GSEE
GSSE
MESSAGE
GSSE FUNCTION: Enabled GSSE ID: GSSEOut DESTINATION MAC: 000000000000
Range: 65-character ASCII string
Range: standard MAC address
MESSAGE
These settings are applicable to GSSE only. If the fixed GOOSE function is enabled, GSSE messages are not transmitted. The GSSE ID setting represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE message. This string identifies the GSSE message to the receiving device. In G60 releases previous to 5.0x, this name string was represented by the RELAY NAME setting. The fixed GOOSE settings are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT... COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GSSE/GOOSE... TRANSMISSION FIXED GOOSE
FIXED GOOSE
MESSAGE
GOOSE FUNCTION: Disabled GOOSE ID: GOOSEOut DESTINATION MAC: 000000000000 GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY: 4 GOOSE VLAN ID: 0 GOOSE ETYPE APPID: 0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-23
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP These settings are applicable to fixed (DNA/UserSt) GOOSE only.
5 SETTINGS
The GOOSE ID setting represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each GOOSE message. This string identifies the GOOSE message to the receiving device. In revisions previous to 5.0x, this name string was represented by the RELAY NAME setting. The DESTINATION MAC setting allows the destination Ethernet MAC address to be set. This address must be a multicast address; the least significant bit of the first byte must be set. In G60 releases previous to 5.0x, the destination Ethernet MAC address was determined automatically by taking the sending MAC address (that is, the unique, local MAC address of the G60) and setting the multicast bit. The GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages. This allows GOOSE messages to have higher priority than other Ethernet data. The GOOSE ETYPE APPID setting allows the selection of a specific application ID for each GOOSE sending device. This value can be left at its default if the feature is not required. Both the GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY and GOOSE ETYPE APPID settings are required by IEC 61850. The configurable GOOSE settings are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS... COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GSSE... TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8)
CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION: Enabled CONFIG GSE 1 ID: GOOSEOut_1 CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC: 010CDC010000 CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY: 4 CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID: 0 CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID: CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV: 0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
1
Range: Aggressive, Medium, Relaxed, Heartbeat
MESSAGE
CONFIG GSE 1 RESTRANS CURVE: Relaxed CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS
MESSAGE
Range: 64 data items; each can be set to all valid MMS data item references for transmitted data
The configurable GOOSE settings allow the G60 to be configured to transmit a number of different datasets within IEC 61850 GOOSE messages. Up to eight different configurable datasets can be configured and transmitted. This is useful for intercommunication between G60 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850. The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the G60. The G60 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data transfer between devices. Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected. Datasets 1 and 2 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer tripping, blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in the required dataset to enable transmission of configured data. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 or 2 will not activate transmission. Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every 100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent. For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no changes in the data items are detected.
5-24
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE messages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message. The G60 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the G60 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a minimum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the G60 will continue to block transmission of the dataset. The G60 will assert the MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill self-test error message on the front panel display, where XXX denotes the data item detected as oscillating. For versions 5.70 and higher, the G60 supports four retransmission schemes: aggressive, medium, relaxed, and heartbeat. The aggressive scheme is only supported in fast type 1A GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 1 and GOOSEOut 2). For slow GOOSE messages (GOOSEOut 3 to GOOSEOut 8) the aggressive scheme is the same as the medium scheme. The details about each scheme are shown in the following table. Table 51: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEMES
SCHEME Aggressive SQ NUM 0 1 2 3 4 5 Medium 0 1 2 3 4 5 Relaxed 0 1 2 3 4 5 Heartbeat 0 1 2 3 4 5 TIME FROM THE EVENT 0 ms 4 ms 8 ms 16 ms Heartbeat Heartbeat 0 ms 16 ms 32 ms 64 ms Heartbeat Heartbeat 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 700 ms Heartbeat Heartbeat 0 ms Heartbeat Heartbeat Heartbeat Heartbeat Heartbeat TIME BETWEEN MESSAGES 0 ms 4 ms 4 ms 8 ms Heartbeat Heartbeat 0 ms 16 ms 16 ms 32 ms Heartbeat Heartbeat 0 ms 100 ms 100 ms 500 ms Heartbeat Heartbeat 0 ms Heartbeat Heartbeat Heartbeat Heartbeat Heartbeat COMMENT Event T1 T1 T2 T0 T0 Event T1 T1 T2 T0 T0 Event T1 T1 T2 T0 T0 Event T1 T1 T2 T0 T0 TIME ALLOWED TO LIVE IN MESSAGE 2000 ms 2000 ms 2000 ms Heartbeat * 4, 5 Heartbeat * 4, 5 Heartbeat * 4, 5 2000 ms 2000 ms 2000 ms Heartbeat * 4, 5 Heartbeat * 4, 5 Heartbeat * 4, 5 2000 ms 2000 ms 2000 ms Heartbeat * 4, 5 Heartbeat * 4, 5 Heartbeat * 4, 5 2000 ms 2000 ms 2000 ms Heartbeat * 4, 5 Heartbeat * 4, 5 Heartbeat * 4, 5
The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series IEDs. IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setup software can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (refer to the IEC 61850 IED configuration section later in this appendix). The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The general steps required for transmission configuration are:
GE Multilin
5-25
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 1. 2. 3. Configure the transmission dataset. Configure the GOOSE service settings. Configure the data.
5 SETTINGS
The general steps required for reception configuration are: 1. 2. 3. Configure the reception dataset. Configure the GOOSE service settings. Configure the data.
This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value. The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration. 1.
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE Set ITEM 1 to GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q to indicate quality flags for GGIO1 status indication 1. Set ITEM 2 to GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO1 status indication 1. Set ITEM 3 to MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f to indicate the analog frequency magnitude for MMXU1 (the metered frequency for SRC1).
The transmission dataset now contains a quality flag, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog value. The reception dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure.
2.
Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 settings menu: Set CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to Enabled. Set CONFIG GSE 1 ID to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is GOOSEOut_1). Set CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56). Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY; the default value of 4 is OK for this example. Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID value; the default value is 0, but some switches may require this value to be 1. Set the CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID value. This setting represents the ETHERTYPE application ID and must match the configuration on the receiver (the default value is 0). Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For this example it can be left at its default value.
3.
COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOsettings menu: Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to a FlexLogic operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example, a contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).
4.
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL MMXU DEADBANDS MMXU1 DEADBANDS
Configure the MMXU1 Hz Deadband by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION settings menu: Set MMXU1 HZ DEADBAND to 0.050%. This will result in an update to the MMXU1.MX.mag.f analog value with a change greater than 45 mHz, from the previous MMXU1.MX.mag.f value, in the source frequency.
The G60 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect. The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration. 1. Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu: Set ITEM 1 to GGIO3.ST.Ind1.q to indicate quality flags for GGIO3 status indication 1.
5-26
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Set ITEM 2 to GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO3 status indication 1. Set ITEM 3 to GGIO3.MX.AnIn1.mag.f to indicate the analog magnitude for GGIO3 analog input 1.
The reception dataset now contains a quality flag, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above. 2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1 settings menu: 3. Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter GOOSEOut_1. Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID to match the ETHERTYPE application ID from the transmitting device. This is 0 in the example above. Set the REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as GOOSEIn 1.
INPUT 1
Configure the Boolean data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE settings menu: Set REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE to GOOSEOut_1. Set REMOTE IN 1 ITEM to Dataset Item 2. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status item to remote input 1.
4.
INPUTS
Configure the analog data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOG settings menu: Set the IEC61850 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 DEFAULT VALUE to 60.000. Enter Hz for the IEC61850 GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1 UNITS setting.
The GOOSE analog input 1 can now be used as a FlexAnalog value in a FlexElement or in other settings. The G60 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect. The value of GOOSE analog input 1 in the receiving device will be determined by the MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f value in the sending device. This MMXU value is determined by the source 1 frequency value and the MMXU Hz deadband setting of the sending device. Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic equations or other settings. The G60 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect. The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a complete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software. For intercommunication between G60 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages. All GOOSE messages transmitted by the G60 (DNA/UserSt dataset and configurable datasets) use the IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging services (for example, VLAN support). Set the CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION function to Disabled when configuration changes are required. Once changes are entered, return the CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to Enabled and restart the unit for changes to take effect.
NOTE
PATH:...TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8) CONIFIG GSE 1(64) DATA TIMES ITEM 1(64)
CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS
ITEM 1: GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
Range: all valid MMS data item references for transmitted data
To create a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains an IEC 61850 Single Point Status indication and its associated quality flags, the following dataset items can be selected: GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal and GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q. The G60 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The status value for GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal is determined by the FlexLogic operand assigned to GGIO1 indication 1. Changes to this operand will result in the transmission of GOOSE messages containing the defined dataset.
GE Multilin
5-27
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The main reception menu is applicable to configurable GOOSE only and contains the configurable GOOSE dataset items for reception:
PATH:...RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8) CONIFIG GSE 1(64) DATA ITEMS
CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS
ITEM 1: GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal
Range: all valid MMS data item references for transmitted data
The configurable GOOSE settings allow the G60 to be configured to receive a number of different datasets within IEC 61850 GOOSE messages. Up to eight different configurable datasets can be configured for reception. This is useful for intercommunication between G60 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850. For intercommunication between G60 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages. To set up a G60 to receive a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains two IEC 61850 single point status indications, the following dataset items can be selected (for example, for configurable GOOSE dataset 1): GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal and GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal. The G60 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The Boolean status values from these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic operands. First, the REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) DATASET setting must be set to contain dataset GOOSEIn 1 (that is, the first configurable dataset). Then REMOTE IN 1(16) ITEM settings must be set to Dataset Item 1 and Dataset Item 2. These remote input FlexLogic operands will then change state in accordance with the status values of the data items in the configured dataset. Floating point analog values originating from MMXU logical nodes may be included in GOOSE datasets. Deadband (noninstantaneous) values can be transmitted. Received values are used to populate the GGIO3.XM.AnIn1 and higher items. Received values are also available as FlexAnalog parameters (GOOSE analog In1 and up). The main menu for the IEC 61850 server configuration is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL SERVER CONFIGURATION
SERVER CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
IED NAME: IECDevice LD INST: LDInst LOCATION: Location IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER: 102 INCLUDE NON-IEC DATA: Enabled SERVER SCANNING: Disabled
Range: up to 32 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The IED NAME and LD INST settings represent the MMS domain name (IEC 61850 logical device) where all IEC/MMS logical nodes are located. Valid characters for these values are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore (_) character, and the first character in the string must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard. The LOCATION is a variable string and can be composed of ASCII characters. This string appears within the PhyName of the LPHD node. The IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER setting allows the user to change the TCP port number for MMS connections. The INCLUDE NON-IEC DATA setting determines whether or not the UR MMS domain will be available. This domain contains a large number of UR-series specific data items that are not available in the IEC 61850 logical nodes. This data does not follow the IEC 61850 naming conventions. For communications schemes that strictly follow the IEC 61850 standard, this setting should be Disabled. The SERVER SCANNING feature should be set to Disabled when IEC 61850 client/server functionality is not required. IEC 61850 has two modes of functionality: GOOSE/GSSE inter-device communication and client/server communication. If the GOOSE/GSSE functionality is required without the IEC 61850 client server feature, then server scanning can be disabled to increase CPU resources. When server scanning is disabled, there will be not updated to the IEC 61850 logical node status values in the G60. Clients will still be able to connect to the server (G60 relay), but most data values will not be updated. This setting does not affect GOOSE/GSSE operation.
5-28
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Changes to the IED NAME setting, LD INST setting, and GOOSE dataset will not take effect until the G60 is restarted.
NOTE
The main menu for the IEC 61850 logical node name prefixes is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES

MESSAGE
PIOC LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES PTOC LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
MESSAGE
PTRC LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
The IEC 61850 logical node name prefix settings are used to create name prefixes to uniquely identify each logical node. For example, the logical node PTOC1 may have the name prefix abc. The full logical node name will then be abcMMXU1. Valid characters for the logical node name prefixes are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore (_) character, and the first character in the prefix must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard. Changes to the logical node prefixes will not take effect until the G60 is restarted. The main menu for the IEC 61850 MMXU deadbands is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL MMXU DEADBANDS
MMXU DEADBANDS
MESSAGE
MMXU1 DEADBANDS MMXU2 DEADBANDS MMXU3 DEADBANDS MMXU4 DEADBANDS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The MMXU deadband settings represent the deadband values used to determine when the update the MMXU mag and cVal values from the associated instmag and instcVal values. The mag and cVal values are used for the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reports. These settings correspond to the associated db data items in the CF functional constraint of the MMXU logical node, as per the IEC 61850 standard. According to IEC 61850-7-3, the db value shall represent the percentage of difference between the maximum and minimum in units of 0.001%. Thus, it is important to know the maximum value for each MMXU measured quantity, since this represents the 100.00% value for the deadband. The minimum value for all quantities is 0; the maximum values are as follows: phase current: 46 phase CT primary setting neutral current: 46 ground CT primary setting voltage: 275 VT ratio setting power (real, reactive, and apparent): 46 phase CT primary setting 275 VT ratio setting frequency: 90 Hz power factor: 2
GE Multilin
5-29
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP The GGIO1 status configuration points are shown below:
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE
NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1: 8 GGIO1 INDICATION Off GGIO1 INDICATION Off
MESSAGE
1 2
MESSAGE
GGIO1 INDICATION 128 Off
The NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting specifies the number of Ind (single point status indications) that are instantiated in the GGIO1 logical node. Changes to the NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting will not take effect until the G60 is restarted. The GGIO2 control configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GGIO2 CONTROL... GGIO2 CF SPSCO 1(64)
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1 CTLMODEL: 1
Range: 0, 1, or 2
The GGIO2 control configuration settings are used to set the control model for each input. The available choices are 0 (status only), 1 (direct control), and 2 (SBO with normal security). The GGIO2 control points are used to control the G60 virtual inputs. The GGIO4 analog configuration points are shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE
NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS IN GGIO4: GGIO4 ANALOG 1 MEASURED VALUE GGIO4 ANALOG 2 MEASURED VALUE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GGIO4 ANALOG 32 MEASURED VALUE
The NUMBER OF ANALOG POINTS setting determines how many analog data points will exist in GGIO4. When this value is changed, the G60 must be rebooted in order to allow the GGIO4 logical node to be re-instantiated and contain the newly configured number of analog points.
5-30
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS The measured value settings for each of the 32 analog values are shown below.
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT... COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GGIO4... GGIO4 ANALOG 1(32) MEASURED VALUE
GGIO4 ANALOG 1 MEASURED VALUE

MESSAGE
ANALOG IN Off ANALOG IN 0.000 ANALOG IN 0.000 ANALOG IN 0.000
1 VALUE: 1 DB: 1 MIN: 1 MAX:
Range: any FlexAnalog value
Range: 0.000 to 100.000 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
Range: 1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001 Range: 1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
These settings are configured as follows. ANALOG IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexAnalog value to drive the instantaneous value of each GGIO4 analog status value (GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.instMag.f). ANALOG IN 1 DB: This setting specifies the deadband for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 61850-7-3 for details. The deadband is used to determine when to update the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude. The deadband is a percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum values. ANALOG IN 1 MIN: This setting specifies the minimum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 61850-7-3 for details. This minimum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determination of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude. ANALOG IN 1 MAX: This setting defines the maximum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 61850-7-3 for details. This maximum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determination of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude. Note that the ANALOG IN 1 MIN and ANALOG IN 1 MAX settings are stored as IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point numbers. Because of the large range of these settings, not all values can be stored. Some values may be rounded to the closest possible floating point number.
NOTE
The GGIO5 integer configuration points are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GGIO5 ANALOG CONFIGURATION
GGIO5 UINTEGER CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE
GGIO5 UINT In Off GGIO5 UINT In Off
MESSAGE
1: 2:
Range: Off, any FlexInteger parameter
GGIO5 UINT 1n 16: Off
The GGIO5 logical node allows IEC 61850 client access to integer data values. This allows access to as many as 16 unsigned integer value points, associated timestamps, and quality flags. The method of configuration is similar to that of GGIO1 (binary status values). The settings allow the selection of FlexInteger values for each GGIO5 integer value point. It is intended that clients use GGIO5 to access generic integer values from the G60. Additional settings are provided to allow the selection of the number of integer values available in GGIO5 (1 to 16), and to assign FlexInteger values to the GGIO5 integer inputs. The following setting is available for all GGIO5 configuration points. GGIO5 UINT IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexInteger value to drive each GGIO5 integer status value (GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1). This setting is stored as an 32-bit unsigned integer value.
GE Multilin
5-31
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP The report control configuration settings are shown below:
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... REPORT... REPORT 1(6) CONFIGURATION
REPORT 1 CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
REPORT 1 RptID: REPORT 1 OptFlds: REPORT 1 BufTm: REPORT 1 TrgOps: REPORT 1 IntgPd: 0 0
MESSAGE
0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Changes to the report configuration will not take effect until the G60 is restarted. Please disconnect any IEC 61850 client connection to the G60 prior to making setting changes to the report configuration. Disconnecting the rear Ethernet connection from the G60 will disconnect the IEC 61850 client connection.
NOTE
The breaker configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL XCBR CONFIGURATION
XCBR CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND Off XCBR2 ST.LOC OPERAND Off
MESSAGE
XCBR6 ST.LOC OPERAND Off CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt: No CLEAR XCBR2 OpCnt: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CLEAR XCBR6 OpCnt: No
Range: No, Yes
The CLEAR XCBR1 OpCnt setting represents the breaker operating counter. As breakers operate by opening and closing, the XCBR operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent breaker operation may result in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to 0 for XCBR1.
5-32
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The disconnect switch configuration settings are shown below. Changes to these values will not take effect until the UR is restarted:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL XSWI CONFIGURATION
XSWI CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND Off XSWI2 ST.LOC OPERAND Off
MESSAGE
XSWI24 ST.LOC OPERAND Off CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt: No CLEAR XSWI2 OpCnt: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CLEAR XSWI24 OpCnt: No
Range: No, Yes
The CLEAR XSWI1 OpCnt setting represents the disconnect switch operating counter. As disconnect switches operate by opening and closing, the XSWI operating counter status attribute (OpCnt) increments with every operation. Frequent switch operation may result in very large OpCnt values over time. This setting allows the OpCnt to be reset to 0 for XSWI1. Since GSSE/GOOSE messages are multicast Ethernet by specification, they will not usually be forwarded by network routers. However, GOOSE messages may be fowarded by routers if the router has been configured for VLAN functionality.
NOTE
h) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
HTTP TCP PORT NUMBER: 80
The G60 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox. This feature is available only if the G60 has the ethernet option installed. The web pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the G60 Main Menu. Web pages are available showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, event records, fault reports, etc. The web pages can be accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The main menu will be displayed in the web browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the G60 into the Address box on the web browser. i) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS TFTP PROTOCOL
TFTP PROTOCOL
MESSAGE
TFTP MAIN UDP PORT NUMBER: 69 TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1 NUMBER: 0 TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2 NUMBER: 0
MESSAGE
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the G60 over a network. The G60 operates as a TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file obtained from the G60 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).
GE Multilin
5-33
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP j) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
5 SETTINGS
IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

MESSAGE
IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION: Disabled IEC TCP PORT NUMBER: 2404 IEC NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES IEC COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU: 0 IEC CYCLIC DATA PERIOD: 60 s IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC POWER DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC ENERGY DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC OTHER DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE
The G60 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The G60 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to a maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the G60 maintains two sets of IEC 60870-5-104 data change buffers, no more than two masters should actively communicate with the G60 at one time. The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the G60 analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, to trigger spontaneous responses from the G60 when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the G60, the default thresholds will be in effect. The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be used simultaneously. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION setting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).
NOTE
k) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SNTP PROTOCOL
SNTP PROTOCOL
MESSAGE
SNTP FUNCTION: Disabled SNTP SERVER IP ADDR: 0.0.0.0 SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER: 123
Range: Standard IP address format
MESSAGE
The G60 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the G60 can obtain clock time over an Ethernet network. The G60 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported.
5-34
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the G60 clock for as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the G60 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad. To use SNTP in unicast mode, SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is set and SNTP FUNCTION is Enabled, the G60 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the G60 clock is closely synchronized with the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to two minutes for the G60 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline. To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting to 0.0.0.0 and SNTP FUNCTION to Enabled. The G60 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the all ones broadcast address for the subnet. The G60 waits up to eighteen minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error. The UR-series relays do not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality. l) EGD PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS EGD PROTOCOL
EGD PROTOCOL
MESSAGE
FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION SLOW PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION SLOW PROD EXCH 2 CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE
The G60 Generator Protection System is provided with optional Ethernet Global Data (EGD) communications capability. This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details. The Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol feature is not available if CPU Type E is ordered. The relay supports one fast Ethernet Global Data (EGD) exchange and two slow EGD exchanges. There are 20 data items in the fast-produced EGD exchange and 50 data items in each slow-produced exchange. Ethernet Global Data (EGD) is a suite of protocols used for the real-time transfer of data for display and control purposes. The relay can be configured to produce EGD data exchanges, and other devices can be configured to consume EGD data exchanges. The number of produced exchanges (up to three), the data items in each exchange (up to 50), and the exchange production rate can be configured. EGD cannot be used to transfer data between UR-series relays. The relay supports EGD production only. An EGD exchange will not be transmitted unless the destination address is non-zero, and at least the first data item address is set to a valid Modbus register address. Note that the default setting value of 0 is considered invalid. The settings menu for the fast EGD exchange is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS EGD PROTOCOL FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION
FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE
EXCH 1 FUNCTION: Disable EXCH 1 DESTINATION: 0.0.0.0 EXCH 1 DATA RATE: 1000 ms EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1: 0
Range: Disable, Enable
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register address range)
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 20: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register address range)
GE Multilin
5-35
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Fast exchanges (50 to 1000 ms) are generally used in control schemes. The G60 has one fast exchange (Exchange 1) and two slow exchanges (Exchanges 2 and 3). The settings menu for the slow EGD exchanges is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS EGD PROTOCOL SLOW PROD EXCH 1(2) CONFIGURATION
SLOW PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE
EXCH 1 FUNCTION: Disable EXCH 1 DESTINATION: 0.0.0.0 EXCH 1 DATA RATE: 1000 ms EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1: 0
Range: Disable, Enable
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register address range in decimal)
MESSAGE
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 50: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register address range in decimal)
Slow EGD exchanges (500 to 1000 ms) are generally used for the transfer and display of data items. The settings for the fast and slow exchanges are described below: EXCH 1 DESTINATION: This setting specifies the destination IP address of the produced EGD exchange. This is usually unicast or broadcast. EXCH 1 DATA RATE: This setting specifies the rate at which this EGD exchange is transmitted. If the setting is 50 ms, the exchange data will be updated and sent once every 50 ms. If the setting is 1000 ms, the exchange data will be updated and sent once per second. EGD exchange 1 has a setting range of 50 to 1000 ms. Exchanges 2 and 3 have a setting range of 500 to 1000 ms. EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1 to 20/50: These settings specify the data items that are part of this EGD exchange. Almost any data from the G60 memory map can be configured to be included in an EGD exchange. The settings are the starting Modbus register address for the data item in decimal format. Refer to Appendix B for the complete Modbus memory map. Note that the Modbus memory map displays shows addresses in hexadecimal format; as such, it will be necessary to convert these values to decimal format before entering them as values for these setpoints. To select a data item to be part of an exchange, it is only necessary to choose the starting Modbus address of the item. That is, for items occupying more than one Modbus register (for example, 32 bit integers and floating point values), only the first Modbus address is required. The EGD exchange configured with these settings contains the data items up to the first setting that contains a Modbus address with no data, or 0. That is, if the first three settings contain valid Modbus addresses and the fourth is 0, the produced EGD exchange will contain three data items. m) ETHERNET SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS ETHERNET SWITCH
ETHERNET SWITCH
MESSAGE
SWITCH IP ADDRESS: 127.0.0.1 SWITCH MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER: 502 PORT 1 EVENTS: Disabled PORT 2 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: standard IP address format
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PORT 6 EVENTS: Disabled
5-36
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS These settings appear only if the G60 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module (type 2S or 2T).
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The IP address and Modbus TCP port number for the Ethernet switch module are specified in this menu. These settings are used in advanced network configurations. Please consult the network administrator before making changes to these settings. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) is the preferred interface to configure these settings. The PORT 1 EVENTS through PORT 6 EVENTS settings allow Ethernet switch module events to be logged in the event recorder. 5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP MODBUS USER MAP
MODBUS USER MAP

MESSAGE
ADDRESS VALUE: ADDRESS VALUE:
1: 0 2: 0
0 0
MESSAGE
ADDRESS 256: VALUE: 0
The Modbus user map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired address in the ADDRESS line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is displayed in the VALUE line. A value of 0 in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous ADDRESS lines incremented by 1. An address value of 0 in the initial register means none and values of 0 will be displayed for all registers. Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
GE Multilin
5-37
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK
REAL TIME CLOCK

MESSAGE
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE: None REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS: Disabled LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC: 0.0 hrs DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME: Disabled DST START MONTH: April DST START DAY: Sunday DST START DAY INSTANCE: First DST START HOUR: 2:00 DST STOP MONTH: April DST STOP DAY: Sunday DST STOP DAY INSTANCE: First DST STOP HOUR: 2:00
Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
Range: 24.0 to 24.0 hrs in steps of 0.5
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: January to December (all months)
MESSAGE
Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
MESSAGE
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
MESSAGE
Range: 0:00 to 23:00
MESSAGE
Range: January to December (all months)
MESSAGE
Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
MESSAGE
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
MESSAGE
Range: 0:00 to 23:00
MESSAGE
The date and time can be synchronized a known time base and to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately 1 minute per month. If an IRIG-B signal is connected to the relay, only the current year needs to be entered. See the COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME menu to manually set the relay clock. The REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record. The LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC setting is used to specify the local time zone offset from Universal Coordinated Time (Greenwich Mean Time) in hours. This setting has two uses. When the G60 is time synchronized with IRIG-B, or has no permanent time synchronization, the offset is used to calculate UTC time for IEC 61850 features. When the G60 is time synchronized with SNTP, the offset is used to determine the local time for the G60 clock, since SNTP provides UTC time. The daylight savings time (DST) settings can be used to allow the G60 clock can follow the DST rules of the local time zone. Note that when IRIG-B time synchronization is active, the DST settings are ignored. The DST settings are used when the G60 is synchronized with SNTP, or when neither SNTP nor IRIG-B is used. Only timestamps in the event recorder and communications protocols are affected by the daylight savings time settings. The reported real-time clock value does not change.
NOTE
5-38
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1(2)
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1

MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Off FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Off FAULT REPORT 1 #1: Off FAULT REPORT 1 #2: Off
MESSAGE
Range: Off, any actual value analog parameter
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT 1 #32: Off
When enabled, this function monitors the pre-fault trigger. The pre-fault data are stored in the memory for prospective creation of the fault report on the rising edge of the pre-fault trigger. The element waits for the fault trigger as long as the prefault trigger is asserted, but not shorter than 1 second. When the fault trigger occurs, the fault data is stored and the complete report is created. If the fault trigger does not occur within 1 second after the pre-fault trigger drops out, the element resets and no record is created. The user programmable record contains the following information: the user-programmed relay name, detailed firmware revision (5.8x, for example) and relay model (G60), the date and time of trigger, the name of pre-fault trigger (a specific FlexLogic operand), the name of fault trigger (a specific FlexLogic operand), the active setting group at pre-fault trigger, the active setting group at fault trigger, pre-fault values of all programmed analog channels (one cycle before pre-fault trigger), and fault values of all programmed analog channels (at the fault trigger). Each fault report is stored as a file to a maximum capacity of ten files. An eleventh trigger overwrites the oldest file. The EnerVista UR Setup software is required to view all captured data. A FAULT RPT TRIG event is automatically created when the report is triggered. The relay includes two user-programmable fault reports to enable capture of two types of trips (for example, trip from thermal protection with the report configured to include temperatures, and short-circuit trip with the report configured to include voltages and currents). Both reports feed the same report file queue. The last record is available as individual data items via communications protocols. PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the pre-fault data. The rising edge of this operand stores one cycle-old data for subsequent reporting. The element waits for the fault trigger to actually create a record as long as the operand selected as PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER is On. If the operand remains Off for 1 second, the element resets and no record is created. FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the fault data. The rising edge of this operand stores the data as fault data and results in a new report. The trigger (not the pre-fault trigger) controls the date and time of the report. FAULT REPORT 1 #1 to FAULT REPORT 1 #32: These settings specify an actual value such as voltage or current magnitude, true RMS, phase angle, frequency, temperature, etc., to be stored should the report be created. Up to 32 channels can be configured. Two reports are configurable to cope with variety of trip conditions and items of interest.
GE Multilin
5-39
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF RECORDS: 5 TRIGGER MODE: Automatic Overwrite TRIGGER POSITION: 50% TRIGGER SOURCE: Off AC INPUT WAVEFORMS: 16 samples/cycle DIGITAL CHANNELS ANALOG CHANNELS
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger. Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records may be captured simultaneously. The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sample configurations with corresponding cycles/record. Table 52: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE
RECORDS 1 1 8 8 8 8 8 8 32 CT/VTS 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 SAMPLE RATE 8 16 16 16 16 16 32 64 64 DIGITALS 0 16 16 16 16 64 64 64 64 ANALOGS 0 0 0 4 4 16 16 16 16 CYCLES/ RECORD 1872.0 1685.0 276.0 219.5 93.5 93.5 57.6 32.3 9.5
A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if TRIGGER MODE is set to Automatic Overwrite. Set the TRIGGER POSITION to a percentage of the total buffer size (for example, 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be any FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle. The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (that is, current and voltage) are stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle; that is, it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
5-40
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records will be CLEARED.
WARNING
b) DIGITAL CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY DIGITAL CHANNELS
DIGITAL CHANNELS
MESSAGE
DIGITAL CHANNEL Off DIGITAL CHANNEL Off
1: 2:
MESSAGE
DIGITAL CHANNEL 63: Off
A DIGITAL 1(63) CHANNEL setting selects the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. c) ANALOG CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY ANALOG CHANNELS
ANALOG CHANNELS
MESSAGE
ANALOG CHANNEL Off ANALOG CHANNEL Off
1: 2:
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A for complete list. Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A for complete list.
MESSAGE
ANALOG CHANNEL 16: Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A for complete list.
These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: The type of relay, The type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and The type and number of analog input hardware modules installed.
Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad and display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed. All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows: <slot_letter><terminal_number><I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input> The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB designates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F. If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will appear.
GE Multilin
5-41
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.2.9 DATA LOGGER
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER MODE: Continuous DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: Off DATA LOGGER RATE: 60000 ms DATA LOGGER CHNL Off DATA LOGGER CHNL Off
MESSAGE
Range: Continuous, Trigger
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
1: 2:
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list. Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL 16: Off DATA LOGGER CONFIG: 0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list. Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only
MESSAGE
The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data may be downloaded to EnerVista UR Setup and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis. All data is stored in non-volatile memory, meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is lost. For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use. Example storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz are shown in the following table. Table 53: DATA LOGGER STORAGE CAPACITY EXAMPLE
SAMPLING RATE 15 ms CHANNELS 1 8 9 16 1000 ms 1 8 9 16 60000 ms 1 8 9 16 3600000 ms 1 8 9 DAYS 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.7 0.1 0.1 0.1 45.4 5.6 5 2.8 2727.5 340.9 303 STORAGE CAPACITY 954 s 120 s 107 s 60 s 65457 s 8182 s 7273 s 4091 s 3927420 s 490920 s 436380 s 254460 s 235645200 s 29455200 s 26182800 s
Changing any setting affecting data logger operation will clear any data that is currently in the log.
NOTE
DATA LOGGER MODE: This setting configures the mode in which the data logger will operate. When set to Continuous, the data logger will actively record any configured channels at the rate as defined by the DATA LOGGER RATE. The
5-42
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
data logger will be idle in this mode if no channels are configured. When set to Trigger, the data logger will begin to record any configured channels at the instance of the rising edge of the DATA LOGGER TRIGGER source FlexLogic operand. The data logger will ignore all subsequent triggers and will continue to record data until the active record is full. Once the data logger is full a CLEAR DATA LOGGER command is required to clear the data logger record before a new record can be started. Performing the CLEAR DATA LOGGER command will also stop the current record and reset the data logger to be ready for the next trigger. DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any FlexLogic operand can be used as the trigger source. The DATA LOGGER TRIGGER setting only applies when the mode is set to Trigger. DATA LOGGER RATE: This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded. DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16): This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of the data log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/ VT hardware modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is shown in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad/display entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed. DATA LOGGER CONFIG: This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not selected to Off without over-writing old data. 5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
5
See below See page 545. See page 545.
MESSAGE
LED TEST TRIP & ALARM LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED48
b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS LED TEST
LED TEST
MESSAGE
LED TEST FUNCTION: Disabled LED TEST CONTROL: Off
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
When enabled, the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-programmable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all LEDs, including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons. The test consists of three stages. 1. All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is burned. This stage lasts as long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.
GE Multilin
5-43
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 2.
5 SETTINGS
All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time. All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
3.
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and stores the actual LED states (on or off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting from relay response during testing. The reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress. A dedicated FlexLogic operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is initiated, the LED TEST INITIATED event is stored in the event recorder. The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and stages 2 and 3 can be interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.
READY TO TEST
Reset the LED TEST IN PROGRESS operand
rising edge of the control input
Start the software image of the LEDs
Restore the LED states from the software image
Set the LED TEST IN PROGRESS operand control input is on
STAGE 1 (all LEDs on)

dropping edge of the control input Wait 1 second
time-out (1 minute)
STAGE 2 (one LED on at a time)
Wait 1 second
STAGE 3 (one LED off at a time)
842011A1.CDR
Figure 53: LED TEST SEQUENCE APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1: Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is burned through user-programmable pushbutton 1. The following settings should be applied. Configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.10 s
5-44
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Configure the LED test to recognize user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: Enabled LED TEST CONTROL: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
The test will be initiated when the user-programmable pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then automatically start stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton. APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2: Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are burned as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1. After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next, release the pushbutton to automatically start stage 2. Once stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When stage 2 is completed, stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton. c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS TRIP & ALARM LEDS
TRIP & ALARM LEDS

MESSAGE
TRIP LED INPUT: Off ALARM LED INPUT: Off
The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced faceplate) and on LED panel 1 (standard faceplate). Each indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state. d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1
MESSAGE
LED 1 OPERAND: Off LED 1 TYPE: Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state. For the standard faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows. LED Panel 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 24 LED Panel 3: user programmable LEDs 25 through 48
For the enhanced faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows. LED column 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 12 LED column 3: user-programmable LEDs 13 through 24 LED column 4: user-programmable LEDs 25 through 36 LED column 5: user-programmable LEDs 37 through 48
Refer to the LED indicators section in chapter 4 for additional information on the location of these indexed LEDs. The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is Self-Reset (the default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is Latched, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
GE Multilin
5-45
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Table 54: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

SETTING LED 1 operand LED 2 operand LED 3 operand LED 4 operand LED 5 operand LED 6 operand LED 7 operand LED 8 operand LED 9 operand LED 10 operand LED 11 operand LED 12 operand PARAMETER SETTING GROUP ACT 1 SETTING GROUP ACT 2 SETTING GROUP ACT 3 SETTING GROUP ACT 4 SETTING GROUP ACT 5 SETTING GROUP ACT 6 Off Off Off Off Off Off SETTING LED 13 operand LED 14 operand LED 15 operand LED 16 operand LED 17 operand LED 18 operand LED 19 operand LED 20 operand LED 21 operand LED 22 operand LED 23 operand LED 24 operand PARAMETER Off Off Off Off SYNC 1 SYNC OP SYNC 2 SYNC OP Off Off Off Off Off Off
Refer to the Control of setting groups example in the Control elements section of this chapter for group activation. 5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS

MESSAGE
DIRECT RING BREAK FUNCTION: Enabled DIRECT DEVICE OFF FUNCTION: Enabled REMOTE DEVICE OFF FUNCTION: Enabled PRI. ETHERNET FAIL FUNCTION: Disabled SEC. ETHERNET FAIL FUNCTION: Disabled BATTERY FAIL FUNCTION: Enabled SNTP FAIL FUNCTION: Enabled IRIG-B FAIL FUNCTION: Enabled ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with Direct Input/Output module. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with Direct Input/Output module. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a CPU with Ethernet capability. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a CPU with a primary fiber port. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a CPU with a redundant fiber port. Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a CPU with Ethernet capability. Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic operands, events, and targets. Most of the minor alarms can be disabled if desired. When in the Disabled mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic operand, write to the event recorder, or display target messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in the Enabled mode, minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay self-tests section in chapter 7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms. To enable the Ethernet switch failure function, ensure that the ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL FUNCTION is Enabled in this menu.
NOTE
5-46
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.12 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
MESSAGE
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: Disabled
There are three standard control pushbuttons, labeled USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3, on the standard and enhanced front panels. These are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays. The location of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following figures.
Control pushbuttons
842813A1.CDR
Figure 54: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE) An additional four control pushbuttons are included on the standard faceplate when the G60 is ordered with the twelve user-programmable pushbutton option.
STATUS IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY OTHER PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3 USER 2 USER 1 RESET
THREE STANDARD CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
USER 4 USER 5 USER 6 USER 7
FOUR EXTRA OPTIONAL CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
842733A2.CDR
Figure 55: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE) Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password. However, by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for security reasons. Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand. These operands should be configured appropriately to perform the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation will be recognized by various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs. An event is logged in the event record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed. No event is logged when the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously a given key must be released before the next one can be pressed.
GE Multilin
5-47
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Enabled=1 SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP/ BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/ BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL: Enabled=1 SYSTEM SETUP/ BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/ BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL: Enabled=1
When applicable
AND
RUN OFF ON TIMER 0 100 msec FLEXLOGIC OPERAND CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON 842010A2.CDR
Figure 56: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC 5.2.13 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1(16)
USER PUSHBUTTON 1
MESSAGE
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: 0.0 s PUSHBTN 1 SET: Off PUSHBTN 1 RESET: Off PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: Disabled PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY: 1.0 s PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: Off PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: Off PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: Off PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: Disabled PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Normal, High Priority
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5-48
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The optional user-programmable pushbuttons (specified in the order code) provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. The number of available pushbuttons is dependent on the faceplate module ordered with the relay. Type P faceplate: standard horizontal faceplate with 12 user-programmable pushbuttons. Type Q faceplate: enhanced horizontal faceplate with 16 user-programmable pushbuttons.
The digital state can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton) or remotely (via FlexLogic operands) into FlexLogic equations, protection elements, and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, and setting groups changes. The user-programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of password protection. The user-configurable pushbuttons for the enhanced faceplate are shown below.
USER LABEL 1
USER LABEL 2
USER LABEL 3
USER LABEL 4
USER LABEL 5
USER LABEL 6
USER LABEL 7
USER LABEL 8
USER LABEL 9
USER LABEL 10
USER LABEL 11
USER LABEL 12
USER LABEL 13
USER LABEL 14
USER LABEL 15
USER LABEL 16
842814A1.CDR
Figure 57: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE) The user-configurable pushbuttons for the standard faceplate are shown below.
1
USER LABEL
3
USER LABEL
5
USER LABEL
7
USER LABEL
9
USER LABEL
11
USER LABEL
2
USER LABEL
4
USER LABEL
6
USER LABEL
8
USER LABEL
10
USER LABEL
12
USER LABEL
842779A1.CDR
Figure 58: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE) Both the standard and enhanced faceplate pushbuttons can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, available online at http://www.GEmultilin.com. The EnerVista UR Setup software can also be used to create labels for the enhanced faceplate. Each pushbutton asserts its own On and Off FlexLogic operands (for example, PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF). These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific actions. If any pushbutton is active, the ANY PB ON operand will be asserted. Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of the corresponding pushbutton (on or off). However, each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic operand through the PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL setting. The pushbuttons can be automatically controlled by activating the operands assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET (for latched and self-reset mode) and PUSHBTN 1 RESET (for latched mode only) settings. The pushbutton reset status is declared when the PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand is asserted. The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons is dependent on whether latched or self-reset mode is programmed. Latched mode: In latched mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting or by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton. The pushbutton maintains the set state until deactivated by the reset command or after a user-specified time delay. The state of each pushbutton is stored in non-volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power. The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET setting or by directly pressing the associated active front panel pushbutton.
GE Multilin
5-49
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY settings. These settings enable the autoreset timer and specify the associated time delay. The autoreset timer can be used in select-before-operate (SBO) breaker control applications, where the command type (close/open) or breaker location (feeder number) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must reset automatically if control is not executed within a specified time period. Self-reset mode: In self-reset mode, a pushbutton will remain active for the time it is pressed (the pulse duration) plus the dropout time specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting. If the pushbutton is activated via FlexLogic, the pulse duration is specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME only. The time the operand remains assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting has no effect on the pulse duration.
TIME
The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in self-reset mode when the dropout delay specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT setting expires. The pulse duration of the remote set, remote reset, or local pushbutton must be at least 50 ms to operate the pushbutton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to properly operate during power cycling events and various system disturbances that may cause transient assertion of the operating signals.
NOTE
The local and remote operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL and PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE settings, respectively. If local locking is applied, the pushbutton will ignore set and reset commands executed through the front panel pushbuttons. If remote locking is applied, the pushbutton will ignore set and reset commands executed through FlexLogic operands. The locking functions are not applied to the autorestart feature. In this case, the inhibit function can be used in SBO control operations to prevent the pushbutton function from being activated and ensuring one-at-a-time select operation. The locking functions can also be used to prevent the accidental pressing of the front panel pushbuttons. The separate inhibit of the local and remote operation simplifies the implementation of local/remote control supervision.
Pushbutton states can be logged by the event recorder and displayed as target messages. In latched mode, user-defined messages can also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is on or changing to off. PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to Disabled, the pushbutton is not active and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both On and Off) are de-asserted. If set to SelfReset, the control logic is activated by the pulse (longer than 100 ms) issued when the pushbutton is being physically pressed or virtually pressed via a FlexLogic operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting. When in Self-Reset mode and activated locally, the pushbutton control logic asserts the On corresponding FlexLogic operand as long as the pushbutton is being physically pressed, and after being released the deactivation of the operand is delayed by the drop out timer. The Off operand is asserted when the pushbutton element is deactivated. If the pushbutton is activated remotely, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the corresponding On FlexLogic operand only for the time period specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting. If set to Latched, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between On and Off on each button press or by virtually activating the pushbutton (assigning set and reset operands). When in the Latched mode, the states of the FlexLogic operands are stored in a non-volatile memory. Should the power supply be lost, the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay. PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the User-definable displays section for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad. PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is in the on position. Refer to the User-definable displays section for instructions on entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad. PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the on to the off position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Latched. This message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Self-reset as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be Off upon its release. The length of the Off message is configured with the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: This setting specifies the time required for a pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed active. This timer is reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that any pushbutton operation will require the pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 50 ms. This minimum time is required prior to activating the pushbutton hold timer.
5-50
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
PUSHBTN 1 SET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to operate the pushbutton element and to assert PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand. The duration of the incoming set signal must be at least 100 ms. PUSHBTN 1 RESET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to reset pushbutton element and to assert PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand. This setting is applicable only if pushbutton is in latched mode. The duration of the incoming reset signal must be at least 50 ms. PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton autoreset feature. This setting is applicable only if the pushbutton is in the Latched mode. PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay for automatic reset of the pushbutton when in the latched mode. PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET or PUSHBTN 1 RESET settings. PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the front panel pushbuttons. This locking functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset. PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting applies only to Self-Reset mode and specifies the duration of the pushbutton active status after the pushbutton has been released. When activated remotely, this setting specifies the entire activation time of the pushbutton status; the length of time the operand remains on has no effect on the pulse duration. This setting is required to set the duration of the pushbutton operating pulse. PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to drive pushbutton LED. If this setting is Off, then LED operation is directly linked to PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand. PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: If pushbutton message is set to High Priority, the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings will be displayed undisturbed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is asserted. The high priority option is not applicable to the PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting.
ID
This message can be temporary removed if any front panel keypad button is pressed. However, ten seconds of keypad inactivity will restore the message if the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is still active. If the PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE is set to Normal, the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings will be displayed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is asserted, but not longer than time period specified by FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. After the flash time is expired, the default message or other active target message is displayed. The instantaneous reset of the flash message will be executed if any relay front panel button is pressed or any new target or message becomes active. The PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting is linked to PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand and will be displayed in PUSHBTN 1 ID only if pushbutton element is in the Latched mode. The PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT message as Normal if the PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE setting is High Priority or Normal. conjunction with will be displayed
PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: If this setting is enabled, each pushbutton state change will be logged as an event into event recorder.
GE Multilin
5-51
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP The user-programmable pushbutton logic is shown below.

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF TIMER 200 ms 0 SETTING Function = Enabled = Latched = Self-Reset
5 SETTINGS
LATCHED
OR
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
To user-programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 2, 842024A2
SETTING Local Lock Off = 0

AND
Non-volatile latch
S
SETTING Remote Lock Off = 0 SETTING Hold TPKP 0

AND
TIMER 50 ms
R
Latch
0
OR
TIMER 50 ms 0
OR
SETTING Set Off = 0
AND
SETTING Reset
OR
AND
OR
PUSHBUTTON ON
To user-programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 2, 842024A2
Off = 0
AND
SETTING Autoreset Function = Enabled = Disabled
SETTING Autoreset Delay TPKP

AND
0
AND
SETTING Drop-Out Timer 0

OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
TIMER 200 ms 0
AND
TRST
842021A3.CDR
Figure 59: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-52
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
LCD MESSAGE ENGAGE MESSAGE SETTING Flash Message Time 0

OR AND
LATCHED
SETTINGS Top Text = XXXXXXXXXX On Text = XXXXXXXXXX
TRST
From user-programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 1, 842021A3
Instantaneous reset * FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
AND
PUSHBUTTON ON
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
SETTING Message Priority = Disabled = High Priority = Normal
The message is temporarily removed if any keypad button is pressed. Ten (10) seconds of keypad inactivity restores the message.
AND
LCD MESSAGE ENGAGE MESSAGE SETTINGS Top Text

OR
= XXXXXXXXXX On Text = XXXXXXXXXX
SETTING Flash Message Time 0

AND
TRST Instantaneous reset * PUSHBUTTON 1 LED LOGIC

1. If pushbutton 1 LED control is set to off. Pushbutton 1 LED
Instantaneous reset will be executed if any front panel button is pressed or any new target or message becomes active.
5
Pushbutton 1 LED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON PUSHBUTTON 2 ON PUSHBUTTON 3 ON
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ANY PB ON

2. If pushbutton 1 LED control is not set to off.
OR
SETTING PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL = any FlexLogic operand
PUSHBUTTON 16 ON The enhanced front panel has 16 operands; the standard front panel has 12
842024A2.CDR
Figure 510: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2) User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP or HQ faceplate. If an HP or HQ type faceplate was ordered separately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the correct faceplate option. This can be done via EnerVista UR Setup with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command. 5.2.14 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
NOTE
FLEX STATE PARAMETERS

MESSAGE
PARAMETER Off PARAMETER Off
MESSAGE
1: 2:
PARAMETER 256: Off
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
GE Multilin
5-53
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The state bits may be read out in the Flex States register array beginning at Modbus address 0900h. Sixteen states are packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are sixteen registers to accommodate the 256 state bits. 5.2.15 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
MESSAGE
INVOKE AND SCROLL: Off USER DISPLAY USER DISPLAY
MESSAGE
1 2
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAY 16
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facilitate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways. KEYPAD: Use the MENU key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user-definable display (note that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the UP and DOWN keys. The display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting. USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL setting. Any FlexLogic operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate the programmed displays. On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand acts exactly as the down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the DOWN key operate concurrently. When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay will start to cycle through the user displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user display, not at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.
5-54
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS b) USER DISPLAY 1(16)

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS USER DISPLAY 1(16)
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
USER DISPLAY 1
MESSAGE
DISP 1 TOP LINE: DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: DISP 1 ITEM 1 0 DISP 1 ITEM 2 0 DISP 1 ITEM 3 0 DISP 1 ITEM 4 0 DISP 1 ITEM 5: 0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display and pressing the ENTER key. The display will then prompt ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?. After selecting Yes, a message indicates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are automatically configured with the proper content this content may subsequently be edited. This menu is used to enter user-defined text and user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user display. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the start of a data field - the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to five separate data fields can be entered in a user display - the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item. A User Display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface (preferred for convenience). The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select the line to be edited. Press the decimal key to enter text edit mode. Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character. Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position. Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed. The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information. Press the ENTER key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the five items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of 0 for any items not being used. Use the HELP key at any selected system display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista UR Setup usage conveniently facilitates this conversion). Use the MENU key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show in sequence, changing every 4 seconds. While viewing a user display, press the ENTER key and then select the Yes option to remove the display from the user display list. Use the MENU key again to exit the user displays menu.
GE Multilin
5-55
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP An example user display setup and result is shown below: USER DISPLAY 1
MESSAGE
5 SETTINGS
DISP 1 TOP LINE: Current X ~ A DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Current Y ~ A DISP 1 ITEM 1: 6016 DISP 1 ITEM 2: 6357 DISP 1 ITEM 3: 0 DISP 1 ITEM 4: 0 DISP 1 ITEM 5: 0
Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker.
Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker. Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAYS
Current X Current Y
0.850 A 0.327 A
Shows the resultant display content.
5
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O
5.2.16 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
DIRECT I/O
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: Yes DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: Yes DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: 64 kbps DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER: Disabled CRC ALARM CH1 CRC ALARM CH2 UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1 UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH2
Range: 1 to 16
Range: Yes, No
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
See page 562. See page 562. See page 563. See page 563.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Direct inputs and outputs are intended for exchange of status information (inputs and outputs) between UR-series relays connected directly via type 7 digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to IEC 61850 GSSE, except that communications takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On type 7 cards that support two channels, direct output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends direct output
5-56
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
messages both ways around a ring configuration. On type 7 cards that support one channel, direct output messages are sent only in one direction. Messages will be resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at the receiver. Direct output message timing is similar to GSSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two self-tests are performed and signaled by the following FlexLogic operands: 1. 2.
DIRECT RING BREAK (direct input/output ring break). This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages sent from a UR-series relay are not being received back by the relay. DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF (direct device offline). These FlexLogic operands indicate that direct
output messages from at least one direct device are not being received. Direct input and output settings are similar to remote input and output settings. The equivalent of the remote device name strings for direct inputs and outputs is the DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID. The DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID setting identifies the relay in all direct output messages. All UR-series IEDs in a ring should have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used to identify the sender of the direct input and output message.
CH2 RING CONFIGURATION
If the direct input and output scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION or DIRECT I/O is Yes), all direct output messages should be received back. If not, the direct input/output ring break self-test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic operand.
Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. All IEDs communicating over direct inputs and outputs must be set to the same data rate. UR-series IEDs equipped with dual-channel communications cards apply the same data rate to both channels. Delivery time for direct input and output messages is approximately 0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4 of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each bridge.
GE Multilin
5-57
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Table 55: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT DATA RATES

MODULE 74 7L 7M 7P 7T 7W 7V 2A 2B 2G 2H 76 77 75 7E 7F 7G 7Q 7R 7S CHANNEL Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 SUPPORTED DATA RATES 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 128 kbps 128 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps
The G.703 modules are fixed at 64 kbps. The DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to these modules.
NOTE
The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to G60s with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing over messages from channel 1 to channel 2. This places all UR-series IEDs into one direct input and output network regardless of the physical media of the two communication channels. The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input and output configuration. Please refer to the Inputs and outputs section in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.
5-58
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING THE INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A UR-SERIES RELAY
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional input and output and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
Figure 511: INPUT AND OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS In the above application, the following settings should be applied. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: 128 kbps
Yes
For UR-series IED 2:

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 2 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: 128 kbps
Yes
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); that is, from device 1 to device 2, and from device 2 to device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection (for example: fiber, G.703, or RS422). EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown below.
UR IED 1
BLOCK
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 512: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown below) is recommended for this application.
GE Multilin
5-59
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX2 TX2
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX1
UR IED 2
TX1 RX2 TX2
UR IED 4
RX1
TX2
RX2
UR IED 3
RX1 TX1
842716A1.CDR
Figure 513: INTERLOCKING BUS PROTECTION SCHEME VIA DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS In the above application, the following settings should be applied. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:
Yes Yes

Yes Yes
Yes Yes

Yes Yes
Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of bridges between the origin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum communications distance by a factor of two. In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle. If one ring is broken (say TX2-RX2) the delivery times are as follows: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 4: 0.6 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle. A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of a power system cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time should be adaptively increased to 0.6 of a power system cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues such as failure of both the communications rings, failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, etc. Self-monitoring flags of the direct inputs and outputs feature would be primarily used to address these concerns.
5-60
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS EXAMPLE 3: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown below:
UR IED 1
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 514: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION A permissive pilot-aided scheme could be implemented in a two-ring configuration as shown below (IEDs 1 and 2 constitute a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring):
TX1
RX1
RX2
UR IED 1
RX1 TX1
UR IED 2
TX2
5
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 515: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above application, the following settings should be applied. For UR-series IED 1:
Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps): IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.5 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle. In the above scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as explained in the Inputs and outputs section. A blocking pilot-aided scheme should be implemented with more security and, ideally, faster message delivery time. This could be accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown below.
GE Multilin
5-61
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
TX2
TX1
RX1
RX2
UR IED 1
RX1 RX2 TX2
UR IED 2
TX1
TX1
RX1
UR IED 3
RX2 TX2
842715A1.CDR
Figure 516: DUAL-CHANNEL CLOSED LOOP (DUAL-RING) CONFIGURATION In the above application, the following settings should be applied. For UR-series IED 1:
Yes Yes

Yes Yes
Yes Yes
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle. The two communications configurations could be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Speed, reliability and cost should be taken into account when selecting the required architecture. b) CRC ALARM CH1(2)
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O CRC ALARM CH1(2)
CRC ALARM CH1

MESSAGE
CRC ALARM CH1 FUNCTION: Disabled CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT: 600 CRC ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD: 10 CRC ALARM CH1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The G60 checks integrity of the incoming direct input and output messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC alarm function is available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter adds up messages that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM FlexLogic operand is set. When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
5-62
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output. Latching and acknowledging conditions - if required - should be programmed accordingly. The CRC alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of direct input and output messages that failed the CRC check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS CRC FAIL COUNT CH1 actual value. Message count and length of the monitoring window: To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1 message per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (128 kbps) even if there is no change in the direct outputs. For example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to 10000, corresponds a time window of about 160 minutes at 64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent faster as a result of direct outputs activity, the monitoring time interval will shorten. This should be taken into account when determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT should be set to 10 60 1 = 600. Correlation of failed CRC and bit error rate (BER): The CRC check may fail if one or more bits in a packet are corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A direct input and output packet containing 20 bytes results in 160 bits of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 104 implies 1 bit error for every 10000 bits sent or received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet, having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 104.
c) UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1

MESSAGE
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 FUNCTION: Disabled UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT: 600 UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD: 10 UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The G60 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring configuration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The unreturned messages alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of unreturned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have failed to return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM FlexLogic operand is set. When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted. The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output. Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, should be programmed accordingly. The unreturned messages alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration. The total number of unreturned input and output messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1 actual value.
GE Multilin
5-63
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.2.17 TELEPROTECTION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP TELEPROTECTION
TELEPROTECTION
MESSAGE
TELEPROTECTION FUNCTION: Disabled NUMBER OF TERMINALS: 2 NUMBER OF COMM CHANNELS: 1 LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER: 0 TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER: 0 TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER: 0
Range: 2, 3
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Digital teleprotection functionality is designed to transfer protection commands between two or three relays in a secure, fast, dependable, and deterministic fashion. Possible applications are permissive or blocking pilot schemes and direct transfer trip (DTT). Teleprotection can be applied over any analog or digital channels and any communications media, such as direct fiber, copper wires, optical networks, or microwave radio links. A mixture of communication media is possible.
Once teleprotection is enabled and the teleprotection input/outputs are configured, data packets are transmitted continuously every 1/4 cycle (3/8 cycle if using C37.94 modules) from peer-to-peer. Security of communication channel data is achieved by using CRC-32 on the data packet. Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive as such, they cannot be used simulatneously. Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are blocked, and vice versa.
NOTE
NUMBER OF TERMINALS: Specifies whether the teleprotection system operates between two peers or three peers. NUMBER OF CHANNELS: Specifies how many channels are used. If the NUMBER OF TERMINALS is 3 (three-terminal system), set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to 2. For a two-terminal system, the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to 1 or 2 (redundant channels). LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER, TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER, and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER: In installations that use multiplexers or modems, it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line is from the correct relays. The teleprotection function performs this check by reading the message ID sent by transmitting relays and comparing it to the programmed ID in the receiving relay. This check is also used to block inputs if inadvertently set to loopback mode or data is being received from a wrong relay by checking the ID on a received channel. If an incorrect ID is found on a channel during normal operation, the TELEPROT CH1 ID FAIL or TELEPROT CH2 ID FAIL FlexLogic operand is set, driving the event with the same name and blocking the teleprotection inputs. For commissioning purposes, the result of channel identification is also shown in the STATUS CHANNEL TESTS VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION actual value. The default value of 0 for the LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER indicates that relay ID is not to be checked. On two- terminals two-channel systems, the same LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER is transmitted over both channels; as such, only the TERMINAL 1 ID NUMBER has to be programmed on the receiving end. 5.2.18 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
MESSAGE
RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed RELAY NAME: Relay-1
Range: Not Programmed, Programmed
5-64
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state. The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet communications channel using the IEC 61850 protocol.
GE Multilin
5-65
5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES 5.3REMOTE RESOURCES
5 SETTINGS 5.3.1 REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION
When G60 is ordered with a process card module as a part of HardFiber system, then an additional Remote Resources menu tree is available in EnerVista UR Setup software to allow configuring HardFiber system.
Figure 517: REMOTE RESOURCES CONFIGURATION MENU
The remote resources settings configure a G60 with a process bus module to work with devices called Bricks. Remote resources configuration is only available through the EnerVista UR Setup software, and is not available through the G60 front panel. A Brick provides eight AC measurements, along with contact inputs, DC analog inputs, and contact outputs, to be the remote interface to field equipment such as circuit breakers and transformers. The G60 with a process bus module has access to all of the capabilities of up to eight Bricks. Remote resources settings configure the point-to-point connection between specific fiber optic ports on the G60 process card and specific Brick. The relay is then configured to measure specific currents, voltages and contact inputs from those Bricks, and to control specific outputs. The configuration process for remote resources is straightforward and consists of the following steps. Configure the field units. This establishes the point-to-point connection between a specific port on the relay process bus module, and a specific digital core on a specific Brick. This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus relay. Configure the AC banks. This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages. AC bank configuration also provides a provision for redundant measurements for currents and voltages, a powerful reliability improvement possible with process bus. Configure signal sources. This functionality of the G60 has not changed other than the requirement to use currents and voltages established by AC bank configuration under the remote resources menu. Configure field contact inputs, field contact outputs, RTDs, and transducers as required for the application's functionality. These inputs and outputs are the physical interface to circuit breakers, transformers, and other equipment. They replace the traditional contact inputs and outputs located at the relay to virtually eliminate copper wiring. Configure shared inputs and outputs as required for the application's functionality. Shared inputs and outputs are distinct binary channels that provide high-speed protection quality signaling between relays through a Brick.
For additional information on how to configure a relay with a process bus module, please refer to GE publication number GEK-113500: HardFiber System Instruction Manual.
5-66
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.4SYSTEM SETUP a) CURRENT BANKS

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK F1(M5)
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5.4.1 AC INPUTS
CURRENT BANK F1
MESSAGE
PHASE CT F1 PRIMARY:
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A
PHASE CT F1 SECONDARY: 1 A GROUND CT F1 PRIMARY: 1 A GROUND CT F1 SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing CT characteristics.
NOTE
Four banks of phase and ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the module slot position letter): Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {1, 5}. See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details. These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = neutral current = 3Io) is used as the input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections. Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct operation, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used). The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given If the following current banks: F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio. F5: CT bank with 1000: ratio. M1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio.
The following rule applies: SRC 1 = F1 + F5 + M1

(EQ 5.6)
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary. The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).
GE Multilin
5-67
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP b) VOLTAGE BANKS

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK F5(M5)
5 SETTINGS
VOLTAGE BANK F5
MESSAGE
PHASE VT F5 CONNECTION: Wye PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY: 66.4 V PHASE VT F5 RATIO: 1.00 :1 AUXILIARY VT F5 CONNECTION: Vag AUXILIARY VT F5 SECONDARY: 66.4 V AUXILIARY VT F5 RATIO: 1.00 :1
Range: Wye, Delta
Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
MESSAGE
Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing VT characteristics.
CAUTION
Two banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {5}. See the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details. With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5 CONNECTION made to the system as Wye or Delta. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as Delta. The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal voltage is applied to the VT primary. For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a delta connection, the secondary voltage would be 115; that is, (13800 / 14400) 120. For a wye connection, the voltage value entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / 3 = 66.4. On a 14.4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage value entered would be 120; that is, 14400 / 120. 5.4.2 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM
NOTE
POWER SYSTEM
MESSAGE
NOMINAL FREQUENCY: 60 Hz PHASE ROTATION: ABC REVERSE PH ROTATION: Off FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE: SRC 1 FREQUENCY TRACKING: Enabled
Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1
Range: ABC, ACB
MESSAGE
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5-68
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay. The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters. The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be connected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation. The REVERSE PH ROTATION setting allows the user to dynamically change the phase rotation used for phasor calculations. This allows the G60 to follow the current phase rotation of the protected generator. For example, if the PHASE ROTATION setting is ABC but the condition defined for opposite phase rotation is true, then the phase rotation used for phasor calculation will switch to ACB. This feature is only intended for use in special applications, such as pumped storage schemes The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source: phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current. For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = V A ), while Clarke transformation of the phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY = ( 2 V A V B V C ) 3 ) for better performance during fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions. The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay. Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this signal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced. The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they have the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between different UR-series relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
FREQUENCY TRACKING
NOTE
should only be set to Disabled in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for special variable-frequency applications. The frequency tracking feature will function only when the G60 is in the Programmed mode. If the G60 is Not Programmed, then metering values will be available but may exhibit significant errors.
NOTE
5.4.3 SIGNAL SOURCES

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE 1(4)
SOURCE 1
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 NAME: SRC 1 SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: None SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: None SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: None SOURCE 1 AUX VT: None
Range: up to six alphanumeric characters
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of any 6 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed. Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of any 6 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed. Range: None, F5, M5 Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed. Range: None, F5, M5 Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Identical menus are available for each source. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate for the associated source.
GE Multilin
5-69
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The first letter in the source identifier represents the module slot position. The number directly following this letter represents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called 1 or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called 5 in a particular CT/VT module. Refer to the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details on this concept. It is possible to select the sum of all CT combinations. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be referred. For example, the selection F1+F5 indicates the sum of each phase from channels F1 and F5, scaled to whichever CT has the higher ratio. Selecting None hides the associated actual values. The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type, ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each source is entered, including specifying which CTs will be summed together. User selection of AC parameters for comparator elements: CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection. In elements where the parameter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting specifies the source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS. AC input actual values: The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and voltage sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be displayed here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values. DISTURBANCE DETECTORS (INTERNAL):
The disturbance detector (ANSI 50DD) element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on the protected system. The 50DD function is intended for use in conjunction with measuring elements, blocking of current based elements (to prevent maloperation as a result of the wrong settings), and starting oscillography data capture. A disturbance detector is provided for each source. The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector scheme logic is as follows:
SETTING ACTUAL SOURCE 1 CURRENT PHASOR I_1 I_2 I_0 PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY PROPERTIES/CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL I_1 - I_1 >2*CUT-OFF I_2 - I_2 >2*CUT-OFF I_0 - I_0 >2*CUT-OFF Where I is 2 cycles old SETTING ACTUAL SOURCE 2 CURRENT PHASOR I_1 I_2 I_0 PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY PROPERTIES/CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL I_1 - I_1 >2*CUT-OFF I_2 - I_2 >2*CUT-OFF I_0 - I_0 >2*CUT-OFF Where I is 2 cycles old OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SRC 2 50DD OP OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SRC 1 50DD OP
SETTING ACTUAL SOURCE 6 CURRENT PHASOR I_1 I_2 I_0 PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY PROPERTIES/CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL I_1 - I_1 >2*CUT-OFF I_2 - I_2 >2*CUT-OFF I_0 - I_0 >2*CUT-OFF Where I is 2 cycles old
827092A3.CDR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR SRC 6 50DD OP
Figure 518: DISTURBANCE DETECTOR LOGIC DIAGRAM The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off threshold is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering sensitivity setting (PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL) controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector accordingly.
5-70
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES:
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
An example of the use of sources is shown in the diagram below. A relay could have the following hardware configuration:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER --> CT/VT MODULE 1 CTs CT/VT MODULE 2 VTs CT/VT MODULE 3 not applicable
This configuration could be used on a two-winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half system. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.
F1 DSP Bank
F5 Source 1 Amps Source 3

51BF-1 51BF-2
Source 2 Amps
U1
Volts Amps
A V W Var 87T
V A W Var 51P
Volts Amps M1 M1 Source 4
5
UR Relay
M5
Figure 519: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES
GE Multilin
5-71
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.4.4 BREAKERS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1
BREAKER 1
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Disabled BREAKER 1 NAME: Bkr 1 BREAKER 1 MODE: 3-Pole BREAKER 1 OPEN: Off BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN: Off BREAKER 1 CLOSE: Off BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE: Off BREAKER 1 A/3P CLSD: Off BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND: Off BREAKER 1 B CLOSED: Off BREAKER 1 B OPENED: Off BREAKER 1 C CLOSED: Off BREAKER 1 C OPENED: Off BREAKER 1 Toperate: 0.070 s BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: Off BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY: 0.000 s MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: 0.000 s BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Off BREAKER 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5-72
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in chapter 4. Only information concerning programming of the associated settings is covered here. These features are provided for two or more breakers; a user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1. The number of breaker control elements is dependent on the number of CT/VT modules specified with the G60. The following settings are available for each breaker control element. BREAKER 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the breaker control feature. BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Set to Enable to allow faceplate push button operations. BREAKER 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the breaker. This name will be used in flash messages related to breaker 1. BREAKER 1 MODE: This setting selects 3-pole mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or 1pole mode where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously. BREAKER 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to open breaker 1. BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the breaker. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA. BREAKER 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to close breaker 1. BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the breaker. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA. BREAKER 1 A/3P CLOSED: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is closed. If the BREAKER 1 MODE setting is selected as 3-Pole, this setting selects a single input as the operand used to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the BREAKER 1 B and BREAKER 1 C settings select operands to track phases B and C, respectively. BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed 52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the breaker is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted BREAKER 1 CLOSED status signal can be used. BREAKER 1 B CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B closed position as above for phase A. BREAKER 1 B OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B opened position as above for phase A. BREAKER 1 C CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C closed position as above for phase A. BREAKER 1 C OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C opened position as above for phase A. BREAKER 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts during breaker operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has expired, the BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes. BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: This setting selects an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker alarm reporting contact. BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles. MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: This setting specifies the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after an operator has initiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker. BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Selects an operand indicating that breaker 1 is out-of-service.
GE Multilin
5-73
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
SETTING BREAKER 1 FUNCTION = Enabled = Disabled SETTING BREAKER 1 BLOCK OPEN Off = 0 D60, L60, and L90 devices only from trip output FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS TRIP PHASE A TRIP PHASE B TRIP PHASE C TRIP 3-POLE SETTING BREAKER 1 OPEN Off = 0
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS BREAKER 1 OFF CMD BREAKER 1 TRIP A BREAKER 1 TRIP B BREAKER 1 TRIP C
AND
AND
AND
61850 Select & Open

USER 3 OFF/ON To open BRK1-(Name)
BKR ENABLED
AND
To breaker control logic sheet 2, 842025A1
SETTING BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL = Enabled

AND
USER 2 OFF/ON To open BRK1-(Name)
OR
SETTING BREAKER 1 CLOSE Off = 0
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
61850 Select & Close

C60, D60, L60, and L90 relays from recloser FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR CLOSE BKR 1 SETTING BREAKER 1 BLOCK CLOSE Off = 0
SETTING MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR AND
BREAKER 1 ON CMD
827061AS.CDR
Figure 520: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2) IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the G60 is in Programmed mode and not in the local control mode.
NOTE
5-74
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
from breaker control logic sheet 1, 827061AR
BKR ENABLED
SETTING BREAKER 1 MODE

= 3-Pole = 1-Pole
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND OR AND
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
BREAKER 1 CLOSED (DEFAULT)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND AND OR
BREAKER 1 OPEN
SETTING BREAKER 1 A/3P CLSD = Off

AND
BREAKER 1 OPEN (DEFAULT)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 DISCREP
SETTING BREAKER 1 B CLSD

= Off
SETTING BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY

AND
0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING BREAKER 1 C CLSD

= Off
OR AND AND
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
Note: the BREAKER 1 TROUBLE LED can be latched using FlexLogic
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE (DEFAULT)
SETTING BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM

= Off
XOR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING BREAKER 1 Toperate

AND OR
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND = Off
0
AND
AND AND AND
BREAKER 1 A BAD ST BREAKER 1 A CLSD BREAKER 1 A OPEN BREAKER 1 A INTERM
SETTING BREAKER 1 Toperate
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND
XOR
SETTING BREAKER 1 B OPENED = Off
0
AND
AND AND AND
BREAKER 1 B BAD ST BREAKER 1 B CLSD BREAKER 1 B OPEN BREAKER 1 B INTERM
SETTING BREAKER 1 Toperate
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND XOR
SETTING BREAKER 1 C OPENED = Off
0
AND
AND AND AND
BREAKER 1 C BAD ST BREAKER 1 C CLSD BREAKER 1 C OPEN BREAKER 1 C INTERM
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND AND
SETTING BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV

= Off
AND XOR AND
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN BREAKER 1 1P OPEN BREAKER 1 OOS
842025A1.CDR
Figure 521: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)
GE Multilin
5-75
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.4.5 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SWITCHES SWITCH 1
SWITCH 1
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 FUNCTION: Disabled SWITCH 1 NAME: SW 1 SWITCH 1 MODE: 3-Pole SWITCH 1 OPEN: Off SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN: Off SWITCH 1 CLOSE: Off SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE: Off SWTCH 1 A/3P CLSD: Off SWTCH 1 A/3P OPND: Off SWITCH 1 B CLOSED: Off SWITCH 1 B OPENED: Off SWITCH 1 C CLOSED: Off SWITCH 1 C OPENED: Off SWITCH 1 Toperate: 0.070 s SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY: 0.000 s SWITCH 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The disconnect switch element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and closing of disconnect switches from SCADA or through the front panel interface. The disconnect switch element can be used to create an interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the switch pole position, both the 52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them. The number of available disconnect switches depends on the number of the CT/VT modules ordered with the G60. SWITCH 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the operation of the disconnect switch element. SWITCH 1 NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the disconnect switch. This name will be used in flash messages related to disconnect switch 1. SWITCH 1 MODE: This setting selects 3-pole mode, where all disconnect switch poles are operated simultaneously, or 1-pole mode where all disconnect switch poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
5-76
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
SWITCH 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to open disconnect switch 1. SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the disconnect switch. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA. SWITCH 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to close disconnect switch 1. SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the disconnect switch. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA. SWTCH 1 A/3P CLSD: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a disconnect switch auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is closed. If the SWITCH 1 MODE setting is selected as 3-Pole, this setting selects a single input as the operand used to track the disconnect switch open or closed position. If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the SWITCH 1 B and SWITCH 1 C settings select operands to track phases B and C, respectively. SWITCH 1 A/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed 52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted SWITCH 1 CLOSED status signal can be used. SWITCH 1 B CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as above for phase A. SWITCH 1 B OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B opened position as above for phase A. SWITCH 1 C CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C closed position as above for phase A. SWITCH 1 C OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C opened position as above for phase A. SWITCH 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has expired, the SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes. SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles. IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the G60 is in Programmed mode and not in the local control mode.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-77
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
SETTING SWITCH 1 FUNCTION = Disabled = Enabled SETTING SWITCH 1 OPEN

= Off
OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 OFF CMD
SETTING SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN

= Off
61850 Select & Open
SETTING SWITCH 1 CLOSE

= Off
OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 ON CMD
SETTING SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE

= Off
61850 Select & Close
SETTING SWITCH 1 MODE

= 3-Pole = 1-Pole
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND OR AND
SWITCH 1 CLOSED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND AND OR
SWITCH 1 OPEN
SETTING SWTCH 1 A/3P CLSD

= Off
AND AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 DISCREP
SETTING SWITCH 1 B CLOSED

= Off
SETTING SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY

AND
0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR AND AND
SWITCH 1 TROUBLE
SETTING SWITCH 1 C CLOSED

= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING SWITCH 1 Toperate

AND XOR OR
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING SWTCH 1 A/3P OPND

= Off
0
AND
AND AND
SWITCH 1 A BAD ST SWITCH 1 A CLSD SWITCH 1 A OPEN SWITCH 1 A INTERM
AND AND
SETTING SWITCH 1 Toperate
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND XOR
SETTING SWITCH 1 B OPENED

= Off
0
AND
AND AND AND
SWITCH 1 B BAD ST SWITCH 1 B CLSD SWITCH 1 B OPEN SWITCH 1 B INTERM
SETTING SWITCH 1 Toperate
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
XOR
SETTING SWITCH 1 C OPENED

= Off
AND AND
AND AND
SWITCH 1 C BAD ST SWITCH 1 C CLSD SWITCH 1 C OPEN SWITCH 1 C INTERM
AND
AND 842026A3.CDR
Figure 522: DISCONNECT SWITCH SCHEME LOGIC
5-78
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP 5.4.6 FLEXCURVES
a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP FLEXCURVES FLEXCURVE A(D)
FLEXCURVE A
FLEXCURVE A TIME AT 0.00 xPKP: 0 ms
FlexCurves A through D have settings for entering times to reset and operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98 and 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a custom FlexCurve, enter the reset and operate times (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the MESSAGE UP/DOWN keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D). Table 56: FLEXCURVE TABLE
RESET 0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.48 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 TIME MS RESET 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.88 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 TIME MS OPERATE 1.03 1.05 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 TIME MS OPERATE 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 TIME MS OPERATE 4.9 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 TIME MS OPERATE 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 TIME MS
NOTE
The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of 1; that is, 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.
GE Multilin
5-79
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP b) FLEXCURVE CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The EnerVista UR Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated data points. Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file (.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From EnerVista UR Setup setting. Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves are customized by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup. c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING Recloser curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite operating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream protective devices have different operating characteristics. The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initialize From EnerVista UR Setup setting is set to Recloser Curve and the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked.
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time; otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum curve time. High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the operating time.
842721A1.CDR
Figure 523: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION The multiplier and adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT ratio.
NOTE
5-80
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS d) EXAMPLE
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then enabled at eight (8) times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately four (4) times pickup, the curve operating time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).
842719A1.CDR
Figure 524: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.
842720A1.CDR
Figure 525: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this is attempted, the EnerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE
e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES The standard recloser curves available for the G60 are displayed in the following graphs.
GE Multilin
5-81
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
2 1 0.5
GE106
TIME (sec)
0.2 0.1 0.05
GE103 GE104 GE105
GE101
GE102
0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2
5
50
2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842723A1.CDR
Figure 526: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106
20 10 5
GE142
GE138
TIME (sec)
2 1
GE113 GE120
0.5
0.2 0.1 0.05 1
1.2
1.5
15
20
842725A1.CDR
Figure 527: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142
5-82
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
50
20
10
TIME (sec)
GE201
GE151
2
GE134 GE140 GE137
0.5 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20
842730A1.CDR
Figure 528: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201
50
GE152
20
TIME (sec)
GE141
10
GE131
GE200
2 1
1.2
1.5
15
20
842728A1.CDR
Figure 529: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200
GE Multilin
5-83
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
50 20 10 5 2
GE162
GE164
TIME (sec)
1 0.5
GE133
0.2 0.1 0.05

GE161
GE165
0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2
GE163
15
20
842729A1.CDR
Figure 530: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165
20 10 5 2
GE132
TIME (sec)
1 0.5 0.2
GE136 GE139
0.1
GE116
0.05
GE118
GE117
0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20
842726A1.CDR
Figure 531: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139
5-84
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
20 10 5
GE122
TIME (sec)
1 0.5
GE114
0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20
GE121 GE111
GE107
GE115
GE112
842724A1.CDR
Figure 532: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122
50
20
GE202
10
TIME (sec)
2 1 0.5
GE119
GE135
0.2 1
1.2
1.5
15
20
842727A1.CDR
Figure 533: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202
GE Multilin
5-85
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS 5.4.7 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT

MESSAGE
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1 REPORTING OVER NETWORK
See below. See page 5-101.
The G60 Generator Protection System is provided with an optional phasor measurement unit feature. This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. The number of phasor measurement units available is also dependent on this option. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details.
The PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT menu allows specifying basic parameters of the measurements process such as signal source, ID and station name, calibration data, triggering, recording, and content for transmission on each of the supported ports. The reporting ports menus allow specifying the content and rate of reporting on each of the supported ports. Precise IRIG-B input is vital for correct synchrophasor measurement and reporting. A DC level shift IRIG-B receiver must be used for the phasor measurement unit to output proper synchrophasor values.
NOTE
The PMU settings are organized in five logical groups as follows.

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1
PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1

MESSAGE
PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION PMU 1 CALIBRATION PMU 1 COMMUNICATION PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 RECORDING
See page 5-87. See page 5-88. See page 5-89. See page 5-91. See page 5-98.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5-86
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS b) BASIC CONFIGURATION
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1 PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION
PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE
PMU 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PMU 1 IDCODE: 1 PMU 1 STN: GE-UR-PMU PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PMU 1 POST-FILTER: Symm-3-point
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: available post-filters as per table below
MESSAGE
This section contains basic phasor measurement unit (PMU) data, such as functions, source settings, and names. PMU 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables the PMU 1 functionality. Any associated functions (such as the recorder or triggering comparators) will not function if this setting is Disabled. Use the command frame to force the communication portion of the feature to start/stop transmission of data. When the transmission is turned off, the PMU is fully operational in terms of calculating and recording the phasors. PMU 1 IDCODE: This setting assigns a numerical ID to the PMU. It corresponds to the IDCODE field of the data, configuration, header, and command frames of the C37.118 protocol. The PMU uses this value when sending data, configuration, and header frames and responds to this value when receiving the command frame. PMU 1 STN: This setting assigns an alphanumeric ID to the PMU station. It corresponds to the STN field of the configuration frame of the C37.118 protocol. This value is a 16-character ASCII string as per the C37.118 standard. PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: This setting specifies one of the available G60 signal sources for processing in the PMU. Note that any combination of voltages and currents can be configured as a source. The current channels could be configured as sums of physically connected currents. This facilitates PMU applications in breaker-and-a-half, ring-bus, and similar arrangements. The PMU feature calculates voltage phasors for actual voltage (A, B, C, and auxiliary) and current (A, B, C, and ground) channels of the source, as well as symmetrical components (0, 1, and 2) of both voltages and currents. When configuring communication and recording features of the PMU, the user could select from the above superset the content to be sent out or recorded. PMU 1 POST-FILTER: This setting specifies amount of post-filtering applied to raw synchrophasor measurements. The raw measurements are produced at the rate of nominal system frequency using one-cycle data windows. This setting is provided to deal with interfering frequencies and to balance speed and accuracy of synchrophasor measurements for different applications. The following filtering choices are available: Table 57: POST-FILTER CHOICES
SELECTION None Symm-3-point Symm-5-point Symm-7-point CHARACTERISTIC OF THE FILTER No post-filtering Symmetrical 3-point filter (1 historical point, 1 present point, 1 future point) Symmetrical 5-point filter (2 historical points, 1 present point, 2 future points) Symmetrical 7-point filter (3 historical points, 1 present point, 3 future points)
This setting applies to all channels of the PMU. It is effectively for recording and transmission on all ports configured to use data of this PMU.
GE Multilin
5-87
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP c) CALIBRATION
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(4) PMU 1 CALIBRATION
PMU 1 CALIBRATION
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VA CALIBRATION ANGLE: 0.00 PMU 1 VB CALIBRATION ANGLE: 0.00 PMU 1 VC CALIBRATION ANGLE: 0.00 PMU 1 VX CALIBRATION ANGLE: 0.00 PMU 1 IA CALIBRATION ANGLE: 0.00 PMU 1 IB CALIBRATION ANGLE: 0.00 PMU 1 IC CALIBRATION ANGLE: 0.00 PMU 1 IG CALIBRATION ANGLE: 0.00 PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE: 0 PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT ANGLE: 0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE
This menu contains user angle calibration data for the phasor measurement unit (PMU). This data is combined with the factory adjustments to shift the phasors for better accuracy. PMU 1 VA... IG CALIBRATION ANGLE: These settings recognize applications with protection class voltage and current sources, and allow the user to calibrate each channel (four voltages and four currents) individually to offset errors introduced by VTs, CTs, and cabling. The setting values are effectively added to the measured angles. Therefore, enter a positive correction of the secondary signal lags the true signal; and negative value if the secondary signal leads the true signal. PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE: This setting allows correcting positive- and negative-sequence voltages for vector groups of power transformers located between the PMU voltage point, and the reference node. This angle is effectively added to the positive-sequence voltage angle, and subtracted from the negative-sequence voltage angle. Note that: 1. 2. 3. 4. When this setting is not 0, the phase and sequence voltages will not agree. Unlike sequence voltages, the phase voltages cannot be corrected in a general case, and therefore are reported as measured. When receiving synchrophasor date at multiple locations, with possibly different reference nodes, it may be more beneficial to allow the central locations to perform the compensation of sequence voltages. This setting applies to PMU data only. The G60 calculates symmetrical voltages independently for protection and control purposes without applying this correction. When connected to line-to-line voltages, the PMU calculates symmetrical voltages with the reference to the AG voltage, and not to the physically connected AB voltage (see the Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6).
PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT ANGLE: This setting allows correcting positive and negative-sequence currents for vector groups of power transformers located between the PMU current point and the reference node. The setting has the same meaning for currents as the PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE setting has for voltages. Normally, the two correcting angles are set identically, except rare applications when the voltage and current measuring points are located at different windings of a power transformer.
5-88
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS d) PMU COMMUNICATION
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 COMMUNICATION PMU 1 COMM PORT
PMU 1 COMM PORT 1

MESSAGE
PMU1 COMM PORT: None PMU1 PORT PHS-1 PMU 1 V1 PMU1 PORT PHS-1 NM: GE-UR-PMU1-V1
MESSAGE
Range: None, Network, GOOSE
Range: available synchrophasor values
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT PHS-14 PMU 1 V1 PMU1 PORT PHS-14 NM: GE-UR-PMU1-V1 PMU1 PORT A-CH-1: Off PMU1 PORT A-CH-1 NM: AnalogChannel1
MESSAGE
Range: available FlexAnalog values
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT A-CH-8: Off PMU1 PORT A-CH-8 NM: AnalogChannel8 PMU1 PORT D-CH-1: Off PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 NM: DigitalChannel1 PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 NORMAL STATE: Off
MESSAGE
Range: FlexLogic operands
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PMU1 PORT D-CH-16: Off PMU1 PORT D-CH-16 NM: DigitalChannel16 PMU1 PORT D-CH-16 NORMAL STATE: Off
MESSAGE
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
This section configures the phasor measurement unit (PMU) communication functions. PMU1 COMM PORT: This setting specifies the communication port for transmission of the PMU data.
GE Multilin
5-89
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
PMU1 PORT PHS-1 to PMU1 PORT PHS-14: These settings specify synchrophasors to be transmitted from the superset of all synchronized measurements. The available synchrophasor values are tabulated below.
SELECTION Va Vb Vc Vx Ia Ib Ic Ig V1 V2 V0 I1 I2 I0 MEANING First voltage channel, either Va or Vab Second voltage channel, either Vb or Vbc Third voltage channel, either Vc or Vca Fourth voltage channel Phase A current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings Phase B current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings Phase C current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings Fourth current channel, physical or summation as per the source settings Positive-sequence voltage, referenced to Va Negative-sequence voltage, referenced to Va Zero-sequence voltage Positive-sequence current, referenced to Ia Negative-sequence current, referenced to Ia Zero-sequence current
These settings allow for optimizing the frame size and maximizing transmission channel usage, depending on a given application. Select Off to suppress transmission of a given value. PMU1 PORT PHS-1 NM to PMU1 PORT PHS-14 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. These names are typically based on station, bus, or breaker names. PMU1 PORT A-CH-1 to PMU1 PORT A-CH-8: These settings specify any analog data measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable analog channel of the data frame. Up to eight analog channels can be configured to send any FlexAnalog value from the relay. Examples include active and reactive power, per phase or three-phase power, power factor, temperature via RTD inputs, and THD. The configured analog values are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant and sent as 32-bit floating point values. PMU1 PORT A-CH-1 NM to PMU1 PORT A-CH-8 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16: These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable digital channel of the data frame. Up to sixteen digital channels can be configured to send any FlexLogic operand from the relay. The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant. The values are mapped into a two-byte integer number, with byte 1 LSB corresponding to the digital channel 1 and byte 2 MSB corresponding to digital channel 16. PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 NM to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 NORMAL STATE to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16 NORMAL STATE: These settings allow for specifying a normal state for each digital channel. These states are transmitted in configuration frames to the data concentrator.
5-90
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS e) PMU TRIGGERING OVERVIEW
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1 PMU 1 TRIGGERING
PMU 1 TRIGGERING
MESSAGE
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER PMU 1 FREQUENCY TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
See page 5-91. See page 5-92. See page 5-93. See page 5-94. See page 5-95. See page 5-97.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Each logical phasor measurement unit (PMU) contains five triggering mechanisms to facilitate triggering of the associated PMU recorder, or cross-triggering of other PMUs of the system. They are: Overfrequency and underfrequency. Overvoltage and undervoltage. Overcurrent. Overpower. High rate of change of frequency.
The pre-configured triggers could be augmented with a user-specified condition built freely using programmable logic of the relay. The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles. All five triggering functions and the user-definable condition are consolidated (ORed) and connected to the PMU recorder. Each trigger can be programmed to log its operation into the event recorder, and to signal its operation via targets. The five triggers drive the STAT bits of the data frame to inform the destination of the synchrophasor data regarding the cause of trigger. The following convention is adopted to drive bits 11, 3, 2, 1, and 0 of the STAT word.
SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER: Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OR PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR
bit 0 bit 3, bit 11
PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 recorder
OR
bit 1 bit 2
847004A1.CDR
Figure 534: STAT BITS LOGIC f) USER TRIGGERING

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER
PMU 1 USER TRIGGER
PMU1 USER TRIGGER: Off
The user trigger allows customized triggering logic to be constructed from FlexLogic. The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles.
GE Multilin
5-91
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP g) FREQUENCY TRIGGERING
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 FREQUENCY TRIGGER
PMU 1 FREQUENCY TRIGGER

MESSAGE
PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ: 49.00 Hz PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ: 61.00 Hz PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME: 0.10 s PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME: 1.00 s PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK: Off PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER TARGET: Self-Reset PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The trigger responds to the frequency signal of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. The frequency is calculated from either phase voltages, auxiliary voltage, phase currents and ground current, in this hierarchy, depending on the source configuration as per G60 standards. This element requires the frequency is above the minimum measurable value. If the frequency is below this value, such as when the circuit is de-energized, the trigger will drop out. PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ: This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a 0.03 Hz hysteresis. PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ: This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a 0.03 Hz hysteresis. PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder. PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER SETTINGS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK: Off = 0 SETTING PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: FREQUENCY, f AND PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER OR SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER: Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 TRIGGERED
SETTINGS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ: PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ: RUN 0< f < LOW-FREQ OR f > HIGH-FREQ
SETTINGS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME: PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME: tPKP tDPO
to STAT bits of the data frame
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

847002A2.CDR
Figure 535: FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC
5-92
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS h) VOLTAGE TRIGGERING
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER
PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER

MESSAGE
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT: 0.800 pu PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT: 1.200 pu PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME: 0.10 s PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME: 1.00 s PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK: Off PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER TARGET: Self-Reset PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 0.250 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This element responds to abnormal voltage. Separate thresholds are provided for low and high voltage. In terms of signaling its operation, the element does not differentiate between the undervoltage and overvoltage events. The trigger responds to the phase voltage signal of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. All voltage channels (A, B, and C or AB, BC, and CA) are processed independently and could trigger the recorder. A minimum voltage supervision of 0.1 pu is implemented to prevent pickup on a de-energized circuit, similarly to the undervoltage protection element. PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT: This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in perunit of the PMU source. 1 pu is a nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis. PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT: This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal voltage trigger, in perunit of the PMU source. 1 pu is a nominal voltage value defined as the nominal secondary voltage times VT ratio. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis. PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder. PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
GE Multilin
5-93
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
SETTINGS PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK: Off = 0 SETTINGS SETTINGS PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: VT CONNECTION: WYE VA VB VC DELTA VAB VBC VCA PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT: PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT: RUN (0.1pu < V < LOW-VOLT) OR (V > HIGH-VOLT) (0.1pu < V < LOW-VOLT) OR (V > HIGH-VOLT) (0.1pu < V < LOW-VOLT) OR (V > HIGH-VOLT) OR SETTINGS AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER OR SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER: Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME: PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME: tPKP tDPO
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

847005A1.CDR
Figure 536: VOLTAGE TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC i) CURRENT TRIGGERING

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE
PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP: 1.800 pu PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME: 0.10 s PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME: 1.00 s PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK: Off PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER TARGET: Self-Reset PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This element responds to elevated current. The trigger responds to the phase current signal of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. All current channel (A, B, and C) are processed independently and could trigger the recorder. PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the overcurrent trigger, in per unit of the PMU source. A value of 1 pu is a nominal primary current. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis. PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder. PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
5-94
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER SETTINGS PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER FUNCTION: Enabled = 1
AND
PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER

OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 TRIGGERED
SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER: Off = 0 SETTINGS PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP: RUN I > PICKUP I > PICKUP I > PICKUP
OR
PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK: Off = 0 SETTINGS PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: IA IB IC
SETTINGS PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME: PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME: tPKP tDPO FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER
847000A1.CDR
Figure 537: CURRENT TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC j) POWER TRIGGERING

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER

MESSAGE
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE: 1.250 pu PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE: 1.250 pu PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT: 1.250 pu PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME: 0.10 s PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME: 1.00 s PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK: Off PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER TARGET: Self-Reset PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This element responds to abnormal power. Separate thresholds are provided for active, reactive, and apparent powers. In terms of signaling its operation the element does not differentiate between the three types of power. The trigger responds to the single-phase and three-phase power signals of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the active power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis. PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the reactive power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis.
GE Multilin
5-95
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the apparent power of the source. For single-phase power, 1 pu is a product of 1 pu voltage and 1 pu current, or the product of nominal secondary voltage, the VT ratio and the nominal primary current. For the three-phase power, 1 pu is three times that for a single-phase power. The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis. PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder. PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
SETTINGS PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FUNCTION: Enabled = 1
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER SETTINGS PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER ACTIVE: PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER REACTIVE: PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER
OR
PMU 1 PWR TRIG BLK: Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 TRIGGERED
SETTINGS PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: ACTIVE POWER, PA ACTIVE POWER, PB ACTIVE POWER, PC
PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT: RUN abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP abs(P) > 3*(ACTIVE PICKUP) abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP
OR
SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER: Off = 0
SETTINGS PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME: PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME: tPKP tDPO FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
3P ACTIVE POWER, P REACTIVE POWER, QA REACTIVE POWER, QB REACTIVE POWER, QC 3P REACTIVE POWER, Q APPARENT POWER, SA APPARENT POWER, SB APPARENT POWER, SC 3P APPARENT POWER, S
abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP abs(Q) > 3*(REACTIVE PICKUP) S > APPARENT PICKUP S > APPARENT PICKUP S > APPARENT PICKUP S > 3*(APPARENT PICKUP)
847003A1.CDR
Figure 538: POWER TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC
5-96
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS k) DF/DT TRIGGERING
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

MESSAGE
PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE: 0.25 Hz/s PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL: 0.25 Hz/s PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME: 0.10 s PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME: 1.00 s PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK: Off PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER TARGET: Self-Reset PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This element responds to frequency rate of change. Separate thresholds are provided for rising and dropping frequency. The trigger responds to the rate of change of frequency (df/dt) of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the raising direction (positive df/dt). The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis. PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the falling direction (negative df/dt). The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis. PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder. PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER SETTINGS PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK: Off = 0 SETTING PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: ROCOF, df/dt AND PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER OR SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER: Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 TRIGGERED
SETTINGS PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE: PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL: RUN df/dt > RAISE OR df/dt > FALL
SETTINGS PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME: PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME: tPKP tDPO
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER

847000A1.CDR
Figure 539: RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-97
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP l) PMU RECORDING
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1 PMU 1 RECORDING
PMU 1 RECORDING
MESSAGE
PMU 1 RECORDING RATE: 10/sec PMU 1 NO OF TIMED RECORDS: 10 PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE: Automatic Overwrite PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER POSITION: 10% PMU 1 REC PHS-1: PMU 1 V1 PMU 1 REC PHS-1 NM: GE-UR-PMU-V1
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second Range: 2 to 128 in steps of 1
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 16 character ASCII string
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC PHS-14: Off PMU 1 REC PHS-14 NM: GE-UR-PMU-PHS-14 PMU 1 REC A-CH-1: Off PMU 1 REC A-CH-1 NM: AnalogChannel1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC A-CH-8: Off PMU 1 REC A-CH-8 NM: AnalogChannel8 PMU 1 REC D-CH-1: Off PMU 1 REC D-CH-1 NM: DigitalChannel1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PMU 1 REC D-CH-16: Off PMU 1 REC D-CH-16 NM: DigitalChannel16
MESSAGE
Each logical phasor measurement unit (PMU) is associated with a recorder. The triggering condition is programmed via the PMU 1 TRIGGERING menu. The recorder works with polar values using resolution as in the PMU actual values.
5-98
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
TRIGGER
REC
847709A2.CDR
Figure 540: PMU RECORDING PMU 1 RECORDING RATE: This setting specifies the recording rate for the record content. Not all recording rates are applicable to either 50 or 60 Hz systems (for example, recording at 25 phasors a second in a 60 Hz system). The relay supports decimation by integer number of phasors from the nominal system frequency. If the rate of 25 is selected for the 60 Hz system, the relay would decimate the rate of 60 phasors a second by round (60 / 25) = 2; that is, it would record at 60 / 2 = 30 phasors a second. PMU 1 NO OF TIMED RECORDS: This setting specifies how many timed records are available for a given logical PMU. The length of each record equals available memory divided by the content size and number of records. The higher the number of records, the shorter each record. The relay supports a maximum of 128 records. PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE: This setting specifies what happens when the recorder uses its entire available memory storage. If set to Automatic Overwrite, the last record is erased to facilitate new recording, when triggered. If set to Protected, the recorder stops creating new records when the entire memory is used up by the old un-cleared records. Refer to chapter 7 for more information on clearing PMU records. The following set of figures illustrate the concept of memory management via the PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE setting.
Total memory for all logical PMUs Memory available for the logical PMU
5
Other logical PMUs
Record 1 Record 1 Record 1 Record 6
Free Free memory memory Record 4 Record 4 Record 4 Free memory Record 5 Record 5
Other logical PMUs
Other logical PMUs
Other logical PMUs

847705A1.CDR
Figure 541: AUTOMATIC OVERWRITE MODE

Total memory for all logical PMUs Memory available for the logical PMU
Record 1 Record 1 Record 1
Free Free memory memory Record 4 Record 4 Free memory Record 5
Other logical PMUs
Other logical PMUs
Other logical PMUs

847706A1.CDR
No further recording after all allocated memory is used
Figure 542: PROTECTED MODE
GE Multilin
5-99
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER POSITION: This setting specifies the amount of pre-trigger data in percent of the entire record. PMU1 PORT 1 PHS-1 to PMU1 PORT 1 PHS-14: These settings specify synchrophasors to be recorded from the superset of all synchronized measurements as indicated in the following table. These settings allow for optimizing the record size and content depending on a given application. Select Off to suppress recording of a given value.
VALUE Va Vb Vc Vx Ia Ib Ic Ig V1 V2 V0 I1 I2 I0 DESCRIPTION First voltage channel, either Va or Vab Second voltage channel, either Vb or Vbc Third voltage channel, either Vc or Vca Fourth voltage channel Phase A current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings Phase B current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings Phase C current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings Fourth current channel, physical or summation as per the source settings Positive-sequence voltage, referenced to Va Negative-sequence voltage, referenced to Va Zero-sequence voltage Positive-sequence current, referenced to Ia Negative-sequence current, referenced to Ia Zero-sequence current
PMU 1 REC PHS-1 NM to PMU 1 REC PHS-14 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. Typically these names would be based on station, bus, or breaker names. PMU 1 REC A-CH-1 to PMU 1 REC A-CH-8: These settings specify analog data measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable analog channel of the record. Up to eight analog channels can be configured to record any FlexAnalog value from the relay. Examples include active and reactive power, per phase or three-phase power, power factor, temperature via RTD inputs, and THD. The configured analogs are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant. PMU 1 REC A-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 REC A-CH-8 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. PMU 1 REC D-CH-1 to PMU 1 REC D-CH-16: These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable digital channel in the record. Up to digital analog channels can be configured to record any FlexLogic operand from the relay. The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant. PMU 1 REC D-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 REC D-CH-16 NM: This setting allows custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.
5-100
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS m) NETWORK CONNECTION
5.4 SYSTEM SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(4) REPORTING OVER NETWORK
REPORTING OVER NETWORK

MESSAGE
NETWORK REPORTING FUNCTION: Disabled NETWORK REPORTING IDCODE: 1 NETWORK REPORTING RATE: 10 per sec NETWORK REPORTING STYLE: Polar NETWORK REPORTING FORMAT: Integer NETWORK PDC CONTROL: Disabled NETWORK TCP PORT: 4712 NETWORK UDP PORT 1: 4713 NETWORK UDP PORT 2: 4714
MESSAGE
Range: 1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second Range: Polar, Rectangular
MESSAGE
Range: Integer, Floating
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The Ethernet connection works simultaneously with other communication means working over the Ethernet and is configured as follows. Up to three clients can be simultaneously supported. NETWORK REPORTING IDCODE: This setting specifies an IDCODE for the entire port. Individual PMU streams transmitted over this port are identified via their own IDCODES as per the device settings. This IDCODE is to be used by the command frame to start or stop transmission, and request configuration or header frames. NETWORK REPORTING RATE: This setting specifies the reporting rate for the network (Ethernet) port. This value applies to all PMU streams of the device that are assigned to transmit over this port. NETWORK REPORTING STYLE: This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors in rectangular (real and imaginary) or in polar (magnitude and angle) coordinates. This setting complies with bit-0 of the format field of the C37.118 configuration frame. NETWORK REPORTING FORMAT: This setting selects between reporting synchrophasors as 16-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating point numbers. This setting complies with bit 1 of the format field of the C37.118 configuration frame. Note that this setting applies to synchrophasors only the user-selectable FlexAnalog channels are always transmitted as 32-bit floating point numbers. NETWORK PDC CONTROL: The synchrophasor standard allows for user-defined controls originating at the PDC, to be executed on the PMU. The control is accomplished via an extended command frame. The relay decodes the first word of the extended field, EXTFRAME, to drive 16 dedicated FlexLogic operands: PDC NETWORK CNTRL 1 (from the least significant bit) to PDC NETWORK CNTRL 16 (from the most significant bit). Other words, if any, in the EXTFRAME are ignored. The operands are asserted for 5 seconds following reception of the command frame. If the new command frame arrives within the 5 second period, the FlexLogic operands are updated, and the 5 second timer is re-started. This setting enables or disables the control. When enabled, all 16 operands are active; when disabled all 16 operands remain reset. NETWORK TCP PORT: This setting selects the TCP port number that will be used for network reporting. NETWORK UDP PORT 1: This setting selects the first UDP port that will be used for network reporting. NETWORK UDP PORT 2: This setting selects the second UDP port that will be used for network reporting.
GE Multilin
5-101
5.5 FLEXLOGIC 5.5FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS 5.5.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic through FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process are shown below.
Figure 543: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW The states of all digital signals used in the G60 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are described later in this section). A digital 1 is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a contact output. The state of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human operators. If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, if it is desired to have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This equation ANDs the two control inputs to produce a virtual output which is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations. Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
5-102
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic). FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback. A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0. Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e. flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle. Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different types of operands are listed in the table below. Table 58: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TYPES
OPERAND TYPE Contact Input STATE On Off Contact Output (type Form-A contact only) Direct Input Element (Analog) Current On Voltage On Voltage Off On Pickup EXAMPLE FORMAT Cont Ip On Cont Ip Off Cont Op 1 Ion Cont Op 1 VOn Cont Op 1 VOff DIRECT INPUT 1 On PHASE TOC1 PKP CHARACTERISTICS [INPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...] Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact closed). Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external contact open). Current is flowing through the contact. Voltage exists across the contact. Voltage does not exists across the contact. The direct input is presently in the ON state. The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting of an element which responds to rising values or below the pickup setting of an element which responds to falling values. This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand. The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing. The output of the comparator is set to the block function. The input operand is at logic 1. This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand. The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing. The number of pulses counted is above the set number. The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number. The number of pulses counted is below the set number. Logic 1 Logic 0 The remote input is presently in the ON state. The virtual input is presently in the ON state. The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e. evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual output results in a "1").
Dropout Operate
PHASE TOC1 DPO PHASE TOC1 OP
Block Element (Digital) Pickup Dropout Operate
PHASE TOC1 BLK Dig Element 1 PKP Dig Element 1 DPO Dig Element 1 OP
Element (Digital Counter)
Higher than Equal to Lower than On Off On On On
Counter 1 HI Counter 1 EQL Counter 1 LO On Off REMOTE INPUT 1 On Virt Ip 1 On Virt Op 1 On
Fixed Remote Input Virtual Input Virtual Output
GE Multilin
5-103
5.5 FLEXLOGIC The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table. Table 59: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 9)
OPERAND TYPE CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS OPERAND SYNTAX CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON CONTROL PUSHBTN 2 ON CONTROL PUSHBTN 3 ON CONTROL PUSHBTN 4 ON CONTROL PUSHBTN 5 ON CONTROL PUSHBTN 6 ON CONTROL PUSHBTN 7 ON DIRECT DEVICE 1On DIRECT DEVICE 16On DIRECT DEVICE 1Off DIRECT DEVICE 16Off DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM DIR IO CH2 CRC ALARM DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM DIR IO CH2 UNRET ALM ELEMENT: 100% stator ground 100% STATOR STG1 PKP 100% STATOR STG1 OP 100% STATOR STG1 DPO 100% STATOR STG2 PKP 100% STATOR STG2 OP 100% STATOR STG2 DPO 100% STATOR PKP 100% STATOR OP 100% STATOR DPO 3RD HARM NTRL UV PKP 3RD HARM NTRL UV OP 3RD HARM NTRL UV DPO ACCDNT ENRG ARMED ACCDNT ENRG DPO ACCDNT ENRG OP AUX OV1 PKP AUX OV1 DPO AUX OV1 OP AUX OV2 to AUX OV3 ELEMENT: Auxiliary undervoltage AUX UV1 PKP AUX UV1 DPO AUX UV1 OP AUX UV2 to AUX UV3 OPERAND DESCRIPTION Control pushbutton 1 is being pressed Control pushbutton 2 is being pressed Control pushbutton 3 is being pressed Control pushbutton 4 is being pressed Control pushbutton 5 is being pressed Control pushbutton 6 is being pressed Control pushbutton 7 is being pressed Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1
5 SETTINGS
DIRECT DEVICES
DIRECT INPUT/ OUTPUT CHANNEL MONITORING
The rate of direct input messages received on channel 1 and failing the CRC exceeded the user-specified level. The rate of direct input messages received on channel 2 and failing the CRC exceeded the user-specified level. The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 1 exceeded the user-specified level (ring configurations only). The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 2 exceeded the user-specified level (ring configurations only). Stage 1 of the 100% stator ground element has picked up Stage 1 of the 100% stator ground element has operated Stage 1 of the 100% stator ground element has dropped out Stage 2 of the 100% stator ground element has picked up Stage 2 of the 100% stator ground element has operated Stage 2 of the 100% stator ground element has dropped out The 100% stator ground element has picked up The 100% stator ground element has operated The 100% stator ground element has dropped out Third harmonic neutral undervoltage element has picked up Third harmonic neutral undervoltage element has operated Third harmonic neutral undervoltage element has dropped out The accidental energization element is armed The accidental energization element has dropped out The accidental energization element has operated Auxiliary overvoltage element has picked up Auxiliary overvoltage element has dropped out Auxiliary overvoltage element has operated Same set of operands as shown for AUX OV1 Auxiliary undervoltage element has picked up Auxiliary undervoltage element has dropped out Auxiliary undervoltage element has operated Same set of operands as shown for AUX UV1
5
ELEMENT: Third harmonic neutral undervoltage ELEMENT: Accidental energization ELEMENT: Auxiliary overvoltage
5-104
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS Table 59: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 2 of 9)

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Breaker control OPERAND SYNTAX BREAKER 1 OFF CMD BREAKER 1 ON CMD BREAKER 1 A BAD ST BREAKER 1 A INTERM BREAKER 1 A CLSD BREAKER 1 A OPEN BREAKER 1 B BAD ST BREAKER 1 A INTERM BREAKER 1 B CLSD BREAKER 1 B OPEN BREAKER 1 C BAD ST BREAKER 1 A INTERM BREAKER 1 C CLSD BREAKER 1 C OPEN BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS BREAKER 1 CLOSED BREAKER 1 OPEN BREAKER 1 DISCREP BREAKER 1 TROUBLE BREAKER 1 MNL CLS BREAKER 1 TRIP A BREAKER 1 TRIP B BREAKER 1 TRIP C BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN BREAKER 1 OOS BREAKER 2... ELEMENT: Digital counters Counter 1 HI Counter 1 EQL Counter 1 LO Counter 2 to Counter 8 ELEMENT: Digital elements Dig Element 1 PKP Dig Element 1 OP Dig Element 1 DPO Dig Element 2 to Dig Element 48 ELEMENT: Sensitive directional power DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP DIR POWER 1 PKP DIR POWER 1 DPO DIR POWER 1 OP DIR POWER 2 ELEMENT: Field ground fault FIELD GND STG1 PKP FIELD GND STG1 DPO FIELD GND STG1 OP FIELD GND STG2 PKP FIELD GND STG2 DPO FIELD GND STG2 OP FIELD GND INJ UC PKP FIELD GND INJ UC DPO FIELD GND INJ UC OP FIELD OC PKP FIELD OC DPO FIELD OC OP FIELD UC PKP FIELD UC DPO FIELD UC OP GPM-F FAILURE OPERAND DESCRIPTION
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
Breaker 1 open command initiated Breaker 1 close command initiated Breaker 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts) Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another) Breaker 1 phase A is closed Breaker 1 phase A is open Breaker 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts) Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another) Breaker 1 phase B is closed Breaker 1 phase B is open Breaker 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts) Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another) Breaker 1 phase C is closed Breaker 1 phase C is open Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole Breaker 1 is closed Breaker 1 is open Breaker 1 has discrepancy Breaker 1 trouble alarm Breaker 1 manual close Breaker 1 trip phase A command Breaker 1 trip phase B command Breaker 1 trip phase C command At least one pole of breaker 1 is open Only one pole of breaker 1 is open Breaker 1 is out of service Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1 Digital counter 1 output is more than comparison value Digital counter 1 output is equal to comparison value Digital counter 1 output is less than comparison value Same set of operands as shown for Counter 1 Digital Element 1 is picked up Digital Element 1 is operated Digital Element 1 is dropped out Same set of operands as shown for Dig Element 1 Stage 1 of the directional power element 1 has picked up Stage 2 of the directional power element 1 has picked up Stage 1 of the directional power element 1 has dropped out Stage 2 of the directional power element 1 has dropped out Stage 1 of the directional power element 1 has operated Stage 2 of the directional power element 1 has operated The directional power element has picked up The directional power element has dropped out The directional power element has operated Same set of operands as DIR POWER 1 ---------------------------------
GE Multilin
5-105
5.5 FLEXLOGIC Table 59: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 3 of 9)

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Frequency out-ofband accumulation OPERAND SYNTAX FREQ OOB BAND 1 PKP FREQ OOB BAND 1 DPO FREQ OOB BAND 1 OP FREQ OOB ACCUM PKP FREQ OOB ACCUM OP FREQ OOB BAND 2... ELEMENT Frequency rate of change ELEMENT: FlexElements FREQ RATE 1 PKP FREQ RATE 1 DPO FREQ RATE 1 OP FREQ RATE 2 to FREQ RATE 4 FxE 1 PKP FxE 1 OP FxE 1 DPO FxE 2 to FxE 16 ELEMENT: Generator unbalance GEN UNBAL STG1 PKP GEN UNBAL STG1 DPO GEN UNBAL STG1 OP GEN UNBAL STG2 PKP GEN UNBAL STG2 DPO GEN UNBAL STG2 OP GEN UNBAL PKP GEN UNBAL DPO GEN UNBAL OP GROUND IOC1 PKP GROUND IOC1 OP GROUND IOC1 DPO GROUND TOC1 PKP GROUND TOC1 OP GROUND TOC1 DPO LATCH 1 ON LATCH 1 OFF LATCH 2 to LATCH 16 ELEMENT: Loss of excitation LOSS EXCIT STG1 PKP LOSS EXCIT STG2 PKP LOSS EXCIT STG1 DPO LOSS EXCIT STG2 DPO LOSS EXCIT STG1 OP LOSS EXCIT STG2 OP LOSS EXCIT PKP LOSS EXCIT DPO LOSS EXCIT OP NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV NEG SEQ DIR OC2 FWD NEG SEQ DIR OC2 REV NEG SEQ OV1 PKP NEG SEQ OV1 DPO NEG SEQ OV1 OP NEG SEQ OV2... ELEMENT: Neutral instantaneous overcurrent ELEMENT: Neutral overvoltage ELEMENT: Neutral time overcurrent ELEMENT: Neutral directional overcurrent NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP NEUTRAL IOC1 OP NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO NEUTRAL OV1 PKP NEUTRAL OV1 DPO NEUTRAL OV1 OP NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP NEUTRAL TOC1 OP NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO NTRL DIR OC1 FWD NTRL DIR OC1 REV NTRL DIR OC2 OPERAND DESCRIPTION
5 SETTINGS
Asserted when the frequency accumulation in band 1 is active. Asserted when the frequency accumulation in band 1 is inactive. Asserted when the frequency accumulator in band 1 operates. Asserted when the frequency accumulator in any band is active. Asserted when The frequency accumulator in any band operates. The set of operands shown for band 1 above are available for bands 2 through 7. The frequency rate of change 1 element has picked up The frequency rate of change 1 element has dropped out The frequency rate of change 1 element has operated Same set of operands as shown for FREQ RATE 1 FlexElement 1 has picked up FlexElement 1 has operated FlexElement 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for FxE 1 The Generator Unbalance Stage 1 element has picked up The Generator Unbalance Stage 1 element has dropped out The Generator Unbalance Stage 1 element has operated The Generator Unbalance Stage 2 element has picked up The Generator Unbalance Stage 2 element has dropped out The Generator Unbalance Stage 2 element has operated The Generator Unbalance element has picked up The Generator Unbalance element has dropped out The Generator Unbalance element has operated Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out Ground time overcurrent 1 has picked up Ground time overcurrent 1 has operated Ground time overcurrent 1 has dropped out Non-volatile latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1) Non-volatile latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0) Same set of operands as shown for LATCH 1 Stage 1 of the loss of excitation element has picked up Stage 2 of the loss of excitation element has picked up Stage 1 of the loss of excitation element has dropped out Stage 2 of the loss of excitation element has dropped out Stage 1 of the loss of excitation element has operated Stage 2 of the loss of excitation element has operated The loss of excitation element has picked up The loss of excitation element has dropped out The loss of excitation element has operated Negative-sequence directional overcurrent 1 forward has operated Negative-sequence directional overcurrent 1 reverse has operated Negative-sequence directional overcurrent 2 forward has operated Negative-sequence directional overcurrent 2 reverse has operated Negative-sequence overvoltage element has picked up Negative-sequence overvoltage element has dropped out Negative-sequence overvoltage element has operated Same set of operands as shown for NEG SEQ OV1 Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated Neutral instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out Neutral overvoltage element 1 has picked up Neutral overvoltage element 1 has dropped out Neutral overvoltage element 1 has operated Neutral time overcurrent 1 has picked up Neutral time overcurrent 1 has operated Neutral time overcurrent 1 has dropped out Neutral directional overcurrent 1 forward has operated Neutral directional overcurrent 1 reverse has operated Same set of operands as shown for NTRL DIR OC1
ELEMENT: Ground instantaneous overcurrent ELEMENT: Ground time overcurrent ELEMENT Non-volatile latches
ELEMENT: Negative-sequence directional overcurrent ELEMENT: Negative-sequence overvoltage
5-106
GE Multilin

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Overfrequency OPERAND SYNTAX OVERFREQ 1 PKP OVERFREQ 1 OP OVERFREQ 1 DPO OVERFREQ 2 to 4 ELEMENT: Synchrophasor phasor data concentrator ELEMENT: Phase directional overcurrent ELEMENT: Phase distance PDC NETWORK CNTRL 1 PDC NETWORK CNTRL 2 PDC NETWORK CNTRL 16 PH DIR1 BLK A PH DIR1 BLK B PH DIR1 BLK C PH DIR1 BLK PH DIST Z1 PKP PH DIST Z1 OP PH DIST Z1 OP AB PH DIST Z1 OP BC PH DIST Z1 OP CA PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 PKP BC PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA PH DIST Z1 DPO AB PH DIST Z1 DPO BC PH DIST Z1 DPO CA PH DIST Z2 to Z3 ELEMENT: Phase instantaneous overcurrent PHASE IOC1 PKP PHASE IOC1 OP PHASE IOC1 DPO PHASE IOC1 PKP A PHASE IOC1 PKP B PHASE IOC1 PKP C PHASE IOC1 OP A PHASE IOC1 OP B PHASE IOC1 OP C PHASE IOC1 DPO A PHASE IOC1 DPO B PHASE IOC1 DPO C PHASE IOC2 ELEMENT: Phase overvoltage PHASE OV1 PKP PHASE OV1 OP PHASE OV1 DPO PHASE OV1 PKP A PHASE OV1 PKP B PHASE OV1 PKP C PHASE OV1 OP A PHASE OV1 OP B PHASE OV1 OP C PHASE OV1 DPO A PHASE OV1 DPO B PHASE OV1 DPO C PHASE TOC1 PKP PHASE TOC1 OP PHASE TOC1 DPO PHASE TOC1 PKP A PHASE TOC1 PKP B PHASE TOC1 PKP C PHASE TOC1 OP A PHASE TOC1 OP B PHASE TOC1 OP C PHASE TOC1 DPO A PHASE TOC1 DPO B PHASE TOC1 DPO C OPERAND DESCRIPTION Overfrequency 1 has picked up Overfrequency 1 has operated Overfrequency 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for OVERFREQ 1
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 1 as received via the network Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 2 as received via the network Phasor data concentrator asserts control bit 16 as received via the network Phase A directional 1 block Phase B directional 1 block Phase C directional 1 block Phase directional 1 block Phase distance zone 1 has picked up Phase distance zone 1 has operated Phase distance zone 1 phase AB has operated Phase distance zone 1 phase BC has operated Phase distance zone 1 phase CA has operated Phase distance zone 1 phase AB has picked up Phase distance zone 1 phase BC has picked up Phase distance zone 1 phase CA has picked up Phase distance zone 1 phase AB IOC is supervising Phase distance zone 1 phase BC IOC is supervising Phase distance zone 1 phase CA IOC is supervising Phase distance zone 1 phase AB has dropped out Phase distance zone 1 phase BC has dropped out Phase distance zone 1 phase CA has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for PH DIST Z1 At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated All phases of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 have dropped out Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1 At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has picked up At least one phase of overvoltage 1 has operated All phases of overvoltage 1 have dropped out Phase A of overvoltage 1 has picked up Phase B of overvoltage 1 has picked up Phase C of overvoltage 1 has picked up Phase A of overvoltage 1 has operated Phase B of overvoltage 1 has operated Phase C of overvoltage 1 has operated Phase A of overvoltage 1 has dropped out Phase B of overvoltage 1 has dropped out Phase C of overvoltage 1 has dropped out At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated All phases of phase time overcurrent 1 have dropped out Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
ELEMENT: Phase time overcurrent
GE Multilin
5-107

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Phase undervoltage OPERAND SYNTAX PHASE UV1 PKP PHASE UV1 OP PHASE UV1 DPO PHASE UV1 PKP A PHASE UV1 PKP B PHASE UV1 PKP C PHASE UV1 OP A PHASE UV1 OP B PHASE UV1 OP C PHASE UV1 DPO A PHASE UV1 DPO B PHASE UV1 DPO C PHASE UV2 ELEMENT: Synchrophasor phasor measurement unit (PMU) PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 TRIGGERED ELEMENT: Synchrophasor oneshot PMU ONE-SHOT EXPIRED PMU ONE-SHOT OP PMU ONE-SHOT PENDING ELEMENT: Power swing detect POWER SWING OUTER POWER SWING MIDDLE POWER SWING INNER POWER SWING BLOCK POWER SWING TMR1 PKP POWER SWING TMR2 PKP POWER SWING TMR3 PKP POWER SWING TMR4 PKP POWER SWING TRIP POWER SWING 50DD POWER SWING INCOMING POWER SWING OUTGOING POWER SWING UN/BLOCK RESTD GND FT1 PKP RESTD GND FT1 OP RESTD GND FT1 DPO RESTD GND FT2 to FT4 ELEMENT: Remote RTD protection RRTD COMM FAIL RRTD RTD 1 ALARM DPO RRTD RTD 1 ALARM OP RRTD RTD 1 ALARM PKP RRTD RTD 1 OPEN RRTD RTD 1 SHORTED RRTD RTD 1 TRIP DPO RRTD RTD 1 TRIP OP RRTD RTD 1 TRIP PKP RRTD RTD 2... ELEMENT: RTD protection RTD Ip 1 ALARM DPO RTD Ip 1 ALARM OP RTD Ip 1 ALARM PKP RTD Ip 1 OPEN RTD Ip 1 SHORTED RTD Ip 1 TRIP DPO RTD Ip 1 TRIP OP RTD Ip 1 TRIP PKP RTD Ip 2... OPERAND DESCRIPTION At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up At least one phase of phase undervoltage 1 has operated All phases of phase undervoltage 1 have dropped out Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has picked up Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has operated Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has operated Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has operated Phase A of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out Phase B of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out Phase C of phase undervoltage 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1
5 SETTINGS
Overcurrent trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated Abnormal frequency trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated Overpower trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated Rate of change of frequency trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated Abnormal voltage trigger of phasor measurement unit 1 has operated Phasor measurement unit 1 triggered; no events or targets are generated by this operand Indicates the one-shot operation has been executed, and the present time is at least 30 seconds past the scheduled one-shot time Indicates the one-shot operation and remains asserted for 30 seconds afterwards Indicates the one-shot operation is pending; that is, the present time is before the scheduled one-shot time Positive-sequence impedance in outer characteristic Positive-sequence impedance in middle characteristic Positive-sequence impedance in inner characteristic Power swing blocking element operated Power swing timer 1 picked up Power swing timer 2 picked up Power swing timer 3 picked up Power swing timer 4 picked up Out-of-step tripping operated The power swing element detected a disturbance other than power swing An unstable power swing has been detected (incoming locus) An unstable power swing has been detected (outgoing locus) Asserted when a fault occurs after the power swing blocking condition has been established Restricted ground fault 1 has picked up. Restricted ground fault 1 has operated. Restricted ground fault 1 has dropped out. Same set of operands as shown for RESTD GND FT1 Asserted when RRTD loss of communications is detected. Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 alarm stage drops out. Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 alarm stage operates. Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 alarm stage picks up. Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 detects an open circuit. Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 detects an short/low circuit. Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 trip stage drops out. Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 trip stage operates. Asserted when the RRTD RTD 1 trip stage picks up. The set of operands shown above are available for RRTD RTD 2 and higher Asserted when the alarm stage of RTD input 1 protection picks up. Asserted when the alarm stage of RTD input 1 protection operates. Asserted when the alarm stage of RTD input 1 protection drops out. Asserted when RTD input 1 detects an open circuit. Asserted when RTD input 1 detects a shorted or low circuit. Asserted when the trip stage of RTD input 1 protection picks up. Asserted when the trip stage of RTD input 1 protection operates. Asserted when the trip stage of RTD input 1 protection drops out. The set of operands shown above are available for the RTD Ip 2 and higher elements
ELEMENT: Restricted ground fault
5-108
GE Multilin

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Selector switch OPERAND SYNTAX SELECTOR 1 POS Y SELECTOR 1 BIT 0 SELECTOR 1 BIT 1 SELECTOR 1 BIT 2 SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM SELECTOR 1 ALARM SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM SELECTOR 2 ELEMENT: Setting group SETTING GROUP ACT 1 SETTING GROUP ACT 2 SETTING GROUP ACT 3 SETTING GROUP ACT 4 SETTING GROUP ACT 5 SETTING GROUP ACT 6 OPERAND DESCRIPTION
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
Selector switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands) First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1 Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1 Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1 Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control input but not acknowledged Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but not acknowledged Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged Position of selector switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when the relay powers up and synchronizes to the three-bit input Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1 Setting group 1 is active Setting group 2 is active Setting group 3 is active Setting group 4 is active Setting group 5 is active Setting group 6 is active ------------------------Phase A of the split phase protection has picked up Phase A of the split phase protection has dropped out Phase A of the split phase protection has operated Phase B of the split phase protection has picked up Phase B of the split phase protection has dropped out Phase B of the split phase protection has operated Phase C of the split phase protection has picked up Phase C of the split phase protection has dropped out Phase C of the split phase protection has operated The split phase protection has operated The split phase protection has picked up The split phase protection has dropped out Source 1 VT fuse failure detector has operated Source 1 VT fuse failure detector has dropped out Source 1 has lost voltage signals (V2 below 15% AND V1 below 5% of nominal) Same set of operands as shown for SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL At least one phase of stator differential has operated Phase A of stator differential has picked up Phase B of stator differential has picked up Phase C of stator differential has picked up Phase A of stator differential has operated Phase B of stator differential has operated Phase C of stator differential has operated Phase A of stator differential has dropped out Phase B of stator differential has dropped out Phase C of stator differential has dropped out Phase A of stator differential has is saturated Phase B of stator differential has is saturated Phase C of stator differential has is saturated Phase A of stator differential phase comparison has been satisfied Phase B of stator differential phase comparison has been satisfied Phase C of stator differential phase comparison has been satisfied
ELEMENT: SH STAT GND STG1 PKP Sub-harmonic stator SH STAT GND STG1 DPO ground fault detector SH STAT GND STG1 OP SH STAT GND STG2 PKP SH STAT GND STG2 DPO SH STAT GND STG2 OP SH STAT GND OC PKP SH STAT GND OC DPO SH STAT GND OC OP SH STAT GND TRB PKP SH STAT GND TRB DPO SH STAT GND TRB OP ELEMENT: Split phase protection SPLIT PHASE A PKP SPLIT PHASE A DPO SPLIT PHASE A OP SPLIT PHASE B PKP SPLIT PHASE B DPO SPLIT PHASE B OP SPLIT PHASE C PKP SPLIT PHASE C DPO SPLIT PHASE C OP SPLIT PHASE OP SPLIT PHASE PKP SPLIT PHASE DPO SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS SRC2 VT FUSE FAIL to SRC4 VT FUSE FAIL ELEMENT: Stator differential STATOR DIFF OP STATOR DIFF PKP A STATOR DIFF PKP B STATOR DIFF PKP C STATOR DIFF OP A STATOR DIFF OP B STATOR DIFF OP C STATOR DIFF DPO A STATOR DIFF DPO B STATOR DIFF DPO C STATOR DIFF SAT A STATOR DIFF SAT B STATOR DIFF SAT C STATOR DIFF DIR A STATOR DIFF DIR B STATOR DIFF DIR C
ELEMENT: VTFF (Voltage transformer fuse failure)
GE Multilin
5-109

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Disconnect switch OPERAND SYNTAX SWITCH 1 OFF CMD SWITCH 1 ON CMD SWITCH 1 A BAD ST SWITCH 1 A INTERM SWITCH 1 A CLSD SWITCH 1 A OPEN SWITCH 1 B BAD ST SWITCH 1 A INTERM SWITCH 1 B CLSD SWITCH 1 B OPEN SWITCH 1 C BAD ST SWITCH 1 A INTERM SWITCH 1 C CLSD SWITCH 1 C OPEN SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS SWITCH 1 CLOSED SWITCH 1 OPEN SWITCH 1 DISCREP SWITCH 1 TROUBLE SWITCH 2... ELEMENT: Synchrocheck SYNC 1 DEAD S OP SYNC 1 DEAD S DPO SYNC 1 SYNC OP SYNC 1 SYNC DPO SYNC 1 CLS OP SYNC 1 CLS DPO SYNC 1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC 1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC 1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC 1 V2 BELOW MAX SYNC 2 ELEMENT: Teleprotection channel tests TELEPRO CH1 FAIL TELEPRO CH2 FAIL TELEPRO CH1 ID FAIL TELEPRO CH2 ID FAIL TELEPRO CH1 CRC FAIL TELEPRO CH2 CRC FAIL TELEPRO CH1 PKT LOST TELEPRO CH2 PKT LOST TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On TELEPRO INPUT 1-16 On TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On TELEPRO INPUT 2-16 On TRIP BUS 1 PKP TRIP BUS 1 OP TRIP BUS 2... ELEMENT: Underfrequency UNDERFREQ 1 PKP UNDERFREQ 1 OP UNDERFREQ 1 DPO UNDERFREQ 2 to 6 ELEMENT: Volts per hertz VOLT PER HERTZ 1 PKP VOLT PER HERTZ 1 OP VOLT PER HERTZ 1 DPO VOLT PER HERTZ 2 FIXED OPERANDS Off On OPERAND DESCRIPTION
5 SETTINGS
Disconnect switch 1 open command initiated Disconnect switch 1 close command initiated Disconnect switch 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts) Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another) Disconnect switch 1 phase A is closed Disconnect switch 1 phase A is open Disconnect switch 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts) Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another) Disconnect switch 1 phase B is closed Disconnect switch 1 phase B is open Disconnect switch 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts) Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another) Disconnect switch 1 phase C is closed Disconnect switch 1 phase C is open Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole Disconnect switch 1 is closed Disconnect switch 1 is open Disconnect switch 1 has discrepancy Disconnect switch 1 trouble alarm Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1 Synchrocheck 1 dead source has operated Synchrocheck 1 dead source has dropped out Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has operated Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has dropped out Synchrocheck 1 close has operated Synchrocheck 1 close has dropped out Synchrocheck 1 V1 is above the minimum live voltage Synchrocheck 1 V1 is below the maximum dead voltage Synchrocheck 1 V2 is above the minimum live voltage Synchrocheck 1 V2 is below the maximum dead voltage Same set of operands as shown for SYNC 1 Channel 1 failed Channel 2 failed The ID check for a peer relay on channel 1 has failed The ID check for a peer relay on channel 2 has failed CRC detected packet corruption on channel 1 CRC detected packet corruption on channel 2 CRC detected lost packet on channel 1 CRC detected lost packet on channel 2 Flag is set, Logic =1 Flag is set, Logic =1 Flag is set, Logic =1 Flag is set, Logic =1 Asserted when the trip bus 1 element picks up. Asserted when the trip bus 1 element operates. Same set of operands as shown for TRIP BUS 1 Underfrequency 1 has picked up Underfrequency 1 has operated Underfrequency 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for UNDERFREQ 1 above The volts per hertz element 1 has picked up The volts per hertz element 1 has operated The volts per hertz element 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as VOLT PER HERTZ 1 above Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list; used as Disable by other features. Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
ELEMENT: Teleprotection inputs/outputs
ELEMENT Trip bus
5-110
GE Multilin

OPERAND TYPE INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact inputs OPERAND SYNTAX Cont Ip 1 Cont Ip 2 Cont Ip 1 Cont Ip 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 On On Off Off IOn IOn OPERAND DESCRIPTION (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered)
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact outputs, current (from detector on form-A output only) INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact outputs, voltage (from detector on form-A output only) INPUTS/OUTPUTS Direct inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Remote doublepoint status inputs
Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2
VOn VOn VOff VOff
(will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the bad state. Asserted while the remote double-point status input is in the intermediate state. Asserted while the remote double-point status input is off. Asserted while the remote double-point status input is on. Same set of operands as per REMDPS 1 above Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on. Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on. Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on. Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on. Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on. Asserted when the front panel PICKUP LED is on. Asserted when the front panel VOLTAGE LED is on. Asserted when the front panel CURRENT LED is on. Asserted when the front panel FREQUENCY LED is on. Asserted when the front panel OTHER LED is on. Asserted when the front panel PHASE A LED is on. Asserted when the front panel PHASE B LED is on. Asserted when the front panel PHASE C LED is on. Asserted when the front panel NEUTRAL/GROUND LED is on. An LED test has been initiated and has not finished. Asserted when user-programmable LED 1 is on. The operand above is available for user-programmable LEDs 2 through 48. Asserted when local setting access is disabled. Asserted when local setting access is enabled. Asserted when local command access is disabled. Asserted when local command access is enabled. Asserted when remote setting access is disabled. Asserted when remote setting access is enabled. Asserted when remote command access is disabled. Asserted when remote command access is enabled. Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password protected level of the G60.
DIRECT INPUT 1 On DIRECT INPUT 32 On RemDPS Ip 1 BAD RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM RemDPS Ip 1 OFF RemDPS Ip 1 ON REMDPS Ip 2...
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Remote inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virtual inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virtual outputs LED INDICATORS: Fixed front panel LEDs
REMOTE INPUT 1 On REMOTE INPUT 32 On Virt Ip 1 On Virt Ip 64 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 96 On LED IN SERVICE LED TROUBLE LED TEST MODE LED TRIP LED ALARM LED PICKUP LED VOLTAGE LED CURRENT LED FREQUENCY LED OTHER LED PHASE A LED PHASE B LED PHASE C LED NEUTRAL/GROUND LED TEST IN PROGRESS LED USER 1 LED USER 2 to 48 ACCESS LOC SETG OFF ACCESS LOC SETG ON ACCESS LOC CMND OFF ACCESS LOC CMND ON ACCESS REM SETG OFF ACCESS REM SETG ON ACCESS REM CMND OFF ACCESS REM CMND ON UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
LED INDICATORS: LED test LED INDICATORS: User-programmable LEDs PASSWORD SECURITY
GE Multilin
5-111

OPERAND TYPE REMOTE DEVICES OPERAND SYNTAX REMOTE DEVICE 1 On REMOTE DEVICE 16 On REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off RESETTING RESET OP RESET OP (COMMS) RESET OP (OPERAND) RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON) SELFDIAGNOSTICS ANY MAJOR ERROR ANY MINOR ERROR ANY SELF-TESTS BATTERY FAIL DIRECT DEVICE OFF DIRECT RING BREAK EQUIPMENT MISMATCH ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN IRIG-B FAILURE LATCHING OUT ERROR MAINTENANCE ALERT PORT 1 OFFLINE PORT 2 OFFLINE PORT 3 OFFLINE PORT 4 OFFLINE PORT 5 OFFLINE PORT 6 OFFLINE PRI ETHERNET FAIL PROCESS BUS FAILURE REMOTE DEVICE OFF RRTD COMM FAIL SEC ETHERNET FAIL SNTP FAILURE SYSTEM EXCEPTION TEMP MONITOR UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED TEMP MONITOR PUSHBUTTON 1 ON PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF ANY PB ON PUSHBUTTON 2 to 12 OPERAND DESCRIPTION Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1
5 SETTINGS
Reset command is operated (set by all three operands below). Communications source of the reset command. Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu) source of the reset command. Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command. Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error) Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error) Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error) See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets Asserted while the ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature (80C) Pushbutton number 1 is in the On position Pushbutton number 1 is in the Off position Any of twelve pushbuttons is in the On position Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1
TEMPERATURE MONITOR USERPROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID (identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name or ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in the FlexLogic operands table above. The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the FlexLogic operators table. Table 510: FLEXLOGIC GATE CHARACTERISTICS
GATES NOT OR AND NOR NAND XOR NUMBER OF INPUTS 1 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 OUTPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF... input is 0 any input is 1 all inputs are 1 all inputs are 0 any input is 0 only one input is 1
5-112
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
Table 511: FLEXLOGIC OPERATORS

TYPE Editor End One-shot SYNTAX INSERT DELETE END DESCRIPTION Insert a parameter in an equation list. Delete a parameter from an equation list. The first END encountered signifies the last entry in the list of processed FlexLogic parameters. One shot that responds to a negative going edge. One shot that responds to both the positive and negative going edges. Logical NOT 2 input OR gate 16 input OR gate 2 input AND gate 16 input AND gate 2 input NOR gate 16 input NOR gate 2 input NAND gate 16 input NAND gate 2 input Exclusive OR gate Latch (set, reset): reset-dominant A one shot refers to a single input gate that generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input. The output from a one shot is True (positive) for only one pass through the FlexLogic equation. There is a maximum of 64 one shots. Operates on the previous parameter. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is the reset input. The parameter preceding the reset input is the set input. The timer is started by the preceding parameter. The output of the timer is TIMER #. The virtual output is set by the preceding parameter NOTES
POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge. NEGATIVE ONE SHOT DUAL ONE SHOT
Logic gate
NOT OR(2) OR(16) AND(2) AND(16) NOR(2) NOR(16) NAND(2) NAND(16) XOR(2) LATCH (S,R)
Timer
TIMER 1 TIMER 32 = Virt Op 1 = Virt Op 96
Timer set with FlexLogic timer 1 settings. Timer set with FlexLogic timer 32 settings. Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual output 1. Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual output 96.
Assign virtual output
5.5.2 FLEXLOGIC RULES When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules: 1. 2. 3. 4. Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as an input to two or more operators. Assigning the output of an operator to a virtual output terminates the equation. A timer operator (for example, "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (for example, " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once. If this rule is broken, a syntax error will be declared. 5.5.3 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered. FlexLogic provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; that is, they reset on the re-application of control power. When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting value is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic during testing, for example, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-113
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS 5.5.4 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE
This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite important as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation. In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce virtual outputs 1 and 2, and is only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic, it is important to make a note of each virtual output used a virtual output designation (1 to 96) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated Timer 1 AND Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed
827025A2.vsd
Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms) Operate Output Relay H1
Figure 544: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME
1.
Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits, which is unlikely but possible. If the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25 inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs from these two gates to AND(2). Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a virtual output. For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must therefore be made a virtual output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output must also be assigned to a virtual output as virtual output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section to operate relay H1 (that is, contact output H1). Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic equations with outputs of virtual output 3 and virtual output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated Timer 1 AND Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827026A2.VSD
Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms) VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
Figure 545: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
5-114
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 2.
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce virtual output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the virtual output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific virtual output). The logic for virtual output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated AND(2) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed
827027A2.VSD
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
Figure 546: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 3. Prepare a logic diagram for virtual output 4, replacing the logic ahead of virtual output 3 with a symbol identified as virtual output 3, as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup Timer 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 State=ON CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms)
827028A2.VSD
Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
Figure 547: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 4. Program the FlexLogic equation for virtual output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic parameters. The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99, and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic, it is suggested that a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.
01 02 03 04 05
.....
97 98 99
827029A1.VSD
Figure 548: FLEXLOGIC WORKSHEET 5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows: 99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter is therefore "= Virt Op 3."
GE Multilin
5-115
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2input AND so the parameter is AND(2). Note that FlexLogic rules require that the number of inputs to most types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower. 97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is NOT. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next. 96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact. The operand is therefore Cont Ip H1c On. 95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2. This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP". Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for virtual output 3: [95] [96] [97] [98] [99] DIG ELEM 2 OP Cont Ip H1c On NOT AND(2) = Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 3 diagram as a check.
95
96 97 98 99
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: DIG ELEM 2 OP FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Cont Ip H1c On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: NOT FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: AND (2) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: =Virt Op 3
AND
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827030A2.VSD
Figure 549: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 6. Repeating the process described for virtual output 3, select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4. 99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 4 which is parameter = Virt Op 4". 98: The operator preceding the output is timer 2, which is operand TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the timer are established in the timer programming section. 97: The operator preceding timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter OR(3). 96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand Cont Ip H1c On. 95: The center input to OR #2 is operand TIMER 1". 94: The input to timer 1 is operand Virt Op 3 On". 93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand LATCH (S,R). 92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which is parameter OR(4). 91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 3 On". 90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand XOR(2). 89: The lower input to the XOR is operand DIG ELEM 1 PKP. 88: The upper input to the XOR is operand Virt Ip 1 On". 87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 2 On". 86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 1 On". 85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand Virt Op 4 On".
5-116
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS The equation for virtual output 4 is: [85] [86] [87] [88] [89] [90] [91] [92] [93] [94] [95] [96] [97] [98] [99] Virt Op 4 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Ip 1 On DIG ELEM 1 PKP XOR(2) Virt Op 3 On OR(4) LATCH (S,R) Virt Op 3 On TIMER 1 Cont Ip H1c On OR(3) TIMER 2 = Virt Op 4
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 4 diagram as a check.
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 4 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 1 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 2 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Ip 1 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: DIG ELEM 1 PKP FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: XOR FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 3 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OR (4) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: LATCH (S,R) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 3 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: TIMER 1 FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Cont Ip H1c On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OR (3) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: TIMER 2 FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: =Virt Op 4
85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99
Set LATCH XOR OR Reset
OR
T2
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
T1
827031A2.VSD
Figure 550: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 7. Now write the complete FlexLogic expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service. In the following equation, virtual output 3 is used as an input to both latch 1 and timer 1 as arranged in the order shown below: DIG ELEM 2 OP Cont Ip H1c On NOT AND(2)
GE Multilin
5-117
5.5 FLEXLOGIC = Virt Op 3 Virt Op 4 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Ip 1 On DIG ELEM 1 PKP XOR(2) Virt Op 3 On OR(4) LATCH (S,R) Virt Op 3 On TIMER 1 Cont Ip H1c On OR(3) TIMER 2 = Virt Op 4 END
5 SETTINGS
In the expression above, the virtual output 4 input to the four-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct. 8. The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past. Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic equations. The equations will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator. The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
5.5.5 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

MESSAGE
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY END FLEXLOGIC ENTRY END
1: 2:
MESSAGE
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512: END
There are 512 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag will never be set to 1. The +/ key may be used when editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types. 5.5.6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)
FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1
MESSAGE
TIMER 1 TYPE: millisecond TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: 0 TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: 0
Range: millisecond, second, minute
MESSAGE
There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations. TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit. TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0".
5-118
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0". 5.5.7 FLEXELEMENTS
PATH: SETTING FLEXLOGIC FLEXELEMENTS FLEXELEMENT 1(16)
FLEXELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME: FxE1 FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: Off FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: Off FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE: Signed FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE: Level FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION: Over FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS: 3.0% FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: milliseconds FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: 20 FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY: 0.000 s FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY: 0.000 s FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK: Off FLEXELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset FLEXELEMENT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Signed, Absolute
MESSAGE
Range: Level, Delta
MESSAGE
Range: Over, Under
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
A FlexElement is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice. The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as per user's choice.
GE Multilin
5-119
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
SETTING FLEXELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0 SETTING FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK: AND Off = 0 SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: RUN Actual Value FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: Actual Value
SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE: FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE: FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION: FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP: FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT HYSTERESIS: FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY: FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FxE 1 OP
+ -
tPKP tRST
FxE 1 DPO FxE 1 PKP
ACTUAL VALUE FlexElement 1 OpSig

842004A3.CDR
Figure 551: FLEXELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element will not assert its output operands. This FLEXELEMENT 1 IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build the effective operating signal. The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to Signed. The element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to Absolute. Sample applications for the Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of decreases. The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Level. The element responds to the rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Delta. In this case the FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS settings.
5-120
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Over
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Under
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842705A1.CDR
Figure 552: FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra characteristics as shown in the figure below.
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Over; FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE = Signed;
5
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Over; FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Under; FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Under; FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A2.CDR
Figure 553: FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE SETTING
GE Multilin
5-121
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
5 SETTINGS
The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set to Over, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to Under, the element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units: Table 512: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS
dcmA FIELD CURRENT FIELD GROUND CURRENT FIELD GROUND FAULT LOCATION FIELD GROUND INJECTED VOLTAGE FIELD GROUND RESISTANCE FIELD VOLTAGE FREQUENCY FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE PHASE ANGLE BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the +IN and IN inputs. IBASE = maximum value setting defined for the specific transducer input configured IBASE = 5 mA BASE = 100% VBASE = 15 V RBASE = 250 K VBASE = 500 V fBASE = 1 Hz df/dtBASE = 1 Hz/s BASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention) PFBASE = 1.00 BASE = 100C PBASE = maximum value of 3 VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs of the sources configured for the sensitive power directional element(s). IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively PBASE = maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents) VBASE = Primary auxiliary voltage of the STATOR GROUND SOURCE RBASE = 10 K VBASE = nominal secondary voltage of auxiliary VT for the stator ground source IBASE = ground CT primary current of stator ground source IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents) VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and IN inputs BASE = 1.00 pu
POWER FACTOR RTDs SENSITIVE DIR POWER (Sns Dir Power) SOURCE CURRENT SOURCE ENERGY (Positive and Negative Watthours, Positive and Negative Varhours) SOURCE POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE STATOR DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT (Stator Diff Iar, Ibr, and Icr) STATOR GROUND 3RD HARMONIC VOLTAGES (Stator Gnd Vn/V0 3rd) STATOR GROUND RESISTANCE STATOR GROUND SUBHARMONIC VOLTAGE STATOR GROUND SUBHARMONIC CURRENT STATOR RESTRAINING CURRENT (Stator Diff Iad, Ibd, and Icd) SYNCHROCHECK (Max Delta Volts) VOLTS PER HERTZ
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting defines the pickupdropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement direction, pickup, and hysteresis diagram.
5-122
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 FLEXLOGIC
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT setting specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT setting specifies duration of the time interval for the rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta. This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting specifies the reset delay of the element. 5.5.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC NON-VOLATILE LATCHES LATCH 1(16)
LATCH 1
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 FUNCTION: Disabled LATCH 1 TYPE: Reset Dominant LATCH 1 SET: Off LATCH 1 RESET: Off LATCH 1 TARGET: Self-reset LATCH 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as Autorecloser, until a deliberate interface action resets the latch. The settings element operation is described below: LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant. LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operands 'sets' Latch 1. LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operand 'resets' Latch 1.
SETTING
LATCH N TYPE Reset Dominant
LATCH N SET ON OFF ON OFF
LATCH N RESET OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
LATCH N ON ON Previous State OFF OFF ON ON Previous State OFF
LATCH N OFF OFF Previous State ON ON OFF OFF Previous State ON
LATCH 1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING LATCH 1 SET: Off=0 SETTING LATCH 1 SET: Off=0
SETTING LATCH 1 TYPE: RUN
Set Dominant
ON ON OFF OFF
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SET LATCH 1 ON LATCH 1 OFF
RESET
842005A1.CDR
Figure 554: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N = 1 to 16) AND LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-123
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to setting group designations 1 to 6. The performance of these elements is defined by the active setting group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (for example, altered power system configuration, season of the year, etc.). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the Control elements section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to elements section at the beginning of this chapter. 5.6.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6)
SETTING GROUP 1
MESSAGE
DISTANCE POWER SWING DETECT STATOR DIFFERENTIAL PHASE CURRENT NEUTRAL CURRENT GROUND CURRENT NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT GENERATOR UNBALANCE SPLIT PHASE VOLTAGE ELEMENTS LOSS OF EXCITATION ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION POWER STATOR GROUND FIELD GROUND
See page 5125. See page 5133. See page 5141. See page 5144. See page 5155. See page 5162. See page 5169. See page 5173. See page 5175. See page 5179. See page 5189. See page 5-191. See page 5-193. See page 5-196. See page 5-205.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Each of the six setting group menus is identical. Setting group 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active if no other group is active (see the Control elements section for additional details).
5-124
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.3 DISTANCE
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE
DISTANCE
MESSAGE
DISTANCE SOURCE: SRC 1 MEMORY DURATION: 10 cycles FORCE SELF-POLAR: Off FORCE MEM-POLAR: Off PHASE DISTANCE Z1 PHASE DISTANCE Z2 PHASE DISTANCE Z3
Range: 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Four common settings are available for distance protection. The DISTANCE SOURCE identifies the signal source for all distance functions. The mho distance functions use a dynamic characteristic: the positive-sequence voltage either memorized or actual is used as a polarizing signal. The memory voltage is also used by the built-in directional supervising functions applied for both the mho and quad characteristics. The MEMORY DURATION setting specifies the length of time a memorized positive-sequence voltage should be used in the distance calculations. After this interval expires, the relay checks the magnitude of the actual positive-sequence voltage. If it is higher than 10% of the nominal, the actual voltage is used, if lower the memory voltage continues to be used. The memory is established when the positive-sequence voltage stays above 80% of its nominal value for five power system cycles. For this reason it is important to ensure that the nominal secondary voltage of the VT is entered correctly under the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK menu. Set MEMORY DURATION long enough to ensure stability on close-in reverse three-phase faults. For this purpose, the maximum fault clearing time (breaker fail time) in the substation should be considered. On the other hand, the MEMORY DURATION cannot be too long as the power system may experience power swing conditions rotating the voltage and current phasors slowly while the memory voltage is static, as frozen at the beginning of the fault. Keeping the memory in effect for too long may eventually lead to incorrect operation of the distance functions. The distance zones can be forced to become self-polarized through the FORCE SELF-POLAR setting. Any user-selected condition (FlexLogic operand) can be configured to force self-polarization. When the selected operand is asserted (logic 1), the distance functions become self-polarized regardless of other memory voltage logic conditions. When the selected operand is de-asserted (logic 0), the distance functions follow other conditions of the memory voltage logic as shown below. The distance zones can be forced to become memory-polarized through the FORCE MEM-POLAR setting. Any user-selected condition (any FlexLogic operand) can be configured to force memory polarization. When the selected operand is asserted (logic 1), the distance functions become memory-polarized regardless of the positive-sequence voltage magnitude at this time. When the selected operand is de-asserted (logic 0), the distance functions follow other conditions of the memory voltage logic. The FORCE SELF-POLAR and FORCE MEM-POLAR settings should never be asserted simultaneously. If this happens, the logic will give higher priority to forcing self-polarization as indicated in the logic below. This is consistent with the overall philosophy of distance memory polarization. The memory polarization cannot be applied permanently but for a limited time only; the self-polarization may be applied permanently and therefore should take higher priority.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-125
5 SETTINGS
SETTING Force Memory Polarization Off = 0
Update memory
AND RUN
SETTING Distance Source = VA, Vrms_A = VB, Vrms_B = VC, Vrms_C = V_1 = IA = IB = IC
| V_1 | < 1.15 pu | Vrms | V | | < Vrms / 8 | Vrms | V | | < Vrms / 8 | Vrms | V | | < Vrms / 8 | V_1 | > 0.80 pu | IA | < 0.05 pu | IB | < 0.05 pu | IC | < 0.05 pu | V_1 | < 0.10 pu
TIMER 5 cycles
AND
SETTING Memory duration 0

AND
0 TIMER 6 cycles
AND
S Q
Treset
AND
Use V_1 memory

OR
OR
R
AND
Use V_1
SETTING Force Self Polarization Off = 0
827842A7.CDR
Figure 555: MEMORY VOLTAGE LOGIC b) PHASE DISTANCE

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE PHASE DISTANCE Z1(Z3)
PHASE DISTANCE Z1
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHS DIST Z1 DIR: Forward PHS DIST Z1 SHAPE: Mho PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION: None PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION: None PHS DIST Z1 REACH: 2.00 ohms PHS DIST Z1 RCA: 85 PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH: 2.00 ohms PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA: 85 PHS DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: 90 PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA: 85 PHS DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: 90 PHS DIST Z1 SUPV: 0.200 pu PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: 0.000 pu PHS DIST Z1 DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: Forward, Reverse, Non-directional
Range: Mho. This value is fixed and cannot be changed.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: None, Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7, Dy9, Dy11, Yd1, Yd3, Yd5, Yd7, Yd9, Yd11 Range: None, Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7, Dy9, Dy11, Yd1, Yd3, Yd5, Yd7, Yd9, Yd11 Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5-126
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
PHS DIST Z1 BLK: Off PHS DIST Z1 TARGET: Self-reset PHS DIST Z1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The phase mho distance function uses a dynamic 100% memory-polarized mho characteristic with additional reactance, directional, and overcurrent supervising characteristics. When set to Non-directional, the mho function becomes an offset mho with the reverse reach controlled independently from the forward reach, and all the directional characteristics removed. Each phase distance zone is configured individually through its own setting menu. All of the settings can be independently modified for each of the zones except: 1. 2. The SIGNAL SOURCE setting (common for the distance ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE). elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS GROUPED
The MEMORY DURATION setting (common for the distance elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE).
The common distance settings described earlier must be properly chosen for correct operation of the phase distance elements. Additional details may be found in chapter 8: Theory of operation. Ensure that the PHASE VT SECONDARY VOLTAGE setting (see the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK menu) is set correctly to prevent improper operation of associated memory action.
WARNING
PHS DIST Z1 DIR: All phase distance zones are reversible. The forward direction is defined by the PHS DIST Z1 RCA setting, whereas the reverse direction is shifted 180 from that angle. The non-directional zone spans between the forward reach impedance defined by the PHS DIST Z1 REACH and PHS DIST Z1 RCA settings, and the reverse reach impedance defined by PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH and PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA as illustrated below.
COMP LIMIT
DIR COMP LIMIT
REAC H
DIR COMP LIMIT DIR RCA RCA
837720A1.CDR
Figure 556: DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
GE Multilin
5-127
5 SETTINGS
COMP LIMIT
R E AC H
RCA
R
REV REACH RCA
REV R E AC
837802A1.CDR
Figure 557: NON-DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
RCA = 80o COMP LIMIT = 90o DIR RCA = 80o DIR COMP LIMIT = 90o
REAC H
REAC H
REACH
REAC H
R
837722A1.CDR
Figure 558: MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC SAMPLE SHAPES PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION: The phase distance elements can be applied to look through a three-phase delta-wye or wye-delta power transformer. In addition, VTs and CTs could be located independently from one another at different windings of the transformer. If the potential source is located at the correct side of the transformer, this setting shall be set to None.
5-128
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
This setting specifies the location of the voltage source with respect to the involved power transformer in the direction of the zone. The following figure illustrates the usage of this setting. In section (a), zone 1 is looking through a transformer from the delta into the wye winding. Therefore, the Z1 setting shall be set to Dy11. In section (b), Zone 3 is looking through a transformer from the wye into the delta winding. Therefore, the Z3 setting shall be set to Yd1. The zone is restricted by the potential point (location of the VTs) as illustrated in Figure (e). PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION: This setting specifies the location of the current source with respect to the involved power transformer in the direction of the zone. In section (a) of the following figure, zone 1 is looking through a transformer from the delta into the wye winding. Therefore, the Z1 setting shall be set to Dy11. In section (b), the CTs are located at the same side as the read point. Therefore, the Z3 setting shall be set to None. See the Theory of operation chapter for more details, and the Application of settings chapter for information on calculating distance reach settings in applications involving power transformers.
(a) (b)
delta
wye, 330o lag
delta
wye, 330o lag
Z3 Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z3 Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Yd1 Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
5
(c)
delta wye, 330o lag
(e)
L1 L2
Z3 Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Yd1
Zone 3 Zone 1 ZL1 ZT ZL2
Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None

830717A1.CDR
Figure 559: APPLICATIONS OF THE PH DIST XFMR VOL/CUR CONNECTION SETTINGS PHS DIST Z1 REACH: This setting defines the zone reach for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-directional applications, this setting defines the forward reach of the zone. The reverse reach impedance in non-directional applications is set independently. The reach impedance is entered in secondary ohms. The reach impedance angle is entered as the PHS DIST Z1 RCA setting. PHS DIST Z1 RCA: This setting specifies the characteristic angle (similar to the maximum torque angle in previous technologies) of the phase distance characteristic for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-directional applications, this setting defines the angle of the forward reach impedance. The reverse reach impedance in the non-directional applications is set independently. The setting is an angle of reach impedance as shown in the distance characteristic figures shown earlier. This setting is independent from PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA, the characteristic angle of an extra directional supervising function. PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH: This setting defines the reverse reach of the zone set to non-directional (PHS DIST Z1 DIR setting). The value must be entered in secondary ohms. This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to Forward or Reverse.
GE Multilin
5-129
5 SETTINGS
PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA: This setting defines the angle of the reverse reach impedance if the zone is set to non-directional (PHS DIST Z1 DIR setting). This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to Forward or Reverse. PHS DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: This setting shapes the operating characteristic, producing the lens-type characteristic of the mho function. The same limit angle applies to both the mho and supervising reactance comparators. This setting improves loadability of the protected line. PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA: This setting selects the characteristic angle (or maximum torque angle) of the directional supervising function. The directional function is an extra supervising function as the dynamic mho characteristic itself is a directional one. The directional function uses the memory voltage for polarization. This setting typically equals the distance characteristic angle PHS DIST Z1 RCA. PHS DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: Selects the comparator limit angle for the directional supervising function. PHS DIST Z1 SUPV: The phase distance elements are supervised by the magnitude of the line-to-line current (fault loop current used for the distance calculations). For convenience, 3 is accommodated by the pickup (that is, before being used, the entered value of the threshold setting is multiplied by 3 ). If the minimum fault current level is sufficient, the current supervision pickup should be set above maximum full load current preventing maloperation under VT fuse fail conditions. This requirement may be difficult to meet for remote faults at the end of zones 2 and above. If this is the case, the current supervision pickup would be set below the full load current, but this may result in maloperation during fuse fail conditions.
PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: This setting is relevant for applications on series-compensated lines, or in general, if series capacitors are located between the relaying point and a point where the zone shall not overreach. For plain (non-compensated) lines, set to zero. Otherwise, the setting is entered in per unit of the phase VT bank configured under the DISTANCE SOURCE. Effectively, this setting facilitates dynamic current-based reach reduction. In non-directional applications (PHS DIST Z1 DIR set to Non-directional), this setting applies only to the forward reach of the nondirectional zone. See chapters 8 and 9 for information on calculating this setting for series compensated lines. PHS DIST Z1 DELAY: This setting allows the user to delay operation of the distance elements and implement stepped distance protection. The distance element timers for zones 2 and higher apply a short dropout delay to cope with faults located close to the zone boundary when small oscillations in the voltages or currents could inadvertently reset the timer. Zone 1 does not need any drop out delay since it is sealed-in by the presence of current. PHS DIST Z1 BLK: This setting enables the user to select a FlexLogic operand to block a given distance element. VT fuse fail detection is one of the applications for this setting.
AND OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP AB FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP BC FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP CA
SETTING PH DIST Z1 DELAY TPKP 0 TPKP 0 TPKP 0
AND OR OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 OP
AND OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 OP AB PH DIST Z1 OP BC PH DIST Z1 OP CA
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA OPEN POLE OP **
AND AND AND
** D60, L60, and L90 only. Other UR-series models apply regular current seal-in for zone 1.
837017A8.CDR
Figure 560: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 1 OP SCHEME
5-130
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
from the open pole element (D60, L60, and L90 only) FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 PKP AB

OR
TIMER 0 ms 20 ms
AND OR
SETTING PH DIST Z2 DELAY TPKP 0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 OP AB
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 PKP BC

OR
TIMER 0 ms 20 ms
AND OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 OP BC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 PKP CA from the trip output element FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP Z2 PH TMR INIT
OR
TIMER 0 ms 20 ms
AND OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 OP CA
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 OP

837036A1.CDR
Figure 561: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 2 OP SCHEME For phase distance zone 2, there is a provision to start the zone timer with other distance zones or loop the pickup flag to avoid prolonging phase distance zone 2 operation when the fault evolves from one type to another or migrates from the initial zone to zone 2. Desired zones in the trip output function should be assigned to accomplish this functionality.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP ** TIMER 0 ms 20 ms SETTING PH DIST Z3 DELAY TPKP 0
NOTE
5
AND OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z3 PKP AB
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z3 OP AB
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z3 PKP BC
TIMER 0 ms 20 ms
AND OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z3 OP BC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z3 PKP CA
TIMER 0 ms 20 ms
AND OR

OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z3 OP CA FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z3 OP

837020AA.CDR
** D60, L60, and L90 only.
Figure 562: PHASE DISTANCE ZONES 3 AND HIGHER OP SCHEME
GE Multilin
5-131
5 SETTINGS
D60, L60, and L90 only FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OPEN POLE BLK AB OPEN POLE BLK BC OPEN POLE BLK CA SETTINGS PH DIST Z1 DIR PH DIST Z1 SHAPE PH DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION SETTING PH DIST Z1 FUNCTION Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0 SETTING PH DIST Z1 BLK Off = 0 AND PH DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION PH DIST Z1 REACH PH DIST Z1 RCA PH DIST Z1 REV REACH PH DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA PH DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD PH DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA PH DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD PH DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA PH DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL
RUN
Quadrilateral characteristic only FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 DPO AB FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 PKP BC PH DIST Z1 DPO BC FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 DPO CA FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 PKP
SETTING DISTANCE SOURCE IA-IB IB-IC IC-IA VAG-VBG VBG-VCG VCG-VAG VAB VBC VCA V_1 I_1
AND A-B ELEMENT
RUN
Wye VTs
B-C ELEMENT
RUN
AND
Delta VTs
C-A ELEMENT AND MEMORY V_1 > 0.80 pu TIMER 1 cycle OR I_1 > 0.025 pu 1 cycle
OR
SETTING PHS DIST Z1 SUPV

RUN
| IA IB | > 3 Pickup
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA
837002AL.CDR
| IB IC | > 3 Pickup
RUN
| IC IA | > 3 Pickup
Figure 563: PHASE DISTANCE SCHEME LOGIC
5-132
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.4 POWER SWING DETECT
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) POWER SWING DETECT
POWER SWING DETECT

MESSAGE
POWER SWING FUNCTION: Disabled POWER SWING SOURCE: SRC 1 POWER SWING SHAPE: Mho Shape POWER SWING MODE: Two Step POWER SWING SUPV: 0.600 pu POWER SWING FWD REACH: 50.00 POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID: 60.00 POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT: 70.00 POWER SWING FWD RCA: 75 POWER SWING REV REACH: 50.00 POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID: 60.00 POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH OUT: 70.00 POWER SWING REV RCA: 75 POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE: 120 POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE: 90 POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE: 60 POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING MIDDLE RGT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING MIDDLE LFT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING INNER RGT BLD: 100.00
Range: Mho Shape, Quad Shape
MESSAGE
Range: Two Step, Three Step
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.10 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-133
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS POWER SWING INNER LFT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1: 0.030 s POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1: 0.050 s POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2: 0.017 s POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3: 0.009 s POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 4: 0.017 s POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY: 0.400 s POWER SWING TRIP MODE: Delayed POWER SWING BLK: Off POWER SWING TARGET: Self-Reset POWER SWING EVENTS: Disabled
5 SETTINGS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Early, Delayed
MESSAGE
Range: Flexlogic operand
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE
The power swing detect element provides both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The element measures the positive-sequence apparent impedance and traces its locus with respect to either two or three user-selectable operating characteristic boundaries. Upon detecting appropriate timing relations, the blocking and tripping indications are given through FlexLogic operands. The element incorporates an adaptive disturbance detector. This function does not trigger on power swings, but is capable of detecting faster disturbances faults in particular that may occur during power swings. Operation of this dedicated disturbance detector is signaled via the POWER SWING 50DD operand. The power swing detect element asserts two outputs intended for blocking selected protection elements on power swings:
POWER SWING BLOCK is a traditional signal that is safely asserted for the entire duration of the power swing, and POWER SWING UN/BLOCK is established in the same way, but resets when an extra disturbance is detected during the power swing. The POWER SWING UN/BLOCK operand may be used for blocking selected protection elements if the intent is to respond to
faults during power swing conditions. Different protection elements respond differently to power swings. If tripping is required for faults during power swing conditions, some elements may be blocked permanently (using the POWER SWING BLOCK operand), and others may be blocked and dynamically unblocked upon fault detection (using the POWER SWING UN/BLOCK operand). The operating characteristic and logic figures should be viewed along with the following discussion to develop an understanding of the operation of the element. The power swing detect element operates in three-step or two-step mode: Three-step operation: The power swing blocking sequence essentially times the passage of the locus of the positivesequence impedance between the outer and the middle characteristic boundaries. If the locus enters the outer characteristic (indicated by the POWER SWING OUTER FlexLogic operand) but stays outside the middle characteristic (indicated by the POWER SWING MIDDLE FlexLogic operand) for an interval longer than POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1, the power swing blocking signal (POWER SWING BLOCK FlexLogic operand) is established and sealed-in. The blocking signal resets when the locus leaves the outer characteristic, but not sooner than the POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1 time. Two-step operation: If the two-step mode is selected, the sequence is identical, but it is the outer and inner characteristics that are used to time the power swing locus.
5-134
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The out-of-step tripping feature operates as follows for three-step and two-step power swing detection modes: Three-step operation: The out-of-step trip sequence identifies unstable power swings by determining if the impedance locus spends a finite time between the outer and middle characteristics and then a finite time between the middle and inner characteristics. The first step is similar to the power swing blocking sequence. After timer POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1 times out, latch 1 is set as long as the impedance stays within the outer characteristic. If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the middle characteristic but stays outside the inner characteristic for a period of time defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2, latch 2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic. If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the inner characteristic and stays there for a period of time defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3, latch 2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic; the element is now ready to trip. If the "Early" trip mode is selected, the POWER SWING TRIP operand is set immediately and sealed-in for the interval set by the POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY. If the "Delayed" trip mode is selected, the element waits until the impedance locus leaves the inner characteristic, then times out the POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 and sets Latch 4; the element is now ready to trip. The trip operand is set later, when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic. Two-step operation: The two-step mode of operation is similar to the three-step mode with two exceptions. First, the initial stage monitors the time spent by the impedance locus between the outer and inner characteristics. Second, the stage involving the POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 timer is bypassed. It is up to the user to integrate the blocking (POWER SWING BLOCK) and tripping (POWER SWING TRIP) FlexLogic operands with other protection functions and output contacts in order to make this element fully operational.
The element can be set to use either lens (mho) or rectangular (quadrilateral) characteristics as illustrated below. When set to Mho, the element applies the right and left blinders as well. If the blinders are not required, their settings should be set high enough to effectively disable the blinders.
5
X
ACH
OU
TE
R
E DL
IN
FWD RE
ID
NE
FW DR CA
REV REAC H
E NN
LIM
IT
AN
E GL
MI
DD
LE
I LIM
TA
NG
LE
Figure 564: POWER SWING DETECT MHO OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
RE VR CA
OUTER LIMIT ANGLE
827843A2.CDR
GE Multilin
5-135
5 SETTINGS
842734A1.CDR
Figure 565: EFFECTS OF BLINDERS ON THE MHO CHARACTERISTICS
5
INNER LFT BL D D MIDDLE RGT ACH MID QUAD FWD RE FWD REACH ACH OUT QUAD FWD RE MIDDLE LFT BL OUTER LFT BL D INNER RGT BL D
BLD D
OUTER RGT BL
FWD RCA
REV REACH
CH MID
QUAD REV REA
QUAD REV RE AC
H OUT
842735A1.CDR
Figure 566: POWER SWING DETECT QUADRILATERAL OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS The FlexLogic output operands for the power swing detect element are described below: The POWER SWING OUTER, POWER SWING MIDDLE, POWER SWING INNER, POWER SWING TMR2 PKP, POWER SWING TMR3 PKP, and POWER SWING TMR4 PKP FlexLogic operands are auxiliary operands that could be used to facilitate testing and special applications. The POWER SWING BLOCK FlexLogic operand shall be used to block selected protection elements such as distance functions.
5-136
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The POWER SWING UN/BLOCK FlexLogic operand shall be used to block those protection elements that are intended to be blocked under power swings, but subsequently unblocked should a fault occur after the power swing blocking condition has been established. The POWER SWING 50DD FlexLogic operand indicates that an adaptive disturbance detector integrated with the element has picked up. This operand will trigger on faults occurring during power swing conditions. This includes both three-phase and single-pole-open conditions. The POWER SWING INCOMING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an incoming locus (the locus enters the inner characteristic). The POWER SWING OUTGOING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an outgoing locus (the locus leaving the outer characteristic). This operand can be used to count unstable swings and take certain action only after pre-defined number of unstable power swings. The POWER SWING TRIP FlexLogic operand is a trip command.
The settings for the power swing detect element are described below: POWER SWING FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the entire power swing detection element. The setting applies to both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. POWER SWING SOURCE: The source setting identifies the signal source for both blocking and tripping functions. POWER SWING SHAPE: This setting selects the shapes (either Mho or Quad) of the outer, middle and, inner characteristics of the power swing detect element. The operating principle is not affected. The Mho characteristics use the left and right blinders. POWER SWING MODE: This setting selects between the two-step and three-step operating modes and applies to both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The three-step mode applies if there is enough space between the maximum load impedances and distance characteristics of the relay that all three (outer, middle, and inner) characteristics can be placed between the load and the distance characteristics. Whether the spans between the outer and middle as well as the middle and inner characteristics are sufficient should be determined by analysis of the fastest power swings expected in correlation with settings of the power swing timers. The two-step mode uses only the outer and inner characteristics for both blocking and tripping functions. This leaves more space in heavily loaded systems to place two power swing characteristics between the distance characteristics and the maximum load, but allows for only one determination of the impedance trajectory. POWER SWING SUPV: A common overcurrent pickup level supervises all three power swing characteristics. The supervision responds to the positive sequence current. POWER SWING FWD REACH: This setting specifies the forward reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner quadrilateral characteristic. For a simple system consisting of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach should be higher than the sum of the line and remote source positive-sequence impedances. Detailed transient stability studies may be needed for complex systems in order to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID: This setting specifies the forward reach of the middle quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho. POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT: This setting specifies the forward reach of the outer quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho. POWER SWING FWD RCA: This setting specifies the angle of the forward reach impedance for the mho characteristics, angles of all the blinders, and both forward and reverse reach impedances of the quadrilateral characteristics. POWER SWING REV REACH: This setting specifies the reverse reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner quadrilateral characteristic. For a simple system of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach should be higher than the positive-sequence impedance of the local source. Detailed transient stability studies may be needed for complex systems to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING REV RCA setting for Mho, and the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting for Quad. POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID: This setting specifies the reverse reach of the middle quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho.
GE Multilin
5-137
5 SETTINGS
POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH OUT: This setting specifies the reverse reach of the outer quadrilateral characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho. POWER SWING REV RCA: This setting specifies the angle of the reverse reach impedance for the mho characteristics. This setting applies to mho shapes only. POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the outer power swing characteristic. The convention depicted in the Power swing detect characteristic diagram should be observed: values greater than 90 result in an apple-shaped characteristic; values less than 90 result in a lens shaped characteristic. This angle must be selected in consideration of the maximum expected load. If the maximum load angle is known, the outer limit angle should be coordinated with a 20 security margin. Detailed studies may be needed for complex systems to determine this setting. This setting applies to mho shapes only. POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the middle power swing detect characteristic. It is relevant only for the 3-step mode. A typical value would be close to the average of the outer and inner limit angles. This setting applies to mho shapes only. POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the inner power swing detect characteristic. The inner characteristic is used by the out-of-step tripping function: beyond the inner characteristic out-of-step trip action is definite (the actual trip may be delayed as per the TRIP MODE setting). Therefore, this angle must be selected in consideration to the power swing angle beyond which the system becomes unstable and cannot recover. The inner characteristic is also used by the power swing blocking function in the two-step mode. In this case, set this angle large enough so that the characteristics of the distance elements are safely enclosed by the inner characteristic. This setting applies to mho shapes only.
POWER SWING OUTER, MIDDLE, and INNER RGT BLD: These settings specify the resistive reach of the right blinder. The blinder applies to both Mho and Quad characteristics. Set these value high if no blinder is required for the Mho characteristic. POWER SWING OUTER, MIDDLE, and INNER LFT BLD: These settings specify the resistive reach of the left blinder. Enter a positive value; the relay automatically uses a negative value. The blinder applies to both Mho and Quad characteristics. Set this value high if no blinder is required for the Mho characteristic. POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1: All the coordinating timers are related to each other and should be set to detect the fastest expected power swing and produce out-of-step tripping in a secure manner. The timers should be set in consideration to the power swing detect characteristics, mode of power swing detect operation and mode of out-ofstep tripping. This timer defines the interval that the impedance locus must spend between the outer and inner characteristics (two-step operating mode), or between the outer and middle characteristics (three-step operating mode) before the power swing blocking signal is established. This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to travel between the two selected characteristics during the fastest expected power swing. This setting is relevant for both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping. POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1: This setting defines the dropout delay for the power swing blocking signal. Detection of a condition requiring a block output sets latch 1 after PICKUP DELAY 1 time. When the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic, timer POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1 is started. When the timer times-out the latch is reset. This setting should be selected to give extra security for the power swing blocking action. POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2: Controls the out-of-step tripping function in the three-step mode only. This timer defines the interval the impedance locus must spend between the middle and inner characteristics before the second step of the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed. This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to travel between the two characteristics during the fastest expected power swing. POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3: Controls the out-of-step tripping function only. It defines the interval the impedance locus must spend within the inner characteristic before the last step of the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed and the element is armed to trip. The actual moment of tripping is controlled by the TRIP MODE setting. This time delay is provided for extra security before the out-of-step trip action is executed. POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 4: Controls the out-of-step tripping function in Delayed trip mode only. This timer defines the interval the impedance locus must spend outside the inner characteristic but within the outer characteristic before the element is armed for the delayed trip. The delayed trip occurs when the impedance leaves the outer characteristic. This time delay is provided for extra security and should be set considering the fastest expected power swing.
5-138
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY: The out-of-step trip FlexLogic operand (POWER SWING TRIP) is sealed-in for the specified period of time. The sealing-in is crucial in the delayed trip mode, as the original trip signal is a very short pulse occurring when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic after the out-of-step sequence is completed. POWER SWING TRIP MODE: Selection of the Early trip mode results in an instantaneous trip after the last step in the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed. The early trip mode will stress the circuit breakers as the currents at that moment are high (the electromotive forces of the two equivalent systems are approximately 180 apart). Selection of the Delayed trip mode results in a trip at the moment when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic. delayed trip mode will relax the operating conditions for the breakers as the currents at that moment are low. The selection should be made considering the capability of the breakers in the system. POWER SWING BLK: This setting specifies the FlexLogic operand used for blocking the out-of-step function only. The power swing blocking function is operational all the time as long as the element is enabled. The blocking signal resets the output POWER SWING TRIP operand but does not stop the out-of-step tripping sequence.
SETTINGS POWER SWING SHAPE: POWER SWING FWD REACH: POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID: POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT: POWER SWING FWD RCA: SETTING POWER SWING FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING POWER SWING SOURCE: V_1 I_1 POWER SWING REV REACH: POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE: POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE: POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE: POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD: POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD: POWER SWING MIDDLE RGT BLD:
POWER SWING QUAD REV POWER SWING MIDDLE REACH MID: LFT BLD: POWER SWING QUAD REV POWER SWING INNER REACH OUT: RGT BLD: POWER SWING REV RCA: RUN OUTER IMPEDANCE REGION RUN MIDDLE IMPEDANCE REGION RUN INNER IMPEDANCE REGION SETTING POWER SWING SUPV: RUN I_1 > PICKUP 827840A3.CDR AND AND AND POWER SWING INNER LFT BLD: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING OUTER FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING MIDDLE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING INNER
Figure 567: POWER SWING DETECT SCHEME LOGIC (1 of 3)

SETTING POWER SWING FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 0 SETTING POWER SWING SOURCE: I_0 I_1 I_2 RUN | |I_0| - |I_0'|| > K_0 | |I_1| - |I_1'|| > K_1 | |I_2| - |I_2'|| > K_2 OR AND 0 4 cycles TIMER 10 cycles FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING 50DD TIMER
I_0, I_1, I_2 - present values I_0', I_1', I_2' - half-a-cycle old values K_0, K_2 - three times the average change over last power cycle K_1 - four times the average change over last power cycle
842008A1.CDR
GE Multilin
5-139
5 SETTINGS
POWER SWING MIDDLE
POWER SWING INNER
POWER SWING OUTER
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND AND AND
SETTING POWER SWING MODE: 3-step
SETTINGS POWER SWING DELAY 1 PICKUP: POWER SWING DELAY 1 RESET: tPKP tRST
S Q1 L1 R
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS POWER SWING BLOCK FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING 50DD OR OR
S Q5
POWER SWING UN/BLOCK
2-step
L5
R
SETTING POWER SWING DELAY 2 PICKUP: tPKP 0

S Q2 L2 R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING TMR2 PKP
3-step
2-step SETTING POWER SWING DELAY 3 PICKUP:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING TMR3 PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0

S Q3 L3 R
AND
tPKP
POWER SWING INCOMING SETTING POWER SWING TRIP MODE: SETTING Early POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY: 0 tRST AND Delayed AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING TRIP
SETTING POWER SWING DELAY 4 PICKUP: AND tPKP 0 S Q4 L4 R
SETTING NOTE: L1 AND L4 LATCHES ARE SET DOMINANT L2, L3 AND L5 LATCHES ARE RESET DOMINANT POWER SWING BLK: Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING TMR4 PKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING OUTGOING 827841A4.CDR
5-140
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.5 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
MESSAGE
STATOR DIFF FUNCTION: Disabled STATOR DIFF LINE END SOURCE: SRC 1 STATOR DIFF NEUTRAL END SOURCE: SRC 1 STATOR DIFF PICKUP: 0.100 pu STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1: 10 % STATOR DIFF BREAK 1: 1.15 pu STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2: 80 % STATOR DIFF BREAK 2: 8.00 pu STATOR DIFF BLK: Off STATOR DIFF TARGET: Self-reset STATOR DIFF EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The stator differential protection element is intended for use on the stator windings of rotating machinery.
differential
Operate
Slope 2
Block
Slope 1 Pickup
Break 1
Break 2
restraining
830735A1.CDR
Figure 570: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC This element has a dual slope characteristic. The main purpose of the percent-slope characteristic is to prevent a maloperation caused by unbalances between CTs during external faults. CT unbalances arise as a result of the following factors: 1. CT accuracy errors
GE Multilin
5-141
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 2. CT saturation
5 SETTINGS
The characteristic allows for very sensitive settings when fault current is low and less sensitive settings when fault current is high and CT performance may produce incorrect operate signals. STATOR DIFF LINE END SOURCE: This setting selects the source connected to CTs in the end of the machine stator winding closest to the load and furthest from the winding neutral point. Both line and neutral-side CTs should be wired to measure their currents in the same direction with respect to the neutral point of the winding. STATOR DIFF NEUTRAL END SOURCE: This setting selects the source connected to CTs in the end of the machine stator winding furthest from the load and closest to the winding neutral point. Both line and neutral-side CTs should be wired to measure their currents in the same direction with respect to the neutral point of the winding. STATOR DIFF PICKUP: This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation. This setting is based on the amount of differential current that might be seen under normal operating conditions. A setting of 0.1 to 0.3 pu is generally recommended. STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1: This setting is applicable for restraint currents from zero to STATOR DIFF BREAK 1, and defines the ratio of differential to restraint current above which the element will operate. This slope is set to ensure sensitivity to internal faults at normal operating current levels. The criteria for setting this slope is to allow for maximum expected CT mismatch error when operating at the maximum permitted current. This maximum error is generally in the range of 5 to 10% of CT rating. STATOR DIFF BREAK 1: This setting defines the end of the Slope 1 region and the start of the transition region. It should be set just above the maximum normal operating current level of the machine. STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2: This setting is applicable for restraint currents above the STATOR DIFF BREAK 2 setting when the element is applied to generator stator windings. This slope is set to ensure stability under heavy external fault conditions that could lead to high differential currents as a result of CT saturation. A setting of 80 to 100% is recommended. The transition region (as shown on the characteristic plot) is a cubic spline, automatically calculated by the relay to result in a smooth transition between STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1 and STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2 with no discontinuities. STATOR DIFF BREAK 2: This setting defines the end of the transition region and the start of the Slope 2 region. It should be set to the level at which any of the protection CTs are expected to begin to saturate.
SETTING STATOR DIFF FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING STATOR DIFF BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTING STATOR DIFF LINE END SOURCE: IA IB IC DC Offset Removal D.F.T. and Differential and Restraint Differential Phasors Iad Ibd Icd RUN Ibd SETTINGS STATOR DIFF PICKUP: STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1: AND STATOR DIFF BREAK 1: STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2: STATOR DIFF BREAK 2: RUN Iad FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS STATOR DIFF PKP A Iar STATOR DIFF DPO A
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS STATOR DIFF PKP B Ibr STATOR DIFF DPO B
SETTING STATOR DIFF NEUTRAL END SOURCE: IA IB IC
Restraint Phasors Iar Ibr Icr
RUN Icd
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS STATOR DIFF PKP C Icr STATOR DIFF DPO C
Figure 571: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC SATURATION DETECTION: External faults near generators typically result in very large time constants of DC components in the fault currents. Also, when energizing a step-up transformer, the inrush current being limited only by the machine impedance may be significant and may last for a very long time. In order to provide additional security against maloperations during these events, the G60 incorporates saturation detection logic. When saturation is detected the element will make an additional check on the angle between the neutral and output current. If this angle indicates an internal fault then tripping is permitted.
5-142
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The saturation detector is implemented as a state machine (see below). "NORMAL" is the initial state of the machine. When in "NORMAL" state, the saturation flag is not set (SAT = 0). The algorithm calculates the saturation condition, SC. If SC = 1 while the state machine is "NORMAL", the saturation detector goes into the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state and sets the saturation flag (SAT = 1). The algorithm returns to the "NORMAL" state if the differential current is below the first slope, SL, for more than 200 ms. When in the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state, the algorithm goes into the "EXTERNAL FAULT & CT SATURATION" state if the differential flag is set (DIF = 1). When in the "EXTERNAL FAULT & CT SATURATION" state, the algorithm keeps the saturation flag set (SAT = 1). The state machine returns to the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state if the differential flag is reset (DIF = 0) for 100 ms.
NORMAL
SC = (|ID| < SL x IR) and (IR > BL) where: IR = restraint current ID = differential current DIF = stator differential pickup flag SL = slope 1 setting BL = break point 1 setting PICKUP = pickup setting
SAT := 0
(|ID| < SL x IR) or (|ID| < PICKUP) AND (NOT (SC)) for 200 ms SC (saturation condition) EXTERNAL FAULT
SAT := 1
DIF = 0 for 100 ms EXTERNAL FAULT AND CT SATURATION
SAT := 1
830736A1.CDR
Figure 572: SATURATION DETECTION STATE MACHINE PHASE COMPARISON PRINCIPLE: The test for direction can be summarized by the following equation: If ( I TS > B L or ( I TS > K I R and I TS > 0.1 pu ) ) and ( I NS > B L or ( I NS > K I R and I NS > 0.1 pu ) ) then DIR = abs ( I TS I NS ) > 90 else DIR = 1 where: IR = restraining current, DIR = flag indicating that the phase comparison principle is satisfied BL = breakpoint 1 setting, ITS, INS = current at the terminal and neutral sources, respectively K = factory constant of 0.25
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS STATOR DIFF PKP A STATOR DIFF SAT A STATOR DIFF DIR A FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS STATOR DIFF PKP B STATOR DIFF SAT B STATOR DIFF DIR B FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS STATOR DIFF PKP C STATOR DIFF SAT C STATOR DIFF DIR C OR AND OR AND OR AND
(EQ 5.7)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND STATOR DIFF OP A
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND STATOR DIFF OP B
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND STATOR DIFF OP C
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR STATOR DIFF OP

842707A1.CDR
Figure 573: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL FINAL OUTPUT LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-143
5 SETTINGS 5.6.6 PHASE CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT
PHASE CURRENT
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC2 PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
b) INVERSE TIME OVERCURRENT CHARACTERISTICS The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the time overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I2t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices. If none of these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics. The definite time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required. Table 513: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES
IEEE IEEE Extremely Inverse IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Moderately Inverse
IEC IEC Curve A (BS142) IEC Curve B (BS142) IEC Curve C (BS142) IEC Short Inverse
GE TYPE IAC IAC Extremely Inverse IAC Very Inverse IAC Inverse IAC Short Inverse
OTHER I2t FlexCurves A, B, C, and D Recloser Curves Definite Time
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1 or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup. Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: Instantaneous and Timed. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Timed selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.
5-144
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS IEEE CURVES:
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae: A tr ---------------------------------+B ----------------------------------I - p T = TDM --------------, T TDM = I 2 RESET 1 -------------- I pickup 1 I pickup where:
(EQ 5.8)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting A, B, p = constants, TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed), tr = characteristic constant
Table 514: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEEE CURVE SHAPE IEEE Extremely Inverse IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Moderately Inverse A 28.2 19.61 0.0515 B 0.1217 0.491 0.1140 P 2.0000 2.0000 0.02000 TR 29.1 21.6 4.85
Table 515: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER (TDM) CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 11.341 22.682 45.363 90.727 136.090 181.454 226.817 8.090 16.179 32.358 64.716 97.074 129.432 161.790 3.220 6.439 12.878 25.756 38.634 51.512 64.390 2.0 4.761 9.522 19.043 38.087 57.130 76.174 95.217 3.514 7.028 14.055 28.111 42.166 56.221 70.277 1.902 3.803 7.606 15.213 22.819 30.426 38.032 3.0 1.823 3.647 7.293 14.587 21.880 29.174 36.467 1.471 2.942 5.885 11.769 17.654 23.538 29.423 1.216 2.432 4.864 9.729 14.593 19.458 24.322 4.0 1.001 2.002 4.003 8.007 12.010 16.014 20.017 0.899 1.798 3.597 7.193 10.790 14.387 17.983 0.973 1.946 3.892 7.783 11.675 15.567 19.458 5.0 0.648 1.297 2.593 5.187 7.780 10.374 12.967 0.654 1.308 2.616 5.232 7.849 10.465 13.081 0.844 1.688 3.377 6.753 10.130 13.507 16.883 6.0 0.464 0.927 1.855 3.710 5.564 7.419 9.274 0.526 1.051 2.103 4.205 6.308 8.410 10.513 0.763 1.526 3.051 6.102 9.153 12.204 15.255 7.0 0.355 0.709 1.418 2.837 4.255 5.674 7.092 0.450 0.900 1.799 3.598 5.397 7.196 8.995 0.706 1.412 2.823 5.647 8.470 11.294 14.117 8.0 0.285 0.569 1.139 2.277 3.416 4.555 5.693 0.401 0.802 1.605 3.209 4.814 6.418 8.023 0.663 1.327 2.653 5.307 7.960 10.614 13.267 9.0 0.237 0.474 0.948 1.897 2.845 3.794 4.742 0.368 0.736 1.472 2.945 4.417 5.889 7.361 0.630 1.260 2.521 5.041 7.562 10.083 12.604 10.0 0.203 0.407 0.813 1.626 2.439 3.252 4.065 0.345 0.689 1.378 2.756 4.134 5.513 6.891 0.603 1.207 2.414 4.827 7.241 9.654 12.068
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
IEEE VERY INVERSE
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE
GE Multilin
5-145
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS IEC CURVES
5 SETTINGS
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K tr --------------------------------------------------------------------------2 T = TDM ( I I pickup ) E 1 , T RESET = TDM 1 ( I I pickup ) (EQ 5.9)
where:
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting, K, E = constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)
Table 516: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE IEC Curve A (BS142) IEC Curve B (BS142) IEC Curve C (BS142) IEC Short Inverse K 0.140 13.500 80.000 0.050 E 0.020 1.000 2.000 0.040 TR 9.7 43.2 58.2 0.500
Table 517: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)

MULTIPLIER (TDM) IEC CURVE A CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 0.860 1.719 3.439 6.878 10.317 13.755 17.194 1.350 2.700 5.400 10.800 16.200 21.600 27.000 3.200 6.400 12.800 25.600 38.400 51.200 64.000 0.153 0.306 0.612 1.223 1.835 2.446 3.058 2.0 0.501 1.003 2.006 4.012 6.017 8.023 10.029 0.675 1.350 2.700 5.400 8.100 10.800 13.500 1.333 2.667 5.333 10.667 16.000 21.333 26.667 0.089 0.178 0.356 0.711 1.067 1.423 1.778 3.0 0.315 0.630 1.260 2.521 3.781 5.042 6.302 0.338 0.675 1.350 2.700 4.050 5.400 6.750 0.500 1.000 2.000 4.000 6.000 8.000 10.000 0.056 0.111 0.223 0.445 0.668 0.890 1.113 4.0 0.249 0.498 0.996 1.992 2.988 3.984 4.980 0.225 0.450 0.900 1.800 2.700 3.600 4.500 0.267 0.533 1.067 2.133 3.200 4.267 5.333 0.044 0.088 0.175 0.351 0.526 0.702 0.877 5.0 0.214 0.428 0.856 1.712 2.568 3.424 4.280 0.169 0.338 0.675 1.350 2.025 2.700 3.375 0.167 0.333 0.667 1.333 2.000 2.667 3.333 0.038 0.075 0.150 0.301 0.451 0.602 0.752 6.0 0.192 0.384 0.767 1.535 2.302 3.070 3.837 0.135 0.270 0.540 1.080 1.620 2.160 2.700 0.114 0.229 0.457 0.914 1.371 1.829 2.286 0.034 0.067 0.135 0.269 0.404 0.538 0.673 7.0 0.176 0.353 0.706 1.411 2.117 2.822 3.528 0.113 0.225 0.450 0.900 1.350 1.800 2.250 0.083 0.167 0.333 0.667 1.000 1.333 1.667 0.031 0.062 0.124 0.247 0.371 0.494 0.618 8.0 0.165 0.330 0.659 1.319 1.978 2.637 3.297 0.096 0.193 0.386 0.771 1.157 1.543 1.929 0.063 0.127 0.254 0.508 0.762 1.016 1.270 0.029 0.058 0.115 0.231 0.346 0.461 0.576 9.0 0.156 0.312 0.623 1.247 1.870 2.493 3.116 0.084 0.169 0.338 0.675 1.013 1.350 1.688 0.050 0.100 0.200 0.400 0.600 0.800 1.000 0.027 0.054 0.109 0.218 0.327 0.435 0.544 10.0 0.149 0.297 0.594 1.188 1.782 2.376 2.971 0.075 0.150 0.300 0.600 0.900 1.200 1.500 0.040 0.081 0.162 0.323 0.485 0.646 0.808 0.026 0.052 0.104 0.207 0.311 0.415 0.518
0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 IEC CURVE B 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 IEC CURVE C 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00
IEC SHORT TIME
5-146
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS IAC CURVES: The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
D E B tr - + ------------------------------------- + ------------------------------------- T = TDM A + ----------------------------2 3 , T RESET = TDM ------------------------------( ) C I I 2 I I I I ( ( ) C ) ( ( ) C ) pkp pkp pkp 1 ( I I pkp ) where:
(EQ 5.10)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = Input current, Ipkp = Pickup Current setting, A to E = constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)
Table 518: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS

IAC CURVE SHAPE IAC Extreme Inverse IAC Very Inverse IAC Inverse IAC Short Inverse A 0.0040 0.0900 0.2078 0.0428 B 0.6379 0.7955 0.8630 0.0609 C 0.6200 0.1000 0.8000 0.6200 D 1.7872 1.2885 0.4180 0.0010 E 0.2461 7.9586 0.1947 0.0221 TR 6.008 4.678 0.990 0.222
Table 519: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES

MULTIPLIER (TDM)
CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 1.699 3.398 6.796 13.591 20.387 27.183 33.979 1.451 2.901 5.802 11.605 17.407 23.209 29.012 0.578 1.155 2.310 4.621 6.931 9.242 11.552 0.072 0.143 0.286 0.573 0.859 1.145 1.431 2.0 0.749 1.498 2.997 5.993 8.990 11.987 14.983 0.656 1.312 2.624 5.248 7.872 10.497 13.121 0.375 0.749 1.499 2.997 4.496 5.995 7.494 0.047 0.095 0.190 0.379 0.569 0.759 0.948 3.0 0.303 0.606 1.212 2.423 3.635 4.846 6.058 0.269 0.537 1.075 2.150 3.225 4.299 5.374 0.266 0.532 1.064 2.128 3.192 4.256 5.320 0.035 0.070 0.140 0.279 0.419 0.559 0.699 4.0 0.178 0.356 0.711 1.422 2.133 2.844 3.555 0.172 0.343 0.687 1.374 2.061 2.747 3.434 0.221 0.443 0.885 1.770 2.656 3.541 4.426 0.031 0.061 0.123 0.245 0.368 0.490 0.613 5.0 0.123 0.246 0.491 0.983 1.474 1.966 2.457 0.133 0.266 0.533 1.065 1.598 2.131 2.663 0.196 0.392 0.784 1.569 2.353 3.138 3.922 0.028 0.057 0.114 0.228 0.341 0.455 0.569 6.0 0.093 0.186 0.372 0.744 1.115 1.487 1.859 0.113 0.227 0.453 0.906 1.359 1.813 2.266 0.180 0.360 0.719 1.439 2.158 2.878 3.597 0.027 0.054 0.108 0.217 0.325 0.434 0.542 7.0 0.074 0.149 0.298 0.595 0.893 1.191 1.488 0.101 0.202 0.405 0.810 1.215 1.620 2.025 0.168 0.337 0.674 1.348 2.022 2.695 3.369 0.026 0.052 0.105 0.210 0.314 0.419 0.524 8.0 0.062 0.124 0.248 0.495 0.743 0.991 1.239 0.093 0.186 0.372 0.745 1.117 1.490 1.862 0.160 0.320 0.640 1.280 1.921 2.561 3.201 0.026 0.051 0.102 0.204 0.307 0.409 0.511 9.0 0.053 0.106 0.212 0.424 0.636 0.848 1.060 0.087 0.174 0.349 0.698 1.046 1.395 1.744 0.154 0.307 0.614 1.229 1.843 2.457 3.072 0.025 0.050 0.100 0.200 0.301 0.401 0.501 10.0 0.046 0.093 0.185 0.370 0.556 0.741 0.926 0.083 0.165 0.331 0.662 0.992 1.323 1.654 0.148 0.297 0.594 1.188 1.781 2.375 2.969 0.025 0.049 0.099 0.197 0.296 0.394 0.493
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 IAC INVERSE 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
IAC VERY INVERSE
IAC SHORT INVERSE
GE Multilin
5-147
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS I2t CURVES: The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae: 100 100 ---------------------------------------------------I 2 , T RESET = TDM I 2 T = TDM ---------------------------- I pickup I pickup where:
5 SETTINGS
(EQ 5.11)
T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting; TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 520: I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES

MULTIPLIER (TDM) 0.01 0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00 600.00 CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 0.44 4.44 44.44 444.44 4444.4 26666.7 2.0 0.25 2.50 25.00 250.00 2500.0 15000.0 3.0 0.11 1.11 11.11 111.11 1111.1 6666.7 4.0 0.06 0.63 6.25 62.50 625.00 3750.0 5.0 0.04 0.40 4.00 40.00 400.00 2400.0 6.0 0.03 0.28 2.78 27.78 277.78 1666.7 7.0 0.02 0.20 2.04 20.41 204.08 1224.5 8.0 0.02 0.16 1.56 15.63 156.25 937.50 9.0 0.01 0.12 1.23 12.35 123.46 740.74 10.0 0.01 0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00 600.00
FLEXCURVES: The custom FlexCurves are described in detail in the FlexCurves section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the FlexCurves are derived from the formulae:
I - --------------T = TDM FlexCurve Time at I pickup
I - --------------when I pickup 1.00 I - --------------when I pickup 0.98
(EQ 5.12)
I - --------------T RESET = TDM FlexCurve Time at I pickup where:
(EQ 5.13)
T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
DEFINITE TIME CURVE: The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup T RESET = TDM in seconds where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
(EQ 5.14) (EQ 5.15)
RECLOSER CURVES: The G60 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. Please refer to the FlexCurve section in this chapter for additional details.
5-148
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS c) PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51P)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT PHASE TOC1
PHASE TOC1
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE TOC1 INPUT: Phasor PHASE TOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu PHASE TOC1 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv PHASE TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: See Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 RESET: Instantaneous PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE RESTRAINT: Disabled PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A: Off PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B: Off PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C: Off PHASE TOC1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE TOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The phase time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple definite time element. The phase current input quantities may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application. Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse Time overcurrent curves characteristic sub-section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times, and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately. The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be dynamically reduced by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve (see the figure below); the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting. If the voltage restraint feature is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.
GE Multilin
5-149
5 SETTINGS
Multiplier for Pickup Current
1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Phase-Phase Voltage VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage

818784A4.CDR
Figure 574: PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC

SETTING PHASE TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING PHASE TOC1 BLOCK-A : Off=0
SETTING PHASE TOC1 BLOCK-B: Off=0 SETTING PHASE TOC1 BLOCK-C: Off=0 SETTING PHASE TOC1 SOURCE: IA IB IC Seq=ABC Seq=ACB
RUN
SETTING PHASE TOC1 INPUT: PHASE TOC1 PICKUP: PHASE TOC1 CURVE: PHASE TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: PHASE TOC1 RESET:
AND
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PHASE TOC1 A PKP PHASE TOC1 A DPO PHASE TOC1 A OP PHASE TOC1 B PKP PHASE TOC1 B DPO PHASE TOC1 B OP PHASE TOC1 C PKP PHASE TOC1 C DPO PHASE TOC1 C OP
OR OR
IA
PICKUP t
VAB VBC VCA
VAC VBA VCB
Set Calculate Multiplier Set Calculate Multiplier Set Calculate Multiplier
MULTIPLY INPUTS Set Pickup Multiplier-Phase A Set Pickup Multiplier-Phase B Set Pickup Multiplier-Phase C
AND
RUN
RUN
IB
PICKUP t
RUN
AND
RUN
IC
PICKUP t
SETTING PHASE TOC1 VOLT RESTRAINT: Enabled
PHASE TOC1 PKP PHASE TOC1 OP PHASE TOC1 DPO

827072A4.CDR
AND
Figure 575: PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-150
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS d) PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50P)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT PHASE IOC 1(2)
PHASE IOC1
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE IOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu PHASE IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.00 s PHASE IOC1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A: Off PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B: Off PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C: Off PHASE IOC1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE IOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a definite time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude. The phase instantaneous overcurrent timing curves are shown below for form-A contacts in a 60 Hz system.
GE Multilin
5-151
5 SETTINGS
35
30
25
Milliseconds
20
15 Maximum 10 Minimum
5
SETTING PHASE IOC1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0 SETTING PHASE IOC1 SOURCE: IA IB IC SETTING PHASE IOC1 BLOCK-A: Off = 0 SETTING PHASE IOC1 BLOCK-B: Off = 0 SETTING PHASE IOC1 BLOCK-C: Off = 0
1.05
1.1
1.2
1.5
2 Multiple of pickup
10
15
20
843807A1.CDR
Figure 576: PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT TIMING CURVES
AND
SETTING PHASE IOC1 PICKUP: RUN IA PICKUP
SETTINGS PHASE IOC1 PICKUPDELAY: PHASE IOC1 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST tPKP tRST tPKP tRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PHASE IOC1 A PKP PHASE IOC1 A DPO PHASE IOC1 B PKP PHASE IOC1 B DPO PHASE IOC1 C PKP PHASE IOC1 C DPO PHASE IOC1 A OP PHASE IOC1 B OP PHASE IOC1 C OP OR OR AND PHASE IOC1 PKP PHASE IOC1 OP PHASE IOC1 DPO
AND
RUN IB PICKUP
AND
RUN IC PICKUP
827033A6.VSD
Figure 577: PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-152
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS e) PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67P)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1
PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1
MESSAGE
PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK: Off PHASE DIR 1 ECA: 30 PHASE DIR POL V1 THRESHOLD: 0.700 pu PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP: No PHASE DIR 1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE DIR 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The phase directional elements (one for each of phases A, B, and C) determine the phase current flow direction for steady state and fault conditions and can be used to control the operation of the phase overcurrent elements via the BLOCK inputs of these elements.
S UT TP OU
90
VAG (Unfaulted)
Fault angle set at 60 Lag VPol
VAG(Faulted)
IA
ECA set at 30 VBC
VBC VCG VBG +90
Phasors for Phase A Polarization: VPol = VBC (1/_ECA) = polarizing voltage IA = operating current ECA = Element Characteristic Angle at 30
827800A2.CDR
Figure 578: PHASE A DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION This element is intended to apply a block signal to an overcurrent element to prevent an operation when current is flowing in a particular direction. The direction of current flow is determined by measuring the phase angle between the current from the phase CTs and the line-line voltage from the VTs, based on the 90 or quadrature connection. If there is a requirement to supervise overcurrent elements for flows in opposite directions, such as can happen through a bus-tie breaker, two phase directional elements should be programmed with opposite element characteristic angle (ECA) settings.
GE Multilin
5-153
5 SETTINGS
To increase security for three phase faults very close to the VTs used to measure the polarizing voltage, a voltage memory feature is incorporated. This feature stores the polarizing voltage the moment before the voltage collapses, and uses it to determine direction. The voltage memory remains valid for one second after the voltage has collapsed. The main component of the phase directional element is the phase angle comparator with two inputs: the operating signal (phase current) and the polarizing signal (the line voltage, shifted in the leading direction by the characteristic angle, ECA). The following table shows the operating and polarizing signals used for phase directional control:
PHASE A B C OPERATING SIGNAL angle of IA angle of IB angle of IC POLARIZING SIGNAL Vpol ABC PHASE SEQUENCE angle of VBC (1ECA) angle of VCA (1ECA) angle of VAB (1ECA) ACB PHASE SEQUENCE angle of VCB (1ECA) angle of VAC 1ECA) angle of VBA (1ECA)
MODE OF OPERATION: When the function is Disabled, or the operating current is below 5% CT nominal, the element output is 0. When the function is Enabled, the operating current is above 5% CT nominal, and the polarizing voltage is above the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL value, the element output is dependent on the phase angle between the operating and polarizing signals: The element output is logic 0 when the operating current is within polarizing voltage 90. For all other angles, the element output is logic 1. Once the voltage memory has expired, the phase overcurrent elements under directional control can be set to block or trip on overcurrent as follows: When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to Yes, the directional element will block the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control when voltage memory expires. When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to No, the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements under directional control when voltage memory expires. In all cases, directional blocking will be permitted to resume when the polarizing voltage becomes greater than the polarizing voltage threshold. SETTINGS: PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: This setting is used to select the source for the operating and polarizing signals. The operating current for the phase directional element is the phase current for the selected current source. The polarizing voltage is the line voltage from the phase VTs, based on the 90 or quadrature connection and shifted in the leading direction by the element characteristic angle (ECA). PHASE DIR 1 ECA: This setting is used to select the element characteristic angle, i.e. the angle by which the polarizing voltage is shifted in the leading direction to achieve dependable operation. In the design of the UR-series elements, a block is applied to an element by asserting logic 1 at the blocking input. This element should be programmed via the ECA setting so that the output is logic 1 for current in the non-tripping direction. PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD: This setting is used to establish the minimum level of voltage for which the phase angle measurement is reliable. The setting is based on VT accuracy. The default value is 0.700 pu. PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP: This setting is used to select the required operation upon expiration of voltage memory. When set to "Yes", the directional element blocks the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control, when voltage memory expires; when set to "No", the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements under directional control. The phase directional element responds to the forward load current. In the case of a following reverse fault, the element needs some time in the order of 8 ms to establish a blocking signal. Some protection elements such as instantaneous overcurrent may respond to reverse faults before the blocking signal is established. Therefore, a coordination time of at least 10 ms must be added to all the instantaneous protection elements under the supervision of the phase directional element. If current reversal is of a concern, a longer delay in the order of 20 ms may be needed.
NOTE
5-154
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTING PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK: Off=0 SETTING PHASE DIR 1 SOURCE: IA Seq=ABC VBC Seq=ACB VCB SETTING PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD: -Use V when V Min -Use V memory when V < Min V MINIMUM OR MEMORY TIMER 1 cycle 1 sec AND I 0.05 pu AND
AND
SETTING PHASE DIR 1 ECA: RUN 1 0 Vpol I OR

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIR1 BLK
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIR1 BLK A
SETTING PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC WHEN V MEM EXP: No Yes
USE ACTUAL VOLTAGE
USE MEMORIZED VOLTAGE
PHASE B LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIR1 BLK B
PHASE C LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A

Figure 579: PHASE DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PH DIR1 BLK C 827078A6.CDR
5.6.7 NEUTRAL CURRENT a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT
NEUTRAL CURRENT
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
5-155
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS b) NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51N)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL TOC1
5 SETTINGS
NEUTRAL TOC1
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEUTRAL TOC1 INPUT: Phasor NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu NEUTRAL TOC1 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv NEUTRAL TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: See OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1 RESET: Instantaneous NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK: Off NEUTRAL TOC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEUTRAL TOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE
The neutral time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple definite time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calculated as 3Io from the phase currents and may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application. Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse time overcurrent curve characteristics section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
SETTINGS NEUTRAL TOC1 INPUT: NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP: NEUTRAL TOC1 CURVE: NEUTRAL TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: NEUTRAL TOC 1 RESET: IN PICKUP RUN
t I
SETTING NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1
SETTING NEUTRAL TOC1 SOURCE: IN SETTING NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK: Off = 0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
827034A3.VSD
Figure 580: NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT 1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-156
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS c) NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50N)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL IOC1
NEUTRAL IOC1
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.00 s NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK: Off NEUTRAL IOC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEUTRAL IOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The neutral instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a definite time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency phasor calculated from the phase currents. A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance. A small portion (6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity of the element as follows: I op = 3 ( I_0 K I_1 ) where K = 1 16
(EQ 5.16)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents resulting from: System unbalances under heavy load conditions Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults. Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection: I op = 0.9375 I injected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: I op = 3 I injected ).
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION:
SETTINGS SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP:
Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING

NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP DELAY : NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET DELAY : tPKP tRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
AND
RUN 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP
Off=0 SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 SOURCE:
I_0
827035A4.CDR
Figure 581: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-157
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS d) NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67N)
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1(2)
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1

MESSAGE
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE: SRC 1 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: Voltage NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: Calculated V0 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: Calculated 3I0 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: 0.063 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: 0.00 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: 75 Lag NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: 90 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: 0.050 pu NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: 90 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: 0.050 pu NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK: Off NEUTRAL DIR OC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEUTRAL DIR OC1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Voltage, Current, Dual
MESSAGE
Range: Calculated V0, Measured VX
MESSAGE
Range: Calculated 3I0, Measured IG
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The neutral directional overcurrent element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD and NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV operands, respectively. The output operand is asserted if the magnitude of the operating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as forward or reverse, respectively (directional unit). The overcurrent unit responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of the either the neutral current calculated from the phase currents or the ground current. There are separate pickup settings for the forward-looking and reverse-looking functions. If set to use the calculated 3I_0, the element applies a positive-sequence restraint for better performance: a small user-programmable portion of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zerosequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity. I op = 3 ( I_0 K I_1 )
(EQ 5.17)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents resulting from: System unbalances under heavy load conditions.
5-158
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults. Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection: Iop = (1 K) Iinjected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: Iop = 3 Iinjected). The positive-sequence restraint is removed for low currents. If the positive-sequence current is below 0.8 pu, the restraint is removed by changing the constant K to zero. This facilitates better response to high-resistance faults when the unbalance is very small and there is no danger of excessive CT errors as the current is low. The directional unit uses the zero-sequence current (I_0) or ground current (IG) for fault direction discrimination and may be programmed to use either zero-sequence voltage (Calculated V0 or Measured VX), ground current (IG), or both for polarizing. The following tables define the neutral directional overcurrent element. Table 521: QUANTITIES FOR "CALCULATED 3I0" CONFIGURATION
DIRECTIONAL UNIT POLARIZING MODE Voltage Current DIRECTION Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Dual Reverse IG IG V_0 + Z_offset I_0 or I_0 COMPARED PHASORS V_0 + Z_offset I_0 V_0 + Z_offset I_0 IG IG V_0 + Z_offset I_0 or I_0 I_0 1ECA I_0 1ECA I_0 1ECA I_0 I_0 I_0 1ECA Iop = 3 (|I_0| K |I_1|) if |I1| > 0.8 pu Iop = 3 (|I_0|) if |I1| 0.8 pu OVERCURRENT UNIT
Table 522: QUANTITIES FOR "MEASURED IG" CONFIGURATION

DIRECTIONAL UNIT POLARIZING MODE Voltage DIRECTION Forward Reverse COMPARED PHASORS V_0 + Z_offset IG/3 V_0 + Z_offset IG/3 IG 1ECA IG 1ECA OVERCURRENT UNIT Iop = |IG|
where:
1 - ( VAG + VBG + VCG ) = zero sequence voltage , V_0 = -3 1 - IN = 1 -- ( IA + IB + IC ) = zero sequence current , I_0 = -3 3 ECA = element characteristic angle and IG = ground current
When NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT is set to Measured VX, one-third of this voltage is used in place of V_0. The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element. The figure below shows the voltage-polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault, with: ECA = 90 (element characteristic angle = centerline of operating characteristic) FWD LA = 80 (forward limit angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation) REV LA = 80 (reverse limit angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation)
The above bias should be taken into account when using the neutral directional overcurrent element to directionalize other protection elements.
GE Multilin
5-159
5 SETTINGS
REV LA line
3V_0 line VAG

(reference)
FWD LA line
REV Operating Region
FWD Operating Region
LA ECA
LA 3I_0 line
ECA line ECA line
3I_0 line VCG LA
LA
VBG
REV LA line
3V_0 line
FWD LA line
827805A1.CDR
Figure 582: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL VOLTAGE-POLARIZED CHARACTERISTICS NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: This setting selects the polarizing mode for the directional unit. If Voltage polarizing is selected, the element uses the zero-sequence voltage angle for polarization. The user can use either the zero-sequence voltage V_0 calculated from the phase voltages, or the zero-sequence voltage supplied externally as the auxiliary voltage V_X, both from the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE. The calculated V_0 can be used as polarizing voltage only if the voltage transformers are connected in Wye. The auxiliary voltage can be used as the polarizing voltage provided SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION is set to Vn and the auxiliary voltage is connected to a zero-sequence voltage source (such as open delta connected secondary of VTs). The zero-sequence (V_0) or auxiliary voltage (V_X), accordingly, must be greater than 0.02 pu to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is invalid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given. If Current polarizing is selected, the element uses the ground current angle connected externally and configured under NEUTRAL OC1 SOURCE for polarization. The ground CT must be connected between the ground and neutral point of an adequate local source of ground current. The ground current must be greater than 0.05 pu to be validated as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given. In addition, the zero-sequence current (I_0) must be greater than the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. For a choice of current polarizing, it is recommended that the polarizing signal be analyzed to ensure that a known direction is maintained irrespective of the fault location. For example, if using an autotransformer neutral current as a polarizing source, it should be ensured that a reversal of the ground current does not occur for a high-side fault. The low-side system impedance should be assumed minimal when checking for this condition. A similar situation arises for a wye/delta/wye transformer, where current in one transformer winding neutral may reverse when faults on both sides of the transformer are considered. If Dual polarizing is selected, the element performs both directional comparisons as described above. A given direction is confirmed if either voltage or current comparators indicate so. If a conflicting (simultaneous forward and reverse) indication occurs, the forward direction overrides the reverse direction.
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: Selects the polarizing voltage used by the directional unit when "Voltage" or "Dual" polarizing mode is set. The polarizing voltage can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase voltages ("Calculated V0") or supplied externally as an auxiliary voltage ("Measured VX").
5-160
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: This setting indicates whether the 3I_0 current calculated from the phase currents, or the ground current shall be used by this protection. This setting acts as a switch between the neutral and ground modes of operation (67N and 67G). If set to Calculated 3I0 the element uses the phase currents and applies the positive-sequence restraint; if set to Measured IG the element uses ground current supplied to the ground CT of the CT bank configured as NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE. If this setting is Measured IG, then the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING setting must be Voltage, as it is not possible to use the ground current as an operating and polarizing signal simultaneously. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-SEQ RESTRAINT: This setting controls the amount of the positive-sequence restraint. Set to 0.063 for backward compatibility with firmware revision 3.40 and older. Set to zero to remove the restraint. Set higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary application for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines. In regular applications, the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the zero-sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small. If this is the intent, the offset impedance shall not be larger than the zero-sequence impedance of the protected circuit. Practically, it shall be several times smaller. The offset impedance shall be entered in secondary ohms. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: This setting defines the characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction in the "Voltage" polarizing mode. The "Current" polarizing mode uses a fixed ECA of 0. The ECA in the reverse direction is the angle set for the forward direction shifted by 180. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the forward direction. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the forward direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique for the Calculated 3I0 mode of operation. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the reverse direction. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the reverse direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique for the Calculated 3I0 mode of operation. Proper application of this element requires that the operating current and the polarizing voltage (or current) be measured from the same side of the transformer.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-161
5 SETTINGS
SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK: Off=0 SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: Measured VX Calculated V_0 Zero Seq Crt (I_0) Ground Crt (IG) NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: RUN 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP OR IG PICKUP
AND
AND AND
SETTINGS NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD
}
IG 0.05 pu AND
FWD
OR AND 1.25 cy 1.5 cy
}
OR OR
FWD REV
-3V_0 3I_0 REV
Voltage Polarization SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: RUN FWD Current Polarization REV OR
Voltage Current Dual
NOTE: 1) CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RELAYS WITH THE GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CONNECTED TO AN ADEQUATE CURRENT POLARIZING SOURCE 2) GROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USED FOR POLARIZATION AND OPERATION SIMULTANEOUSLY 3) POSITIVE SEQUENCE RESTRAINT IS NOT APPLIED WHEN I_1 IS BELOW 0.8pu
SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: RUN 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP OR IG PICKUP 827077AB.CDR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV
Figure 583: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT LOGIC 5.6.8 GROUND CURRENT a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT
GROUND CURRENT
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 GROUND IOC1 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 4
The G60 relay contains one Ground Time Overcurrent, one Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent, and four Restricted Ground Fault elements. Refer to Inverse Time Overcurrent Characteristics on page 5144 for additional information.
5-162
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS b) GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51G)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT GROUND TOC1
GROUND TOC1
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 GROUND TOC1 INPUT: Phasor GROUND TOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu GROUND TOC1 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv GROUND TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 RESET: Instantaneous GROUND TOC1 BLOCK: Off GROUND TOC1 TARGET: Self-reset GROUND TOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple definite time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse time overcurrent curve characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately. These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.
NOTE
This channel may be also equipped with a sensitive input. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
NOTE
SETTING GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1
SETTING GROUND TOC1 SOURCE: IG SETTING GROUND TOC1 BLOCK: Off = 0
AND
SETTINGS GROUND TOC1 INPUT: GROUND TOC1 PICKUP: GROUND TOC1 CURVE: GROUND TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: GROUND TOC 1 RESET: RUN IG PICKUP t I
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GROUND TOC1 PKP GROUND TOC1 DPO GROUND TOC1 OP
827036A3.VSD
Figure 584: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-163
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS c) GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50G)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT GROUND IOC1
5 SETTINGS
GROUND IOC1
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 GROUND IOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.00 s GROUND IOC1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s GROUND IOC1 BLOCK: Off GROUND IOC1 TARGET: Self-reset GROUND IOC1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The ground instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a definite time element. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor magnitude. These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.
NOTE
This channel may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
NOTE
SETTING GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING GROUND IOC1 SOURCE: IG SETTING GROUND IOC1 BLOCK: Off = 0
AND
SETTING GROUND IOC1 PICKUP: RUN IG PICKUP
SETTINGS GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: GROUND IOC1 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GROUND IOC1 PKP GROUND IOIC DPO GROUND IOC1 OP
827037A4.VSD
Figure 585: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-164
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS d) RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT (ANSI 87G)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1(4)

MESSAGE
RESTD GND FT1 FUNCTION: Disabled RESTD GND FT1 SOURCE: SRC 1 RESTD GND FT1 PICKUP: 0.080 pu RESTD GND FT1 SLOPE: 40% RESTD GND FT1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.10 s RESTD GND FT1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s RESTD GND FT1 BLOCK: Off RESTD GND FT1 TARGET: Self-reset RESTD GND FT1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Restricted ground fault (RGF) protection provides sensitive ground fault detection for low-magnitude fault currents, primarily faults close to the neutral point of a wye-connected winding. An internal ground fault on an impedance grounded wye winding will produce a fault current dependent on the ground impedance value and the fault position on the winding with respect to the neutral point. The resultant primary current will be negligible for faults on the lower 30% of the winding since the fault voltage is not the system voltage, but rather the result of the transformation ratio between the primary windings and the percentage of shorted turns on the secondary. Therefore, the resultant differential currents may be below the slope threshold of the main differential element and the fault could go undetected. Application of the restricted ground fault protection extends the coverage towards the neutral point (see the RGF and Percent Differential Zones of Protection diagram).
WINDING
35%
Rg
RGF ZONE
DIFFERENTIAL ZONE
842731A1.CDR
Figure 586: RGF AND PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL ZONES OF PROTECTION This protection is often applied to transformers having impedance-grounded wye windings. The element may also be applied to the stator winding of a generator having the neutral point grounded with a CT installed in the grounding path, or the ground current obtained by external summation of the neutral-side stator CTs. The Typical Applications of RGF Protection diagram explains the basic application and wiring rules.
GE Multilin
5-165
5 SETTINGS
(A) Transformer
Transformer Winding IA
(C) Stator
Stator Winding IA
IB
IB
IC
IC
IG
IG
(B) Transformer in a Breaker-and-a-Half

Transformer Winding IA
1 IA
1 IB
1 IC
(D) Stator without a Ground CT

Stator Winding
IA
IB
IB
IC
IC
IG 2
IA 2
IB 2
IC
IG
842732A1.CDR
Figure 587: TYPICAL APPLICATIONS OF RGF PROTECTION The relay incorporates low-impedance restricted ground fault protection. This low-impedance form of protection faces potential stability problems. An external phase-to-phase fault is an ultimate case. Ideally, there is neither ground (IG) nor neutral (IN = IA + IB + IC) current present. If one or more of the phase CTs saturate, a spurious neutral current is seen by the relay. This is similar to a single infeed situation and may be mistaken for an internal fault. Similar difficulties occur in a breaker-and-a-half application of the restricted ground fault, where any through fault with a weak infeed from the winding itself may cause problems. The UR uses a novel definition of the restraining signal to cope with the above stability problems while providing for fast and sensitive protection. Even with the improved definition of the restraining signal, the breaker-and-a-half application of the restricted ground fault must be approached with care, and is not recommended unless the settings are carefully selected to avoid maloperation due to CT saturation. The differential current is produced as an unbalance current between the ground current of the neutral CT (IG) and the neutral current derived from the phase CTs (IN = IA + IB + IC): Igd = IG + IN = IG + IA + IB + IC
(EQ 5.18)
The relay automatically matches the CT ratios between the phase and ground CTs by re-scaling the ground CT to the phase CT level. The restraining signal ensures stability of protection during CT saturation conditions and is produced as a maximum value between three components related to zero, negative, and positive-sequence currents of the three phase CTs as follows: Irest = max ( IR0, IR1, IR2 )
(EQ 5.19)
The zero-sequence component of the restraining signal (IR0) is meant to provide maximum restraint during external ground faults, and therefore is calculated as a vectorial difference of the ground and neutral currents: IR0 = IG IN = IG ( IA + IB + IC )
(EQ 5.20)
5-166
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The equation above brings an advantage of generating the restraining signal of twice the external ground fault current, while reducing the restraint below the internal ground fault current. The negative-sequence component of the restraining signal (IR2) is meant to provide maximum restraint during external phase-to-phase faults and is calculated as follows: IR2 = I_2 or IR2 = 3 I_2
(EQ 5.21)
The multiplier of 1 is used by the relay for first two cycles following complete de-energization of the winding (all three phase currents below 5% of nominal for at least five cycles). The multiplier of 3 is used during normal operation; that is, two cycles after the winding has been energized. The lower multiplier is used to ensure better sensitivity when energizing a faulty winding. The positive-sequence component of the restraining signal (IR1) is meant to provide restraint during symmetrical conditions, either symmetrical faults or load, and is calculated according to the following algorithm: 1 If I_1 > 1.5 pu of phase CT, then 2 If I_1 > I_0 , then IR1 = 3 ( I_1 I_0 ) 3 else IR1 = 0 4 else IR1 = I_1 8 Under load-level currents (below 150% of nominal), the positive-sequence restraint is set to 1/8th of the positive-sequence current (line 4). This is to ensure maximum sensitivity during low-current faults under full load conditions. Under fault-level currents (above 150% of nominal), the positive-sequence restraint is removed if the zero-sequence component is greater than the positive-sequence (line 3), or set at the net difference of the two (line 2). The raw restraining signal (Irest) is further post-filtered for better performance during external faults with heavy CT saturation and for better switch-off transient control: Igr ( k ) = max ( Irest ( k ), Igr ( k 1 ) )
(EQ 5.22)
where k represents a present sample, k 1 represents the previous sample, and is a factory constant ( < 1). The equation above introduces a decaying memory to the restraining signal. Should the raw restraining signal (Irest) disappear or drop significantly, such as when an external fault gets cleared or a CT saturates heavily, the actual restraining signal (Igr(k)) will not reduce instantly but will keep decaying decreasing its value by 50% each 15.5 power system cycles. Having the differential and restraining signals developed, the element applies a single slope differential characteristic with a minimum pickup as shown in the logic diagram below.
SETTING RESTD GND FT1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING RESTD GND FT1 BLOCK: Off=0 SETTING SETTING RESTD GND FT1 SOURCE: IG IN I_0 I_1 I_2 ACTUAL VALUES RGF 1 Igd Mag RGF 1 Igr Mag
828002A2.CDR
SETTING RESTD GND FT1 PICKUP: AND RUN Igd > PICKUP SETTINGS RESTD GND FT1 PICKUP DELAY: RESTD GND FT1 RESET DELAY: AND t PKP t RST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS RESTD GND FT1 PKP RESTD GND FT1 DPO RESTD GND FT1 OP
RESTD GND FT1 SLOPE: RUN Differential and Restraining Currents Igd > SLOPE * Igr
Figure 588: RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-167
5 SETTINGS
The following examples explain how the restraining signal is created for maximum sensitivity and security. These examples clarify the operating principle and provide guidance for testing of the element. EXAMPLE 1: EXTERNAL SINGLE-LINE-TO-GROUND FAULT Given the following inputs: IA = 1 pu 0, IB = 0, IC = 0, and IG = 1 pu 180 The relay calculates the following values: 1 3 - ( 1 ) = 2 pu , IR2 = 3 1 -- = 1 pu , IR1 = 1 Igd = 0, IR0 = abs 3 ---------- = 0.042 pu , and Igr = 2 pu 3 3 8 The restraining signal is twice the fault current. This gives extra margin should the phase or neutral CT saturate. EXAMPLE 2: EXTERNAL HIGH-CURRENT SLG FAULT Given the following inputs: IA = 10 pu 0, IB = 0, IC = 0, and IG = 10 pu 180 The relay calculates the following values: 1 - ( 10 ) = 20 pu , IR2 = 3 10 ----- = 10 pu , IR1 = 3 10 Igd = 0, IR0 = abs 3 -- 10 ----- = 0 , and Igr = 20 pu. ----3 3 3 3 EXAMPLE 3: EXTERNAL HIGH-CURRENT THREE-PHASE SYMMETRICAL FAULT Given the following inputs: IA = 10 pu 0, IB = 10 pu 120, IC = 10 pu 120, and IG = 0 pu The relay calculates the following values: Igd = 0, IR0 = abs ( 3 0 ( 0 ) ) = 0 pu , IR2 = 3 0 = 0 pu , IR1 = 3 10 ----- 0 = 10 pu , and Igr = 10 pu. 3
EXAMPLE 4: INTERNAL LOW-CURRENT SINGLE-LINE-TO-GROUND FAULT UNDER FULL LOAD Given the following inputs: IA = 1.10 pu 0, IB = 1.0 pu 120, IC = 1.0 pu 120, and IG = 0.05 pu 0 The relay calculates the following values: I_0 = 0.033 pu 0, I_2 = 0.033 pu 0, and I_1 = 1.033 pu 0 Igd = abs(3 0.0333 + 0.05) = 0.15 pu, IR0 = abs(3 0.033 (0.05)) = 0.05 pu, IR2 = 3 0.033 = 0.10 pu, IR1 = 1.033 / 8 = 0.1292 pu, and Igr = 0.1292 pu Despite very low fault current level the differential current is above 100% of the restraining current. EXAMPLE 5: INTERNAL LOW-CURRENT, HIGH-LOAD SINGLE-LINE-TO-GROUND FAULT WITH NO FEED FROM THE GROUND Given the following inputs: IA = 1.10 pu 0, IB = 1.0 pu 120, IC = 1.0 pu 120, and IG = 0.0 pu 0 The relay calculates the following values: I_0 = 0.033 pu 0, I_2 = 0.033 pu 0, and I_1 = 1.033 pu 0 Igd = abs(3 0.0333 + 0.0) = 0.10 pu, IR0 = abs(3 0.033 (0.0)) = 0.10 pu, IR2 = 3 0.033 = 0.10 pu, IR1 = 1.033 / 8 = 0.1292 pu, and Igr = 0.1292 pu Despite very low fault current level the differential current is above 75% of the restraining current. EXAMPLE 6: INTERNAL HIGH-CURRENT SINGLE-LINE-TO-GROUND FAULT WITH NO FEED FROM THE GROUND Given the following inputs: IA = 10 pu 0, IB = 0 pu, IC = 0 pu, and IG = 0 pu The relay calculates the following values: I_0 = 3.3 pu 0, I_2 = 3.3 pu 0, and I_1 = 3.3 pu 0 Igd = abs(3 3.3 + 0.0) = 10 pu, IR0 = abs(3 3.3 (0.0)) = 10 pu, IR2 = 3 3.3 = 10 pu, IR1 = 3 (3.33 3.33) = 0 pu, and Igr = 10 pu The differential current is 100% of the restraining current.
5-168
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.9 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT
a) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67_2)

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT NEG SEQ DIR OC1(2)
NEG SEQ DIR OC1

MESSAGE
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled NEG SEQ DIR OC1 SOURCE: SRC 1 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 OFFSET: 0.00 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE: Neg Sequence NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: 0.063 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD ECA: 75 Lag NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: 90 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: 0.050 pu NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: 90 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: 0.050 pu NEG SEQ DIR OC1 BLK: Off NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEG SEQ DIR OC1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: Neg Sequence, Zero Sequence
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 90 Lag in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
There are two negative-sequence directional overcurrent protection elements available. The element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications through its output operands NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD and NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV, respectively. The output operand is asserted if the magnitude of the operating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as forward or reverse, respectively (directional unit). The overcurrent unit of the element essentially responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of either the negative-sequence or zero-sequence current as per user selection. The zero-sequence current should not be mistaken with the neutral current (factor 3 difference). A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance: a small user-programmable portion of the positivesequence current magnitude is subtracted from the negative or zero-sequence current magnitude, respectively, when forming the element operating quantity. I op = I_2 K I_1 or I op = 3 ( I_0 K I_1 )
(EQ 5.23)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative-sequence and zero-sequence currents resulting from: System unbalances under heavy load conditions. Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs). Fault inception and switch-off transients.
GE Multilin
5-169
5 SETTINGS
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pick-up accuracy and response time (multiple of pickup). The positive-sequence restraint is removed for low currents. If the positive-sequence current is less than 0.8 pu, then the restraint is removed by changing the constant K to zero. This results in better response to high-resistance faults when the unbalance is very small and there is no danger of excessive CT errors, since the current is low. The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the G60. For single phase injection: Iop = (1 K) Iinjected for I_2 mode. Iop = (1 K) Iinjected for I_0 mode if I_1 > 0.8 pu.
The directional unit uses the negative-sequence current (I_2) and negative-sequence voltage (V_2). The following tables define the negative-sequence directional overcurrent element. Table 523: NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT UNIT
MODE Negative-sequence Zero-sequence OPERATING CURRENT Iop = |I_2| K I_1| Iop = 3 (|I_0| K |I_1|) if |I_1| > 0.8 pu Iop = 3 |I_0| if |I_1| 0.8 pu
Table 524: NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL UNIT

DIRECTION Forward Reverse Forward Reverse COMPARED PHASORS V_2 + Z_offset I_2 V_2 + Z_offset I_2 V_2 + Z_offset I_2 V_2 + Z_offset I_2 I_2 1ECA (I_2 1ECA) I_2 1ECA (I_2 1ECA)
The negative-sequence voltage must be greater than 0.02 pu to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not validated neither forward nor reverse indication is given. The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element. The figure below shows the phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault, with settings of: ECA FWD LA REV LA = 75 (element characteristic angle = centerline of operating characteristic) = 80 (forward limit angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation) = 80 (reverse limit angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation)
5-170
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The element incorporates a current reversal logic: if the reverse direction is indicated for at least 1.25 of a power system cycle, the prospective forward indication will be delayed by 1.5 of a power system cycle. The element is designed to emulate an electromechanical directional device. Larger operating and polarizing signals will result in faster directional discrimination bringing more security to the element operation.
V_2 line REV LA FWD LA VAG (reference)
REV Operating Region
LA ECA line LA ECA I_2 line
I_2 line
LA FWD Operating Region
ECA line
LA VCG VBG
V_2 line
REV LA
FWD LA
827806A2.CDR
Figure 589: NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTIC The forward-looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse-looking function, and therefore should be used for the tripping direction. The reverse-looking function is designed to be faster as compared to the forwardlooking function and should be used for the blocking direction. This allows for better protection coordination. The above bias should be taken into account when using the negative-sequence directional overcurrent element to directionalize other protection elements. The negative-sequence directional pickup must be greater than the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 OFFSET: This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary application for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines (see the Application of settings chapter for information on how to calculate this setting). In regular applications, the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the negative-sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small. If this is the intent, the offset impedance shall not be larger than the negative-sequence impedance of the protected circuit. Practically, it shall be several times smaller. The offset impedance shall be entered in secondary ohms. See the Theory of operation chapter for additional details. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE: This setting selects the operating mode for the overcurrent unit of the element. The choices are Neg Sequence and Zero Sequence. In some applications it is advantageous to use a directional negative-sequence overcurrent function instead of a directional zero-sequence overcurrent function as inter-circuit mutual effects are minimized. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POS-SEQ RESTRAINT: This setting controls the positive-sequence restraint. Set to 0.063 (in Zero Sequence mode) or 0.125 (in Neg Sequence mode) for backward compatibility with revisions 3.40 and earlier. Set to zero to remove the restraint. Set higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD ECA: This setting select the element characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction. The element characteristic angle in the reverse direction is the angle set for the forward direction shifted by 180. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the forward direction.
GE Multilin
5-171
5 SETTINGS
NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit in the forward direction. Upon NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE selection, this pickup threshold applies to zero- or negative-sequence current. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the reverse direction. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit in the reverse direction. Upon NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE selection, this pickup threshold applies to zero- or negative-sequence current. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique.
SETTINGS Forward Pickup Positive-Sequence Restraint
AND RUN
( |3I_0| K |I_1| ) Pickup

AND RUN OR AND
SETTING Function Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING Block Off = 0

AND
( |I_2| K |I_1| ) Pickup
SETTINGS Forward ECA Forward Limit Angle Reverse Limit Angle Offset
RUN Forward AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD
TIMER 1.25 cycles 1.5 cycles
ACTUAL VALUES V_2 I_2 I_0
Reverse
NOTE: V_2 is negative-sequence voltage I_2 is negative-sequence current I_0 is zero-sequence current
Voltage Polarization
SETTINGS Reverse Pickup Pos Seq Restraint SETTING Type = Neg Sequence = Zero Sequence
AND RUN AND
( |I_2| K |I_1| ) Pickup

AND RUN OR
( |3I_0| K |I_1| ) Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV

827091A6.CDR
Figure 590: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-172
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.10 GENERATOR UNBALANCE
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GENERATOR UNBALANCE
GENERATOR UNBALANCE
MESSAGE
GENERATOR UNBAL FUNCTION: Disabled GEN UNBAL SOURCE: SRC 1 GEN UNBAL INOM: 0.800 pu GEN UNBAL STG1 PICKUP: 8.00% GEN UNBAL STG1 K-VALUE: 1.00 GEN UNBAL STG1 TMIN: 0.250 s GEN UNBAL STG1 TMAX: 600.00 s GEN UNBAL STG1 K-RESET: 240.00 s GEN UNBAL STG2 PICKUP: 3.0% GEN UNBAL STG2 PKP DELAY: 5.0 s GEN UNBAL BLK: Off GEN UNBAL TARGET: Self-Reset GEN UNBAL EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 Range: FlexLogic operand
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The generator unbalance element protects the machine from rotor damage due to excessive negative-sequence current. The element has an inverse time stage which is typically used for tripping and a definite time stage typically used for alarm purposes. The inverse time stage operating characteristic is defined by the following equation: K T = -------------------------2 ( I 2 I nom ) where Inom is the generator rated current and K is the negative-sequence capability constant normally provided by the generator manufacturer.
GEN UNBAL INOM: This setting is the rated full load current of the machine. GEN UNBAL STG1 PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup of the stage 1 element expressed as a percentage of the nominal current as specified by GEN UNBAL INOM setting. It is typically set at the maximum continuous negative sequence current rating of the machine. GEN UNBAL STG1 K-VALUE: This setting is the negative sequence capability constant. This value is normally provided by the generator manufacturer (refer to ANSI C50.13 for details). GEN UNBAL STG1 TMIN: This is the minimum operate time of the stage 1 element. The stage will not operate before this time expires. This is set to prevent false trips for faults that would be cleared normally by system protections. GEN UNBAL STG1 TMAX: This is the maximum operate time of the stage 1 element. This setting can be applied to limit the maximum tripping time for low level unbalances.
GE Multilin
5-173
5 SETTINGS
GEN UNBAL STG1 K-RESET: This setting defines the linear reset rate of the stage 1 element. It is the maximum reset time from the threshold of tripping. This feature provides a thermal memory of previous unbalance conditions. GEN UNBAL STG2 PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup of the stage 2 element expressed as a percentage of the nominal current as specified by GEN UNBAL INOM setting. The definite time element would normally be used to generate an alarm to prompt an operator to take some corrective action. The stage 2 element would typically be set at a safe margin below the stage 1 pickup setting. GEN UNBAL STG2 PKP DELAY: This is the minimum operate time of the stage 2 element. This is set to prevent nuisance alarms during system faults.
1000
K=1 Tmax
K=4
K=15 K=40 K=100
100
10
Tmin
0.1 0.01 0.1 1 10 100
830714A1.CDR
Figure 591: GENERATOR UNBALANCE INVERSE TIME CURVES

SETTINGS GEN UNBAL INOM: GEN UNBAL STG1 PICKUP: GEN UNBAL STG1 TMIN: GEN UNBAL STG1 TMAX: GEN UNBAL STG1 K-VALUE: GEN UNBAL STG1 K-RESET: AND RUN t
SETTING GEN UNBAL FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING GEN UNBAL BLK: Off=0 SETTINGS GEN UNBAL STG2 PICKUP: SETTING GEN UNBAL SOURCE: I_2 AND GEN UNBAL INOM: RUN I_2 > PICKUP x INOM 100
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GEN UNBAL STG1 OP I_2 GEN UNBAL STG1 PKP GEN UNBAL STG1 DPO SETTING GEN UNBAL STG2 PKP DELAY: TPKP 0 OR GEN UNBAL STG2 OP GEN UNBAL STG2 PKP GEN UNBAL STG2 DPO OR GEN UNBAL PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GEN UNBAL OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR GEN UNBAL DPO 830713A4.CDR
Figure 592: GENERATOR UNBALANCE SCHEME LOGIC
5-174
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.11 SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) SPLIT PHASE
SPLIT PHASE
MESSAGE
SPLIT PHASE SOURCE: SRC 1 SPLIT PHASE LOAD SOURCE: SRC 2 SPLIT PHASE A PICKUP: 0.200 pu SPLIT PHASE A OFFSET: 0.000 pu SPLIT PHASE A SLOPE: 0.0% SPLIT PHASE B PICKUP: 0.200 pu SPLIT PHASE B OFFSET: 0.000 pu SPLIT PHASE B SLOPE: 0.0% SPLIT PHASE C PICKUP: 0.200 pu SPLIT PHASE C OFFSET: 0.000 pu SPLIT PHASE C SLOPE: 0.0% SPLIT PHASE MIN LOAD: 0.00 pu SPLIT PHASE MODE: Over SPLIT PHASE DELAY: 0.000 s SPLIT PHASE BLK: Off SPLIT PHASE TARGET: Self-Reset SPLIT PHASE EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.0 to 100% in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.0 to 100% in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
Range: 0.000 to 1.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Range: 0.0 to 100% in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Over, Over-Under
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Some generators, due to physical construction, have windings that consist of multiple adjacent turns. It is therefore possible for faults to develop between turns on the same phase (inter-turn faults). These faults are not detected by the stator differential protection, as there is no difference between the neutral and at the terminal currents. Split phase protection may be applied to detect inter-turn faults in the case that the generator is wound with two three-phase windings, each brought separately out of the machine and connected in parallel. The currents in the two windings are compared, any difference indicating an inter-turn fault. The split phase element allows a separate pickup setting to be applied for each phase. Additionally, the pickup can be biased by the load current (slope characteristic). Two modes of operation are supported (over and over-under).
GE Multilin
5-175
5 SETTINGS
830728A1.CDR
Split Phase Source
Load Source
Figure 593: SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION FOR 2 CTS
830727A1.CDR
Split Phase Source
Load Source
Figure 594: SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION FOR 1 CT The split phase element principle of operation is as follows. First, define the following parameters: Isplit: split-phase current, Iload: load current, pickup: pickup setting, min_load: minimum load supervision setting Then, the expected value of the steady state unbalance (defined as bias current) is expressed as follows: I bias = slope I load + offset where: I split Load CT Primary - Split Phase CT Secondary - --------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------slope = ---------I load Load CT Secondary Split Phase CT Primary and offset is the split phase current at no-load. In Over mode, the element will pickup if: ( I split I bias > pickup ) In Over-under, mode, the element will pickup if: ( I split I bias > pickup ) and ( I load min_load )
(EQ 5.27) (EQ 5.25) (EQ 5.24)
and
( I load min_load )
(EQ 5.26)
5-176
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
I splt phs (pu)
Operate
Slope
Offset
Operate
Min Load Iload (pu) Operating Characteristic
I splt phs (pu)
Operate
5
Iload (pu) Operating Characteristic (mode = over, Min Load = 0, Slope = 0)
I splt phs (pu)
Min Load
Operate
Slope
Offset
Iload (pu) Operating Characteristic (mode = over)

830729A1.CDR
Figure 595: SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS SPLIT PHASE SOURCE: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide current from the split phase CT to the split phase protection. SPLIT PHASE LOAD SOURCE: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide current from the load CT to the split phase protection. SPLIT PHASE A(C) PICKUP: This setting specifies a pickup level for each phase. This should be set less than the minimum expected unbalance (split phase) current due to an inter-turn fault. SPLIT PHASE A(C) OFFSET: This setting specifies the steady-state split phase current at no-load for the each phase. This should be set equal to the split phase current during normal (unfaulted) operation. The user should assign the split phase current and the load current (positive sequence) to the data logger to identify the optimum value for this setting. SPLIT PHASE A(C) SLOPE: This setting specifies the slope of split phase characteristic for each phase. This setting is used to bias the pickup of the element due to variations in generator loading. The slope is defined as the ratio of the
GE Multilin
5-177
5 SETTINGS
per-unit split phase current over the per-unit load current. The user should assign the split phase current and the load current (positive sequence) to the data logger to identify the optimum value for this setting. SPLIT PHASE MIN LOAD: This setting specifies the minimum load (positive-sequence current) supervision level. SPLIT PHASE MODE: This setting specifies the mode of operation. If the Over mode is chosen, the element will pickup when the split phase current is rises above the biased offset current plus the pickup setting. If Over-under mode is chosen, the element will also pickup if the split phase current is falls below the biased offset current minus the pickup setting. See the earlier description for further details. SPLIT PHASE DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay required to operate after the pickup condition is established. During an external disturbance the CTs may saturate. CT saturation can cause a spurious split phase current, especially in the case where the split phase current is derived from the external summation of two split phase CTs (first figure above). In this instance, a time delay can be used to ride through the saturation event. Alternately, the CT saturation flag can also be used to supervise the function.
SETTINGS SPLIT PHASE A PICKUP SETTINGS SPLIT PHASE FUNCTION Enabled =1 SPLIT PHASE BLOCK Off = 0 AND SPLIT PHASE A OFFSET SPLIT PHASE A SLOPE SPLIT PHASE MIN LOAD SPLIT PHASE MODE START SETTING SPLIT PHASE DELAY t 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SPLIT PHASE PKP A SPLIT PHASE DPO A SPLIT PHASE OP A
SETTING SPLIT PHASE LOAD SOURCE: I_1 SETTINGS SPLIT PHASE B PICKUP SPLIT PHASE B OFFSET SPLIT PHASE B SLOPE SETTING SPLIT PHASE SOURCE: I_A I_B I_C SPLIT PHASE MIN LOAD SPLIT PHASE MODE START SETTING SPLIT PHASE DELAY t 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SPLIT PHASE PKP B SPLIT PHASE DPO B SPLIT PHASE OP B
SETTINGS SPLIT PHASE C PICKUP SPLIT PHASE C OFFSET SPLIT PHASE C SLOPE SPLIT PHASE MIN LOAD SPLIT PHASE MODE START SETTING SPLIT PHASE DELAY t 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OR SPLIT PHASE OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SPLIT PHASE PKP C SPLIT PHASE DPO C SPLIT PHASE OP C
ACTUAL VALUES SPLIT PHASE A CURRENT (PU) SPLIT PHASE B CURRENT (PU) SPLIT PHASE C CURRENT (PU) LOAD CURRENT (PU)
830007A1.CDR
Figure 596: SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION LOGIC
5-178
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.12 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
MESSAGE
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE2 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1 NEUTRAL OV1 NEUTRAL OV2 NEUTRAL OV3 NEG SEQ OV1 NEG SEQ OV2 NEG SEQ OV3 AUXILIARY UV1 AUXILIARY UV2 AUXILIARY OV1 AUXILIARY OV2 VOLTS/HZ 1 VOLTS/HZ 2
See page 5181. See page 5181. See page 5182. See page 5183. See page 5183. See page 5183. See page 5184. See page 5184. See page 5184. See page 5185. See page 5185. See page 5186. See page 5186. See page 5187. See page 5187.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as: Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the drawn current which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time delay. Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices by operating an output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature may also be used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements. Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source.
GE Multilin
5-179
5 SETTINGS
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a definite time delay characteristic. The definite time curve operates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0 to 600.00 seconds in steps of 0.01. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay characteristic. The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below. D T = --------------------------------V 1 ----------------- V
pickup
(EQ 5.28)
where:
T = operating time D = undervoltage delay setting (D = 0.00 operates instantaneously) V = secondary voltage applied to the relay Vpickup = pickup level
Time (seconds)
% of voltage pickup
842788A1.CDR
Figure 597: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting.
NOTE
5-180
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS b) PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27P)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1(3)
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHASE UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE UV1 MODE: Phase to Ground PHASE UV1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu PHASE UV1 CURVE: Definite Time PHASE UV1 DELAY: 1.00 s PHASE UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu PHASE UV1 BLOCK: Off PHASE UV1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE UV1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage (phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase for wye VT connection, or phase-to-phase for delta VT connection) or as a definite time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked (a setting of 0 will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
SETTING PHASE UV1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING PHASE UV1 BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTING PHASE UV1 SOURCE: Source VT = Delta VAB VBC VCA Source VT = Wye SETTING PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground Phase to Phase
SETTING PHASE UV1 PICKUP: PHASE UV1 CURVE: PHASE UV1 DELAY: AND RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP t V RUN VBG or VBC< PICKUP t V RUN VCG or VCA < PICKUP t V FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR PHASE UV1 PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PHASE UV1 A PKP PHASE UV1 A DPO PHASE UV1 A OP SETTING AND PHASE UV1 B PKP PHASE UV1 B DPO PHASE UV1 B OP AND PHASE UV1 C PKP PHASE UV1 C DPO PHASE UV1 C OP
AND
VAG VBG VCG
VAB VBC VCA
PHASE UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: VAG or VAB < Minimum VBG or VBC < Minimum VCG or VCA < Minimum
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR PHASE UV1 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND PHASE UV1 DPO

827039AB.CDR
Figure 598: PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-181
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS c) PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59P)
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1
MESSAGE
PHASE OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHASE OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE OV1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY: 1.00 s PHASE OV1 RESET DELAY: 1.00 s PHASE OV1 BLOCK: Off PHASE OV1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE OV1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: FlexLogic Operand
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The phase overvoltage element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a definite time element. The input voltage is the phase-to-phase voltage, either measured directly from delta-connected VTs or as calculated from phase-to-ground (wye) connected VTs. The specific voltages to be used for each phase are shown below.
SETTINGS SETTING PHASE OV1 PICKUP: RUN VAB PICKUP SETTING PHASE OV1 BLOCK: Off = 0 RUN AND RUN PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY: PHASE OV1 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST tPKP tRST VCA PICKUP tPKP tRST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PHASE OV1 A PKP PHASE OV1 A DPO PHASE OV1 A OP PHASE OV1 B PKP PHASE OV1 B DPO PHASE OV1 B OP PHASE OV1 C PKP PHASE OV1 C DPO PHASE OV1 C OP
SETTING PHASE OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1
VBC PICKUP
SETTING PHASE OV1 SOURCE: Source VT = Delta VAB VBC VCA Source VT = Wye
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR PHASE OV1 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND PHASE OV1 DPO FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR PHASE OV1 PKP
827066A7.CDR
Figure 599: PHASE OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC If the source VT is wye-connected, then the phase overvoltage pickup condition is V > 3 Pickup for VAB, VBC, and VCA.
NOTE
5-182
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS d) NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59N)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS NEUTRAL OV1(3)
NEUTRAL OV1
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: 0.300 pu NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE: Definite time NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: DELAY: 1.00 s NEUTRAL OV1 RESET: DELAY: 1.00 s NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK: Off NEUTRAL OV1 TARGET: Self-reset NEUTRAL OV1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Definite time, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
There are three neutral overvoltage elements available. The neutral overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetrical system voltage condition due to a ground fault or to the loss of one or two phases of the source. The element responds to the system neutral voltage (3V_0), calculated from the phase voltages. The nominal secondary voltage of the phase voltage channels entered under SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK PHASE VT SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level. The neutral overvoltage element can provide a time-delayed operating characteristic versus the applied voltage (initialized from FlexCurves A, B, or C) or be used as a definite time element. The NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP DELAY setting applies only if the NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE setting is Definite time. The source assigned to this element must be configured for a phase VT. VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element. This function requires the VTs to be wye-connected.
Figure 5100: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-183
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS e) NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59_2)
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS NEG SEQ OV1(3)
NEG SEQ OV1

MESSAGE
NEG SEQ OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled NEG SEQ OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP: 0.300 pu NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.50 s NEG SEQ OV1 RESET DELAY: 0.50 s NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK: Off NEG SEQ OV1 TARGET: Self-reset NEG SEQ OV1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
There are three negative-sequence overvoltage elements available.
The negative-sequence overvoltage element may be used to detect loss of one or two phases of the source, a reversed phase sequence of voltage, or a non-symmetrical system voltage condition.
SETTING NEG SEQ OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTING NEG SEQ OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: Wye VT V_2 Delta VT 3 V_2 SETTING NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP:
AND RUN
SETTINGS NEG SEQ OV1 PICKUP DELAY: NEG SEQ OV1 RESET DELAY: t PKP t RST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS NEG SEQ OV1 PKP NEG SEQ OV1 DPO NEG SEQ OV1 OP
V_2 or 3 V_2 PKP
827839A3.CDR
Figure 5101: NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC
5-184
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS f) AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27X)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS AUXILIARY UV1(2)
AUXILIARY UV1
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 FUNCTION: Disabled AUX UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 AUX UV1 PICKUP: 0.700 pu AUX UV1 CURVE: Definite Time AUX UV1 DELAY: 1.00 s AUX UV1 MINIMUM: VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu AUX UV1 BLOCK: Off AUX UV1 TARGET: Self-reset AUX UV1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The G60 contains one auxiliary undervoltage element for each VT bank. This element is intended for monitoring undervoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The AUX UV1 PICKUP selects the voltage level at which the time undervoltage element starts timing. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK X5 AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY is the per-unit base used when setting the pickup level. The AUX UV1 DELAY setting selects the minimum operating time of the auxiliary undervoltage element. Both AUX UV1 PICKUP and AUX UV1 DELAY settings establish the operating curve of the undervoltage element. The auxiliary undervoltage element can be programmed to use either definite time delay or inverse time delay characteristics. The operating characteristics and equations for both definite and inverse time delay are as for the phase undervoltage element. The element resets instantaneously. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked.
SETTING
AUX UV1 FUNCTION:
SETTING AUX UV1 PICKUP: AUX UV1 CURVE: AUX UV1 DELAY: AND SETTING AUX UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: Vx < Minimum V
827849A2.CDR

AUX UV1 BLOCK:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AUX UV1 PKP AUX UV1 DPO AUX UV1 OP
Off=0 SETTING
AUX UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE:
RUN t
Vx < Pickup
AUX VOLT Vx
Figure 5102: AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-185
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS g) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59X)
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS AUXILIARY OV1(2)
AUXILIARY OV1
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled AUX OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 AUX OV1 PICKUP: 0.300 pu AUX OV1 PICKUP DELAY: 1.00 s AUX OV1 RESET DELAY: 1.00 s AUX OV1 BLOCK: Off AUX OV1 TARGET: Self-reset AUX OV1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The G60 contains one auxiliary overvoltage element for each VT bank. This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK X5 AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY is the per-unit (pu) base used when setting the pickup level. In the G60, this element is used to detect stator ground faults by measuring the voltage across the neutral resistor.
SETTING
AUX OV1 FUNCTION:

AUX OV1 BLOCK:
SETTING AUX OV1 PICKUP: AND RUN SETTING AUX OV1 PICKUP DELAY : AUX OV1 RESET DELAY : Vx < Pickup tPKP tRST
Off=0 SETTING
AUX OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AUX OV1 OP AUX OV1 DPO AUX OV1 PKP
AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)

827836A2.CDR
Figure 5103: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC
5-186
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS h) VOLTS PER HERTZ (ANSI 24)
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS VOLTS/HZ 1(2)
VOLTS/HZ 1
MESSAGE
VOLTS/HZ 1 FUNCTION: Disabled VOLTS/HZ 1 SOURCE: SRC 1 VOLTS/HZ 1 PICKUP: 1.00 pu VOLTS/HZ 1 CURVE: Definite Time VOLTS/HZ 1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00 VOLTS/HZ 1 T-RESET: 1.0 s VOLTS/HZ 1 BLOCK: Off VOLTS/HZ 1 TARGET: Self-reset VOLTS/HZ 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse A, Inverse B, Inverse C, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C, FlexCurve D Range: 0.05 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The per-unit V/Hz value is calculated using the maximum of the three-phase voltage inputs or the auxiliary voltage channel Vx input, if the Source is not configured with phase voltages. To use the V/Hz element with auxiliary voltage, set SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE 1(6) SOURCE 1(6) PHASE VT to None and SOURCE 1(6) AUX VT to the corresponding voltage input bank. If there is no voltage on the relay terminals in either case, the per-unit V/Hz value is automatically set to 0. The per unit value is established as per voltage and nominal frequency power system settings as follows: 1.
SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK N PHASE VT N SECONDARY SETUP POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY setting.
If the phase voltage inputs defined in the source menu are used for V/Hz operation, then 1 pu is the selected SYSTEM setting, divided by the divided by the SYSTEM
2.
When the auxiliary voltage Vx is used (regarding the condition for None phase voltage setting mentioned above), then the 1 pu value is the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK N AUXILIARY VT N SECONDARY setting divided by the SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY setting. If V/Hz source is configured with both phase and auxiliary voltages, the maximum phase among the three voltage channels at any given point in time is the input voltage signal for element operation, and therefore the per-unit value will be calculated as described in Step 1 above. If the measured voltage of all three phase voltages is 0, than the perunit value becomes automatically 0 regardless of the presence of auxiliary voltage.
SETTINGS VOLTS / HZ 1 PICKUP: VOLTS / HZ 1 CURVE: VOLTS / HZ 1 TD MULTIPLIER: VOLTS / HZ 1 T-RESET: AND t RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 PKP VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 DPO VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 OP
3.
SETTING VOLTS/HZ 1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING VOLTS/HZ 1 BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTING VOLTS/HZ 1 SOURCE: VOLT / Hz
V/Hz
828003A5.CDR
Figure 5104: VOLTS PER HERTZ SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-187
5 SETTINGS
The element has a linear reset characteristic. The reset time can be programmed to match the cooling characteristics of the protected equipment. The element will fully reset from the trip threshold in VOLTS/HZ T-RESET seconds. The V/Hz element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a Definite or Inverse timed element. The characteristics of the inverse curves are shown below. DEFINITE TIME: T(sec.) = TD Multiplier. For example, setting the TD Multiplier set to 20 means a time delay of 20 seconds to operate, when above the Volts/Hz pickup setting. Instantaneous operation can be obtained the same way by setting the TD Multiplier to 0. INVERSE CURVE A: The curve for the Volts/Hertz Inverse Curve A shape is derived from the formula:
Time to trip (in seconds)
TDM - when V --- > Pickup T = -----------------------------------------------2 F V --- Pickup 1 F where:
(EQ 5.29)
T = Operating Time TDM = Time Delay Multiplier (delay in sec.) V = fundamental RMS value of voltage (pu) F = frequency of voltage signal (pu) Pickup = volts-per-hertz pickup setpoint (pu)
Time delay setting
Multiples of volts per hertz pickup

830738A1.CDR
INVERSE CURVE B: The curve for the Volts/Hertz Inverse Curve B shape is derived from the formula:
TDM --- > Pickup - when V T = --------------------------------------------F V --- Pickup 1 F where:
(EQ 5.30)
Time delay setting

830739A1.CDR
INVERSE CURVE C: The curve for the Volts/Hertz Inverse Curve C shape is derived from the formula: TDM - when V --- > Pickup T = ---------------------------------------------------0.5 F V --- Pickup 1 F where:
(EQ 5.31)
Time delay setting

830740A1.CDR
5-188
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.13 LOSS OF EXCITATION
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) LOSS OF EXCITATION
LOSS OF EXCITATION
MESSAGE
LOSS OF EXCITATION FUNCTION: Disabled LOSS OF EXCITATION SOURCE: SRC 1 LOSS OF EXCITATION CENTER 1: 10.00 ohm LOSS OF EXCITATION RADIUS 1: 8.00 ohm EXCITATION V SUPV 1: Enabled LOSS OF EXCITATION PKP DELAY1: 0.050 s LOSS OF EXCITATION CENTER 2: 12.00 ohm LOSS OF EXCITATION RADIUS 2: 10.00 ohm LOSS OF EXCITATION V SUPV 2: Enabled LOSS OF EXCITATION PKP DELAY2: 0.500 s LOSS OF EXCITATION UV SUPV: 0.700 pu LOSS OF EXCIT BLK: Off LOSS OF EXCITATION TARGET: Self-reset LOSS OF EXCITATION EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The operating characteristic is shaped out of two offset mho circles shifted down along the imaginary axis as shown below.
X
Xd 2
R
C1 = Center of element 1 = (Zb + Xd) / 2 R1 = Radius of element 1 = Zb / 2
C2
C1
Zb
C2 = Center of element 2 = (Xd + Xd) / 2 R2 = Radius of element 2 = Xd / 2 Zb = Base impedance of the machine Xd = Transient reactance of the machine Xd = Synchronous reactance of the machine
830711A1.CDR
Figure 5105: LOSS OF EXCITATION OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
GE Multilin
Xd
R1 R2
5-189
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS STAGE 1 SETTINGS:
5 SETTINGS
The stage 1 characteristic is typically set to detect a loss of excitation for load conditions of 30% of the nominal or higher. This is achieved with a mho element with a diameter equal to the base impedance of the machine and an offset equal to half the machine transient reactance (Xd). Zb + X d -, CENTER 1 = ---------------------2 RADIUS 1 = Zb -----2
(EQ 5.32)
The stage 1 element should be time delayed to allow for blocking by the VT fuse failure element (50 ms). STAGE 2 SETTINGS: The stage 2 characteristic is typically set to detect a loss of excitation for all load conditions. This is achieved with a mho element with a diameter equal to the synchronous reactance of the machine and an offset equal to half the machine transient reactance (Xd). Xd + X d -, CENTER 2 = ---------------------2 RADIUS 1 = Xd -----2
(EQ 5.33)
During stable power swing conditions the positive-sequence impedance may momentarily enter the stage 2 characteristic. For security of the function under such conditions, it is recommended to delay stage 2 by a minimum of 0.5 seconds. The LOSS OF EXCIT BLK setting specifies a FlexLogic operand for blocking the feature based on user-programmable conditions. When the blocking input is asserted, the element resets its timers, de-asserts the PKP and OP operands (if asserted), clears self-reset targets, logs a blocked event if events are enabled, and becomes inactive. When unblocked, the element will start functioning instantly. If exposed to pickup conditions for an extended period of time and unblocked, the element will pickup and start timing out at the moment of unblocking.
The element responds to the positive sequence impedance as shown below.

SETTING
LOSS OF EXCITATION FUNCTION:
Disabled=0 Generator=1, Motor=1 SETTING

LOSS EXCIT BLK:
SETTINGS
LOSS OF EXCITATION FUNCTION:
Off=0 SETTING
LOSS OF EXCITATION UV SUPV 1 :
BLOCK (See description) COMPARATOR

RUN
LOSS OF EXCITATION CENTER 1: LOSS OF EXCITATION RADIUS 1:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS LOSS EXCIT STG1 PKP SETTING

LOSS OF EXCITATION PKP DELAY 1:
I_1 > 0.05 pu AND OR
LOSS EXCIT STG1 DPO
Disabled=1 Enabled=0
RUN
0 ms
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 ms LOSS EXCIT STG1 OP
20 ms
SETTING
LOSS OF EXCITATION UV SUPV : RUN
LOSS OF EXCITATION CENTER 2: LOSS OF EXCITATION RADIUS 2:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS LOSS EXCIT STG2 PKP SETTING

LOSS OF EXCITATION PKP DELAY 2:
LOSS EXCIT STG2 DPO
SETTING
LOSS OF EXCITATION UV SUPV 2 :
|V_1| < PICKUP

OR
AND
RUN

LOSS OF EXCITATION SOURCE:
0 ms
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 ms LOSS EXCIT STG2 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR LOSS EXCIT OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
20 ms
I_1 V_1
OR
LOSS EXCIT PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
830001AB.CDR
LOSS EXCIT DPO
Figure 5106: LOSS OF EXCITATION SCHEME LOGIC
5-190
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.14 ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION
ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION
MESSAGE
ACCDNT ENRG FUNCTION: Disabled ACCDNT ENRG SOURCE: SRC 1 ACCDNT ENRG ARMING MODE: UV and Offline ACCDNT ENRG OC PICKUP: 0.300 pu ACCDNT ENRG UV PICKUP: 0.500 pu ACCDNT ENRG OFFLINE: Off ACCDNT ENRG BLOCK: Off ACCDNT ENRG TARGET: Self-reset ACCDNT ENRG EVENTS: Disabled
Range: UV and Offline, UV or Offline
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This element provides protection against energization while the generator is at standstill or reduced speed. The feature is armed using either the AND or OR combination of the undervoltage and machine off-line conditions, selected with the ACCDNT ENRG ARMING MODE setting (see below). The undervoltage condition is determined from the measured voltages. The machine off-line status is indicated by a dedicated FlexLogic operand. Once armed, the accidental energization feature operates upon detecting an overcurrent condition in any of the stator phases. This feature can also provide protection against poor synchronization. ACCDNT ENRG ARMING MODE: This setting specifies whether the feature gets armed by either of the undervoltage or machine off-line conditions (UV or Off-line value), or by both the conditions (UV and Off-line value). In both cases, the element is armed after 5 seconds of the appropriate condition and de-armed 250 ms after the arming condition (UV and/or Off-line) ceases. The UV or Off-line selection shall be made when the VTs are on the power system side of the disconnecting device. If this is the case, the measured voltages may be normal regardless of the status of the protected machine, thus the need for an OR condition. The UV or Off-line value provides protection against poor synchronization. During normal synchronization, there should be relatively low current measured. If however, synchronization is attempted when conditions are not appropriate, a large current would be measured shortly after closing the breaker. Since this feature does not de-arm immediately, but after a 250 ms time delay, this will result in operation under imprecise synchronization. The ACCDNT ENRG OC PICKUP setting can control the required precision of synchronization. The UV and Off-line value shall be made when the VTs are on the generator side of the disconnecting device. If this is the case, both the undervoltage and machine off-line conditions are required to indicate that the protected generator is not energized. ACCDNT ENRG OC PICKUP: This setting specifies the current level required to operate the armed Accidental Energization element. If any of the phase current is above the ACCDNT ENRG OC PICKUP level, the feature operates. ACCDNT ENRG UV PICKUP: This setting specifies the voltage level required to arm the Accidental Energization element. All of the line-to-line voltages must drop below the ACCDNT ENRG UV PICKUP level in order to detect the undervoltage condition. The setting is entered in voltage pu values. As the element always responds to the line-to-line voltages, care must be applied in picking up the value depending on the VT connection. ACCDNT ENRG OFFLINE: This setting specifies the FlexLogic operand indicating that the protected generator is off-line.
GE Multilin
5-191
5 SETTINGS
SETTING ACCDNT ENRG FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING ACCDNT ENRG BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTINGS ACCDNT ENRG OC PICKUP: AND RUN RUN RUN SETTING ACCDNT ENRG SOURCE: IA IB IC VT CONNECTION WYE VAG - VBG VBG - VCG VCG - VAG SETTING ACCDNT ENRG OFFLINE: Off = 0 SETTING ACCDNT ENRG ARMING MODE: UV or Offline = 1
830004A3.CDR
IA IB IC
> Pickup > Pickup > Pickup OR
SETTINGS ACCDNT ENRG UV PICKUP: RUN DELTA VAB VBC VCA RUN RUN VAB < Pickup VBC < Pickup VCA < Pickup AND AND AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS ACCDNT ENRG OP ACCDNT ENRG DPO
OR
OR
5s 0.25 s
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ACCDNT ENRG ARMED
AND
Figure 5107: ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION SCHEME LOGIC
5-192
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.6.15 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) POWER SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER DIRECTIONAL POWER 1(2)
DIRECTIONAL POWER 1
MESSAGE
DIR POWER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled DIR POWER 1 SOURCE: SRC 1 DIR POWER 1 RCA: 0 DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION: 0.00 DIR POWER 1 STG1 SMIN: 0.100 pu DIR POWER 1 STG1 DELAY: 0.50 s DIR POWER 1 STG2 SMIN: 0.100 pu DIR POWER 1 STG2 DELAY: 20.00 s DIR POWER 1 BLK: Off DIR POWER 1 TARGET: Self-Reset DIR POWER 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 0.95 in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The sensitive directional power element responds to three-phase directional power and is designed for reverse power and low forward power applications for synchronous machines or interconnections involving co-generation. The relay measures the three-phase power from either full set of wye-connected VTs or full-set of delta-connected VTs. In the latter case, the two-wattmeter method is used. Refer to the UR-series metering conventions section in chapter 6 for details regarding the active and reactive powers used by the sensitive directional power element. The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional power characteristic diagram. The element responds to the following condition: P cos + Q sin > SMIN where:
(EQ 5.34)
P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the UR-series metering convention, is a sum of the element characteristic (DIR POWER 1 RCA) and calibration (DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION) angles, and SMIN is the minimum operating power
The operating quantity is displayed in the ACTUAL VALUES METERING SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 1(2) actual value. The element has two independent (as to the pickup and delay settings) stages for alarm and trip, respectively.
GE Multilin
5-193
5 SETTINGS
Q
re ct io n Di
OPERATE RCA+ CALIBRATION P
SMIN + RESTRAIN -
Figure 5108: DIRECTIONAL POWER CHARACTERISTIC By making the characteristic angle adjustable and providing for both negative and positive values of the minimum operating power a variety of operating characteristics can be achieved as presented in the figure below. For example, section (a) in the figure below shows settings for reverse power, while section (b) shows settings for low forward power applications.
(a)
(b)
RESTRAIN OPERATE RESTRAIN
OPERATE
RCA = 180o SMIN > 0
RCA = 180o SMIN < 0
(c)
(d)
OPERATE
OPERATE
P
RESTRAIN RCA = 0o SMIN < 0 RESTRAIN RCA = 0o SMIN > 0
(e)
OPERATE
(f)
RESTRAIN
RESTRAIN
OPERATE
RCA = 90o SMIN > 0
RCA = 270o SMIN < 0
842702A1.CDR
Figure 5109: DIRECTIONAL POWER ELEMENT SAMPLE APPLICATIONS
5-194
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
DIR POWER 1 RCA: Specifies the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the sensitive directional power function. Application of this setting is threefold: 1. 2. 3. It allows the element to respond to active or reactive power in any direction (active overpower/underpower, etc.). Together with a precise calibration angle, it allows compensation for any CT and VT angular errors to permit more sensitive settings. It allows for required direction in situations when the voltage signal is taken from behind a delta-wye connected power transformer and the phase angle compensation is required.
For example, the active overpower characteristic is achieved by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to 0, reactive overpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to 90, active underpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to 180, and reactive underpower by setting DIR POWER 1 RCA to 270. DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION: This setting allows the relay characteristic angle to change in steps of 0.05. This may be useful when a small difference in VT and CT angular errors is to be compensated to permit more sensitive settings. This setting virtually enables calibration of the directional power function in terms of the angular error of applied VTs and CTs. The element responds to the sum of the DIR POWER 1 RCA and DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION settings. DIR POWER 1 STG1 SMIN: This setting specifies the minimum power as defined along the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the stage 1 of the element. The positive values imply a shift towards the operate region along the RCA line; the negative values imply a shift towards the restrain region along the RCA line. Refer to the Directional power sample applications figure for details. Together with the RCA, this setting enables a wide range of operating characteristics. This setting applies to three-phase power and is entered in per-unit (pu) values. The base quantity is 3 VT pu base CT pu base. For example, a setting of 2% for a 200 MW machine is 0.02 200 MW = 4 MW. If 7.967 kV is a primary VT voltage and 10 kA is a primary CT current, the source pu quantity is 239 MVA, and thus, SMIN should be set at 4 MW / 239 MVA = 0.0167 pu 0.017 pu. If the reverse power application is considered, RCA = 180 and SMIN = 0.017 pu. The element drops out if the magnitude of the positive-sequence current becomes virtually zero, that is, it drops below the cutoff level. DIR POWER 1 STG1 DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for stage 1. For reverse power or low forward power applications for a synchronous machine, stage 1 is typically applied for alarming and stage 2 for tripping.
SETTING DIR POWER 1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 SETTINGS SETTING
AND
SETTING DIR POWER 1 STG1 DELAY: tPKP 100 ms FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO DIR POWER 1 DPO
OR
DIR POWER 1 RCA: DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION: DIR POWER 1 STG1 SMIN: DIR POWER 1 STG2 SMIN: RUN DIRECTIONAL POWER CHARACTERISTICS
DIR POWER 1 BLK: Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP
SETTING DIR POWER 1 SOURCE: Three-phase active power (P) Three-phase reactive power (Q)
DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO
DIR POWER 1 PKP

OR
DIR POWER 1 OP DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP
SETTING DIR POWER 1 STG2 DELAY: tPKP 100 ms

842003A3.CDR
Figure 5110: SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-195
5 SETTINGS 5.6.16 STATOR GROUND
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) STATOR GROUND
STATOR GROUND
MESSAGE
STATOR GROUND SOURCE: SRC1 100% STATOR GROUND 3RD HARM NTRL UNDERVOLTAGE SH STATOR GROUND
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Three means of stator ground fault protection are provided: 100% stator ground protection that uses third harmonic signals at the neutral of the machine and in the zero-sequence voltage of the machine terminals. Third harmonic neutral undervoltage protection that responds to the third harmonic in the voltage at the machine neutral point. 100% stator ground protection based on sub-harmonic injection.
The three protection elements are configured through their individual setting menus. They share the STATOR GROUND SOURCE setting. This setting specifies a signal source used to provide current and voltage signals for stator ground fault protection. For the 100% stator ground protection function, the stator ground source shall be configured as follows: Phase voltages measured at the terminal of the machine shall be configured as phase VT banks. The element extracts the third harmonic of the zero-sequence voltage from the phase voltages in order to operate. The VTs must be connected in wye. Voltage measured at the neutral of the machine shall be configured as the auxiliary VT bank. The element extracts the third harmonic of the auxiliary voltage from the source in order to operate.
For the third harmonic neutral undervoltage protection function, the stator ground source shall be configured as follows: Phase voltages measured at the terminal of the machine shall be configured as phase VT banks. The element uses the voltages to measure the power at the machine terminals for power supervision. Phase currents measured at the terminal of the machine shall be configured as phase CT banks. The element uses the currents to measures the power at the machine terminals for power supervision. Voltage measured at the neutral of the machine shall be configured as the auxiliary VT bank. The element extracts the third harmonic of the auxiliary voltage from the source in order to operate.
For the sub-harmonic injection based 100% stator ground protection, the stator ground source shall be configured as follows: Voltage measured at the neutral of the machine shall be configured as the auxiliary VT bank. The element extracts the 20 Hz component of the auxiliary voltage from the source in order to calculate resistance. The fundamental frequency component from the same input is extracted when the same source is configured for auxiliary overvoltage protection element to provide 95% stator ground fault protection. The auxiliary VT connection setting should be chosen as Vn for this element. Current measured at the secondary of the neutral grounding transformer of the machine shall be configured as the sensitive ground CT bank. The element extracts the 20 Hz component of the ground current from the source in order to calculate resistance. This source can be independent of any of the other inputs from the generator such as neutral end CTs, terminal end CTs and terminal VTs. Or these auxiliary VT and sensitive ground CT can be combined with either neutral side or terminal side inputs within the same source settings.
5-196
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
In addition the relay should be set properly with frequency tracking enabled and the source used as FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE should be the one connected to generator terminal VTs. The tracking frequency, which is essentially the generator frequency, will be used to block the sub-harmonic stator ground protection and auxiliary over voltage protection in the frequency range of 15 to 25 Hz.
b) 100% STATOR GROUND

PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) STATOR GROUND 100% STATOR GROUND
100% STATOR GROUND

MESSAGE
100% STATOR GROUND FUNCTION: Disabled 100% STATOR GND STG1 PICKUP: 0.150 pu 100% STATOR GND STG1 DELAY: 1.00 s 100% STATOR GND STG1 SUPV: 0.0057 pu 100% STATOR GND STG2 PICKUP: 0.150 pu 100% STATOR GND STG2 DELAY: 0.00 s 100% STATOR GND STG2 SUPV: 0.0045 pu 100% STATOR GND BLK: Off 100% STATOR GROUND TARGET: Self-reset 100% STATOR GROUND EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The 100% stator ground function responds to third harmonic voltage measured at the generator neutral and output terminals. When used in conjunction with the neutral overvoltage (fundamental frequency) element, it provides 100% ground fault protection of the stator windings. Since the amount of third harmonic voltage that appears in the neutral is both load and machine dependent, the protection method of choice is an adaptive method. The following formula is used to create an adaptive operating quantity based on the amount of third harmonic that appears at the generator terminals. V N ( 3 rd ) --------------------------------------------< Pickup V N ( 3 rd ) + V 0 ( 3 rd ) where: and V 0 ( 3 rd ) --------------------------------------------> 1 Pickup V N ( 3 rd ) + V 0 ( 3 rd ) and V N ( 3 rd ) + V 0 ( 3 rd ) > Supervision
(EQ 5.35)
VN(3rd) is a magnitude of the 3rd harmonic in the voltage measured at the machine neutral point measured via an auxiliary channel of the VT bank, and V0(3rd) is a magnitude of the 3rd harmonic in the zero-sequence voltage measured at the machine terminals. This element requires wye-connected VTs for measurement of the third harmonic in the zero-sequence voltage at the generator output terminals.
NOTE
Example 1: Operating quantities under normal conditions. Consider the figure shown below. In the case of a high impedance grounded machine, the neutral resistor is typically chosen such that power dissipated in the resistor during a single line to ground fault is approximately equal to the reactive power produced by the zero sequence capacitance of the stator winding and the GSU LV winding ( X oc ). At power system frequencies, the neutral resistance is therefore equal to X oc 3 , and at 3 F n , the neutral resistance is X oc . For analysis, assume that E 3 = 10 V , R = 5 , and X c = 5 .
GE Multilin
5-197
5 SETTINGS
E3 E3 E3
k Vn Va Vb Vc
Vn (3rd) Vn (3rd) + V0 (3rd)

and
< Pickup
Va (3rd) 3V0 (3rd) S Vb (3rd) Vc (3rd)
Vn (3rd)
V0 (3rd) Vn (3rd) + V0 (3rd)

and
> 1 - Pickup
Vn (3rd) + V0 (3rd) > Supervision
830737A1.CDR
Figure 5111: 100% STATOR GROUND APPLICATION EXAMPLE We have the magnitude of neutral voltage VN as: R E3 10 5 10- V = --------V N = ----------------- = --------------V 5 j5 1j R jX c V N = 7.07 V and the magnitude of the neutral and zero-sequence voltages V N + V 0 as: jX c E 3 j 50 j 10 j 10 - V N + V 0 = 10 V 0 = ----------------------- = ------------- = ----------------------------R jX c 5 j5 1 j 1j V N + V 0 = 10 pu Therefore, under the normal conditions described above, we set the operating quantities as follows: VN - = 7.07 Pickup > ------------------------------- = 0.707 pu VN + V0 10 Supervision < V N + V 0 = 10 pu In actual practice, the |VN| / |VN + V0| ratio may vary from 0.4 to 0.85 under normal conditions. The pickup and supervision setpoints are determined by evaluating the operating quantities during a fault condition (refer to example 2 for details). Example 2: Operating quantities for a fault at a fraction k from the neutral grounding point. For analysis, consider the above figure and assume that E 3 = 10 V , R = 5 , X c = 5 , and k = 0.15 . In this case, we have the magnitude of the neutral voltage at: V N = k E 3 = 0.15 10 = 1.5 and the magnitude of the neutral and zero-sequence voltages V N + V 0 as:
(EQ 5.39)
(EQ 5.36)
(EQ 5.37)
(EQ 5.38)
5-198
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
( 1 k ) E 3 + ( 1 k ) E 3 + ( 1 k ) E 3 3 0.85 10 V 0 = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = --------------------------------- = 8.5 V N + V 0 = 8.5 + 1.5 = 10 3 3 V N + V 0 = 10 pu
(EQ 5.40)
Therefore, for faults at a fraction k = 0.15 from the neutral grounding point, we set the operating quantities as follows: VN - = 1.5 ------- = 0.15 pu Pickup > ---------------------VN + V0 10 Supervision < V N + V 0 = 10 pu The 100% stator ground settings are described below. 100% STATOR GND STG1 PICKUP: This setting specifies a pickup level for the operating quantity. It may be beneficial to measure the operating quantity under various load conditions for a particular machine in order to optimize this setting. This can be achieved using the actual values menu of the G60. 100% STATOR GND STG1 DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay required to operate after the pickup condition is established. 100% STATOR GND STG1 SUPV: This setting specifies a signal level supervision for the vectorial sum of the third harmonic at the machine neutral and in the zero-sequence terminal voltage. The setting is entered as a per-unit value of the terminal voltages. Different settings may be considered for stages 1 and 2 as one of them could be used for alarm and the other for trip. The safe value of this setting could be established after putting a given machine into service and reading the quantity from the relay under ACTUAL VALUES menu.
SETTING 100% STATOR GND STG1 PICKUP: 100% STATOR GND STG1 SUPV: 100% STATOR GND STG2 PICKUP: 100% STATOR GND STG2 SUPV: AND RUN Vaux Vaux + V_0 & V_0 Vaux + V_0 & Vaux + V_0 < Supv AND V_1 > 0.5 pu SETTING 100% STATOR GND STG2 DELAY: t PKP 20 ms OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 100% STATOR STG2 PKP 100% STATOR STG2 DPO FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 100% STATOR OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 100% STATOR STG2 OP
830003A5.CDR
(EQ 5.41)
SETTING 100% STATOR GROUND FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING 100% STATOR GND BLK: Off=0 SETTING STATOR GROUND SOURCE: Vaux (3rd harmonic) V_0 (3rd harmonic) V_1 (fundamental)
5
SETTING 100% STATOR GND STG1 DELAY: t PKP 20 ms FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 100% STATOR STG1 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 100% STATOR DPO
< Pickup AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 100% STATOR STG1 DPO 100% STATOR STG1 PKP
< 1-Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR 100% STATOR PKP
Figure 5112: 100% STATOR GROUND SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-199
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS c) THIRD HARMONIC NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) STATOR GROUND 3RD HARM NTRL UNDERVOLTAGE
3RD HARM NTRL UNDERVOLTAGE

MESSAGE
3RD HARM NTRL UV FUNCTION: Disabled 3RD HARM NTRL UV PICKUP: 0.3000 pu 3RD HARM NTRL UV PKP DELAY: 0.00 s 3RD HARM NTRL UV MAX POWER: 0.200 pu 3RD HARM NTRL UV MIN POWER: 0.200 pu 3RD HARM NTRL UV VOLT SUPV: 0.500 pu 3RD HARM NTRL UV BLK: Off 3RD HARM NTRL UV TARGET: Self-reset 3RD HARM NTRL UV EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The third harmonic neutral undervoltage function detects a loss of third harmonic voltage at the generator neutral. The percentage of stator winding covered by this function depends on the pickup setting and the amount of third harmonic generated by the machine at the time of the fault. A settable window of forward power can supervise this element for enhanced security. The element is also supervised by positive-sequence voltage measured at the generator output terminals. This element can be used with either wye or delta connected VTs on the terminal side and requires the machine neutral voltage to be connected via an auxiliary voltage channel of a relay VT bank. 3RD HARM NTRL UV PICKUP: This setting specifies the pickup level for the magnitude of the third harmonic of the neutral voltage. This setting is entered in pu of the nominal auxiliary voltage. The magnitude of the third harmonic voltage at the neutral point is monitored in the ACTUAL VALUES METERING STATOR GROUND menu. Measuring the actual value of the operating quantity for a specific machine under variety of load conditions may be helpful when selecting the pickup threshold for this feature. 3RD HARM NTRL UV MAX POWER: This setting specifies the maximum active power that inhibits this protection function. If the measured power is below this setting but above the 3RD HARM NTRL UV MIN POWER setting the element shall not operate. This setting applies to three-phase power and is entered in pu. The base quantity is 3 VT pu base CT pu base. For example, a setting of 20% for a 200 MW machine, is 0.20 200 MW = 40 MW. If 7.967 kV is a primary VT voltage and 10 kA is a primary CT current, the source pu quantity is 239 MVA, and thus, the pu power setting is 40 MW / 239 MVA = 0.167 pu. 3RD HARM NTRL UV MIN POWER: This setting specifies the minimum active power that inhibits this protection function. If the measured power is above this setting but below the 3RD HARM NTRL UV MAX POWER setting the element shall not operate. If the 3RD HARMONIC NTRL UV MIN POWER is set to 0.00 pu, then the element will not operate for all power values less than the 3RD HARM NTRL UV MAX POWER setting. This setting applies to three-phase power and is entered in pu. The base quantity is 3 VT pu base CT pu base.
5-200
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTING 3RD HARM NTRL UV FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING 3RD HARM NTRL UV BLK: Off = 0 SETTINGS 3RD HARM NTRL UV PICKUP: AND RUN Vaux < Pickup
SETTINGS 3RD HARM NTRL UV MAX POWER: 3RD HARM NTRL UV MIN POWER: RUN Min < 3 Phase Power < Max AND
SETTINGS 3RD HARM NTRL UV PKP DELAY: 20 ms
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 3RD HARM NTRL UV PKP 3RD HARM NTRL UV DPO 3RD HARM NTRL UV OP
SETTING STATOR GROUND SOURCE: Vaux (3rd harmonic) 3 Phase Real Power V_1
SETTINGS 3RD HARM NTRL UV VOLT SUPV: RUN V_1 > Pickup
830005A4.CDR
Figure 5113: THIRD HARMONIC NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-201
5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS d) SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND FAULT
5 SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) STATOR GROUND SH STATOR GROUND
SH STATOR GROUND
MESSAGE
SH STATOR GROUND FUNCTION: Disabled SH STATOR GND STG1 PICKUP: 10 k SH STATOR GND STG1 DELAY: 10.0 s SH STATOR GND STG2 PICKUP: 10 k SH STATOR GND STG2 DELAY: 10.0 s SH CT ANGLE COMPEN: 0.00 SH STATOR GND OC PICKUP: 0.010 pu SH STATOR GND OC DELAY: 1.00 s SH STATOR GND Vsupv: 0.000 pu SH STATOR GND Isupv: 0.000 pu SH STATOR GND BLK: Off SH STATOR GROUND TARGET: Self-reset SH STATOR GROUND EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 1 to 20 k in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
A voltage source placed at the neutral of the generator will produce a current for ground faults anywhere on the stator winding. This source is coupled to the primary circuit using the existing neutral grounding transformer. The following figure shows a typical high impedance grounded generator that is protected against ground faults using the sub-harmonic injection method. The neutral resistor is chosen to limit the ground fault current to a low value (less than 25 A) in order to minimize damage. A sub-harmonic frequency voltage signal is injected into the neutral of the generator. Under normal conditions a resulting current flows through the surge capacitors (Cs) and through the stray capacitance of the stator and step-up transformer windings. When a ground fault develops on the stator winding, an additional current flows through the resistance RG. The value of RG is derived from the measurement of the injected voltage and the resulting current. An AC signal is injected so that it can be coupled through an injection transformer to the primary circuit. The signal is of a low frequency in order to minimize the effects of the capacitance of the primary circuit. A frequency of 20 Hz is chosen. Referring to the following figure, the admittance seen looking into the grounding transformer is: IG 2 1 - = ------Y = N ------ + j CT VX RG In the above equation: RG is the ground fault resistance. CT is the total capacitance to ground. N is the neutral grounding transformer ratio.
(EQ 5.42)
5-202
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS VX is the measured sub-harmonic voltage. IG is the measured sub-harmonic current.
The ground fault resistance can be easily calculated by measuring the 20 Hz voltage and current phasors at the secondary of the grounding transformer. This is done by the G60. An overcurrent element responding to the sub-harmonic provides backup protection. For machines that may operate at sub-synchronous frequencies (for instance a gas turbine that employs static starting), the function is blocked at frequencies between 15 and 25 Hz. This ensures that the voltage and current produced by the generator does not leak into the sub-harmonic ground fault measurements.
Stator winding IG 20 Hz injection module Coupling filter Neutral resistor RG UR-series G60 IED Auxiliary voltage input Sensitive ground input Cst Csurge Cst Grounding transformer Step Up Transformer
VX
CT
830750A1.CDR
Figure 5114: STATOR GROUND FAULT DETECTION BY SUB-HARMONIC INJECTION In addition, a check for minimum values of injected voltage and current guards against a failure of the injection unit or a short or open circuit in the external circuit. In addition, the critical-fail relay contact of the 20 Hz generator can also be connected to one of the contact inputs of G60 and the sub-harmonic stator ground element may be blocked. The stator ground source settings determine the signals that are applied for VX, IG, and frequency. The resistance is reported in primary ohms. Therefore the VT ratio setting of the auxiliary VT input must match the turns ratio of the neutral grounding transformer and the CT primary setting of the ground CT input must match that of the CT used to measure ground current. When the magnitude of RG is large the resulting current IG will be very small therefore the G60 sensitive ground input should be used to make this measurement. Thus a CT/VT module with sensitive ground current input should be present in a G60 if it were to be used for sub-harmonic stator ground protection. Accessory modules required for sub-harmonic injection based stator ground protection: 20 Hz injection module (GE Multilin order code): GPM-S-G. Coupling filter (GE Multilin order code): GPM-S-B. Current transformer (GE order code): 204-SD-43737.
The following settings are available for the sub-harmonic stator ground fault feature. SH STATOR GND STG1 PICKUP: If the measured stator ground primary resistance is less than the value specified by this setting, the stage 1 element will pickup. Normally stage 1 is used to raise alarms and typical settings may fall in the range of 5 to 10 k. This setting is given in primary ohms. SH STATOR GND STG1 DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for stage 1. Typical settings are in the range of 5 to 10 seconds. This delay will have to be added to the operating time of the element to obtain the overall delay. SH STATOR GND STG2 PICKUP: If the measured stator ground primary resistance is less than the value specified this setting, stage 2 element will pickup. Normally stage 2 is used to raise trip signals and typical settings may fall in the range of 1 to 5 k. This setting is given in primary ohms. SH STATOR GND STG2 DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for stage 2. Typical settings are in the range of 1 to 2 seconds. This delay will have to be added to the operating time of the element to obtain the overall delay. SH CT ANGLE COMPEN: The CT used may introduce phase shifts and this should be compensated for accurate fault resistance calculations. Perform a test during commissioning at no fault condition by measuring the SH CURRENT ANGLE reported by the G60. In a healthy machine, the SH impedance is purely capacitive and the angle should be 90.
GE Multilin
5-203
5 SETTINGS
The difference in angle can be used as the SH CT ANGLE COMPEN setting. The preferred method of doing this is by inserting a resistance equal to the SH STATOR GND STG2 PICKUP setting at the neutral of the generator and compensating the angle at this setting. SH STATOR GND OC PICKUP: This setting specifies the backup overcurrent pickup level based on sub-harmonic current. This protection can be used in addition to the sub-harmonic injection based 100% ground fault and fundamental phasor over voltage based 95% ground fault protection. One per-unit value of current is the sensitive ground CT secondary rating setting, which is always 5 A since the CT used is rated for 5 A secondary. SH STATOR GND OC DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for sub-harmonic current based backup over current protection. Thermal capabilities of the loading resistor or neutral grounding transformer should be considered while setting this delay. SH STATOR GND Vsupv: The 20 Hz source can be monitored using this voltage supervision. This setting in pu provides the voltage level below which if the sub-harmonic voltage phasor magnitude remains for a period of 10 seconds, the SH STATOR GND TRB OP operand will be asserted. One per-unit value of voltage is the auxiliary VT nominal secondary voltage setting or the equivalent primary voltage if used in primary. A typical setting of 1 V is suggested. However, when the neutral grounding transformers load resistance is less than 0.5 ohms, the use of voltage supervision is not recommended. SH STATOR GND Isupv: The 20 Hz source can be monitored using this current supervision. This setting in per-unit values provides the current level below which if the sub-harmonic current phasor magnitude remains for a period of 10 seconds, the SH STATOR GND TRB OP operand will be asserted. One per-unit current is the sensitive ground CT secondary rating setting or the primary rating if used in primary. A typical setting of 0.002 pu (=10 mA in secondary) is recommended with the provided 5 A secondary CT.
The logic for the sub-harmonic stator ground fault feature is shown below.
SETTINGS Function = Enabled Block = Off

AND
SETTING Stage 1 Pickup

RUN
SETTING Stage 1 Pickup Delay TPKP 0
ACTUAL VALUE Tracking Frequency
COMPARATOR 15 Hz < f < 25 Hz
Rg Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SH STATOR GND STG1 OP SH STATOR GND STG1 PKP SH STATOR GND STG1 DPO
SETTINGS Function = <Rs> Function = <Rp>
CALCULATE

RUN
Rg Pickup Calculate resistance SETTING Ground OC Pickup

RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SH STATOR GND STG2 OP SH STATOR GND STG2 PKP SH STATOR GND STG2 DPO
ACTUAL VALUES Vaux (SH) Ignd (SH)
SETTING Ground OC Delay TPKP 0
Ignd Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SH STATOR GND OC OP SH STATOR GND OC PKP SH STATOR GND OC DPO
SETTING Current Supervision

RUN
Ignd Pickup TIMER 10 sec. SETTING Voltage Supervision

RUN OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SH STATOR GND TRB OP SH STATOR GND TRB PKP SH STATOR GND TRB DPO
Vx Pickup ACTUAL VALUES Stator Ground Resistance SH Injection Amps SH Injection Volts
830009A1.CDR
Figure 5115: SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND FAULT LOGIC
5-204
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
e) APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS FOR SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND FAULT DETECTOR The following special application considerations must be followed when employing sub-harmonic injection based 100% stator ground protection. 1. A generator with wye-grounded primary VT will provide a path for the injected 20 Hz signal to flow through the ground. So the voltage measured using this VT will have both fundamental and 20 Hz components super-imposed at all times. This leads to mild compromise on the accuracy of fundamental phase-ground voltage phasor measurement. So it is recommended that the generator terminal VTs be delta connected if sub-harmonic injection based stator ground protection is used. Special algorithms address impact of this 20 Hz component on the aux over voltage element, which is normally used for 95% ground fault protection by measuring NGT secondary voltage. There are applications where a wye-grounded primary VT is normally used on the bus side of a generator breaker and a neutral over voltage is used to detect ground faults on the bus duct or cable, etc. In such applications, it is recommended that this function be blocked when the generator is online since the sub-harmonic injection based protection covers this zone. The third harmonic based stator ground fault protection elements should not be used while using the sub-harmonic injection based stator ground protection. It is recommended that phase-phase voltages be used in G60 for the synchrocheck function rather than phase-toground voltages under applications where a single voltage is being connected to one of the auxiliary VT channels of G60 device. The current from the CT in the secondary of the NGT fed to the sensitive ground input of G60 shall only be used for sub-harmonic based stator ground protection and not for any other protection element such as ground over current or neutral directional overcurrent. 5.6.17 FIELD GROUND FAULT PROTECTION a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) FIELD GROUND PROTECTION
2. 3.
4. 5.
6.
FIELD GROUND PROTECTION

MESSAGE
FIELD GROUND FIELD CURRENT
See page 5207. See page 5209.
A block diagram of the field ground detection scheme using the G60 and the GPM-F is shown below. The field winding of a synchronous generator is represented electrically by the impedance ZF = ZF1 + ZF2. Under normal conditions the field circuit is ungrounded. The capacitance CF is the stray capacitance of the field, distributed along the field winding. This capacitance represents the only path for current to flow to ground under normal conditions.
dcmA IFLD UR -series G60 device RS485 communications CF Field ground module IG RG ZF1 ZF2 VFLD Exciter Hall-effect CT
830751A3.CDR
Figure 5116: FIELD GROUND FAULT DETECTION
GE Multilin
5-205
5 SETTINGS
The resistance RG represents a breakdown of the field winding insulation providing a resistive path to ground through the field grounding brush. The insulation failure can occur anywhere, so the impedances ZF1 and ZF2 are unknown. The fault impedance RG is also unknown. The purpose of the field ground detector is to measure this resistance. Measurement of RG is accomplished by injecting a voltage, VINJ and measuring the resulting current, IG. The measurement algorithm must be capable of discriminating between capacitive current due to CF (which can be significant) and resistive current due to a fault. The exciter voltage, VFLD is a DC value with a small ripple such that the impedance of the field is essentially resistive. The current IFLD is a DC current with a range of tens, hundreds, or thousands of amps.
IEXC RC IEXC
ZF1 RG LOC ZF2 RCL IG1, IG2 VINJ1, VINJ2 IG1, IG2 VINJ1, VINJ2 RC VEXC RG
ZF1 LOC ZF2 VEXC
Single-point injection
Double-point injection
830752A2.CDR
Figure 5117: EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT, SINGLE-POINT AND DOUBLE-POINT INJECTION Referring to the single-point injection circuit, the magnitude of IFLD makes it evident that VINJ cannot have a significant impact on the voltage drop across ZF2. Therefore if two values (VINJ1 and VINJ2) are injected the following equations can be written: V INJ 1 = I G 1 R G + I G 1 R CL V F 2 V INJ 2 = I G 2 R G + I G 2 R CL V F 2 Where IG1 is the current flowing due to VINJ1 and IG2 is the current flowing due to VINJ2. Solving for RG we get: ( V INJ 1 V INJ 2 ) ( I G 1 I G 2 ) R CL R G = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------IG 1 IG 2 For the double-point injection circuit, RCL is defined as: RC R CL = ------2
(EQ 5.45) (EQ 5.44) (EQ 5.43)
The VINJ voltage is therefore composed of a square wave to create two levels of injection. Once the value of RG is known it can be substituted into the VINJ equation above to determine VF2. If the VFLD voltage (refer to the single-point injection circuit) is known through measurement then the location of the fault is simply VF2 / VFLD. This gives the location of the fault as percentage of field winding from negative terminal in case of single point injection. If double point injection is used, fault location cannot be determined. The relay displays an invalid fault location for approximately 10% for such conditions. The fault location cannot be determined if the field voltage is zero (that is, when the generator is not running). The fault location is displayed only when the measured field ground resistance is less than 500 K. Refer to Field Ground Module Instruction Manual for details of wiring and installation. GROUND UNDERCURRENT: A brush lift-off condition will prevent the field ground detector from operating. This is detected by calculating the RMS value of the ground current. It will normally have a nonzero value due to the capacitance of the field winding. A drop in this signal indicates an open circuit in the injection path and the field ground under current feature detects this condition.
5-206
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS FIELD CURRENT MONITORING:
The G60 can monitor the field current via a Hall effect transducer that produces a 4 to 20 mA output. This device must be wired to a dcmA input of the G60 or a Brick in HardFiber system. Note that the relay must be configured with a transducer input card for the former case. Assignment of this signal to the field ground function allows the user to detect a field overcurrent or undercurrent condition. The maximum and minimum settings configured for scaling of this dcmA input shall be used to get the per-unit values of field current. b) FIELD GROUND
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) FIELD GROUND PROTECTION FIELD GROUND
FIELD GROUND
MESSAGE
FIELD GROUND FUNCTION: Disabled FIELD GROUND INJECTION FREQUENCY: 1.0 Hz INJ CONNECTION TYPE: Single Point FIELD GROUND STG1 PICKUP: 20 k FIELD GROUND STG1 DELAY: 10.0 s FIELD GROUND STG2 PICKUP: 5 k FIELD GROUND STG2 DELAY: 3.0 s FIELD GROUND UC PICKUP: 1.00 mA FIELD GROUND UC DELAY: 1.0 s FIELD GROUND BLK: Off FIELD GROUND TARGET: Self-reset FIELD GROUND EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Single Point, Double Point
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.05 to 100.00 mA in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The following settings are available for the field ground fault detector function. FIELD GROUND INJECTION FREQUENCY: This setting specifies the frequency of the signal to be injected into the field winding for detecting ground faults. The injection frequency selection will depend on the value of field winding capacitance to ground. The following simple formula can be used to set the injection frequency when the field winding capacitance is known in F. F inj = 2.5 ------CF
(EQ 5.46)
GE Multilin
5-207
5 SETTINGS
Where CF is in microfarads. Some example injection frequency settings are given in the table below for various field winding capacitance values. For field winding capacitances greater than 10 F, resistance measurements will be less accurate. Table 525: EXAMPLE INJECTION FREQUENCY SETTINGS
CF 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F FINJ 2.50 Hz 1.50 Hz 0.83 Hz 0.63 Hz 0.50 Hz 0.42 Hz 0.36 Hz 0.31 Hz 0.28 Hz 0.25 Hz
INJ CONNECTION TYPE: Field ground protection can be implemented by injecting a low frequency signal either into both positive and negative terminals of the field winding or only into the negative terminal of the field winding. Refer to the instruction manual of the field ground module for wiring difference between single point and double point injections. For single point injection, the G60 provides the feature of fault location. In case of a field ground fault, the G60 displays the location of the fault in the field winding as a percentage of the winding from the negative terminal. If the preference is to keep the injection symmetrical into the field winding, then double point injection has to be done but the fault location feature is not available. This setting has to match the type of connection on the field ground module. FIELD GROUND STG1 PICKUP: If the measured ground resistance is less than the value specified by this setting, then the stage 1 element will pickup. Normally stage 1 is used to raise alarms and typical settings may fall in the range of 10 to 40 k. FIELD GROUND STG1 DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for stage 1. Typical settings are in the range of 10 to 15 seconds. This delay will have to be added to the operating time of the element to obtain the overall delay. FIELD GROUND STG2 PICKUP: If the measured ground resistance is less than the value specified by this setting, then the stage 2 element will pickup. Normally stage 2 is used to raise trip signals and typical settings may fall in the range of 2 to 5 k. FIELD GROUND STG2 DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for stage 2. Typical settings are in the range of 3 to 5 seconds. This delay will have to be added to the operating time of the element to obtain the overall delay. FIELD GROUND UC PICKUP: This setting specifies the ground undercurrent level below which a brush open condition shall be detected. A brush lift-off condition will prevent the field ground detector from operating. This is detected by calculating the RMS value of the ground current. It will normally have a non-zero value due to the capacitance of the field winding. A drop in this signal indicates an open circuit in the injection path. To set this value, the ground current in a healthy operating condition preferably with zero field voltage should be recorded from G60 actual values display (performed during commissioning). Configure this setting to be 60 to 70% of that normal value. FIELD GROUND UC DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for field ground undercurrent element. Typical settings are in the range of 20 to 30 seconds. This delay will have to be added to the operating time of the element to obtain the overall delay. FIELD GROUND FUNCTION BLK: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand to block the field ground function.
5-208
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS The field ground fault detector function logic is shown below.
AND
COMMAND TO GPM-F Block 0.1 to 3.0 Hz Injection

RUN
Rg Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS EIELD GND STG1 OP EIELD GND STG1 PKP EIELD GND STG1 DPO

RUN
Rg Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS EIELD GND STG2 OP EIELD GND STG2 PKP EIELD GND STG2 DPO
SETTING Ground UC Pickup

RUN
SETTING Ground UC Delay TPKP 0
Ig_RMS Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FIELD GND INJ UC OP FIELD GND INJ UC PKP FIELD GND INJ UC DPO ACTUAL VALUES Field Ground Resistance Field Ground Current
From injection unit TIMER 5 sec. GPM-F failure 5 sec.
Injected Voltage Fault Location
Field Voltage SELF-TEST MESSAGE GPM-F FAILURE

830010A2.CDR
Figure 5118: FIELD GROUND FAULT DETECTOR FUNCTION LOGIC c) FIELD CURRENT
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) FIELD GROUND PROTECTION FIELD CURRENT
FIELD CURRENT
MESSAGE
FIELD CURRENT FUNCTION: Disabled FIELD CURRENT ORIGIN: Off FIELD OVER CURRENT PICKUP: 0.80 pu FIELD OVER CURRENT DELAY: 1.00 s FIELD UNDER CURRENT PICKUP: 0.20 pu FIELD UNDER CURRENT DELAY: 1.00 s FIELD CURRENT BLK: Off FIELD CURRENT TARGET: Self-reset FIELD CURRENT EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Off, dcmA 1, dcmA 2,..., dcmA 24, TRD1, TRD2,..., TRD8 Range: 0.05 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The following settings are available for the field current fault detector function. FIELD CURRENT ORIGIN: This setting selects the dcmA input to be used for the field current protection element. A dcmA input can be selected from up to 24 possible inputs, depending on the number of installed transducer modules.
GE Multilin
5-209
5 SETTINGS
In a HardFiber G60 device, this setting can point to one of the TRD inputs mapped to a Brick dcmA input. In both cases, the minimum and maximum scaling settings of that transducer input are used to perform the per-unit conversion. The unit setting shall be configured as Amps if the transducer input is used. These minimum and maximum settings are set as per the Hall sensor current rating. The per-unit computation is scaled to a base equal to the maximum value setting, with a zero per-unit value corresponding to zero in the unit system used by the maximum value setting. For example, in the case where the maximum value setting is 100 A, a trip level of 75 A is achieved by setting the operate level at 0.75 pu, regardless of the range (for example, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA etc.) and regardless of the minimum value setting. FIELD OVER CURRENT PICKUP: This setting specifies the field current level above which the overcurrent element picks up. FIELD OVER CURRENT DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for the overcurrent element. This delay is added to the operating time of the element to obtain the overall delay. FIELD UNDER CURRENT PICKUP: This setting specifies the field current level above which the undercurrent element picks up. FIELD UNDER CURRENT DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for undercurrent element. This delay is added to the operating time of the element to obtain the overall delay. FIELD CURRENT BLK: This setting allows the user to select a FlexLogic operand to block the field ground function.
The field current fault detector function logic is shown below.

AND
SETTING Field OC Pickup

RUN
SETTING Field OC Delay TPKP 0
IFLD Pickup
5
SETTING Field UC Pickup
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FIELD OC OP FIELD OC PKP FIELD OC DPO
SETTING Field UC Delay TPKP 0
IFLD Pickup
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FIELD UC OP FIELD UC PKP FIELD UC DPO
SETTINGS Field Current Origin = <Value>
ACTUAL VALUE Field Current

830011A1.CDR
Figure 5119: FIELD CURRENT FAULT DETECTOR FUNCTION LOGIC
5-210
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.7CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.7.1 OVERVIEW
Control elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chapter for further information. 5.7.2 TRIP BUS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS TRIP BUS TRIP BUS 1(6)
TRIP BUS 1
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION: Disabled TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK: Off TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.00 s TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1: Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2: Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16: Off TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING: Disabled TRIP BUS 1 RESET: Off TRIP BUS 1 TARGET: Self-reset TRIP BUS 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The trip bus element allows aggregating outputs of protection and control elements without using FlexLogic and assigning them a simple and effective manner. Each trip bus can be assigned for either trip or alarm actions. Simple trip conditioning such as latch, delay, and seal-in delay are available. The easiest way to assign element outputs to a trip bus is through the EnerVista UR Setup software A protection summary is displayed by navigating to a specific protection or control protection element and checking the desired bus box. Once the desired element is selected for a specific bus, a list of element operate-type operands are displayed and can be assigned to a trip bus. If more than one operate-type operand is required, it may be assigned directly from the trip bus menu.
GE Multilin
5-211
5 SETTINGS
Figure 5120: TRIP BUS FIELDS IN THE PROTECTION SUMMARY The following settings are available. TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK: The trip bus output is blocked when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted. TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay to produce an output depending on how output is used. TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay to reset an output command. The time delay should be set long enough to allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action. TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16: These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an input to the trip bus. TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING: This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output. This is typically used when lockout is required or user acknowledgement of the relay response is required. TRIP BUS 1 RESET: The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted. Note that the RESET OP operand is pre-wired to the reset gate of the latch, As such, a reset command the front panel interface or via communications will reset the trip bus output.
SETTINGS TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 = Off TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2 = Off
***
OR AND
SETTINGS TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY TPKP Latch
R
Non-volatile, set-dominant
S
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 = Off SETTINGS TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION = Enabled TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK = Off SETTINGS TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING = Enabled TRIP BUS 1 RESET = Off FLEXLOGIC OPERAND RESET OP
OR AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP BUS 1 OP TRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TRIP BUS 1 PKP
842023A1.CDR
Figure 5121: TRIP BUS LOGIC
5-212
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.7.3 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTINGS GROUPS
SETTING GROUPS
MESSAGE
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: Disabled SETTING GROUPS BLK: Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: Off GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: Off GROUP 1 NAME: GROUP 2 NAME:
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GROUP 6 NAME: SETTING GROUP EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
The setting groups menu controls the activation and deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED settings menu. The faceplate Settings In Use LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized LED) is in service.
ELEMENTS
The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic parameter is set to "On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the breaker being open. The GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON to GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON settings select a FlexLogic operand which, when set, will make the particular setting group active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time the highest-numbered group which is activated by its ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lowernumbered groups. There is no activate on setting for group 1 (the default active group), because group 1 automatically becomes active if no other group is active. The SETTING GROUP 1 NAME to SETTING GROUP 6 NAME settings allows to user to assign a name to each of the six settings groups. Once programmed, this name will appear on the second line of the GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) menu display. The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default settings group. The following FlexLogic equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications (for example, VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ON) or from a local contact input (for example, CONTACT IP 1 ON) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular settings group. The assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the On state of a particular settings group.
GE Multilin
5-213
5 SETTINGS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VIRT IP 1 ON (VI1) CONT IP 1 ON (H5A) OR (2) PHASE TOC1 PKP NOT PHASE TOC2 PKP NOT AND (3) = VIRT OP 1 (VO1)
OR (2)
AND (3)
= VIRT OP 1 (VO1)
10
END
842789A1.CDR
Figure 5122: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP 5.7.4 SELECTOR SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SELECTOR SWITCH SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Disabled SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: 7 SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: 5.0 s SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: Off SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: Restore SELECTOR 1 TARGETS: Self-reset SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5-214
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The selector switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic. The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The three-bit control input allows setting the selector to the position defined by a three-bit word. The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after timeout or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile memory. Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current three-bit word (user setting). Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; for example, the three-bit control input being out of range. SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through available positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (position 1). When using a direct threebit control word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word is within the range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds. SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in the following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is Time-out, the setting specifies the required period of inactivity of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEPUP MODE is Acknowledge, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is re-started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT timer expires; otherwise, the change will not take place and an alarm will be set. SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new position at each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE) to the first (position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every 50 ms. After each rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POS Z CHNG INITIATED target message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for the time specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out (Time-out mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (Acknowledge mode). When the new position is applied, the relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically, a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input. SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the selector will change its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to Acknowledge, the selector will change its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change and an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds. SELECTOR 1 ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under Acknowledge mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input. SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2: These settings specify a three-bit control input of the selector. The three-bit control word pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:
A2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 A1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 A0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 POSITION rest 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GE Multilin
5-215
5 SETTINGS
The rest position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the three-bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is Time-out, the pre-selected position is applied in SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the three-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is Acknowledge, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging input. The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the three-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2) lock-out mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the three-bit control input is inactive; once the three-bit control sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive. SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the selector changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to Acknowledge, the selector changes its position only after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds. SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the three-bit control input. The preselected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic operand. This setting is active only under the Acknowledge mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the three-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and three-bit control input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly). SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay. When set to Restore, the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering up the relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied and an alarm is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM). When set to Synchronize selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position 0 to the switch and activates SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes to the position dictated by the three-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When the synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (that is, the three-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of range) then the selector switch output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM). The operation of Synch/Restore mode is similar to the Synchronize mode. The only difference is that after an unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch will attempt to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The Synch/Restore mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group in redundant (two relay) protection schemes. SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: If enabled, the following events are logged:
EVENT NAME SELECTOR 1 POS Z SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM DESCRIPTION Selector 1 changed its position to Z. The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been confirmed before the time out. The selector position pre-selected via the three-bit control input has not been confirmed before the time out.
5-216
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The following figures illustrate the operation of the selector switch. In these diagrams, T represents a time-out setting.
pre-existing position 2 changed to 4 with a pushbutton changed to 1 with a 3-bit input changed to 2 with a pushbutton changed to 7 with a 3-bit input
STEP-UP T T
3BIT A0 3BIT A1 3BIT A2 T T
POS 1 POS 2 POS 3 POS 4 POS 5 POS 6 POS 7 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2
STP ALARM BIT ALARM ALARM

842737A1.CDR
Figure 5123: TIME-OUT MODE
GE Multilin
5-217
5 SETTINGS
pre-existing position 2
changed to 4 with a pushbutton
changed to 1 with a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with a pushbutton
STEP-UP ACK 3BIT A0 3BIT A1 3BIT A2 3BIT ACK POS 1 POS 2 POS 3 POS 4 POS 5 POS 6
POS 7 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 STP ALARM BIT ALARM ALARM

842736A1.CDR
Figure 5124: ACKNOWLEDGE MODE APPLICATION EXAMPLE Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control setting groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting groups are to be controlled from both user-programmable pushbutton 1 and from an external device via contact inputs 1 through 3. The active setting group shall be available as an encoded three-bit word to the external device and SCADA via output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group shall be applied automatically after 5 seconds of inactivity of the control inputs. When the relay powers up, it should synchronize the setting group to the three-bit control input. Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS menu:
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: Enabled SETTING GROUPS BLK: Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON: GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON: GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON:
2" 3"
SELECTOR 1 POS 4" Off Off
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
Make the following changes to selector switch element in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SELECTOR SWITCH menu to assign control to user programmable pushbutton 1 and contact inputs 1 through 3:
5-218
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Enabled SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: 4 SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: 5.0 s SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: PUSHBUTTON 1 SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: CONT IP 1 ON SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: CONT IP 2 ON SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: CONT IP 3 ON SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: Synchronize
ON
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the selector switch element by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: OUTPUT H2 OPERATE: OUTPUT H3 OPERATE:
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0" SELECTOR 1 BIT 1" SELECTOR 1 BIT 2"
Finally, assign configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.10 s
The logic for the selector switch is shown below:

SETTINGS SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: SETTINGS SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: Off = 0 SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off = 0 SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: Off = 0 SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: Off = 0 SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: Off = 0 SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off = 0
3-bit acknowledge 3-bit position out acknowledge step up
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: RUN
ACTUAL VALUE SELECTOR 1 POSITION
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 1 2 3 4
three-bit control input
SELECTOR 1 POS 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2 SELECTOR 1 POS 3 SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SELECTOR 1 POS 5 5 SELECTOR 1 POS 6 SELECTOR 1 POS 7 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
ON
OR
SELECTOR 1 ALARM SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM SELECTOR 1 BIT 0 SELECTOR 1 BIT 1 SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
842012A2.CDR
Figure 5125: SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-219
5 SETTINGS 5.7.5 UNDERFREQUENCY
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS UNDERFREQUENCY UNDERFREQUENCY 1(6)
UNDERFREQUENCY 1
MESSAGE
UNDFREQ 1 FUNCTION: Disabled UNDERFREQ 1 BLOCK: Off UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE: SRC 1 UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT/AMP: 0.10 pu UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP: 59.50 Hz UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP DELAY: 2.000 s UNDERFREQ 1 RESET DELAY : 2.000 s UNDERFREQ 1 TARGET: Self-reset UNDERFREQ 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
There are six identical underfrequency elements, numbered from 1 through 6. The steady-state frequency of a power system is a certain indicator of the existing balance between the generated power and the load. Whenever this balance is disrupted through the loss of an important generating unit or the isolation of part of the system from the rest of the system, the effect will be a reduction in frequency. If the control systems of the system generators do not respond fast enough, the system may collapse. A reliable method to quickly restore the balance between load and generation is to automatically disconnect selected loads, based on the actual system frequency. This technique, called load-shedding, maintains system integrity and minimize widespread outages. After the frequency returns to normal, the load may be automatically or manually restored. The UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE setting is used to select the source for the signal to be measured. The element first checks for a live phase voltage available from the selected source. If voltage is not available, the element attempts to use a phase current. If neither voltage nor current is available, the element will not operate, as it will not measure a parameter below the minimum voltage/current setting. The UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT/AMP setting selects the minimum per unit voltage or current level required to allow the underfrequency element to operate. This threshold is used to prevent an incorrect operation because there is no signal to measure. This UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting is used to select the level at which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For example, if the system frequency is 60 Hz and the load shedding is required at 59.5 Hz, the setting will be 59.50 Hz.
SETTING
UNDERFREQ 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING

UNDERFREQ 1 BLOCK:
SETTING UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP : AND SETTING ACTUAL VALUES Level Frequency

UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT / AMP:
SETTING UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP DELAY : UNDERFREQ 1 RESET DELAY :
Off = 0 SETTING
UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE:
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS UNDERFREQ 1 PKP UNDERFREQ 1 DPO tRST UNDERFREQ 1 OP
0 < f PICKUP
tPKP
VOLT / AMP
Minimum
827079A8.CDR
Figure 5126: UNDERFREQUENCY SCHEME LOGIC
5-220
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.7.6 OVERFREQUENCY
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS OVERFREQUENCY OVERFREQUENCY 1(4)
OVERFREQUENCY 1
MESSAGE
OVERFREQ 1 FUNCTION: Disabled OVERFREQ 1 BLOCK: Off OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE: SRC 1 OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP: 60.50 Hz OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.500 s OVERFREQ 1 RESET DELAY : 0.500 s OVERFREQ 1 TARGET: Self-reset OVERFREQ 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
There are four overfrequency elements, numbered 1 through 4. A frequency calculation for a given source is made on the input of a voltage or current channel, depending on which is available. The channels are searched for the signal input in the following order: voltage channel A, auxiliary voltage channel, current channel A, ground current channel. The first available signal is used for frequency calculation. The steady-state frequency of a power system is an indicator of the existing balance between the generated power and the load. Whenever this balance is disrupted through the disconnection of significant load or the isolation of a part of the system that has a surplus of generation, the effect will be an increase in frequency. If the control systems of the generators do not respond fast enough, to quickly ramp the turbine speed back to normal, the overspeed can lead to the turbine trip. The overfrequency element can be used to control the turbine frequency ramp down at a generating location. This element can also be used for feeder reclosing as part of the "after load shedding restoration". The OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for the signal to be measured. The OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting selects the level at which the overfrequency element is to pickup.
SETTING
OVERFREQ 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING

OVERFREQ 1 BLOCK:
SETTING OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP : AND RUN SETTING OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP DELAY : OVERFREQ 1 RESET DELAY : tPKP tRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OVERFREQ 1 PKP OVERFREQ 1 DPO OVERFREQ 1 OP
Off = 0 SETTING
OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE:
f PICKUP
Frequency
827832A5.CDR
Figure 5127: OVERFREQUENCY SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-221
5 SETTINGS 5.7.7 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 1(4)
FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 1

MESSAGE
FREQ RATE 1 FUNCTION: Disabled FREQ RATE 1 SOURCE: SRC 1 FREQ RATE 1 TREND: Decreasing FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP: 0.50 Hz/sec FREQ RATE 1 OV SUPV PICKUP: 0.700 pu FREQ RATE 1 OC SUPV PICKUP: 0.200 pu FREQ RATE 1 MIN FREQUENCY: 45.00 Hz FREQ RATE 1 MAX FREQUENCY: 65.00 Hz FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.000 s FREQ RATE 1 RESET DELAY: 0.000 s FREQ RATE 1 BLOCK: Off FREQ RATE 1 TARGET: Self-Reset FREQ RATE 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Increasing, Decreasing, Bi-directional
MESSAGE
Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/sec in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Four (4) independent rate of change of frequency elements are available. The element responds to rate of change of frequency with voltage, current and frequency supervision. FREQ RATE 1 TREND: This setting allows configuring the element to respond to increasing or decreasing frequency, or to frequency change in either direction. FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP: This setting specifies an intended df dt pickup threshold. For applications monitoring a decreasing trend, set FREQ RATE 1 TREND to Decreasing and specify the pickup threshold accordingly. The operating condition is: df dt > Pickup . For applications monitoring an increasing trend, set FREQ RATE 1 TREND to Increasing and specify the pickup threshold accordingly. The operating condition is: df dt > Pickup . For applications monitoring rate of change of frequency in any direction set FREQ RATE 1 TREND to Bi-Directional and specify the pickup threshold accordingly. The operating condition is: abs ( df dt ) > Pickup FREQ RATE 1 OV SUPV PICKUP: This setting defines minimum voltage level required for operation of the element. The supervising function responds to the positive-sequence voltage. Overvoltage supervision should be used to prevent operation under specific system conditions such as faults. FREQ RATE 1 OC SUPV PICKUP: This setting defines minimum current level required for operation of the element. The supervising function responds to the positive-sequence current. Typical application includes load shedding. Set the pickup threshold to zero if no overcurrent supervision is required.
5-222
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
FREQ RATE 1 MIN FREQUENCY: This setting defines minimum frequency level required for operation of the element. The setting may be used to effectively block the feature based on frequency. For example, if the intent is to monitor an increasing trend but only if the frequency is already above certain level, this setting should be set to the required frequency level. FREQ RATE 1 MAX FREQUENCY: This setting defines maximum frequency level required for operation of the element. The setting may be used to effectively block the feature based on frequency. For example, if the intent is to monitor a decreasing trend but only if the frequency is already below certain level (such as for load shedding), this setting should be set to the required frequency level. If the signal source assigned to the frequency rate of change element is only set to auxiliary VT, then the minimum voltage supervision is 3 V.
NOTE
SETTINGS FREQ RATE 1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 FREQ RATE 1 BLOCK: Off
SETTING FREQ RATE 1 OV SUPV PICKUP:
AND
RUN | V_1 | > PICKUP SETTINGS SETTING SETTINGS FREQ RATE 1 TREND: FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP: FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP DELAY: FREQ RATE 1 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FREQ RATE 1 OP df/dt > PICKUP SETTINGS FREQ RATE 1 PKP FREQ RATE 1 MIN FREQUENCY: FREQ RATE 1 MAX FREQUENCY: RUN F > MIN & F < MAX FREQ RATE 1 DPO
SETTING FREQ RATE 1 SOURCE: Pos seq voltage (V_1) Pos seq current (I_1) Frequency (F)
FREQ RATE 1 OC SUPV PICKUP:
AND
RUN | I_1 | >PICKUP
RUN
RUN Calculate df/dt

832023A2.CDR
Figure 5128: FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-223
5 SETTINGS 5.7.8 FREQUENCY OUT-OF-BAND ACCUMULATION
a) GENERAL SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATION
FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATION

MESSAGE
FREQ OOB ACCUM SOURCE: SRC 1 FREQ OOB ACCUM MIN VOLT/AMP: 0.10 pu FREQ ACCUM BLOCK: Off FREQ OOB ACCUM TARGET: Self-reset FREQ OOB ACCUM EVENTS: Disabled FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATOR 1 FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATOR 2
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
See following section. See following section.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATOR 7
See following section.
The turbine portion of a generator is designed to operate in a narrow frequency range around the nominal, typically 5%. As the turbine overspeeds (typically due to load rejection) or coasts down, the turbine will pass through operating frequencies where the turbine blades find stimulus at their natural frequencies. Blade vibrations at these natural frequencies result is stress on the blades that is accumulated and can result in cracking in some parts of the blade structure, most likely the tie wires or blade covers. Though typically not catastrophic, the stress can change the vibration behavior of the blade so that they can have natural resonances closer to the normal operating frequency. This element will provide diagnostic information and alarms to the customer based on the accumulated off-nominal frequency operation time of a turbine over several frequency bands and can then be used to schedule maintenance or other actions as desired by the customer. The available setting of an upper and lower frequency for each band enables the user to overlap bands of frequencies in the accumulation function. The accumulation function in any band can be blocked as desired. For example, accumulation may be blocked during an out-of-service condition as set via an input to the relay. The following settings are available and apply to all accumulators. FREQ OOB ACCUM SOURCE: This setting selects the source for the signal to be measured. The element first checks for a live phase voltage available from the selected source. If voltage is not available, the element attempts to use a phase current. If neither voltage nor current is available, the element will not operate, as it will not measure a parameter below the minimum voltage/current setting. FREQ OOB ACCUM MIN VOLT/AMP: This setting specifies the minimum per-unit positive-sequence voltage or current level required to allow the frequency out-of-band accumulators to operate. This threshold is used to prevent an incorrect accumulation when operating quantity is too low. FREQ ACCUM BLOCK: This setting selects a FlexLogic operand to block out-of-band frequency accumulation in all bands. This is typically required to avoid unnecessary accumulation when relay testing is being performed.
5-224
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS b) ACCUMULATORS 1 TO 7
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATION FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATOR 1(7)
FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATOR 1

MESSAGE
FREQ ACCUM 1 FUNCTION: Disabled FREQ ACCUM 1 UPPER FREQ 60.00 Hz FREQ ACCUM 1 LOWER FREQ 60.00 Hz FREQ ACCUM 1 TIME LIMIT: 200 s FREQ ACCUM 1 TIME PRESET: 0 s
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Seven frequency out-of-band accumulators are available. The following settings are available for each accumulator. FREQ ACCUM 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disabled a particular frequency band. FREQ ACCUM 1 UPPER FREQ: This setting specifies the upper frequency value, in Hz, below which band 1 values start to accumulate. This upper frequency value must be greater than the lower frequency value. FREQ ACCUM 1 LOWER FREQ: This setting specifies the lower frequency value, in Hz, above which band 1 values start to accumulate. This lower frequency value must be less than the upper frequency value. FREQ ACCUM 1 TIME LIMIT: This value specifies the accumulation time, in seconds, at which the overfrequency accumulation band exceeds the overfrequency accumulation limit and operates. FREQ ACCUM 1 TIME PRESET: This setting allows the user to either transfer accumulated frequency time of operation values from a previous hardware platform to a new platform, or, given that some knowledge of the operation of the turbine is known, to start accumulation at a user-specified value.
SETTING FREQ ACCUM BLOCK = Off SETTING FREQ OOB ACCUM SOURCE = Volt/amp mag = Frequency ACTUAL VALUE SETTING FREQ ACCUM 1 FUNCTION = Enabled COMMANDS RESET FREQ OOB ACCUMULATORS PRESET FREQ OOB ACCUMULATORS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FREQ OOB BAND 2 OP FREQ OOB BAND 3 OP FREQ OOB BAND 4 OP FREQ OOB BAND 5 OP FREQ OOB BAND 6 OP FREQ OOB BAND 7 OP
OR
SETTINGS FREQ ACCUM 1 UPPER FREQ FREQ ACCUM 1 LOWER FREQ

AND RUN Accumulating
SETTINGS FREQ ACCUM 1 TIME LIMIT FREQ ACCUM 1 TIME PRESET

RUN
SETTING FREQ OOB ACCUM MIN VOLT/AMP V/A > MINIMUM
AND
fLOWER < f f UPPER
tACCUM > tLIMIT
FREQ OOB BAND 1 ACCUMULATION
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FREQ OOB BAND 1 OP FREQ OOB BAND 1 DPO FREQ OOB BAND 1 PKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FREQ OOB ACCUM OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FREQ OOB BAND 2 PKP FREQ OOB BAND 3 PKP FREQ OOB BAND 4 PKP FREQ OOB BAND 5 PKP FREQ OOB BAND 6 PKP FREQ OOB BAND 7 PKP
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FREQ OOB ACCUM PKP
830008A1.CDR
Figure 5129: FREQUENCY OUT-OF-BAND ACCUMULATION LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-225
5 SETTINGS 5.7.9 SYNCHROCHECK
a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SYNCHROCHECK SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)
SYNCHROCHECK 1
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 FUNCTION: Disabled SYNCHK1 BLOCK: Off SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: SRC 1 SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: SRC 2 SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF: 10000 V SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF: 30 SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: 1.00 Hz SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS: 0.06 Hz SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: LV1 and DV2 SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu SYNCHK1 TARGET: Self-reset SYNCHK1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: None, LV1 and DV2, DV1 and LV2, DV1 or DV2, DV1 Xor DV2, DV1 and DV2 Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The are two identical synchrocheck elements available, numbered 1 and 2. The synchronism check function is intended for supervising the paralleling of two parts of a system which are to be joined by the closure of a circuit breaker. The synchrocheck elements are typically used at locations where the two parts of the system are interconnected through at least one other point in the system. Synchrocheck verifies that the voltages (V1 and V2) on the two sides of the supervised circuit breaker are within set limits of magnitude, angle and frequency differences. The time that the two voltages remain within the admissible angle difference is determined by the setting of the phase angle difference and the frequency difference F (slip frequency). It can be defined as the time it would take the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2 at a frequency equal to the frequency difference F. This time can be calculated by: 1 T = ------------------------------360 ----------------- F 2
(EQ 5.47)
5-226
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS where: = phase angle difference in degrees; F = frequency difference in Hz.
If one or both sources are de-energized, the synchrocheck programming can allow for closing of the circuit breaker using undervoltage control to by-pass the synchrocheck measurements (dead source function). SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V1 (see NOTES below). SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V2, which must not be the same as used for the V1 (see NOTES below). SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF: This setting selects the maximum primary voltage difference in volts between the two sources. A primary voltage magnitude difference between the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism. SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF: This setting selects the maximum angular difference in degrees between the two sources. An angular difference between the two input voltage phasors below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism. SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: This setting selects the maximum frequency difference in Hz between the two sources. A frequency difference between the two input voltage systems below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism. SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS: This setting specifies the required hysteresis for the maximum frequency difference condition. The condition becomes satisfied when the frequency difference becomes lower than SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF. Once the Synchrocheck element has operated, the frequency difference must increase above the SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF + SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS sum to drop out (assuming the other two conditions, voltage and angle, remain satisfied). SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: This setting selects the combination of dead and live sources that will by-pass synchronism check function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages (V1 or/and V2) are below the maximum voltage threshold. A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level. Six options are available: None: LV1 and DV2: DV1 and LV2: DV1 or DV2: DV1 Xor DV2: DV1 and DV2: Dead Source function is disabled Live V1 and Dead V2 Dead V1 and Live V2 Dead V1 or Dead V2 Dead V1 exclusive-or Dead V2 (one source is Dead and the other is Live) Dead V1 and Dead V2
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V1 in 1 pu. Below this magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Dead or de-energized. SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V2 in pu. Below this magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Dead or de-energized. SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V1 in pu. Above this magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Live or energized. SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V2 in pu. Above this magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Live or energized.
NOTES ON THE SYNCHROCHECK FUNCTION: 1. The selected sources for synchrocheck inputs V1 and V2 (which must not be the same source) may include both a three-phase and an auxiliary voltage. The relay will automatically select the specific voltages to be used by the synchrocheck element in accordance with the following table.
NO. V1 OR V2 (SOURCE Y) Phase VTs and Auxiliary VT Phase VTs and Auxiliary VT Phase VT V2 OR V1 (SOURCE Z) Phase VTs and Auxiliary VT Phase VT Phase VT AUTO-SELECTED COMBINATION SOURCE Y 1 2 3 Phase Phase Phase SOURCE Z Phase Phase Phase VAB VAB VAB AUTO-SELECTED VOLTAGE
GE Multilin
5-227

NO. V1 OR V2 (SOURCE Y) Phase VT and Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT V2 OR V1 (SOURCE Z) Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT AUTO-SELECTED COMBINATION SOURCE Y 4 5 Phase Auxiliary SOURCE Z Auxiliary Auxiliary V auxiliary (as set for Source z)
5 SETTINGS
AUTO-SELECTED VOLTAGE
V auxiliary (as set for selected sources)
The voltages V1 and V2 will be matched automatically so that the corresponding voltages from the two sources will be used to measure conditions. A phase to phase voltage will be used if available in both sources; if one or both of the Sources have only an auxiliary voltage, this voltage will be used. For example, if an auxiliary voltage is programmed to VAG, the synchrocheck element will automatically select VAG from the other source. If the comparison is required on a specific voltage, the user can externally connect that specific voltage to auxiliary voltage terminals and then use this "Auxiliary Voltage" to check the synchronism conditions. If using a single CT/VT module with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage, ensure that only the auxiliary voltage is programmed in one of the sources to be used for synchrocheck. Exception: Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye connected auxiliary voltage.
NOTE
2.
The relay measures frequency and Volts/Hz from an input on a given source with priorities as established by the configuration of input channels to the source. The relay will use the phase channel of a three-phase set of voltages if programmed as part of that source. The relay will use the auxiliary voltage channel only if that channel is programmed as part of the Source and a three-phase set is not.
5-228
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
AND
SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTINGS Function Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0 Block Off = 0
AND AND AND AND AND
SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SYNC1 DEAD S OP SYNC1 DEAD S DPO FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SYNC1 CLS OP SYNC1 CLS DPO
SETTING Dead Source Select None LV1 and DV2 DV1 and LV2 DV1 or DV2 DV1 xor DV2 DV1 and DV2 SETTING Dead V1 Max Volt V1 Maximum
XOR
AND
OR
OR
AND
AND
SETTING Dead V2 Max Volt V2 Maximum
OR
SETTING Live V1 Min Volt V1 Minimum
5
AND
SETTING Live V2 Min Volt V2 Minimum
AND
SETTING V1 Source = SRC 1
CALCULATE Magnitude V1 Angle 1 Frequency F1
SETTING Max Volt Diff
Calculate I V1 V2 I = V
V Maximum
AND
SETTING Max Angle Diff
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SYNC1 SYNC OP SYNC1 SYNC DPO
Calculate I 1 2 I =
Maximum
SETTING V2 Source = SRC 2
CALCULATE Magnitude V2 Angle 2 Frequency F2
SETTINGS Max Freq Diff Freq Hysteresis
SYNCHROCHECK 1
Calculate I F1 F2 I = F
F Maximum
ACTUAL VALUE Synchrocheck 1 V Synchrocheck 1
Synchrocheck 1 F
827076AB.CDR
Figure 5130: SYNCHROCHECK SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-229
5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS b) SPECIAL APPLICATION OF THE SYNCHROCHECK ELEMENT
5 SETTINGS
The synchrocheck element is intended for applications where the potential sources are located on either side of the breaker to be closed. It can also be used in cases where a power transformer is located between the two potential sources by compensating for the power transformer phase shift with the auxiliary VT connection to the G60 and the auxiliary VT connection setting, as shown in the following example.
a A
System nominal Vpp = 13.8 kV
52
System nominal Vpp = 230 kV
c C
210000 14000 14400 : 120 138000 : 69
~5a ~5c ~6a ~6c ~7a ~7c
~8a
~8c
Phase VT input UR-series device
Auxiliary VT input
843808A1.CDR
Figure 5131: SYNCHROCHECK APPLIED ACROSS A TRANSFORMER In this example, the phase voltage VT input is programmed as Delta with a secondary setting of 120 volts and a ratio of 13800 V/ 120 V = 115. The auxiliary VT connection is selected to be VAB since this vector is in phase with VA on the transformer primary. The secondary setting is 69 volts and the auxiliary VT ratio is calculated as 13800 V / 69 V = 200. Note that the metered values for the auxiliary VT will now reflect the AB voltage of the secondary side of the transformer.
5-230
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.7.10 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS DIGITAL ELEMENTS DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(48)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Dig Element 1 DIG ELEM Off DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM DELAY: 1 INPUT: 1 PICKUP 0.000 s 1 RESET 0.000 s
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIG ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED: Enabled DIG ELEM Off 1 BLOCK:
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
There are 48 identical digital elements available, numbered 1 to 48. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic operand and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element settings include a name which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand. DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element. DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set to "0". DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to 0. DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED: This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED. When set to Disabled, the operation of the pickup LED is blocked.
SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 INPUT: Off = 0 SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 BLOCK: Off = 0
AND
SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 NAME: RUN INPUT = 1
SETTINGS DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 PICKUP DELAY: DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DIG ELEM 01 DPO DIG ELEM 01 PKP DIG ELEM 01 OP
827042A1.VSD
Figure 5132: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS: Some versions of the digital input modules include an active voltage monitor circuit connected across form-A contacts. The voltage monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see technical specifications for form-A).
GE Multilin
5-231
5 SETTINGS
As long as the current through the voltage monitor is above a threshold (see technical specifications for form-A), the Cont Op 1 VOn FlexLogic operand will be set (for contact input 1 corresponding operands exist for each contact output). If the output circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and the Cont Op 1 VOff FlexLogic operand will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the circuits in which form-A contacts are inserted. EXAMPLE 1: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output contact detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resistance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared. In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must include the breaker position.
UR-series device with form-A contacts
H1a
I
H1b
V
DC DC+
H1c
52a
Trip coil
I = current monitor V = voltage monitor
827073A2.CDR
Figure 5133: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1 Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name; for example, Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status. Using the contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, for example, Cont Ip 1", and will be set On when the breaker is closed. The settings to use digital element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit are indicated below (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
The PICKUP DELAY setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoid nuisance alarms.
NOTE
5-232
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS EXAMPLE 2: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING
If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the figure below). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure below) across the auxiliary contact in the trip circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position the BLOCK setting is selected to Off. In this case, the settings are as follows (EnerVista UR Setup example shown).
UR-series device with form-A contacts
H1a
I
Values for resistor R
5
Power 2W 2W 2W 5W 5W 5W
827074A3.CDR
Power supply 24 V DC
Resistance 1000 5000 10000 25000 25000 50000
H1b
V
DC DC+
30 V DC 48 V DC 110 V DC 125 V DC 250 V DC
H1c
52a R Bypass resistor
Trip coil
I = current monitor V = voltage monitor
Figure 5134: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2 The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form-A contacts with voltage monitoring and solid-state contact with voltage monitoring.
NOTE
GE Multilin
5-233
5 SETTINGS 5.7.11 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS DIGITAL COUNTERS COUNTER 1(8)
COUNTER 1
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled COUNTER 1 NAME: Counter 1 COUNTER 1 UNITS: COUNTER 1 PRESET: 0 COUNTER 1 COMPARE: 0 COUNTER 1 UP: Off COUNTER 1 DOWN: Off COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Off CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Off COUNTER 1 RESET: Off COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET: Off COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT: Off
MESSAGE
Range: 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
Range: 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter. COUNTER 1 UNITS: Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted. The units label will appear in the corresponding actual values status. COUNTER 1 PRESET: Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case where a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running. COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output operands are provided to indicate if the present value is more than (HI), equal to (EQL), or less than (LO) the set value. COUNTER 1 UP: Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to 2,147,483,648. COUNTER 1 DOWN: Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of 2,147,483,648 counts, the counter will rollover to +2,147,483,647. COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are blocked.
5-234
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will be set to the preset value in the following situations: 1. 2. 3. When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled and CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter will be set to 0).
PRESET
When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).
When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 0, the counter will be set to 0).
COUNTER 1 RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count to either 0 or the preset value depending on the state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand. COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to 0. COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1
SETTING
COUNTER 1 UP: Off = 0
AND
SETTINGS COUNTER 1 NAME: COUNTER 1 UNITS: COUNTER 1 PRESET: RUN
5
SETTING
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Count more than Comp. Count equal to Comp. Count less than Comp.
SETTING
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Off = 0
CALCULATE VALUE
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS COUNTER 1 HI COUNTER 1 EQL COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Off = 0 SET TO PRESET VALUE SET TO ZERO
SETTING
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET: Off = 0
ACTUAL VALUE
COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
AND AND OR
ACTUAL VALUES
COUNTER 1 FROZEN: STORE DATE & TIME Date & Time
SETTING
COUNTER 1 RESET: Off = 0
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET: Off = 0
OR
827065A1.VSD
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT: Off = 0
Figure 5135: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-235
5 SETTINGS 5.7.12 MONITORING ELEMENTS
a) VT FUSE FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS VT FUSE FAILURE 1(4)
VT FUSE FAILURE 1
VT FUSE FAILURE 1 FUNCTION: Disabled
Every signal source includes a fuse failure scheme. The VT fuse failure detector can be used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that may operate incorrectly for a full or partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that might be blocked (via the BLOCK input) are distance, voltage restrained overcurrent, and directional current. There are two classes of fuse failure that may occur: Class A: loss of one or two phases. Class B: loss of all three phases.
Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of class A failures is a significant level of negative sequence voltage, whereas an indication of class B failures is when positive sequence current is present and there is an insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. These noted indications of fuse failure could also be present when faults are present on the system, so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure declarations during these events is provided. Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it will be sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears. An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized; positive sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels.
The function setting enables and disables the fuse failure feature for each source.
AND
Reset-dominant
OR AND SET
Latch
RESET
FAULT
SETTING
Function Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 COMPARATORS SOURCE 1 V_2 V_1 I_1 Run Run Run Run Run
V_2 > 0.1 pu V_1 < 0.05 pu
AND OR OR AND
FUSE FAIL
SET
I_1 > 0.075 pu V_1 < 0.80 pu I_1 < 0.05 pu

AND
TIMER
2 cycles 20 cycles
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Latch
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SRC1 50DD OP OPEN POLE OP The OPEN POLE OP operand is applicable to the D60, L60, and L90 only.
AND OR AND RESET
Reset-dominant
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS

827093AM.CDR
Figure 5136: VT FUSE FAIL SCHEME LOGIC
5-236
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.8INPUTS/OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.8.1 CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS CONTACT INPUT H5a

MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: Cont Ip 1 CONTACT INPUT H5a DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms CONTACT INPUT H5a EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT xxx CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS

MESSAGE
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs. An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The CONTACT IP X On (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to contact input X being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off corresponds to contact input X being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to overcome contact bouncing conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT INPUT EVENTS is set to Enabled, every change in the contact input state will trigger an event. A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below. The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a usersettable debounce time in order for the G60 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated (debounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting. A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the contact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram). Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic operand reflecting the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the figure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.
GE Multilin
5-237
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
The FlexLogic operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is below 1msec. For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a contact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1 ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time. Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 s accuracy using the time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change. The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.
INPUT VOLTAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
1
At this time, the new (HIGH) contact state is validated
3
The FlexLogic operand is going to be asserted at this protection pass
TM
6
Time stamp of the first scan corresponding to the new validated state is logged in the SOE record
5
At this time, the new (LOW) contact state is validated
5
RAW CONTACT STATE
Time stamp of the first scan corresponding to the new validated state is logged in the SOE record
7
The FlexLogicTM operand is going to be de-asserted at this protection pass
DEBOUNCE TIME (user setting)
4
FLEXLOGICTM OPERAND
SCAN TIME (0.5 msec)
The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the validated contact state
DEBOUNCE TIME (user setting)
The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the validated contact state
PROTECTION PASS (8 times a cycle controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism)
842709A1.cdr
Figure 5137: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This value should be selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V sources and 166 for 250 V sources. For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"
(52b)"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
5-238
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.8.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64)
VIRTUAL INPUT
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled VIRTUAL INPUT Virt Ip 1 VIRTUAL INPUT TYPE: Latched 1 ID: 1
MESSAGE
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MANDS
There are 64 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (via the COMmenu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to Off (logic 0) unless the appropriate input signal is received. If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to Disabled, the input will be forced to off (logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the input. If set to Enabled, the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic operands in response to received input signals and the applied settings. There are two types of operation: self-reset and latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is Self-Reset, when the input signal transits from off to on, the output operand will be set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to off. If set to Latched, the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received input. The self-reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic equation, it will likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 FUNCTION:
NOTE
Disabled=0 Enabled=1
AND
S Latch R
OR
Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1 Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0

AND
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
SETTING VIRTUAL INPUT 1 TYPE: Latched Self - Reset
(Flexlogic Operand) Virt Ip 1
AND
827080A2.CDR
Figure 5138: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
5-239
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS 5.8.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS
a) DIGITAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1
CONTACT OUTPUT H1
MESSAGE
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID Cont Op 1 OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: Off OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Off CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: Enabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs. An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic operand may be used to SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so. For example, the trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A contacts (see the trip circuit example in the Digital elements section). The monitor will set a flag (see the specifications for Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the name of the flag; for example, CONT OP 1 ION. In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect operation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called trip seal-in. This can be realized in the G60 using the CONT OP 1 ION FlexLogic operand to seal-in the contact output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: Cont Op 1" OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Cont Op 1 IOn CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: Enabled
operand
b) LATCHING OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a

MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a ID L-Cont Op 1 OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: Off OUTPUT H1a RESET: Off OUTPUT H1a TYPE: Operate-dominant OUTPUT H1a EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5-240
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The G60 latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and populates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic). The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching contacts when replacing a module. Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring capabilities for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test error is declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic operand, event, and target message. OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the close coil of the contact. The relay will seal-in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting. OUTPUT H1a RESET: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the trip coil of the contact. The relay will seal-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting. OUTPUT H1a TYPE: This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact will close if set to Operate-dominant and will open if set to Reset-dominant.
Application Example 1: A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The following settings should be applied. Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON OUTPUT H1a RESET: PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s PUSHBUTTON 2 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBTN 2 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s
Application Example 2: A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset. Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO2 OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2 OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO1
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they will not operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time may occur. Therefore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay will not guarantee any specific sequence of operation (such as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the control inputs as shown in the next application example. Application Example 3: A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement this functionality as described below:
GE Multilin
5-241
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
5 SETTINGS
Both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) should be set to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
PUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTand CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO4 OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2 OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO3
Application Example 4: A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact should stay closed as long as VO1 is high, and should stay opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
PUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTmenu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO2
5.8.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(96)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
VIRTUAL OUTPUT Virt Op 1
1 ID
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
There are 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic. If not assigned, the output will be forced to OFF (Logic 0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so. For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings would be programmed as follows:
5-242
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip" VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.8.5 REMOTE DEVICES a) REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS OVERVIEW Remote inputs and outputs provide a means of exchanging digital state information between Ethernet-networked devices. The IEC 61850 GSSE (Generic Substation State Event) and GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) standards are used. The IEC 61850 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet. For UR-series relays, Ethernet communications is provided on all CPU modules except type 9E.
NOTE
The sharing of digital point state information between GSSE/GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to FlexLogic, allowing distributed FlexLogic by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications network. In addition to digital point states, GSSE/GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other information required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data only from messages that have originated in selected devices. IEC 61850 GSSE messages are compatible with UCA GOOSE messages and contain a fixed set of digital points. IEC 61850 GOOSE messages can, in general, contain any configurable data items. When used by the remote input/output feature, IEC 61850 GOOSE messages contain the same data as GSSE messages. Both GSSE and GOOSE messages are designed to be short, reliable, and high priority. GOOSE messages have additional advantages over GSSE messages due to their support of VLAN (virtual LAN) and Ethernet priority tagging functionality. The GSSE message structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The IEC 61850 specification provides 32 DNA bit pairs that represent the state of two pre-defined events and 30 user-defined events. All remaining bit pairs are UserSt bit pairs, which are status bits representing user-definable events. The G60 implementation provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs. The IEC 61850 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GSSE/GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when the state of any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the default update time) if a change-of-state has not occurred. The transmitting device also sends a hold time which is set greater than three times the programmed default time required by the receiving device. Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the message time allowed to live. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to this time interval, and if it has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communicating, so it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. If a message is received from a remote device before the time allowed to live expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained in the message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where Offline indicates non-communicating, can be displayed. The remote input/output facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs. b) LOCAL DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING GSSE MESSAGES In a G60 relay, the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of each GOOSE message is programmed in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION FIXED GOOSE GOOSE ID setting. Likewise, the device ID that represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE message is programmed in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION GSSE GSSE ID setting. In G60 releases previous to 5.0x, these name strings were represented by the RELAY NAME setting.
GE Multilin
5-243
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS c) REMOTE DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR RECEIVING GSSE MESSAGES

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
5 SETTINGS
REMOTE DEVICE
REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID: Remote Device 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID: 0 REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET: Fixed
MESSAGE
Range: Fixed, GOOSE 1 through GOOSE 8
MESSAGE
Remote devices are available for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be programmed to capture messages from only those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific remote devices by entering (bottom row) the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices. The REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID setting is only used with GOOSE messages; they are not applicable to GSSE messages. This setting identifies the Ethernet application identification in the GOOSE message. It should match the corresponding settings on the sending device. The REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET setting provides for the choice of the G60 fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset (that is, containing DNA and UserSt bit pairs), or one of the configurable datasets. Note that the dataset for the received data items must be made up of existing items in an existing logical node. For this reason, logical node GGIO3 is instantiated to hold the incoming data items. GGIO3 is not necessary to make use of the received data. The remote input data item mapping takes care of the mapping of the inputs to remote input FlexLogic operands. However, GGIO3 data can be read by IEC 61850 clients.
5
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1(32)
5.8.6 REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUT 1
MESSAGE
REMOTE INPUT Remote Ip 1
1 ID:
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE: Remote Device 1 REMOTE IN None 1 ITEM:
Range: 1 to 16 inclusive
MESSAGE
Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32, Config Item 1 to Config Item 64 Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE: Off REMOTE IN 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Remote Inputs that create FlexLogic operands at the receiving relay are extracted from GSSE/GOOSE messages originating in remote devices. Each remote input can be selected from a list consisting of 64 selections: DNA-1 through DNA-32 and UserSt-1 through UserSt-32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the IEC 61850 specification and is presented in the IEC 61850 DNA Assignments table in the Remote outputs section. The function of UserSt inputs is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic operand whose state is represented in the GSSE/GOOSE message. A user must program a DNA point from the appropriate FlexLogic operand. Remote input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above. The REMOTE INPUT 1 ID setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the remote input. The REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE setting selects the number (1 to 16) of the remote device which originates the required signal, as previously assigned to the remote device via the setting REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) ID (see the Remote devices section). The REMOTE IN 1 ITEM setting selects the specific bits of the GSSE/GOOSE message required. The REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available:
5-244
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to On value defaults the input to logic 1. Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Off value defaults the input to logic 0.
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/On freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational. Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/Off freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational. For additional information on GSSE/GOOOSE messaging, refer to the Remote devices section in this chapter.
NOTE
5.8.7 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUT 1(5)
REMOTE DPS INPUT 1

MESSAGE
REM DPS IN 1 ID: RemDPS Ip 1 REM DPS IN 1 DEV: Remote Device 1 REM DPS IN 1 ITEM: None REM DPS IN 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Remote Device 1 to Remote Device 16
Range: None, Dataset Item 1 to Dataset Item 64
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Remote double-point status inputs are extracted from GOOSE messages originating in the remote device. Each remote double point status input must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local use. This functionality is accomplished with the five remote double-point status input settings. REM DPS IN 1 ID: This setting assigns descriptive text to the remote double-point status input. REM DPS IN 1 DEV: This setting selects a remote device ID to indicate the origin of a GOOSE message. The range is selected from the remote device IDs specified in the Remote devices section. REM DPS IN 1 ITEM: This setting specifies the required bits of the GOOSE message.
The configurable GOOSE dataset items must be changed to accept a double-point status item from a GOOSE dataset (changes are made in the SETTINGS COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8) CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS menus). Dataset items configured to receive any of GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stV to GGIO3.ST.IndPos5.stV will accept double-point status information that will be decoded by the remote double-point status inputs configured to this dataset item. The remote double point status is recovered from the received IEC 61850 dataset and is available as through the RemDPS Ip 1 BAD, RemDPS Ip 1 INTERM, RemDPS Ip 1 OFF, and RemDPS Ip 1 ON FlexLogic operands. These operands can then be used in breaker or disconnect control schemes. 5.8.8 REMOTE OUTPUTS a) DNA BIT PAIRS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1(32) BIT PAIR
REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA- 1 BIT PAIR

MESSAGE
DNA- 1 OPERAND: Off DNA- 1 EVENTS: Disabled
GE Multilin
5-245
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
Remote outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic operands inserted into GSSE/GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted. Table 526: IEC 61850 DNA ASSIGNMENTS
DNA 1 2 IEC 61850 DEFINITION Test ConfRev FLEXLOGIC OPERAND IEC 61850 TEST MODE IEC 61850 CONF REV
b) USERST BIT PAIRS

PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1(32) BIT PAIR
REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR

MESSAGE
UserSt- 1 OPERAND: Off UserSt- 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Remote outputs 1 to 32 originate as GSSE/GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The setting above is used to select the operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted. The following setting represents the time between sending GSSE/GOOSE messages when there has been no change of state of any selected digital point. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION settings menu.
5
NOTE
DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME: 60 s
For more information on GSSE/GOOSE messaging, refer to Remote Inputs/Outputs Overview in the Remote Devices section. 5.8.9 RESETTING
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS RESETTING
RESETTING
RESET OPERAND: Off
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic latches) to the reset state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset button, a remote device via a communications channel, or any programmed operand. When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic operands are created. These operands, which are stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each create the RESET OP FlexLogic operand. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual operand RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. The setting shown above selects the operand that will create the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.
5-246
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.8.10 DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
a) DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT INPUTS DIRECT INPUT 1(32)
DIRECT INPUT
DIRECT INPUT 1 NAME: Dir Ip 1 DIRECT INPUT DEVICE ID: 1 1
Range: 1 to 16
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER: 1 DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE: Off DIRECT INPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
Range: 1 to 32
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
These settings specify how the direct input information is processed. The DIRECT INPUT 1 NAME setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct input. The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEVICE ID represents the source of direct input 1. The specified direct input is driven by the device identified here. The DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER is the bit number to extract the state for direct input 1. Direct Input 1 is driven by the bit identified as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the direct output number of the sending device. The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE represents the state of the direct input when the associated direct device is offline. The following choices are available: Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to On value defaults the input to Logic 1. Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Off value defaults the input to Logic 0. Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/On freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational. Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/Off freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
b) DIRECT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT OUTPUTS DIRECT OUTPUT 1(32)
DIRECT OUTPUT
DIRECT OUT Dir Out 1 DIRECT OUT Off
1 NAME: 1 OPERAND:
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled
The DIRECT OUT 1 NAME setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct output. The DIR OUT 1 OPERAND is the FlexLogic operand that determines the state of this direct output. c) APPLICATION EXAMPLES The examples introduced in the earlier Direct inputs and outputs section (part of the Product Setup section) are continued below to illustrate usage of the direct inputs and outputs.
GE Multilin
5-247
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A G60 RELAY
5 SETTINGS
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional inputs/outputs and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
Figure 5139: INPUT AND OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Assume contact input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings should be applied (Direct Input 5 and bit number 12 are used, as an example): UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = 2 DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = 12
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND
= Cont Ip 1 On
The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON. EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1
BLOCK
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 5140: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1 would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay. The following settings should be applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to sent the blocking signal and Direct Inputs 7, 8, and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals): UR IED 2: UR IED 3: UR IED 4: UR IED 1:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP" DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP" DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP" DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3" DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT INPUT 8 BIT NUMBER: "3" DIRECT INPUT 8 DEFAULT STATE: select
"On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
5-248
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
DIRECT INPUT 9 DEVICE ID: "4" DIRECT INPUT 9 BIT NUMBER: "3" DIRECT INPUT 9 DEFAULT STATE: select
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and DIRECT INPUT 9 ON. Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to On), or to trip the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to Off). EXAMPLE 2: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1 UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 5141: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown below. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.
TX1
RX1
RX2
UR IED 1
RX1 TX1
UR IED 2
TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 5142: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN-LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a bridge. The following settings should be applied: UR IED 1:
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1" DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2) DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1" DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2) DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "1" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "2"
IED 3)
UR IED 3:
IED 1)
UR IED 2:
GE Multilin
5-249
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1" DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5" DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6"
5 SETTINGS
(forward a message from 1 to 3) (forward a message from 3 to 1)
Signal flow between the three IEDs is shown in the figure below:
UR IED 1
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 2
DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT OUT 4 = DIRECT INPUT 6 DIRECT OUT 3 = DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 3
DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1

842717A1.CDR
Figure 5143: SIGNAL FLOW FOR DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT EXAMPLE 3 In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, direct inputs 5 and 6 should be ANDed in FlexLogic and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT RX1 setting).
5.8.11 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS AND OUTPUTS a) OVERVIEW The relay provides sixteen teleprotection inputs on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-16) and sixteen teleprotection inputs on communications channel 2 (on two-terminals two-channel and three-terminal systems only, numbered 2-1 through 2-16). The remote relay connected to channels 1 and 2 of the local relay is programmed by assigning FlexLogic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel. This allows the user to create distributed protection and control schemes via dedicated communications channels. Some examples are directional comparison pilot schemes and direct transfer tripping. It should be noted that failures of communications channels will affect teleprotection functionality. The teleprotection function must be enabled to utilize the inputs. b) TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS TELEPROTECTION TELEPROT INPUTS
TELEPROT INPUTS
MESSAGE
TELEPROT INPUT 1-1 DEFAULT: Off TELEPROT INPUT 1-2 DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
MESSAGE
TELEPROT INPUT 1-16 DEFAULT: Off TELEPROT INPUT 2-1 DEFAULT: Off TELEPROT INPUT 2-2 DEFAULT: Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TELEPROT INPUT 2-16 DEFAULT: Off
5-250
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Setting the TELEPROT INPUT ~~ DEFAULT setting to On defaults the input to logic 1 when the channel fails. A value of Off defaults the input to logic 0 when the channel fails. The Latest/On and Latest/Off values freeze the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, then the input defaults to logic 1 for Latest/On and logic 0 for Latest/Off. c) TELEPROTECTION OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS TELEPROTECTION TELEPROT OUTPUTS
TELEPROT OUTPUTS
MESSAGE
TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1: Off TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-2: Off
MESSAGE
TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-16: Off TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-1: Off TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-2: Off
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-16: Off
As the following figure demonstrates, processing of the teleprotection inputs/outputs is dependent on the number of communication channels and terminals. On two-terminal two-channel systems, they are processed continuously on each channel and mapped separately per channel. Therefore, to achieve redundancy, the user must assign the same operand on both channels (teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end). On three-terminal two-channel systems, redundancy is achieved by programming signal re-transmittal in the case of channel failure between any pair of relays.
GE Multilin
5-251
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
UR-1
ACTUAL VALUES CHANNEL 1 STATUS: SETTING TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1: (same for 1-2...1-16) Off (Flexlogic Operand) SETTING TELEPROT INPUT 1-1 DEFAULT: (same for 1-2...1-16) FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On
UR-2
SETTING TELEPROT INPUT 1-1 DEFAULT: (same for 1-2...1-16) On Off OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Fail OK ACTUAL VALUES CHANNEL 1 STATUS:
(same for 1-2...1-16)
Communication channel #1
(Teleprotection I/O Enabled)
SETTING
TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1:
On OR Off
Fail OK
(same for 1-2...1-16)
(same for 1-2...1-16)
Off (Flexlogic Operand)
ACTUAL VALUES CHANNEL 2 STATUS: SETTING TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-1: (same for 1-2...1-16) Off (Flexlogic Operand) SETTING TELEPROT INPUT 2-1 DEFAULT: (same for 1-2...1-16) FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SETTING TELEPROT INPUT 2-1 DEFAULT: (same for 2-2...2-16) On Off
UR-2 or UR-3
Fail OK ACTUAL VALUES CHANNEL 2 STATUS:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR (same for 2-2...2-16)

Communication channel #2
(On 3-terminal system or 2-terminal with redundant channel)
SETTING (same for 2-2...2-16)
TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-1:
On OR Off
Fail OK
(same for 1-2...1-16)
Off (Flexlogic Operand)
842750A2.CDR
5
GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1
Figure 5144: TELEPROTECTION INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSING 5.8.12 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS GOOSE ANALOG INPUT 1(16)
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT: 1000.000

MESSAGE
ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE: Default Value GOOSE ANALOG UNITS: 1
Range: Default Value, Last Known
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
GOOSE ANALOG 1 PU: 1.000
The IEC 61850 GOOSE analog inputs feature allows the transmission of analog values between any two UR-series devices. The following settings are available for each GOOSE analog input. ANALOG 1 DEFAULT: This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE analog input when the sending device is offline and the ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to Default Value.This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point number. Because of the large range of this setting, not all possible values can be stored. Some values may be rounded to the closest possible floating point number. ANALOG 1 DEFAULT MODE: When the sending device is offline and this setting is Last Known, the value of the GOOSE analog input remains at the last received value. When the sending device is offline and this setting value is Default Value, then the value of the GOOSE analog input is defined by the ANALOG 1 DEFAULT setting. GOOSE ANALOG 1 UNITS: This setting specifies a four-character alphanumeric string that can is used in the actual values display of the corresponding GOOSE analog input value. GOOSE ANALOG 1 PU: This setting specifies the per-unit base factor when using the GOOSE analog input FlexAnalog values in other G60 features, such as FlexElements. The base factor is applied to the GOOSE analog input FlexAnalog quantity to normalize it to a per-unit quantity. The base units are described in the following table.
5-252
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Table 527: GOOSE ANALOG INPUT BASE UNITS

ELEMENT dcmA FREQUENCY FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE PHASE ANGLE POWER FACTOR RTDs SENSITIVE DIR POWER (Sns Dir Power) SOURCE CURRENT SOURCE ENERGY (Positive and Negative Watthours, Positive and Negative Varhours) SOURCE POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE STATOR DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT (Stator Diff Iar, Ibr, and Icr) STATOR GROUND 3RD HARMONIC VOLTAGES (Stator Gnd Vn/V0 3rd) STATOR RESTRAINING CURRENT (Stator Diff Iad, Ibd, and Icd) SYNCHROCHECK (Max Delta Volts) VOLTS PER HERTZ BASE UNITS BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the +IN and IN inputs. fBASE = 1 Hz df/dtBASE = 1 Hz/s BASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention) PFBASE = 1.00 BASE = 100C PBASE = maximum value of 3 VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs of the sources configured for the sensitive power directional element(s). IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively PBASE = maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents) VBASE = Primary auxiliary voltage of the STATOR GROUND SOURCE
IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents) VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and IN inputs BASE = 1.00 pu
The GOOSE analog input FlexAnalog values are available for use in other G60 functions that use FlexAnalog values. 5.8.13 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS GOOSE UINTEGER INPUT 1(16)
GOOSE UINTEGER INPUT 1

MESSAGE
UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT: 1000 UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE: Default Value
Range: Default Value, Last Known
The IEC 61850 GOOSE uinteger inputs feature allows the transmission of FlexInteger values between any two URseries devices. The following settings are available for each GOOSE uinteger input. UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT: This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE uinteger input when the sending device is offline and the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE is set to Default Value.This setting is stored as a 32-bit unsigned integer number. UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT MODE: When the sending device is offline and this setting is Last Known, the value of the GOOSE uinteger input remains at the last received value. When the sending device is offline and this setting value is Default Value, then the value of the GOOSE uinteger input is defined by the UINTEGER 1 DEFAULT setting.
The GOOSE integer input FlexInteger values are available for use in other G60 functions that use FlexInteger values.
GE Multilin
5-253
5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5.9TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT H1(W8)
5 SETTINGS 5.9.1 DCMA INPUTS
DCMA INPUT H1
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT H1 FUNCTION: Disabled DCMA INPUT H1 ID: DCMA Ip 1 DCMA INPUT H1 UNITS: A DCMA INPUT H1 RANGE: 0 to -1 mA DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE: 0.000 DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE: 0.000
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, 1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5 mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA Range: 9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
Range: 9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of 1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.
Before the dcmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter. dcmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown here. The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel. Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H. The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled. If Disabled, no actual values are created for the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual value, along with the programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, C, megawatts, etc. This ID is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The DCMA INPUT H1 RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel. The DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250C; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE value is 0 and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE value is 250. Another example would be a watts transducer with a span from 20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE value would be 20 and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE value 180. Intermediate values between the min and max values are scaled linearly.
5-254
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5.9.2 RTD INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT H1(W8)
RTD INPUT H1
MESSAGE
RTD INPUT H1 FUNCTION: Disabled RTD INPUT H1 ID: RTD Ip 1 RTD INPUT H1 TYPE: 100 Nickel RTD INPUT H1 APPLICATION: Bearing RTD INPUT H1 ALARM TEMPERATURE: 130C RTD INPUT H1 ALARM PKP DELAY: 0.00 s RTD INPUT H1 TRIP TEMPERATURE: 130C RTD INPUT H1 TRIP PKP DELAY: 0.00 s RTD INPUT H1 TRIP RST DELAY: 0.00 s RTD INPUT H1 TRIP VOTING: None RTD INPUT H1 OPEN: None RTD INPUT H1 BLOCK: Off RTD INPUT H1 TARGET: Self-reset RTD INPUT H1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: 100 Nickel, 10 Copper, 100 Platinum, 120 Nickel Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Group 1, Group 2 Range: 1 to 249C in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 1 to 249C in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
Range: None, Group, RTD Inp H1, RTD Inp H2,..., RTD Inp W8 Range: None, Alarm, Block
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The RTD inputs convert values of input resistance into temperature for further operations. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in common use. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3. RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown here. The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel. Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot. RTD INPUT H1 FUNCTION: The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled. If set to Disabled, there will not be an actual value created for the channel. RTD INPUT H1 ID: An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel. This ID will be included in the channel actual values. It is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter.
GE Multilin
5-255
5 SETTINGS
RTD INPUT H1 TYPE: This setting specifies the RTD type. Four different RTD types are available: 100 Nickel, 10 Copper, 100 Platinum, and 120 Nickel. Refer the table below for reference temperature values for each type. Table 528: RTD TEMPERATURE VS. RESISTANCE
TEMPERATURE C 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 F 58 40 22 4 14 32 50 68 86 104 122 140 158 176 194 212 230 248 266 284 302 320 338 356 374 392 410 428 446 464 482 RESISTANCE (IN OHMS) 100 OHM PT (DIN 43760) 80.31 84.27 88.22 92.16 96.09 100.00 103.90 107.79 111.67 115.54 119.39 123.24 127.07 130.89 134.70 138.50 142.29 146.06 149.82 153.58 157.32 161.04 164.76 168.47 172.46 175.84 179.51 183.17 186.82 190.45 194.08 120 OHM NI 86.17 92.76 99.41 106.15 113.00 120.00 127.17 134.52 142.06 149.79 157.74 165.90 174.25 182.84 191.64 200.64 209.85 219.29 228.96 238.85 248.95 259.30 269.91 280.77 291.96 303.46 315.31 327.54 340.14 353.14 366.53 100 OHM NI 71.81 77.30 82.84 88.45 94.17 100.00 105.97 112.10 118.38 124.82 131.45 138.25 145.20 152.37 159.70 167.20 174.87 182.75 190.80 199.04 207.45 216.08 224.92 233.97 243.30 252.88 262.76 272.94 283.45 294.28 305.44 10 OHM CU 7.10 7.49 7.88 8.26 8.65 9.04 9.42 9.81 10.19 10.58 10.97 11.35 11.74 12.12 12.51 12.90 13.28 13.67 14.06 14.44 14.83 15.22 15.61 16.00 16.39 16.78 17.17 17.56 17.95 18.34 18.73
100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250
RTD INPUT H1 APPLICATION: This setting allows each individual RTD to be assigned to a group application. This is useful for applications that require group measurement for voting. A value of None specifies that the RTD will operate individually and not part of any RTD group. All RTDs programmed to Stator are used for RTD biasing of the G60 thermal model. Common groups are provided for rotating machines applications such as ambient, bearing, group 1, or group 2. If the RTD INPUT H1 TRIP VOTING setting value is Group, then it is allowed to issue a trip if N 1 RTDs from the same group also pick up, where N is the number of enabled RTDs from the group. RTD INPUT H1 ALARM TEMPERATURE: This setting specifies the temperature pickup level for the alarm stage. RTD INPUT H1 ALARM PKP DELAY: This setting specifies time delay for the alarm stage until the output can be asserted. RTD INPUT H1 TRIP TEMPERATURE: This setting specifies the temperature pickup level for the trip stage. RTD INPUT H1 TRIP PKP DELAY: This setting specifies time delay for the trip stage until the output can be asserted.
5-256
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
RTD INPUT H1 TRIP RST DELAY: This setting specifies the reset delay to seal-in the trip signal. RTD INPUT H1 TRIP VOTING: This setting allows securing trip signal by voting with other RTDs. A value of None indicates that element operates individually and no voting takes place. A value of Group indicates that element is allowed to issue a trip if N 1 of other RTDs of the same group pick up as well (where N is the number of enabled RTDs from the group). For example, if three RTDs are assigned to the same group, there should be at least one additional RTD of the same group picked up to issue a trip command. The RTD Inp H1 through RTD Inp W8 values indicate that element is allowed to issue a trip if the corresponding peer RTD is also picked up.
RTD INPUT H1 OPEN: This setting allows monitoring an open RTD sensor circuit. If this functionality is not required, then a value of None will disable monitoring and assertion of output operands. If set to Alarm, the monitor will set an alarm when a broken sensor is detected. If set to Block, the monitor will set an alarm and simultaneously block RTD operation when a broken sensor is detected. If targets are enabled, a message will appear on the display identifying the broken RTD. If this feature is used, it is recommended that the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may be taken.
RTD INPUT H1 BLOCK: This setting is used to block RTD operation.

SETTINGS RTD INPUT H1 FUNCTION = Enabled RTD INPUT H1 BLOCK Off = 0
AND
To other RTDs for voting SETTINGS SETTINGS RTD INPUT H1 TRIP PKP DELAY RTD INPUT H1 TRIP RST DELAY RTD INPUT H1 ALARM PKP DELAY TPKP TDPO TPKP 0 From other RTDs for voting FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS RTD Ip ALARM OP RTD Ip TRIP PKP RTD Ip TRIP DPO RTD Ip ALARM PKP RTD Ip ALARM DPO RTD Ip OPEN RTD Ip SHORTED
833019A2.CDR
SETTINGS RTD INPUT H1 APPLICATION RTD INPUT H1 TRIP VOTING Voting logic FLEXLOGIC OPERAND RTD Ip TRIP OP
SETTINGS RTD INPUT H1 ID = RTD Inp H1 RTD INPUT H1 TYPE Resistance to temperature conversion
AND
RTD INPUT H1 TRIP TEMPERATURE RTD INPUT H1 ALARM TEMPERATURE

RUN
temperature > TRIP PICKUP

RUN
temperature > ALARM PICKUP
SETTING RTD INPUT H1 OPEN

RUN
Block R 250C Alarm None

OR
RUN
R 50C
Figure 5145: RTD INPUT PROTECTION LOGIC 5.9.3 RRTD INPUTS a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O RRTD INPUTS
RRTD INPUTS
MESSAGE
RRTD RRTD
1 2
MESSAGE
RRTD 12
See page 5-258.
Menus are available to configure each of the remote RTDs.
GE Multilin
5-257
5 SETTINGS
It is recommended to use the G60 to configure the RRTD parameters. If the RRTDPC software is used to change the RRTD settings directly (the application and type settings), then one of the following two operations is required for changes to be reflected in the G60. Cycle power to G60. Break then re-establish the communication link between the RRTD unit and the G60. This will cause the RRTD COMM
FAIL operand to be asserted then de-asserted.
b) REMOTE RTDS 1 THROUGH 12

PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O RRTD INPUTS RRTD RTD 1(12)
RRTD 1
MESSAGE
RRTD 1 FUNCTION: Disabled RRTD 1 ID: RRTD 1 RRTD 1 TYPE: 100 Nickel RRTD 1 APPLICATION: Bearing RRTD 1 ALARM TEMPERATURE: 130C RRTD 1 ALARM PKP DELAY: 5 s RRTD 1 TRIP TEMPERATURE: 130C RRTD 1 TRIP PKP DELAY: 5 s RRTD 1 TRIP RST DELAY: 5 s RRTD 1 TRIP VOTING: None RRTD 1 OPEN: None RRTD 1 BLOCK: Off RRTD 1 TARGET: Self-reset RRTD 1 EVENTS: Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: 100 Nickel, 10 Copper, 100 Platinum, 120 Nickel Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Group 1, Group 2 Range: 1 to 200C in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
MESSAGE MESSAGE
Range: 1 to 200C in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: None, Group, Remote RTD 1, Remote RTD 2,..., Remote RTD 12 Range: None, Alarm, Block
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The remote RTD inputs convert values of input resistance into temperature for further operations. These inputs are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in common use. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3. On power up, the G60 reads and saves all application and type settings from the RRTD. This synchronizes the RRTD and G60. Any changes to RRTD settings (function, application, or type) from the G60 interface are immediately reflected in the RRTD. The following rules are followed. If the RRTD 1 FUNCTION setting is Enabled, then the RRTD 1 APPLICATION setting value will be written to RRTD device. If the RRTD 1 FUNCTION setting is Disabled, then RRTD1 APPLICATION setting value is set as None. If the RRTD 1 APPLICATION or RRTD 1 TYPE settings are changes, then these settings are immediately written to the RRTD device.
5-258
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
If the RRTD 1 APPLICATION setting is Group 1 or Group 2, then a value of Other is written to the RRTD device.
An RRTD actual value of 43C implies that the RRTD 1 FUNCTION setting is Enabled but the corresponding RRTD 1 APPLICATION setting is None. If the RRTD communication link with the G60 is broken, then the last temperature actual values are retained until the RRTD communication failure is detected. When this occurs, a RRTD COMM FAILURE self-test alarm and target message is generated, and an event is logged in the event recorder and the temperature actual values reset to 0. When the link is re-established, the RRTD 1 APPLICATION and RRTD 1 TYPE settings are read from the RRTD to re-synchronize the device. RRTD 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables and disables the remote RTD. If set to Disabled, no actual value is created for the remote RTD. RRTD 1 ID: This setting is used to assign alphanumeric ID is assigned to the remote RTD. This ID will be included in the remote RTD actual values. It is also used to reference the remote RTD input to features using the remote RTD. RRTD 1 TYPE: This setting specifies the remote RTD type. Four different RTD types are available: 100 Nickel, 10 Copper, 100 Platinum, and 120 Nickel. The RRTD converts resistance to temperature as per the values in the following table. The G60 reads the RTD temperatures from the RRTD once every five seconds and applies protection accordingly. The RRTDs can be used to provide RTD bias in the existing thermal model. Table 529: RTD TEMPERATURE VS. RESISTANCE
TEMPERATURE C 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 F 40 22 4 14 32 50 68 86 104 122 140 158 176 194 212 230 248 266 284 302 320 338 356 374 392 RESISTANCE (IN OHMS) 100 OHM PT (DIN 43760) 84.27 88.22 92.16 96.09 100 103.9 107.79 111.67 115.54 119.39 123.24 127.07 130.89 134.7 138.5 142.29 146.06 149.82 153.58 157.32 161.04 164.76 168.47 172.46 175.84 120 OHM NI 92.76 99.41 106.15 113 120 127.17 134.52 142.06 149.79 157.74 165.9 174.25 182.84 191.64 200.64 209.85 219.29 228.96 238.85 248.95 259.3 269.91 280.77 291.96 303.46 100 OHM NI 79.13 84.15 89.23 94.58 100 105.6 111.2 117.1 123 129.1 135.3 141.7 148.3 154.9 161.8 168.8 176 183.3 190.9 198.7 206.6 214.8 223.2 231.6 240 10 OHM CU 7.49 7.88 8.26 8.65 9.04 9.42 9.81 10.19 10.58 10.97 11.35 11.74 12.12 12.51 12.9 13.28 13.67 14.06 14.44 14.83 15.22 15.61 16 16.39 16.78
An RRTD open condition is detected when actual RRTD resistance is greater than 1000 ohms and RRTD open is displayed as 250C in the G60.
GE Multilin
5-259
5 SETTINGS
An RRTD short condition is detected when actual RRTD temperature is less than 40C and RRTD short is displayed as is 50C. in the G60. RRTD 1 APPLICATION: This setting allows each remote RTD to be assigned to a group application. This is useful for applications that require group measurement for voting. A value of None specifies that the remote RTD will operate individually and not part of any RTD group. All remote RTDs programmed to Stator are used for RTD biasing of the G60 thermal model. Common groups are provided for rotating machines applications such as ambient, bearing, group 1, or group 2. If the REMOTE RTD 1 TRIP VOTING setting value is Group, then it is allowed to issue a trip if N 1 RTDs from the same group also pick up, where N is the number of enabled RTDs from the group. RRTD 1 ALARM TEMPERATURE: This setting specifies the temperature pickup level for the alarm stage. The range of 1 to 200C differs from the existing RTD settings to correspond to the range of the RRTD unit. RRTD 1 ALARM PKP DELAY: This setting specifies time delay for the alarm stage until the output can be asserted. The range of 5 to 600 seconds differs from the existing RTD settings to correspond to the range of the RRTD unit. RRTD 1 TRIP TEMPERATURE: This setting specifies the temperature pickup level for the trip stage. The range of 1 to 200C differs from the existing RTD settings to correspond to the range of the RRTD unit. RRTD 1 TRIP PKP DELAY: This setting specifies time delay for the trip stage until the output can be asserted. The range of 5 to 600 seconds differs from the existing RTD settings to correspond to the range of the RRTD unit. RRTD 1 TRIP RST DELAY: This setting specifies the reset delay to seal-in the trip signal. RRTD 1 TRIP VOTING: This setting allows securing trip signal by voting with other RTDs. A value of None indicates that element operates individually and no voting takes place. A value of Group indicates that element is allowed to issue a trip if N 1 of other RTDs of the same group pick up as well (where N is the number of enabled RTDs from the group). For example, if three RTDs are assigned to the same group, there should be at least one additional RTD of the same group picked up to issue a trip command. The Remote RTD 1 through Remote RTD 12 values indicate that element is allowed to issue a trip if the corresponding peer RTD is also picked up. RRTD 1 OPEN: This setting allows monitoring an open remote RTD sensor circuit. If this functionality is not required, then a value of None will disable monitoring and assertion of output operands. If set to Alarm, the monitor will set an alarm when a broken sensor is detected. If set to Block, the monitor will set an alarm and simultaneously block remote RTD operation when a broken sensor is detected. If targets are enabled, a message will appear on the display identifying the broken RTD. If this feature is used, it is recommended that the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may be taken. RRTD 1 BLOCK: This setting is used to block remote RTD operation.
5-260
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
SETTINGS Function Enabled = 1 Block Off = 0 SETTING ID = RRTD 1

AND
To other remote RTDs for voting
AND
SETTING Type Temperature read from RRTD
SETTINGS Trip Temperature Alarm Temperature

RUN
SETTINGS Trip Pickup Delay Trip Reset Delay Alarm Pickup Delay TPKP TDPO TPKP 0
SETTINGS Application Trip Voting Voting logic FLEXLOGIC OPERAND REMOTE RTD 1 TRIP OP
temperature > Trip Pickup

RUN
temperature > Alarm Pickup SETTING Open

RUN
From other remote RTDs for voting
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS RRTD 1 ALARM OP RRTD 1 TRIP PKP RRTD 1 TRIP DPO RRTD 1 ALARM PKP RRTD 1 ALARM DPO RRTD 1 OPEN RRTD 1 SHORTED
833026A1.CDR
Block R > 1000 ohms Alarm None

OR
RUN
T 40C
Figure 5146: REMOTE RTD INPUT PROTECTION LOGIC 5.9.4 DCMA OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA OUTPUTS DCMA OUTPUT H1(W8)
DCMA OUTPUT H1
MESSAGE
DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: Off DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: 1 to 1 mA DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: 0.000 pu DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: 1.000 pu
Range: 1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Hardware and software is provided to generate dcmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3. The dcmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown below. The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same manner used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu (an example for channel M5 is shown). The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently rescales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE. The following equation is applied: I min if x < MIN VAL = I max if x > MAX VAL k ( x MIN VAL ) + I min otherwise
I out
(EQ 5.48)
GE Multilin
5-261
5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS where: x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting Imin and Imax are defined by the RANGE setting k is a scaling constant calculated as: I max I min k = -----------------------------------------------MAX VAL MIN VAL
VAL
5 SETTINGS
(EQ 5.49)
The feature is intentionally inhibited if the MAX VAL and MIN VAL settings are entered incorrectly, e.g. when MAX VAL MIN < 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.
Imax
OUTPUT CURRENT
Imin
DRIVING SIGNAL MIN VAL MAX VAL
842739A1.CDR
Figure 5147: DCMA OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC
The dcmA output settings are described below. DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values (FlexAnalog parameters) such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as sources driving dcmA outputs. Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of FlexAnalog parameters. DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: This setting allows selection of the output range. Each dcmA channel may be set independently to work with different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available. DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units. DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units. The DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL and DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL settings are ignored for power factor base units (i.e. if the DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE is set to FlexAnalog value based on power factor measurement).
NOTE
Three application examples are described below. EXAMPLE: POWER MONITORING A three phase active power on a 13.8 kV system measured via UR-series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the dcmA H1 output of the range of 1 to 1 mA. The following settings are applied on the relay: CT ratio = 1200:5, VT secondary 115, VT connection is delta, and VT ratio = 120. The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0.90. The power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20% overload compared to the nominal. The nominal three-phase power is: P = 3 13.8 kV 0.8 kA 0.9 = 17.21 MW
(EQ 5.50)
The three-phase power with 20% overload margin is: P max = 1.2 17.21 MW = 20.65 MW
(EQ 5.51)
5-262
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
The base unit for power (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is: P BASE = 115 V 120 1.2 kA = 16.56 MW The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are: 20.65 MW = 1.247 pu, minimum power = -----------------------------16.56 MW The following settings should be entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: SRC 1 P DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: 1 to 1 mA DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: 1.247 pu DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: 1.247 pu
(EQ 5.52)
MW maximum power = 20.65 -------------------------- = 1.247 pu 16.56 MW
(EQ 5.53)
With the above settings, the output will represent the power with the scale of 1 mA per 20.65 MW. The worst-case error for this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error: 0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or 0.005 ( 1 ( 1 ) ) 20.65 MW = 0.207 MW 1% of reading error for the active power at power factor of 0.9
For example at the reading of 20 MW, the worst-case error is 0.01 20 MW + 0.207 MW = 0.407 MW. EXAMPLE: CURRENT MONITORING The phase A current (true RMS value) is to be monitored via the H2 current output working with the range from 4 to 20 mA. The CT ratio is 5000:5 and the maximum load current is 4200 A. The current should be monitored from 0 A upwards, allowing for 50% overload. The phase current with the 50% overload margin is: I max = 1.5 4.2 kA = 6.3 kA The base unit for current (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is: I BASE = 5 kA The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are: kA minimum current = 0 ----------- = 0 pu, 5 kA The following settings should be entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE: SRC 1 Ia RMS DCMA OUTPUT H2 RANGE: 4 to 20 mA DCMA OUTPUT H2 MIN VAL: 0.000 pu DCMA OUTPUT H2 MAX VAL: 1.260 pu
5
(EQ 5.54) (EQ 5.55)
kA maximum current = 6.3 ---------------- = 1.26 pu 5 kA
(EQ 5.56)
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error: 0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or 0.005 ( 20 4 ) 6.3 kA = 0.504 kA 0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) for currents between 0.1 and 2.0 of nominal
For example, at the reading of 4.2 kA, the worst-case error is max(0.0025 4.2 kA, 0.001 5 kA) + 0.504 kA = 0.515 kA. EXAMPLE: VOLTAGE MONITORING A positive-sequence voltage on a 400 kV system measured via source 2 is to be monitored by the dcmA H3 output with a range of 0 to 1 mA. The VT secondary setting is 66.4 V, the VT ratio setting is 6024, and the VT connection setting is Delta. The voltage should be monitored in the range from 70% to 110% of nominal. The minimum and maximum positive-sequence voltages to be monitored are: 400 kV - = 161.66 kV, V min = 0.7 -----------------3 400 kV - = 254.03 kV V max = 1.1 -----------------3
(EQ 5.57)
The base unit for voltage (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
GE Multilin
5-263
5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS V BASE = 0.0664 kV 6024 = 400 kV The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored (in pu) are: kV minimum voltage = 161.66 -------------------------- = 0.404 pu, 400 kV The following settings should be entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE: SRC 2 V_1 DCMA OUTPUT H3 RANGE: 0 to 1 mA DCMA OUTPUT H3 MIN VAL: 0.404 pu DCMA OUTPUT H3 MAX VAL: 0.635 pu
5 SETTINGS
(EQ 5.58)
kV maximum voltage = 254.03 -------------------------- = 0.635 pu 400 kV
(EQ 5.59)
mag
The limit settings differ from the expected 0.7 pu and 1.1 pu because the relay calculates the positive-sequence quantities scaled to the phase-to-ground voltages, even if the VTs are connected in Delta (refer to the Metering conventions section in chapter 6), while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings. Consequently the settings required in this example differ from naturally expected by the factor of 3 . The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error: 0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or 0.005 ( 1 0 ) 254.03 kV = 1.27 kV 0.5% of reading
For example, under nominal conditions, the positive-sequence reads 230.94 kV and the worst-case error is 0.005 x 230.94 kV + 1.27 kV = 2.42 kV.
5-264
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS 5.10TESTING
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE
5.10 TESTING 5.10.1 TEST MODE
SETTINGS TESTING
MESSAGE
TEST MODE FUNCTION: Disabled TEST MODE FORCING: On
Range: Disabled, Isolated, Forcible
The G60 provides a test facility to verify the functionality of contact inputs and outputs, some communication channels and the phasor measurement unit (where applicable), using simulated conditions. The test mode is indicated on the relay faceplate by a Test Mode LED indicator. The test mode may be in any of three states: disabled, isolated, or forcible. In the Disabled mode, G60 operation is normal and all test features are disabled. In the Isolated mode, the G60 is prevented from performing certain control actions, including tripping via contact outputs. All relay contact outputs, including latching outputs, are disabled. Channel tests and phasor measurement unit tests remain usable on applicable UR-series models. In the Forcible mode, the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting controls the relay inputs and outputs. If the test mode is forcible, and the operand assigned to the TEST MODE FORCING setting is Off, the G60 inputs and outputs operate normally. If the test mode is forcible, and the operand assigned to the TEST MODE FORCING setting is On, the G60 contact inputs and outputs are forced to the values specified in the following sections. Forcing may be controlled by manually changing the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting between on and off, or by selecting a user-programmable pushbutton, contact input, or communication-based input operand. Channel tests and phasor measurement unit tests remain usable on applicable UR-series models. Communications based inputs and outputs remain fully operational in test mode. If a control action is programmed using direct inputs and outputs or remote inputs and outputs, then the test procedure must take this into account.
NOTE
When in Forcible mode, the operand selected by the TEST MODE FORCING setting dictates further response of the G60 to testing conditions. To force contact inputs and outputs through relay settings, set TEST MODE FORCING to On. To force contact inputs and outputs through a user-programmable condition, such as FlexLogic operand (pushbutton, digital input, communication-based input, or a combination of these), set TEST MODE FORCING to the desired operand. The contact input or output is forced when the selected operand assumes a logic 1 state. The G60 remains fully operational in test mode, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular, the protection and control elements, FlexLogic, and communication-based inputs and outputs function normally. The only difference between the normal operation and the test mode is the behavior of the input and output contacts. The contact inputs can be forced to report as open or closed or remain fully operational, whereas the contact outputs can be forced to open, close, freeze, or remain fully operational. The response of the digital input and output contacts to the test mode is programmed individually for each input and output using the force contact inputs and force contact outputs test functions described in the following sections. The test mode state is indicated on the relay faceplate by a combination of the Test Mode LED indicator, the In-Service LED indicator, and by the critical fail relay, as shown in the following table.
GE Multilin
5-265
5.10 TESTING
5 SETTINGS
Table 530: TEST MODE OPERATION

TEST MODE FUNCTION Disabled TEST MODE FORCING OPERAND No effect IN-SERVICE LED Unaffected TEST MODE LED Off CRITICAL FAIL RELAY Unaffected INPUT AND OUTPUT BEHAVIOR
Contact outputs and inputs are under normal operation. Channel tests and PMU tests not operational (where applicable). Contact outputs are disabled and contact inputs are operational. Channel tests and PMU tests are also operational (where applicable). Contact inputs and outputs are controlled by the force contact input and force contact output functions. Channel tests and PMU tests are operational (where applicable). Contact outputs and inputs are under normal operation. Channel tests and PMU tests are also operational (where applicable).
Isolated
No effect
Off
On
Deenergized Deenergized
Forcible
On (logic 1)
Off
Flashing
Off (logic 0)
Off
Flashing
Deenergized
The TEST MODE FUNCTION setting can only be changed by a direct user command. Following a restart, power up, settings upload, or firmware upgrade, the test mode will remain at the last programmed value. This allows a G60 that has been placed in isolated mode to remain isolated during testing and maintenance activities. On restart, the TEST MODE FORCING setting and the force contact input and force contact output settings all revert to their default states. 5.10.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Ip 1 :Disabled FORCE Cont Ip 2 :Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
FORCE Cont Ip xx :Disabled
The relay digital inputs (contact inputs) could be pre-programmed to respond to the test mode in the following ways: If set to Disabled, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can be turned on and off by external circuitry. This value should be selected if a given input must be operational during the test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence. If set to Open, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of the voltage across the input terminals. If set to Closed, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of the voltage across the input terminals.
The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once enabled, the relay is placed into test mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test Mode LED will be on, indicating that the relay is in test mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as Disabled, Open, or Closed. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.
5-266
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.10 TESTING 5.10.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Op 1 :Disabled FORCE Cont Op 2 :Disabled
MESSAGE
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
FORCE Cont Op xx :Disabled
The relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the test mode. If set to Disabled, the contact output remains fully operational. If operates when its control operand is logic 1 and will resets when its control operand is logic 0. If set to Energized, the output will close and remain closed for the entire duration of the test mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to De-energized, the output will open and remain opened for the entire duration of the test mode regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to Freeze, the output retains its position from before entering the test mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. These settings are applied two ways. First, external circuits may be tested by energizing or de-energizing contacts. Second, by controlling the output contact state, relay logic may be tested and undesirable effects on external circuits avoided. Example 1: Initiating test mode through user-programmable pushbutton 1 For example, the test mode can be initiated from user-programmable pushbutton 1. The pushbutton will be programmed as Latched (pushbutton pressed to initiate the test, and pressed again to terminate the test). During the test, digital input 1 should remain operational, digital inputs 2 and 3 should open, and digital input 4 should close. Also, contact output 1 should freeze, contact output 2 should open, contact output 3 should close, and contact output 4 should remain fully operational. The required settings are shown below. To enable user-programmable pushbutton 1 to initiate the test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE menu: TEST MODE FUNCTION: Enabled and TEST MODE INITIATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON Make the following changes to configure the contact inputs and outputs. In the SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT INPUTS and FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS menus, set:
FORCE Cont Ip 1: Disabled, FORCE Cont Ip 2: Open, FORCE Cont Ip 3: Open, and FORCE Cont Ip 4: FORCE Cont Op 1: Freeze, FORCE Cont Op 2: De-energized, FORCE Cont Op 3: Energized, and FORCE Cont Op 4: Disabled
Closed
Example 2: Initiating a test from user-programmable pushbutton 1 or through remote input 1 In this example, the test can be initiated locally from user-programmable pushbutton 1 or remotely through remote input 1. Both the pushbutton and the remote input will be programmed as Latched. Write the following FlexLogic equation:
PUSHBUTTONS
Set the user-programmable pushbutton as latching by changing SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION to Latched. To enable either pushbutton 1 or remote input 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE menu:
TEST MODE FUNCTION:
Enabled and TEST MODE INITIATE: VO1
GE Multilin
5-267
5.10 TESTING
5 SETTINGS 5.10.4 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT TEST VALUES
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING PMU TEST VALUES PMU 1 TEST VALUES
PMU 1 TEST VALUES

MESSAGE
PMU 1 TEST FUNCTION: Disabled PMU 1 VA TEST MAGNITUDE: 500.00 kV PMU 1 VA TEST ANGLE: 0.00 PMU 1 VB TEST MAGNITUDE: 500.00 kV PMU 1 VB TEST ANGLE: 120.00 PMU 1 VC TEST MAGNITUDE: 500.00 kV PMU 1 VC TEST ANGLE: 120.00 PMU 1 VX TEST MAGNITUDE: 500.00 kV PMU 1 VX TEST ANGLE: 0.00 PMU 1 IA TEST MAGNITUDE: 1.000 kA PMU 1 IA TEST ANGLE: 10.00 PMU 1 IB TEST MAGNITUDE: 1.000 kA PMU 1 IB TEST ANGLE: 130.00 PMU 1 IC TEST MAGNITUDE: 1.000 kA PMU 1 IC TEST ANGLE: 110.00 PMU 1 IG TEST MAGNITUDE: 0.000 kA PMU 1 IG TEST ANGLE: 0.00 PMU 1 TEST FREQUENCY: 60.000 Hz PMU 1 TEST df/dt: 0.000 Hz/s
Range: 0.00 to 700.00 kV in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0.000 to 9.999 kA in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The relay must be in test mode to use the PMU test mode. That is, the TESTING TEST MODE FUNCTION setting must be Enabled and the TESTING TEST MODE INITIATE initiating signal must be On.
5-268
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.10 TESTING
During the PMU test mode, the physical channels (VA, VB, VC, VX, IA, IB, IC, and IG), frequency, and rate of change of frequency are substituted with user values, while the symmetrical components are calculated from the physical channels. The test values are not explicitly marked in the outgoing data frames. When required, it is recommended to use the user-programmable digital channels to signal the C37.118 client that test values are being sent in place of the real measurements.
GE Multilin
5-269
5.10 TESTING
5 SETTINGS
5-270
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW
6.1 OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
ACTUAL VALUES STATUS
CONTACT INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE DPS INPUTS TELEPROTECTION INPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS DIGITAL COUNTERS SELECTOR SWITCHES FLEX STATES ETHERNET DIRECT INPUTS DIRECT DEVICES STATUS IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS EGD PROTOCOL STATUS TELEPROT CH TESTS ETHERNET SWITCH
See page 6-4. See page 6-4. See page 6-4. See page 6-5. See page 6-5. See page 6-5. See page 6-6. See page 6-6. See page 6-6. See page 6-7. See page 6-7. See page 6-7. See page 6-7. See page 6-8. See page 6-8. See page 6-9. See page 6-9. See page 6-10. See page 6-10.
ACTUAL VALUES METERING
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL SOURCE SRC 1
GE Multilin
6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW SOURCE SRC 2 SOURCE SRC 3 SOURCE SRC 4 SYNCHROCHECK TRACKING FREQUENCY FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATION FLEXELEMENTS IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER STATOR GROUND SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND See page 6-19. See page 6-20. See page 6-20. See page 6-20. See page 6-21. See page 6-22. See page 6-22. See page 6-22. See page 6-23. See page 6-23. See page 6-23. See page 6-23. See page 6-23. See page 6-24. See page 6-25. See page 6-25.
6 ACTUAL VALUES
FIELD GROUND VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 VOLTS PER HERTZ 2 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT CURRENTS PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS EVENT RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY
See page 6-26. See page 6-26. See page 6-26.
6-2
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES DATA LOGGER PMU RECORDS ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION FIRMWARE REVISIONS
6.1 OVERVIEW
GE Multilin
6-3
6.2 STATUS 6.2STATUS For status reporting, On represents Logic 1 and Off represents Logic 0.
NOTE
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
MESSAGE
Cont Ip 1 Off Cont Ip 2 Off
MESSAGE
Range: On, Off
Range: On, Off
Cont Ip xx Off
Range: On, Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact input. For example, Cont Ip 1 refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact input. 6.2.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 1 Off Virt Ip 2 Off
MESSAGE
Range: On, Off
Range: On, Off
Virt Ip 64 Off
Range: On, Off
The present status of the 64 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual input. For example, Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input. 6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
MESSAGE
REMOTE INPUT STATUS: Off REMOTE INPUT STATUS: Off
MESSAGE
1 2
Range: On, Off
Range: On, Off
REMOTE INPUT 32 STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here. The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be Offline in which case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.
6-4
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS 6.2.4 REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DPS INPUTS
REMOTE DPS INPUTS

MESSAGE
REMOTE DPS INPUT STATUS: Bad REMOTE DPS INPUT STATUS: Bad
1 2
Range: On, Off, Intermediate, Bad
MESSAGE
REMOTE DPS INPUT STATUS: Bad
The present state of the remote double-point status inputs is shown here. The actual values indicate if the remote doublepoint status inputs are in the on (close), off (open), intermediate, or bad state. 6.2.5 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
MESSAGE
TELEPROTECTION INPUT 1-1: Off TELEPROTECTION INPUT 1-2: Off
MESSAGE
Range: Off, On
Range: Off, On
TELEPROTECTION INPUT 1-16: Off TELEPROTECTION INPUT 2-1: Off TELEPROTECTION INPUT 2-2: Off
Range: Off, On
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
TELEPROTECTION INPUT 2-16: Off
Range: Off, On
The present state of teleprotection inputs from communication channels 1 and 2 are shown here. The state displayed will be that of corresponding remote output unless the channel is declared failed. 6.2.6 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUTS
MESSAGE
Cont Op 1 Off Cont Op 2 Off
Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff
MESSAGE
Cont Op xx Off
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact output. For example, Cont Op 1 refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.
GE Multilin
6-5
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
For form-A contact outputs, the state of the voltage and current detectors is displayed as Off, VOff, IOff, On, IOn, and VOn. For form-C contact outputs, the state is displayed as Off or On.
NOTE
6.2.7 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
MESSAGE
Virt Op Off Virt Op Off
1 2
Range: On, Off
Range: On, Off
MESSAGE
Virt Op 96 Off
Range: On, Off
The present state of up to 96 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual output. For example, Virt Op 1 refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic equation for that output. 6.2.8 REMOTE DEVICES a) STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
REMOTE DEVICES STATUS

MESSAGE
All REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE: No REMOTE DEVICE 1 STATUS: Offline REMOTE DEVICE 2 STATUS: Offline
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
Range: Online, Offline
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 16 STATUS: Offline
The present state of up to 16 programmed remote devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indicates whether or not all programmed remote devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one required remote device is not online. b) STATISTICS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
REMOTE DEVICE
REMOTE DEVICE StNum: REMOTE DEVICE SqNum:
1 0 1 0
MESSAGE
Statistical data (two types) for up to 16 programmed remote devices is shown here. The StNum number is obtained from the indicated remote device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs. The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated remote device and is incremented whenever a GSSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4 294 967 295 is incremented.
6-6
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS 6.2.9 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIGITAL COUNTERS DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)
DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1

MESSAGE
Counter 1 0 Counter 1 0
ACCUM: FROZEN:
MESSAGE
Counter 1 FROZEN: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS Counter 1 0 MICROS:
MESSAGE
The present status of the eight digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date and time stamp for the frozen count. The COUNTER 1 MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp. 6.2.10 SELECTOR SWITCHES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS SELECTOR SWITCHES
SELECTOR SWITCHES
MESSAGE
SELECTOR SWITCH 1 POSITION: 0/7 SELECTOR SWITCH 2 POSITION: 0/7
Range: Current Position / 7
Range: Current Position / 7
The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the actual value. 6.2.11 FLEX STATES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS FLEX STATES
FLEX STATES
MESSAGE
PARAM Off PARAM Off
1: Off 2: Off
Range: Off, On
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
PARAM 256: Off Off
Range: Off, On
There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit. 6.2.12 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS ETHERNET
ETHERNET
MESSAGE
ETHERNET PRI LINK STATUS: OK ETHERNET SEC LINK STATUS: OK
Range: Fail, OK
Range: Fail, OK
These values indicate the status of the primary and secondary Ethernet links.
GE Multilin
6-7
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2.13 DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS
DIRECT INPUTS
MESSAGE
AVG MSG RETURN TIME CH1: 0 ms UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1: 0 CRC FAIL COUNT CH1: 0 AVG MSG RETURN TIME CH2: 0 ms UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH2: 0 CRC FAIL COUNT CH2: 0 DIRECT INPUT On DIRECT INPUT On
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
1: 2:
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 32: On
The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for direct output messages to return to the sender in a direct input/output ring configuration (this value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last ten messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules. The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that do not make the trip around the communications ring. The CRC FAIL COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that have been received but fail the CRC check. High values for either of these counts may indicate on a problem with wiring, the communication channel, or one or more relays. The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL COUNT values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command. The DIRECT INPUT 1 to DIRECT INPUT (32) values represent the state of each direct input. 6.2.14 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
DIRECT DEVICES STATUS

MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE 1 STATUS: Offline DIRECT DEVICE 2 STATUS: Offline
MESSAGE
Range: Offline, Online
DIRECT DEVICE 16 STATUS: Offline
These actual values represent the state of direct devices 1 through 16.
6-8
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS 6.2.15 IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS
IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS

MESSAGE
UINT INPUT 0 UINT INPUT 0
1 2
MESSAGE
UINT INPUT 16 0
The IEC 61850 GGIO5 integer input data points are displayed in this menu. The GGIO5 integer data values are received via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices. 6.2.16 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS a) FAST EXCHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS EGD PROTOCOL STATUS PRODUCER STATUS FAST EXCHANGE 1
FAST EXCHANGE 1
MESSAGE
FAST EXCHANGE 1 SIGNATURE: 0 FAST EXCHANGE 1 DATA LENGTH: 0
These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size for the fast EGD exchange is displayed. b) SLOW EXCHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS EGD PROTOCOL STATUS PRODUCER STATUS SLOW EXCHANGE 1(2)
SLOW EXCHANGE 1
MESSAGE
SLOW EXCHANGE 1 SIGNATURE: 0 SLOW EXCHANGE 1 DATA LENGTH: 0
These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size for the slow EGD exchanges are displayed.
GE Multilin
6-9
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2.17 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS TELEPROT CH TESTS
TELEPROT CH TESTS
MESSAGE
CHANNEL 1 STATUS: n/a CHANNEL 1 LOST PACKETS: 1 CHANNEL 2 STATUS: n/a CHANNEL 2 LOST PACKETS: 1 VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION: FAIL
Range: n/a, FAIL, OK
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The status information for two channels is shown here. CHANNEL 1 STATUS: This represents the receiver status of each channel. If the value is OK, teleprotection is enabled and data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is FAIL, teleprotection enabled and data is not being received from the remote terminal. If n/a, teleprotection is disabled. CHANNEL 1 LOST PACKETS: Data is transmitted to the remote terminals in data packets at a rate of two packets per cycle. The number of lost packets represents data packets lost in transmission; this count can be reset to 0 through the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu. VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION: This value displays the current state of the communications channel identification check, and hence validity. If a remote relay ID does not match the programmed ID at the local relay, the FAIL message will be displayed. The N/A value appears if the local relay ID is set to a default value of 0, the channel is failed, or if the teleprotection inputs/outputs are not enabled. 6.2.18 ETHERNET SWITCH
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS ETHERNET SWITCH
ETHERNET SWITCH
MESSAGE
SWITCH 1 PORT STATUS: OK SWITCH 2 PORT STATUS: OK
Range: FAIL, OK
Range: FAIL, OK
MESSAGE
SWITCH 6 PORT STATUS: OK SWITCH MAC ADDRESS: 00A0F40138FA
Range: FAIL, OK
Range: standard MAC address format
MESSAGE
These actual values appear only if the G60 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module (type 2S or 2T). The status information for the Ethernet switch is shown in this menu. SWITCH 1 PORT STATUS to SWITCH 6 PORT STATUS: These values represents the receiver status of each port on the Ethernet switch. If the value is OK, then data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is FAIL, then data is not being received from the remote terminal or the port is not connected. SWITCH MAC ADDRESS: This value displays the MAC address assigned to the Ethernet switch module.
6-10
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3METERING a) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING POWER AND ENERGY The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR-series relays.
6.3 METERING 6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS
Generator
PER IEEE CONVENTIONS

PARAMETERS AS SEEN BY THE UR RELAY
Voltage WATTS = Positive VARS = Positive PF = Lag VAG Current UR RELAY IB IA
G
VCG
+Q
IC
PF = Lead -P PF = Lag
PF = Lag
IA
+P PF = Lead -Q
M
Inductive Generator
LOAD Resistive
VBG
S=VI
G
Voltage WATTS = Positive VARS = Negative PF = Lead Current IB UR RELAY VBG IC VCG
+Q
PF = Lead
IA VAG
PF = Lag
-P
IA
+P PF = Lag
-Q
PF = Lead
LOAD Resistive Inductive Resistive LOAD VCG Voltage WATTS = Negative VARS = Negative PF = Lag Current VBG UR RELAY IC IA IB VAG
S=VI
2
6
+Q PF = Lead -P
IA
PF = Lag +P
PF = Lag -Q
PF = Lead
G
Generator Resistive LOAD
S=VI
3
VCG Voltage WATTS = Negative VARS = Positive PF = Lead IA Current UR RELAY VBG IC VAG IB
+Q PF = Lead
IA
PF = Lag
+P
-P PF = Lag
PF = Lead
-Q
4
G
Generator
827239AC.CDR
S=VI
Figure 61: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS
GE Multilin
6-11
6.3 METERING b) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES
6 ACTUAL VALUES
All phasors calculated by UR-series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times. For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected by the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting defines a particular AC signal source to be used as the reference. The relay will first determine if any Phase VT bank is indicated in the source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any Aux VT bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include Phase CT bank and Ground CT bank. If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.
-270o
-225o
-315o positive angle direction
-180o
UR phase angle reference
0o
-135o
-45o
-90o
827845A1.CDR
Figure 62: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION c) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS The UR-series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage, and symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages. For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common reference as described in the previous sub-section. WYE-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS: ABC phase rotation: 1 - ( V + V BG + V CG ) V_0 = -3 AG 1 - ( V + aV BG + a 2 V CG ) V_1 = -3 AG 1 - ( V + a 2 V BG + aV CG ) V_2 = -3 AG The above equations apply to currents as well. ACB phase rotation: 1 - ( V + V BG + V CG ) V_0 = -3 AG 1 - ( V + a 2 V BG + aV CG ) V_1 = -3 AG 1 - ( V + aV BG + a 2 V CG ) V_2 = -3 AG
6-12
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES DELTA-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS: ABC phase rotation: V_0 = N/A 1 30 2 V_1 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA ) 3 3 1 30 - ( V AB + a 2 V BC + aV CA ) V_2 = ---------------3 3 ACB phase rotation:
6.3 METERING
V_0 = N/A 1 30 - ( V AB + a 2 V BC + aV CA ) V_1 = ---------------3 3 1 30 2 V_2 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA ) 3 3
The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation. Table 61: SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V * VAG 13.9 0 VBG 76.2 125 VCG 79.7 250 VAB 84.9 313 84.9 0 VBC 138.3 97 138.3 144 VCA 85.4 241 85.4 288 VT CONN. WYE DELTA RELAY INPUTS, SEC. V F5AC 13.9 0 84.9 0 F6AC 76.2 125 138.3 144 F7AC 79.7 250 85.4 288 SYMM. COMP, SEC. V V0 19.5 192 N/A V1 56.5 7 56.5 54 V2 23.3 187 23.3 234
UNKNOWN (only V1 and V2 can be determined)
The power system voltages are phase-referenced for simplicity to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a relative matter. It is important to remember that the G60 displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.
SYSTEM VOLTAGES
SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
WYE VTs
C B 2
U re R ph fe a re se nc a e ng
le
A
DELTA VTs
U re R ph fe a re se nc a e ng
1
le
C B 2
827844A1.CDR
Figure 63: MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
GE Multilin
6-13
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3.2 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING STATOR DIFFERENTIAL STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
MESSAGE
STATOR DIFF OPERATE Iad: 0.00 A STATOR DIFF RESTRAIN Iar: 0.00 A STATOR DIFF OPERATE Ibd: 0.00 A STATOR DIFF RESTRAIN Iar: 0.00 A STATOR DIFF OPERATE Icd: 0.00 A STATOR DIFF RESTRAIN Icr: 0.00 A
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The phasors of differential and restraint currents are displayed in primary amperes. 6.3.3 SOURCES a) MAIN MENU
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC1
SOURCE SRC 1
MESSAGE
PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 POWER SRC 1 ENERGY SRC 1 FREQUENCY SRC 1 CURRENT HARMONICS SRC 1 VOLTAGE HARMONICS SRC 1
See page 615. See page 615. See page 616. See page 616. See page 617. See page 618. See page 618. See page 618. See page 619.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This menu displays the metered values available for each source. Metered values presented for each source depend on the phase and auxiliary VTs and phase and ground CTs assignments for this particular source. For example, if no phase VT is assigned to this source, then any voltage, energy, and power values will be unavailable.
6-14
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES b) PHASE CURRENT METERING

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE CURRENT
6.3 METERING
PHASE CURRENT SRC 1

MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000 b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000 A SRC 1 RMS Ib: 0.000 A SRC 1 RMS Ic: 0.000 A SRC 1 RMS In: 0.000 A SRC 1 PHASOR Ia: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Ib: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Ic: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR In: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 POS SEQ I1: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2: 0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The metered phase current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES). c) GROUND CURRENT METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 GROUND CURRENT
GROUND CURRENT SRC 1

MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ig: 0.000 A SRC 1 PHASOR Ig: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Igd: 0.000 A 0.0
MESSAGE
The metered ground current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES).
GE Multilin
6-15
6.3 METERING d) PHASE VOLTAGE METERING

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 PHASE VOLTAGE
6 ACTUAL VALUES
PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1

MESSAGE
SRC 1 0.00 SRC 1 0.00 SRC 1 0.00
RMS Vag: V RMS Vbg: V RMS Vcg: V
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vag: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 0.00 SRC 1 0.00 SRC 1 0.00 RMS Vab: V RMS Vbc: V RMS Vca: V
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vab: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Vca: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 POS SEQ V1: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2: 0.000 V 0.0
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The metered phase voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES). e) AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1

MESSAGE
SRC 1 0.00
RMS Vx: V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vx: 0.000 V 0.0
The metered auxiliary voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES).
6-16
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES f) POWER METERING

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 POWER
6.3 METERING
POWER SRC 1
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REAL POWER 3: 0.000 W SRC 1 REAL POWER a: 0.000 W SRC 1 REAL POWER b: 0.000 W SRC 1 REAL POWER c: 0.000 W SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR 3: 0.000 var SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR a: 0.000 var SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR b: 0.000 var SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR c: 0.000 var SRC 1 APPARENT PWR 3: 0.000 VA SRC 1 APPARENT PWR a: 0.000 VA SRC 1 APPARENT PWR b: 0.000 VA SRC 1 APPARENT PWR c: 0.000 VA SRC 1 3: SRC 1 a: SRC 1 b: SRC 1 c: POWER FACTOR 1.000 POWER FACTOR 1.000 POWER FACTOR 1.000 POWER FACTOR 1.000
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The metered values for real, reactive, and apparent power, as well as power factor, are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES).
GE Multilin
6-17
6.3 METERING g) ENERGY METERING

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 ENERGY
6 ACTUAL VALUES
ENERGY SRC 1
MESSAGE
SRC 1 POS WATTHOUR: 0.000 Wh SRC 1 NEG WATTHOUR: 0.000 Wh SRC 1 POS VARHOUR: 0.000 varh SRC 1 NEG VARHOUR: 0.000 varh
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The metered values for real and reactive energy are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES). Because energy values are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing CT or VT characteristics. h) FREQUENCY METERING
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY SRC 1
SRC 1 FREQUENCY: 0.00 Hz
The metered frequency values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES). is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration (see the SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and transients.
SOURCE FREQUENCY
i) CURRENT HARMONICS AND THD METERING

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 CURRENT HARMONICS
CURRENT HARMONICS SRC 1

MESSAGE
SRC 1 THD Ia: 0.0 Ib: 0.0 Ic: 0.0% SRC 1 2ND Ia: 0.0 Ib: 0.0 Ic: 0.0% SRC 1 3RD Ia: 0.0 Ib: 0.0 Ic: 0.0%
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
SRC 1 25TH Ia: 0.0 Ib: 0.0 Ic: 0.0%
The metered current harmonics values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES). Current harmonics are measured for each source for the total harmonic distortion (THD) and 2nd to 25th harmonics per phase.
6-18
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES j) VOLTAGE HARMONICS AND THD METERING

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1 VOLTAGE HARMONICS
6.3 METERING
VOLTAGE HARMONICS SRC 1

MESSAGE
SRC 1 THD Va: 0.0 Vb: 0.0 Vc: 0.0% SRC 1 2ND Va: 0.0 Vb: 0.0 Vc: 0.0% SRC 1 3RD Va: 0.0 Vb: 0.0 Vc: 0.0%
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
SRC 1 25TH Va: 0.0 Vb: 0.0 Vc: 0.0%
The metered current harmonics values are displayed in this menu. The SRC 1 text will be replaced by the programmed name for the associated source (see the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES menu). To extract the 2nd to 25th voltage harmonics, each harmonic is computed on a per-phase basis, where: N = 64 is the number of samples per cycle 0 = 2f is the angular frequency based on the system frequency (50 or 60 Hz) k = 1, 2,..., N 1 is the index over one cycle for the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) m is the last sample number for the sliding window h = 1, 2,..., 25 is the harmonic number The short-time Fourier transform is applied to the unfiltered signal: 2 - ( f ( m k ) cos ( h 0 t ( k ) ) ) F real ( m, h ) = --N
k
2 - ( f ( m k ) sin ( h 0 t ( k ) ) ) F imag ( m, h ) = --N

k
(EQ 6.1)
F ampl ( m, h ) =
F real ( m, h ) + F imag ( m, h )
The harmonics are a percentage of the fundamental signal obtained as a ratio of harmonic amplitude to fundamental amplitude multiplied by 100%. The total harmonic distortion (THD) is the ratio of the total harmonic content to the fundamental: THD = F 2 + F 3 + + F 25
2 2 2
(EQ 6.2)
NOTE
Voltage harmonics are calculated only for Wye connected phase VTs. Ensure the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK F5 PHASE VT XX CONNECTION setting is Wye to enable voltage harmonics metering.
6.3.4 SYNCHROCHECK
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SYNCHROCHECK SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)
SYNCHROCHECK 1
MESSAGE
SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA VOLT: 0.000 V SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA PHASE: 0.0 SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA FREQ: 0.00 Hz
MESSAGE
The actual values menu for synchrocheck 2 is identical to that of synchrocheck 1. If a synchrocheck function setting is "Disabled", the corresponding actual values menu item will not be displayed.
GE Multilin
6-19
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3.5 TRACKING FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRACKING FREQUENCY
TRACKING FREQUENCY
TRACKING FREQUENCY: 60.00 Hz
The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on the selection of the reference source with the FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting in the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM menu. Refer to the Power System section of chapter 5 for additional details. 6.3.6 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE
FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE

MESSAGE
FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 1: 0.00 Hz/s FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 2: 0.00 Hz/s FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 3: 0.00 Hz/s FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 4: 0.00 Hz/s
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The metered frequency rate of change for the frequency rate of change elements is shown here. 6.3.7 FREQUENCY OUT-OF-BAND ACCUMULATION
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATION
FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATION

MESSAGE
FREQUENCY OOB BAND 1 ACCUMULATION: 0.0% FREQUENCY OOB BAND 2 ACCUMULATION: 0.0%
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY OOB BAND 7 ACCUMULATION: 0.0%
The frequency out-of-band accumulation metered values are displayed to the nearest percent as a ratio of the present accumulation to the user-specified limit. Note that this value can be greater than 100%.
6-20
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING 6.3.8 FLEXELEMENTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING FLEXELEMENTS FLEXELEMENT 1(16)
FLEXELEMENT 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 OpSig: 0.000 pu
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units. Table 62: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS
dcmA FIELD CURRENT FIELD GROUND CURRENT FIELD GROUND FAULT LOCATION FIELD GROUND INJECTED VOLTAGE FIELD GROUND RESISTANCE FIELD VOLTAGE FREQUENCY FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE PHASE ANGLE POWER FACTOR RTDs SENSITIVE DIR POWER (Sns Dir Power) SOURCE CURRENT SOURCE ENERGY (Positive and Negative Watthours, Positive and Negative Varhours) SOURCE POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE STATOR DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT (Stator Diff Iar, Ibr, and Icr) STATOR GROUND 3RD HARMONIC VOLTAGES (Stator Gnd Vn/V0 3rd) STATOR GROUND RESISTANCE STATOR GROUND SUBHARMONIC VOLTAGE STATOR GROUND SUBHARMONIC CURRENT STATOR RESTRAINING CURRENT (Stator Diff Iad, Ibd, and Icd) SYNCHROCHECK (Max Delta Volts) VOLTS PER HERTZ BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the +IN and IN inputs. IBASE = maximum value setting defined for the specific transducer input configured IBASE = 5 mA BASE = 100% VBASE = 15 V RBASE = 250 K VBASE = 500 V fBASE = 1 Hz df/dtBASE = 1 Hz/s BASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention) PFBASE = 1.00 BASE = 100C PBASE = maximum value of 3 VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs of the sources configured for the sensitive power directional element(s). IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively PBASE = maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents) VBASE = Primary auxiliary voltage of the STATOR GROUND SOURCE RBASE = 10 K VBASE = nominal secondary voltage of auxiliary VT for the stator ground source IBASE = ground CT primary current of stator ground source IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents) VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and IN inputs BASE = 1.00 pu
GE Multilin
6-21
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3.9 IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS
IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS

MESSAGE
ANALOG INPUT 0.000 ANALOG INPUT 0.000
MESSAGE
1 2
ANALOG INPUT 16 0.000
The IEC 61850 GGIO3 analog input data points are displayed in this menu. The GGIO3 analog data values are received via IEC 61850 GOOSE messages sent from other devices. 6.3.10 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER

MESSAGE
DIRECTIONAL POWER 1 3: 0.000 W DIRECTIONAL POWER 2 3: 0.000 W
The effective operating quantities of the sensitive directional power elements are displayed here. The display may be useful to calibrate the feature by compensating the angular errors of the CTs and VTs with the use of the RCA and CALIBRATION settings. 6.3.11 STATOR GROUND
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING STATOR GROUND
STATOR GROUND
MESSAGE
STATOR GND 3RD HARM VN: 0.000 V STATOR GND 3RD HARM VN+V0: 0.000 V STATOR GND 3RD HARM V0: 0.000 V
MESSAGE
Magnitudes of the third harmonic components of the machine neutral point voltage (VN), the zero-sequence voltage at the machine terminals (V0), and in the vector sum of the neutral point voltage and zero-sequence voltage (VN + V0) are available for display. The values are calculated for a signal source specified under the stator ground settings menu. These readings may be useful when selecting a pickup and supervision setting for the 100% stator ground and third harmonic neutral undervoltage protection elements.
6-22
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING 6.3.12 SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND
SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND

MESSAGE
SH INJECTION VOLTS 0.000 V SH INJECTION AMPS 0.000 A SH CURRENT ANGLE 0 STATOR GND. RESIST: > 500.000 k
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Actual values related to sub-harmonic stator ground protection are displayed in this menu. 6.3.13 FIELD GROUND
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING FIELD GROUND
FIELD GROUND
MESSAGE
FIELD GROUND RESIST 500 k FIELD VOLTAGE 0.0 V INJECTED VOLTAGE 0.000 V FAULT LOCATION 10% FIELD GROUND CURRENT: 0.00 mA FIELD CURRENT: 0.000 A
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Actual values related to field ground protection are displayed in this menu. 6.3.14 VOLTS PER HERTZ
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING VOLTS PER HERTZ 1(2)
VOLTS PER HERTZ 1
VOLTS PER HERTZ 1: 0.000 pu
The volts per hertz actual values are displayed in this menu. 6.3.15 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT CURRENTS RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1(4)

MESSAGE
RGF 1 DIFF 0.000 A
Igd:
RGF 1 RESTR Igr: 0.000 A
The differential and restraint current values for the restricted ground fault element are displayed in this menu.
GE Multilin
6-23
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3.16 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PMU 1(4)
PMU 1
MESSAGE
PMU 1 VA: 0.0000 kV, 0.00 PMU 1 VB: 0.0000 kV, 0.00 PMU 1 VC: 0.0000 kV, 0.00 PMU 1 VX: 0.0000 kV, 0.00 PMU 1 V1: 0.0000 kV, 0.00 PMU 1 V2: 0.0000 kV, 0.00 PMU 1 V0: 0.0000 kV, 0.00 PMU 1 IA: 0.0000 kA, 0.00 PMU 1 IB: 0.0000 kA, 0.00 PMU 1 IC: 0.0000 kA, 0.00 PMU 1 IG: 0.0000 kA, 0.00 PMU 1 I1: 0.0000 kA, 0.00 PMU 1 I2: 0.0000 kA, 0.00 PMU 1 I0: 0.0000 kA, 0.00 PMU 1 FREQUENCY: 0.0000 Hz PMU 1 df/dt: 0.0000 Hz/s PMU 1 CONFIG CHANGE COUNTER: 0
Range: Va or Vab per VT bank connection
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: Substituted with zero if delta-connected VTs.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
6
MESSAGE MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 65535
MESSAGE
The above actual values are displayed without the corresponding time stamp as they become available per the recording rate setting. Also, the recording post-filtering setting is applied to these values.
6-24
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING 6.3.17 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT xx
DCMA INPUT xx
DCMA INPUT xx 0.000 mA
Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT xx
RTD INPUT xx
RTD INPUT xx -50 C
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID and the bottom line as the value.
GE Multilin
6-25
6.4 RECORDS 6.4RECORDS
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4.1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT

MESSAGE
NEWEST RECORD NUMBER: 0 LAST CLEARED DATE: 2002/8/11 14:23:57 LAST REPORT DATE: 2002/10/09 08:25:27
MESSAGE
This menu displays the user-programmable fault report actual values. See the User-Programmable Fault Report section in chapter 5 for additional information on this feature. 6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS EVENT RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS
EVENT: XXXX RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)
MESSAGE
EVENT: 3 POWER ON EVENT: 2 POWER OFF EVENT: 1 EVENTS CLEARED
EVENT 3 DATE: 2000/07/14 EVENT 3 TIME: 14:53:00.03405 Date and Time Stamps
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The event records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new record is added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated with the event trigger. Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records. 6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY
MESSAGE
FORCE TRIGGER? No NUMBER OF TRIGGERS: 0 AVAILABLE RECORDS: 0 CYCLES PER RECORD: 0.0 LAST CLEARED DATE: 2000/07/14 15:40:16
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The CYCLES PER RECORD value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillography section of chapter 5 for additional details.
CLEAR RECORDS
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting Yes to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS menu for information on clearing the oscillography records.
6-26
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4 RECORDS 6.4.4 DATA LOGGER
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER
MESSAGE
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME: 2000/01/14 13:45:51 NEWEST SAMPLE TIME: 2000/01/14 15:21:19
The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It will be static until the log gets full, at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate. The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time the most recent samples were taken. It counts up at the defined sampling rate. If the data logger channels are defined, then both values are static. Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing data logger records. 6.4.5 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS PMU RECORDS
PMU RECORDS
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS: 0 PMU 1 RECORDING
See below.
The number of triggers applicable to the phasor measurement unit recorder is indicated by the NUMBER OF TRIGGERS value. The status of the phasor measurement unit recorder is indicated as follows:
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS PMU RECORDS PMU 1 RECORDING
PMU 1 RECORDING
MESSAGE
PMU 1 FORCE TRIGGER: Yes PUM 1 AVAILABLE RECORDS: 0 PUM 1 SECONDS PER RECORD: 0.0 PUM 1 LAST CLEARED: 2005/07/14 015:40:16
Range: No, Yes
Range: 0 to 6553.5 in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
Range: date and time in format shown
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
6-27
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION
MESSAGE
ORDER CODE LINE 1: G60-E00-HCH-F8G-H6B ORDER CODE LINE 2: ORDER CODE LINE 3: ORDER CODE LINE 4: SERIAL NUMBER: ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS 000000000000 MANUFACTURING DATE: 0 PMU FEATURE ACTIVE: No CT/ VT ADVANCED DIAG ACTIVE: No OPERATING TIME: 0:00:00 LAST SETTING CHANGE: 1970/01/01 23:11:19
Range: standard GE multilin order code format; example order code shown Range: standard GE multilin order code format
Range: standard GE multilin order code format
MESSAGE
Range: standard GE multilin order code format
MESSAGE
Range: standard GE multilin serial number format
MESSAGE
Range: standard Ethernet MAC address format
MESSAGE
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
Range: opearting time in HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
MESSAGE
The order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date and time of manufacture, and operating time are shown here. 6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO FIRMWARE REVISIONS
FIRMWARE REVISIONS
MESSAGE
G60 Relay REVISION:
5.8x
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 Revision number of the application firmware. Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE) Value is 0 for each standard firmware release. Range: 0.00 to 655.35 Revision number of the boot program firmware. Range: 0.00 to 655.35 Revision number of faceplate program firmware. Range: Any valid date and time. Date and time when product firmware was built. Range: Any valid date and time. Date and time when the boot program was built.
MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER: 0 BOOT PROGRAM REVISION: 3.01 FRONT PANEL PROGRAM REVISION: 0.08 COMPILE DATE: 2004/09/15 04:55:16 BOOT DATE: 2004/09/15 16:41:32
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been installed.
6-28
GE Multilin
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS
7.1 COMMANDS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU
COMMANDS
MESSAGE
COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME COMMANDS PMU ONE-SHOT
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
The commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from unauthorized access via the command password; see the Security section of chapter 5 for details. The following flash message appears after successfully command entry: COMMAND EXECUTED 7.1.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS
COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS
Virt Ip Off Virt Ip Off
1 2
Range: Off, On
Range: Off, On
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 64 Off
Range: Off, On
The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a state off (logic 0) or on (logic 1).
GE Multilin
7-1
7.1 COMMANDS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS
PATH: COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS
COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS
CLEAR USER FAULT REPORTS? No CLEAR EVENT RECORDS? No CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? No CLEAR DATA LOGGER? No CLEAR ENERGY? No CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS? No CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS? No CLEAR TELEPROTECT COUNTERS? No CLEAR FREQ OOB ACCUMULATORS? No PRESET FREQ OOB ACCUMULATORS? No CLEAR ALL RELAY RECORDS? No
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes. Valid only for units with Direct Input/ Output module. Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the event records. Data is cleared by changing a command setting to Yes and pressing the ENTER key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to No. 7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
PATH: COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME
COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME
SET DATE AND TIME: 2000/01/14 13:47:03
(YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)
The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad only if the IRIG-B or SNTP signal is not in use. The time setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The new time will take effect at the moment the ENTER key is clicked.
7-2
GE Multilin
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.1 COMMANDS 7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE
COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE
PERFORM LAMPTEST? No UPDATE ORDER CODE? No SERVICE COMMAND: 0
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
Range: 0, 101
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands for the lamp test and order code are activated by changing a command setting to Yes and pressing the ENTER key. The command setting will then automatically revert to No. The service command is activated by entering a numerical code and pressing the ENTER key. The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown. UPDATING... PLEASE WAIT There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER CODE NOT UPDATED message will be shown. The SERVICE COMMAND is used to perform specific G60 service actions. Presently, there is only one service action available. Code 101 is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non-volatile memory. If a code other than 101 is entered, the command will be ignored and no actions will be taken. Various self-checking diagnostics are performed in the background while the G60 is running, and diagnostic information is stored on the non-volatile memory from time to time based on the self-checking result. Although the diagnostic information is cleared before the G60 is shipped from the factory, the user may want to clear the diagnostic information for themselves under certain circumstances. For example, it may be desirable to clear diagnostic information after replacement of hardware. Once the diagnostic information is cleared, all selfchecking variables are reset to their initial state and diagnostics will restart from scratch.
GE Multilin
7-3
7.1 COMMANDS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1.6 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ONE-SHOT
PATH: COMMANDS PMU ONE-SHOT
COMMANDS PMU ONE-SHOT
PMU ONE-SHOT FUNCTION: Disabled PMU ONE-SHOT SEQUENCE NUMBER: 0 PMU ONE-SHOT TIME: 2005/06/14 7:58:35
Range: 0 to nominal frequency 1 in steps of 1
Range: 24h time format
This feature allows pre-scheduling a PMU measurement at a specific point in time. This functionality can be used to test for accuracy of the PMU, and for manual collection of synchronized measurements through the system, as explained below. When enabled, the function continuously compares the present time with the pre-set PMU ONE-SHOT TIME. When the two times match, the function compares the present sequence number of the measured synchrophasors with the pre-set PMU ONE-SHOT SEQUENCE NUMBER. When the two numbers match, the function freezes the synchrophasor actual values and the corresponding protocol data items for 30 seconds. This allows manual read-out of the synchrophasor values for the preset time and pre-set sequence number (via the faceplate display, supported communication protocols such as Modbus or DNP, and the EnerVista UR Setup software). When freezing the actual values the function also asserts a PMU ONE-SHOT OP FlexLogic operand. This operand may be configured to drive an output contact and trigger an external measuring device such as a digital scope with the intent to verify the accuracy of the PMU under test. With reference to the figure below, the PMU one-shot function (when enabled) controls three FlexLogic operands: The PMU ONE-SHOT EXPIRED operand indicates that the one-shot operation has been executed, and the present time is at least 30 seconds past the scheduled one-shot time. The PMU ONE-SHOT PENDING operand indicates that the one-shot operation is pending; that is, the present time is before the scheduled one-shot time. The PMU ONE-SHOT OP operand indicates the one-shot operation and remains asserted for 30 seconds afterwards.
When the function is disabled, all three operands are de-asserted. The one-shot function applies to all logical PMUs of a given G60 relay.
Figure 71: PMU ONE-SHOT FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS TESTING ACCURACY OF THE PMU: The one-shot feature can be used to test accuracy of the synchrophasor measurement. GPS-synchronized tests sets perform a similar function to PMUs: instead of measuring the phasor from physical signals with respect to the externally provided time reference, they produce the physical signals with respect to the externally provided time reference, given the desired phasor values. Therefore the GPS-synchronized test sets cannot be automatically assumed more accurate then the PMUs under test. This calls for a method to verify both the measuring device (PMU) and the source of signal (test set). With reference to the figure below, the one-shot feature could be configured to trigger a high-accuracy scope to capture both the time reference signal (rising edge of the 1 pps signal of the IRIG-B time reference), and the measured waveform. The high-accuracy high-sampling rate record of the two signals captured by the scope can be processed using digital tools to verify the magnitude and phase angle with respect to the time reference signal. As both the time reference and the mea-
7-4
GE Multilin
7.1 COMMANDS
sured signals are raw inputs to the PMU under test, their independently captured record, processed using third-party software, is a good reference point for accuracy calculations. Such a record proves useful when discussing the test results, and should be retained as a part of the testing documentation. Note that the PMU under such test does not have to be connected to a real GPS receiver as the accuracy is measured with respect to the timing reference provided to the PMU and not to the absolute UTC time. Therefore a simple IRIG-B generator could be used instead. Also, the test set does not have to support GPS synchronization. Any stable signal source can be used. If both the PMU under test and the test set use the timing reference, they should be driven from the same IRIG-B signal: either the same GPS receiver or IRIG-B generator. Otherwise, the setpoints of the test set and the PMU measurements should not be compared as they are referenced to different time scales.
Figure 72: USING THE PMU ONE-SHOT FEATURE TO TEST SYNCHROPHASOR MEASUREMENT ACCURACY COLLECTING SYNCHRONIZED MEASUREMENTS AD HOC: The one-shot feature can be used for ad hoc collection of synchronized measurements in the network. Two or more PMU can be pre-scheduled to freeze their measurements at the same time. When frozen the measurements could be collected using EnerVista UR Setup or a protocol client.
GE Multilin
7-5
7.2 TARGETS 7.2TARGETS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.2.1 TARGETS MENU
TARGETS
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT LATCHED
1:
Displayed only if targets for this element are active. Example shown. Displayed only if targets for this element are active. Example shown.
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 48: LATCHED

MESSAGE
The status of any active targets will be displayed in the targets menu. If no targets are active, the display will read NO
ACTIVE TARGETS:
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that message. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the target message. The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a target message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed. Table 71: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS
PRIORITY 1 2 3 ACTIVE STATUS OP PKP LATCHED DESCRIPTION element operated and still picked up element picked up and timed out element had operated but has dropped out
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed. 7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS a) DESCRIPTION The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present. Major self-test errors also result in the following: The critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized. All other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation. The faceplate In Service LED indicator is turned off. A RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded.
7-6
GE Multilin
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS b) MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES The major self-test errors are listed and described below. MODULE FAILURE___: Contact Factory (xxx) Latched target message: Yes. Description of problem: Module hardware failure detected. How often the test is performed: Module dependent.
7.2 TARGETS
What to do: Contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. The xxx text identifies the failed module (for example, F8L). INCOMPATIBLE H/W: Contact Factory (xxx)
Latched target message: Yes. Description of problem: One or more installed hardware modules is not compatible with the G60 order code. How often the test is performed: Module dependent. What to do: Contact the factory and supply the failure code noted in the display. The xxx text identifies the failed module (for example, F8L). EQUIPMENT MISMATCH: with 2nd line detail
Latched target message: No. Description of problem: The configuration of modules does not match the order code stored in the G60. How often the test is performed: On power up. Afterwards, the backplane is checked for missing cards every five seconds. What to do: Check all modules against the order code, ensure they are inserted properly, and cycle control power. If the problem persists, contact the factory. FLEXLOGIC ERROR: with 2nd line detail
Latched target message: No. Description of problem: A FlexLogic equation is incorrect. How often the test is performed: The test is event driven, performed whenever FlexLogic equations are modified. What to do: Finish all equation editing and use self tests to debug any errors. UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED: Check Settings
Latched target message: No. Description of problem: The PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS setting indicates the G60 is not programmed. How often the test is performed: On power up and whenever the PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS setting is altered. What to do: Program all settings and then set PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS to Programmed.
GE Multilin
7-7
7.2 TARGETS c) MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES
Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. Refer to the settings in the User-programmable self-tests section in chapter 5 for additional details. MAINTENANCE ALERT: Replace Battery Latched target message: Yes. Description of problem: The battery is not functioning. How often the test is performed: The battery is monitored every five seconds. The error message is displayed after 60 seconds if the problem persists. What to do: Replace the battery located in the power supply module (1H or 1L).
MAINTENANCE ALERT: Direct I/O Ring Break Latched target message: No. Description of problem: Direct input and output settings are configured for a ring, but the connection is not in a ring. How often the test is performed: Every second. What to do: Check direct input and output configuration and wiring.
MAINTENANCE ALERT: ENET MODULE OFFLINE Latched target message: No. Description of problem: The G60 has failed to detect the Ethernet switch. How often the test is performed: Monitored every five seconds. An error is issued after five consecutive failures. What to do: Check the G60 device and switch IP configuration settings. Check for incorrect UR port (port 7) settings on the Ethernet switch. Check the power to the switch.
MAINTENANCE ALERT: ENET PORT # OFFLINE Latched target message: No. Description of problem: The Ethernet connection has failed for the specified port. How often the test is performed: Every five seconds. What to do: Check the Ethernet port connection on the switch.
MAINTENANCE ALERT: **Bad IRIG-B Signal** Latched target message: No. Description of problem: A bad IRIG-B input signal has been detected. How often the test is performed: Monitored whenever an IRIG-B signal is received. What to do: Ensure the following: The IRIG-B cable is properly connected. Proper cable functionality (that is, check for physical damage or perform a continuity test). The IRIG-B receiver is functioning. Check the input signal level (it may be less than specification).
7-8
GE Multilin
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS If none of these apply, then contact the factory. MAINTENANCE ALERT: Port ## Failure Latched target message: No. Description of problem: An Ethernet connection has failed. How often the test is performed: Monitored every five seconds. What to do: Check Ethernet connections. Port 1 is the primary port and port 2 is the secondary port.
7.2 TARGETS
MAINTENANCE ALERT: SNTP Failure Latched target message: No. Description of problem: The SNTP server is not responding. How often the test is performed: Every 10 to 60 seconds. What to do: Check SNTP configuration and network connections.
MAINTENANCE ALERT: 4L Discrepancy Latched target message: No. Description of problem: A discrepancy has been detected between the actual and desired state of a latching contact output of an installed type 4L module. How often the test is performed: Upon initiation of a contact output state change. What to do: Verify the state of the output contact and contact the factory if the problem persists.
MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind xxx oscill Latched target message: No. Description of problem: A data item in a configurable GOOSE data set is oscillating. How often the test is performed: Upon scanning of each configurable GOOSE data set. What to do: The xxx text denotes the data item that has been detected as oscillating. Evaluate all logic pertaining to this item.
DIRECT I/O FAILURE: COMM Path Incomplete Latched target message: No. Description of problem: A direct device is configured but not connected. How often the test is performed: Every second. What to do: Check direct input and output configuration and wiring.
REMOTE DEVICE FAIL: COMM Path Incomplete Latched target message: No. Description of problem: One or more GOOSE devices are not responding.
GE Multilin
7-9
7.2 TARGETS
How often the test is performed: Event driven. The test is performed when a device programmed to receive GOOSE messages stops receiving. This can be from 1 to 60 seconds, depending on GOOSE packets. What to do: Check GOOSE setup.
TEMP MONITOR: OVER TEMPERATURE Latched target message: Yes. Description of problem: The ambient temperature is greater than the maximum operating temperature (+80C). How often the test is performed: Every hour. What to do: Remove the G60 from service and install in a location that meets operating temperature standards.
UNEXPECTED RESTART: Press RESET key Latched target message: Yes. Description of problem: Abnormal restart from modules being removed or inserted while the G60 is powered-up, when there is an abnormal DC supply, or as a result of internal relay failure. How often the test is performed: Event driven. What to do: Contact the factory.
d) EXTERNAL DEVICE SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES The major self-test errors are listed and described below. GPM-F FAILURE: TROUBLE 01 Latched target message: No. Description of problem: The G60 detects loss of communication with the field ground module on the RS485 link. How often the test is performed: Every five seconds. What to do: Check the field ground module and its RS485 connection to G60. GPM-F FAILURE: TROUBLE 02 Latched target message: No. Description of problem: The field ground module reports trouble with injected low frequency signal voltage level or frequency. How often the test is performed: Every second. What to do: Verify that the injection voltage actual value in the G60 is around 15 V. If the message remains, cycle power the field ground module. If the problem persists, then contact the factory. GPM-F FAILURE: TROUBLE 03 Latched target message: No. Description of problem: Field ground module reports trouble with its circuitry. How often the test is performed: Every second. What to do: Verify that the actual values in G60 are within accepted values. Cycle power to the field ground module. If the problem remains, then contact the factory.
7-10
GE Multilin
7.2 TARGETS
GPM-F FAILURE: TROUBLE 04 Latched target message: No. Description of problem: The setting for field ground module injection frequency does not match the injection frequency reported by the module. How often the test is performed: Every second. What to do: The field ground module may be connected to another G60 through its alternate RS485 port and it might be receiving another frequency setting. Please ensure both G60 devices connected to the same field ground module have the same injection frequency setting. GPM-F FAILURE: TROUBLE 05 Latched target message: No. Description of problem: The hardware revision of the field ground module is not supported by the present revision of G60. Please contact the factory. How often the test is performed: Every second. What to do: Check the hardware revision of the field ground module in the G60 actual values and contact the factory. GPM-F FAILURE: TROUBLE 06 Latched target message: No. Description of problem: The firmware revision of the field ground module is not supported by the present revision of G60 device. Please contact the factory. How often the test is performed: Every second. What to do: Check the firmware revision of the field ground module in the G60 actual values and contact the factory.
GE Multilin
7-11
7.2 TARGETS
7-12
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY 8 SECURITY 8.1PASSWORD SECURITY
8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY 8.1.1 OVERVIEW
Two levels of password security are provided via the ACCESS LEVEL setting: command and setting. The factory service level is not available and intended for factory use only. The following operations are under command password supervision: Changing the state of virtual inputs. Clearing the event records. Clearing the oscillography records. Changing the date and time. Clearing energy records. Clearing the data logger. Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states.
The following operations are under setting password supervision: Changing any setting. Test mode operation.
The command and setting passwords are defaulted to 0 when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is set to 0, the password security feature is disabled. The G60 supports password entry from a local or remote connection. Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality. When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the G60, the remote password must be used. If the connection is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password must be used. The PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder. The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either by the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista UR Setup software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout. The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands. ACCESS LOC SETG OFF: Asserted when local setting access is disabled. ACCESS LOC SETG ON: Asserted when local setting access is enabled. ACCESS LOC CMND OFF: Asserted when local command access is disabled. ACCESS LOC CMND ON: Asserted when local command access is enabled. ACCESS REM SETG OFF: Asserted when remote setting access is disabled. ACCESS REM SETG ON: Asserted when remote setting access is enabled. ACCESS REM CMND OFF: Asserted when remote command access is disabled. ACCESS REM CMND ON: Asserted when remote command access is enabled.
The appropriate events are also logged in the Event Recorder as well. The FlexLogic operands and events are updated every five seconds. A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of all the remote and local security operands shown above.
NOTE
GE Multilin
8-1
8 SECURITY 8.1.2 PASSWORD SECURITY MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY
SECURITY
MESSAGE
ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS ACCESS SUPERVISION DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting, Factory Service (for factory use only)

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
8.1.3 LOCAL PASSWORDS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS

MESSAGE
CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No ENCRYPTED COMMAND PASSWORD: ---------ENCRYPTED SETTING PASSWORD: ----------
Range: No, Yes
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
Range: 0 to 9999999999 Note: ---------- indicates no password Range: 0 to 9999999999 Note: ---------- indicates no password
MESSAGE
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters. When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to Yes via the front panel interface, the following message sequence is invoked: 1. 2. 3. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a Restricted setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to Setting and then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. Accessibility automatically reverts to the Restricted level according to the access level timeout setting values. If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD. If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and settings.
NOTE
8-2
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY 8.1.4 REMOTE PASSWORDS
The remote password settings are only visible from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Password Security menu item to open the remote password settings window.
Figure 81: REMOTE PASSWORD SETTINGS WINDOW Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access. A command or setting password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters and are initially programmed to 0. The following procedure describes how the set the command or setting password. 1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field. Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field. Click the Change button. This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password. If the original password is not 0, then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send Password to Device button.
5.
The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the ENCRYPTED PASSWORD item.
If a command or setting password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding Encrypted Password value. 8.1.5 ACCESS SUPERVISION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION
ACCESS SUPERVISION
MESSAGE
ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3 PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: 5 min
MESSAGE
GE Multilin
8-3
8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY The following access supervision settings are available.
8 SECURITY
INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operands are set to On. These operands are returned to the Off state upon expiration of the lockout. PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the G60 will lockout password access after the number of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting has occurred.
The G60 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts. The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS RESET UNAUTHORIZED ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The operand does not generate events or targets. If events or targets are required, the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed with event logs or targets enabled. The access level timeout settings are shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS

MESSAGE
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: 5 min SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: 30 min
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled. COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from the command password level. SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from the command password level. 8.1.6 DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS

MESSAGE
LOCAL SETTING AUTH: On REMOTE SETTING AUTH: On ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: 30 min.
Range: selected FlexLogic operands (see below)
MESSAGE
The dual permission security access feature provides a mechanism for customers to prevent unauthorized or unintended upload of settings to a relay through the local or remote interfaces interface. The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only. LOCAL SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision. Valid values for the FlexLogic operands are either On (default) or any physical Contact Input ~~ On value. If this setting is On, then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this setting is any contact input on FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the local setting password to gain setting access.
8-4
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message is displayed on the front panel. REMOTE SETTING AUTH: This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision. If this setting is On (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is required). If this setting is Off, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access. ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT: This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except On. The state of the FlexLogic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer programmed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
The Remote Settings Authorization setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interfaces) setting access supervision. If this setting is On (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is required). If this setting is Off, then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to providing the remote setting password to gain setting access. The Access Authorization Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. This setting is applicable when the Remote Settings Authorization setting is programmed to any operand except On or Off. The state of the FlexLogic operand is continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted and the timer programmed with the Access Authorization Timeout setting value is started. When this timer expires, remote setting access is immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the timeout is restarted. The status of this timer is updated every 5 seconds.
GE Multilin
8-5
8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY 8.2SETTINGS SECURITY
8 SECURITY 8.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES
Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An example of this is a substation that has ten similar feeders protected by ten UR-series F60 relays. In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so they are not available to users. For example, these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate on the specific settings. The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers installing the devices. These will be settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios. The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings will be visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings templates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality is identical for both purposes. The settings template feature requires that both the EnerVista UR Setup software and the G60 firmware are at versions 5.40 or higher.
NOTE
a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings template for UR-series settings files. 1. 2. Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Right-click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing mode. Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process. 1. 2. Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Right-click on the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.
The software will prompt for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be at least four characters in length. 3. Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode. b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic equation editor settings are locked. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template editing mode. Enter the template password then click OK. Open the relevant settings windows that contain settings to be specified as viewable.
8-6
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of the settings window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
Figure 82: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED 5. Specify which settings to make viewable by clicking on them. The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below.
Figure 83: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE 6. 7. Click on Save to save changes to the settings template. Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.
c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE It is highly recommended that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security. The following procedure describes how to add password protection to a settings file template. 1. 2. Select a settings file from the offline window on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Selecting the Template Mode > Password Protect Template option.
GE Multilin
8-7
8 SECURITY
The software will prompt for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.
3.
Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The settings file template is now secured with password protection. When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It does not need to be added after the template is created.
NOTE
d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature: Display only those settings available for editing. Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out.
Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing. 1. 2. 3. Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option. Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
8
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied. Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command. The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve settings be available.
842858A1.CDR
Figure 84: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND
8-8
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.
Typical settings tree view without template applied.
Typical settings tree view with template applied via the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
842860A1.CDR
Figure 85: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template. 1. 2. 3. Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View All Settings option. Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings will be shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via the Template Mode > View All Settings command. The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve settings be available.
842859A1.CDR
Figure 86: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE It may be necessary at some point to remove a settings template. Once a template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and it will be necessary to define a new settings template. 1. 2. 3. Select an installed device or settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Select the Template Mode > Remove Settings Template option. Enter the template password and click OK to continue.
GE Multilin
8-9
8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY 4. Verify one more time that you wish to remove the template by clicking Yes.
8 SECURITY
The EnerVista software will remove all template information and all settings will be available. 8.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of critical FlexLogic applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within FlexLogic equations. Secured FlexLogic equations will remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device. a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATION ENTRIES The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation. 1. 2. Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the settings template feature. Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item. By default, all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on the upper right of the window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. 3. Specify which entries to lock by clicking on them. The locked entries will be displayed against a grey background as shown in the example below.
8
Figure 87: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE 4. 5. 6. Click on Save to save and apply changes to the settings template. Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template. Apply a password to the template then click OK to secure the FlexLogic equation.
8-10
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY
Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the FlexLogic entries not locked by the template. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic entries in the above procedure is shown below.
Typical FlexLogic entries without template applied.
Typical FlexLogic entries locked with template via the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
842861A1.CDR
Figure 88: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES The FlexLogic entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.
8
Figure 89: SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number. Once the desired FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific serial number. 1. 2. Select the settings file in the offline window. Right-click on the file and select the Edit Settings File Properties item.
GE Multilin
8-11
8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY The following window is displayed.
8 SECURITY
Figure 810: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW 3. Enter the serial number of the G60 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic equations are now locked to the G60 device specified by the serial number. 8.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a G60 device have been changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transfered to a G60 device, the date, time, and serial number of the G60 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This information can be compared with the G60 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised. The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the G60 device or obtained from the G60 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability information to the settings file.
SETTINGS FILE TRANSFERRED TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date are stored in the UR-series device.
8
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer date are added to the settings file when settings files are transferred to the device. Compare transfer dates in the settings file and the UR-series device to determine if security has been compromised.
SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND ADDED TO SETTINGS FILE.
842864A1.CDR
Figure 811: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.
8-12
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY 1. 2.
The transfer date of a setting file written to a G60 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup. Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future will indicate if any changes have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to an G60 device. The G60 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings file device definition
842863A1.CDR
Figure 812: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in settings report
842862A1.CDR
Figure 813: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA
GE Multilin
8-13
8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION
8 SECURITY
The G60 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the example below.
Traceability data in online device actual values page
842865A1.CDR
Figure 814: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW This infomormation if also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE
c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is removed from the settings file. If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file. If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed from the settings file. If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings file.
8-14
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY 8.3ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 8.3.1 OVERVIEW
The EnerVista security management system is a role-based access control (RBAC) system that allows a security administrator to easily manage the security privileges of multiple users. This allows for access control of URPlus-series devices by multiple personnel within a substation and conforms to the principles of RBAC as defined in ANSI INCITS 359-2004. The EnerVista security management system is disabled by default to allow the administrator direct access to the EnerVista software after installation. It is recommended that security be enabled before placing the device in service. 8.3.2 ENABLING THE SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM The EnerVista security management system is disabled by default. This allows access to the device immediately after installation. When security is disabled, all users are granted administrator access. 1. Select the Security > User Management menu item to open the user management configuration window.
2.
Check the Enable Security box in the lower-left corner to enable the security management system.
Security is now enabled for the EnerVista UR Setup software. It will now be necessary to enter a username and password upon starting the software. 8.3.3 ADDING A NEW USER The following pre-requisites are required to add new users to the EnerVista security management system. The user adding the new user must have administrator rights. The EnerVista security management system must be enabled.
The following procedure describes how to add new users. 1. 2. Select the Security > User Management menu item to open the user management configuration window. Enter a username in the User field. The username must be between 4 and 20 characters in length.
GE Multilin
8-15
8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 3. Select the user access rights by checking one or more of the fields shown.
8 SECURITY
The access rights are described in the following table Table 81: ACCESS RIGHTS SUMMARY
FIELD Delete Entry Actual Values Settings Commands Event Recorder FlexLogic Update Info DESCRIPTION Checking this box will delete the user when exiting the user management configuration window. Checking this box allows the user to read actual values. Checking this box allows the user to read setting values. Checking this box allows the user to execute commands. Checking this box allows the user to use the digital fault recorder. Checking this box allows the user to read FlexLogic values. Checking this box allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of the Settings, Event Recorder, and FlexLogic boxes are checked by themselves, the user is granted read access. When any of these are checked in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and write access. The user will not be granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update Info field is checked. When this box is checked, the user will become an EnerVista URPlus Setup administrator, therefore receiving all of the administrative rights. Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.
Admin
4.
Click OK to add the new user to the security management system. 8.3.4 MODIFYING USER PRIVILEGES
The following pre-requisites are required to modify user privileges in the EnerVista security management system. The user modifying the privileges must have administrator rights. The EnerVista security management system must be enabled.
The following procedure describes how to modify user privileges. 1. 2. Select the Security > User Management menu item to open the user management configuration window. Locate the username in the User field.
8-16
GE Multilin
8 SECURITY 3.
Modify the user access rights by checking or clearing one or more of the fields shown.
The access rights are described in the following table Table 82: ACCESS RIGHTS SUMMARY
FIELD Delete Entry Actual Values Settings Commands Event Recorder FlexLogic Update Info DESCRIPTION Checking this box will delete the user when exiting the user management configuration window. Checking this box allows the user to read actual values. Checking this box allows the user to read setting values. Checking this box allows the user to execute commands. Checking this box allows the user to use the digital fault recorder. Checking this box allows the user to read FlexLogic values. Checking this box allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of the Settings, Event Recorder, and FlexLogic boxes are checked by themselves, the user is granted read access. When any of these are checked in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and write access. The user will not be granted write access to functions that are not checked, even if the Update Info field is checked. When this box is checked, the user will become an EnerVista URPlus Setup administrator, therefore receiving all of the administrative rights. Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.
Admin
4.
Click OK to save the changes to user to the security management system.
GE Multilin
8-17
8 SECURITY
8-18
GE Multilin
9 THEORY OF OPERATION
9.1 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS 9.1.1 DESCRIPTION
9 THEORY OF OPERATION 9.1PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS
As a Wye-Delta transformer introduces discontinuity for the zero-sequence circuit, the ground distance protection cannot be applied, except special circumstances, to respond to faults behind the transformer. The phase distance elements, however, could be developed so that both accurate reach and correct fault phase identification is retained for faults behind the power transformer as seen from the relaying point. Without appropriate compensation, the relay's reach would depend on a type of fault, creating considerable difficulties in applying the relay. The G60 provides for any location of the VTs and CTs with respect to the involved power transformer and the direction of any given zone. In the following equations, the VT and CT locations are referenced as None if the transformer is not present between the CT/VT and the intended reach point. Otherwise, the location is to be selected as a type of a transformer as seen from the VT/CT position towards the intended reach point. The following figure explains the adopted rules.
(a) (b)
delta
wye, 330o lag
delta
wye, 330o lag
Z3 Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z3 Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Yd1 Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None
Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
(c)
delta
wye, 330o lag
(e)
L1 L2
Z3 Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Yd1
Zone 3 Zone 1 ZL1 ZT ZL2
Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None

830717A1.CDR
Figure 91: APPLICATIONS OF THE PHS DIST XFMR VOL/CUR CONNECTION SETTINGS
GE Multilin
9-1
Table 91: PHASE DISTANCE INPUT SIGNALS FOR DELTA-WYE TRANSFORMERS

TRANSFORMER CONNECTION None LOOP AB BC CA Dy1 AB CURRENT TRANSFORMATION VOLTAGE TRANSFORMATION
IA IB IB IC IC IA 3 IA 3 IB 3 IC I AB _21 P = 3 I C I BC _21 P = 3 I A I CA _21 P = 3 I B I AB _21 P = 3 I B I BC _21 P = 3 I C I CA _21 P = 3 I A I AB _21 P = 3 I A I BC _21 P = 3 I B I CA _21 P = 3 I C I AB _21 P = 3 I C I BC _21 P = 3 I A I CA _21 P = 3 I B I AB _21 P = 3 I B I BC _21 P = 3 I C I CA _21 P = 3 I A
V AB V BC V CA 1-----( V AB V CA ) 3 1-----( V BC V AB ) 3 1-----( V CA V BC ) 3 1V AB _21 P = -----( V BC V CA ) 3 1V BC _21 P = -----( V CA V AB ) 3 1V CA _21 P = -----( V AB V BC ) 3 1V AB _21 P = -----( V BC V AB ) 3 1V BC _21 P = -----( V CA V BC ) 3 1V CA _21 P = -----( V AB V CA ) 3 1V AB _21 P = -----( V CA V AB ) 3 1V BC _21 P = -----( V AB V BC ) 3 1V CA _21 P = -----( V BC V CA ) 3 1V AB _21 P = -----( V CA V BC ) 3 1V BC _21 P = -----( V AB V CA ) 3 1V CA _21 P = -----( V BC V AB ) 3 1V AB _21 P = -----( V AB V BC ) 3 1V BC _21 P = -----( V BC V CA ) 3 1V CA _21 P = -----( V CA V AB ) 3
BC
CA
Dy3
AB
BC
CA
Dy5
AB
BC
CA
Dy7
AB
BC
CA
Dy9
AB
BC
CA
Dy11
AB
BC
CA
9-2
GE Multilin
Table 92: PHASE DISTANCE INPUT SIGNALS FOR WYE-DELTA TRANSFORMERS

TRANSFORMER CONNECTION Yd1 LOOP AB CURRENT TRANSFORMATION VOLTAGE TRANSFORMATION
1I AB _21 P = -----( 2 IA IB IC ) 3 1I BC _21 P = -----( 2 IB IA IC ) 3 1I CA _21 P = -----( 2 IC IA IB ) 3 1I AB _21 P = -----( IA + IB 2 IC ) 3 1I BC _21 P = -----( IB + IC 2 IA ) 3 1I CA _21 P = -----( IA + IC 2 IB ) 3 1I AB _21 P = -----( 2 IB IA IC ) 3 1I BC _21 P = -----( 2 IC IA IB ) 3 1I CA _21 P = -----( 2 IA IB IC ) 3 1I AB _21 P = -----( IB + IC 2 IA ) 3 1I BC _21 P = -----( IA + IC 2 IB ) 3 1I CA _21 P = -----( IA + IB 2 IC ) 3 1I AB _21 P = -----( 2 IC IA IB ) 3 1I BC _21 P = -----( 2 IA IB IC ) 3 1 - ( 2 IB IA IC ) I CA _21 P = -----3 1I AB _21 P = -----( IA + IC 2 IB ) 3 1I BC _21 P = -----( IA + IB 2 IC ) 3 I CA _21 P 1= -----( IB + IC 2 IA ) 3
V AB _21 P = V BC _21 P = V CA _21 P =
3 VA 3 VB 3 VC
BC
CA
Yd3
AB
V AB _21 P = 3 V C V BC _21 P = 3 V A V CA _21 P = 3 V B V AB _21 P = V BC _21 P = V CA _21 P = 3 VB 3 VC 3 VA
BC
CA
Yd5
AB
BC
CA
Yd7
AB
V AB _21 P = 3 V A V BC _21 P = 3 V B V CA _21 P = 3 V C V AB _21 P = V BC _21 P = V CA _21 P = 3 VC 3 VA 3 VB
BC
CA
Yd9
AB
BC
CA
Yd11
AB
V AB _21 P = 3 V B V BC _21 P = 3 V C
BC
CA
9
V CA _21 P = 3 V A
GE Multilin
9-3
Equations from the Current Transformation and Voltage Transformation columns are used to derive inputs to the three (AB, BC, and CA) phase distance elements. For example, if the CTs are located at the delta side of the Delta-Wye 11 transformer, and a given zone is set to look through the transformer into the system connected to the Wye winding, the CT location setting for that zone shall be set to Dy11 and the relay would use 3 I B instead of a traditional I A I B for the AB phase distance element. The current supervision pickup setting applies to the currents specified in the Current Transformation columns. A distance zone originates at the location of the VTs (regardless of the location of the CTs). For more information on settings please refer to Chapter 9: Application of Settings. 9.1.2 EXAMPLE Consider the system shown below:
150 MVA, 10% 13.8kV/315kV delta wye, 330 lag ZL = 30.1185 AB
H VT = 13.8kV/120V CT = 8000:5
X VT = 315kV/120V CT = 300:5 0.68885 2.5788.4
837727A2.CDR
Figure 92: SAMPLE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Normally, in order to respond to the fault shown in the figure, a distance relay shall be applied at the relaying point X. The relay input signals at this location are shown in the following table.
INPUT VA VB VC IA IB IC PRIMARY 100.4 kV 7.32 97.23 kV 53.4 181.8 kV 150.0 1.288 kA 27.6 1.288 kA 152.4 0 SECONDARY 38.25 V 7.32 37.04 V 53.4 69.26 V 150.0 21.47 A 27.6 21.47 A 152.4 0
If installed at the location X, the relay would use the following input signals for its phase AB distance element:
V = VAB = 77.402 kV 57.5 primary or 29.49 V 57.5 secondary I = IA IB = 2.576 kA 27.6 primary or 42.93 A 27.6 secondary And consequently it would see an apparent impedance of: Zapp = V / I = 30.05 85 primary or 0.687 85 secondary
9-4
GE Multilin
If applied at location H, the relay sees the following input signals:

INPUT VA VB VC IA IB IC PRIMARY 7.584 kV 5.59 6.269 kV 120.1 7.751 kV 125.5 16.976 kA 27.6 33.952 kA 152.4 16.976 kA 27.6 SECONDARY 69.95 V 5.59 54.52 V 120.1 65.84 V 125.5 10.61 A 27.6 21.22 A 152.4 10.61 A 27.6
The relay is set as follows:

XFMR VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 XFMR CUR CONNECTION = Dy11
Consequently, the following signals are applied to the phase AB distance element: 1V = -----V AB V BC = 10.861 kV 59.9 primary or 94.45 V 59.9 secondary 3 I = 3 I B = 58.860 kA 27.6 primary or 36.75 A 27.6 secondary This results in the following apparent impedance: 94.45 kV 59.9 - = 2.570 87.5 secondary Z app = V --- = --------------------------------------------I 36.75 kA 27.6
(EQ 9.3) (EQ 9.1)
(EQ 9.2)
The above value is a correct measure of the distance from the VT location to the fault. For relay location 2, this certainly includes the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer: 10- ( 13.8 kV ) Z T ( at 13.8 kV ) = -------- --------------------------= 0.127 90 100 150 MVA 13.8 2 - = 0.05779 85 Z L ( at 13.8 kV ) = 30.11 --------- 315 Thus, 0.127 90 + 0.05779 85 = 0.1847 88.4 primary side or 2.569 88.4 on the secondary side. The above example illustrates how the relay maintains correct reach for fault behind power transformers. When installed at X, the relay shall be set to 0.687 85 secondary in order to reach to the fault shown in the figure. When installed at H, the relay shall be set to 2.569 88.4 to ensure exactly same coverage. See Chapter 9: Application of Settings for more information on setting calculations.
2
(EQ 9.4)
GE Multilin
9-5
9-6
GE Multilin
10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10.1SETTING EXAMPLE
10.1 SETTING EXAMPLE 10.1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section provides an example of the settings required for an example system configuration. Consider the generator protection system shown below:
GENERATOR: 211.765 MVA, 18 kV, ABC xd = 0.216 pu xd = 1.967 pu 2 I2T capability = 10 I2 capability = 8% Motoring Power = 22000 kW
X1 X3 H1
GSU: 200 MVA 18 : 138 kV X1 = 10%

X2 H2 H0 H3
TX LINE: 138 kV Z1 = 15 + j75 ohm
8000 : 5 A
A B C
8000 : 5 A
X1 X2 X3 H0
H1 H2 H3
52G
52
A Power B system C
18900 : 120 V 12000 : 240 V

R
Yd1
M1a
M1b
M2a
M2b
M3a
M3b
M4a
M1c
M2c
M4b
M3c
M4c
F6a
F5a
F7a
F8a
F4a
F1a
F1b
F2a
F2b
F3a
F3b
F5c
F6c
F7c
F3c
F1c
F4b
IG
F8c
F2c
VB
VA
VC
VX
VX
IG5
IG5
IG1
IC5
IC5
CURRENT INPUTS 8H
IC1
IB5
IB1
VOLTAGE INPUTS 8F
CURRENT INPUTS
Inlet valve
52b
IC1
IB5
IA5
IA1
IB1
H5a H5c H6a H6c H5b H7a H7c H8a H8c H7b
H8b
CONTACT INPUT H5a CONTACT INPUT H5c CONTACT INPUT H6a CONTACT INPUT H6c COMMON H5b CONTACT INPUT H7a CONTACT INPUT H7c CONTACT INPUT H8a CONTACT INPUT H8c COMMON H7b SURGE
6G H1
V
H2
V I
H3
V I
H4
H1a H1b H1c H2a H2b H2c H3a H3b H3c H4a H4b H4c
IG1
VA
VB
VC
IG
IA5
IA1
IB
IB
IA
IC
IA
IC
F4c
Trip generator breaker Trip field breaker Trip turbine Alarm
GE Consumer & Industrial Multilin

830712A7.CDR
Figure 101: G60 SAMPLE SYSTEM 10.1.2 SYSTEM SETUP Ideally, the CTs should be selected so the generator nominal current is 80 to 85% of CT primary. The following settings are entered for the example system. The M5 bank and the ground CT input on each of the groups are unused in this example. The nominal current is given by:
6 S nom 212 10 VA - = 6800 A I nom = -------------------- = ----------------------------------------3 3 V nom 3 18 10 V
(EQ 10.1)
Make the following settings changes in EnerVista UR Setup (or alternately, via the front panel through the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK F1 and the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK M1 menus).
10
GE Multilin
10-1
10.1 SETTING EXAMPLE For the example system, the voltage settings are calculated as follows:
PHASE VT SECONDARY =
10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS
18000 V 120 V --------------------- --------------------= 66 V 18900 V 3 18900 V --------------------- = 157.5 120 V 12000 V --------------------- = 50 240 V
(EQ 10.2)
PHASE VT RATIO =
(EQ 10.3)
NEUTRAL VT RATIO =
(EQ 10.4)
Enter the following values through EnerVista UR Setup (or alternately, through the front panel SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK F5 menu):
10.1.3 POWER SYSTEM Frequency tracking should always be enabled for generator applications. Make the following power system parameters changes via EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM VOLTAGE BANK F5 menu:
10.1.4 SIGNAL SOURCES Two sources are required for this application example. The LINE source uses the phase and auxiliary VT inputs and the CT input wired to the generator output CT. The NEUTRL source uses the phase VT inputs and the CT input wired to the generator neutral CT. Including the phase VT inputs for both sources allows the user to choose the location of elements that use both voltage and current. Elements using the auxiliary VT input are assigned to the NEUTRL source. Make the following changes through EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SOURCE 1 and the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SOURCE 2 menus:
10
10-2 G60 Generator Protection System GE Multilin
10.1 SETTING EXAMPLE 10.1.5 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
The LINE and NEUTRL sources are both required for the stator differential element. The minimum pickup can usually be set as low as 0.05 pu (corresponding to 0.25 A secondary or 400 A primary in this example). Set the STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1 setting to accommodate for CT errors; a setting of 10% is adequate in most instances. Set the STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2 setting to accommodate for errors due to CT saturation; a setting of 80% is recommended for most applications. The STATOR DIFF BREAK 1 setting must be greater than the maximum load expected for the machine. The STATOR DIFF BREAK 2 setting should be set at the level where CT saturation is expected to occur. Make the following parameter changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL menu:
10.1.6 GENERATOR UNBALANCE Stage 1 of the generator unbalance element is typically used to trip the generator. In this example, the I2 capability of the machine is 8% and the I22T capability is 10. The generator nominal current is: I nom primary A ------------------ = 0.85 pu I nom ( pu ) = -------------------------------- = 6800 CT primary 8000 A
(EQ 10.5)
The minimum operate time of stage 1 will be set to 0.25 seconds, the maximum operating time will be 10 minutes, and the reset time will be set to 4 minutes. Stage 2 is typically set lower than stage 1 with a time delay to prevent nuisance alarms for external faults that are normally cleared by system protection. For the application example, the pickup setting is: Pickup = 70% I 2 capability = 0.70 8% = 5.6% Source 2 will be chosen for this element. The settings are as follows:
(EQ 10.6)
10
GE Multilin
10-3
10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10.1.7 LOSS OF EXCITATION
For the example system, we have the following values: ratio ( 18 kV ) - -------------1600base kV - CT - = ---------------------------------- ------------------- = 15.54 Z b ( sec ) = -------------------------base MVA VT ratio 211.765 MVA 157.5 X d (sec) = X d Z b (sec) = 0.216 15.54 = 3.36 X d ( sec ) = X d Z b ( sec ) = 1.967 15.54 = 30.57 Z b ( sec ) + X d (sec) + 3.36 - = 15.54 ------------------------------------------ = 9.45 CENTER 1 = -----------------------------------------------2 2 Z b ( sec ) = 15.54 --------------------- = 7.77 RADIUS 1 = -------------------2 2 PICKUP DELAY 1 = 0.06 seconds X d ( sec ) + X d (sec) 30.57 + 3.36 CENTER 2 = ------------------------------------------------= ------------------------------------------ = 16.97 2 2 X d ( sec ) --------------------- = 15.28 RADIUS 2 = -------------------- = 30.57 2 2
2 2
(EQ 10.7) (EQ 10.8) (EQ 10.9) (EQ 10.10)
(EQ 10.11) (EQ 10.12) (EQ 10.13)
(EQ 10.14)
The voltage supervision setting will be determined by a system study and may be disabled on either element if required. VT fuse failure should supervise this element. The choice of source is not critical for this application. The NEUTRL source is chosen for the following setting changes. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 LOSS OF EXCITATION menu:
10.1.8 REVERSE POWER The reverse power element should be set at the rated motoring power. The pickup is calculated as follows: 1 Rated Motoring Power (primary watts) - ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------S min = -2 3 Phase CT Primary Phase VT Ratio Phase VT Secondary 1 22 10 W - -------------------------------------------------------------------- = 0.044 pu For the example system: S min = -2 3 8000 A 157.5 66 V
6
(EQ 10.15)
10
To prevent maloperation for power swings the element is typically time delayed by 20 to 30 seconds. For sequential tripping applications the time delay will be 2 to 3 seconds. The element may be blocked when the generator is offline. The line source will be used for this application. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER DIRECTIONAL POWER 1 menu:
Sequential tripping logic can be implemented in FlexLogic as follows:

54 55 56 57
DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP AND(2) INLET VALVE OFF(H8A) AND(2) = SEQ TRIP (VO9)
830731A1.CDR
= SEQ TRIP (VO9)
Figure 102: SEQUENTIAL TRIPPING FLEXLOGIC 10.1.9 SYSTEM BACKUP OVERCURRENT System backup protection is implemented using a phase time overcurrent element with voltage restraint enabled. The NEUTRL source will be chosen for this element. The pickup of this element should be set at a safe margin above the maximum load expected on the machine. Generator Nominal Current - = 1.5 6800 ------------ = 1.275 pu PICKUP = 1.5 ----------------------------------------------------------------------CT Primary 8000
(EQ 10.16)
The selection of all standard curves (and FlexCurves) is allowed for easy coordination with system relaying. For the example system, an IEEE extremely inverse curve will be used and a setting will be chosen such that the operate time for a three phase fault on the high side of the transformer is 0.75 seconds. For simplicity, the power system contribution is not considered. 211.765 - = 0.106 pu on machine base Transformer Impedance = 0.10 -------------------200 Impedance to Fault = 0.216 + 0.106 = 0.322 pu 1 - 6800 - = 2.64 pu Fault Current = V --- = ------------- -----------0.322 8000 X Transformer Impedance - = 18 kV 10.6 ---------- = 5.93 kV Fault Voltage = Nominal Voltage --------------------------------------------------------------Total Impedance 32.2 Fault Voltage kV Pickup Reduction = ----------------------------------------------------------------------- = 5.93 ------------------- = 0.329 Generator Nominal Voltage 18 kV The equation for an IEEE extremely inverse curve is as follows: A --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+B p I T = TDM -------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 I pickup Pickup Reduction
(EQ 10.17) (EQ 10.18) (EQ 10.19)
(EQ 10.20)
(EQ 10.21)
(EQ 10.22)
10
GE Multilin
10-5
10.1 SETTING EXAMPLE where A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, and p = 2. Solving for TDM, we have: 0.75 TDM = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = 0.88 28.2 ----------------------------------------------------- + 0.1217 2 2.64 ----------------------------------- 1.275 0.329 1
(EQ 10.23)
Since this element will coordinate with system protections a timed reset is chosen. The element must be blocked for a VT fuse failure. The neutral source will be chosen. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 PHASE CURRENT PHASE TOC1 menu:
10.1.10 BACKUP DISTANCE This function provides time-delayed protection for system faults that have not been cleared by system protections and to provide backup protection for stator faults. The Line source will be used in this example to permit the application of a forward and reverse zone. The memory duration will be left at the default setting (10 cycles). Zone 1 will look forward and cover the GSU and the transmission line leaving the station. Zone 3 will look in the reverse direction and cover the stator winding. Zone 2 will not be used in this example. Both the VTs and the CTs are located on the low voltage side of the GSU. The transformer vector diagram (see figure 9-1) shows this transformer to be Yd1. Consequently, due to the location of instrument transformers, Dy11 is chosen for both the XFMR VOL CONNECTION and XFMR CUR CONNECTION settings. There are no transformers in the reverse direction. Therefore None is chosen for both of the zone 3 transformer connection settings. The reach of the zone 1 element will be set at 120% of impedance of the GSU and the transmission line. In the instance that there are multiple lines and/or multiple generators, the zone 1 reach must be increased to compensate for the infeed effect.
2 VL ( 18 ) = j 0.162 primary ohms Transformer impedance = X T --------------- = j 0.1 ------------MVA T 200 2 VL ( 18 ) - = ( 15 + j 75 ) ---------------- = 0.255 + j 1.276 primary ohms Line impedance = X L -----2 ( 138 ) 2 VH 2 2
(EQ 10.24)
(EQ 10.25)
CT ratio Zone 1 reach = 1.2 ( Transformer impedance + Line impedance ) -------------------VT ratio 1600= 1.2 ( j 0.162 + 0.255 + j 1.276 ) -------------= 17.8 80 secondary ohms 157.5
(EQ 10.26)
10
The zone 3 reach will be set at 120% of the generator transient reactance. The time delay of this element should be compared to the generator decrement curve to verify the adequacy of this setting.
2 VL 18 ) ------------- = j 1.967 ( = j 3.01 primary ohms Generator impedance = X d --------------MVA G 211 2
(EQ 10.27)
CT ratio Zone 3 reach = 1.2 Generator impedance -------------------VT ratio 1600= 1.2 j 3.01 -------------= j 36.68 secondary ohms 157.5
(EQ 10.28)
An mho shape has been chosen for this example. Therefore, the quadrilateral settings are left at their default values. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 DISTANCE PHASE DISTANCE Z1(3) menus:
10.1.11 STATOR GROUND FAULT a) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE Stator ground fault protection is implemented with an overvoltage element connected at the generator neutral resistor. The auxiliary overvoltage element will be used in this example. The auxiliary voltage input has previously been assigned to the NEUTRL source. In this example the element will be set to protect 97% of the stator against ground faults. Nominal Phase Ground Voltage 18000 3 - = 0.026 pu PICKUP = 0.03 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = 0.03 --------------------------Ground VT Primary 12000
(EQ 10.29)
10
GE Multilin
10-7
The time delay should be longer than the longest normal clearing time for faults outside the generator zone. If the phase VTs are wye-connected then this element should also be coordinated with VT secondary fuses to prevent false operations for VT secondary ground faults. For the sample system a time delay of 1 second will be used. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS AUXILIARY OV1 menu:
b) 100% STATOR GROUND The auxiliary voltage input is required for both the 100% stator ground and the third harmonic neutral undervoltage elements. Therefore the NEUTRL source will be assigned for these elements. Make the following changes in the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 STATOR GROUND menu
STATOR GROUND SOURCE: "SRC
2" (the "NEUTRL" source)
This 100% stator ground element provides ground fault protection for the neutral end of the stator winding. The element has two stages. In this application, stage 1 is used to trip the machine and stage 2 is used for alarm purposes. Set the pickup to 0.15 for both stages to provide adequate overlap with the auxiliary overvoltage element. Set stage 1 to 0.375 V secondary (this value may be increased for security in particularly noisy environments). Stage 2 is typically set at 0.3 V secondary. The supervision settings are expressed in per unit of the NOMINAL PHASE VT SECONDARY setting. The time delay settings are 5 seconds and 1 second for the Stage 1 and Stage 2 elements respectively. V STG1 SUPV = 0.375 -------------------- = 0.0057 pu , 66 V V STG2 SUPV = 0.300 -------------------- = 0.0045 pu 66 V
(EQ 10.30)
Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 STATOR GROUND 100% STATOR GROUND menu:
10
10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS c) THIRD HARMONIC NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE
If the phase VTs are delta connected then third harmonic voltage cannot be measured and the 100% stator ground element cannot be used. In this case the third harmonic neutral undervoltage element can be used. Field measurements should be taken over the entire operating range of the machine to determine the variation of the third harmonic voltage as shown below:
Third harmonic neutral voltage
Megawatts
830733A1.CDR
Figure 103: THIRD HARMONIC NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE FIELD MEASUREMENTS The element is accurate for levels as low as 0.25 volts, secondary. In this case, the pickup setting will be: V PICKUP = 0.25 ---------------- = 0.001 pu 240 V
(EQ 10.31)
The third harmonic will dip below the pickup setting between 85 and 105 megawatts. The element should be blocked over this range. A margin of 5% should be added to the relay settings. The values for maximum and minimum power will be: 105 10 - = 0.441 pu Max Power = 1.05 -------------------------------------------------------3 8000 157.5 66 85 10 - = 0.323 pu Min Power = 0.95 -------------------------------------------------------3 8000 157.5 66
6 6
(EQ 10.32)
(EQ 10.33)
Voltage supervision will be given a setting of 0.8 pu in order to prevent maloperation during a sustained undervoltage condition. A time delay of 5 seconds will be applied. If required, the element may be blocked when the machine is offline. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 STATOR GROUND 3RD HARM NTRL UNDERVOLTAGE menu:
10
GE Multilin
10-9
10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10.1.12 OVEREXCITATION
This protection should be set to coordinate with the manufacturers excitation capability curves. For example system, the combined generator/GSU limit curve is shown below:
Time (seconds)
Volts per hertz (p.u.)

Combined generator/GSU limit curve Volts per hertz 1 Volts per hertz 2
830734A1.CDR
Figure 104: GENERATOR/GSU LIMIT CURVE Program the volts per hertz 1 element with an inverse characteristic (curve A), a pickup of 1.05, and a TDM of 40. Program the volts per hertz 2 element with a definite time characteristic, a pickup of 1.23, and a time delay of 2 seconds. Both elements will issue a trip. The volts per hertz 1 pickup will be used to generate an alarm. Either source may be assigned in this example. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS VOLTS/HZ 1(2) menus:
10
10.1 SETTING EXAMPLE 10.1.13 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The following inputs and outputs will be used in this example. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS CONTACT INPUT H7a(H7c) menus:
Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(4) menus:
Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUT H1(H4) menus:
10
GE Multilin
10-11
10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10.1.14 FREQUENCY
The pickup and delay settings are dependent on operating practices and system characteristics. In this example, two overfrequency and two underfrequency elements will be used. The elements will be blocked when offline. Underfrequency will initiate a trip. Overfrequency will alarm only. Either source may be assigned.
QUENCY UNDERFREQUENCY 1(2) and
Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS UNDERFREthe SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS OVERFREQUENCY OVERFREQUENCY 1(2) menus:
10.1.15 ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION In this example, the ACCDNT ENRG ARMING MODE is selected as UV and Offline. The ACCDNT ENRG OC PICKUP setting should be set at the minimum expected fault current. In this case, 1.0 pu (8000 A primary) is selected. In cases where it is possible to re-energize the machine through its auxiliary transformer, a lower setting may be required. The undervoltage pickup setting must be set above the maximum expected fault voltage. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION menu:
10
10.1 SETTING EXAMPLE 10.1.16 FLEXLOGIC
The following logic as given as an example only. The logic for each specific application will be dependant on system design, protection philosophies, and operating practices.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 33 34 35 36 37
OR(11) = GEN BKR TRIP (VO1)
5 sec. 0 sec.
SEQ TRIP ON (VO9) STATOR DIFF OP PHASE TOC1 OP GEN UNBAL STG1 OP LOSS EXCIT OP DIR POWER 1 STG 1 OP OVEREXCIT ON (VO7) UNDERFREQ ON (VO5) AUX OV1 OP STATOR GND STG1 OP ACCDNT ENRG OP OR(11) = GEN BKR TRIP (VO1)
VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 PKP TIMER 1 GEN UNBAL STG2 OP OVERFREQ ON (VO6) STATOR GND STG2 OP OR(4) = ALARM (VO4)
OR(4)
= ALARM (VO4)
38 39
40 41 42 43
UNDERFREQ 1 OP OR(2) UNDERFREQ 2 OP OR(2) = UNDERFREQ (VO5) = UNDERFREQ (VO5)
44 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SEQ TRIP ON (VO9) STATOR DIFF OP LOSS EXCIT OP DIR POWER STG1 OP OVEREXCIT ON (VO7) OR(7) = FLD BKR TRIP (VO2)
OVERFREQ 1 OP OR(2) = OVERFREQ (VO6) OVERFREQ 2 OP OR(2) = OVERFREQ (VO6)
45 46 47
48
AUX OV1 OP
VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 OP OR(2) = OVEREXCIT (VO7) VOLTS PER HERTZ 2 OP OR(2) = OVEREXCIT (VO7)
49
STATOR GND STG1 OP
50
OR(7)
51
= FLD BKR TRIP (VO2)
52 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
STATOR DIFF OP LOSS EXCIT OP DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP ONLINE ON (VO8) AND(2) OVEREXCIT ON (VO7) OR(6) = TURBINE TRIP (VO3)
OFFLINE OFF(H7C) = ONLINE (VO8)
= ONLINE (VO8)
53
54 55 56
DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP AND(2) INLET VALVE OFF(H8A) AND(2) = SEQ TRIP (VO9) = SEQ TRIP (VO9)
AND(2)
57
AUX OV1 OP STATOR GND STG1 OP
58
OR(6) = TURBINE TRIP (VO3)
END
830732A1.CDR
Figure 105: APPLICATION EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC
10
GE Multilin
10-13
10.2 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS 10.2PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS a) APPLICATION DESCRIPTION
10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 10.2.1 OVERVIEW
Phase distance elements of the G60 could be set to respond to faults beyond any three-phase power transformer. The relay guarantees accurate reach and targeting for any phase fault. Moreover, the current and voltage transformers may be located independently on different sides of the transformer. The following setting rules apply to this feature: 1. 2. 3. A given distance zone is terminated by location of the VTs, not the CTs. Consequently, the positive-sequence impedance of a transformer must be included in the reach setting only if the transformer is located between the potential source and the intended reach point. The current signals require compensation if the transformer is located between the CTs and the intended reach point. If this is the case the CT connection setting shall be set to transformer connection and vector group as seen from the CTs toward the reach point. Otherwise, the CT connection setting shall be set to "None". The voltage signals require compensation if the transformer is located between the VTs and the intended reach point. If this is the case the VT connection setting shall be set to transformer connection and vector group as seen from the VTs toward the reach point. Otherwise, the VT connection setting shall be set to "None". The reach setting is entered in secondary ohms and as such must take into account location and ratios of VTs and CTs as well as voltage ratio of the involved power transformer.
4.
5.
The following equations explain the setting rules. Consider two applications as shown in the figure below:
(a) ZH ZT ZX
Z3
Z1
(b) ZH ZT ZX
Z3
Z1
830718A1.CDR
Figure 106: PHASE DISTANCE PROTECTION LOOKING THROUGH A POWER TRANSFORMER where: ZX = intended reach impedance for Zone 1 (primary ohms) ZH = intended reach impedance for Zone 3 (primary ohms) ZT = positive-sequence impedance of the transformer VX, VH = transformer rated voltages nCT = transformation ratio of the CTs nVT = transformation ratio of the VTs Z1: Z1 reach setting (secondary ohms) Z3: Zone 3 reach setting (secondary ohms)
10
10-14
GE Multilin
10 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS b) ZONE 1 SETTING IN APPLICATION (A)
As the transformer is located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 1, the reach impedance must include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. In addition, the primary impedance must be re-calculated for the voltage level of the VTs and CTs, and eventually, re-calculated to secondary quantities: V H 2 n CT - --------Z 1 = ( Z T ( at X ) + Z x ) ----- V X n VT c) ZONE 3 SETTING IN APPLICATION (A) As the transformer is not located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 3, the reach impedance must not include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. Because both VTs and CTs are located on the same side as the intended reach point, no correction for the transformer ratio is required. The primary impedance must be only re-calculated to secondary quantities: n CT Z 3 = Z H --------n VT d) ZONE 1 SETTING IN APPLICATION (B) As the transformer is not located between the potential source and the reach point for Z1, the reach impedance must not include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. The CTs are located on the other side of the transformer, thus transformer ratio must be included: V H n CT -------------Z1 = ZX V X n VT e) ZONE 3 SETTING IN APPLICATION (B) As the transformer is located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 3, the reach impedance must include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. The VTs are located on the other side of the transformer, thus transformer ratio must be included: V X n CT -------------Z 3 = ( Z T ( at H ) + Z H ) V H n VT
(EQ 10.37) (EQ 10.36) (EQ 10.35) (EQ 10.34)
10.2.2 EXAMPLE Given the following for the system shown in the previous section: ZX = 30 85 (intended reach of Zone 1) ZH = 0.06 88 (intended reach of Zone 3) nCT = 8000:5 = 1600 (located at H) nVT = 315000:120 = 2625 (located at X) Transformer: 13.8/315 kV, 150 MVA, 10%, delta/wye, 315 kV side lagging 30 Transformer impedance: 10- ( 13.8 ) -----------------= 0.127 90 Z T ( at H ) = --------150 100 The Zone 1 settings are: 13.8 - 1600 ------------ = 0.8011 85 Z 1 = 30 ---------315 2625
PHS DIST Z1 REACH: "0.80" PHS DIST Z1 RCA: "85" PHS DIST Z1 XMFR VOL CONNECTION: "None" PHS DIST Z1 XMFR CUR CONNECTION: "Dy1"
2
(EQ 10.38)
(EQ 10.39)
10
GE Multilin
10-15
10.2 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS The Zone 3 settings are:
315- 1600 - = 2.601 89.4 Z 3 = ( 0.127 90 + 0.006 88 ) --------- -----------13.8 2625

PHS DIST Z3 REACH: "2.60" PHS DIST Z3 RCA: "89" PHS DIST Z3 XMFR VOL CONNECTION: "Yd11" PHS DIST Z3 XMFR CUR CONNECTION: "None"
(EQ 10.40)
10
11 COMMISSIONING 11 COMMISSIONING 11.1TESTING
11.1 TESTING 11.1.1 TESTING UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY ELEMENTS
Underfreqency and overfrequency protection requires techniques with subtle testing implications. Whereas most protection is designed to detect changes from normal to fault conditions that occur virtually instantaneously, power system inertia requires frequency protection to pickup while the frequency is changing slowly. Frequency measurement is inherently sensitive to noise, making high precision in combination with high speed challenging for both relays and test equipment. Injection to a particular G60 frequency element must be to its configured source and to the channels the source uses for frequency measurement. For frequency measurement, a source will use the first quantity configured in the following order: 1. 2. 3. 4. Phase voltages. Auxiliary voltage. Phase currents. Ground current.
11
For example, if only auxiliary voltage and phase currents are configured, the source will use the auxiliary voltage, not the phase voltages or any of the currents. When phase voltages or phase currents are used, the source applies a filter that rejects the zero-sequence component. As such, the same signal must not be injected to all three phases, or the injected signal will be completely filtered out. For an underfrequency element using phase quantities, the phase A signal must be above the MIN VOLT/AMP setting value. Therefore, either inject into phase A only, or inject a balanced three-phase signal.
Frequency
Injection frequency Source frequency Tracking frequency
Pickup frequency Relay conditioning time
Source frequency calculation delay
Time
Underfrequency element detection time Underfrequency element pickup set pickup delay Underfrequency element operate
831771A1.CDR
Figure 111: TYPICAL UNDERFREQUENCY ELEMENT TEST TIMING The static accuracy of the frequency threshold may be determined by slowly adjusting the frequency of the injected signal about the set pickup. If the G60 frequency metering feature is used to determine the injected frequency, the metering accuracy should be verified by checking it against a known standard (for example, the power system). To accurately measure the time delay of a frequency element, a test emulating realistic power system dynamics is required. The injected frequency should smoothly ramp through the set threshold, with the ramp starting frequency sufficiently outside the threshold so the relay becomes conditioned to the trend before operation. For typical interconnected power systems, the recommended testing ramp rate is 0.20 Hz/s.
GE Multilin
11-1
11.1 TESTING
11 COMMISSIONING
11
The desired delay time is the interval from the point the frequency crosses the set threshold to the point the element operates. Some test sets can measure only the time from the ramp start to element operation, necessitating the subtraction of the pre-threshold ramp time from the reading. For example, with a ramp rate of 0.20 Hz/s, start the ramp 0.20 Hz before the threshold and subtract 1 second from test set time reading of ramp start to relay operation. Note that the G60 event records only show the pickup delay component, a definite time timer. This is exclusive of the time taken by the frequency responding component to pickup. The G60 oscillography can be used to measure the time between the calculated source frequency crossing the threshold and element operation; however, this method omits the delay in the calculated source frequency. The security features of the source frequency measurement algorithm result in the calculated frequency being delayed by 2 to 4 cycles (or longer with noise on the input). In addition, oscillography resolution is 0.004 Hz, which at 0.20 Hz/s corresponds to a delay of 20 ms. The tracking frequency should not be used in timing measurements, as its algorithm involves phase locking, which purposely sets its frequency high or low to allow the G60 sample clock to catch-up or wait as necessary to reach synchronism with the power system.
11-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS A.1.1 FLEXANALOG ITEMS
AppendicesAPPENDIX A FlexAnalog and FlexInteger ParametersA.1Parameter Lists
A
Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 1 of 23)
ADDRESS 5728 5730 5732 5734 5736 5738 5744 5746 5748 5760 5762 5792 5794 5796 5798 5800 5802 5804 5806 5808 5810 5812 5814 5856 5860 5864 5868 6144 6146 6148 6150 6152 6154 6155 6157 6158 6160 6161 6163 6164 6166 6168 6169 6171 6172 FLEXANALOG NAME Stator Diff Iad Stator Rest Iar Stator Diff Ibd Stator Rest Ibr Stator Diff Icd Stator Rest Icr Stator Gnd Vn 3rd Stator Gnd Vn+V0 3rd Stator Gnd V0 3rd Sns Dir Power 1 Sns Dir Power 2 RGF 1 Igd Mag RGF 1 Igr Mag RGF 2 Igd Mag RGF 2 Igr Mag RGF 3 Igd Mag RGF 3 Igr Mag RGF 4 Igd Mag RGF 4 Igr Mag RGF 5 Igd Mag RGF 5 Igr Mag RGF 6 Igd Mag RGF 6 Igr Mag Freq Rate 1 Value Freq Rate 2 Value Freq Rate 3 Value Freq Rate 4 Value SRC 1 Ia RMS SRC 1 Ib RMS SRC 1 Ic RMS SRC 1 In RMS SRC 1 Ia Mag SRC 1 Ia Angle SRC 1 Ib Mag SRC 1 Ib Angle SRC 1 Ic Mag SRC 1 Ic Angle SRC 1 In Mag SRC 1 In Angle SRC 1 Ig RMS SRC 1 Ig Mag SRC 1 Ig Angle SRC 1 I_0 Mag SRC 1 I_0 Angle SRC 1 I_1 Mag UNITS Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Volts Volts Volts Watts Watts Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Hz/s Hz/s Hz/s Hz/s Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees DESCRIPTION Stator differential phase A current (Iad) Stator restraint phase A current (Iar) Stator differential phase B current (Ibd) Stator restraint phase B current (Ibr) Stator differential phase C current (Icd) Stator restraint phase C current (Icr) Stator ground Vn third harmonic voltage Stator ground Vn+V0 third harmonic voltage Stator ground V0 third harmonic voltage Sensitive directional power 1 actual value Sensitive directional power 2 actual value Restricted ground fault 1 differential ground current magnitude Restricted ground fault 1 restricted ground current magnitude Restricted ground fault 2 differential ground current magnitude Restricted ground fault 2 restricted ground current magnitude Restricted ground fault 3 differential ground current magnitude Restricted ground fault 3 restricted ground current magnitude Restricted ground fault 4 differential ground current magnitude Restricted ground fault 4 restricted ground current magnitude Restricted ground fault 5 differential ground current magnitude Restricted ground fault 5 restricted ground current magnitude Restricted ground fault 6 differential ground current magnitude Restricted ground fault 6 restricted ground current magnitude Frequency rate of change 1 actual value Frequency rate of change 2 actual value Frequency rate of change 3 actual value Frequency rate of change 4 actual value Source 1 phase A current RMS Source 1 phase B current RMS Source 1 phase C current RMS Source 1 neutral current RMS Source 1 phase A current magnitude Source 1 phase A current angle Source 1 phase B current magnitude Source 1 phase B current angle Source 1 phase C current magnitude Source 1 phase C current angle Source 1 neutral current magnitude Source 1 neutral current angle Source 1 ground current RMS Source 1 ground current magnitude Source 1 ground current angle Source 1 zero-sequence current magnitude Source 1 zero-sequence current angle Source 1 positive-sequence current magnitude
GE Multilin
A-1
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 2 of 23)
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS 6174 6175 6177 6178 6180 6208 6210 6212 6214 6216 6218 6219 6221 6222 6224 6225 6227 6228 6230 6232 6233 6235 6236 6238 6239 6241 6242 6244 6272 6274 6276 6278 6280 6282 6283 6285 6286 6288 6289 6291 6292 6294 6296 6297 6299 6300 6302
FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 1 I_1 Angle SRC 1 I_2 Mag SRC 1 I_2 Angle SRC 1 Igd Mag SRC 1 Igd Angle SRC 2 Ia RMS SRC 2 Ib RMS SRC 2 Ic RMS SRC 2 In RMS SRC 2 Ia Mag SRC 2 Ia Angle SRC 2 Ib Mag SRC 2 Ib Angle SRC 2 Ic Mag SRC 2 Ic Angle SRC 2 In Mag SRC 2 In Angle SRC 2 Ig RMS SRC 2 Ig Mag SRC 2 Ig Angle SRC 2 I_0 Mag SRC 2 I_0 Angle SRC 2 I_1 Mag SRC 2 I_1 Angle SRC 2 I_2 Mag SRC 2 I_2 Angle SRC 2 Igd Mag SRC 2 Igd Angle SRC 3 Ia RMS SRC 3 Ib RMS SRC 3 Ic RMS SRC 3 In RMS SRC 3 Ia Mag SRC 3 Ia Angle SRC 3 Ib Mag SRC 3 Ib Angle SRC 3 Ic Mag SRC 3 Ic Angle SRC 3 In Mag SRC 3 In Angle SRC 3 Ig RMS SRC 3 Ig Mag SRC 3 Ig Angle SRC 3 I_0 Mag SRC 3 I_0 Angle SRC 3 I_1 Mag SRC 3 I_1 Angle
UNITS Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps
DESCRIPTION Source 1 positive-sequence current angle Source 1 negative-sequence current magnitude Source 1 negative-sequence current angle Source 1 differential ground current magnitude Source 1 differential ground current angle Source 2 phase A current RMS Source 2 phase B current RMS Source 2 phase C current RMS Source 2 neutral current RMS Source 2 phase A current magnitude Source 2 phase A current angle Source 2 phase B current magnitude Source 2 phase B current angle Source 2 phase C current magnitude Source 2 phase C current angle Source 2 neutral current magnitude Source 2 neutral current angle Source 2 ground current RMS Source 2 ground current magnitude Source 2 ground current angle Source 2 zero-sequence current magnitude Source 2 zero-sequence current angle Source 2 positive-sequence current magnitude Source 2 positive-sequence current angle Source 2 negative-sequence current magnitude Source 2 negative-sequence current angle Source 2 differential ground current magnitude Source 2 differential ground current angle Source 3 phase A current RMS Source 3 phase B current RMS Source 3 phase C current RMS Source 3 neutral current RMS Source 3 phase A current magnitude Source 3 phase A current angle Source 3 phase B current magnitude Source 3 phase B current angle Source 3 phase C current magnitude Source 3 phase C current angle Source 3 neutral current magnitude Source 3 neutral current angle Source 3 ground current RMS Source 3 ground current magnitude Source 3 ground current angle Source 3 zero-sequence current magnitude Source 3 zero-sequence current angle Source 3 positive-sequence current magnitude Source 3 positive-sequence current angle
A-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 3 of 23)

ADDRESS 6303 6305 6306 6308 6336 6338 6340 6342 6344 6346 6347 6349 6350 6352 6353 6355 6356 6358 6360 6361 6363 6364 6366 6367 6369 6370 6372 6656 6658 6660 6662 6664 6665 6667 6668 6670 6671 6673 6675 6677 6679 6680 6682 6683 6685 6686 6688 FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 3 I_2 Mag SRC 3 I_2 Angle SRC 3 Igd Mag SRC 3 Igd Angle SRC 4 Ia RMS SRC 4 Ib RMS SRC 4 Ic RMS SRC 4 In RMS SRC 4 Ia Mag SRC 4 Ia Angle SRC 4 Ib Mag SRC 4 Ib Angle SRC 4 Ic Mag SRC 4 Ic Angle SRC 4 In Mag SRC 4 In Angle SRC 4 Ig RMS SRC 4 Ig Mag SRC 4 Ig Angle SRC 4 I_0 Mag SRC 4 I_0 Angle SRC 4 I_1 Mag SRC 4 I_1 Angle SRC 4 I_2 Mag SRC 4 I_2 Angle SRC 4 Igd Mag SRC 4 Igd Angle SRC 1 Vag RMS SRC 1 Vbg RMS SRC 1 Vcg RMS SRC 1 Vag Mag SRC 1 Vag Angle SRC 1 Vbg Mag SRC 1 Vbg Angle SRC 1 Vcg Mag SRC 1 Vcg Angle SRC 1 Vab RMS SRC 1 Vbc RMS SRC 1 Vca RMS SRC 1 Vab Mag SRC 1 Vab Angle SRC 1 Vbc Mag SRC 1 Vbc Angle SRC 1 Vca Mag SRC 1 Vca Angle SRC 1 Vx RMS SRC 1 Vx Mag UNITS Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Volts Volts Volts Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Volts Volts Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Volts DESCRIPTION
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
Source 3 negative-sequence current magnitude Source 3 negative-sequence current angle Source 3 differential ground current magnitude Source 3 differential ground current angle Source 4 phase A current RMS Source 4 phase B current RMS Source 4 phase C current RMS Source 4 neutral current RMS Source 4 phase A current magnitude Source 4 phase A current angle Source 4 phase B current magnitude Source 4 phase B current angle Source 4 phase C current magnitude Source 4 phase C current angle Source 4 neutral current magnitude Source 4 neutral current angle Source 4 ground current RMS Source 4 ground current magnitude Source 4 ground current angle Source 4 zero-sequence current magnitude Source 4 zero-sequence current angle Source 4 positive-sequence current magnitude Source 4 positive-sequence current angle Source 4 negative-sequence current magnitude Source 4 negative-sequence current angle Source 4 differential ground current magnitude Source 4 differential ground current angle Source 1 phase AG voltage RMS Source 1 phase BG voltage RMS Source 1 phase CG voltage RMS Source 1 phase AG voltage magnitude Source 1 phase AG voltage angle Source 1 phase BG voltage magnitude Source 1 phase BG voltage angle Source 1 phase CG voltage magnitude Source 1 phase CG voltage angle Source 1 phase AB voltage RMS Source 1 phase BC voltage RMS Source 1 phase CA voltage RMS Source 1 phase AB voltage magnitude Source 1 phase AB voltage angle Source 1 phase BC voltage magnitude Source 1 phase BC voltage angle Source 1 phase CA voltage magnitude Source 1 phase CA voltage angle Source 1 auxiliary voltage RMS Source 1 auxiliary voltage magnitude
GE Multilin
A-3
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS 6690 6691 6693 6694 6696 6697 6699 6720 6722 6724 6726 6728 6729 6731 6732 6734 6735 6737 6739 6741 6743 6744 6746 6747 6749 6750 6752 6754 6755 6757 6758 6760 6761 6763 6784 6786 6788 6790 6792 6793 6795 6796 6798 6799 6801 6803 6805
FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 1 Vx Angle SRC 1 V_0 Mag SRC 1 V_0 Angle SRC 1 V_1 Mag SRC 1 V_1 Angle SRC 1 V_2 Mag SRC 1 V_2 Angle SRC 2 Vag RMS SRC 2 Vbg RMS SRC 2 Vcg RMS SRC 2 Vag Mag SRC 2 Vag Angle SRC 2 Vbg Mag SRC 2 Vbg Angle SRC 2 Vcg Mag SRC 2 Vcg Angle SRC 2 Vab RMS SRC 2 Vbc RMS SRC 2 Vca RMS SRC 2 Vab Mag SRC 2 Vab Angle SRC 2 Vbc Mag SRC 2 Vbc Angle SRC 2 Vca Mag SRC 2 Vca Angle SRC 2 Vx RMS SRC 2 Vx Mag SRC 2 Vx Angle SRC 2 V_0 Mag SRC 2 V_0 Angle SRC 2 V_1 Mag SRC 2 V_1 Angle SRC 2 V_2 Mag SRC 2 V_2 Angle SRC 3 Vag RMS SRC 3 Vbg RMS SRC 3 Vcg RMS SRC 3 Vag Mag SRC 3 Vag Angle SRC 3 Vbg Mag SRC 3 Vbg Angle SRC 3 Vcg Mag SRC 3 Vcg Angle SRC 3 Vab RMS SRC 3 Vbc RMS SRC 3 Vca RMS SRC 3 Vab Mag
UNITS Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Volts Volts Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Volts Volts Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Volts Volts Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Volts Volts Volts
DESCRIPTION Source 1 auxiliary voltage angle Source 1 zero-sequence voltage magnitude Source 1 zero-sequence voltage angle Source 1 positive-sequence voltage magnitude Source 1 positive-sequence voltage angle Source 1 negative-sequence voltage magnitude Source 1 negative-sequence voltage angle Source 2 phase AG voltage RMS Source 2 phase BG voltage RMS Source 2 phase CG voltage RMS Source 2 phase AG voltage magnitude Source 2 phase AG voltage angle Source 2 phase BG voltage magnitude Source 2 phase BG voltage angle Source 2 phase CG voltage magnitude Source 2 phase CG voltage angle Source 2 phase AB voltage RMS Source 2 phase BC voltage RMS Source 2 phase CA voltage RMS Source 2 phase AB voltage magnitude Source 2 phase AB voltage angle Source 2 phase BC voltage magnitude Source 2 phase BC voltage angle Source 2 phase CA voltage magnitude Source 2 phase CA voltage angle Source 2 auxiliary voltage RMS Source 2 auxiliary voltage magnitude Source 2 auxiliary voltage angle Source 2 zero-sequence voltage magnitude Source 2 zero-sequence voltage angle Source 2 positive-sequence voltage magnitude Source 2 positive-sequence voltage angle Source 2 negative-sequence voltage magnitude Source 2 negative-sequence voltage angle Source 3 phase AG voltage RMS Source 3 phase BG voltage RMS Source 3 phase CG voltage RMS Source 3 phase AG voltage magnitude Source 3 phase AG voltage angle Source 3 phase BG voltage magnitude Source 3 phase BG voltage angle Source 3 phase CG voltage magnitude Source 3 phase CG voltage angle Source 3 phase AB voltage RMS Source 3 phase BC voltage RMS Source 3 phase CA voltage RMS Source 3 phase AB voltage magnitude
A-4
GE Multilin

ADDRESS 6807 6808 6810 6811 6813 6814 6816 6818 6819 6821 6822 6824 6825 6827 6848 6850 6852 6854 6856 6857 6859 6860 6862 6863 6865 6867 6869 6871 6872 6874 6875 6877 6878 6880 6882 6883 6885 6886 6888 6889 6891 7168 7170 7172 7174 7176 7178 FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 3 Vab Angle SRC 3 Vbc Mag SRC 3 Vbc Angle SRC 3 Vca Mag SRC 3 Vca Angle SRC 3 Vx RMS SRC 3 Vx Mag SRC 3 Vx Angle SRC 3 V_0 Mag SRC 3 V_0 Angle SRC 3 V_1 Mag SRC 3 V_1 Angle SRC 3 V_2 Mag SRC 3 V_2 Angle SRC 4 Vag RMS SRC 4 Vbg RMS SRC 4 Vcg RMS SRC 4 Vag Mag SRC 4 Vag Angle SRC 4 Vbg Mag SRC 4 Vbg Angle SRC 4 Vcg Mag SRC 4 Vcg Angle SRC 4 Vab RMS SRC 4 Vbc RMS SRC 4 Vca RMS SRC 4 Vab Mag SRC 4 Vab Angle SRC 4 Vbc Mag SRC 4 Vbc Angle SRC 4 Vca Mag SRC 4 Vca Angle SRC 4 Vx RMS SRC 4 Vx Mag SRC 4 Vx Angle SRC 4 V_0 Mag SRC 4 V_0 Angle SRC 4 V_1 Mag SRC 4 V_1 Angle SRC 4 V_2 Mag SRC 4 V_2 Angle SRC 1 P SRC 1 Pa SRC 1 Pb SRC 1 Pc SRC 1 Q SRC 1 Qa UNITS Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Volts Volts Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Volts Volts Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Watts Watts Watts Watts Vars Vars DESCRIPTION Source 3 phase AB voltage angle Source 3 phase BC voltage magnitude Source 3 phase BC voltage angle Source 3 phase CA voltage magnitude Source 3 phase CA voltage angle Source 3 auxiliary voltage RMS Source 3 auxiliary voltage magnitude Source 3 auxiliary voltage angle Source 3 zero-sequence voltage magnitude Source 3 zero-sequence voltage angle
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
Source 3 positive-sequence voltage magnitude Source 3 positive-sequence voltage angle Source 3 negative-sequence voltage magnitude Source 3 negative-sequence voltage angle Source 4 phase AG voltage RMS Source 4 phase BG voltage RMS Source 4 phase CG voltage RMS Source 4 phase AG voltage magnitude Source 4 phase AG voltage angle Source 4 phase BG voltage magnitude Source 4 phase BG voltage angle Source 4 phase CG voltage magnitude Source 4 phase CG voltage angle Source 4 phase AB voltage RMS Source 4 phase BC voltage RMS Source 4 phase CA voltage RMS Source 4 phase AB voltage magnitude Source 4 phase AB voltage angle Source 4 phase BC voltage magnitude Source 4 phase BC voltage angle Source 4 phase CA voltage magnitude Source 4 phase CA voltage angle Source 4 auxiliary voltage RMS Source 4 auxiliary voltage magnitude Source 4 auxiliary voltage angle Source 4 zero-sequence voltage magnitude Source 4 zero-sequence voltage angle Source 4 positive-sequence voltage magnitude Source 4 positive-sequence voltage angle Source 4 negative-sequence voltage magnitude Source 4 negative-sequence voltage angle Source 1 three-phase real power Source 1 phase A real power Source 1 phase B real power Source 1 phase C real power Source 1 three-phase reactive power Source 1 phase A reactive power
GE Multilin
A-5
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS 7180 7182 7184 7186 7188 7190 7192 7193 7194 7195 7200 7202 7204 7206 7208 7210 7212 7214 7216 7218 7220 7222 7224 7225 7226 7227 7232 7234 7236 7238 7240 7242 7244 7246 7248 7250 7252 7254 7256 7257 7258 7259 7264 7266 7268 7270 7272
FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 1 Qb SRC 1 Qc SRC 1 S SRC 1 Sa SRC 1 Sb SRC 1 Sc SRC 1 PF SRC 1 Phase A PF SRC 1 Phase B PF SRC 1 Phase C PF SRC 2 P SRC 2 Pa SRC 2 Pb SRC 2 Pc SRC 2 Q SRC 2 Qa SRC 2 Qb SRC 2 Qc SRC 2 S SRC 2 Sa SRC 2 Sb SRC 2 Sc SRC 2 PF SRC 2 Phase A PF SRC 2 Phase B PF SRC 2 Phase C PF SRC 3 P SRC 3 Pa SRC 3 Pb SRC 3 Pc SRC 3 Q SRC 3 Qa SRC 3 Qb SRC 3 Qc SRC 3 S SRC 3 Sa SRC 3 Sb SRC 3 Sc SRC 3 PF SRC 3 Phase A PF SRC 3 Phase B PF SRC 3 Phase C PF SRC 4 P SRC 4 Pa SRC 4 Pb SRC 4 Pc SRC 4 Q
UNITS Vars Vars VA VA VA VA --------Watts Watts Watts Watts Vars Vars Vars Vars VA VA VA VA --------Watts Watts Watts Watts Vars Vars Vars Vars VA VA VA VA --------Watts Watts Watts Watts Vars
DESCRIPTION Source 1 phase B reactive power Source 1 phase C reactive power Source 1 three-phase apparent power Source 1 phase A apparent power Source 1 phase B apparent power Source 1 phase C apparent power Source 1 three-phase power factor Source 1 phase A power factor Source 1 phase B power factor Source 1 phase C power factor Source 2 three-phase real power Source 2 phase A real power Source 2 phase B real power Source 2 phase C real power Source 2 three-phase reactive power Source 2 phase A reactive power Source 2 phase B reactive power Source 2 phase C reactive power Source 2 three-phase apparent power Source 2 phase A apparent power Source 2 phase B apparent power Source 2 phase C apparent power Source 2 three-phase power factor Source 2 phase A power factor Source 2 phase B power factor Source 2 phase C power factor Source 3 three-phase real power Source 3 phase A real power Source 3 phase B real power Source 3 phase C real power Source 3 three-phase reactive power Source 3 phase A reactive power Source 3 phase B reactive power Source 3 phase C reactive power Source 3 three-phase apparent power Source 3 phase A apparent power Source 3 phase B apparent power Source 3 phase C apparent power Source 3 three-phase power factor Source 3 phase A power factor Source 3 phase B power factor Source 3 phase C power factor Source 4 three-phase real power Source 4 phase A real power Source 4 phase B real power Source 4 phase C real power Source 4 three-phase reactive power
A-6
GE Multilin

ADDRESS 7274 7276 7278 7280 7282 7284 7286 7288 7289 7290 7291 7552 7553 7554 7555 8064 8065 8066 8067 8068 8069 8070 8071 8072 8073 8074 8075 8076 8077 8078 8079 8080 8081 8082 8083 8084 8085 8086 8087 8088 8089 8090 8091 8092 8093 8094 8095 FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 4 Qa SRC 4 Qb SRC 4 Qc SRC 4 S SRC 4 Sa SRC 4 Sb SRC 4 Sc SRC 4 PF SRC 4 Phase A PF SRC 4 Phase B PF SRC 4 Phase C PF SRC 1 Frequency SRC 2 Frequency SRC 3 Frequency SRC 4 Frequency SRC 1 Va THD SRC 1 Va Harm[0] SRC 1 Va Harm[1] SRC 1 Va Harm[2] SRC 1 Va Harm[3] SRC 1 Va Harm[4] SRC 1 Va Harm[5] SRC 1 Va Harm[6] SRC 1 Va Harm[7] SRC 1 Va Harm[8] SRC 1 Va Harm[9] SRC 1 Va Harm[10] SRC 1 Va Harm[11] SRC 1 Va Harm[12] SRC 1 Va Harm[13] SRC 1 Va Harm[14] SRC 1 Va Harm[15] SRC 1 Va Harm[16] SRC 1 Va Harm[17] SRC 1 Va Harm[18] SRC 1 Va Harm[19] SRC 1 Va Harm[20] SRC 1 Va Harm[21] SRC 1 Va Harm[22] SRC 1 Va Harm[23] SRC 1 Vb THD SRC 1 Vb Harm[0] SRC 1 Vb Harm[1] SRC 1 Vb Harm[2] SRC 1 Vb Harm[3] SRC 1 Vb Harm[4] SRC 1 Vb Harm[5] UNITS Vars Vars Vars VA VA VA VA --------Hz Hz Hz Hz --Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts --Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts DESCRIPTION Source 4 phase A reactive power Source 4 phase B reactive power Source 4 phase C reactive power Source 4 three-phase apparent power Source 4 phase A apparent power Source 4 phase B apparent power Source 4 phase C apparent power Source 4 three-phase power factor Source 4 phase A power factor Source 4 phase B power factor Source 4 phase C power factor Source 1 frequency Source 2 frequency Source 3 frequency Source 4 frequency
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
Source 1 phase A voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) Source 1 phase A voltage second harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage third harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage fourth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage fifth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage sixth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage seventh harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage eighth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage ninth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage tenth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage eleventh harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage twelfth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage thirteenth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage fourteenth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage fifteenth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage sixteenth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage seventeenth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage eighteenth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage nineteenth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage twentieth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage twenty-first harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage twenty-second harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage twenty-third harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage twenty-fourth harmonic Source 1 phase A voltage twenty-fifth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) Source 1 phase B voltage second harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage third harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage fourth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage fifth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage sixth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage seventh harmonic
GE Multilin
A-7
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS 8096 8097 8098 8099 8100 8101 8102 8103 8104 8105 8106 8107 8108 8109 8110 8111 8112 8113 8114 8115 8116 8117 8118 8119 8120 8121 8122 8123 8124 8125 8126 8127 8128 8129 8130 8131 8132 8133 8134 8135 8136 8137 8138 8139 8140 8141 8142
FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 1 Vb Harm[6] SRC 1 Vb Harm[7] SRC 1 Vb Harm[8] SRC 1 Vb Harm[9] SRC 1 Vb Harm[10] SRC 1 Vb Harm[11] SRC 1 Vb Harm[12] SRC 1 Vb Harm[13] SRC 1 Vb Harm[14] SRC 1 Vb Harm[15] SRC 1 Vb Harm[16] SRC 1 Vb Harm[17] SRC 1 Vb Harm[18] SRC 1 Vb Harm[19] SRC 1 Vb Harm[20] SRC 1 Vb Harm[21] SRC 1 Vb Harm[22] SRC 1 Vb Harm[23] SRC 1 Vc THD SRC 1 Vc Harm[0] SRC 1 Vc Harm[1] SRC 1 Vc Harm[2] SRC 1 Vc Harm[3] SRC 1 Vc Harm[4] SRC 1 Vc Harm[5] SRC 1 Vc Harm[6] SRC 1 Vc Harm[7] SRC 1 Vc Harm[8] SRC 1 Vc Harm[9] SRC 1 Vc Harm[10] SRC 1 Vc Harm[11] SRC 1 Vc Harm[12] SRC 1 Vc Harm[13] SRC 1 Vc Harm[14] SRC 1 Vc Harm[15] SRC 1 Vc Harm[16] SRC 1 Vc Harm[17] SRC 1 Vc Harm[18] SRC 1 Vc Harm[19] SRC 1 Vc Harm[20] SRC 1 Vc Harm[21] SRC 1 Vc Harm[22] SRC 1 Vc Harm[23] SRC 2 Va THD SRC 2 Va Harm[0] SRC 2 Va Harm[1] SRC 2 Va Harm[2]
UNITS Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts --Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts --Volts Volts Volts
DESCRIPTION Source 1 phase B voltage eighth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage ninth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage tenth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage eleventh harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage twelfth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage thirteenth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage fourteenth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage fifteenth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage sixteenth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage seventeenth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage eighteenth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage nineteenth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage twentieth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage twenty-first harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage twenty-second harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage twenty-third harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage twenty-fourth harmonic Source 1 phase B voltage twenty-fifth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) Source 1 phase C voltage second harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage third harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage fourth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage fifth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage sixth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage seventh harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage eighth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage ninth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage tenth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage eleventh harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage twelfth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage thirteenth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage fourteenth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage fifteenth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage sixteenth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage seventeenth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage eighteenth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage nineteenth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage twentieth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage twenty-first harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage twenty-second harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage twenty-third harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage twenty-fourth harmonic Source 1 phase C voltage twenty-fifth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) Source 2 phase A voltage second harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage third harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage fourth harmonic
A-8
GE Multilin

ADDRESS 8143 8144 8145 8146 8147 8148 8149 8150 8151 8152 8153 8154 8155 8156 8157 8158 8159 8160 8161 8162 8163 8164 8165 8166 8167 8168 8169 8170 8171 8172 8173 8174 8175 8176 8177 8178 8179 8180 8181 8182 8183 8184 8185 8186 8187 8188 8189 FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 2 Va Harm[3] SRC 2 Va Harm[4] SRC 2 Va Harm[5] SRC 2 Va Harm[6] SRC 2 Va Harm[7] SRC 2 Va Harm[8] SRC 2 Va Harm[9] SRC 2 Va Harm[10] SRC 2 Va Harm[11] SRC 2 Va Harm[12] SRC 2 Va Harm[13] SRC 2 Va Harm[14] SRC 2 Va Harm[15] SRC 2 Va Harm[16] SRC 2 Va Harm[17] SRC 2 Va Harm[18] SRC 2 Va Harm[19] SRC 2 Va Harm[20] SRC 2 Va Harm[21] SRC 2 Va Harm[22] SRC 2 Va Harm[23] SRC 2 Vb THD SRC 2 Vb Harm[0] SRC 2 Vb Harm[1] SRC 2 Vb Harm[2] SRC 2 Vb Harm[3] SRC 2 Vb Harm[4] SRC 2 Vb Harm[5] SRC 2 Vb Harm[6] SRC 2 Vb Harm[7] SRC 2 Vb Harm[8] SRC 2 Vb Harm[9] SRC 2 Vb Harm[10] SRC 2 Vb Harm[11] SRC 2 Vb Harm[12] SRC 2 Vb Harm[13] SRC 2 Vb Harm[14] SRC 2 Vb Harm[15] SRC 2 Vb Harm[16] SRC 2 Vb Harm[17] SRC 2 Vb Harm[18] SRC 2 Vb Harm[19] SRC 2 Vb Harm[20] SRC 2 Vb Harm[21] SRC 2 Vb Harm[22] SRC 2 Vb Harm[23] SRC 2 Vc THD UNITS Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts --Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts --DESCRIPTION Source 2 phase A voltage fifth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage sixth harmonic
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
Source 2 phase A voltage seventh harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage eighth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage ninth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage tenth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage eleventh harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage twelfth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage thirteenth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage fourteenth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage fifteenth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage sixteenth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage seventeenth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage eighteenth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage nineteenth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage twentieth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage twenty-first harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage twenty-second harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage twenty-third harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage twenty-fourth harmonic Source 2 phase A voltage twenty-fifth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) Source 2 phase B voltage second harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage third harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage fourth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage fifth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage sixth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage seventh harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage eighth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage ninth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage tenth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage eleventh harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage twelfth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage thirteenth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage fourteenth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage fifteenth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage sixteenth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage seventeenth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage eighteenth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage nineteenth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage twentieth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage twenty-first harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage twenty-second harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage twenty-third harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage twenty-fourth harmonic Source 2 phase B voltage twenty-fifth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage total harmonic distortion (THD)
GE Multilin
A-9
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS 8190 8191 8192 8193 8194 8195 8196 8197 8198 8199 8200 8201 8202 8203 8204 8205 8206 8207 8208 8209 8210 8211 8212 8213 8214 8215 8216 8217 8218 8219 8220 8221 8222 8223 8224 8225 8226 8227 8228 8229 8230 8231 8232 8233 8234 8235 8236
FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 2 Vc Harm[0] SRC 2 Vc Harm[1] SRC 2 Vc Harm[2] SRC 2 Vc Harm[3] SRC 2 Vc Harm[4] SRC 2 Vc Harm[5] SRC 2 Vc Harm[6] SRC 2 Vc Harm[7] SRC 2 Vc Harm[8] SRC 2 Vc Harm[9] SRC 2 Vc Harm[10] SRC 2 Vc Harm[11] SRC 2 Vc Harm[12] SRC 2 Vc Harm[13] SRC 2 Vc Harm[14] SRC 2 Vc Harm[15] SRC 2 Vc Harm[16] SRC 2 Vc Harm[17] SRC 2 Vc Harm[18] SRC 2 Vc Harm[19] SRC 2 Vc Harm[20] SRC 2 Vc Harm[21] SRC 2 Vc Harm[22] SRC 2 Vc Harm[23] SRC 3 Va THD SRC 3 Va Harm[0] SRC 3 Va Harm[1] SRC 3 Va Harm[2] SRC 3 Va Harm[3] SRC 3 Va Harm[4] SRC 3 Va Harm[5] SRC 3 Va Harm[6] SRC 3 Va Harm[7] SRC 3 Va Harm[8] SRC 3 Va Harm[9] SRC 3 Va Harm[10] SRC 3 Va Harm[11] SRC 3 Va Harm[12] SRC 3 Va Harm[13] SRC 3 Va Harm[14] SRC 3 Va Harm[15] SRC 3 Va Harm[16] SRC 3 Va Harm[17] SRC 3 Va Harm[18] SRC 3 Va Harm[19] SRC 3 Va Harm[20] SRC 3 Va Harm[21]
UNITS Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts --Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts
DESCRIPTION Source 2 phase C voltage second harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage third harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage fourth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage fifth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage sixth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage seventh harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage eighth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage ninth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage tenth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage eleventh harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage twelfth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage thirteenth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage fourteenth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage fifteenth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage sixteenth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage seventeenth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage eighteenth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage nineteenth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage twentieth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage twenty-first harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage twenty-second harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage twenty-third harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage twenty-fourth harmonic Source 2 phase C voltage twenty-fifth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) Source 3 phase A voltage second harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage third harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage fourth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage fifth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage sixth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage seventh harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage eighth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage ninth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage tenth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage eleventh harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage twelfth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage thirteenth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage fourteenth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage fifteenth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage sixteenth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage seventeenth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage eighteenth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage nineteenth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage twentieth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage twenty-first harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage twenty-second harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage twenty-third harmonic
A-10
GE Multilin

ADDRESS 8237 8238 8239 8240 8241 8242 8243 8244 8245 8246 8247 8248 8249 8250 8251 8252 8253 8254 8255 8256 8257 8258 8259 8260 8261 8262 8263 8264 8265 8266 8267 8268 8269 8270 8271 8272 8273 8274 8275 8276 8277 8278 8279 8280 8281 8282 8283 FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 3 Va Harm[22] SRC 3 Va Harm[23] SRC 3 Vb THD SRC 3 Vb Harm[0] SRC 3 Vb Harm[1] SRC 3 Vb Harm[2] SRC 3 Vb Harm[3] SRC 3 Vb Harm[4] SRC 3 Vb Harm[5] SRC 3 Vb Harm[6] SRC 3 Vb Harm[7] SRC 3 Vb Harm[8] SRC 3 Vb Harm[9] SRC 3 Vb Harm[10] SRC 3 Vb Harm[11] SRC 3 Vb Harm[12] SRC 3 Vb Harm[13] SRC 3 Vb Harm[14] SRC 3 Vb Harm[15] SRC 3 Vb Harm[16] SRC 3 Vb Harm[17] SRC 3 Vb Harm[18] SRC 3 Vb Harm[19] SRC 3 Vb Harm[20] SRC 3 Vb Harm[21] SRC 3 Vb Harm[22] SRC 3 Vb Harm[23] SRC 3 Vc THD SRC 3 Vc Harm[0] SRC 3 Vc Harm[1] SRC 3 Vc Harm[2] SRC 3 Vc Harm[3] SRC 3 Vc Harm[4] SRC 3 Vc Harm[5] SRC 3 Vc Harm[6] SRC 3 Vc Harm[7] SRC 3 Vc Harm[8] SRC 3 Vc Harm[9] SRC 3 Vc Harm[10] SRC 3 Vc Harm[11] SRC 3 Vc Harm[12] SRC 3 Vc Harm[13] SRC 3 Vc Harm[14] SRC 3 Vc Harm[15] SRC 3 Vc Harm[16] SRC 3 Vc Harm[17] SRC 3 Vc Harm[18] UNITS Volts Volts --Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts --Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts DESCRIPTION
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
Source 3 phase A voltage twenty-fourth harmonic Source 3 phase A voltage twenty-fifth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) Source 3 phase B voltage second harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage third harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage fourth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage fifth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage sixth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage seventh harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage eighth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage ninth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage tenth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage eleventh harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage twelfth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage thirteenth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage fourteenth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage fifteenth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage sixteenth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage seventeenth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage eighteenth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage nineteenth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage twentieth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage twenty-first harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage twenty-second harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage twenty-third harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage twenty-fourth harmonic Source 3 phase B voltage twenty-fifth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) Source 3 phase C voltage second harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage third harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage fourth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage fifth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage sixth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage seventh harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage eighth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage ninth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage tenth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage eleventh harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage twelfth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage thirteenth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage fourteenth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage fifteenth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage sixteenth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage seventeenth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage eighteenth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage nineteenth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage twentieth harmonic
GE Multilin
A-11
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS 8284 8285 8286 8287 8288 8289 8290 8291 8292 8293 8294 8295 8296 8297 8298 8299 8300 8301 8302 8303 8304 8305 8306 8307 8308 8309 8310 8311 8312 8313 8314 8315 8316 8317 8318 8319 8320 8321 8322 8323 8324 8325 8326 8327 8328 8329 8330
FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 3 Vc Harm[19] SRC 3 Vc Harm[20] SRC 3 Vc Harm[21] SRC 3 Vc Harm[22] SRC 3 Vc Harm[23] SRC 4 Va THD SRC 4 Va Harm[0] SRC 4 Va Harm[1] SRC 4 Va Harm[2] SRC 4 Va Harm[3] SRC 4 Va Harm[4] SRC 4 Va Harm[5] SRC 4 Va Harm[6] SRC 4 Va Harm[7] SRC 4 Va Harm[8] SRC 4 Va Harm[9] SRC 4 Va Harm[10] SRC 4 Va Harm[11] SRC 4 Va Harm[12] SRC 4 Va Harm[13] SRC 4 Va Harm[14] SRC 4 Va Harm[15] SRC 4 Va Harm[16] SRC 4 Va Harm[17] SRC 4 Va Harm[18] SRC 4 Va Harm[19] SRC 4 Va Harm[20] SRC 4 Va Harm[21] SRC 4 Va Harm[22] SRC 4 Va Harm[23] SRC 4 Vb THD SRC 4 Vb Harm[0] SRC 4 Vb Harm[1] SRC 4 Vb Harm[2] SRC 4 Vb Harm[3] SRC 4 Vb Harm[4] SRC 4 Vb Harm[5] SRC 4 Vb Harm[6] SRC 4 Vb Harm[7] SRC 4 Vb Harm[8] SRC 4 Vb Harm[9] SRC 4 Vb Harm[10] SRC 4 Vb Harm[11] SRC 4 Vb Harm[12] SRC 4 Vb Harm[13] SRC 4 Vb Harm[14] SRC 4 Vb Harm[15]
UNITS Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts --Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts --Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts
DESCRIPTION Source 3 phase C voltage twenty-first harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage twenty-second harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage twenty-third harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage twenty-fourth harmonic Source 3 phase C voltage twenty-fifth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) Source 4 phase A voltage second harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage third harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage fourth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage fifth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage sixth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage seventh harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage eighth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage ninth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage tenth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage eleventh harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage twelfth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage thirteenth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage fourteenth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage fifteenth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage sixteenth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage seventeenth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage eighteenth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage nineteenth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage twentieth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage twenty-first harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage twenty-second harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage twenty-third harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage twenty-fourth harmonic Source 4 phase A voltage twenty-fifth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) Source 4 phase B voltage second harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage third harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage fourth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage fifth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage sixth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage seventh harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage eighth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage ninth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage tenth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage eleventh harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage twelfth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage thirteenth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage fourteenth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage fifteenth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage sixteenth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage seventeenth harmonic
A-12
GE Multilin

ADDRESS 8331 8332 8333 8334 8335 8336 8337 8338 8339 8340 8341 8342 8343 8344 8345 8346 8347 8348 8349 8350 8351 8352 8353 8354 8355 8356 8357 8358 8359 8360 8361 8362 8363 9216 9218 9219 9220 9222 9223 9536 9538 9539 9541 9542 9544 9545 9547 FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 4 Vb Harm[16] SRC 4 Vb Harm[17] SRC 4 Vb Harm[18] SRC 4 Vb Harm[19] SRC 4 Vb Harm[20] SRC 4 Vb Harm[21] SRC 4 Vb Harm[22] SRC 4 Vb Harm[23] SRC 4 Vc THD SRC 4 Vc Harm[0] SRC 4 Vc Harm[1] SRC 4 Vc Harm[2] SRC 4 Vc Harm[3] SRC 4 Vc Harm[4] SRC 4 Vc Harm[5] SRC 4 Vc Harm[6] SRC 4 Vc Harm[7] SRC 4 Vc Harm[8] SRC 4 Vc Harm[9] SRC 4 Vc Harm[10] SRC 4 Vc Harm[11] SRC 4 Vc Harm[12] SRC 4 Vc Harm[13] SRC 4 Vc Harm[14] SRC 4 Vc Harm[15] SRC 4 Vc Harm[16] SRC 4 Vc Harm[17] SRC 4 Vc Harm[18] SRC 4 Vc Harm[19] SRC 4 Vc Harm[20] SRC 4 Vc Harm[21] SRC 4 Vc Harm[22] SRC 4 Vc Harm[23] Synchchk 1 Delta V Synchchk 1 Delta F Synchchk 1 Delta Phs Synchchk 2 Delta V Synchchk 2 Delta F Synchchk 2 Delta Phs PMU 1 Va Mag PMU 1 Va Angle PMU 1 Vb Mag PMU 1 Vb Angle PMU 1 Vc Mag PMU 1 Vc Angle PMU 1 Vx Mag PMU 1 Vx Angle UNITS Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts --Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Volts Hz Degrees Volts Hz Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees DESCRIPTION
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
Source 4 phase B voltage eighteenth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage nineteenth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage twentieth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage twenty-first harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage twenty-second harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage twenty-third harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage twenty-fourth harmonic Source 4 phase B voltage twenty-fifth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) Source 4 phase C voltage second harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage third harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage fourth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage fifth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage sixth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage seventh harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage eighth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage ninth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage tenth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage eleventh harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage twelfth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage thirteenth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage fourteenth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage fifteenth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage sixteenth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage seventeenth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage eighteenth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage nineteenth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage twentieth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage twenty-first harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage twenty-second harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage twenty-third harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage twenty-fourth harmonic Source 4 phase C voltage twenty-fifth harmonic Synchrocheck 1 delta voltage Synchrocheck 1 delta frequency Synchrocheck 1 delta phase Synchrocheck 2 delta voltage Synchrocheck 2 delta frequency Synchrocheck 2 delta phase Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A voltage magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A voltage angle Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B voltage magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B voltage angle Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C voltage magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C voltage angle Phasor measurement unit 1 auxiliary voltage magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 auxiliary voltage angle
GE Multilin
A-13
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS 9548 9550 9551 9553 9554 9556 9557 9559 9560 9562 9563 9565 9566 9568 9569 9571 9572 9574 9575 9577 9578 9580 9581 10240 10241 10242 10243 10244 10245 10246 10247 10248 10249 10250 10251 10252 10253 10254 10255 10256 10257 10258 10259 10260 10261 10262 10263
FLEXANALOG NAME PMU 1 V1 Mag PMU 1 V1 Angle PMU 1 V2 Mag PMU 1 V2 Angle PMU 1 V0 Mag PMU 1 V0 Angle PMU 1 Ia Mag PMU 1 Ia Angle PMU 1 Ib Mag PMU 1 Ib Angle PMU 1 Ic Mag PMU 1 Ic Angle PMU 1 Ig Mag PMU 1 Ig Angle PMU 1 I1 Mag PMU 1 I1 Angle PMU 1 I2 Mag PMU 1 I2 Angle PMU 1 I0 Mag PMU 1 I0 Angle PMU 1 Freq PMU 1 df dt PMU 1 Conf Ch SRC 1 Ia THD SRC 1 Ia Harm[0] SRC 1 Ia Harm[1] SRC 1 Ia Harm[2] SRC 1 Ia Harm[3] SRC 1 Ia Harm[4] SRC 1 Ia Harm[5] SRC 1 Ia Harm[6] SRC 1 Ia Harm[7] SRC 1 Ia Harm[8] SRC 1 Ia Harm[9] SRC 1 Ia Harm[10] SRC 1 Ia Harm[11] SRC 1 Ia Harm[12] SRC 1 Ia Harm[13] SRC 1 Ia Harm[14] SRC 1 Ia Harm[15] SRC 1 Ia Harm[16] SRC 1 Ia Harm[17] SRC 1 Ia Harm[18] SRC 1 Ia Harm[19] SRC 1 Ia Harm[20] SRC 1 Ia Harm[21] SRC 1 Ia Harm[22]
UNITS Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Volts Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Amps Degrees Hz Hz/s ----Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps
DESCRIPTION Phasor measurement unit 1 positive-sequence voltage magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 positive-sequence voltage angle Phasor measurement unit 1 negative-sequence voltage magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 negative-sequence voltage angle Phasor measurement unit 1 zero-sequence voltage magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 zero-sequence voltage angle Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A current magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 phase A current angle Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B current magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 phase B current angle Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C current magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 phase C current angle Phasor measurement unit 1 ground current magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 ground current angle Phasor measurement unit 1 positive-sequence current magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 positive-sequence current angle Phasor measurement unit 1 negative-sequence current magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 negative-sequence current angle Phasor measurement unit 1 zero-sequence current magnitude Phasor measurement unit 1 zero-sequence current angle Phasor measurement unit 1 frequency Phasor measurement unit 1 rate of change of frequency Phasor measurement unit 1 configuration change counter Source 1 phase A current total harmonic distortion Source 1 phase A current second harmonic Source 1 phase A current third harmonic Source 1 phase A current fourth harmonic Source 1 phase A current fifth harmonic Source 1 phase A current sixth harmonic Source 1 phase A current seventh harmonic Source 1 phase A current eighth harmonic Source 1 phase A current ninth harmonic Source 1 phase A current tenth harmonic Source 1 phase A current eleventh harmonic Source 1 phase A current twelfth harmonic Source 1 phase A current thirteenth harmonic Source 1 phase A current fourteenth harmonic Source 1 phase A current fifteenth harmonic Source 1 phase A current sixteenth harmonic Source 1 phase A current seventeenth harmonic Source 1 phase A current eighteenth harmonic Source 1 phase A current nineteenth harmonic Source 1 phase A current twentieth harmonic Source 1 phase A current twenty-first harmonic Source 1 phase A current twenty-second harmonic Source 1 phase A current twenty-third harmonic Source 1 phase A current twenty-fourth harmonic
A-14
GE Multilin

ADDRESS 10264 10273 10274 10275 10276 10277 10278 10279 10280 10281 10282 10283 10284 10285 10286 10287 10288 10289 10290 10291 10292 10293 10294 10295 10296 10297 10306 10307 10308 10309 10310 10311 10312 10313 10314 10315 10316 10317 10318 10319 10320 10321 10322 10323 10324 10325 10326 FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 1 Ia Harm[23] SRC 1 Ib THD SRC 1 Ib Harm[0] SRC 1 Ib Harm[1] SRC 1 Ib Harm[2] SRC 1 Ib Harm[3] SRC 1 Ib Harm[4] SRC 1 Ib Harm[5] SRC 1 Ib Harm[6] SRC 1 Ib Harm[7] SRC 1 Ib Harm[8] SRC 1 Ib Harm[9] SRC 1 Ib Harm[10] SRC 1 Ib Harm[11] SRC 1 Ib Harm[12] SRC 1 Ib Harm[13] SRC 1 Ib Harm[14] SRC 1 Ib Harm[15] SRC 1 Ib Harm[16] SRC 1 Ib Harm[17] SRC 1 Ib Harm[18] SRC 1 Ib Harm[19] SRC 1 Ib Harm[20] SRC 1 Ib Harm[21] SRC 1 Ib Harm[22] SRC 1 Ib Harm[23] SRC 1 Ic THD SRC 1 Ic Harm[0] SRC 1 Ic Harm[1] SRC 1 Ic Harm[2] SRC 1 Ic Harm[3] SRC 1 Ic Harm[4] SRC 1 Ic Harm[5] SRC 1 Ic Harm[6] SRC 1 Ic Harm[7] SRC 1 Ic Harm[8] SRC 1 Ic Harm[9] SRC 1 Ic Harm[10] SRC 1 Ic Harm[11] SRC 1 Ic Harm[12] SRC 1 Ic Harm[13] SRC 1 Ic Harm[14] SRC 1 Ic Harm[15] SRC 1 Ic Harm[16] SRC 1 Ic Harm[17] SRC 1 Ic Harm[18] SRC 1 Ic Harm[19] UNITS Amps --Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps --Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps DESCRIPTION
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
Source 1 phase A current twenty-fifth harmonic Source 1 phase B current total harmonic distortion Source 1 phase B current second harmonic Source 1 phase B current third harmonic Source 1 phase B current fourth harmonic Source 1 phase B current fifth harmonic Source 1 phase B current sixth harmonic Source 1 phase B current seventh harmonic Source 1 phase B current eighth harmonic Source 1 phase B current ninth harmonic Source 1 phase B current tenth harmonic Source 1 phase B current eleventh harmonic Source 1 phase B current twelfth harmonic Source 1 phase B current thirteenth harmonic Source 1 phase B current fourteenth harmonic Source 1 phase B current fifteenth harmonic Source 1 phase B current sixteenth harmonic Source 1 phase B current seventeenth harmonic Source 1 phase B current eighteenth harmonic Source 1 phase B current nineteenth harmonic Source 1 phase B current twentieth harmonic Source 1 phase B current twenty-first harmonic Source 1 phase B current twenty-second harmonic Source 1 phase B current twenty-third harmonic Source 1 phase B current twenty-fourth harmonic Source 1 phase B current twenty-fifth harmonic Source 1 phase C current total harmonic distortion Source 1 phase C current second harmonic Source 1 phase C current third harmonic Source 1 phase C current fourth harmonic Source 1 phase C current fifth harmonic Source 1 phase C current sixth harmonic Source 1 phase C current seventh harmonic Source 1 phase C current eighth harmonic Source 1 phase C current ninth harmonic Source 1 phase C current tenth harmonic Source 1 phase C current eleventh harmonic Source 1 phase C current twelfth harmonic Source 1 phase C current thirteenth harmonic Source 1 phase C current fourteenth harmonic Source 1 phase C current fifteenth harmonic Source 1 phase C current sixteenth harmonic Source 1 phase C current seventeenth harmonic Source 1 phase C current eighteenth harmonic Source 1 phase C current nineteenth harmonic Source 1 phase C current twentieth harmonic Source 1 phase C current twenty-first harmonic
GE Multilin
A-15
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS 10327 10328 10329 10330 10339 10340 10341 10342 10343 10344 10345 10346 10347 10348 10349 10350 10351 10352 10353 10354 10355 10356 10357 10358 10359 10360 10361 10362 10363 10372 10373 10374 10375 10376 10377 10378 10379 10380 10381 10382 10383 10384 10385 10386 10387 10388 10389
FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 1 Ic Harm[20] SRC 1 Ic Harm[21] SRC 1 Ic Harm[22] SRC 1 Ic Harm[23] SRC 2 Ia THD SRC 2 Ia Harm[0] SRC 2 Ia Harm[1] SRC 2 Ia Harm[2] SRC 2 Ia Harm[3] SRC 2 Ia Harm[4] SRC 2 Ia Harm[5] SRC 2 Ia Harm[6] SRC 2 Ia Harm[7] SRC 2 Ia Harm[8] SRC 2 Ia Harm[9] SRC 2 Ia Harm[10] SRC 2 Ia Harm[11] SRC 2 Ia Harm[12] SRC 2 Ia Harm[13] SRC 2 Ia Harm[14] SRC 2 Ia Harm[15] SRC 2 Ia Harm[16] SRC 2 Ia Harm[17] SRC 2 Ia Harm[18] SRC 2 Ia Harm[19] SRC 2 Ia Harm[20] SRC 2 Ia Harm[21] SRC 2 Ia Harm[22] SRC 2 Ia Harm[23] SRC 2 Ib THD SRC 2 Ib Harm[0] SRC 2 Ib Harm[1] SRC 2 Ib Harm[2] SRC 2 Ib Harm[3] SRC 2 Ib Harm[4] SRC 2 Ib Harm[5] SRC 2 Ib Harm[6] SRC 2 Ib Harm[7] SRC 2 Ib Harm[8] SRC 2 Ib Harm[9] SRC 2 Ib Harm[10] SRC 2 Ib Harm[11] SRC 2 Ib Harm[12] SRC 2 Ib Harm[13] SRC 2 Ib Harm[14] SRC 2 Ib Harm[15] SRC 2 Ib Harm[16]
UNITS Amps Amps Amps Amps --Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps --Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps
DESCRIPTION Source 1 phase C current twenty-second harmonic Source 1 phase C current twenty-third harmonic Source 1 phase C current twenty-fourth harmonic Source 1 phase C current twenty-fifth harmonic Source 2 phase A current total harmonic distortion Source 2 phase A current second harmonic Source 2 phase A current third harmonic Source 2 phase A current fourth harmonic Source 2 phase A current fifth harmonic Source 2 phase A current sixth harmonic Source 2 phase A current seventh harmonic Source 2 phase A current eighth harmonic Source 2 phase A current ninth harmonic Source 2 phase A current tenth harmonic Source 2 phase A current eleventh harmonic Source 2 phase A current twelfth harmonic Source 2 phase A current thirteenth harmonic Source 2 phase A current fourteenth harmonic Source 2 phase A current fifteenth harmonic Source 2 phase A current sixteenth harmonic Source 2 phase A current seventeenth harmonic Source 2 phase A current eighteenth harmonic Source 2 phase A current nineteenth harmonic Source 2 phase A current twentieth harmonic Source 2 phase A current twenty-first harmonic Source 2 phase A current twenty-second harmonic Source 2 phase A current twenty-third harmonic Source 2 phase A current twenty-fourth harmonic Source 2 phase A current twenty-fifth harmonic Source 2 phase B current total harmonic distortion Source 2 phase B current second harmonic Source 2 phase B current third harmonic Source 2 phase B current fourth harmonic Source 2 phase B current fifth harmonic Source 2 phase B current sixth harmonic Source 2 phase B current seventh harmonic Source 2 phase B current eighth harmonic Source 2 phase B current ninth harmonic Source 2 phase B current tenth harmonic Source 2 phase B current eleventh harmonic Source 2 phase B current twelfth harmonic Source 2 phase B current thirteenth harmonic Source 2 phase B current fourteenth harmonic Source 2 phase B current fifteenth harmonic Source 2 phase B current sixteenth harmonic Source 2 phase B current seventeenth harmonic Source 2 phase B current eighteenth harmonic
A-16
GE Multilin

ADDRESS 10390 10391 10392 10393 10394 10395 10396 10405 10406 10407 10408 10409 10410 10411 10412 10413 10414 10415 10416 10417 10418 10419 10420 10421 10422 10423 10424 10425 10426 10427 10428 10429 10438 10439 10440 10441 10442 10443 10444 10445 10446 10447 10448 10449 10450 10451 10452 FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 2 Ib Harm[17] SRC 2 Ib Harm[18] SRC 2 Ib Harm[19] SRC 2 Ib Harm[20] SRC 2 Ib Harm[21] SRC 2 Ib Harm[22] SRC 2 Ib Harm[23] SRC 2 Ic THD SRC 2 Ic Harm[0] SRC 2 Ic Harm[1] SRC 2 Ic Harm[2] SRC 2 Ic Harm[3] SRC 2 Ic Harm[4] SRC 2 Ic Harm[5] SRC 2 Ic Harm[6] SRC 2 Ic Harm[7] SRC 2 Ic Harm[8] SRC 2 Ic Harm[9] SRC 2 Ic Harm[10] SRC 2 Ic Harm[11] SRC 2 Ic Harm[12] SRC 2 Ic Harm[13] SRC 2 Ic Harm[14] SRC 2 Ic Harm[15] SRC 2 Ic Harm[16] SRC 2 Ic Harm[17] SRC 2 Ic Harm[18] SRC 2 Ic Harm[19] SRC 2 Ic Harm[20] SRC 2 Ic Harm[21] SRC 2 Ic Harm[22] SRC 2 Ic Harm[23] SRC 3 Ia THD SRC 3 Ia Harm[0] SRC 3 Ia Harm[1] SRC 3 Ia Harm[2] SRC 3 Ia Harm[3] SRC 3 Ia Harm[4] SRC 3 Ia Harm[5] SRC 3 Ia Harm[6] SRC 3 Ia Harm[7] SRC 3 Ia Harm[8] SRC 3 Ia Harm[9] SRC 3 Ia Harm[10] SRC 3 Ia Harm[11] SRC 3 Ia Harm[12] SRC 3 Ia Harm[13] UNITS Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps --Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps --Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps DESCRIPTION
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
Source 2 phase B current nineteenth harmonic Source 2 phase B current twentieth harmonic Source 2 phase B current twenty-first harmonic Source 2 phase B current twenty-second harmonic Source 2 phase B current twenty-third harmonic Source 2 phase B current twenty-fourth harmonic Source 2 phase B current twenty-fifth harmonic Source 2 phase C current total harmonic distortion Source 2 phase C current second harmonic Source 2 phase C current third harmonic Source 2 phase C current fourth harmonic Source 2 phase C current fifth harmonic Source 2 phase C current sixth harmonic Source 2 phase C current seventh harmonic Source 2 phase C current eighth harmonic Source 2 phase C current ninth harmonic Source 2 phase C current tenth harmonic Source 2 phase C current eleventh harmonic Source 2 phase C current twelfth harmonic Source 2 phase C current thirteenth harmonic Source 2 phase C current fourteenth harmonic Source 2 phase C current fifteenth harmonic Source 2 phase C current sixteenth harmonic Source 2 phase C current seventeenth harmonic Source 2 phase C current eighteenth harmonic Source 2 phase C current nineteenth harmonic Source 2 phase C current twentieth harmonic Source 2 phase C current twenty-first harmonic Source 2 phase C current twenty-second harmonic Source 2 phase C current twenty-third harmonic Source 2 phase C current twenty-fourth harmonic Source 2 phase C current twenty-fifth harmonic Source 3 phase A current total harmonic distortion Source 3 phase A current second harmonic Source 3 phase A current third harmonic Source 3 phase A current fourth harmonic Source 3 phase A current fifth harmonic Source 3 phase A current sixth harmonic Source 3 phase A current seventh harmonic Source 3 phase A current eighth harmonic Source 3 phase A current ninth harmonic Source 3 phase A current tenth harmonic Source 3 phase A current eleventh harmonic Source 3 phase A current twelfth harmonic Source 3 phase A current thirteenth harmonic Source 3 phase A current fourteenth harmonic Source 3 phase A current fifteenth harmonic
GE Multilin
A-17
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS 10453 10454 10455 10456 10457 10458 10459 10460 10461 10462 10471 10472 10473 10474 10475 10476 10477 10478 10479 10480 10481 10482 10483 10484 10485 10486 10487 10488 10489 10490 10491 10492 10493 10494 10495 10504 10505 10506 10507 10508 10509 10510 10511 10512 10513 10514 10515
FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 3 Ia Harm[14] SRC 3 Ia Harm[15] SRC 3 Ia Harm[16] SRC 3 Ia Harm[17] SRC 3 Ia Harm[18] SRC 3 Ia Harm[19] SRC 3 Ia Harm[20] SRC 3 Ia Harm[21] SRC 3 Ia Harm[22] SRC 3 Ia Harm[23] SRC 3 Ib THD SRC 3 Ib Harm[0] SRC 3 Ib Harm[1] SRC 3 Ib Harm[2] SRC 3 Ib Harm[3] SRC 3 Ib Harm[4] SRC 3 Ib Harm[5] SRC 3 Ib Harm[6] SRC 3 Ib Harm[7] SRC 3 Ib Harm[8] SRC 3 Ib Harm[9] SRC 3 Ib Harm[10] SRC 3 Ib Harm[11] SRC 3 Ib Harm[12] SRC 3 Ib Harm[13] SRC 3 Ib Harm[14] SRC 3 Ib Harm[15] SRC 3 Ib Harm[16] SRC 3 Ib Harm[17] SRC 3 Ib Harm[18] SRC 3 Ib Harm[19] SRC 3 Ib Harm[20] SRC 3 Ib Harm[21] SRC 3 Ib Harm[22] SRC 3 Ib Harm[23] SRC 3 Ic THD SRC 3 Ic Harm[0] SRC 3 Ic Harm[1] SRC 3 Ic Harm[2] SRC 3 Ic Harm[3] SRC 3 Ic Harm[4] SRC 3 Ic Harm[5] SRC 3 Ic Harm[6] SRC 3 Ic Harm[7] SRC 3 Ic Harm[8] SRC 3 Ic Harm[9] SRC 3 Ic Harm[10]
UNITS Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps --Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps --Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps
DESCRIPTION Source 3 phase A current sixteenth harmonic Source 3 phase A current seventeenth harmonic Source 3 phase A current eighteenth harmonic Source 3 phase A current nineteenth harmonic Source 3 phase A current twentieth harmonic Source 3 phase A current twenty-first harmonic Source 3 phase A current twenty-second harmonic Source 3 phase A current twenty-third harmonic Source 3 phase A current twenty-fourth harmonic Source 3 phase A current twenty-fifth harmonic Source 3 phase B current total harmonic distortion Source 3 phase B current second harmonic Source 3 phase B current third harmonic Source 3 phase B current fourth harmonic Source 3 phase B current fifth harmonic Source 3 phase B current sixth harmonic Source 3 phase B current seventh harmonic Source 3 phase B current eighth harmonic Source 3 phase B current ninth harmonic Source 3 phase B current tenth harmonic Source 3 phase B current eleventh harmonic Source 3 phase B current twelfth harmonic Source 3 phase B current thirteenth harmonic Source 3 phase B current fourteenth harmonic Source 3 phase B current fifteenth harmonic Source 3 phase B current sixteenth harmonic Source 3 phase B current seventeenth harmonic Source 3 phase B current eighteenth harmonic Source 3 phase B current nineteenth harmonic Source 3 phase B current twentieth harmonic Source 3 phase B current twenty-first harmonic Source 3 phase B current twenty-second harmonic Source 3 phase B current twenty-third harmonic Source 3 phase B current twenty-fourth harmonic Source 3 phase B current twenty-fifth harmonic Source 3 phase C current total harmonic distortion Source 3 phase C current second harmonic Source 3 phase C current third harmonic Source 3 phase C current fourth harmonic Source 3 phase C current fifth harmonic Source 3 phase C current sixth harmonic Source 3 phase C current seventh harmonic Source 3 phase C current eighth harmonic Source 3 phase C current ninth harmonic Source 3 phase C current tenth harmonic Source 3 phase C current eleventh harmonic Source 3 phase C current twelfth harmonic
A-18
GE Multilin

ADDRESS 10516 10517 10518 10519 10520 10521 10522 10523 10524 10525 10526 10527 10528 10537 10538 10539 10540 10541 10542 10543 10544 10545 10546 10547 10548 10549 10550 10551 10552 10553 10554 10555 10556 10557 10558 10559 10560 10561 10570 10571 10572 10573 10574 10575 10576 10577 10578 FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 3 Ic Harm[11] SRC 3 Ic Harm[12] SRC 3 Ic Harm[13] SRC 3 Ic Harm[14] SRC 3 Ic Harm[15] SRC 3 Ic Harm[16] SRC 3 Ic Harm[17] SRC 3 Ic Harm[18] SRC 3 Ic Harm[19] SRC 3 Ic Harm[20] SRC 3 Ic Harm[21] SRC 3 Ic Harm[22] SRC 3 Ic Harm[23] SRC 4 Ia THD SRC 4 Ia Harm[0] SRC 4 Ia Harm[1] SRC 4 Ia Harm[2] SRC 4 Ia Harm[3] SRC 4 Ia Harm[4] SRC 4 Ia Harm[5] SRC 4 Ia Harm[6] SRC 4 Ia Harm[7] SRC 4 Ia Harm[8] SRC 4 Ia Harm[9] SRC 4 Ia Harm[10] SRC 4 Ia Harm[11] SRC 4 Ia Harm[12] SRC 4 Ia Harm[13] SRC 4 Ia Harm[14] SRC 4 Ia Harm[15] SRC 4 Ia Harm[16] SRC 4 Ia Harm[17] SRC 4 Ia Harm[18] SRC 4 Ia Harm[19] SRC 4 Ia Harm[20] SRC 4 Ia Harm[21] SRC 4 Ia Harm[22] SRC 4 Ia Harm[23] SRC 4 Ib THD SRC 4 Ib Harm[0] SRC 4 Ib Harm[1] SRC 4 Ib Harm[2] SRC 4 Ib Harm[3] SRC 4 Ib Harm[4] SRC 4 Ib Harm[5] SRC 4 Ib Harm[6] SRC 4 Ib Harm[7] UNITS Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps --Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps --Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps DESCRIPTION
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
Source 3 phase C current thirteenth harmonic Source 3 phase C current fourteenth harmonic Source 3 phase C current fifteenth harmonic Source 3 phase C current sixteenth harmonic Source 3 phase C current seventeenth harmonic Source 3 phase C current eighteenth harmonic Source 3 phase C current nineteenth harmonic Source 3 phase C current twentieth harmonic Source 3 phase C current twenty-first harmonic Source 3 phase C current twenty-second harmonic Source 3 phase C current twenty-third harmonic Source 3 phase C current twenty-fourth harmonic Source 3 phase C current twenty-fifth harmonic Source 4 phase A current total harmonic distortion Source 4 phase A current second harmonic Source 4 phase A current third harmonic Source 4 phase A current fourth harmonic Source 4 phase A current fifth harmonic Source 4 phase A current sixth harmonic Source 4 phase A current seventh harmonic Source 4 phase A current eighth harmonic Source 4 phase A current ninth harmonic Source 4 phase A current tenth harmonic Source 4 phase A current eleventh harmonic Source 4 phase A current twelfth harmonic Source 4 phase A current thirteenth harmonic Source 4 phase A current fourteenth harmonic Source 4 phase A current fifteenth harmonic Source 4 phase A current sixteenth harmonic Source 4 phase A current seventeenth harmonic Source 4 phase A current eighteenth harmonic Source 4 phase A current nineteenth harmonic Source 4 phase A current twentieth harmonic Source 4 phase A current twenty-first harmonic Source 4 phase A current twenty-second harmonic Source 4 phase A current twenty-third harmonic Source 4 phase A current twenty-fourth harmonic Source 4 phase A current twenty-fifth harmonic Source 4 phase B current total harmonic distortion Source 4 phase B current second harmonic Source 4 phase B current third harmonic Source 4 phase B current fourth harmonic Source 4 phase B current fifth harmonic Source 4 phase B current sixth harmonic Source 4 phase B current seventh harmonic Source 4 phase B current eighth harmonic Source 4 phase B current ninth harmonic
GE Multilin
A-19
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS 10579 10580 10581 10582 10583 10584 10585 10586 10587 10588 10589 10590 10591 10592 10593 10594 10603 10604 10605 10606 10607 10608 10609 10610 10611 10612 10613 10614 10615 10616 10617 10618 10619 10620 10621 10622 10623 10624 10625 10626 10627 13504 13506 13508 13510 13512 13514
FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 4 Ib Harm[8] SRC 4 Ib Harm[9] SRC 4 Ib Harm[10] SRC 4 Ib Harm[11] SRC 4 Ib Harm[12] SRC 4 Ib Harm[13] SRC 4 Ib Harm[14] SRC 4 Ib Harm[15] SRC 4 Ib Harm[16] SRC 4 Ib Harm[17] SRC 4 Ib Harm[18] SRC 4 Ib Harm[19] SRC 4 Ib Harm[20] SRC 4 Ib Harm[21] SRC 4 Ib Harm[22] SRC 4 Ib Harm[23] SRC 4 Ic THD SRC 4 Ic Harm[0] SRC 4 Ic Harm[1] SRC 4 Ic Harm[2] SRC 4 Ic Harm[3] SRC 4 Ic Harm[4] SRC 4 Ic Harm[5] SRC 4 Ic Harm[6] SRC 4 Ic Harm[7] SRC 4 Ic Harm[8] SRC 4 Ic Harm[9] SRC 4 Ic Harm[10] SRC 4 Ic Harm[11] SRC 4 Ic Harm[12] SRC 4 Ic Harm[13] SRC 4 Ic Harm[14] SRC 4 Ic Harm[15] SRC 4 Ic Harm[16] SRC 4 Ic Harm[17] SRC 4 Ic Harm[18] SRC 4 Ic Harm[19] SRC 4 Ic Harm[20] SRC 4 Ic Harm[21] SRC 4 Ic Harm[22] SRC 4 Ic Harm[23] DCMA Inputs 1 Value DCMA Inputs 2 Value DCMA Inputs 3 Value DCMA Inputs 4 Value DCMA Inputs 5 Value DCMA Inputs 6 Value
UNITS Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps --Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps mA mA mA mA mA mA
DESCRIPTION Source 4 phase B current tenth harmonic Source 4 phase B current eleventh harmonic Source 4 phase B current twelfth harmonic Source 4 phase B current thirteenth harmonic Source 4 phase B current fourteenth harmonic Source 4 phase B current fifteenth harmonic Source 4 phase B current sixteenth harmonic Source 4 phase B current seventeenth harmonic Source 4 phase B current eighteenth harmonic Source 4 phase B current nineteenth harmonic Source 4 phase B current twentieth harmonic Source 4 phase B current twenty-first harmonic Source 4 phase B current twenty-second harmonic Source 4 phase B current twenty-third harmonic Source 4 phase B current twenty-fourth harmonic Source 4 phase B current twenty-fifth harmonic Source 4 phase C current total harmonic distortion Source 4 phase C current second harmonic Source 4 phase C current third harmonic Source 4 phase C current fourth harmonic Source 4 phase C current fifth harmonic Source 4 phase C current sixth harmonic Source 4 phase C current seventh harmonic Source 4 phase C current eighth harmonic Source 4 phase C current ninth harmonic Source 4 phase C current tenth harmonic Source 4 phase C current eleventh harmonic Source 4 phase C current twelfth harmonic Source 4 phase C current thirteenth harmonic Source 4 phase C current fourteenth harmonic Source 4 phase C current fifteenth harmonic Source 4 phase C current sixteenth harmonic Source 4 phase C current seventeenth harmonic Source 4 phase C current eighteenth harmonic Source 4 phase C current nineteenth harmonic Source 4 phase C current twentieth harmonic Source 4 phase C current twenty-first harmonic Source 4 phase C current twenty-second harmonic Source 4 phase C current twenty-third harmonic Source 4 phase C current twenty-fourth harmonic Source 4 phase C current twenty-fifth harmonic dcmA input 1 actual value dcmA input 2 actual value dcmA input 3 actual value dcmA input 4 actual value dcmA input 5 actual value dcmA input 6 actual value
A-20
GE Multilin

ADDRESS 13516 13518 13520 13522 13524 13526 13528 13530 13532 13534 13536 13538 13540 13542 13544 13546 13548 13550 13552 13553 13554 13555 13556 13557 13558 13559 13560 13561 13562 13563 13564 13565 13566 13567 13568 13569 13570 13571 13572 13573 13574 13575 13576 13577 13578 13579 13580 FLEXANALOG NAME DCMA Inputs 7 Value DCMA Inputs 8 Value DCMA Inputs 9 Value DCMA Inputs 10 Value DCMA Inputs 11 Value DCMA Inputs 12 Value DCMA Inputs 13 Value DCMA Inputs 14 Value DCMA Inputs 15 Value DCMA Inputs 16 Value DCMA Inputs 17 Value DCMA Inputs 18 Value DCMA Inputs 19 Value DCMA Inputs 20 Value DCMA Inputs 21 Value DCMA Inputs 22 Value DCMA Inputs 23 Value DCMA Inputs 24 Value RTD Inputs 1 Value RTD Inputs 2 Value RTD Inputs 3 Value RTD Inputs 4 Value RTD Inputs 5 Value RTD Inputs 6 Value RTD Inputs 7 Value RTD Inputs 8 Value RTD Inputs 9 Value RTD Inputs 10 Value RTD Inputs 11 Value RTD Inputs 12 Value RTD Inputs 13 Value RTD Inputs 14 Value RTD Inputs 15 Value RTD Inputs 16 Value RTD Inputs 17 Value RTD Inputs 18 Value RTD Inputs 19 Value RTD Inputs 20 Value RTD Inputs 21 Value RTD Inputs 22 Value RTD Inputs 23 Value RTD Inputs 24 Value RTD Inputs 25 Value RTD Inputs 26 Value RTD Inputs 27 Value RTD Inputs 28 Value RTD Inputs 29 Value UNITS mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA ----------------------------------------------------------DESCRIPTION dcmA input 7 actual value dcmA input 8 actual value dcmA input 9 actual value dcmA input 10 actual value dcmA input 11 actual value dcmA input 12 actual value dcmA input 13 actual value dcmA input 14 actual value dcmA input 15 actual value dcmA input 16 actual value dcmA input 17 actual value dcmA input 18 actual value dcmA input 19 actual value dcmA input 20 actual value dcmA input 21 actual value dcmA input 22 actual value dcmA input 23 actual value dcmA input 24 actual value RTD input 1 actual value RTD input 2 actual value RTD input 3 actual value RTD input 4 actual value RTD input 5 actual value RTD input 6 actual value RTD input 7 actual value RTD input 8 actual value RTD input 9 actual value RTD input 10 actual value RTD input 11 actual value RTD input 12 actual value RTD input 13 actual value RTD input 14 actual value RTD input 15 actual value RTD input 16 actual value RTD input 17 actual value RTD input 18 actual value RTD input 19 actual value RTD input 20 actual value RTD input 21 actual value RTD input 22 actual value RTD input 23 actual value RTD input 24 actual value RTD input 25 actual value RTD input 26 actual value RTD input 27 actual value RTD input 28 actual value RTD input 29 actual value
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
GE Multilin
A-21
APPENDIX A
ADDRESS 13581 13582 13583 13584 13585 13586 13587 13588 13589 13590 13591 13592 13593 13594 13595 13596 13597 13598 13599 24459 32768 34752 34753 34754 34755 34756 34757 34758 34759 34760 34761 34762 34763 39425 39427 39429 39431 39433 39435 39437 39439 39441 39443 39445 39447 39449 39451
FLEXANALOG NAME RTD Inputs 30 Value RTD Inputs 31 Value RTD Inputs 32 Value RTD Inputs 33 Value RTD Inputs 34 Value RTD Inputs 35 Value RTD Inputs 36 Value RTD Inputs 37 Value RTD Inputs 38 Value RTD Inputs 39 Value RTD Inputs 40 Value RTD Inputs 41 Value RTD Inputs 42 Value RTD Inputs 43 Value RTD Inputs 44 Value RTD Inputs 45 Value RTD Inputs 46 Value RTD Inputs 47 Value RTD Inputs 48 Value Active Setting Group Tracking Frequency RRTD RTD 1 Value RRTD RTD 2 Value RRTD RTD 3 Value RRTD RTD 4 Value RRTD RTD 5 Value RRTD RTD 6 Value RRTD RTD 7 Value RRTD RTD 8 Value RRTD RTD 9 Value RRTD RTD 10 Value RRTD RTD 11 Value RRTD RTD 12 Value FlexElement 1 Value FlexElement 2 Value FlexElement 3 Value FlexElement 4 Value FlexElement 5 Value FlexElement 6 Value FlexElement 7 Value FlexElement 8 Value FlexElement 9 Value FlexElement 10 Value FlexElement 11 Value FlexElement 12 Value FlexElement 13 Value FlexElement 14 Value
UNITS ----------------------------------------Hz C C C C C C C C C C C C -----------------------------
DESCRIPTION RTD input 30 actual value RTD input 31 actual value RTD input 32 actual value RTD input 33 actual value RTD input 34 actual value RTD input 35 actual value RTD input 36 actual value RTD input 37 actual value RTD input 38 actual value RTD input 39 actual value RTD input 40 actual value RTD input 41 actual value RTD input 42 actual value RTD input 43 actual value RTD input 44 actual value RTD input 45 actual value RTD input 46 actual value RTD input 47 actual value RTD input 48 actual value Current setting group Tracking frequency Remote RTD input 1 actual value Remote RTD input 2 actual value Remote RTD input 3 actual value Remote RTD input 4 actual value Remote RTD input 5 actual value Remote RTD input 6 actual value Remote RTD input 7 actual value Remote RTD input 8 actual value Remote RTD input 9 actual value Remote RTD input 10 actual value Remote RTD input 11 actual value Remote RTD input 12 actual value FlexElement 1 actual value FlexElement 2 actual value FlexElement 3 actual value FlexElement 4 actual value FlexElement 5 actual value FlexElement 6 actual value FlexElement 7 actual value FlexElement 8 actual value FlexElement 9 actual value FlexElement 10 actual value FlexElement 11 actual value FlexElement 12 actual value FlexElement 13 actual value FlexElement 14 actual value
A-22
GE Multilin

ADDRESS 39453 39455 43808 43809 45584 45586 45588 45590 45592 45594 45596 45598 45600 45602 45604 45606 45608 45610 45612 45614 61449 FLEXANALOG NAME FlexElement 15 Value FlexElement 16 Value Volts Per Hertz 1 Volts Per Hertz 2 GOOSE Analog In 1 GOOSE Analog In 2 GOOSE Analog In 3 GOOSE Analog In 4 GOOSE Analog In 5 GOOSE Analog In 6 GOOSE Analog In 7 GOOSE Analog In 8 GOOSE Analog In 9 GOOSE Analog In 10 GOOSE Analog In 11 GOOSE Analog In 12 GOOSE Analog In 13 GOOSE Analog In 14 GOOSE Analog In 15 GOOSE Analog In 16 PMU Num Triggers UNITS ----V/Hz V/Hz ----------------------------------DESCRIPTION FlexElement 15 actual value FlexElement 16 actual value Volts per hertz 1 actual value Volts per hertz 2 actual value IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 2 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 3 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 4 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 5 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 6 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 7 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 8 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 9 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 10 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 11 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 12 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 13 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 14 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 15 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 16
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
Phasor measurement unit recording number of triggers
GE Multilin
A-23
A.1 PARAMETER LISTS
APPENDIX A A.1.2 FLEXINTEGER ITEMS
A
Table A2: FLEXINTEGER DATA ITEMS
ADDRESS 9736 9738 9740 9968 9970 9972 9974 9976 9978 9980 9982 9984 9986 9988 9990 9992 9994 9996 9998 FLEXINTEGER NAME PMU 1 SOC PMU 1 FRACSEC PMU 1 STAT GOOSE UInt Input 1 GOOSE UInt Input 2 GOOSE UInt Input 3 GOOSE UInt Input 4 GOOSE UInt Input 5 GOOSE UInt Input 6 GOOSE UInt Input 7 GOOSE UInt Input 8 GOOSE UInt Input 9 GOOSE UInt Input 10 GOOSE UInt Input 11 GOOSE UInt Input 12 GOOSE UInt Input 13 GOOSE UInt Input 14 GOOSE UInt Input 15 GOOSE UInt Input 16 UNITS seconds seconds ----------------------------------DESCRIPTION PMU 1 SOC timestamps PMU 1 FRACSEC timestamps PMU 1 STAT flags IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 2 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 3 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 4 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 5 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 6 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 7 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 8 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 9 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 10 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 11 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 12 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 13 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 14 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 15 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 16
A-24
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATIONSB.1MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL B.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The UR-series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Modbus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master communication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that: The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to requests issued by a master computer. For Modbus, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands. B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER The Modbus RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hardware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear terminal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10Base-T, or 10Base-F. Data flow is half-duplex in all configurations. See chapter 3 for details on communications wiring. Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300). The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are available. Refer to the Communications section of chapter 5 for further details. The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relays slave address (unless the address is the broadcast address see below). A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will accept any address when the Modbus RTU protocol is used. B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by dead-time on the communications line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet formatting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code. Table B1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT
DESCRIPTION SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA CRC DEAD TIME SIZE 1 byte 1 byte N bytes 2 bytes 3.5 bytes transmission time
SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent bus contention. All of the relays ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see chapter 5 for details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address. A master transmit packet with slave address 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link take action based on the packet, but none respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associated with function code 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be ignored.
GE Multilin
B-1
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
APPENDIX B
FUNCTION CODE: This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to perform. See the Supported Function Codes section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indicated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the Exception Responses section for further details. DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, settings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master. CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon or respond to the packet thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 Algorithm section for details on calculating the CRC. DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 s at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave. B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one continuous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial (11000000000000101B). The 16-bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no transmission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most significant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder. A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request. Table B2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM
SYMBOLS: --> A Alow Ahigh CRC i,j (+) N Di G shr (x) ALGORITHM: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. data transfer 16 bit working register low order byte of A high order byte of A 16 bit CRC-16 result loop counters logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator total number of data bytes i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1) 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits are shifted right one location) FFFF (hex) --> A 0 --> i 0 --> j Di (+) Alow --> Alow j + 1 --> j shr (A) Is there a carry? Is j = 8? i + 1 --> i Is i = N? A --> CRC No: go to 3; Yes: continue No: go to 8; Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue. No: go to 5; Yes: continue
B-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B B.2MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
Modbus officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
FUNCTION CODE HEX 03 04 05 06 10 DEC 3 4 5 6 16 Read holding registers Read holding registers Force single coil Preset single register Preset multiple registers Read actual values or settings Read actual values or settings Execute operation Store single setting Store multiple settings MODBUS DEFINITION GE MULTILIN DEFINITION
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay. Data registers are always 16-bit (two-byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maximum number of registers that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the Modbus memory map table for exact details on the data registers. Since some PLC implementations of Modbus only support one of function codes 03h and 04h. The G60 interpretation allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting three register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40, 300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively. Table B3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low NUMBER OF REGISTERS - high NUMBER OF REGISTERS - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 04 40 50 00 03 A7 4A SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE BYTE COUNT DATA #1 - high DATA #1 - low DATA #2 - high DATA #2 - low DATA #3 - high DATA #3 - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 04 06 00 28 01 2C 00 00 0D 60
GE Multilin
B-3
B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
APPENDIX B B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)
This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are shown in the Summary of operation codes table below. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the slave device 11h (17 decimal) to perform a reset. The high and low code value bytes always have the values FF and 00 respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus definition of this function code. Table B4: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE OPERATION CODE - high OPERATION CODE - low CODE VALUE - high CODE VALUE - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 05 00 01 FF 00 DF 6A SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE OPERATION CODE - high OPERATION CODE - low CODE VALUE - high CODE VALUE - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 05 00 01 FF 00 DF 6A
Table B5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES FOR FUNCTION 05H

OPERATION CODE (HEX) 0000 0001 0005 0006 1000 to 103F DEFINITION NO OPERATION RESET CLEAR EVENT RECORDS CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY VIRTUAL IN 1 to 64 ON/OFF DESCRIPTION Does not do anything. Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key. Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu command. Clears all oscillography records. Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 64 either ON or OFF.
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H) This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device 11h (17 dec). Table B6: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low DATA - high DATA - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 06 40 51 00 C8 CE DD SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low DATA - high DATA - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 06 40 51 00 C8 CE DD
B-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to slave device 11h (17 decimal). Table B7: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo BYTE COUNT DATA #1 - high order byte DATA #1 - low order byte DATA #2 - high order byte DATA #2 - low order byte CRC - low order byte CRC - high order byte EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 10 40 51 00 02 04 00 C8 00 01 12 62 SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo CRC - lo CRC - hi EXMAPLE (HEX) 11 10 40 51 00 02 07 64
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order bit of the function code set to 1. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11. Table B8: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE CRC - low order byte CRC - high order byte EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 39 CD F2 SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE ERROR CODE CRC - low order byte CRC - high order byte EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 B9 01 93 95
GE Multilin
B-5
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS B.3FILE TRANSFERS a) DESCRIPTION
APPENDIX B B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS
The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)" and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from the UR relay, use the following steps: 1. Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case sensitive. Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The "position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244. Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indicates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size. If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the previous operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).
2.
3. 4.
The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus connections. b) OTHER PROTOCOLS All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for example, TFTP or MMS). c) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY, AND DATA LOGGER FILES Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 September 1997). The files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format. d) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the Oscillography section in Chapter 5 for additional details. The Oscillography Number of Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered (captured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available. The Oscillography Number of Records register specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography Available Records register specifies the actual number of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay. Writing Yes (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography Clear Data register clears oscillography data files, clears both the Oscillography Number of Triggers and Oscillography Available Records registers to zero, and sets the Oscillography Last Cleared Date to the present date and time. To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames: OSCnnnn.CFG and OSCnnn.DAT Replace nnn with the desired oscillography trigger number. For ASCII format, use the following file names OSCAnnnn.CFG and OSCAnnn.DAT
B-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B e) READING DATA LOGGER FILES
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
Familiarity with the data logger feature is required to understand this description. Refer to the Data Logger section of Chapter 5 for details. To read the entire data logger in binary COMTRADE format, read the following files. datalog.cfg and datalog.dat To read the entire data logger in ASCII COMTRADE format, read the following files. dataloga.cfg and dataloga.dat To limit the range of records to be returned in the COMTRADE files, append the following to the filename before writing it: To read from a specific time to the end of the log: <space> startTime To read a specific range of records: <space> startTime <space> endTime Replace <startTime> and <endTime> with Julian dates (seconds since Jan. 1 1970) as numeric text.
f) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename: EVT.TXT To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename: EVTnnn.TXT (replace nnn with the desired starting record number) To read from a specific record to another specific record, use the following filename: EVT.TXT xxxxx yyyyy (replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number) B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION The G60 supports password entry from a local or remote connection. Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality. When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the G60, the remote password must be used. If the connection is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password must be used. The command password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of 0 removes command password protection. When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. Command security is required to change the command password. Similarly, the setting password is set up at memory location 4002. These are the same settings and encrypted values found in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP PASSWORD SECURITY menu via the keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa. To gain command level security access, the command password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain setting level security access, the setting password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered setting password must match the current setting password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware. Command and setting passwords each have a 30 minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular password, and is re-started whenever you use it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the setting password timer and writing a command register or forcing a coil re-starts the command password timer. The value read at memory location 4010 can be used to confirm whether a command password is enabled or disabled (a value of 0 represents disabled). The value read at memory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a setting password is enabled or disabled. Command or setting password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on which the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and the passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.
GE Multilin
B-7
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING B.4MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 58)

ADDR 0000 0002 0010 0020 0022 0040 0090 0093 00A0 00B0 00C0 0200 0204 0220 0248 0280 REGISTER NAME UR Product Type Product Version Serial Number Manufacturing Date Modification Number Order Code Ethernet MAC Address Reserved (13 items) CPU Module Serial Number CPU Supplier Serial Number Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items) Self Test States (2 items) LED Column n State, n = 1 to 10 (10 items) Display Message Last Key Pressed Simulated keypress -- write zero before each keystroke RANGE 0 to 65535 0 to 655.35 --0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 ------------0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 --0 to 47 0 to 42 UNITS ----------------------0 --------STEP 1 0.01 --1 1 ------------1 1 --1 1 FORMAT F001 F001 F203 F050 F001 F204 F072 F001 F203 F203 F203 F143 F501 F204 F530 F190 DEFAULT 0 1 0 0 0 Order Code x 0 0 (none) (none) (none) 0 0 (none) 0 (None) 0 (No key -- use between real keys) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) Product Information (Read Only)
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
Self Test Targets (Read Only) Front Panel (Read Only)
Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)
Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (64 modules) 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 040A 040B 040C 040D 040E 040F 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 0415 0416 0417 0418 0419 041A 041B Virtual Input 1 State Virtual Input 2 State Virtual Input 3 State Virtual Input 4 State Virtual Input 5 State Virtual Input 6 State Virtual Input 7 State Virtual Input 8 State Virtual Input 9 State Virtual Input 10 State Virtual Input 11 State Virtual Input 12 State Virtual Input 13 State Virtual Input 14 State Virtual Input 15 State Virtual Input 16 State Virtual Input 17 State Virtual Input 18 State Virtual Input 19 State Virtual Input 20 State Virtual Input 21 State Virtual Input 22 State Virtual Input 23 State Virtual Input 24 State Virtual Input 25 State Virtual Input 26 State Virtual Input 27 State Virtual Input 28 State 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 --------------------------------------------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108
B-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 2 of 58)

ADDR 041C 041D 041E 041F 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 0425 0426 0427 0428 0429 042A 042B 042C 042D 042E 042F 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 0435 0436 0437 0438 0439 043A 043B 043C 043D 043E 043F 0800 0802 0804 0806 0808 0810 0818 0820 0828 0830 0838 0900 1000 REGISTER NAME Virtual Input 29 State Virtual Input 30 State Virtual Input 31 State Virtual Input 32 State Virtual Input 33 State Virtual Input 34 State Virtual Input 35 State Virtual Input 36 State Virtual Input 37 State Virtual Input 38 State Virtual Input 39 State Virtual Input 40 State Virtual Input 41 State Virtual Input 42 State Virtual Input 43 State Virtual Input 44 State Virtual Input 45 State Virtual Input 46 State Virtual Input 47 State Virtual Input 48 State Virtual Input 49 State Virtual Input 50 State Virtual Input 51 State Virtual Input 52 State Virtual Input 53 State Virtual Input 54 State Virtual Input 55 State Virtual Input 56 State Virtual Input 57 State Virtual Input 58 State Virtual Input 59 State Virtual Input 60 State Virtual Input 61 State Virtual Input 62 State Virtual Input 63 State Virtual Input 64 State Digital Counter 1 Value Digital Counter 1 Frozen Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp us ...Repeated for Digital Counter 2 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 3 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 4 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 5 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 6 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 7 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 8 FlexState Bits (16 items) Element Operate States (64 items) 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 ----1 1 RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 -2147483647 to 2147483647 -2147483647 to 2147483647 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 UNITS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F004 F004 F050 F003
DEFAULT 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 0 0 0
Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)
FlexStates (Read Only) F001 F502 0 0 Element States (Read Only)
GE Multilin
B-9
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 3 of 58)
ADDR 1080 1200 REGISTER NAME Formatted user-definable displays (16 items) User Map Values (256 items) Target Sequence Number of Targets Target to Read Target Message Contact Input States (6 items) Virtual Input States (8 items) Contact Output States (4 items) Contact Output Current States (4 items) Contact Output Voltage States (4 items) Virtual Output States (6 items) Contact Output Detectors (4 items) Remote Device States Remote Input States (4 items) Remote Devices Online Remote Double-Point Status Input 1 State Remote Double-Point Status Input 2 State Remote Double-Point Status Input 3 State Remote Double-Point Status Input 4 State Remote Double-Point Status Input 5 State Direct input states (6 items) Direct outputs average message return time 1 Direct outputs average message return time 2 Direct inputs/outputs unreturned message count - Ch. 1 Direct inputs/outputs unreturned message count - Ch. 2 Direct device states Reserved Direct inputs/outputs CRC fail count 1 Direct inputs/outputs CRC fail count 2 Ethernet primary fibre channel status Ethernet secondary fibre channel status Data logger channel count Time of oldest available samples Time of newest available samples Data logger duration Generator Differential Iad Generator Restraint Iar Generator Differential Ibd Generator Restraint Ibr Generator Differential Icd Generator Restraint Icr Stator Differential CT Primary RANGE --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 16 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 999.9 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 50000 UNITS --------------------------------------------ms ms ----------------channel seconds seconds days A A A A A A --STEP --1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 FORMAT F200 F001 F001 F001 F001 F200 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F126 F605 F605 F605 F605 F605 F500 F001 F001 F001 F001 F500 F001 F001 F001 F134 F134 F001 F050 F050 F001 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT (none) 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (No) 3 (Bad) 3 (Bad) 3 (Bad) 3 (Bad) 3 (Bad) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Fail) 0 (Fail) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
User Displays Actuals (Read Only) Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only) Element Targets (Read Only) 14C0 14C1 14C2 14C3 1500 1508 1510 1518 1520 1528 1530 1540 1542 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 15C0 15C8 15C9 15CA 15CB 15D0 15D1 15D2 15D3 1610 1611 1618 1619 161B 161D 1660 1662 1664 1666 1668 166A 166C
Element Targets (Read/Write) Element Targets (Read Only) Digital Input/Output States (Read Only)
Remote Input/Output States (Read Only)
Platform Direct Input/Output States (Read Only)
Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)
Data Logger Actuals (Read Only)
Stator Differential Actuals (Read Only)
B-10
GE Multilin

ADDR 1670 1672 1674 1680 1682 16A0 16A2 16A4 16A8 16AC 16B0 16B4 16E0 16E1 16E4 16E8 16EC 1800 1802 1804 1806 1808 180A 180B 180D 180E 1810 1811 1813 1814 1816 1818 1819 181B 181C 181E 181F 1821 1822 1824 1825 1840 1880 18C0 1900 1940 1A00 1A02 REGISTER NAME Stator Ground Vn 3rd Stator Ground Vn V0 3rd Stator Ground V0 3rd Sensitive Directional Power 1 Power Sensitive Directional Power 2 Power Differential Ground Current Magnitude Restricted Ground Current Magnitude ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 2 ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 3 ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 4 ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 5 ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 6 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Reserved (3 items) ...Repeated for Frequency Rate of Change 2 ...Repeated for Frequency Rate of Change 3 ...Repeated for Frequency Rate of Change 4 Source 1 Phase A Current RMS Source 1 Phase B Current RMS Source 1 Phase C Current RMS Source 1 Neutral Current RMS Source 1 Phase A Current Magnitude Source 1 Phase A Current Angle Source 1 Phase B Current Magnitude Source 1 Phase B Current Angle Source 1 Phase C Current Magnitude Source 1 Phase C Current Angle Source 1 Neutral Current Magnitude Source 1 Neutral Current Angle Source 1 Ground Current RMS Source 1 Ground Current Magnitude Source 1 Ground Current Angle Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle Source 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude Source 1 Differential Ground Current Angle Reserved (27 items) ...Repeated for Source 2 ...Repeated for Source 3 ...Repeated for Source 4 ...Repeated for Source 5 ...Repeated for Source 6 Source 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS Source 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS V V 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 --A A A A A degrees A degrees A degrees A degrees A A degrees A degrees A degrees A degrees A degrees --0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 ---327.67 to 327.67 0 to 65535 Hz/s --0.01 1 RANGE 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999
-2147483647 to 2147483647 -2147483647 to 2147483647
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
UNITS V V V W W A A
STEP 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 0.001 0.001
FORMAT F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060
DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Stator Ground Actuals (Read Only)
Sensitive Directional Power Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)
Restricted Ground Fault Currents (Read Only) (6 modules) 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999
Frequency Rate of Change Actuals (Read Only) (4 modules) F002 F001 0 0
Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules) F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules) F060 F060 0 0
GE Multilin
B-11
ADDR 1A04 1A06 1A08 1A09 1A0B 1A0C 1A0E 1A0F 1A11 1A13 1A15 1A17 1A18 1A1A 1A1B 1A1D 1A1E 1A20 1A22 1A23 1A25 1A26 1A28 1A29 1A2B 1A2C 1A40 1A80 1AC0 1B00 1B40 1C00 1C02 1C04 1C06 1C08 1C0A 1C0C 1C0E 1C10 1C12 1C14 1C16 1C18 1C19 REGISTER NAME Source 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle Reserved (20 items) ...Repeated for Source 2 ...Repeated for Source 3 ...Repeated for Source 4 ...Repeated for Source 5 ...Repeated for Source 6 Source 1 Three Phase Real Power Source 1 Phase A Real Power Source 1 Phase B Real Power Source 1 Phase C Real Power Source 1 Three Phase Reactive Power Source 1 Phase A Reactive Power Source 1 Phase B Reactive Power Source 1 Phase C Reactive Power Source 1 Three Phase Apparent Power Source 1 Phase A Apparent Power Source 1 Phase B Apparent Power Source 1 Phase C Apparent Power Source 1 Three Phase Power Factor Source 1 Phase A Power Factor -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -0.999 to 1 -0.999 to 1 W W W W var var var var VA VA VA VA ----0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F013 F013 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 --0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 RANGE UNITS V V degrees V degrees V degrees V V V V degrees V degrees V degrees V V degrees V degrees V degrees V degrees --0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 --0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 STEP FORMAT F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F060 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Source Power (Read Only) (6 modules) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B-12
GE Multilin

ADDR 1C1A 1C1B 1C1C 1C20 1C40 1C60 1C80 1CA0 1D00 1D02 1D04 1D06 1D08 1D10 1D20 1D30 1D40 1D50 1D60 1D80 1D82 1D84 1D86 1D88 1D8A 1F80 1F81 1F99 1F9A 1FB2 1FB3 1FCB 2016 2061 2230 2400 2402 2403 2404 2540 2542 2543 2545 2546 2548 2549 254B REGISTER NAME Source 1 Phase B Power Factor Source 1 Phase C Power Factor Reserved (4 items) ...Repeated for Source 2 ...Repeated for Source 3 ...Repeated for Source 4 ...Repeated for Source 5 ...Repeated for Source 6 Source 1 Positive Watthour Source 1 Negative Watthour Source 1 Positive Varhour Source 1 Negative Varhour Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for Source 2 ...Repeated for Source 3 ...Repeated for Source 4 ...Repeated for Source 5 ...Repeated for Source 6 Energy Clear Command Frequency for Source 1 Frequency for Source 2 Frequency for Source 3 Frequency for Source 4 Frequency for Source 5 Frequency for Source 6 Source 1 Va THD Source 1 Va Harmonics - 2nd to 25th (24 items) Source 1 Vb THD Source 1 Vb Harmonics - 2nd to 25th (24 items) Source 1 Vc THD Source 1 Vc Harmonics - 2nd to 25th (24 items) ...Repeated for Source 2 ...Repeated for Source 3 ...Repeated for Source 4 Reset Unauthorized Access Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase ...Repeated for Synchrocheck 2 PMU 1 Phase A Voltage Magnitude PMU Unit 1 Phase A Voltage Angle PMU 1 Phase B Voltage Magnitude PMU 1 Phase B Voltage Angle PMU 1 Phase C Voltage Magnitude PMU 1 Phase C Voltage Angle PMU 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude PMU 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 V V V V 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0 to 1 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 0 to 655.35 0 to 179.9 --V Hz degrees 1 1 0.01 0.1 0 to 1 ------------0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 --Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz ------------1 ------------0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0 to 1000000000000 0 to 1000000000000 0 to 1000000000000 0 to 1000000000000 --Wh Wh varh varh --0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 --RANGE -0.999 to 1 -0.999 to 1 --UNITS ------STEP 0.001 0.001 ---
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F013 F013 F001
DEFAULT 0 0 0
B
F060 F060 F060 F060 F001 0 0 0 0 0
Source Energy (Read Only Non-Volatile) (6 modules)
Energy Commands (Read/Write Command) F126 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 0 (No) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Source Frequency (Read Only) (6 modules)
Passwords Unauthorized Access (Read/Write Command) F126 F060 F001 F001 0 (No) 0 0 0 Synchrocheck Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)
Phasor Measurement Unit actual values (Read Only) (4 modules) F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
GE Multilin
B-13
ADDR 254C 254E 254F 2551 2552 2554 2555 2557 2558 255A 255B 255D 255E 2560 2561 2563 2564 2566 2567 2569 256A 256C 256D 256E 2608 260A 260C 2620 2621 2622 2628 2629 2632 263B 2644 26B0 26B1 26B2 26B3 26B4 26B5 26B6 26B7 26B8 26B9 26BA 26BB 26BC 26BD 26BE 26BF REGISTER NAME PMU 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude PMU 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle PMU 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude PMU 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle PMU 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude PMU 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle PMU 1 Phase A Current Magnitude PMU 1 Phase A Current Angle PMU 1 Phase B Current Magnitude PMU 1 Phase B Current Angle PMU 1 Phase C Current Magnitude PMU 1 Phase C Current Angle PMU 1 Ground Current Magnitude PMU 1 Ground Current Angle PMU 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude PMU 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle PMU 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude PMU 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle PMU 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude PMU 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle PMU 1 Frequency PMU 1 df/dt PMU 1 Configuration Change Counter Reserved (4 items) PMU 1 SOC timestamp PMU 1 FRAMESEC timestamp PMU 1 STAT flags Remote double-point status input 1 device Remote double-point status input 1 item Remote double-point status input 1 name Remote double-point status input 1 events ... Repeated for double-point status input 2 ... Repeated for double-point status input 3 ... Repeated for double-point status input 4 ... Repeated for double-point status input 5 IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 1 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 2 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 3 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 4 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 5 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 6 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 7 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 8 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 9 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 10 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 11 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 12 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 13 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 14 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 15 operand IEC 61850 GGIO5 uinteger input 16 operand ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------F612 F612 F612 F612 F612 F612 F612 F612 F612 F612 F612 F612 F612 F612 F612 F612 RANGE 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 2 to 90 -327.67 to 327.67 0 to 655.35 0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 1 to 32 0 to 128 1 to 64 0 to 1 --seconds seconds ----------UNITS V V V A A A A A A A Hz Hz/s STEP 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F003 F002 F001 F001 F003 F003 F003 F001 F156 F205 F102
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 (None) "Rem Ip 1" 0 (Disabled)
Phasor measurement unit integer values (read only actual value registers)
Remote double-point status inputs (read/write setting registers)
IEC 61850 GGIO5 configuration (read/write setting registers) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B-14
GE Multilin

ADDR 26F0 26F2 26F4 26F6 26F8 26FA 26FC 26FE 2700 2702 2704 2706 2708 270A 270C 270E 2800 2801 2821 2822 283A 2842 2843 285B 2863 28C6 2929 2B00 2D00 2D80 2E00 2F00 2F80 3000 3001 3002 3004 3005 3011 3060 3070 3071 3073 3090 REGISTER NAME IEC 61850 received uinteger 1 IEC 61850 received uinteger 2 IEC 61850 received uinteger 3 IEC 61850 received uinteger 4 IEC 61850 received uinteger 5 IEC 61850 received uinteger 6 IEC 61850 received uinteger 7 IEC 61850 received uinteger 8 IEC 61850 received uinteger 9 IEC 61850 received uinteger 10 IEC 61850 received uinteger 11 IEC 61850 received uinteger 12 IEC 61850 received uinteger 13 IEC 61850 received uinteger 14 IEC 61850 received uinteger 15 IEC 61850 received uinteger 16 Ia THD for Source 1 Ia Harmonics for Source 1 - 2nd to 25th (24 items) Ib THD for Source 1 Ib Harmonics for Source 1 - 2nd to 25th (24 items) Reserved (8 items) Ic THD for Source 1 Ic Harmonics for Source 1 - 2nd to 25th (24 items) Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for Source 2 ...Repeated for Source 3 ...Repeated for Source 4 FlexStates, one per register (256 items) Contact Input States, one per register (96 items) Contact Output States, one per register (64 items) Virtual Output States, one per register (96 items) Remote Device States, one per register (16 items) Remote Input States, one per register (64 items) Oscillography Number of Triggers Oscillography Available Records Oscillography Last Cleared Date Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record Oscillography Force Trigger Oscillography Clear Data User Fault Report Clear Newest Record Number Cleared Date Report Date (10 items) Fault Report 1 Fault Trigger 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 400000000 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 ----------------------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 RANGE 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 0 to 0.1 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9 0 to 0.1 UNITS ------------------------------------------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001
DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
IEC 61850 received integers (read only actual values)
Source Current THD And Harmonics (Read Only) (6 modules)
Expanded FlexStates (Read Only) F108 F108 F108 F108 F155 F108 F001 F001 F050 F001 F126 F126 F126 F001 F050 F050 F300 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Offline) 0 (Off) 0 0 0 0 0 (No) 0 (No) 0 (No) 0 0 0 0 Expanded Digital Input/Output states (Read Only)
Expanded Remote Input/Output Status (Read Only)
Oscillography Values (Read Only)
Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)
User Programmable Fault Report Commands (Read/Write Command) User Programmable Fault Report Actuals (Read Only)
User Programmable Fault Report (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
GE Multilin
B-15
ADDR 3091 3092 3093 30B3 30B8 3100 3200 3202 3203 3400 3402 3404 3406 34C0 34C2 34C4 34C6 34C8 34CA 34CC 34CE 34D0 34D2 34D4 34D6 34D8 34DA 34DC 34DE 34E0 34E2 34E4 34E6 34E8 34EA 34EC 34EE 34F0 34F1 34F2 34F3 34F4 34F5 34F6 34F7 34F8 34F9 34FA REGISTER NAME Fault Report 1 Function Fault Report 1 Prefault Trigger Fault Report Analog Channel 1 (32 items) Fault Report 1 Reserved (5 items) ...Repeated for Fault Report 2 Name of file to read Character position of current block within file Size of currently-available data block Block of data from requested file (122 items) Events Since Last Clear Number of Available Events Event Recorder Last Cleared Date Event Recorder Clear Command DCMA Inputs 1 Value DCMA Inputs 2 Value DCMA Inputs 3 Value DCMA Inputs 4 Value DCMA Inputs 5 Value DCMA Inputs 6 Value DCMA Inputs 7 Value DCMA Inputs 8 Value DCMA Inputs 9 Value DCMA Inputs 10 Value DCMA Inputs 11 Value DCMA Inputs 12 Value DCMA Inputs 13 Value DCMA Inputs 14 Value DCMA Inputs 15 Value DCMA Inputs 16 Value DCMA Inputs 17 Value DCMA Inputs 18 Value DCMA Inputs 19 Value DCMA Inputs 20 Value DCMA Inputs 21 Value DCMA Inputs 22 Value DCMA Inputs 23 Value DCMA Inputs 24 Value RTD Input 1 Value RTD Input 2 Value RTD Input 3 Value RTD Input 4 Value RTD Input 5 Value RTD Input 6 Value RTD Input 7 Value RTD Input 8 Value RTD Input 9 Value RTD Input 10 Value RTD Input 11 Value --0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 1 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -9999999 to 9999999 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 ----------------------------------------------------------------C C C C C C C C C C C --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F204 F003 F001 F001 F003 F003 F050 F126 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65536 --UNITS --------STEP 1 1 1 --FORMAT F102 F300 F600 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0
Modbus file transfer (read/write) (none) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (No) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Modbus file transfer values (read only)
Event recorder actual values (read only)
Event recorder commands (read/write) DCMA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules)
RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules)
B-16
GE Multilin

ADDR 34FB 34FC 34FD 34FE 34FF 3500 3501 3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507 3508 3509 350A 350B 350C 350D 350E 350F 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 351A 351B 351C 351D 351E 351F 3560 3570 37A0 37A1 37A2 37A3 37A4 37A5 37A6 37A7 37A8 4000 REGISTER NAME RTD Input 12 Value RTD Input 13 Value RTD Input 14 Value RTD Input 15 Value RTD Input 16 Value RTD Input 17 Value RTD Input 18 Value RTD Input 19 Value RTD Input 20 Value RTD Input 21 Value RTD Input 22 Value RTD Input 23 Value RTD Input 24 Value RTD Input 25 Value RTD Input 26 Value RTD Input 27 Value RTD Input 28 Value RTD Input 29 Value RTD Input 30 Value RTD Input 31 Value RTD Input 32 Value RTD Input 33 Value RTD Input 34 Value RTD Input 35 Value RTD Input 36 Value RTD Input 37 Value RTD Input 38 Value RTD Input 39 Value RTD Input 40 Value RTD Input 41 Value RTD Input 42 Value RTD Input 43 Value RTD Input 44 Value RTD Input 45 Value RTD Input 46 Value RTD Input 47 Value RTD Input 48 Value Direct Device States, one per register (8 items) Direct Input States, one per register (96 items) Frequency OOB Accumulator Band 1 Accumulation Frequency OOB Accumulator Band 2 Accumulation Frequency OOB Accumulator Band 3 Accumulation Frequency OOB Accumulator Band 4 Accumulation Frequency OOB Accumulator Band 5 Accumulation Frequency OOB Accumulator Band 6 Accumulation Frequency OOB Accumulator Band 7 Accumulation Reset Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulators Preset Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulators Command Password Setting RANGE -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 -32768 to 32767 0 to 1 0 to 1 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 to 999.9 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 UNITS C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C ----% % % % % % % ------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F155 F108 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F126 F126 F003
DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Offline) 0 (Off) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (No) 0 (No) 0
Expanded Direct Input/Output Status (Read Only)
Frequency out-of-band accumulation actual values (read only)
Frequency out-of-band accumulation commands (read/write)
Passwords (Read/Write Command)
GE Multilin
B-17
ADDR 4002 4008 REGISTER NAME Setting Password Setting Command Password Entry Setting Password Entry Command password status Setting password status Control password access timeout Setting password access timeout Invalid password attempts Password lockout duration Password access events Local setting authorization Remote setting authorization Access authorization timeout Invoke and Scroll Through User Display Menu Operand LED Test Function LED Test Control Language Flash Message Time Default Message Timeout Default Message Intensity Screen Saver Feature Screen Saver Wait Time Current Cutoff Level Voltage Cutoff Level RRTD Slave Address RRTD Baud Rate COM2 Selection COM1 minimum response time COM2 minimum response time Modbus Slave Address RS485 Com1 Baud Rate RS485 Com1 Parity RS485 Com2 Baud Rate RS485 Com2 Parity IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Network Address NSAP DNP Channel 1 Port DNP Channel 2 Port DNP Address Reserved DNP Client Addresses (2 items) TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol RANGE 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 1 0 to 1 5 to 480 5 to 480 2 to 5 5 to 60 0 to 1 1 to 65535 0 to 65535 5 to 480 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 3 0.5 to 10 10 to 900 0 to 3 0 to 1 1 to 65535 0.002 to 0.02 0.1 to 1 1 to 254 0 to 4 0 to 1 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 1 to 254 0 to 11 0 to 2 0 to 11 0 to 2 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 --0 to 4 0 to 4 0 to 65519 0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 UNITS ----------minutes minutes --minutes ------minutes --------s s ----min pu V ------ms ms --------------------------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.1 1 1 1 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F003 F003 F003 F102 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F102 F300 F300 F001 F300 F102 F300 F531 F001 F001 F101 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F602 F601 F001 F001 F001 F112 F113 F112 F113 F003 F003 F003 F074 F177 F177 F001 F001 F003 F001 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 5 30 3 5 0 (Disabled) 1 1 30 0 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (English) 10 300 0 (25%) 0 (Disabled) 30 20 10 254 4 (19200) 0 (RS485) 0 0 254 8 (115200) 0 (None) 8 (115200) 0 (None) 56554706 4294966272 56554497 0 0 (None) 0 (None) 1 0 0 502 20000
Passwords (Read/Write Setting) Passwords (Read/Write) 400A 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4040 4048 4049 404F 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 407A 407B 407D 407E 407F 4080 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4089 408B 408D 409A 409B 409C 409D 409E 40A3 40A4
Passwords (read only actual values)
Passwords (read/write settings)
User Display Invoke (Read/Write Setting) LED Test (Read/Write Setting)
Preferences (Read/Write Setting)
Remote RTD Communications (Read/Write Setting)
Communications (Read/Write Setting)
B-18
GE Multilin

ADDR 40A5 40A6 40A7 40A9 40AA 40AB 40AC 40AD 40AE 40AF 40B0 40B1 40B2 40B3 40B4 40B6 40B8 40BA 40BE 40C0 40C1 40C2 40C4 40C6 40C8 40C9 40CA 40E0 40E1 40E2 40E3 40E4 40E6 40E8 40EA 40EC 40EE 40F0 4104 4005 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147 4148 414A 414B 414C REGISTER NAME TCP Port Number for the HTTP (Web Server) Protocol Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol (zero means automatic) (2 items) DNP Unsolicited Responses Function DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout DNP unsolicited responses maximum retries DNP unsolicited responses destination address Ethernet operation mode DNP current scale factor DNP voltage scale factor DNP power scale factor DNP energy scale factor DNP power scale factor DNP other scale factor DNP current default deadband DNP voltage default deadband DNP power default deadband DNP energy default deadband DNP other default deadband DNP IIN time synchronization bit period DNP message fragment size DNP client address 3 DNP client address 4 DNP client address 5 DNP number of paired binary output control points DNP TCP connection timeout Reserved (22 items) TCP port number for the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol IEC 60870-5-104 protocol function IEC 60870-5-104 protocol common address of ASDU IEC 60870-5-104 protocol cyclic data transmit period IEC 60870-5-104 current default threshold IEC 60870-5-104 voltage default threshold IEC 60870-5-104 power default threshold IEC 60870-5-104 energy default threshold IEC 60870-5-104 power default threshold IEC 60870-5-104 other default threshold IEC 60870-5-104 client address (5 items) IEC 60870-5-104 redundancy port Reserved (59 items) DNP object 1 default variation DNP object 2 default variation DNP object 20 default variation DNP object 21 default variation DNP object 22 default variation DNP object 23 default variation DNP object 30 default variation DNP object 32 default variation Ethernet switch IP address Ethernet switch Modbus IP port number Ethernet switch Port 1 Events Ethernet switch Port 2 Events RANGE 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 60 1 to 255 0 to 65519 0 to 1 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 1 to 10080 30 to 2048 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 32 10 to 65535 0 to 1 1 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 1 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295 0 to 1 0 to 1 1 to 2 1 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 3 1 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 4294967295 1 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 UNITS --------s ----------------------------min --------------------s ------------------------------------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F001 F001 F001 F102 F001 F001 F001 F192 F194 F194 F194 F194 F194 F194 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F003 F003 F003 F001 F001 F001 F001 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F003 F126 F001 F001 F001 F523 F524 F523 F523 F001 F525 F003 F001 F102 F102
DEFAULT 80 69 0 0 (Disabled) 5 10 1 0 (Half-Duplex) 2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1) 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 1440 240 0 0 0 0 120 0 2404 0 (Disabled) 0 60 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 30000 0 0 (No) 0 2 2 0 (1) 0 (1) 0 (1) 0 (1) 1 0 (1) 3232235778 502 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled)
Ethernet switch (Read/Write Setting)
GE Multilin
B-19
ADDR 414D 414E 414F 4150 REGISTER NAME Ethernet switch Port 3 Events Ethernet switch Port 4 Events Ethernet switch Port 5 Events Ethernet switch Port 6 Events Ethernet switch MAC address Ethernet switch Port 1 Status Ethernet switch Port 2 Status Ethernet switch Port 3 Status Ethernet switch Port 4 Status Ethernet switch Port 5 Status Ethernet switch Port 6 Status Switch Firmware Version Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) function Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server IP address Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) UDP port number Data Logger Clear Data Logger Channel Settings (16 items) Data Logger Mode Data Logger Trigger Data Logger Rate Real Time Clock Set Time SR Date Format SR Time Format IRIG-B Signal Type Clock Events Enable / Disable Time Zone Offset from UTC Daylight Savings Time (DST) Function Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Month Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Day Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Day Instance Daylight Savings Time (DST) Start Hour Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Month Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Day Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Day Instance Daylight Savings Time (DST) Stop Hour Oscillography Number of Records Oscillography Trigger Mode Oscillography Trigger Position Oscillography Trigger Source Oscillography AC Input Waveforms Oscillography Analog Channel n (16 items) Oscillography Digital Channel n (63 items) Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 --0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0.00 to 99.99 0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 1 to 65535 0 to 1 --0 to 1 0 to 65535 15 to 3600000 0 to 235959 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 2 0 to 1 24 to 24 0 to 1 0 to 11 0 to 6 0 to 4 0 to 23 0 to 11 0 to 6 0 to 4 0 to 23 1 to 64 0 to 1 0 to 100 0 to 65535 0 to 4 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 UNITS --------------------------------------ms ----------hours ----------------------% --------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F102 F102 F102 F102 F072 F134 F134 F134 F134 F134 F134 F001 F102 F003 F001 F126 F600 F260 F300 F003 F050 F051 F052 F114 F102 F002 F102 F237 F238 F239 F001 F237 F238 F239 F001 F001 F118 F001 F300 F183 F600 F300 F300 F300 F300
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Fail) 0 (Fail) 0 (Fail) 0 (Fail) 0 (Fail) 0 (Fail) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 123 0 (No) 0 0 (continuous) 0 60000 0 0 0 0 (None) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (January) 0 (Sunday) 0 (First) 2 0 (January) 0 (Sunday) 0 (First) 2 5 0 (Auto. Overwrite) 50 0 2 (16 samples/cycle) 0 0 0 0 0
Ethernet switch (Read Only Actual Values) 4151 4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 4159 415A 4168 4169 416B 4170 4181 4191 4192 4193 41A0 41A2 41A4 41A6 41A7 41A8 41A9 41AA 41AB 41AC 41AD 41AE 41AF 41B0 41B1 41C0 41C1 41C2 41C3 41C4 41D0 4200 4260 4261 4280
Simple Network Time Protocol (Read/Write Setting)
Data Logger Commands (Read/Write Command) Data Logger (Read/Write Setting)
Clock (Read/Write Command) Clock (Read/Write Setting)
Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)
Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)
User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
B-20
GE Multilin

ADDR 4281 4282 4284 4286 4288 428A 428C 428E 4290 4292 4294 4296 4298 429A 429C 429E 42A0 42A2 42A4 42A6 42A8 42AA 42AC 42AE 42B0 42B2 42B4 42B6 42B8 42BA 42BC 42BE 42C0 42C2 42C4 42C6 42C8 42CA 42CC 42CE 42D0 42D2 42D4 42D6 42D8 42DA 42DC 42DE 43E0 43E1 4441 4442 REGISTER NAME User LED type (latched or self-resetting) ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 2 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 3 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 4 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 5 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 6 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 7 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 8 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 9 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 10 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 11 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 12 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 13 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 14 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 15 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 16 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 17 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 18 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 19 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 20 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 21 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 22 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 23 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 24 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 25 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 26 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 27 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 28 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 29 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 30 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 31 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 32 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 33 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 34 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 35 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 36 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 37 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 38 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 39 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 40 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 41 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 42 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 43 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 44 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 45 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 46 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 47 ...Repeated for User-Programmable LED 48 Relay Programmed State Relay Name User Programmable Detect Ring Break Function User Programmable Direct Device Off Function 0 to 1 --0 to 1 0 to 1 --------1 --1 1 RANGE 0 to 1 UNITS --STEP 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F127
DEFAULT 1 (Self-Reset)
Installation (Read/Write Setting) F133 F202 F102 F102 0 (Not Programmed) Relay-1 1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)
User Programmable Self Tests (Read/Write Setting)
GE Multilin
B-21
ADDR 4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 4448 4449 4480 4481 4482 4483 4484 4488 448C 4490 4494 4500 4501 4502 4504 4505 4506 4508 4510 4580 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 458E 4595 459C 45A3 4600 4601 4602 4603 4604 4700 4701 4704 4705 4706 4707 4708 4709 470A 470B REGISTER NAME User Programmable Remote Device Off Function User Programmable Primary Ethernet Fail Function User Programmable Secondary Ethernet Fail Function User Programmable Battery Fail Function User Programmable SNTP Fail Function User Programmable IRIG-B Fail Function User Programmable Ethernet Switch Fail Function Phase CT 1 Primary Phase CT 1 Secondary Ground CT 1 Primary Ground CT 1 Secondary ...Repeated for CT Bank 2 ...Repeated for CT Bank 3 ...Repeated for CT Bank 4 ...Repeated for CT Bank 5 ...Repeated for CT Bank 6 Phase VT 1 Connection Phase VT 1 Secondary Phase VT 1 Ratio Auxiliary VT 1 Connection Auxiliary VT 1 Secondary Auxiliary VT 1 Ratio ...Repeated for VT Bank 2 ...Repeated for VT Bank 3 Source 1 Name Source 1 Phase CT Source 1 Ground CT Source 1 Phase VT Source 1 Auxiliary VT ...Repeated for Source 2 ...Repeated for Source 3 ...Repeated for Source 4 ...Repeated for Source 5 ...Repeated for Source 6 Nominal Frequency Phase Rotation Frequency And Phase Reference Frequency Tracking Function Reverse Phase Rotation Breaker 1 function Breaker 1 name Breaker 1 mode Breaker 1 open Breaker 1 close Breaker 1 phase A / three-pole closed Breaker 1 phase B closed Breaker 1 phase C closed Breaker 1 external alarm Breaker 1 alarm delay 25 to 60 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 --0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1000000 Hz --------------------------s 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 F001 F106 F167 F102 F300 F102 F206 F157 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F003 --0 to 63 0 to 63 0 to 63 0 to 63 ------------1 1 1 1 F206 F400 F400 F400 F400 0 to 1 50 to 240 1 to 24000 0 to 6 50 to 240 1 to 24000 --V :1 --V :1 1 0.1 1 1 0.1 1 F100 F001 F060 F166 F001 F060 RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 1 to 65000 0 to 1 1 to 65000 0 to 1 UNITS --------------A --A --STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F102 F102 F102 F102 F102 F102 F102 F001 F123 F001 F123
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 1 (Enabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled) 0 (Disabled) 1 0 (1 A) 1 0 (1 A)
CT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules) 0 (Wye) 664 1 1 (Vag) 664 1
Source Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules) SRC 1" 0 0 0 0
Power System (Read/Write Setting) 60 0 (ABC) 0 (SRC 1) 1 (Enabled) 0 0 (Disabled) Bkr 1" 0 (3-Pole) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Breaker control (read/write settings)
B-22
GE Multilin

ADDR 470D 470E 4710 4711 4712 4713 4714 4715 4716 4717 4718 4719 4732 474B 47A0 47A1 47A2 47A3 47A5 47A6 47A7 47A8 47A9 47AA 47AB 47AC 47AD 47AE 47AF 47B0 4800 48F0 4A00 4C00 4C0A 4C14 4C19 4C20 4C40 4C60 4C80 4CA0 4CC0 4CE0 4D00 4D20 4D40 4D60 4D80 4DA0 REGISTER NAME Breaker 1 pushbutton control Breaker 1 manual close recall time Breaker 1 out of service Breaker 1 block open Breaker 1 block close Breaker 1 phase A / three-pole opened Breaker 1 phase B opened Breaker 1 phase C opened Breaker 1 operate time Breaker 1 events Reserved ...Repeated for breaker 2 ...Repeated for breaker 3 ...Repeated for breaker 4 Synchrocheck 1 Function Synchrocheck 1 V1 Source Synchrocheck 1 V2 Source Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Voltage Difference Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Angle Difference Synchrocheck 1 Maximum Frequency Difference Synchrocheck 1 Dead Source Select Synchrocheck 1 Dead V1 Maximum Voltage Synchrocheck 1 Dead V2 Maximum Voltage Synchrocheck 1 Live V1 Minimum Voltage Synchrocheck 1 Live V2 Minimum Voltage Synchrocheck 1 Target Synchrocheck 1 Events Synchrocheck 1 Block Synchrocheck 1 Frequency Hysteresis ...Repeated for Synchrocheck 2 FlexCurve A (120 items) FlexCurve B (120 items) Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 items) User-Definable Display 1 Top Line Text User-Definable Display 1 Bottom Line Text Modbus Addresses of Display 1 Items (5 items) Reserved (7 items) ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 2 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 3 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 4 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 5 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 6 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 7 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 8 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 9 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 10 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 11 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 12 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 13 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 14 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 ----0 to 65535 --ms ms ----------1 1 1 ----1 --0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 400000 0 to 100 0 to 2 0 to 5 0 to 1.25 0 to 1.25 0 to 1.25 0 to 1.25 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 0.1 ------V degrees Hz --pu pu pu pu ------Hz 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 0.01 RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 1000000 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 --UNITS --s ------------s ----STEP 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 1 ---
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F102 F003 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F001 F102 ---
DEFAULT 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 0 (Disabled) ---
Synchrocheck (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules) F102 F167 F167 F060 F001 F001 F176 F001 F001 F001 F001 F109 F102 F300 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1 (SRC 2) 10000 30 100 1 (LV1 and DV2) 30 30 70 70 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 6
Flexcurves A and B (Read/Write Settings) F011 F011 F001 F202 F202 F001 F001 0 0 0 0 0
Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting) User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
GE Multilin
B-23
ADDR 4DC0 4DE0 4E00 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 15 ...Repeated for User-Definable Display 16 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop-Out Time User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events User Programmable Pushbutton 1 LED Operand User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Delay User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Function User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Local Lock User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Message Priority User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Remote Lock User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Reset User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Set ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 2 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 3 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 4 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 5 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 6 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 7 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 8 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 9 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 10 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 11 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 12 FlexLogic Entry (512 items) RTD Input 1 Function RTD Input 1 ID RTD Input 1 Type RTD Input 1 Application RTD Input 1 Alarm Temperature RTD Input 1 Alarm Pickup Delay RTD Input 1 Trip Temperature RTD Input 1 Trip Pickup Delay RTD Input 1 Trip Reset Delay RTD Input 1 Trip Voting RTD Input 1 Open RTD Input 1 Block RTD Input 1 Target RTD Input 1 Events ...Repeated for RTD Input 2 ...Repeated for RTD Input 3 ...Repeated for RTD Input 4 ...Repeated for RTD Input 5 ...Repeated for RTD Input 6 ...Repeated for RTD Input 7 ...Repeated for RTD Input 8 ...Repeated for RTD Input 9 0 to 65535 0 to 1 --0 to 3 0 to 5 1 to 249 0 to 600 1 to 249 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 48 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 ----------C s C s s ----------1 1 --1 1 1 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 F300 F102 F205 F174 F550 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F551 F552 F300 F109 F102 0 to 2 ------0 to 60 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 600 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 --------s ------s ------------1 ------0.05 1 1 1 0.05 1 1 1 1 1 1 F109 F202 F202 F202 F001 F109 F102 F300 F001 F102 F300 F220 F300 F300 F300 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (12 modules) 2 (Disabled) (none) (none) (none) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 4E01 4E0B 4E15 4E1F 4E20 4E21 4E22 4E23 4E24 4E25 4E26 4E27 4E28 4E29 4E2A 4E54 4E7E 4EA8 4ED2 4EFC 4F26 4F50 4F7A 4FA4 4FCE 5000 5400 5401 5407 5407 5407 5407 540B 540C 540D 540E 540F 5410 5411 5412 5413 5426 5439 544C 545F 5472 5485 5498
Flexlogic (Read/Write Setting) 16384 0 (Disabled) RTD Ip 1 0 (100 ohm Platinum) 0 (None) 130 0 130 0 0 0 0 (None) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
B-24
GE Multilin

ADDR 54AB 54BE 54D1 54E4 54F7 550A 551D 5530 5543 5556 5569 557C 558F 55A2 55B5 55C8 55DB 55EE 5601 5614 5627 563A 564D 5660 5673 5686 5699 56AC 56BF 56D2 56E5 56F8 570B 571E 5731 5744 5757 576A 577D 5800 5801 5802 5803 5808 5810 5818 5820 5828 5830 5838 5840 5848 5850 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for RTD Input 10 ...Repeated for RTD Input 11 ...Repeated for RTD Input 12 ...Repeated for RTD Input 13 ...Repeated for RTD Input 14 ...Repeated for RTD Input 15 ...Repeated for RTD Input 16 ...Repeated for RTD Input 17 ...Repeated for RTD Input 18 ...Repeated for RTD Input 19 ...Repeated for RTD Input 20 ...Repeated for RTD Input 21 ...Repeated for RTD Input 22 ...Repeated for RTD Input 23 ...Repeated for RTD Input 24 ...Repeated for RTD Input 25 ...Repeated for RTD Input 26 ...Repeated for RTD Input 27 ...Repeated for RTD Input 28 ...Repeated for RTD Input 29 ...Repeated for RTD Input 30 ...Repeated for RTD Input 31 ...Repeated for RTD Input 32 ...Repeated for RTD Input 33 ...Repeated for RTD Input 34 ...Repeated for RTD Input 35 ...Repeated for RTD Input 36 ...Repeated for RTD Input 37 ...Repeated for RTD Input 38 ...Repeated for RTD Input 39 ...Repeated for RTD Input 40 ...Repeated for RTD Input 41 ...Repeated for RTD Input 42 ...Repeated for RTD Input 43 ...Repeated for RTD Input 44 ...Repeated for RTD Input 45 ...Repeated for RTD Input 46 ...Repeated for RTD Input 47 ...Repeated for RTD Input 48 FlexLogic Timer 1 Type FlexLogic Timer 1 Pickup Delay FlexLogic Timer 1 Dropout Delay Reserved (5 items) ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 2 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 3 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 4 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 5 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 6 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 7 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 8 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 9 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 10 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 11 0 to 2 0 to 60000 0 to 60000 0 to 65535 --------1 1 1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Flexlogic Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules) F129 F001 F001 F001 0 (millisecond) 0 0 0
GE Multilin
B-25
ADDR 5858 5860 5868 5870 5878 5880 5888 5890 5898 58A0 58A8 58B0 58B8 58C0 58C8 58D0 58D8 58E0 58E8 58F0 58F8 5900 5901 5902 5903 5904 5905 5906 5907 5908 590B 590C 590D 5910 5920 5930 5940 5950 5A00 5A01 5A02 5A03 5A04 5A05 5A06 5A07 5A08 5A09 5A0A 5A10 5A20 5A30 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 12 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 13 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 14 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 15 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 16 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 17 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 18 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 19 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 20 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 21 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 22 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 23 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 24 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 25 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 26 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 27 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 28 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 29 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 30 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 31 ...Repeated for FlexLogic Timer 32 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Function Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Input Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Curve Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Reset Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Voltage Restraint Phase TOC 1 Block For Each Phase (3 items) Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Target Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (3 items) ...Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 2 ...Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 3 ...Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 4 ...Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 5 ...Repeated for Phase Time Overcurrent 6 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay Phase IOC1 Block For Phase A Phase IOC1 Block For Phase B Phase IOC1 Block For Phase C Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (6 items) ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 4 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 30 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 ----pu s s ------------1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F300 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 30 0 to 16 0 to 600 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------pu ----------------1 1 1 0.001 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 F102 F167 F122 F001 F103 F001 F104 F102 F300 F109 F102 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Phase Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Phasor) 1000 0 (IEEE Mod Inv) 100 0 (Instantaneous) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1000 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
B-26
GE Multilin

ADDR 5A40 5A50 5A60 5A70 5A80 5A90 5AA0 5AB0 5B00 5B01 5B02 5B03 5B04 5B05 5B06 5B07 5B08 5B09 5B0A 5B10 5B20 5B30 5B40 5B50 5C00 5C01 5C02 5C03 5C04 5C05 5C06 5C07 5C08 5C10 5C20 5C30 5C40 5C50 5C60 5C70 5C80 5C90 5CA0 5CB0 5D00 5D01 5D02 5D03 5D04 5D05 5D06 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 5 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 6 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 7 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 8 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 9 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 10 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 11 ...Repeated for Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 12 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Function Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Input Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Curve Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Reset Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Block Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Target Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (6 items) ...Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 2 ...Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 3 ...Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 4 ...Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 5 ...Repeated for Neutral Time Overcurrent 6 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 4 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 5 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 6 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 7 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 8 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 9 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 10 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 11 ...Repeated for Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 12 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Function Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Input Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Curve Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Reset 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 30 0 to 16 0 to 600 0 to 1 ------pu ------1 1 1 0.001 1 0.01 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 30 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 ----pu s s --------1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 30 0 to 16 0 to 600 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------pu --------------1 1 1 0.001 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B
F102 F167 F122 F001 F103 F001 F104 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Phasor) 1000 0 (IEEE Mod Inv) 100 0 (Instantaneous) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Neutral Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules) F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1000 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Ground Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules) F102 F167 F122 F001 F103 F001 F104 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Phasor) 1000 0 (IEEE Mod Inv) 100 0 (Instantaneous)
GE Multilin
B-27
ADDR 5D07 5D08 5D09 5D0A 5D10 5D20 5D30 5D40 5D50 5E00 5E01 5E02 5E03 5E04 5E05 5E06 5E07 5E08 5E10 5E20 5E30 5E40 5E50 5E60 5E70 5E80 5E90 5EA0 5EB0 5F40 5F41 5F42 5F43 5F44 5F45 5F46 5F47 5F48 5F49 5F4A 5F4B 5F4C 5F4D 5F4E 5F4F 5F50 5F51 5F52 5F53 5F54 5F55 5F56 REGISTER NAME Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Block Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Target Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (6 items) ...Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 2 ...Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 3 ...Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 4 ...Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 5 ...Repeated for Ground Time Overcurrent 6 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 4 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 5 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 6 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 7 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 8 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 9 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 10 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 11 ...Repeated for Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 12 Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulation Block Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulation Events Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 1 Function Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 2 Function Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 3 Function Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 4 Function Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 5 Function Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 6 Function Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 7 Function Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 1 Lower Frequency Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 2 Lower Frequency Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 3 Lower Frequency Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 4 Lower Frequency Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 5 Lower Frequency Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 6 Lower Frequency Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 7 Lower Frequency Frequency OOB Accumulation Minimum Volts/Amps Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulation Source Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulation Target Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 1 Time Limit Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 2 Time Limit Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 3 Time Limit Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 4 Time Limit 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 20.00 to 70.00 20.00 to 70.00 20.00 to 70.00 20.00 to 70.00 20.00 to 70.00 20.00 to 70.00 20.00 to 70.00 0.10 to 1.25 0 to 5 0 to 2 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 ------------------Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz pu ----s s s s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 F300 F102 F102 F102 F102 F102 F102 F102 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F167 F109 F001 F001 F001 F001 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 30 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 ----pu s s --------1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 F167 F102 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 RANGE 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 UNITS --------STEP 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F300 F109 F102 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Disabled) 1000 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulation (Read/Write Setting) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 10 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Self-reset) 200 200 200 200
B-28
GE Multilin

ADDR 5F57 5F58 5F59 5F5A 5F5B 5F5C 5F5D 5F5E 5F5F 5F60 5F61 5F62 5F63 5F64 5F65 5F66 5F67 5F80 5F81 5F82 5F89 5F8A 5F8B 5F8C 5F94 5F9C 5FA4 5FAC 5FB4 6470 6471 6472 6473 6474 6475 6476 6477 6478 6479 647A 64A0 64A1 64A2 64A3 64A4 64A5 64A6 64A7 REGISTER NAME Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 5 Time Limit Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 6 Time Limit Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 7 Time Limit Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 1 Time Preset Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 2 Time Preset Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 3 Time Preset Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 4 Time Preset Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 5 Time Preset Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 6 Time Preset Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 7 Time Preset Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 1 Upper Frequency Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 2 Upper Frequency Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 3 Upper Frequency Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 4 Upper Frequency Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 5 Upper Frequency Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 6 Upper Frequency Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulator 7 Upper Frequency Setting Group for Modbus Comms (0 means group 1) Setting Groups Block FlexLogic to Activate Groups 2 through 6 (5 items) Setting Group Function Setting Group Events Current Setting Group Setting Group 1 Name Setting Group 2 Name Setting Group 3 Name Setting Group 4 Name Setting Group 5 Name Setting Group 6 Name Stator Differential Function Stator Differential Pickup Stator Differential Slope 1 Stator Differential Slope 2 Stator Differential Break 1 Stator Differential Break 2 Stator Differential Block Stator Differential Targets Stator Differential Events Stator Differential Line End Source Stator Differential Neutral End Source Negative Sequence Overvoltage Function Negative Sequence Overvoltage Source Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup Negative Sequence Overvoltage Pickup Delay Negative Sequence Overvoltage Reset Delay Negative Sequence Overvoltage Block Negative Sequence Overvoltage Target Negative Sequence Overvoltage Events RANGE 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 20.00 to 70.00 20.00 to 70.00 20.00 to 70.00 20.00 to 70.00 20.00 to 70.00 20.00 to 70.00 20.00 to 70.00 0 to 5 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 ------------0 to 1 0.05 to 1 1 to 100 1 to 100 1 to 1.5 1.5 to 30 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1.25 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 UNITS s s s s s s s s s s Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz --------------------------pu % % pu pu --------------pu s s ------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 ------------1 0.001 1 1 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F300 F300 F102 F102 F001 F203 F203 F203 F203 F203 F203 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F167 F167 F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102
DEFAULT 200 200 200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 0 (none) (none) (none) (none) (none) (none) 0 (Disabled) 100 10 80 115 800 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 300 50 50 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled)
Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)
Setting Groups (Read Only) Setting Group Names (Read/Write Setting)
Stator Differential (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
Negative Sequence Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
GE Multilin
B-29
ADDR 64D0 64D1 64D2 64D3 64D4 64D5 64D6 64D7 64D8 64DC 64E8 64F4 65C0 65C1 65C2 65C3 65C4 65C5 65C6 65C7 65C8 65C9 65CA 65CB 65CC 65CD 65CE 65CF 65D0 65D1 65D2 65D3 65D4 65D5 65D6 65D7 65D8 65D9 65DA 65DB 65DC 65DD 65DE 65DF 6660 6661 6662 6663 6665 6667 6668 REGISTER NAME Overfrequency 1 Function Overfrequency 1 Block Overfrequency 1 Source Overfrequency 1 Pickup Overfrequency 1 Pickup Delay Overfrequency 1 Reset Delay Overfrequency 1 Target Overfrequency 1 Events Reserved (4 items) ...Repeated for Overfrequency 2 ...Repeated for Overfrequency 3 ...Repeated for Overfrequency 4 Power Swing Detect Function Power Swing Detect Source Power Swing Detect Mode Power Swing Detect Supervision Power Swing Detect Forward Reach Power Swing Detect Forward RCA Power Swing Detect Reverse Reach Power Swing Detect Reverse RCA Power Swing Detect Outer Limit Angle Power Swing Detect Middle Limit Angle Power Swing Detect Inner Limit Angle Power Swing Detect Delay 1 Pickup Power Swing Detect Delay 1 Reset Power Swing Detect Delay 2 Pickup Power Swing Detect Delay 3 Pickup Power Swing Detect Delay 4 Pickup Power Swing Detect Seal In Delay Power Swing Detect Trip Mode Power Swing Detect Block Power Swing Detect Target Power Swing Detect Event Power Swing Detect Shape Power Swing Detect Quad Forward Middle Power Swing Detect Quad Forward Outer Power Swing Detect Quad Reverse Middle Power Swing Detect Quad Reverse Outer Power Swing Detect Outer Right Blinder Power Swing Detect Outer Left Blinder Power Swing Detect Middle Right Blinder Power Swing Detect Middle Left Blinder Power Swing Detect Inner Right Blinder Power Swing Detect Inner Left Blinder Accidental Energization Function Accidental Energization Source Accidental Energization Arming Mode Accidental Energization OC Pickup Accidental Energization UV Pickup Accidental Energization Offline Accidental Energization Block 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0.05 to 30 0.1 to 500 40 to 90 0.1 to 500 40 to 90 40 to 140 40 to 140 40 to 140 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0.1 to 500 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 ------pu ohms degrees ohms degrees degrees degrees degrees s s s s s s ----------ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms --------------1 1 1 0.001 0.01 1 0.01 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 1 1 F102 F167 F513 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F514 F300 F109 F102 F085 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F102 F167 F193 F003 F003 F300 F300 RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 5 20 to 65 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 UNITS ------Hz s s ------STEP 1 1 1 0.01 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 FORMAT F102 F300 F167 F001 F001 F001 F109 F102 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (SRC 1) 6050 500 500 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Overfrequency (Read/Write Setting) (4 modules)
Power Swing Detect (Read/Write Grouped Setting) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Two Step) 600 5000 75 5000 75 120 90 60 30 50 17 9 17 400 0 (Delayed) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Mho Shape) 6000 7000 6000 7000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (UV AND OFFLINE) 300 500 0 0
Accidental Energization (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
B-30
GE Multilin

ADDR 6669 666A 666B 6680 6681 6682 6683 6684 6685 6686 6687 6688 6689 668A 668B 668C 668D 668E 66A0 66A1 66A2 66A3 66A4 66A5 66A6 66A7 66A8 66A9 66AA 66AB 66B0 6730 6731 6733 6734 6736 6738 6739 673A 673B 673C 6740 6741 6742 6743 6744 6745 6746 6747 6748 REGISTER NAME Accidental Energization Target Accidental Energization Events Reserved (5 items) Loss Of Excitation Function Loss Of Excitation Signal Source Loss Of Excitation Center 1 Loss Of Excitation Radius 1 Loss Of Excitation UV Supervision Enable 1 Loss Of Excitation Pickup Delay 1 Loss Of Excitation Center 2 Loss Of Excitation Radius 2 Loss Of Excitation UV Supervision Enable 2 Loss Of Excitation Pickup Delay 2 Loss Of Excitation UV Supervision Loss Of Excitation Block Loss Of Excitation Target Loss Of Excitation Events Reserved (5 items) Sensitive Directional Power 1 Function Sensitive Directional Power 1 Signal Source Sensitive Directional Power 1 RCA Sensitive Directional Power 1 Calibration Sensitive Directional Power 1 STG1 SMIN Sensitive Directional Power 1 STG1 Delay Sensitive Directional Power 1 STG2 SMIN Sensitive Directional Power 1 STG2 Delay Sensitive Directional Power 1 Block Sensitive Directional Power 1 Target Sensitive Directional Power 1 Events Reserved (5 items) ...Repeated for Sensitive Directional Power 2 Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Function Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Pickup Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Delay Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Max Power Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Min Power Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Volt Supervision Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Block Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Target Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Events Reserved (4 items) Generator Unbalance Function Generator Unbalance Source Generator Unbalance Source Generator Unbalance Stage 1 Pickup Generator Unbalance Stage 1 K value Generator Unbalance Stage 1 Tmin Generator Unbalance Stage 1 Tmax Generator Unbalance Stage 1 K Reset Generator Unbalance Stage 2 Pickup 0 to 1 0 to 30 0 to 600 0 to 30 0 to 30 0 to 1.25 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1.25 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 50 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 0 to 100 --pu s pu pu pu ------------pu % --s s s % 1 0.0001 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.01 RANGE 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 5 0.1 to 300 0.1 to 300 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 0.1 to 300 0.1 to 300 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 0 to 1.25 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 359 0 to 0.95 -1.2 to 1.2 0 to 600 -1.2 to 1.2 0 to 600 --0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 UNITS ----------ohm ohm --s ohm ohm --s pu ------------degrees degrees pu s pu s --------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.05 0.001 0.01 0.001 0.01 --1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F109 F102 F001 F102 F167 F001 F001 F102 F001 F001 F001 F102 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 F102 F167 F001 F001 F002 F001 F002 F001 F001 F109 F102 F001
DEFAULT 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1000 800 1 (Enabled) 50 1200 1000 1 (Enabled) 500 700 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 0 100 50 100 2000 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Loss of Excitation (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
Sensitive Directional Power (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) F102 F003 F001 F003 F003 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 0 (Disabled) 3000 0 200 200 500 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 800 800 100 250 6000 2400 300
Generator Unbalance (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
GE Multilin
B-31
ADDR 6749 674A 674B 674C 674D 6750 6780 6781 6782 6783 6784 6785 6786 6787 6788 6789 678A 67A0 67A1 67A2 67A3 67A4 67A5 67A6 67A7 67A8 67A9 67AA 67AB 67AC 67AD 67AE 67AF 67B0 67B1 67B2 7000 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 700A 7013 7040 REGISTER NAME Generator Unbalance Stage 2 Pickup Delay Generator Unbalance Block Generator Unbalance Target Generator Unbalance Events Reserved (3 items) Stator Ground Source Stator Ground Function Stator Ground Stage 1 Pickup Stator Ground Stage 1 Pickup Delay Stator Ground Stage 1 Supervision Stator Ground Stage 2 Pickup Stator Ground Stage 2 Pickup Delay Stator Ground Stage 2 Supervision Stator Ground Block Stator Ground Target Stator Ground Event Reserved (5 items) Split Phase Protection Function Split Phase Protection Source Split Phase Protection Load Source Split Phase Protection Phase A Pickup Split Phase Protection Phase A Offset Split Phase Protection Phase A Slope Split Phase Protection Phase B Pickup Split Phase Protection Phase B Offset Split Phase Protection Phase B Slope Split Phase Protection Phase C Pickup Split Phase Protection Phase C Offset Split Phase Protection Phase C Slope Split Phase Protection Minimum Load Split Phase Protection Mode Split Phase Protection Delay Split Phase Protection Block Split Phase Protection Target Split Phase Protection Events Reserved (6 items) Phase Undervoltage 1 Function Phase Undervoltage 1 Signal Source Phase Undervoltage 1 Pickup Phase Undervoltage 1 Curve Phase Undervoltage 1 Delay Phase Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage Phase Undervoltage 1 Block Phase Undervoltage 1 Target Phase Undervoltage 1 Events Phase Undervoltage 1 Measurement Mode Reserved (6 items) ...Repeated for Phase Undervoltage 2 Phase Overvoltage 1 Function 0 to 1 --1 F102 RANGE 0 to 1000 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 0.900 0 to 600 0.001 to 0.100 0 to 0.900 0 to 600 0.001 to 0.100 --0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 5 0.020 to 1.500 0 to 1 0 to 100 0.020 to 1.500 0 to 1 0 to 100 0.020 to 1.500 0 to 1 0 to 100 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 3 0 to 1 0 to 600 0 to 3 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 UNITS s ------------pu s pu pu s pu --------------pu pu % pu pu % pu pu % pu --s ------------pu --s pu ----------STEP 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.01 0.0001 0.001 0.01 0.0001 --1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.01 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 1 0.01 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 F167 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F109 F102 F001 F102 F167 F167 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F225 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 F102 F167 F001 F111 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F186 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 50 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Disabled) 150 100 57 150 0 45 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC1) 0 (SRC1) 200 0 0 200 0 0 200 0 0 0 0 (Over) 0 0 0 (Self-Reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 1000 0 (Definite Time) 100 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Phase to Ground) 0
Stator Ground Source (Read/Write Grouped Setting) Stator Ground (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
Split Phase Protection (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
Phase Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) 0 (Disabled)
B-32
GE Multilin

ADDR 7041 7042 7043 7044 7045 7046 7047 7048 7060 7061 7062 7062 7070 7071 7072 7073 7074 7075 7076 7077 7078 707A 707B 707C 7081 7082 7083 7084 7085 7086 7090 70B0 7260 7261 7262 7263 7264 7265 7266 7267 7268 7270 7280 7281 7282 7283 7284 7285 7286 7287 REGISTER NAME Phase Overvoltage 1 Source Phase Overvoltage 1 Pickup Phase Overvoltage 1 Delay Phase Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay Phase Overvoltage 1 Block Phase Overvoltage 1 Target Phase Overvoltage 1 Events Reserved (8 items) Distance Signal Source Memory Duration Force Self-Polarization Force Memory Polarization Phase Distance Zone 1 Function Phase Distance Zone 1 Current Supervision Phase Distance Zone 1 Reach Phase Distance Zone 1 Direction Phase Distance Zone 1 Comparator Limit Phase Distance Zone 1 Delay Phase Distance Zone 1 Block Phase Distance Zone 1 Target Phase Distance Zone 1 Events Phase Distance Zone 1 RCA Phase Distance Zone 1 DIR RCA Phase Distance Zone 1 DIR Comp Limit Phase Distance Zone 1 Volt Limit Phase Distance Zone 1 Transformer Voltage Connection Phase Distance Zone 1 Transformer Current Connection Phase Distance Zone 1 Rev Reach Phase Distance Zone 1 Rev Reach RCA Reserved (10 items) ...Repeated for Phase Distance Zone 2 ...Repeated for Phase Distance Zone 3 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Function Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Source Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Block Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 ECA Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Pol V Threshold Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Block Overcurrent Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Target Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Events Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for Phase Directional Overcurrent 2 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Function Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Source Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Polarizing Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward ECA Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Limit Angle Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Pickup Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Limit Angle Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Pickup 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 2 -90 to 90 40 to 90 0.002 to 30 40 to 90 0.002 to 30 ------ Lag degrees pu degrees pu 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 1 0.001 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 65535 0 to 359 0 to 3 0 to 1 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 --------pu --------1 1 1 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 RANGE 0 to 5 0 to 3 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 5 5 to 25 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0.05 to 30 0.02 to 500 0 to 2 30 to 90 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 30 to 90 30 to 90 30 to 90 0 to 5 0 to 12 0 to 12 0.02 to 500 30 to 90 --UNITS --pu s s ----------cycles ------pu ohms --degrees s ------degrees degrees degrees pu ----ohms degrees --STEP 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.01 1 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 1 1 0.01 1 ---
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 F167 F001 F300 F300 F102 F001 F001 F154 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F153 F153 F001 F001 F001
DEFAULT 0 (SRC 1) 1000 100 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (SRC 1) 10 0 0 0 (Disabled) 200 200 0 (Forward) 90 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 85 85 90 0 0 (None) 0 (None) 200 85 0
Distance (Read/Write Grouped Setting)
Phase Distance (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (5 modules)
Phase Directional Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules) F102 F167 F300 F001 F001 F126 F109 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 30 700 0 (No) 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Neutral Directional Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules) F102 F167 F230 F002 F001 F001 F001 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Voltage) 75 90 50 90 50
GE Multilin
B-33
ADDR 7288 7289 728A 728B 728C 728D 728E 728F 7290 72A0 72A1 72A2 72A3 72A4 72A5 72A6 72A7 72A8 72A9 72AA 72AB 72AC 72AD 72B0 7300 7301 7307 730B 730E 730F 7311 7313 7318 7330 7348 7360 7378 7390 73A8 73C0 73D8 73F0 7408 7420 7438 7450 7468 7480 7498 74B0 74C8 74E0 REGISTER NAME Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Target Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Block Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Events Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Polarizing Voltage Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Op Current Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Offset Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Pos Seq Restraint Reserved ...Repeated for Neutral Directional Overcurrent 2 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Function Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Source Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Type Neg Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward ECA Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Limit Angle Neg Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Forward Pickup Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Limit Angle Neg Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Reverse Pickup Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Target Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Block Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Events Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Offset Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 1 Pos Seq Restraint Reserved (3 items) ...Repeated for Neg Seq Directional Overcurrent 2 dcmA Inputs 1 Function dcmA Inputs 1 ID Reserved 1 (4 items) dcmA Inputs 1 Units dcmA Inputs 1 Range dcmA Inputs 1 Minimum Value dcmA Inputs 1 Maximum Value Reserved (5 items) ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 2 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 3 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 4 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 5 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 6 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 7 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 8 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 9 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 10 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 11 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 12 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 13 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 14 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 15 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 16 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 17 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 18 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 19 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 20 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 21 0 to 1 --0 to 65535 --0 to 6 -9999.999 to 9999.999 -9999.999 to 9999.999 0 to 65535 ----------------1 --1 --1 0.001 0.001 1 F102 F205 F001 F206 F173 F004 F004 F001 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 90 40 to 90 0.015 to 30 40 to 90 0.015 to 30 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 250 0 to 0.5 0 to 1 ------ Lag degrees pu degrees pu ------ohms ----1 1 1 1 1 0.05 1 0.05 1 1 1 0.01 0.001 1 F102 F167 F179 F002 F001 F001 F001 F001 F109 F300 F102 F001 F001 F001 RANGE 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 250 0 to 0.5 0 to 1 UNITS ----------ohms ----STEP 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.001 1 FORMAT F109 F300 F102 F231 F196 F001 F001 F001
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 (Self-reset) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Calculated V0) 0 (Calculated 3I0) 0 63 0
Negative-sequence directional overcurrent (read/write grouped settings) (2 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Neg Sequence) 75 90 5 90 5 0 (Self-reset) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 63 0
dcmA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules) 0 (Disabled) DCMA I 1" 0 mA 6 (4 to 20 mA) 4000 20000 0
B-34
GE Multilin

ADDR 74F8 7510 7528 7540 7541 7544 7545 7546 7547 7548 7549 754A 754B 754C 754D 754E 754F 7550 7552 7553 7555 756A 757F 7594 75A9 75BE 75D3 75E8 75FD 7612 7627 763C 7651 7666 767B 7860 7861 7862 7863 7864 7865 7866 7869 786A 786B 7876 7881 788C 788D 788E 788F REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 22 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 23 ...Repeated for dcmA Inputs 24 Disconnect switch 1 function Disconnect switch 1 name Disconnect switch 1 mode Disconnect switch 1 open Disconnect switch 1 block open Disconnect switch 1 close Disconnect switch 1 block close Disconnect switch 1 phase A / three-pole closed Disconnect switch 1 phase A / three-pole opened Disconnect switch 1 phase B closed Disconnect switch 1 phase B opened Disconnect switch 1 phase C closed Disconnect switch 1 phase C opened Disconnect switch 1 operate time Disconnect switch 1 alarm delay Disconnect switch 1 events Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for disconnect switch 2 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 3 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 4 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 5 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 6 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 7 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 8 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 9 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 10 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 11 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 12 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 13 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 14 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 15 ...Repeated for disconnect switch 16 PMU 1 Power Trigger Function PMU 1 Power Trigger Active PMU 1 Power Trigger Reactive PMU 1 Power Trigger Apparent PMU 1 Power Trigger Pickup Time PMU 1 Power Trigger Dropout Time PMU 1 Power Trigger Block (3 items) PMU 1 Power Trigger Target PMU 1 Power Trigger Events ...Repeated for PMU 2 ...Repeated for PMU 3 ...Repeated for PMU 4 PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Function PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Low Voltage PMU 1 Voltage Trigger High Voltage PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Pickup Time 0 to 1 0.25 to 1.25 0.75 to 1.75 0 to 600 --pu pu s 1 0.001 0.001 0.01 0 to 1 0.25 to 3 0.25 to 3 0.25 to 3 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 --pu pu pu s s ------1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 0 to 1 --0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1000000 0 to 1 ----------------------------s s ----1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.001 0.001 1 --RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Disconnect switches (read/write settings) F102 F206 F157 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F001 F003 F102 --0 (Disabled) SW 1" 0 (3-Pole) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 0 0 (Disabled) ---
Phasor Measurement Unit Power Trigger (Read/Write Setting) F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 0 (Disabled) 1250 1250 1250 10 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled)
Phasor Measurement Unit Voltage Trigger (Read/Write Setting) F102 F001 F001 F001 0 (Disabled) 800 1200 10
GE Multilin
B-35
ADDR 7890 7891 7894 7895 REGISTER NAME PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Dropout Time PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Block (3 items) PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Target PMU 1 Voltage Trigger Events PMU One-shot Function PMU One-shot Sequence Number PMU One-shot Time PMU 1 Test Function PMU 1 Phase A Voltage Test Magnitude PMU 1 Phase A Voltage Test Angle PMU 1 Phase B Voltage Test Magnitude PMU 1 Phase B Voltage Test Angle PMU 1 Phase C Voltage Test Magnitude PMU 1 Phase C Voltage Test Angle PMU 1 Auxiliary Voltage Test Magnitude PMU 1 Auxiliary Voltage Test Angle PMU 1 Phase A Current Test Magnitude PMU 1 Phase A Current Test Angle PMU 1 Phase B Current Test Magnitude PMU 1 Phase B Current Test Angle PMU 1 Phase C Current Test Magnitude PMU 1 Phase C Current Test Angle PMU 1 Ground Current Test Magnitude PMU 1 Ground Current Test Angle PMU 1 Test Frequency PMU 1 Test df/dt PMU 1 Recorder Clear Configuration Counter PMU 1 Available Records PMU 1 Second Per Record PMU 1 Last Cleared Date PMU Network Reporting Function PMU Network Reporting ID Code PMU Network Reporting Rate PMU Network Reporting Style PMU Network Reporting Format PMU Network PDC Control PMU TCP port number PMU UDP port number 1 PMU UDP port number 2 PMU 1 Function PMU 1 IDcode PMU 1 STN PMU 1 Source PMU 1 Post-Filter PMU 1 Va Calibration Angle PMU 1 Vb Calibration Angle PMU 1 Vc Calibration Angle RANGE 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 59 0 to 235959 0 to 1 0 to 700 -180 to 180 0 to 700 -180 to 180 0 to 700 -180 to 180 0 to 700 -180 to 180 0 to 9.999 -180 to 180 0 to 9.999 -180 to 180 0 to 9.999 -180 to 180 0 to 9.999 -180 to 180 20 to 70 -10 to 10 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 6553.5 0 to 400000000 0 to 1 1 to 65534 0 to 11 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 0 to 1 1 to 65534 --0 to 5 0 to 3 -5 to 5 -5 to 5 -5 to 5 UNITS s --------------kV kV kV kV kA kA kA kA Hz Hz/s ------------------------------------ STEP 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.05 0.01 0.05 0.01 0.05 0.01 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.001 1 1 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 1 0.05 0.05 0.05 FORMAT F001 F300 F109 F102 F102 F001 F050 F102 F003 F002 F003 F002 F003 F002 F003 F002 F004 F002 F004 F002 F003 F002 F004 F002 F003 F002 F126 F001 F001 F050 F102 F001 F544 F546 F547 F102 F001 F001 F001 F102 F001 F203 F167 F540 F002 F002 F002
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 1 0 0 (Disabled) 50000 0 50000 -120 50000 120 50000 0 1000 -10 1000 -130 1000 110 0 0 60000 0 0 (No) 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 1 3 (10/sec.) 0 (Polar) 0 (Integer) 0 (Disabled) 4712 4713 4714 0 (Disabled) 1 GE-UR-PMU 0 (SRC 1) 1 (Symm-3-point) 0 0 0
Phasor Measurement Unit One-shot Command (Read/Write Setting) 78B4 78B5 78B6 78B8 78B9 78BB 78BC 78BE 78BF 78C1 78C2 78C4 78C5 78C7 78C8 78CA 78CB 78CD 78CE 78D0 78D1 78D3 7928 792C 792D 792F 7940 7941 7942 7943 7944 7945 7946 7947 7948 7949 794A 794B 7953 7954 7979 797A 797B
Phasor Measurement Unit Test Values (Read/Write Setting)
Phasor Measurement Unit Recorder Configuration Counter Command (Read/Write Command) Phasor Measurement Unit Recording Values (Read Only)
Phasor Measurement Unit Network Reporting Configuration (Read/Write Setting)
Phasor Measurement Unit Basic Configuration (Read/Write Setting)
Phasor Measurement Unit Calibration (Read/Write Setting)
B-36
GE Multilin

ADDR 797C 797D 797E 797F 7980 7981 7982 79A1 79A5 79A6 79A7 79A8 79A9 79AC 79AD 79C9 79CA 79CB 79CC 79CD 79CE 79D1 79D2 79D3 79DD 79E7 7B60 7B61 7B6B 7B75 7B7F 7B80 7B81 7B82 7B83 7B84 7B85 7B86 7B87 7B88 7B89 7B8A 7B8B 7BB6 7BE1 7C0C 7C37 7C62 7C8D 7CB8 REGISTER NAME PMU 1 Vx Calibration Angle PMU 1 Ia Calibration Angle PMU 1 Ib Calibration Angle PMU 1 Ic Calibration Angle PMU 1 Ig Calibration Angle PMU 1 Sequence Voltage Shift Angle PMU 1 Sequence Current Shift Angle PMU 1 User Trigger PMU 1 Current Trigger Function PMU 1 Current Trigger Pickup PMU 1 Current Trigger Pickup Time PMU 1 Current Trigger Dropout Time PMU 1 Current Trigger Block (3 items) PMU 1 Current Trigger Target PMU 1 Current Trigger Events PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Function PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Raise PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Fall PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Pickup Time PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Dropout Time PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Block (3 items) PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Target PMU 1 df/dt Trigger Events ...Repeated for PMU 2 ...Repeated for PMU 3 ...Repeated for PMU 4 User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Function User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Top Line User Programmable Pushbutton 1 On Text User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Off Text User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Drop-Out Time User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Target User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Events User Programmable Pushbutton 1 LED Operand User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Delay User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Autoreset Function User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Local Lock User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Message Priority User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Remote Lock User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Reset User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Set User Programmable Pushbutton 1 Hold ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 2 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 3 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 4 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 5 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 6 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 7 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 8 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 9 0 to 2 ------0 to 60 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 600 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 10 --------s ------s ------------s 1 ------0.05 1 1 1 0.05 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.1 RANGE -5 to 5 -5 to 5 -5 to 5 -5 to 5 -5 to 5 -180 to 180 -180 to 180 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0.1 to 30 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0.1 to 15 0.1 to 15 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 UNITS ----pu s s --------Hz/s Hz/s s s ------STEP 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 30 30 1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F300 F102 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102
DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 1800 10 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 25 25 10 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled)
Phasor Measurement Unit Triggering (Read/Write Setting) Phasor Measurement Unit Current Trigger (Read/Write Setting)
Phasor Measurement Unit df/dt Trigger (Read/Write Setting)
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules) F109 F202 F202 F202 F001 F109 F102 F300 F001 F102 F300 F220 F300 F300 F300 F001 2 (Disabled) (none) (none) (none) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 1
GE Multilin
B-37
ADDR 7CE3 7D0E 7D39 7D64 7D8F 7DBA 7DE5 7E10 7E11 7E12 7E13 7E14 7E15 7E16 7E17 7E18 7E19 7E21 7E32 7E43 7E54 7E65 7F00 7F01 7F02 7F03 7F04 7F05 7F06 7F07 7F08 7F09 7F10 7F20 7F30 7F31 7F32 7F33 7F34 7F35 7F36 7F37 7F38 7F40 7F50 7F60 7F61 7F62 7F63 7F64 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 10 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 11 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 12 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 13 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 14 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 15 ...Repeated for User Programmable Pushbutton 16 Underfrequency Function Underfrequency 1 Block Underfrequency 1 Minimum Current Underfrequency 1 Pickup Underfrequency 1 Pickup Delay Underfrequency 1 Reset Delay Underfrequency 1 Source Underfrequency 1 Events Underfrequency 1 Target Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for Underfrequency 2 ...Repeated for Underfrequency 3 ...Repeated for Underfrequency 4 ...Repeated for Underfrequency 5 ...Repeated for Underfrequency 6 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Function Neutral Overvoltage 1 Signal Source Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay Neutral Overvoltage 1 Block Neutral Overvoltage 1 Target Neutral Overvoltage 1 Events Neutral Overvoltage 1 Curves Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for Neutral Overvoltage 2 ...Repeated for Neutral Overvoltage 3 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Function Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Signal Source Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Block Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Target Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Events Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for Auxiliary Overvoltage 2 ...Repeated for Auxiliary Overvoltage 3 Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Function Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Signal Source Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Pickup Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Delay Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Curve 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 3 0 to 600 0 to 1 ----pu s --1 1 0.001 0.01 1 F102 F167 F001 F001 F111 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 3 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 ----pu s s --------1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 3.00 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 3 0 to 65535 ----pu s s ----------1 1 0.001 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F116 F001 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0.1 to 1.25 20 to 65 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 2 0 to 1 ----pu Hz s s --------1 1 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 F102 F300 F001 F001 F001 F001 F167 F102 F109 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Underfrequency (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 10 5950 2000 2000 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Self-reset) 0
Neutral Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 300 100 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 (Definite Time) 0
Auxiliary Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 300 100 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Auxiliary Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 700 100 0 (Definite Time)
B-38
GE Multilin

ADDR 7F65 7F66 7F67 7F68 7F69 7F70 7F80 8000 83E0 83E1 83E3 83F0 83F1 83F3 83F4 8400 8401 8403 8404 8418 8500 8501 8503 8504 8536 8568 86D0 86D1 86D7 86D8 86D9 86DA 86DB 86DC 86DD 86DE 86DF 86E0 86E1 86E2 86E3 86F6 8709 871C 872F 8742 8755 8768 REGISTER NAME Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Block Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Target Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Events Reserved (7 items) ...Repeated for Auxiliary Undervoltage 2 ...Repeated for Auxiliary Undervoltage 3 Tracking Frequency EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Signature EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Configuration Time EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Size EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Signature EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Configuration Time EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Size ...Repeated for module number 2 EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Function EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Destination EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Data Rate EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Data Item 1 (20 items) Reserved (80 items) EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Function EGD Fast Producer Exchange 1 Destination EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Data Rate EGD Slow Producer Exchange 1 Data Item 1 (50 items) Reserved (50 items) ...Repeated for EGD Exchange 2 Remote RTD 1 Function Remote RTD 1 ID Remote RTD 1 Type Remote RTD 1 Application Remote RTD 1 Alarm Temperature Remote RTD 1 Alarm Pickup Delay Remote RTD 1 Trip Temperature Remote RTD 1 Trip Pickup Delay Remote RTD 1 Trip Reset Delay Remote RTD 1 Trip Voting Remote RTD 1 Block Remote RTD 1 Open Remote RTD 1 Target Remote RTD 1 Events Repeatead for remote RTD input 2 Repeatead for remote RTD input 3 Repeatead for remote RTD input 4 Repeatead for remote RTD input 5 Repeatead for remote RTD input 6 Repeatead for remote RTD input 7 Repeatead for remote RTD input 8 Repeatead for remote RTD input 9 0 to 1 --0 to 3 0 to 5 1 to 200 5 to 600 1 to 200 5 to 600 5 to 600 0 to 13 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 1 --------C seconds C seconds seconds ----------1 --1 1 1 5 1 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 50 to 1000 0 to 65535 --0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 500 to 1000 0 to 65535 ------ms --------ms ----1 1 50 1 --1 1 50 1 ----0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 Hz --------------1 --1 1 --1 RANGE 0 to 3 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 65535 UNITS pu --------STEP 0.001 1 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F001 F300 F109 F102 F001
DEFAULT 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Frequency (Read Only) F001 F001 F003 F001 F001 F003 F001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EGD Fast Production Status (Read Only)
EGD Slow Production Status (Read Only) (2 modules)
EGD Fast Production (Read/Write Setting) F102 F003 F001 F001 F001 F102 F003 F001 F001 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 1000 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 1000 0 0
EGD Slow Production (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
Remote RTD inputs (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules) F102 F205 F174 F550 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F603 F300 F552 F109 F102 0 (Disabled) "RRTD 1" 0 (100 ohm Platinum) 0 (None) 130 5 130 5 5 0 (None) 0 0 (None) 0 (Self-Reset) 0 (Disabled)
GE Multilin
B-39
ADDR 877B 878E 87A1 87C0 87C1 87C2 87C3 87C4 87C5 87C6 87C7 87C8 87C9 87CA 87CB 8800 8A00 8A01 8A09 8A0A 8A0C 8A0E 8A0F 8A10 8A11 8A12 8A14 8A28 8A3C 8A50 8A64 8A78 8A8C 8AA0 8AB4 8AC8 8ADC 8AF0 8B04 8B18 8B2C 8B40 8B54 8B68 8B7C 8B90 8BA4 8BB8 8BCC 8BE0 8BF4 REGISTER NAME Repeatead for remote RTD input 10 Repeatead for remote RTD input 11 Repeatead for remote RTD input 12 Remote RTD 1 Value Remote RTD 2 Value Remote RTD 3 Value Remote RTD 4 Value Remote RTD 5 Value Remote RTD 6 Value Remote RTD 7 Value Remote RTD 8 Value Remote RTD 9 Value Remote RTD 10 Value Remote RTD 11 Value Remote RTD 12 Value FlexState Parameters (256 items) Digital Element 1 Function Digital Element 1 Name Digital Element 1 Input Digital Element 1 Pickup Delay Digital Element 1 Reset Delay Digital Element 1 Block Digital Element 1 Target Digital Element 1 Events Digital Element 1 Pickup LED Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for Digital Element 2 ...Repeated for Digital Element 3 ...Repeated for Digital Element 4 ...Repeated for Digital Element 5 ...Repeated for Digital Element 6 ...Repeated for Digital Element 7 ...Repeated for Digital Element 8 ...Repeated for Digital Element 9 ...Repeated for Digital Element 10 ...Repeated for Digital Element 11 ...Repeated for Digital Element 12 ...Repeated for Digital Element 13 ...Repeated for Digital Element 14 ...Repeated for Digital Element 15 ...Repeated for Digital Element 16 ...Repeated for Digital Element 17 ...Repeated for Digital Element 18 ...Repeated for Digital Element 19 ...Repeated for Digital Element 20 ...Repeated for Digital Element 21 ...Repeated for Digital Element 22 ...Repeated for Digital Element 23 ...Repeated for Digital Element 24 ...Repeated for Digital Element 25 ...Repeated for Digital Element 26 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 0 to 200 --0 to 1 --0 to 65535 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 --C C C C C C C C C C C C --------s s ----------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 --1 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 --F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F002 F300 F102 F203 F300 F003 F003 F300 F109 F102 F102 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Remote RTD inputs (Read Only Actual Values)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) Dig Element 1 0 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled) 0
FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting) Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
B-40
GE Multilin

ADDR 8C08 8C1C 8C30 8C44 8C58 8C6C 8C80 8C94 8CA8 8CBC 8CD0 8CE4 8CF8 8D0C 8D20 8D34 8D48 8D5C 8D70 8D84 8D98 8DAC 8E00 8E01 8E02 8E03 8E04 8E05 8E06 8E07 8E08 8E09 8E0A 8E0B 8E0C 8E0D 8E0E 8E0F 8E10 8E11 8E12 8E13 8E14 8E15 8E16 8E16 8E18 8E20 8E40 8E60 8E80 8EA0 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Digital Element 27 ...Repeated for Digital Element 28 ...Repeated for Digital Element 29 ...Repeated for Digital Element 30 ...Repeated for Digital Element 31 ...Repeated for Digital Element 32 ...Repeated for Digital Element 33 ...Repeated for Digital Element 34 ...Repeated for Digital Element 35 ...Repeated for Digital Element 36 ...Repeated for Digital Element 37 ...Repeated for Digital Element 38 ...Repeated for Digital Element 39 ...Repeated for Digital Element 40 ...Repeated for Digital Element 41 ...Repeated for Digital Element 42 ...Repeated for Digital Element 43 ...Repeated for Digital Element 44 ...Repeated for Digital Element 45 ...Repeated for Digital Element 46 ...Repeated for Digital Element 47 ...Repeated for Digital Element 48 Trip Bus 1 Function Trip Bus 1 Block Trip Bus 1 Pickup Delay Trip Bus 1 Reset Delay Trip Bus 1 Input 1 Trip Bus 1 Input 2 Trip Bus 1 Input 3 Trip Bus 1 Input 4 Trip Bus 1 Input 5 Trip Bus 1 Input 6 Trip Bus 1 Input 7 Trip Bus 1 Input 8 Trip Bus 1 Input 9 Trip Bus 1 Input 10 Trip Bus 1 Input 11 Trip Bus 1 Input 12 Trip Bus 1 Input 13 Trip Bus 1 Input 14 Trip Bus 1 Input 15 Trip Bus 1 Input 16 Trip Bus 1 Latching Trip Bus 1 Reset Trip Bus 1 Target Trip Bus 1 Events Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for Trip Bus 2 ...Repeated for Trip Bus 3 ...Repeated for Trip Bus 4 ...Repeated for Trip Bus 5 ...Repeated for Trip Bus 6 0 to 1 --0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 ------s s ------------------------------------------1 --0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Trip Bus (Read/Write Setting) F102 F300 F001 F001 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F102 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 (Disabled) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
GE Multilin
B-41
ADDR 9000 9001 9004 9005 9006 9007 9008 9009 900A 900C 900D 900F 9010 9011 9012 9013 9014 9028 903C 9050 9064 9078 908C 90A0 90B4 90C8 90DC 90F0 9104 9118 912C 9300 9301 9302 9304 9306 930C 9312 9318 931E 9324 932A 9330 9336 933C 9342 9348 934E 9354 935A 9360 9366 REGISTER NAME FlexElement 1 Function FlexElement 1 Name FlexElement 1 InputP FlexElement 1 InputM FlexElement 1 Compare FlexElement 1 Input FlexElement 1 Direction FlexElement 1 Hysteresis FlexElement 1 Pickup FlexElement 1 DeltaT Units FlexElement 1 DeltaT FlexElement 1 Pickup Delay FlexElement 1 Reset Delay FlexElement 1 Block FlexElement 1 Target FlexElement 1 Events ...Repeated for FlexElement 2 ...Repeated for FlexElement 3 ...Repeated for FlexElement 4 ...Repeated for FlexElement 5 ...Repeated for FlexElement 6 ...Repeated for FlexElement 7 ...Repeated for FlexElement 8 ...Repeated for FlexElement 9 ...Repeated for FlexElement 10 ...Repeated for FlexElement 11 ...Repeated for FlexElement 12 ...Repeated for FlexElement 13 ...Repeated for FlexElement 14 ...Repeated for FlexElement 15 ...Repeated for FlexElement 16 dcmA Output 1 Source dcmA Output 1 Range dcmA Output 1 Minimum dcmA Output 1 Maximum ...Repeated for dcmA Output 2 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 3 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 4 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 5 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 6 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 7 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 8 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 9 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 10 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 11 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 12 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 13 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 14 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 15 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 16 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 17 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 18 0 to 65535 0 to 2 90 to 90 90 to 90 ----pu pu 1 1 0.001 0.001 F600 F522 F004 F004 RANGE 0 to 1 --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0.1 to 50 -90 to 90 0 to 2 20 to 86400 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 UNITS --------------% pu ----s s ------STEP 1 --1 1 1 1 1 0.1 0.001 1 1 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 FORMAT F102 F206 F600 F600 F516 F515 F517 F001 F004 F518 F003 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 (Disabled) FxE 1 0 0 0 (LEVEL) 0 (SIGNED) 0 (OVER) 30 1000 0 (Milliseconds) 20 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled)
FlexElement (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
dcmA Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules) 0 0 (1 to 1 mA) 0 1000
B-42
GE Multilin

ADDR 936C 9372 9378 937E 9384 938A 9400 9406 940C 9418 9424 9430 943C 9448 9454 9460 946C 9478 9484 9490 949C 94A8 94B4 94C0 94CC 94D8 94E4 94F0 94FC 9508 9514 9520 952C 9538 9544 9550 955C 9568 9574 9910 9912 9913 9916 9919 991C 991F 9922 9925 9928 992B 992E 9931 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for dcmA Output 19 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 20 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 21 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 22 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 23 ...Repeated for dcmA Output 24 Direct Input 1 Name Direct Output 1 Name ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 2 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 3 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 4 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 5 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 6 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 7 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 8 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 9 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 10 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 11 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 12 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 13 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 14 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 15 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 16 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 17 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 18 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 19 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 20 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 21 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 22 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 23 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 24 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 25 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 26 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 27 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 28 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 29 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 30 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 31 ...Repeated for Direct Input/Output 32 IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 1 default value IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger input 1 mode ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 2 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 3 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 4 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 5 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 6 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 7 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 8 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 9 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 10 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 11 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 12 0 to 429496295 0 to 1 ----1 1 0 to 96 1 to 96 ----1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B
F205 F205 Dir Ip 1 Dir Out 1
Direct Input/Output Names (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
IEC 61850 received integers (read/write setting registers) F003 F491 1000 0 (Default Value)
GE Multilin
B-43
ADDR 9934 9937 993A 993D REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 13 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 14 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 15 ...Repeated for IEC61850 GOOSE UInteger 16 FlexElement 1 Actual FlexElement 2 Actual FlexElement 3 Actual FlexElement 4 Actual FlexElement 5 Actual FlexElement 6 Actual FlexElement 7 Actual FlexElement 8 Actual FlexElement 9 Actual FlexElement 10 Actual FlexElement 11 Actual FlexElement 12 Actual FlexElement 13 Actual FlexElement 14 Actual FlexElement 15 Actual FlexElement 16 Actual Teleprotection Function Teleprotection Number of Terminals Teleprotection Number of Channels Teleprotection Local Relay ID Teleprotection Terminal 1 ID Teleprotection Terminal 2 ID Reserved (10 items) Teleprotection Input 1-n Default States (16 items) Teleprotection Input 2-n Default States (16 items) Teleprotection Output 1-n Operand (16 items) Teleprotection Output 2-n Operand (16 items) Teleprotection Clear Lost Packets Teleprotection Channel 1 Status Teleprotection Channel 1 Number of Lost Packets Teleprotection Channel 2 Status Teleprotection Channel 2 Number of Lost Packets Teleprotection Network Status Teleprotection Channel 1 Input States Teleprotection Channel 2 Input States Teleprotection Input 1 States, 1 per register (16 items) Teleprotection Input 2 States, 1 per register (16 items) VT Fuse Failure Function ...Repeated for module number 2 ...Repeated for module number 3 ...Repeated for module number 4 ...Repeated for module number 5 ...Repeated for module number 6 Selector switch 1 position 1 to 7 --1 F001
-2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647 -2147483.647 to 2147483.647
APPENDIX B
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
FlexElement Actuals (Read Only) (16 modules) 9A01 9A03 9A05 9A07 9A09 9A0B 9A0D 9A0F 9A11 9A13 9A15 9A17 9A19 9A1B 9A1D 9A1F 9B00 9B01 9B02 9B03 9B04 9B05 9B06 9B10 9B30 9B50 9B70 9B90 9B91 9B92 9B93 9B94 9B95 9BA0 9BA1 9BB0 9BC0 A040 A041 A042 A043 A044 A045 A210 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F004 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F086 F086 F300 F300 F126 F134 F001 F134 F001 F134 F500 F500 F108 F108 F102 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 0 0 (No) 1 (OK) 0 1 (OK) 0 2 (n/a) 0 0 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Disabled)
Teleprotection Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Settings) 0 to 1 2 to 3 1 to 2 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 1 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1
Teleprotection Inputs/Outputs Commands (Read/Write Command) Teleprotection Channel Tests (Read Only)
VT Fuse Failure (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
Selector switch actual values (read only) 0
B-44
GE Multilin

ADDR A211 A280 A281 A282 A283 A284 A285 A286 A287 A288 A289 A28A A28B A28C A28D A28E A298 A300 A400 A580 A581 A582 A583 A584 A585 A586 A587 A588 A589 A5A0 A5A1 A600 A680 A700 A701 A702 A703 A704 A705 A706 A70A A714 A71E A728 A732 A73C A746 A750 REGISTER NAME Selector switch 2 position Selector 1 Function Selector 1 Range Selector 1 Timeout Selector 1 Step Up Selector 1 Step Mode Selector 1 Acknowledge Selector 1 Bit0 Selector 1 Bit1 Selector 1 Bit2 Selector 1 Bit Mode Selector 1 Bit Acknowledge Selector 1 Power Up Mode Selector 1 Target Selector 1 Events Reserved (10 items) ...Repeated for Selector 2 DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 Binary Input Points (256 items) DNP/IEC 60870-5-104 Analog Input Points (256 items) Volts Per Hertz 1 Function Volts Per Hertz 1 Source Volts Per Hertz 1 Pickup Volts Per Hertz 1 Curves Volts Per Hertz 1 TD Multiplier Volts Per Hertz 1 Block Volts Per Hertz 1 Events Volts Per Hertz 1 Target Volts Per Hertz 1 T Reset ...Repeated for Volts Per Hertz 2 Volts Per Hertz 1 Volts Per Hertz 2 FlexCurve C (120 items) FlexCurve D (120 items) Non-Volatile Latch 1 Function Non-Volatile Latch 1 Type Non-Volatile Latch 1 Set Non-Volatile Latch 1 Reset Non-Volatile Latch 1 Target Non-Volatile Latch 1 Events Reserved (4 items) ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 2 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 3 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 4 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 5 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 6 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 7 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 8 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 9 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 --pu pu ms ms --------------0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 5 0.8 to 4 0 to 7 0.05 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 2 0 to 1000 --------pu ----------s 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 0.01 1 1 1 0.1 RANGE 1 to 7 0 to 1 1 to 7 3 to 60 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 1 --UNITS ------s ------------------------STEP 1 1 1 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F001 F102 F001 F001 F300 F083 F300 F300 F300 F300 F083 F300 F084 F109 F102 F001
DEFAULT 1 0 (Disabled) 7 50 0 0 (Time-out) 0 0 0 0 0 (Time-out) 0 0 (Restore) 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Selector switch settings (read/write, 2 modules)
DNP/IEC Points (Read/Write Setting) F300 F300 F102 F167 F001 F240 F001 F300 F102 F109 F001 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 80 0 (Definite Time) 100 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Self-reset) 10
Volts Per Hertz (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
Volts Per Hertz Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules) F001 F001 F011 F011 F102 F519 F300 F300 F109 F102 F001 0 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Reset Dominant) 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0
Flexcurves C and D (Read/Write Setting)
Non Volatile Latches (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
GE Multilin
B-45
ADDR A75A A764 A76E A778 A782 A78C A796 A800 A801 A807 A80A A80B A80C A80D A80F A811 A812 A813 A814 A815 A820 A840 A860 A880 A8A0 A8C0 A8E0 A900 A901 A902 A903 A904 A905 A906 A907 A908 A909 A90A A90B A90C A90D A910 A920 A930 A960 A961 A962 A963 A964 A965 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 10 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 11 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 12 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 13 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 14 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 15 ...Repeated for Non-Volatile Latch 16 Digital Counter 1 Function Digital Counter 1 Name Digital Counter 1 Units Digital Counter 1 Block Digital Counter 1 Up Digital Counter 1 Down Digital Counter 1 Preset Digital Counter 1 Compare Digital Counter 1 Reset Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Reset Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Count Digital Counter 1 Set To Preset Reserved (11 items) ...Repeated for Digital Counter 2 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 3 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 4 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 5 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 6 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 7 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 8 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Function Frequency Rate of Change 1 OC Supervision Frequency Rate of Change 1 Min Frequency Rate of Change 1 Max Frequency Rate of Change 1 Pickup Delay Frequency Rate of Change 1 Reset Delay Frequency Rate of Change 1 Block Frequency Rate of Change 1 Target Frequency Rate of Change 1 Events Frequency Rate of Change 1 Source Frequency Rate of Change 1 Trend Frequency Rate of Change 1 Pickup Frequency Rate of Change 1 OV Supervision Frequency Rate of Change 1 Reserved (3 items) ...Repeated for Frequency Rate of Change 2 ...Repeated for Frequency Rate of Change 3 ...Repeated for Frequency Rate of Change 4 Restricted Ground Fault 1 Function Restricted Ground Fault 1 Source Restricted Ground Fault 1 Pickup Restricted Ground Fault 1 Slope Restricted Ground Fault 1 Delay Restricted Ground Fault 1 Reset Delay 0 to 1 0 to 5 0.005 to 30 0 to 100 0 to 600 0 to 600 ----pu % s s 1 1 0.001 1 0.01 0.01 F102 F167 F001 F001 F001 F001 0 to 1 0 to 30 20 to 80 20 to 80 0 to 65.535 0 to 65.535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 2 0.1 to 15 0.1 to 3 0 to 1 --pu Hz Hz s s ----------Hz/s pu --1 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 0.001 1 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F167 F224 F001 F001 F001 0 to 1 ----0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 2147483647 to 2147483647 2147483647 to 2147483647 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 ----------------------------1 ----1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --F102 F205 F206 F300 F300 F300 F004 F004 F300 F300 F300 F300 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules) 0 (Disabled) Counter 1" (none) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Frequency Rate of Change (Read/Write Setting) (4 modules) 0 (Disabled) 200 4500 6500 0 0 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 0 (Increasing) 50 700 0
Restricted Ground Fault (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules) 0 (Disabled) 0 (SRC 1) 80 40 0 0
B-46
GE Multilin

ADDR A966 A967 A968 A969 A972 A97B A984 A98D AA00 AA02 AA03 AA05 AA07 AA0E AA15 AA1C AA23 AA2A AA31 AA38 AA3F AA46 AA4D AA54 AA5B AA62 AA69 AB24 AB25 AB26 AB27 AB28 AB29 AB2A AB2B AB2C AB2D AB2E AB2F AB30 AB33 AC0B AC53 AC7A AC98 ACB6 ACFE AD01 AD13 AD25 AD34 REGISTER NAME Restricted Ground Fault 1 Block Restricted Ground Fault 1 Target Restricted Ground Fault 1 Events ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 2 ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 3 ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 4 ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 5 ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 6 IEC 61850 GOOSE analog 1 default value IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 mode IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 units IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 1 per-unit base ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 2 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 3 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 4 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 5 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 6 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 7 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 8 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 9 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 10 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 11 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 12 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 13 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 14 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 15 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GOOSE analog input 16 Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR1.ST.Loc status Command to clear XCBR1 OpCnt (operation counter) Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR2.ST.Loc status Command to clear XCBR2 OpCnt (operation counter) Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR3.ST.Loc status Command to clear XCBR3 OpCnt (operation counter) Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR4.ST.Loc status Command to clear XCBR4 OpCnt (operation counter) Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR5.ST.Loc status Command to clear XCBR5 OpCnt (operation counter) Operand for IEC 61850 XCBR6.ST.Loc status Command to clear XCBR6 OpCnt (operation counter) IEC 61850 logical node LPHD1 name prefix IEC 61850 logical node PIOCx name prefix (72 items) IEC 61850 logical node PTOCx name prefix (24 items) IEC 61850 logical node PTUVx name prefix (13 items) IEC 61850 logical node PTOVx name prefix (10 items) IEC 61850 logical node PDISx name prefix (10 items) IEC 61850 logical node RBRFx name prefix (24 items) IEC 61850 logical node RPSBx name prefix IEC 61850 logical node RRECx name prefix (6 items) IEC 61850 logical node MMXUx name prefix (6 items) IEC 61850 logical node GGIOx name prefix (5 items) IEC 61850 logical node RFLOx name prefix (5 items) 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 ------------------------------------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1000000 to 1000000 0 to 1 --0 to 999999999.999 --------0.001 1 --0.001 RANGE --0 to 2 0 to 1 UNITS ------STEP --1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F001 F109 F102
DEFAULT 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled)
B
F060 F491 F207 F060 1000 0 (Default Value) (none) 1
IEC 61850 received analog settings (read/write)
IEC 61850 XCBR configuration (read/write settings) F300 F126 F300 F126 F300 F126 F300 F126 F300 F126 F300 F126 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 0 0 (No) 0 0 (No) 0 0 (No) 0 0 (No) 0 0 (No) 0 0 (No) (none) (none) (none) (none) (none) (none) (none) (none) (none) (none) (none) (none)
IEC 61850 LN name prefixes (read/write settings)
GE Multilin
B-47
ADDR AD43 AD55 AD67 AD73 ADE2 AE3C AECF AED0 AED1 AED3 AED5 AED7 AED9 AEDB AEDD AEDF AEE1 AEE3 AEE5 AEE7 AEE9 AEEB AEED AEEF AEF1 AEF3 AEF5 AEF7 AEF9 AEFB AEFD AF00 AF10 AF11 AF13 AF15 AF17 AF1E AF25 AF2C AF33 AF3A AF41 AF48 AF4F AF56 AF5D AF64 AF6B AF72 REGISTER NAME IEC 61850 logical node XCBRx name prefix (6 items) IEC 61850 logical node PTRCx name prefix (6 items) IEC 61850 logical node PDIFx name prefix (6 items) IEC 61850 logical node MMXNx name prefix (6 items) IEC 61850 logical node CSWIx name prefix (6 items) IEC 61850 logical node XSWIx name prefix (6 items) Operand for IEC 61850 XSWI1.ST.Loc status Command to clear XSWI1 OpCnt (operation counter) Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI2 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI3 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI4 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI5 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI6 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI7 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI8 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI9 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI10 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI11 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI12 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI13 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI14 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI15 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI16 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI17 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI18 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI19 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI20 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI21 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI22 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI23 Repeated for IEC 61850 XSWI24 Number of analog points in GGIO4 IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 value IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 deadband IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 minimum IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 1 maximum ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 2 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 3 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 4 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 5 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 6 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 7 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 8 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 9 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 10 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 11 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 12 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 13 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 14 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 15 4 to 32 --0.001 to 100 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 1000000000000 to 1000000000000 ----% ----4 --0.001 0.001 0.001 F001 F600 F003 F060 F060 RANGE 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65535 0 to 1 UNITS ----------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F300 F126
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT (none) (none) (none) (none) (none) (none) 0 0 (No)
IEC 61850 XSWI configuration (read/write settings)
IEC 61850 GGIO4 general analog configuration settings (read/write) 4 0 100000 0 1000000 IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input points configuration settings (read/write)
B-48
GE Multilin

ADDR AF79 AF80 AF87 AF8E AF95 AF9C AFA3 AFAA AFB1 AFB8 AFBF AFC6 AFCD AFD4 AFDB AFE2 AFE9 AB30 AB33 AC0B AC53 AC77 AC8F ACAD ACF5 ACF8 AD0A AD1C AD28 AD37 AD3D AD43 AD4F B01C B01D B013 B03F B040 B043 B064 B067 B068 B069 B06A B06C B06D B07D B08D B0B5 B06B B0B7 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 16 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 17 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 18 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 19 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 20 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 21 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 22 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 23 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 24 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 25 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 26 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 27 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 28 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 29 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 30 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 31 ...Repeated for IEC 61850 GGIO4 analog input 32 IEC 61850 Logical Node LPHD1 Name Prefix IEC 61850 Logical Node PIOCx Name Prefix (72 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node PTOCx Name Prefix (24 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node PTUVx Name Prefix (12 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node PTOVx Name Prefix (8 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node PDISx Name Prefix (10 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node RRBFx Name Prefix (24 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node RPSBx Name Prefix IEC 61850 Logical Node RRECx Name Prefix (6 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXUx Name Prefix (6 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node GGIOx Name Prefix (4 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node RFLOx Name Prefix (5 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node XCBRx Name Prefix (2 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node PTRCx Name Prefix (2 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node PDIFx Name Prefix (4 items) IEC 61850 Logical Node MMXNx Name Prefix (37 items) Default GOOSE/GSSE Update Time IEC 61850 GSSE Function (GsEna) IEC 61850 GSSE ID IEC 61850 GOOSE Function (GoEna) IEC 61850 GSSE Destination MAC Address IEC 61850 Standard GOOSE ID IEC 61850 Standard GOOSE Destination MAC Address IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority IEC 61850 GOOSE VLAN ID IEC 61850 GOOSE ETYPE APPID Reserved (2 items) TCP Port Number for the IEC 61850 / MMS Protocol IEC 61850 Logical Device Name IEC 61850 Logical Device Instance IEC 61850 LPHD Location Include non-IEC 61850 Data IEC 61850 Server Data Scanning Function Reserved (15 items) 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 0 to 65534 1 to 60 0 to 1 --0 to 1 ------0 to 7 0 to 4095 0 to 16383 0 to 1 1 to 65535 ------0 to 1 0 to 1 --------------------------------s --------------------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 ------1 1 1 1 1 ------1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
IEC 61850 Logical Node Name Prefixes (Read/Write Setting) F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F206 F001 F102 F209 F102 F072 F209 F072 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F213 F213 F204 F102 F102 (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) (None) 60 1 (Enabled) GSSEOut 0 (Disabled) 0 GOOSEOut 0 4 0 0 0 102 IECName LDInst Location 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled)
IEC 61850 GOOSE/GSSE Configuration (Read/Write Setting)
IEC 61850 Server Configuration (Read/Write Settings/Commands)
GE Multilin
B-49
ADDR B0C0 B0C2 B0C4 B0C6 B0C8 B0CA B0CC B0CE B0D0 B0D2 B0D4 B0D6 B0D8 B0DA B0DC B0DE B0E0 B0E2 B0E4 B0E6 B0E8 B0EA B0EC B0EE B0F0 B0F2 B0F4 B0F6 B12C B162 B198 B1CE B280 B2A1 B2A2 B2A4 B2A5 B2A7 B2CE B2F5 B31C B343 B36A B391 B3B8 B3DF B406 B42D B454 B47B B4A2 B4C9 REGISTER NAME IEC 61850 MMXU TotW Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU TotVAr Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU TotVA Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU TotPF Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU Hz Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsAB Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsBC Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU PPV.phsCA Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsADeadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsB Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU PhV.phsC Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsA Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsB Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU A.phsC Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU A.neut Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsA Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsB Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU W.phsC Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsA Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsB Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU VAr.phsC Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsA Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsB Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU VA.phsC Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsA Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsB Deadband 1 IEC 61850 MMXU PF.phsC Deadband 1 ...Repeated for Deadband 2 ...Repeated for Deadband 3 ...Repeated for Deadband 4 ...Repeated for Deadband 5 ...Repeated for Deadband 6 IEC 61850 Report Control 1 RptID IEC 61850 Report Control 1 OptFlds IEC 61850 Report Control 1 BufTm IEC 61850 Report Control 1 TrgOps IEC 61850 Report Control 1 IntgPd ...Repeated for Report 2 ...Repeated for Report 3 ...Repeated for Report 4 ...Repeated for Report 5 ...Repeated for Report 6 ...Repeated for Report 7 ...Repeated for Report 8 ...Repeated for Report 9 ...Repeated for Report 10 ...Repeated for Report 11 ...Repeated for Report 12 ...Repeated for Report 13 ...Repeated for Report 14 ...Repeated for Report 15 ...Repeated for Report 16 --0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295 ------------1 1 1 1 F209 F001 F003 F001 F003 RANGE 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 0.001 to 100 UNITS % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % % STEP 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 FORMAT F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003 F003
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
IEC 61850 MMXU Deadbands (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
IEC 61850 Report Settings (Read/Write Setting) (14 modules) 0 0 0 0
B-50
GE Multilin

ADDR B500 B501 B5A0 B5A1 B5C2 B5C5 B5C6 B5C7 B5C8 B5CA B5CB B60B B676 B6E1 B74C B7B7 B822 B88D B900 B940 B980 B9C0 BA00 BA40 BA80 BAC0 BB00 BB06 BB07 BB08 BB10 BB18 BB20 BB28 BB30 BB38 BB40 BB48 BB50 BB58 BB60 BB68 BB70 BB78 BB80 BB88 BB90 BB98 BBA0 REGISTER NAME Number of Status Indications in GGIO1 IEC 61850 GGIO1 Indication operands (128 items) IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Function IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ID Configurable GOOSE Destination MAC Address IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN Transmit Priority IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE VLAN ID IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ETYPE APPID IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE ConfRev IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Retransmission Curve Configurable GOOSE Dataset Items for Transmission (64 items) ...Repeated for Module 2 ...Repeated for Module 3 ...Repeated for Module 4 ...Repeated for Module 5 ...Repeated for Module 6 ...Repeated for Module 7 ...Repeated for Module 8 Configurable GOOSE Dataset Items for Transmission ...Repeated for Module 2 ...Repeated for Module 3 ...Repeated for Module 4 ...Repeated for Module 5 ...Repeated for Module 6 ...Repeated for Module 7 ...Repeated for Module 8 Contact Input 1 Name Contact Input 1 Events Contact Input 1 Debounce Time ...Repeated for Contact Input 2 ...Repeated for Contact Input 3 ...Repeated for Contact Input 4 ...Repeated for Contact Input 5 ...Repeated for Contact Input 6 ...Repeated for Contact Input 7 ...Repeated for Contact Input 8 ...Repeated for Contact Input 9 ...Repeated for Contact Input 10 ...Repeated for Contact Input 11 ...Repeated for Contact Input 12 ...Repeated for Contact Input 13 ...Repeated for Contact Input 14 ...Repeated for Contact Input 15 ...Repeated for Contact Input 16 ...Repeated for Contact Input 17 ...Repeated for Contact Input 18 ...Repeated for Contact Input 19 ...Repeated for Contact Input 20 ...Repeated for Contact Input 21 --0 to 1 0 to 16 ----ms --1 0.5 0 to 128 --1 RANGE 8 to 128 --0 to 1 ----0 to 7 0 to 4095 0 to 16383 1 to 4294967295 0 to 3 0 to 542 UNITS ----------------------STEP 8 1 1 ----1 1 1 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F001 F300 F102 F209 F072 F001 F001 F001 F003 F611 F232
DEFAULT 8 0 0 (None) GOOSEOut_x_ 0 4 0 0 1 3 (Relaxed) 0 (None)
IEC 61850 GGIO1 Configuration Settings (Read/Write Setting)
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Transmission (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
IEC 61850 Configurable GOOSE Reception (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules) F233 0 (None)
Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules) F205 F102 F001 Cont Ip 1 0 (Disabled) 20
GE Multilin
B-51
ADDR BBA8 BBB0 BBB8 BBC0 BBC8 BBD0 BBD8 BBE0 BBE8 BBF0 BBF8 BC00 BC08 BC10 BC18 BC20 BC28 BC30 BC38 BC40 BC48 BC50 BC58 BC60 BC68 BC70 BC78 BC80 BC88 BC90 BC98 BCA0 BCA8 BCB0 BCB8 BCC0 BCC8 BCD0 BCD8 BCE0 BCE8 BCF0 BCF8 BD00 BD08 BD10 BD18 BD20 BD28 BD30 BD38 BD40 BD48 BD50 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Contact Input 22 ...Repeated for Contact Input 23 ...Repeated for Contact Input 24 ...Repeated for Contact Input 25 ...Repeated for Contact Input 26 ...Repeated for Contact Input 27 ...Repeated for Contact Input 28 ...Repeated for Contact Input 29 ...Repeated for Contact Input 30 ...Repeated for Contact Input 31 ...Repeated for Contact Input 32 ...Repeated for Contact Input 33 ...Repeated for Contact Input 34 ...Repeated for Contact Input 35 ...Repeated for Contact Input 36 ...Repeated for Contact Input 37 ...Repeated for Contact Input 38 ...Repeated for Contact Input 39 ...Repeated for Contact Input 40 ...Repeated for Contact Input 41 ...Repeated for Contact Input 42 ...Repeated for Contact Input 43 ...Repeated for Contact Input 44 ...Repeated for Contact Input 45 ...Repeated for Contact Input 46 ...Repeated for Contact Input 47 ...Repeated for Contact Input 48 ...Repeated for Contact Input 49 ...Repeated for Contact Input 50 ...Repeated for Contact Input 51 ...Repeated for Contact Input 52 ...Repeated for Contact Input 53 ...Repeated for Contact Input 54 ...Repeated for Contact Input 55 ...Repeated for Contact Input 56 ...Repeated for Contact Input 57 ...Repeated for Contact Input 58 ...Repeated for Contact Input 59 ...Repeated for Contact Input 60 ...Repeated for Contact Input 61 ...Repeated for Contact Input 62 ...Repeated for Contact Input 63 ...Repeated for Contact Input 64 ...Repeated for Contact Input 65 ...Repeated for Contact Input 66 ...Repeated for Contact Input 67 ...Repeated for Contact Input 68 ...Repeated for Contact Input 69 ...Repeated for Contact Input 70 ...Repeated for Contact Input 71 ...Repeated for Contact Input 72 ...Repeated for Contact Input 73 ...Repeated for Contact Input 74 ...Repeated for Contact Input 75 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
B-52
GE Multilin

ADDR BD58 BD60 BD68 BD70 BD78 BD80 BD88 BD90 BD98 BDA0 BDA8 BDB0 BDB8 BDC0 BDC8 BDD0 BDD8 BDE0 BDE8 BDF0 BDF8 BE00 BE30 BE31 BE37 BE38 BE39 BE3C BE48 BE54 BE60 BE6C BE78 BE84 BE90 BE9C BEA8 BEB4 BEC0 BECC BED8 BEE4 BEF0 BEFC BF08 BF14 BF20 BF2C BF38 BF44 BF50 BF5C REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Contact Input 76 ...Repeated for Contact Input 77 ...Repeated for Contact Input 78 ...Repeated for Contact Input 79 ...Repeated for Contact Input 80 ...Repeated for Contact Input 81 ...Repeated for Contact Input 82 ...Repeated for Contact Input 83 ...Repeated for Contact Input 84 ...Repeated for Contact Input 85 ...Repeated for Contact Input 86 ...Repeated for Contact Input 87 ...Repeated for Contact Input 88 ...Repeated for Contact Input 89 ...Repeated for Contact Input 90 ...Repeated for Contact Input 91 ...Repeated for Contact Input 92 ...Repeated for Contact Input 93 ...Repeated for Contact Input 94 ...Repeated for Contact Input 95 ...Repeated for Contact Input 96 Contact Input n Threshold, n = 1 to 24 (24 items) Virtual Input 1 Function Virtual Input 1 Name Virtual Input 1 Programmed Type Virtual Input 1 Events Reserved (3 items) ...Repeated for Virtual Input 2 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 3 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 4 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 5 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 6 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 7 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 8 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 9 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 10 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 11 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 12 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 13 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 14 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 15 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 16 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 17 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 18 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 19 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 20 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 21 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 22 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 23 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 24 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 25 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 26 0 to 3 0 to 1 --0 to 1 0 to 1 --------------1 1 --1 1 --RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting) F128 F102 F205 F127 F102 F001 1 (33 Vdc) 0 (Disabled) Virt Ip 1 0 (Latched) 0 (Disabled) 0 Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
GE Multilin
B-53
ADDR BF68 BF74 BF80 BF8C BF98 BFA4 BFB0 BFBC BFC8 BFD4 BFE0 BFEC BFF8 C004 C010 C01C C028 C034 C040 C04C C058 C064 C070 C07C C088 C094 C0A0 C0AC C0B8 C0C4 C0D0 C0DC C0E8 C0F4 C100 C10C C118 C124 C130 C136 C137 C138 C140 C148 C150 C158 C160 C168 C170 C178 C180 C188 C190 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Virtual Input 27 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 28 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 29 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 30 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 31 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 32 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 33 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 34 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 35 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 36 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 37 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 38 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 39 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 40 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 41 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 42 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 43 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 44 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 45 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 46 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 47 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 48 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 49 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 50 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 51 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 52 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 53 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 54 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 55 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 56 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 57 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 58 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 59 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 60 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 61 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 62 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 63 ...Repeated for Virtual Input 64 Virtual Output 1 Name Virtual Output 1 Events Reserved ...Repeated for Virtual Output 2 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 3 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 4 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 5 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 6 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 7 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 8 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 9 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 10 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 11 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 12 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 13 --0 to 1 ----------1 --F205 F102 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules) Virt Op 1 0 (Disabled) 0
B-54
GE Multilin

ADDR C198 C1A0 C1A8 C1B0 C1B8 C1C0 C1C8 C1D0 C1D8 C1E0 C1E8 C1F0 C1F8 C200 C208 C210 C218 C220 C228 C230 C238 C240 C248 C250 C258 C260 C268 C270 C278 C280 C288 C290 C298 C2A0 C2A8 C2B0 C2B8 C2C0 C2C8 C2D0 C2D8 C2E0 C2E8 C2F0 C2F8 C300 C308 C310 C318 C320 C328 C330 C338 C340 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Virtual Output 14 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 15 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 16 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 17 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 18 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 19 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 20 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 21 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 22 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 23 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 24 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 25 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 26 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 27 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 28 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 29 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 30 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 31 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 32 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 33 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 34 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 35 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 36 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 37 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 38 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 39 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 40 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 41 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 42 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 43 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 44 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 45 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 46 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 47 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 48 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 49 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 50 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 51 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 52 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 53 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 54 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 55 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 56 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 57 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 58 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 59 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 60 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 61 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 62 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 63 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 64 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 65 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 66 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 67 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
GE Multilin
B-55
ADDR C348 C350 C358 C360 C368 C370 C378 C380 C388 C390 C398 C3A0 C3A8 C3B0 C3B8 C3C0 C3C8 C3D0 C3D8 C3E0 C3E8 C3F0 C3F8 C400 C408 C410 C418 C420 C428 C430 C431 C432 C433 C440 C446 C447 C448 C449 C44A C44B C44C C458 C464 C470 C47C C488 C494 C4A0 C4AC C4B8 C4C4 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Virtual Output 68 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 69 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 70 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 71 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 72 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 73 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 74 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 75 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 76 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 77 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 78 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 79 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 80 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 81 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 82 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 83 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 84 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 85 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 86 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 87 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 88 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 89 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 90 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 91 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 92 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 93 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 94 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 95 ...Repeated for Virtual Output 96 Test Mode Function Force VFD and LED Test Mode Forcing Clear All Relay Records Command Contact Output 1 Name Contact Output 1 Operation Contact Output 1 Seal In Latching Output 1 Reset Contact Output 1 Events Latching Output 1 Type Reserved ...Repeated for Contact Output 2 ...Repeated for Contact Output 3 ...Repeated for Contact Output 4 ...Repeated for Contact Output 5 ...Repeated for Contact Output 6 ...Repeated for Contact Output 7 ...Repeated for Contact Output 8 ...Repeated for Contact Output 9 ...Repeated for Contact Output 10 ...Repeated for Contact Output 11 ...Repeated for Contact Output 12 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------------------------1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 --F245 F126 F300 F126 F205 F300 F300 F300 F102 F090 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Mandatory (Read/Write Setting) 0 (Disabled) 0 (No) 1 0 (No) Cont Op 1" 0 0 0 1 (Enabled) 0 (Operate-dominant) 0
Clear commands (read/write) Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
B-56
GE Multilin

ADDR C4D0 C4DC C4E8 C4F4 C500 C50C C518 C524 C530 C53C C548 C554 C560 C56C C578 C584 C590 C59C C5A8 C5B4 C5C0 C5CC C5D8 C5E4 C5F0 C5FC C608 C614 C620 C62C C638 C644 C650 C65C C668 C674 C680 C68C C698 C6A4 C6B0 C6BC C6C8 C6D4 C6E0 C6EC C6F8 C704 C710 C71C C728 C734 C750 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Contact Output 13 ...Repeated for Contact Output 14 ...Repeated for Contact Output 15 ...Repeated for Contact Output 16 ...Repeated for Contact Output 17 ...Repeated for Contact Output 18 ...Repeated for Contact Output 19 ...Repeated for Contact Output 20 ...Repeated for Contact Output 21 ...Repeated for Contact Output 22 ...Repeated for Contact Output 23 ...Repeated for Contact Output 24 ...Repeated for Contact Output 25 ...Repeated for Contact Output 26 ...Repeated for Contact Output 27 ...Repeated for Contact Output 28 ...Repeated for Contact Output 29 ...Repeated for Contact Output 30 ...Repeated for Contact Output 31 ...Repeated for Contact Output 32 ...Repeated for Contact Output 33 ...Repeated for Contact Output 34 ...Repeated for Contact Output 35 ...Repeated for Contact Output 36 ...Repeated for Contact Output 37 ...Repeated for Contact Output 38 ...Repeated for Contact Output 39 ...Repeated for Contact Output 40 ...Repeated for Contact Output 41 ...Repeated for Contact Output 42 ...Repeated for Contact Output 43 ...Repeated for Contact Output 44 ...Repeated for Contact Output 45 ...Repeated for Contact Output 46 ...Repeated for Contact Output 47 ...Repeated for Contact Output 48 ...Repeated for Contact Output 49 ...Repeated for Contact Output 50 ...Repeated for Contact Output 51 ...Repeated for Contact Output 52 ...Repeated for Contact Output 53 ...Repeated for Contact Output 54 ...Repeated for Contact Output 55 ...Repeated for Contact Output 56 ...Repeated for Contact Output 57 ...Repeated for Contact Output 58 ...Repeated for Contact Output 59 ...Repeated for Contact Output 60 ...Repeated for Contact Output 61 ...Repeated for Contact Output 62 ...Repeated for Contact Output 63 ...Repeated for Contact Output 64 FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset 0 to 65535 --1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Reset (Read/Write Setting) F300 0
GE Multilin
B-57
ADDR C760 C761 C762 C764 C766 C768 C76A C76C C771 C772 C773 C774 C77D C77F C781 C782 C7A0 C800 C880 C881 C882 C883 C884 C888 C890 C891 C892 C893 C894 C898 C89C C8A0 C8A4 C8A8 C8AC C8B0 C8B4 C8B8 C8BC C8C0 C8C4 C8C8 C8CC C8D0 C8D4 C8D8 C8DC C8E0 REGISTER NAME Control Pushbutton 1 Function Control Pushbutton 1 Events ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 2 ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 3 ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 4 ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 5 ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 6 ...Repeated for Control Pushbutton 7 Clear User Fault Reports operand Clear Event Records operand Clear Oscillography operand Clear Data Logger operand Clear Energy operand Clear Unauthorized Access operand Clear Platform Direct Input/Output Statistics operand Reserved (13 items) Force Contact Input x State (96 items) Force Contact Output x State (64 items) Direct Device ID Direct I/O Channel 1 Ring Configuration Function Platform Direct I/O Data Rate Direct I/O Channel 2 Ring Configuration Function Platform Direct I/O Crossover Function Direct input/output clear counters command Direct Input 1 Device Number Direct Input 1 Number Direct Input 1 Default State Direct Input 1 Events ...Repeated for Direct Input 2 ...Repeated for Direct Input 3 ...Repeated for Direct Input 4 ...Repeated for Direct Input 5 ...Repeated for Direct Input 6 ...Repeated for Direct Input 7 ...Repeated for Direct Input 8 ...Repeated for Direct Input 9 ...Repeated for Direct Input 10 ...Repeated for Direct Input 11 ...Repeated for Direct Input 12 ...Repeated for Direct Input 13 ...Repeated for Direct Input 14 ...Repeated for Direct Input 15 ...Repeated for Direct Input 16 ...Repeated for Direct Input 17 ...Repeated for Direct Input 18 ...Repeated for Direct Input 19 ...Repeated for Direct Input 20 ...Repeated for Direct Input 21 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 --0 to 2 0 to 3 1 to 16 0 to 1 64 to 128 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 16 0 to 96 0 to 3 0 to 1 ------------------------kbps --------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 64 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F300 F001 F144 F131 F001 F126 F001 F126 F102 F126 F001 F001 F086 F102 RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 1 UNITS ----STEP 1 1 FORMAT F102 F102
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled)
Control Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (7 modules)
Clear Records (Read/Write Setting) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled) 1 0 (No) 64 0 (No) 0 (Disabled) 0 (No) 0 0 0 (Off) 0 (Disabled)
Force Contact Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Settings)
Direct Inputs/Outputs (Read/Write Setting)
Direct input/output commands (Read/Write Command) Direct inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
B-58
GE Multilin

ADDR C8E4 C8E8 C8EC C8F0 C8F4 C8F8 C8FC C900 C904 C908 C90C CA10 CA11 CA12 CA14 CA16 CA18 CA1A CA1C CA1E CA20 CA22 CA24 CA26 CA28 CA2A CA2C CA2E CA30 CA32 CA34 CA36 CA38 CA3A CA3C CA3E CA40 CA42 CA44 CA46 CA48 CA4A CA4C CA4E CAD0 CAD1 CAD2 CAD3 CAD4 CAD8 CAD9 CADA REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Direct Input 22 ...Repeated for Direct Input 23 ...Repeated for Direct Input 24 ...Repeated for Direct Input 25 ...Repeated for Direct Input 26 ...Repeated for Direct Input 27 ...Repeated for Direct Input 28 ...Repeated for Direct Input 29 ...Repeated for Direct Input 30 ...Repeated for Direct Input 31 ...Repeated for Direct Input 32 Direct Output 1 Operand Direct Output 1 Events ...Repeated for Direct Output 2 ...Repeated for Direct Output 3 ...Repeated for Direct Output 4 ...Repeated for Direct Output 5 ...Repeated for Direct Output 6 ...Repeated for Direct Output 7 ...Repeated for Direct Output 8 ...Repeated for Direct Output 9 ...Repeated for Direct Output 10 ...Repeated for Direct Output 11 ...Repeated for Direct Output 12 ...Repeated for Direct Output 13 ...Repeated for Direct Output 14 ...Repeated for Direct Output 15 ...Repeated for Direct Output 16 ...Repeated for Direct Output 17 ...Repeated for Direct Output 18 ...Repeated for Direct Output 19 ...Repeated for Direct Output 20 ...Repeated for Direct Output 21 ...Repeated for Direct Output 22 ...Repeated for Direct Output 23 ...Repeated for Direct Output 24 ...Repeated for Direct Output 25 ...Repeated for Direct Output 26 ...Repeated for Direct Output 27 ...Repeated for Direct Output 28 ...Repeated for Direct Output 29 ...Repeated for Direct Output 30 ...Repeated for Direct Output 31 ...Repeated for Direct Output 32 Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Function Direct I/O Channel 1 CRC Alarm Message Count Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Threshold Direct Input/Output Channel 1 CRC Alarm Events Reserved (4 items) Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Function Direct I/O Channel 2 CRC Alarm Message Count Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Threshold 0 to 1 100 to 10000 1 to 1000 0 to 1 1 to 1000 0 to 1 100 to 10000 1 to 1000 ----------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 ----1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Platform Direct Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules) F300 F102 0 0 (Disabled)
Direct Input/Output Alarms (Read/Write Setting) F102 F001 F001 F102 F001 F102 F001 F001 0 (Disabled) 600 10 0 (Disabled) 10 0 (Disabled) 600 10
GE Multilin
B-59
ADDR CADB CADC CAE0 CAE1 CAE2 CAE3 CAE4 CAE8 CAE9 CAEA CAEB CAEC CB00 CB21 CB22 CB23 CB24 CB48 CB6C CB90 CBB4 CBD8 CBFC CC20 CC44 CC68 CC8C CCB0 CCD4 CCF8 CD1C CFA0 CFA1 CFA2 CFA3 CFA4 CFAA CFB4 CFBE CFC8 CFD2 CFDC CFE6 CFF0 CFFA D004 D00E D018 D022 D02C D036 D040 REGISTER NAME Direct Input/Output Channel 2 CRC Alarm Events Reserved (4 items) Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events Reserved (4 items) Direct IO Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold Direct I/O Channel 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events Reserved (4 items) Remote Device 1 GSSE/GOOSE Application ID Remote Device 1 GOOSE Ethernet APPID Remote Device 1 GOOSE Dataset Remote Device 1 in PMU Scheme ...Repeated for Device 2 ...Repeated for Device 3 ...Repeated for Device 4 ...Repeated for Device 5 ...Repeated for Device 6 ...Repeated for Device 7 ...Repeated for Device 8 ...Repeated for Device 9 ...Repeated for Device 10 ...Repeated for Device 11 ...Repeated for Device 12 ...Repeated for Device 13 ...Repeated for Device 14 ...Repeated for Device 15 ...Repeated for Device 16 Remote Input 1 Device Remote Input 1 Item Remote Input 1 Default State Remote Input 1 Events Remote Input 1 Name ...Repeated for Remote Input 2 ...Repeated for Remote Input 3 ...Repeated for Remote Input 4 ...Repeated for Remote Input 5 ...Repeated for Remote Input 6 ...Repeated for Remote Input 7 ...Repeated for Remote Input 8 ...Repeated for Remote Input 9 ...Repeated for Remote Input 10 ...Repeated for Remote Input 11 ...Repeated for Remote Input 12 ...Repeated for Remote Input 13 ...Repeated for Remote Input 14 ...Repeated for Remote Input 15 ...Repeated for Remote Input 16 ...Repeated for Remote Input 17 1 to 16 0 to 64 0 to 3 0 to 1 1 to 64 ----------1 1 1 1 1 F001 F156 F086 F102 F205 RANGE 0 to 1 1 to 1000 0 to 1 100 to 10000 1 to 1000 0 to 1 1 to 1000 0 to 1 100 to 10000 1 to 1000 0 to 1 ----0 to 16383 0 to 8 0 to 1 UNITS --------------------------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 FORMAT F102 F001 F102 F001 F001 F102 F001 F102 F001 F001 F102 F001 F209 F001 F184 F126
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT 0 (Disabled) 10 0 (Disabled) 600 10 0 (Disabled) 10 0 (Disabled) 600 10 0 (Disabled) 10 Remote Device 1 0 0 (Fixed) 0 (No)
Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules) 1 0 (None) 0 (Off) 0 (Disabled) Rem Ip 1
B-60
GE Multilin

ADDR D04A D054 D05E D068 D072 D07C D086 D090 D09A D0A4 D0AE D0B8 D0C2 D0CC D0D6 D220 D221 D222 D224 D228 D22C D230 D234 D238 D23C D240 D244 D248 D24C D250 D254 D258 D25C D260 D264 D268 D26C D270 D274 D278 D27C D280 D284 D288 D28C D290 D294 D298 D29C D2A0 D2A1 D2A2 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Remote Input 18 ...Repeated for Remote Input 19 ...Repeated for Remote Input 20 ...Repeated for Remote Input 21 ...Repeated for Remote Input 22 ...Repeated for Remote Input 23 ...Repeated for Remote Input 24 ...Repeated for Remote Input 25 ...Repeated for Remote Input 26 ...Repeated for Remote Input 27 ...Repeated for Remote Input 28 ...Repeated for Remote Input 29 ...Repeated for Remote Input 30 ...Repeated for Remote Input 31 ...Repeated for Remote Input 32 Remote Output DNA 1 Operand Remote Output DNA 1 Events Reserved (2 items) ...Repeated for Remote Output 2 ...Repeated for Remote Output 3 ...Repeated for Remote Output 4 ...Repeated for Remote Output 5 ...Repeated for Remote Output 6 ...Repeated for Remote Output 7 ...Repeated for Remote Output 8 ...Repeated for Remote Output 9 ...Repeated for Remote Output 10 ...Repeated for Remote Output 11 ...Repeated for Remote Output 12 ...Repeated for Remote Output 13 ...Repeated for Remote Output 14 ...Repeated for Remote Output 15 ...Repeated for Remote Output 16 ...Repeated for Remote Output 17 ...Repeated for Remote Output 18 ...Repeated for Remote Output 19 ...Repeated for Remote Output 20 ...Repeated for Remote Output 21 ...Repeated for Remote Output 22 ...Repeated for Remote Output 23 ...Repeated for Remote Output 24 ...Repeated for Remote Output 25 ...Repeated for Remote Output 26 ...Repeated for Remote Output 27 ...Repeated for Remote Output 28 ...Repeated for Remote Output 29 ...Repeated for Remote Output 30 ...Repeated for Remote Output 31 ...Repeated for Remote Output 32 Remote Output UserSt 1 Operand Remote Output UserSt 1 Events Reserved (2 items) 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------1 1 1 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 1 ------1 1 1 RANGE UNITS STEP
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules) F300 F102 F001 0 0 (Disabled) 0
Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules) F300 F102 F001 0 0 (Disabled) 0
GE Multilin
B-61
ADDR D2A4 D2A8 D2AC D2B0 D2B4 D2B8 D2BC D2C0 D2C4 D2C8 D2CC D2D0 D2D4 D2D8 D2DC D2E0 D2E4 D2E8 D2EC D2F0 D2F4 D2F8 D2FC D300 D304 D308 D30C D310 D314 D318 D31C D320 D321 D322 D323 D324 D325 D326 D327 D328 D329 D32A D32B D32C D32D D32E D32F D330 D331 D332 D333 D334 D335 REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Remote Output 2 ...Repeated for Remote Output 3 ...Repeated for Remote Output 4 ...Repeated for Remote Output 5 ...Repeated for Remote Output 6 ...Repeated for Remote Output 7 ...Repeated for Remote Output 8 ...Repeated for Remote Output 9 ...Repeated for Remote Output 10 ...Repeated for Remote Output 11 ...Repeated for Remote Output 12 ...Repeated for Remote Output 13 ...Repeated for Remote Output 14 ...Repeated for Remote Output 15 ...Repeated for Remote Output 16 ...Repeated for Remote Output 17 ...Repeated for Remote Output 18 ...Repeated for Remote Output 19 ...Repeated for Remote Output 20 ...Repeated for Remote Output 21 ...Repeated for Remote Output 22 ...Repeated for Remote Output 23 ...Repeated for Remote Output 24 ...Repeated for Remote Output 25 ...Repeated for Remote Output 26 ...Repeated for Remote Output 27 ...Repeated for Remote Output 28 ...Repeated for Remote Output 29 ...Repeated for Remote Output 30 ...Repeated for Remote Output 31 ...Repeated for Remote Output 32 IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO1.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO2.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO3.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO4.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO5.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO6.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO7.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO8.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO9.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO10.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO11.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO12.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO13.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO14.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO15.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO16.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO17.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO18.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO19.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO20.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO21.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO22.ctlModel Value 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 --------------------------------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
IEC 61850 GGIO2 Control Configuration (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
B-62
GE Multilin

ADDR D336 D337 D338 D339 D33A D33B D33C D33D D33E D33F D340 D341 D342 D343 D344 D345 D346 D347 D348 D349 D34A D34B D34C D34D D34E D34F D350 D351 D352 D353 D354 D355 D356 D357 D358 D359 D35A D35B D35C D35D D35E D380 D382 D384 D388 D38C D390 D394 D398 D39C D3A0 D3A4 D3A8 REGISTER NAME IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO23.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO24.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO25.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO26.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO27.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO28.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO29.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO30.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO31.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO32.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO33.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO34.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO35.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO36.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO37.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO38.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO39.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO40.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO41.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO42.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO43.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO44.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO45.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO46.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO47.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO48.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO49.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO50.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO51.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO52.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO53.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO54.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO55.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO56.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO57.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO58.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO59.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO60.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO61.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO62.ctlModel Value IEC 61850 GGIO2.CF.SPCSO63.ctlModel Value Remote Device 1 StNum Remote Device 1 SqNum ...Repeated for Remote Device 2 ...Repeated for Remote Device 3 ...Repeated for Remote Device 4 ...Repeated for Remote Device 5 ...Repeated for Remote Device 6 ...Repeated for Remote Device 7 ...Repeated for Remote Device 8 ...Repeated for Remote Device 9 ...Repeated for Remote Device 10 ...Repeated for Remote Device 11 RANGE 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 2 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 UNITS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F001 F003 F003
DEFAULT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0
Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)
GE Multilin
B-63
ADDR D3AC D3B0 D3B4 D3B8 D3BC D3C0 D3C4 D3C8 D3CC D3D0 D3D4 D3D8 D3DC D3E0 D3E4 D3E8 D3EC D3F0 D3F4 D3F8 D3FC D400 D401 D402 D403 D411 D41F D42D D49D D50D D57D D585 D58D D595 D5D5 D615 D655 D665 D675 D685 D705 D785 D705 D715 D725 E4D4 E4D5 E4DC E4DD E4DE E4DF REGISTER NAME ...Repeated for Remote Device 12 ...Repeated for Remote Device 13 ...Repeated for Remote Device 14 ...Repeated for Remote Device 15 ...Repeated for Remote Device 16 ...Repeated for Remote Device 17 ...Repeated for Remote Device 18 ...Repeated for Remote Device 19 ...Repeated for Remote Device 20 ...Repeated for Remote Device 21 ...Repeated for Remote Device 22 ...Repeated for Remote Device 23 ...Repeated for Remote Device 24 ...Repeated for Remote Device 25 ...Repeated for Remote Device 26 ...Repeated for Remote Device 27 ...Repeated for Remote Device 28 ...Repeated for Remote Device 29 ...Repeated for Remote Device 30 ...Repeated for Remote Device 31 ...Repeated for Remote Device 32 PMU 1 Communication Port 1 Type PMU 1 Communication Port 2 Type PMU 1 Communication Port 3 Type PMU 1 Port 1 PHS-x (14 items) PMU 1 Port 2 PHS-x (14 items) PMU 1 Port 3 PHS-x (14 items) PMU 1 Communication Port 1 PHS-x Name (14 items) PMU 1 Port 2 PHS-x Name (14 items) PMU 1 Port 3 PHS-x Name (14 items) PMU 1 Port 1 A-CH-x (8 items) PMU 1 Port 2 A-CH-x (8 items) PMU 1 Port 3 A-CH-x (8 items) PMU 1 Port 1 A-CH-x Name (8 items) PMU 1 Port 2 A-CH-x Name (8 items) PMU 1 Port 3 A-CH-x Name (8 items) PMU 1 Port 1 D-CH-x (16 items) PMU 1 Port 2 D-CH-x (16 items) PMU 1 Port 3 D-CH-x (16 items) PMU 1 Port 1 D-CH-x Name (16 items) PMU 1 Port 2 D-CH-x Name (16 items) PMU 1 Port 3 D-CH-x Name (16 items) PMU 1 Port 1 D-CH-x Normal State (16 items) PMU 1 Port 2 D-CH-x Normal State (16 items) PMU 1 Port 3 D-CH-x Normal State (16 items) PMU 1 Recording Clear Command PMU 1 Recording Force Trigger PMU 1 Recording Rate Reserved PMU 1 No Of Timed Records PMU 1 Trigger Mode 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 3 0 to 14 0 to 14 0 to 14 ------0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 ------0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 ------0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 10 --1 to 128 0 to 1 ------------------------------------------------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 ------1 1 1 ------1 1 1 ------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F545 F545 F545 F543 F543 F543 F203 F203 F203 F600 F600 F600 F203 F203 F203 F300 F300 F300 F203 F203 F203 F108 F108 F108 F126 F126 F544 F001 F001 F542 RANGE UNITS STEP FORMAT
APPENDIX B
DEFAULT
Phasor Measurement Unit Communication (Read/Write Setting) 0 (Network) 0 (Network) 0 (Network) 1 (Va) 1 (Va) 1 (Va) GE-UR-PMU-PHS 1 GE-UR-PMU-PHS 1 GE-UR-PMU-PHS 1 0 0 0 AnalogChannel 1 AnalogChannel 1 AnalogChannel 1 0 0 0 Dig Channel 1 Dig Channel 1 Dig Channel 1 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (No) 0 (No) 3 (10/sec.) 0 3 0 (Auto Overwrite)
Phasor Measurement Unit Recording Command (Read/Write Command)
Phasor Measurement Unit Recording (Read/Write Setting)
B-64
GE Multilin

ADDR E4E0 E4E1 E4E2 E4F0 E560 E568 E5A8 E5B8 EB00 EB01 EB02 EB03 EB04 EB05 EB08 EB09 ED00 ED01 ED07 ED09 EFFF REGISTER NAME PMU 1 Timed Trigger Position Reserved PMU 1 Record PHS-1 (14 items) PMU 1 Record PHS-x Name (14 items) PMU 1 Record A-CH-x (8 items) PMU 1 Record A-CH-x Name (8 items) PMU 1 Record D-CH-x (16 items) PMU 1 Record D-CH-x Name (16 items) PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Function PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Low Frequency PMU 1 Frequency Trigger High Frequency PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Pickup Time PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Dropout Time PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Block (3 items) PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Target PMU 1 Frequency Trigger Events FlexLogic displays active Reserved (6 items) Last settings change date Template bitmask (750 items) PMU Recording Number of Triggers RANGE 1 to 50 --0 to 14 --0 to 65535 --0 to 65535 --0 to 1 20 to 70 20 to 70 0 to 600 0 to 600 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1 --0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 UNITS % ----------------Hz Hz s s --------------samples STEP 1 1 1 --1 --1 --1 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 --1 1 1
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
FORMAT F001 F001 F543 F203 F600 F203 F300 F203 F102 F001 F001 F001 F001 F300 F109 F102 F102 --F050 F001 F001
DEFAULT 10 0 1 (Va) GE-UR-PMU-PHS 1 0 AnalogChannel 1 0 Dig Channel 1 0 (Disabled) 4900 6100 10 100 0 0 (Self-reset) 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled) --0 0 0
Phasor Measurement Unit Frequency Trigger (Read/Write Setting)
Setting file template values (read only)
Phasor Measurement Unit Records (Read Only)
B.4.2 DATA FORMATS
F001 UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F005 UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F002 UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F006 UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F003 UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers) High order word is stored in the first register. Low order word is stored in the second register.
F011 UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points) A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) which are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 for a listing of the pickup ratios; the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the offset into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time value is stored.
F004 UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers) High order word is stored in the first register/ Low order word is stored in the second register.
F012 DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING (unsigned 16-bit integer) MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten. LSB indicates the number of decimal points to display. Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three decimal places and base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is 12345.678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the displayed value on the unit is 12.35 kA.
GE Multilin
B-65
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F013 POWER_FACTOR (SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER) Positive values indicate lagging power factor; negative values indicate leading.
F084 ENUMERATION: SELECTOR POWER UP 0 = Restore, 1 = Synchronize, 2 = Sync/Restore
F040 UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER
F085 ENUMERATION: POWER SWING SHAPE 0 = Mho Shape, 1 = Quad Shape
F050 UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER) Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January 1, 1970.
F086 ENUMERATION: DIGITAL INPUT DEFAULT STATE 0 = Off, 1 = On, 2= Latest/Off, 3 = Latest/On
F051 UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050) First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx). Month: 1=January, 2=February,...,12=December; Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1 Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1
F090 ENUMERATION: LATCHING OUTPUT TYPE 0 = Operate-dominant, 1 = Reset-dominant
F100 ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE 0 = Wye; 1 = Delta
F052 UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050) First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx). Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm; Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1 Last 16 bits are Seconds 1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s) (xx:xx:.SS.SSS): 0=00.000s,
F101 ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY 0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100%
F060 FLOATING_POINT IEEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)
F102 ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED 0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
F070 HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITS
F103 ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES

bitmask curve shape IEEE Mod Inv IEEE Very Inv IEEE Ext Inv IEC Curve A IEC Curve B IEC Curve C IEC Short Inv IAC Ext Inv IAC Very Inv bitmask 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 curve shape IAC Inverse IAC Short Inv I2t Definite Time FlexCurve A FlexCurve B FlexCurve C FlexCurve D
0 1 2
3 4 5
6 7 8
F104 ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE 0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed, 2 = Linear
F083 ENUMERATION: SELECTOR MODES 0 = Time-Out, 1 = Acknowledge
B-66
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F105 ENUMERATION: LOGIC INPUT 0 = Disabled, 1 = Input 1, 2 = Input 2
F116 ENUMERATION: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE CURVES 0 = Definite Time, 1 = FlexCurve A, 2 = FlexCurve B, 3 = FlexCurve C
F106 ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION 0 = ABC, 1 = ACB
F117 ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS 0 = 172 cycles, 1 = 336 cycles, 2 = 718 cycles, 3 = 159 cycles
F108 ENUMERATION: OFF/ON 0 = Off, 1 = On
F118 ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE 0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected
F109 ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION 0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled
F119 ENUMERATION: FLEXCURVE PICKUP RATIOS

mask value 0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.48 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.84 0.86 mask 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 value 0.88 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 1.03 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.10 2.20 2.30 2.40 2.50 2.60 2.70 2.80 mask 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 value 2.90 3.00 3.10 3.20 3.30 3.40 3.50 3.60 3.70 3.80 3.90 4.00 4.10 4.20 4.30 4.40 4.50 4.60 4.70 4.80 4.90 5.00 5.10 5.20 5.30 5.40 5.50 5.60 5.70 5.80 mask 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 value 5.90 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 10.50 11.00 11.50 12.00 12.50 13.00 13.50 14.00 14.50 15.00 15.50 16.00 16.50 17.00 17.50 18.00 18.50 19.00 19.50 20.00
F110 ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL 0 = Trip, 1 = Alarm, 2 = None
0 1 2 3 4
F111 ENUMERATION: UNDERVOLTAGE CURVE SHAPES 0 = Definite Time, 1 = Inverse Time
5 6 7 8
F112 ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES

bitmask 0 1 2 3 value 300 1200 2400 4800 bitmask 4 5 6 7 value 9600 19200 38400 57600 bitmask 8 9 10 11 value 115200 14400 28800 33600
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
F113 ENUMERATION: PARITY 0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
18 19 20 21 22
F114 ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE 0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated
23 24 25 26 27
F115 ENUMERATION: BREAKER STATUS 0 = Auxiliary A, 1 = Auxiliary B
28 29
F120 ENUMERATION: DISTANCE SHAPE 0 = Mho, 1 = Quad
GE Multilin
B-67
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

bitmask element
APPENDIX B
F122 ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE 0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS
60 61 64 65
Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 1 Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent 2 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 4 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 5 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 6 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 7 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 8 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 9 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 10 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 11 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 12 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Ground Time Overcurrent 2 Ground Time Overcurrent 3 Ground Time Overcurrent 4 Ground Time Overcurrent 5 Ground Time Overcurrent 6 Restricted Ground Fault 1 Restricted Ground Fault 2 Restricted Ground Fault 3 Restricted Ground Fault 4 Restricted Ground Fault 5 Restricted Ground Fault 6 Opposite Phase Rotation Generator Unbalance Auxiliary Undervoltage 1 Phase Undervoltage 1 Phase Undervoltage 2 Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Phase Overvoltage 1 Compensated Overvoltage 1 Neutral Overvoltage 1 Phase Distance Zone 1 Phase Distance Zone 2 Phase Distance Zone 3 Power Swing Detect Volt per Hertz 1 Volt per Hertz 2 Sensitive Directional Power 1 Sensitive Directional Power 2 100% Stator Ground Split Phase Protection SRC1 VT Fuse Failure SRC2 VT Fuse Failure SRC3 VT Fuse Failure SRC4 VT Fuse Failure SRC5 VT Fuse Failure SRC6 VT Fuse Failure Stator Differential Accidental Energization
F123 ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY 0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A
66 67 68 69 70
F124 ENUMERATION: LIST OF ELEMENTS

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 16 17 18 19 20 21 24 25 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 48 49 50 51 52 53 56 57 element Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 4 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 5 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 6 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 7 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 8 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 9 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 10 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 11 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 12 Phase Time Overcurrent 1 Phase Time Overcurrent 2 Phase Time Overcurrent 3 Phase Time Overcurrent 4 Phase Time Overcurrent 5 Phase Time Overcurrent 6 Phase Directional Overcurrent 1 Phase Directional Overcurrent 2 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 2 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 3 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 4 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 5 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 6 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 7 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 8 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 9 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 10 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 11 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 12 Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Neutral Time Overcurrent 2 Neutral Time Overcurrent 3 Neutral Time Overcurrent 4 Neutral Time Overcurrent 5 Neutral Time Overcurrent 6 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 1 Neutral Directional Overcurrent 2
71 72 73 74 75 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 101 125 140 144 145 148 152 154 156 160 161 162 190 210 211 214 215 221 222 224 225 226 227 228 229 265 296
B-68
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
bitmask 300 312 313 330 336 337 344 345 346 347 352 353 354 355 356 357 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 element Loss Of Excitation Synchrocheck 1 Synchrocheck 2 Third harmonic neutral undervoltage Setting Group Reset Overfrequency 1 Overfrequency 2 Overfrequency 3 Overfrequency 4 Underfrequency 1 Underfrequency 2 Underfrequency 3 Underfrequency 4 Underfrequency 5 Underfrequency 6 Selector 1 Selector 2 Control pushbutton 1 Control pushbutton 2 Control pushbutton 3 Control pushbutton 4 Control pushbutton 5 Control pushbutton 6 Control pushbutton 7 FlexElement 1 FlexElement 2 FlexElement 3 FlexElement 4 FlexElement 5 FlexElement 6 FlexElement 7 FlexElement 8 FlexElement 9 FlexElement 10 FlexElement 11 FlexElement 12 FlexElement 13 FlexElement 14 FlexElement 15 FlexElement 16 Non-volatile Latch 1 Non-volatile Latch 2 Non-volatile Latch 3 Non-volatile Latch 4 Non-volatile Latch 5 Non-volatile Latch 6 Non-volatile Latch 7 Non-volatile Latch 8 Non-volatile Latch 9 Non-volatile Latch 10 Non-volatile Latch 11 Non-volatile Latch 12 bitmask 432 433 434 435 530 531 532 533 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 element Non-volatile Latch 13 Non-volatile Latch 14 Non-volatile Latch 15 Non-volatile Latch 16
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Frequency Rate of Change 1 Frequency Rate of Change 2 Frequency Rate of Change 3 Frequency Rate of Change 4 Digital Counter 1 Digital Counter 2 Digital Counter 3 Digital Counter 4 Digital Counter 5 Digital Counter 6 Digital Counter 7 Digital Counter 8 Digital Element 1 Digital Element 2 Digital Element 3 Digital Element 4 Digital Element 5 Digital Element 6 Digital Element 7 Digital Element 8 Digital Element 9 Digital Element 10 Digital Element 11 Digital Element 12 Digital Element 13 Digital Element 14 Digital Element 15 Digital Element 16 Digital Element 17 Digital Element 18 Digital Element 19 Digital Element 20 Digital Element 21 Digital Element 22 Digital Element 23 Digital Element 24 Digital Element 25 Digital Element 26 Digital Element 27 Digital Element 28 Digital Element 29 Digital Element 30 Digital Element 31 Digital Element 32 Digital Element 33 Digital Element 34 Digital Element 35 Digital Element 36 Digital Element 37
GE Multilin
B-69
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

bitmask 729 730 731 732 733 element Digital Element 38 Digital Element 39 Digital Element 40 Digital Element 41 Digital Element 42 Digital Element 43 Digital Element 44 Digital Element 45 Digital Element 46 Digital Element 47 Digital Element 48 Trip Bus 1 Trip Bus 2 Trip Bus 3 Trip Bus 4 Trip Bus 5 Trip Bus 6 RTD Input 1 RTD Input 2 RTD Input 3 RTD Input 4 RTD Input 5 RTD Input 6 RTD Input 7 RTD Input 8 RTD Input 9 RTD Input 10 RTD Input 11 RTD Input 12 RTD Input 13 RTD Input 14 RTD Input 15 RTD Input 16 RTD Input 17 RTD Input 18 RTD Input 19 RTD Input 20 RTD Input 21 RTD Input 22 RTD Input 23 RTD Input 24 RTD Input 25 RTD Input 26 RTD Input 27 RTD Input 28 RTD Input 29 RTD Input 30 RTD Input 31 RTD Input 32 RTD Input 33 RTD Input 34 RTD Input 35 RTD Input 36 bitmask 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 968 969 970 971 991 992 993 element RTD Input 37 RTD Input 38 RTD Input 39 RTD Input 40 RTD Input 41 RTD Input 42 RTD Input 43 RTD Input 44 RTD Input 45 RTD Input 46 RTD Input 47 RTD Input 48 User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 User-Programmable Pushbutton 2 User-Programmable Pushbutton 3 User-Programmable Pushbutton 4 User-Programmable Pushbutton 5 User-Programmable Pushbutton 6 User-Programmable Pushbutton 7 User-Programmable Pushbutton 8 User-Programmable Pushbutton 9 User-Programmable Pushbutton 10 User-Programmable Pushbutton 11 User-Programmable Pushbutton 12 User-Programmable Pushbutton 13 User-Programmable Pushbutton 14 User-Programmable Pushbutton 15 User-Programmable Pushbutton 16 Frequency out-of-band accumulation 1 Frequency out-of-band accumulation 2 Disconnect switch 1 Disconnect switch 2 Disconnect switch 3 Disconnect switch 4 Disconnect switch 5 Disconnect switch 6 Disconnect switch 7 Disconnect switch 8 Disconnect switch 9 Disconnect switch 10 Disconnect switch 11 Disconnect switch 12 Disconnect switch 13 Disconnect switch 14 Disconnect switch 15 Disconnect switch 16 Breaker 1 Breaker 2 Breaker 3 Breaker 4 Remote RTD Input 1 Remote RTD Input 2 Remote RTD Input 3
APPENDIX B
734 735 736 737 738 739 842 843 844 845 846 847 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884
B-70
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
bitmask 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 element Remote RTD Input 4 Remote RTD Input 5 Remote RTD Input 6 Remote RTD Input 7 Remote RTD Input 8 Remote RTD Input 9 Remote RTD Input 10 Remote RTD Input 11 Remote RTD Input 12
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F135 ENUMERATION: GAIN CALIBRATION 0 = 0x1, 1 = 1x16
F136 ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS 0 = 31 x 8 cycles, 1 = 15 x 16 cycles, 2 = 7 x 32 cycles 3 = 3 x 64 cycles, 4 = 1 x 128 cycles
F125 ENUMERATION: ACCESS LEVEL 0 = Restricted; 1 = Command, 2 = Setting, 3 = Factory Service
F137 ENUMERATION: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON FUNCTION 0 = Disabled, 1 = Self-Reset, 2 = Latched
F126 ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE 0 = No, 1 = Yes
F138 ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE 0 = Data File, 1 = Configuration File, 2 = Header File
F127 ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING 0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset
F140 ENUMERATION: CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE, DISABLED 0 = Disabled, 1 = Current 46 A, 2 = Voltage 280 V, 3 = Current 4.6 A, 4 = Current 2 A, 5 = Notched 4.6 A, 6 = Notched 2 A
F128 ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD 0 = 17 V DC, 1 = 33 V DC, 2 = 84 V DC, 3 = 166 V DC
F141 ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERRORS

Bitmask 0 1 2 Error Any Self Tests IRIG-B Failure Port 1 Offline Port 2 Offline Port 3 Offline Port 4 Offline Port 5 Offline Port 6 Offline RRTD Communcations Failure Voltage Monitor FlexLogic Error Token Equipment Mismatch Process Bus Failure Unit Not Programmed System Exception Latching Output Discrepancy Ethernet Switch Fail Maintenance Alert 01 SNTP Failure --Primary Ethernet Fail Secondary Ethernet Fail
F129 ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE 0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute
F130 ENUMERATION: SIMULATION MODE 0 = Off. 1 = Pre-Fault, 2 = Fault, 3 = Post-Fault
3 4 5 6 7
F131 ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE 0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze
8 9 10 11
F133 ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE 0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed
12 13 14 15 16
F134 ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL 0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a
17 18 19 20 21
GE Multilin
B-71
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

Bitmask 22 23 24 25 26 Error Temperature Monitor Process Bus Trouble Brick Trouble Field RTD Trouble Field TDR Trouble Remote Device Offline Direct Device Offline Direct Input/Output Ring Break Any Minor Error Any Major Error Unit Not Calibrated ------Watchdog Error Low On Memory --Module Failure 01 Module Failure 02 Module Failure 03 Module Failure 04 Module Failure 05 Module Failure 06 Module Failure 07 Module Failure 08 Module Failure 09 Incompatible Hardware Module Failure 10 Module Failure 11 Module Failure 12
APPENDIX B
F145 ENUMERATION: ALPHABET LETTER

bitmask type 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 null A B C D E F bitmask type 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 G H I J K L M bitmask type 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 N O P Q R S T bitmask type 21 22 23 24 25 26 U V W X Y Z
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
F146 ENUMERATION: MISCELLANEOUS EVENT CAUSES

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 definition Events Cleared Oscillography Triggered Date/time Changed Default Settings Loaded Test Mode Forcing On Test Mode Forcing Off Power On Power Off Relay In Service Relay Out Of Service Watchdog Reset Oscillography Clear Reboot Command Led Test Initiated Flash Programming Fault Report Trigger User Programmable Fault Report Trigger --Reload CT/VT module Settings --Ethernet Port 1 Offline Ethernet Port 2 Offline Ethernet Port 3 Offline Ethernet Port 4 Offline Ethernet Port 5 Offline Ethernet Port 6 Offline Test Mode Isolated Test Mode Forcible Test Mode Disabled Temperature Warning On Temperature Warning Off Unauthorized Access System Integrity Recovery System Integrity Recovery 06 System Integrity Recovery 07
F142 ENUMERATION: EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE 0 = All Record Data, 1 = Headers Only, 2 = Numeric Event Cause
16 17 18 19 20
F143 UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number) A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error
21 22 23 24
F144 ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE 0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B-72
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F151 ENUMERATION: RTD SELECTION

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RTD# NONE RTD 1 RTD 2 RTD 3 RTD 4 RTD 5 RTD 6 RTD 7 RTD 8 RTD 9 RTD 10 RTD 11 RTD 12 RTD 13 RTD 14 RTD 15 RTD 16 bitmask 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 RTD# RTD 17 RTD 18 RTD 19 RTD 20 RTD 21 RTD 22 RTD 23 RTD 24 RTD 25 RTD 26 RTD 27 RTD 28 RTD 29 RTD 30 RTD 31 RTD 32 bitmask 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 RTD# RTD 33 RTD 34 RTD 35 RTD 36 RTD 37 RTD 38 RTD 39 RTD 40 RTD 41 RTD 42 RTD 43 RTD 44 RTD 45 RTD 46 RTD 47 RTD 48
F156 ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 value NONE DNA-1 DNA-2 DNA-3 DNA-4 DNA-5 DNA-6 DNA-7 DNA-8 DNA-9 DNA-10 DNA-11 DNA-12 DNA-13 DNA-14 DNA-15 DNA-16 DNA-17 DNA-18 DNA-19 DNA-20 DNA-21 DNA-22 DNA-23 DNA-24 DNA-25 DNA-26 DNA-27 DNA-28 DNA-29 DNA-30 DNA-31 DNA-32 UserSt-1 UserSt-2 bitmask 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 128 value UserSt-3 UserSt-4 UserSt-5 UserSt-6 UserSt-7 UserSt-8 UserSt-9 UserSt-10 UserSt-11 UserSt-12 UserSt-13 UserSt-14 UserSt-15 UserSt-16 UserSt-17 UserSt-18 UserSt-19 UserSt-20 UserSt-21 UserSt-22 UserSt-23 UserSt-24 UserSt-25 UserSt-26 UserSt-27 UserSt-28 UserSt-29 UserSt-30 UserSt-31 UserSt-32 Dataset Item 1 Dataset Item 2 Dataset Item 3 Dataset Item 64
F152 ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP 0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3 4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6
18 19 20 21 22 23
F153 ENUMERATION: DISTANCE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 type None Dy1 Dy3 Dy5 Dy7 bitmask 5 6 7 8 9 type Dy9 Dy11 Yd1 Yd3 Yd5 bitmask 10 11 12 type Yd7 Yd9 Yd11
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
F154 ENUMERATION: DISTANCE DIRECTION 0 = Forward, 1 = Reverse, 2 = Non-Directional
33 34
F157 ENUMERATION: BREAKER MODE F155 ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE 0 = Offline, 1 = Online F159 ENUMERATION: BREAKER AUX CONTACT KEYING 0 = 52a, 1 = 52b, 2 = None 0 = 3-Pole, 1 = 1-Pole
F166 ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE 0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca
GE Multilin
B-73
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F167 ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE 0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4, 4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6
F176 ENUMERATION: SYNCHROCHECK DEAD SOURCE SELECT

bitmask 0 1 synchrocheck dead source None LV1 and DV2 DV1 and LV2 DV1 or DV2 DV1 Xor DV2 DV1 and DV2
F168 ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION 0 = Disabled, 1 = Adapt. 2nd, 2 = Trad. 2nd
2 3 4 5
F170 ENUMERATION: LOW/HIGH OFFSET and GAIN TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT SELECTION 0 = LOW, 1 = HIGH
F177 ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT 0 = None, 1 = COM1-RS485, 2 = COM2-RS485, 3 = Front Panel-RS232, 4 = Network - TCP, 5 = Network - UDP
F171 ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE 0 = dcmA IN, 1 = Ohms IN, 2 = RTD IN, 3 = dcmA OUT, 4 = RRTD IN
F178 ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER RATES 0 = 1 sec, 1 = 1 min, 2 = 5 min, 3 = 10 min, 4 = 15 min, 5 = 20 min, 6 = 30 min, 7 = 60 min, 8 = 15 ms, 9 = 30 ms, 10 = 100 ms, 11 = 500 ms
F172 ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS

bitmask 0 1 2 3 slot F G H J bitmask 4 5 6 7 slot K L M N bitmask 8 9 10 11 slot P R S T bitmask 12 13 14 15 slot U V W X
F179 ENUMERATION: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT TYPE 0 = Neg Sequence, 1 = Zero Sequence
F180 ENUMERATION: PHASE/GROUND F173 ENUMERATION: DCMA INPUT/OUTPUT RANGE

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 dcmA input/output range 0 to 1 mA 0 to 1 mA 1 to 1 mA 0 to 5 mA 0 to 10 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA bitmask 0 definition Off 8 samples/cycle 16 samples/cycle 32 samples/cycle 64 samples/cycle
0 = PHASE, 1 = GROUND
F181 ENUMERATION: ODD/EVEN/NONE 0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN, 2 = NONE
F183 ENUMERATION: AC INPUT WAVEFORMS
F174 ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE 0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel, 2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper
1 2 3 4
F175 ENUMERATION: PHASE LETTERS 0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C
B-74
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F184 ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE GOOSE DATASET

value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GOOSE dataset Off GooseIn 1 GooseIn 2 GooseIn 3 GooseIn 4 GooseIn 5 GooseIn 6 GooseIn 7 GooseIn 8
F192 ENUMERATION: ETHERNET OPERATION MODE 0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex
F193 ENUMERATION: ACCIDENTAL ENERG. ARMING MODE 0 = UV and Offline, 1 = UV or Offline
F194 ENUMERATION: DNP SCALE 0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000, 6 = 10000, 7 = 100000, 8 = 0.001
F185 ENUMERATION: PHASE A,B,C, GROUND SELECTOR 0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = G
F196 ENUMERATION: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT OPERATING CURRENT 0 = Calculated 3I0, 1 = Measured IG
F186 ENUMERATION: MEASUREMENT MODE 0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase
F199 ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED/CUSTOM 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Custom
F190 ENUMERATION: SIMULATED KEYPRESS

bitmsk 0 keypress --use between real keys 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Decimal Point Plus/Minus Value Up Value Down Message Up Message Down Message Left Message Right Menu Help Escape --bitmsk 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 keypress Reset User 1 User 2 User 3 User-programmable key 1 User-programmable key 2 User-programmable key 3 User-programmable key 4 User-programmable key 5 User-programmable key 6 User-programmable key 7 User-programmable key 8 User-programmable key 9 User-programmable key 10 User-programmable key 11 User-programmable key 12 User-programmable key 13 User-programmable key 14 User-programmable key 15 User-programmable key 16 User 4 (control pushbutton) User 5 (control pushbutton) User 6 (control pushbutton) User 7 (control pushbutton)
F200 TEXT40: 40-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT 20 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
F201 TEXT8: 8-CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE 4 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
F202 TEXT20: 20-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT 10 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
F203 TEXT16: 16-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
GE Multilin
B-75
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

value GOOSE dataset item GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal GGIO1.ST.Ind2.q GGIO1.ST.Ind2.stVal GGIO1.ST.Ind128.q GGIO1.ST.Ind128.stVal MMXU1.MX.TotW.mag.f MMXU1.MX.TotVAr.mag.f MMXU1.MX.TotVA.mag.f MMXU1.MX.TotPF.mag.f MMXU1.MX.Hz.mag.f MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f MMXU1.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU1.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.TotW.mag.f MMXU2.MX.TotVAr.mag.f MMXU2.MX.TotVA.mag.f MMXU2.MX.TotPF.mag.f MMXU2.MX.Hz.mag.f MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f
APPENDIX B
1 2 3
4 255
F220 ENUMERATION: PUSHBUTTON MESSAGE PRIORITY

value 0 1 2 priority Disabled Normal High Priority
256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263
F222 ENUMERATION: TEST ENUMERATION 0 = Test Enumeration 0, 1 = Test Enumeration 1
264 265 266 267 268
F224 ENUMERATION: RATE TREND FOR FREQ RATE OF CHANGE 0 = Increasing, 1 = Decreasing, 2 = Bidirectional
269 270 271 272
F225 ENUMERATION: SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION MODE 0 = Over, 1 = Over-Under
273 274 275 276 277
F226 ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT/OUTPUT TRANSFER METHOD 0 = None, 1 = GSSE, 2 = GOOSE
278 279 280 281 282
F227 ENUMERATION: RELAY SERVICE STATUS 0 = Unknown, 1 = Relay In Service, 2 = Relay Out Of Service
283 284 285 286 287
F230 ENUMERATION: DIRECTIONAL POLARIZING 0 = Voltage, 1 = Current, 2 = Dual
288 289 290 291 292
F231 ENUMERATION: POLARIZING VOLTAGE 0 = Calculated V0, 1 = Measured VX
293 294 295 296
F232 ENUMERATION: CONFIGURABLE GOOSE DATASET ITEMS FOR TRANSMISSION

value 0 GOOSE dataset item None
297 298 299 300 301 302
B-76
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
value 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 GOOSE dataset item MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f MMXU2.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f MMXU2.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f MMXU2.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f MMXU2.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f MMXU2.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU2.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.TotW.mag.f MMXU3.MX.TotVAr.mag.f MMXU3.MX.TotVA.mag.f MMXU3.MX.TotPF.mag.f MMXU3.MX.Hz.mag.f MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f MMXU3.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f MMXU3.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f MMXU3.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f MMXU3.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f value 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 GOOSE dataset item
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
MMXU3.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU3.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.TotW.mag.f MMXU4.MX.TotVAr.mag.f MMXU4.MX.TotVA.mag.f MMXU4.MX.TotPF.mag.f MMXU4.MX.Hz.mag.f MMXU4.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f MMXU4.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f MMXU4.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f MMXU4.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f MMXU4.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f MMXU4.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f MMXU4.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f MMXU4.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU4.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.TotW.mag.f MMXU5.MX.TotVAr.mag.f MMXU5.MX.TotVA.mag.f MMXU5.MX.TotPF.mag.f
GE Multilin
B-77
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

value 409 410 411 412 413 GOOSE dataset item MMXU5.MX.Hz.mag.f MMXU5.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f MMXU5.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f MMXU5.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f MMXU5.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f MMXU5.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f MMXU5.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f MMXU5.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f MMXU5.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f MMXU5.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f MMXU5.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f MMXU5.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU5.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.TotW.mag.f MMXU6.MX.TotVAr.mag.f MMXU6.MX.TotVA.mag.f MMXU6.MX.TotPF.mag.f MMXU6.MX.Hz.mag.f MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsAB.cVal.ang.f MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsBC.cVal.ang.f MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.PPV.phsCA.cVal.ang.f MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsA.cVal.ang.f MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsB.cVal.ang.f MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.PhV.phsC.cVal.ang.f MMXU6.MX.A.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.A.phsA.cVal.ang.f MMXU6.MX.A.phsB.cVal.mag.f value 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 GOOSE dataset item MMXU6.MX.A.phsB.cVal.ang.f MMXU6.MX.A.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.A.phsC.cVal.ang.f MMXU6.MX.A.neut.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.A.neut.cVal.ang.f MMXU6.MX.W.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.W.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.W.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.VAr.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.VAr.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.VAr.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.VA.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.VA.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.VA.phsC.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.PF.phsA.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.PF.phsB.cVal.mag.f MMXU6.MX.PF.phsC.cVal.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn2.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn3.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn4.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn5.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn6.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn7.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn8.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn9.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn10.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn11.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn12.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn13.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn14.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn15.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn16.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn17.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn18.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn19.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn20.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn21.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn22.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn23.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn24.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn25.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn26.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn27.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn28.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn29.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn30.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn31.mag.f GGIO4.MX.AnIn32.mag.f GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn1.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn2.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn2.stVal
APPENDIX B
414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461
B-78
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
value 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 GOOSE dataset item GGIO5.ST.UIntIn3.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn3.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn4.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn4.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn5.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn5.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn6.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn6.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn7.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn7.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn8.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn8.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn9.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn9.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn10.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn10.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn11.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn11.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn12.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn12.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn13.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn13.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn14.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn14.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn15.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn15.stVal GGIO5.ST.UIntIn16.q GGIO5.ST.UIntIn16.stVal value 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 GOOSE dataset item
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
GGIO3.MX.AnIn12.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn13.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn14.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn15.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn16.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn17.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn18.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn19.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn20.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn21.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn22.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn23.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn24.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn25.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn26.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn27.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn28.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn29.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn30.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn31.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn32.mag.f GGIO3.ST.IndPos1.stVal GGIO3.ST.IndPos2.stVal GGIO3.ST.IndPos3.stVal GGIO3.ST.IndPos4.stVal GGIO3.ST.IndPos5.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn1.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn1.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn2.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn2.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn3.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn3.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn4.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn4.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn5.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn5.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn6.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn6.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn7.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn7.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn8.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn8.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn9.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn9.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn10.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn10.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn11.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn11.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn12.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn12.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn13.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn13.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn14.q
F233 ENUMERATION: CONFIGURABLE GOOSE DATASET ITEMS FOR RECEPTION

value 0 1 2 3 4 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 GOOSE dataset item None GGIO3.ST.Ind1.q GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal GGIO3.ST.Ind2.q GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal GGIO1.ST.Ind64q GGIO1.ST.Ind64.stVal GGIO3.MX.AnIn1.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn2.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn3.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn4.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn5.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn6.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn7.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn8.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn9.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn10.mag.f GGIO3.MX.AnIn11.mag.f
169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192
GE Multilin
B-79
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

value 193 194 195 196 197 GOOSE dataset item GGIO3.ST.UIntIn14.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn15.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn15.stVal GGIO3.ST.UIntIn16.q GGIO3.ST.UIntIn16.stVal
APPENDIX B
F240 ENUMERATION: V/HZ CURVES 0 = Definite Time, 1 = Inverse A, 2 = Inverse B, 3 = Inverse C, 4 = FlexCurve A, 5 = FlexCurve B, 6 = FlexCurve C, 7 = FlexCurve D
F237 ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK MONTH

value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 month January February March April May June July August September October November December
F254 ENUMERATION: TEST MODE FUNCTION

Value 0 1 2 Function Disabled Isolated Forcible
F260 ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER MODE 0 = Continuous, 1 = Trigger
F300 UR_UINT16: FLEXLOGIC BASE TYPE (6-bit type) The FlexLogic BASE type is 6 bits and is combined with a 9 bit descriptor and 1 bit for protection element to form a 16 bit value. The combined bits are of the form: PTTTTTTDDDDDDDDD, where P bit if set, indicates that the FlexLogic type is associated with a protection element state and T represents bits for the BASE type, and D represents bits for the descriptor. The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix [PTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate the descriptor range. [0] Off(0) this is boolean FALSE value [0] On (1) this is boolean TRUE value [2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 to 96) [3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1 to 96) [4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1 to 64) [6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1 to 96) [10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1 to 64) [11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1 to 64) [12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1 to 64) [13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1 to 64) [14] REMOTE INPUTS (1 to 32) [28] INSERT (via keypad only) [32] END [34] NOT (1 INPUT) [36] 2 INPUT XOR (0) [38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 inputs) [40] OR (2 to 16 inputs) [42] AND (2 to 16 inputs) [44] NOR (2 to 16 inputs) [46] NAND (2 to 16 inputs) [48] TIMER (1 to 32) [50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 to 96) [52] SELF-TEST ERROR (see F141 for range) [56] ACTIVE SETTING GROUP (1 to 6) [62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (see F146 for range) [64 to 127] ELEMENT STATES
F238 ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK DAY

value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 day Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
F239 ENUMERATION: REAL TIME CLOCK DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START DAY INSTANCE
value 0 1 2 3 4 instance First Second Third Fourth Last
B-80
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F400 UR_UINT16: CT/VT BANK SELECTION

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 bank selection Card 1 Contact 1 to 4 Card 1 Contact 5 to 8 Card 2 Contact 1 to 4 Card 2 Contact 5 to 8 Card 3 Contact 1 to 4 Card 3 Contact 5 to 8
F504 BITFIELD: 3-PHASE ELEMENT STATE

bitmask 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 element state Pickup Operate Pickup Phase A Pickup Phase B Pickup Phase C Operate Phase A Operate Phase B Operate Phase C
F491 ENUMERATION: ANALOG INPUT MODE 0 = Default Value, 1 = Last Known F505 BITFIELD: CONTACT OUTPUT STATE 0 = Contact State, 1 = Voltage Detected, 2 = Current Detected F500 UR_UINT16: PACKED BITFIELD First register indicates input/output state with bits 0 (MSB) to 15 (LSB) corresponding to input/output state 1 to 16. The second register indicates input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output state 17 to 32 (if required) The third register indicates input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output state 33 to 48 (if required). The fourth register indicates input/output state with bits 0 to 15 corresponding to input/output state 49 to 64 (if required). The number of registers required is determined by the specific data item. A bit value of 0 = Off and 1 = On. F507 BITFIELD: COUNTER ELEMENT STATE 0 = Count Greater Than, 1 = Count Equal To, 2 = Count Less Than
F508 BITFIELD: DISTANCE ELEMENT STATE

bitmask 0 1 2 distance element state Pickup Operate Pickup AB Pickup BC Pickup CA Operate AB Operate BC Operate CA Timed Operate IAB Operate IBC Operate ICA
F501 UR_UINT16: LED STATUS Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.
3 4 5 6 7 8
F502 BITFIELD: ELEMENT OPERATE STATES Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124 format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].
9 10 11
F509 BITFIELD: SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE 0 = Operate
F511 BITFIELD: 3-PHASE SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE 0 = Operate, 1 = Operate A, 2 = Operate B, 3 = Operate C
F513 ENUMERATION: POWER SWING MODE 0 = Two Step, 1 = Three Step
GE Multilin
B-81
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F514 ENUMERATION: POWER SWING TRIP MODE 0 = Delayed, 1 = Early
F525 ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION

bitmask 0 default variation 1 2 3 4 5 7
F515 ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE 0 = Signed, 1 = Absolute
1 2 3 4 5
F516 ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE 0 = Level, 1 = Delta F530 ENUMERATION: FRONT PANEL INTERFACE KEYPRESS
value keypress None Menu Message Up 7 8 9 Help Message Left 4 5 6 Escape Message Right 1 2
~
value 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 31 32
keypress 3 Enter Message Down 0 Decimal +/ Value Up Value Down Reset User 1 User 2 User 3 User PB 1 User PB 2
~
value 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 44 45 46 47
keypress User PB 3 User PB 4 User PB 5 User PB 6 User PB 7 User PB 8 User PB 9 User PB 10 User PB 11 User PB 12 User 4 User 5 User 6 User 7
F517 ENUMERATION: ELEMENT DIRECTION OPERATION 0 = Over, 1 = Under
0 1 2 3
F518 ENUMERATION: FLEXELEMENT UNITS 0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes
4 5 6 7
F519 ENUMERATION: NON-VOLATILE LATCH 0 = Reset-Dominant, 1 = Set-Dominant
8 9 10 11 12
F522 ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA OUTPUT RANGE 0 = 1 to 1 mA; 1 = 0 to 1 mA; 2 = 4 to 20 mA
13 14
F523 ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECTS 20, 22, AND 23 DEFAULT VARIATION

bitmask 0 1 2 3 default variation 1 2 5 6
F531 ENUMERATION: LANGUAGE 0 = English, 1 = French, 2 = Chinese, 3 = Russian
F540 ENUMERATION: PMU POST-FILTER 0 = None, 1 = Symm-3-Point, 2 = Symm-5-Point, 3 = Symm-7-Point
F524 ENUMERATION: DNP OBJECT 21 DEFAULT VARIATION

bitmask 0 1 2 3 Default Variation 1 2 9 10
F542 ENUMERATION: PMU TRIGGERING MODE 0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected
B-82
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F543 ENUMERATION: PMU PHASORS

value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 phasor Off Va Vb Vc Vx Ia Ib Ic value 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 phasor Ig V_1 V_2 V_0 I_1 I_2 I_0
F602 ENUMERATION: RRTD BAUD RATE

Enumeration 0 1 2 3 4 RRTD baud rate 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps
F603 ENUMERATION: RRTD TRIP VOTING

Enumeration 0 1 RRTD trip voting None Group Remote RTD 1 Remote RTD 2 Remote RTD 3 Remote RTD 4 Remote RTD 5 Remote RTD 6 Remote RTD 7 Remote RTD 8 Remote RTD 9 Remote RTD 10 Remote RTD 11 Remote RTD 12
F544 ENUMERATION: PMU RECORDING/REPORTING RATE

value 0 1 2 3 4 5 rate 1/second 2/second 4/second 5/second 10/second 12/second value 6 7 8 9 10 11 rate 15/second 20second 25/second 30/second 50/second 60/second
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
F545 ENUMERATION: PMU COM PORT TYPE 0 = Network, 1 = RS485, 2 = Dir Comm Ch1, 3 = Dir Comm Ch2, 4 = GOOSE, 5 = None
10 11 12 13
F546 ENUMERATION: PMU REPORTING STYLE 0 = Polar, 1 = Rectangular
F605 ENUMERATION: REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUT STATUS

Enumeration 0 Remote DPS input status Intermediate Off On Bad
F547 ENUMERATION: PMU REPORTING FORMAT 0 = Integer, 1 = Floating
1 2 3
F600 UR_UINT16: FLEXANALOG PARAMETER Corresponds to the Modbus address of the value used when this parameter is selected. Only certain values may be used as FlexAnalogs (basically all metering quantities used in protection).
F606 ENUMERATION: REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUT

Enumeration 0 1 2 Remote double-point status input None Remote input 1 Remote input 2 Remote input 3 Remote input 64
F601 ENUMERATION: COM2 PORT USAGE

Enumeration 0 1 COM2 port usage RS485 RRTD
3 64
GE Multilin
B-83
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F611 ENUMERATION: GOOSE RETRANSMISSION SCHEME

Enumeration 0 1 Configurable GOOSE retransmission scheme Heartbeat Aggressive Medium Relaxed
F612 UR_UINT16: FLEXINTEGER PARAMETER This 16-bit value corresponds to the Modbus address of the selected FlexInteger paramter. Only certain values may be used as FlexIntegers.
2 3
B-84
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C APPENDIX C IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONSC.1OVERVIEW
C.1 OVERVIEW C.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of electric utilities and vendors of electronic equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration, testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes: IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview IEC 61850-2: Glossary IEC 61850-3: General requirements IEC 61850-4: System and project management IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations related to IEDs IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Principles and models IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract communication service interface (ACSI) IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment Common data classes IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment Compatible logical node classes and data classes IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Mappings to MMS (ISO 9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3 IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3 IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set. C.1.2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for several of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Actual MMS protocol services are mapped to IEC 61850 abstract services in IEC 61850-8-1. The G60 relay supports IEC 61850 server services over both TCP/IP and TP4/CLNP (OSI) communication protocol stacks. The TP4/CLNP profile requires the G60 to have a network address or Network Service Access Point (NSAP) to establish a communication link. The TCP/IP profile requires the G60 to have an IP address to establish communications. These addresses are located in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK menu. Note that the G60 supports IEC 61850 over the TP4/CLNP or TCP/IP stacks, and also operation over both stacks simultaneously. It is possible to have up to five simultaneous connections (in addition to DNP and Modbus/TCP (non-IEC 61850) connections). Client/server: This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC 61850 clients are often substation computers running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such as protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer tap changers, or bay controllers. Peer-to-peer: This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation equipment such as protection relays. GSSE and GOOSE are methods of peer-to-peer communication. Substation configuration language (SCL): A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe the configuration of substation equipment. Each configured device has an IEC Capability Description (ICD) file. The substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file.
GE Multilin
C-1
C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION C.2SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION
APPENDIX C C.2.1 OVERVIEW
IEC 61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC 61850 physical device can contain one or more logical device(s). Each logical device can contain many logical nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting. Each G60 IED represents one IEC 61850 physical device. The physical device contains one logical device, and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD1 contains information about the G60 IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains information about the G60 IED logical device. C.2.2 GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES
The GGIO1 logical node is available in the G60 to provide access to as many 128 digital status points and associated timestamps and quality flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO1 provides digital status points for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO1 in order to access digital status values from the G60. Configuration settings are provided to allow the selection of the number of digital status indications available in GGIO1 (8 to 128), and to allow the choice of the G60 FlexLogic operands that drive the status of the GGIO1 status indications. Clients can utilize the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting features available from GGIO1 in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes. Unbuffered reporting should generally be used for local status display. C.2.3 GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES The GGIO2 logical node is available to provide access to the G60 virtual inputs. Virtual inputs are single-point control (binary) values that can be written by clients. They are generally used as control inputs. GGIO2 provides access to the virtual inputs through the IEC 61850 standard control model (ctlModel) services: Status only. Direct control with normal security. SBO control with normal security.
Configuration settings are available to select the control model for each point. Each virtual input used through GGIO2 should have its VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64) FUNCTION setting programmed as Enabled and its corresponding GGIO2 CF SPSCO1(64) CTLMODEL setting programmed to the appropriate control configuration. C.2.4 GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE DATA The GGIO3 logical node is available to provide access for clients to values received via configurable GOOSE messages. The values of the digital status indications and analog values in GGIO3 originate in GOOSE messages sent from other devices. C.2.5 GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES The GGIO4 logical node provides access to as many as 32 analog value points, as well as associated timestamps and quality flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO4 provides analog values for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO4 to access generic analog values from the G60. Configuration settings allow the selection of the number of analog values available in GGIO4 (4 to 32) and the choice of the FlexAnalog values that determine the value of the GGIO4 analog inputs. Clients can utilize polling or the IEC 61850 unbuffered reporting feature available from GGIO4 in order to obtain the analog values provided by GGIO4.
C-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION C.2.6 MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES
A limited number of measured analog values are available through the MMXU logical nodes. Each MMXU logical node provides data from a G60 current and voltage source. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source (programmed in the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES menu). MMXU1 provides data from G60 source 1, and MMXU2 provides data from G60 source 2. MMXU data is provided in two forms: instantaneous and deadband. The instantaneous values are updated every time a read operation is performed by a client. The deadband values are calculated as described in IEC 61850 parts 7-1 and 7-3. The selection of appropriate deadband settings for the G60 is described in chapter 5 of this manual. IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting capability is available in all MMXU logical nodes. MMXUx logical nodes provide the following data for each source: MMXU1.MX.TotW: three-phase real power MMXU1.MX.TotVAr: three-phase reactive power MMXU1.MX.TotVA: three-phase apparent power MMXU1.MX.TotPF: three-phase power factor MMXU1.MX.Hz: frequency MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle MMXU1.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle MMXU1.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle MMXU1.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle MMXU1.MX.A.neut: ground current magnitude and angle MMXU1.MX.W.phsA: phase A real power MMXU1.MX.W.phsB: phase B real power MMXU1.MX.W.phsC: phase C real power MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsA: phase A reactive power MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsB: phase B reactive power MMXU1.MX.VAr.phsC: phase C reactive power MMXU1.MX.VA.phsA: phase A apparent power MMXU1.MX.VA.phsB: phase B apparent power MMXU1.MX.VA.phsC: phase C apparent power MMXU1.MX.PF.phsA: phase A power factor MMXU1.MX.PF.phsB: phase B power factor MMXU1.MX.PF.phsC: phase C power factor C.2.7 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES The following list describes the protection elements for all UR-series relays. The G60 relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list. PDIF: bus differential, transformer instantaneous differential, transformer percent differential, current differential
GE Multilin
C-3
C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION PDIS: phase distance, ground distance
APPENDIX C
PIOC: phase instantaneous overcurrent, neutral instantaneous overcurrent, ground instantaneous overcurrent, negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent. PTOC: phase time overcurrent, neutral time overcurrent, ground time overcurrent, negative-sequence time overcurrent, neutral directional overcurrent, negative-sequence directional overcurrent PTUV: phase undervoltage, auxiliary undervoltage, third harmonic neutral undervoltage PTOV: phase overvoltage, neutral overvoltage, auxiliary overvoltage, negative sequence overvoltage RBRF: breaker failure RREC: autoreclosure RPSB: power swing detection RFLO: fault locator XCBR: breaker control XSWI: circuit switch CSWI: switch controller
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags. For example, the start flag for PIOC1 is PIOC1.ST.Str.general. The operate flag for PIOC1 is PIOC1.ST.Op.general. For the G60 protection elements, these flags take their values from the pickup and operate FlexLogic operands for the corresponding element. Some protection elements listed above contain directional start values. For example, the directional start value for PDIS1 is PDIS1.ST.Str.dirGeneral. This value is built from the directional FlexLogic operands for the element. The RFLO logical node contains the measurement of the distance to fault calculation in kilometers. This value originates in the fault locator function. The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control feature. XCBR1.ST.Loc: This is the state of the XCBR1 local/remote switch. A setting is provided to assign a FlexLogic operand to determine the state. When local mode is true, IEC 61850 client commands will be rejected. XCBR1.ST.Opcnt: This is an operation counter as defined in IEC 61850. Command settings are provided to allow the counter to be cleared. XCBR1.ST.Pos: This is the position of the breaker. The breaker control FlexLogic operands are used to determine this state. If the breaker control logic indicates that the breaker, or any single pole of the breaker, is closed, then the breaker position state is on. If the breaker control logic indicates that the breaker is open, then the breaker position state is off. XCBR1.ST.BlkOpn: This is the state of the block open command logic. When true, breaker open commands from IEC 61850 clients will be rejected. XCBR1.ST.BlkCls: This is the state of the block close command logic. When true, breaker close commands from IEC 61850 clients will be rejected. XCBR1.CO.Pos: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue open or close commands to the breaker. SBO control with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model. XCBR1.CO.BlkOpn: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue block open commands to the breaker. Direct control with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model. XCBR1.CO.BlkCls: This is where IEC 61850 clients can issue block close commands to the breaker. Direct control with normal security is the only supported IEC 61850 control model.
C-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C C.3SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION
C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION C.3.1 BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING
IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting is provided in the GGIO1 logical nodes (for binary status values) and MMXU1 to MMXU6 (for analog measured values). Report settings can be configured using the EnerVista UR Setup software, substation configurator software, or via an IEC 61850 client. The following items can be configured: TrgOps: Trigger options. The following bits are supported by the G60: Bit 1: data-change Bit 4: integrity Bit 5: general interrogation
OptFlds: Option Fields. The following bits are supported by the G60: Bit 1: sequence-number Bit 2: report-time-stamp Bit 3: reason-for-inclusion Bit 4: data-set-name Bit 5: data-reference Bit 6: buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only) Bit 7: entryID (for buffered reports only) Bit 8: conf-revision Bit 9: segmentation
IntgPd: Integrity period. BufTm: Buffer time. C.3.2 FILE TRANSFER
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record, or other files from a G60 relay. C.3.3 TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING The timestamp values associated with all IEC 61850 data items represent the time of the last change of either the value or quality flags of the data item. To accomplish this functionality, all IEC 61850 data items must be regularly scanned for data changes, and the timestamp updated when a change is detected, regardless of the connection status of any IEC 61850 clients. For applications where there is no IEC 61850 client in use, the IEC 61850 SERVER SCANNING setting can be programmed as Disabled. If a client is in use, this setting should be programmed as Enabled to ensure the proper generation of IEC 61850 timestamps. C.3.4 LOGICAL DEVICE NAME The logical device name is used to identify the IEC 61850 logical device that exists within the G60. This name is composed of two parts: the IED name setting and the logical device instance. The complete logical device name is the combination of the two character strings programmed in the IEDNAME and LD INST settings. The default values for these strings are IEDName and LDInst. These values should be changed to reflect a logical naming convention for all IEC 61850 logical devices in the system. C.3.5 LOCATION The LPHD1 logical node contains a data attribute called location (LPHD1.DC.PhyNam.location). This is a character string meant to describe the physical location of the G60. This attribute is programmed through the LOCATION setting and its default value is Location. This value should be changed to describe the actual physical location of the G60.
GE Multilin
C-5
C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION
APPENDIX C C.3.6 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES
IEC 61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters. The name is composed of: a five or six-character name prefix. a four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.). a one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPIOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable. Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC 61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project. C.3.7 CONNECTION TIMING
A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of two minutes is employed by the G60 to detect dead connections. If there is no data traffic on a TCP connection for greater than two minutes, the connection will be aborted by the G60. This frees up the connection to be used by other clients. Therefore, when using IEC 61850 reporting, clients should configure report control block items such that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes (120000 ms). This ensures that the G60 will not abort the connection. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection at least once every 2 minutes, this timeout will not apply. C.3.8 NON-IEC 61850 DATA The G60 relay makes available a number of non-IEC 61850 data items. These data items can be accessed through the UR MMS domain. IEC 61850 data can be accessed through the standard IEC 61850 logical device. To access the nonIEC data items, the INCLUDE NON-IEC DATA setting must be Enabled. C.3.9 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES The exact structure and values of the supported IEC 61850 logical nodes can be seen by connecting to a G60 relay with an MMS browser, such as the MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS DDE/OPC server from Sisco Inc.
C-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE C.4.1 OVERVIEW
C.4GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE
IEC 61850 specifies two types of peer-to-peer data transfer services: Generic Substation State Events (GSSE) and Generic Object Oriented Substation Events (GOOSE). GSSE services are compatible with UCA 2.0 GOOSE. IEC 61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support, Ethernet priority tagging, and Ethertype Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific VLANs. Because of the additional features of GOOSE services versus GSSE services, it is recommended that GOOSE be used wherever backwards compatibility with GSSE (or UCA 2.0 GOOSE) is not required. Devices that transmit GSSE and/or GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GSSE publisher contains a GSSE control block to configure and control the transmission. Each GOOSE publisher contains a GOOSE control block to configure and control the transmission. The transmission is also controlled via device settings. These settings can be seen in the ICD and/or SCD files, or in the device configuration software or files. IEC 61850 recommends a default priority value of 4 for GOOSE. Ethernet traffic that does not contain a priority tag has a default priority of 1. More details are specified in IEC 61850 part 8-1. IEC 61850 recommends that the Ethertype Application ID number be configured according to the GOOSE source. In the G60, the transmitted GOOSE Application ID number must match the configured receive Application ID number in the receiver. A common number may be used for all GOOSE transmitters in a system. More details are specified in IEC 61850 part 8-1. C.4.2 GSSE CONFIGURATION IEC 61850 Generic Substation Status Event (GSSE) communication is compatible with UCA GOOSE communication. GSSE messages contain a number of double point status data items. These items are transmitted in two pre-defined data structures named DNA and UserSt. Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a bit pair. GSSE messages are transmitted in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message. GSSE messages always contain the same number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs. Depending the on the configuration, only some of these bit pairs may have values that are of interest to receiving devices. The GSSE FUNCTION, GSSE ID, and GSSE DESTINATION MAC ADDRESS settings are used to configure GSSE transmission. GSSE FUNCTION is set to Enabled to enable the transmission. If a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is entered for the GSSE DESTINATION MAC ADDRESS setting, this address will be used as the destination MAC address for GSSE messages. If a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is not entered (for example, 00 00 00 00 00 00), the G60 will use the source Ethernet MAC address as the destination, with the multicast bit set. C.4.3 FIXED GOOSE The G60 supports two types of IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) communication: fixed GOOSE and configurable GOOSE. All GOOSE messages contain IEC 61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The dataset transferred using the G60 fixed GOOSE is the same data that is transferred using the GSSE feature; that is, the DNA and UserSt bit pairs. The FlexLogic operands that determine the state of the DNA and UserSt bit pairs are configurable via settings, but the fixed GOOSE dataset always contains the same DNA/UserSt data structure. Upgrading from GSSE to GOOSE services is simply a matter of enabling fixed GOOSE and disabling GSSE. The remote inputs and outputs are configured in the same manner for both GSSE and fixed GOOSE. It is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between URseries IEDs. Configurable GOOSE may be used for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. C.4.4 CONFIGURABLE GOOSE The configurable GOOSE feature allows for the configuration of the datasets to be transmitted or received from the G60. The G60 supports the configuration of eight (8) transmission and reception datasets, allowing for the optimization of data transfer between devices.
GE Multilin
C-7
APPENDIX C
Items programmed for dataset 1 and 2 will have changes in their status transmitted as soon as the change is detected. Dataset 1 should be used for high-speed transmission of data that is required for applications such as transfer tripping, blocking, and breaker fail initiate. At least one digital status value needs to be configured in dataset 1 to enable transmission of all data configured for dataset 1. Configuring analog data only to dataset 1 will not activate transmission. Items programmed for datasets 3 through 8 will have changes in their status transmitted at a maximum rate of every 100 ms. Datasets 3 through 8 will regularly analyze each data item configured within them every 100 ms to identify if any changes have been made. If any changes in the data items are detected, these changes will be transmitted through a GOOSE message. If there are no changes detected during this 100 ms period, no GOOSE message will be sent. For all datasets 1 through 8, the integrity GOOSE message will still continue to be sent at the pre-configured rate even if no changes in the data items are detected. The GOOSE functionality was enhanced to prevent the relay from flooding a communications network with GOOSE messages due to an oscillation being created that is triggering a message.
The G60 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the G60 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a minimum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the G60 will continue to block transmission of the dataset. The G60 will assert the MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill self-test error message on the front panel display, where XXX denotes the data item detected as oscillating. The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series IEDs. IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setupsoftware can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (refer to the IEC 61850 IED configuration section later in this appendix). The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The general steps required for transmission configuration are: 1. 2. 3. Configure the transmission dataset. Configure the GOOSE service settings. Configure the data.
The general steps required for reception configuration are: 1. 2. 3. Configure the reception dataset. Configure the GOOSE service settings. Configure the data.
This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value. The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration. 1.
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:
Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE Set ITEM 1 to GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q to indicate quality flags for GGIO1 status indication 1. Set ITEM 2 to GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO1 status indication 1.
The transmission dataset now contains a set of quality flags and a single point status Boolean value. The reception dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure. 2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 settings menu:
C-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C 3.
Set CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to Enabled. Set CONFIG GSE 1 ID to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is GOOSEOut_1). Set CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56). Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY; the default value of 4 is OK for this example. Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID value; the default value is 0, but some switches may require this value to be 1. Set the CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID value. This setting represents the Ethertype application ID and must match the configuration on the receiver (the default value is 0). Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For this example it can be left at its default value.
COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION
Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOsettings menu: Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to a FlexLogic operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example, a contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).
The G60 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect. The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration. 1. Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu: Set ITEM 1 to GGIO3.ST.Ind1.q to indicate quality flags for GGIO3 status indication 1. Set ITEM 2 to GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO3 status indication 1.
The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above. 2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1 settings menu: 3. Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter GOOSEOut_1. Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID to match the Ethertype application ID from the transmitting device. This is 0 in the example above. Set the REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as GOOSEIn 1.
Configure the data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1 settings menu: Set REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE to GOOSEOut_1. Set REMOTE IN 1 ITEM to Dataset Item 2. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status item to remote input 1.
Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic equations or other settings. The G60 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect. The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a complete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software. C.4.5 ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE Ethernet capable devices each contain a unique identifying address called a Media Access Control (MAC) address. This address cannot be changed and is unique for each Ethernet device produced worldwide. The address is six bytes in length and is usually represented as six hexadecimal values (for example, 00 A0 F4 01 02 03). It is used in all Ethernet frames as the source address of the frame. Each Ethernet frame also contains a destination address. The destination address can be different for each Ethernet frame depending on the intended destination of the frame.
GE Multilin
C-9
APPENDIX C
A special type of destination address called a multicast address is used when the Ethernet frame can be received by more than one device. An Ethernet MAC address is multicast when the least significant bit of the first byte is set (for example, 01 00 00 00 00 00 is a multicast address). GSSE and GOOSE messages must have multicast destination MAC addresses. By default, the G60 is configured to use an automated multicast MAC scheme. If the G60 destination MAC address setting is not a valid multicast address (that is, the least significant bit of the first byte is not set), the address used as the destination MAC will be the same as the local MAC address, but with the multicast bit set. Thus, if the local MAC address is 00 A0 F4 01 02 03, then the destination MAC address will be 01 A0 F4 01 02 03. C.4.6 GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS GSSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message, defined in IEC 61850 part 8-1 as GsID. This is a programmable 65-character string. This string should be chosen to provide a descriptive name of the originator of the GSSE message. GOOSE messages contain an identifier string used by receiving devices to identify the sender of the message, defined in IEC 61850 part 8-1 as GoID. This programmable 65-character string should be a descriptive name of the originator of the GOOSE message. GOOSE messages also contain two additional character strings used for identification of the message: DatSet - the name of the associated dataset, and GoCBRef - the reference (name) of the associated GOOSE control block. These strings are automatically populated and interpreted by the G60; no settings are required.
C-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP C.5.1 OVERVIEW
C.5IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP The G60 can be configured for IEC 61850 via the EnerVista UR Setup software as follows. 1. 2. 3.
An ICD file is generated for the G60 by the EnerVista UR Setup software that describe the capabilities of the IED. The ICD file is then imported into a system configurator along with other ICD files for other IEDs (from GE or other vendors) for system configuration. The result is saved to a SCD file, which is then imported back to EnerVista UR Setup to create one or more settings file(s). The settings file(s) can then be used to update the relay(s) with the new configuration information.
The configuration process is illustrated below.

Creating ICD (GE Multilin) IEC 61850 related configuration for the IED (GSSE/GOOSE, server, logical node prefixes, MMXU deadbands, GGIO2 control, etc.)
C
Process of creating ICD (vendor 2) Process of creating ICD (vendor 3) Process of creating ICD (vendor N)
IED (UR-series) OR Setting files (.URS) EnerVista UR Setup
ICD file 2 ICD file 1
ICD file 3
ICD file N
System specification data
Import
System specification tool
SSD file System configurator
System Configuration (network, crosscommunications, IED setting modification, etc.)
SCD file
Updating IED with new configuration (GE Multilin) EnerVista UR Setup Vendor specific tool for updating new configuration to IED (vendor 2) Vendor specific tool for updating new configuration to IED (vendor 3) Vendor specific tool for updating new configuration to IED (vendor N)
URS 1
URS 2
URS X
Write settings file to device
Write settings file to other devices
UR relay 1
UR relay 2
UR relay X
Vendor relay 2 Ethernet
Vendor relay 3
Vendor relay N
842790A1.CDR
Figure 01: IED CONFIGURATION PROCESS The following acronyms and abbreviations are used in the procedures describing the IED configuration process for IEC 61850: BDA: Basic Data Attribute, that is not structured DAI: Instantiated Data Attribute DO: Data Object type or instance, depending on the context
GE Multilin
C-11
C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP DOI: Instantiated Data Object IED: Intelligent Electronic Device LDInst: Instantiated Logical Device LNInst: Instantiated Logical Node
APPENDIX C
SCL: Substation Configuration Description Language. The configuration language is an application of the Extensible Markup Language (XML) version 1.0. SDI: Instantiated Sub DATA; middle name part of a structured DATA name UR: GE Multilin Universal Relay series URI: Universal Resource Identifier URS: UR-series relay setting file XML: Extensible Markup Language
The following SCL variants are also used: ICD: IED Capability Description CID: Configured IED Description SSD: System Specification Description SCD: Substation Configuration Description
The following IEC related tools are referenced in the procedures that describe the IED configuration process for IEC 61850: System configurator or Substation configurator: This is an IED independent system level tool that can import or export configuration files defined by IEC 61850-6. It can import configuration files (ICD) from several IEDs for system level engineering and is used to add system information shared by different IEDs. The system configuration generates a substation related configuration file (SCD) which is fed back to the IED configurator (for example, EnerVista UR Setup) for system related IED configuration. The system configurator should also be able to read a system specification file (SSD) to use as base for starting system engineering, or to compare it with an engineered system for the same substation. IED configurator: This is a vendor specific tool that can directly or indirectly generate an ICD file from the IED (for example, from a settings file). It can also import a system SCL file (SCD) to set communication configuration parameters (that is, required addresses, reception GOOSE datasets, IDs of incoming GOOSE datasets, etc.) for the IED. The IED configurator functionality is implemented in the GE Multilin EnerVista UR Setup software. C.5.2 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS Before creating an ICD file, the user can customize the IEC 61850 related settings for the IED. For example, the IED name and logical device instance can be specified to uniquely identify the IED within the substation, or transmission GOOSE datasets created so that the system configurator can configure the cross-communication links to send GOOSE messages from the IED. Once the IEC 61850 settings are configured, the ICD creation process will recognize the changes and generate an ICD file that contains the updated settings. Some of the IED settings will be modified during they system configuration process. For example, a new IP address may be assigned, line items in a Transmission GOOSE dataset may be added or deleted, or prefixes of some logical nodes may be changed. While all new configurations will be mapped to the G60 settings file when importing an SCD file, all unchanged settings will preserve the same values in the new settings file. These settings can be configured either directly through the relay panel or through the EnerVista UR Setup software (preferred method). The full list of IEC 61850 related settings for are as follows: Network configuration: IP address, IP subnet mask, and default gateway IP address (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Network menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup). Server configuration: IED name and logical device instance (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Server Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup). Logical node prefixes, which includes prefixes for all logical nodes except LLN0 (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Logical Node Prefixes menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup).
C-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
MMXU deadbands, which includes deadbands for all available MMXUs. The number of MMXUs is related to the number of CT/VT modules in the relay. There are two MMXUs for each CT/VT module. For example, if a relay contains two CT/VT modules, there will be four MMXUs available (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > MMXU Deadbands menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup). GGIO1 status configuration, which includes the number of status points in GGIO1 as well as the potential internal mappings for each GGIO1 indication. However only the number of status points will be used in the ICD creation process (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO1 Status Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup). GGIO2 control configuration, which includes ctlModels for all SPCSOs within GGIO2 (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO2 Control Configuration menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup). Configurable transmission GOOSE, which includes eight configurable datasets that can be used for GOOSE transmission. The GOOSE ID can be specified for each dataset (it must be unique within the IED as well as across the whole substation), as well as the destination MAC address, VLAN priority, VLAN ID, ETYPE APPID, and the dataset items. The selection of the dataset item is restricted by firmware version; for version 5.8x, only GGIO1.ST.Indx.stVal and GGIO1.ST.Indx.q are valid selection (where x is between 1 to N, and N is determined by number of GGIO1 status points). Although configurable transmission GOOSE can also be created and altered by some third-party system configurators, we recommend configuring transmission GOOSE for GE Multilin IEDs before creating the ICD, and strictly within EnerVista UR Setup software or the front panel display (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GSSE/GOOSE Configuration > Transmission > Tx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup). Configurable reception GOOSE, which includes eight configurable datasets that can be used for GOOSE reception. However, unlike datasets for transmission, datasets for reception only contains dataset items, and they are usually created automatically by process of importing the SCD file (access through the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GSSE/GOOSE Configuration > Reception > Rx Configurable GOOSE menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup). Remote devices configuration, which includes remote device ID (GOOSE ID or GoID of the incoming transmission GOOSE dataset), ETYPE APPID (of the GSE communication block for the incoming transmission GOOSE), and DATASET (which is the name of the associated reception GOOSE dataset). These settings are usually done automatically by process of importing SCD file (access through the Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Devices menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup). Remote inputs configuration, which includes device (remote device ID) and item (which dataset item in the associated reception GOOSE dataset to map) values. Only the items with cross-communication link created in SCD file should be mapped. These configurations are usually done automatically by process of importing SCD file (access through the Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Inputs menu tree in EnerVista UR Setup). C.5.3 ABOUT ICD FILES
The SCL language is based on XML, and its syntax definition is described as a W3C XML Schema. ICD is one type of SCL file (which also includes SSD, CID and SCD files). The ICD file describes the capabilities of an IED and consists of four major sections: Header Communication IEDs DataTypeTemplates
GE Multilin
C-13
C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP The root file structure of an ICD file is illustrated below.
SCL Header (id, version, revision, toolID, nameStructure)
APPENDIX C
Communication
IED (name, type, manufacture, configVersion)
DataTypeTemplates
842795A1.CDR
Figure 02: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, SCL (ROOT) NODE
The Header node identifies the ICD file and its version, and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals The Communication node describes the direct communication connection possibilities between logical nodes by means of logical buses (sub-networks) and IED access ports. The communication section is structured as follows.
Communication SubNetwork (name) ConnectedAP (iedName, apName) Address P (type) Text Other P elements
GSE (IdInst, cbName) Address P (type) Text

842796A1.CDR
Other GSE elements
Other P elements
Figure 03: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, COMMUNICATIONS NODE The SubNetwork node contains all access points which can (logically) communicate with the sub-network protocol and without the intervening router. The ConnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub-network. The Address node contains the address parameters of the access point. The GSE node provides the address element for stating the control block related address parameters, where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located, and cbName is the name of the control block. The IED node describes the (pre-)configuration of an IED: its access points, the logical devices, and logical nodes instantiated on it. Furthermore, it defines the capabilities of an IED in terms of communication services offered and, together with its LNType, instantiated data (DO) and its default or configuration values. There should be only one IED section in an ICD since it only describes one IED.
C-14
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
IED (name, type, manufacture, configVersion) Services DynAssoication GetDirectory GetDateObjectDefinition DataObjectDirectory AccessPoint (name) Server Authentication (none) LDevice (inst) LN0 (InType, InClass, inst) DataSet (name) FCDA (fc, doName, daName, IdInst, prefix, InClass, InInst) Other FCDA elements Other DataSet elements ReportControl (name, datSet, intgPd, rptID, confRev, buffered) TrgOps (dchg) OptFields (seqNum) RptEnabled GetDataSetValue SetDataSetValue DataSetDirectory ConfDataSet (max, maxAttributes) ReadWrite TimerActivatedControl ConfReportControl (max) ConfLogControl (max) GSEDir GOOSE (max) GSSE (max)
GetCBValues
Other ReportControl elements
DOI (name) SDI (name) DAI (name) Val Other DOI elements SDI (name) DAI (name) GSEControl (name, datSet, type, confRev, appID) Other GSEControl elements LN (InType, InClass, prefix, inst) DataSet (name) FCDA (IdInst, prefix, InClass, InInst, doName, fc) Other FCDA elements Other DataSet elements ReportControl (name, datSet, intgPd, rptID, confRev, buffered) TrgOps (dchg) Other ReportControl elements DOI (name) SDI (name) DAI (name) Val Other DOI elements SDI (name) DAI (name) Val Other LN elements Text Text OptFields (seqNum) RptEnabled Val Text Text
Other LDevice elements
842797A1.CDR
Figure 04: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, IED NODE
GE Multilin
C-15
APPENDIX C
The DataTypeTemplates node defines instantiable logical node types. A logical node type is an instantiable template of the data of a logical node. A LnodeType is referenced each time that this instantiable type is needed with an IED. A logical node type template is built from DATA (DO) elements, which again have a DO type, which is derived from the DATA classes (CDC). DOs consist of attributes (DA) or of elements of already defined DO types (SDO). The attribute (DA) has a functional constraint, and can either have a basic type, be an enumeration, or a structure of a DAType. The DAType is built from BDA elements, defining the structure elements, which again can be BDA elements of have a base type such as DA.
DataTypeTemplates LNodeType (id, InClass) DO (name, type) Other DO elements
Other LNodeType elements DOType (id, cdc) SDO (name, type) Other SDO elements DA (name, fc, bType, type) Other DA elements Val Text
Other DOType elements
DAType (id) BDA (name, bType, type) Other BDA elements Other DAType elements EnumType (id) EnumVal (ord) Text
Other EnumVal elements
Other EnumType elements

842798A1.CDR
Figure 05: ICD FILE STRUCTURE, DATATYPETEMPLATES NODE
C-16
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP C.5.4 CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
An ICD file can be created directly from a connected G60 IED or from an offline G60 settings file with the EnerVista UR Setup software using the following procedure: 1. Right-click the connected UR-series relay or settings file and select Create ICD File.
2.
The EnerVista UR Setup will prompt to save the file. Select the file path and enter the name for the ICD file, then click OK to generate the file.
The time to create an ICD file from the offline G60 settings file is typically much quicker than create an ICD file directly from the relay. C.5.5 ABOUT SCD FILES System configuration is performed in the system configurator. While many vendors (including GE Multilin) are working their own system configuration tools, there are some system configurators available in the market (for example, Siemens DIGSI version 4.6 or above and ASE Visual SCL Beta 0.12). Although the configuration tools vary from one vendor to another, the procedure is pretty much the same. First, a substation project must be created, either as an empty template or with some system information by importing a system specification file (SSD). Then, IEDs are added to the substation. Since each IED is represented by its associated ICD, the ICD files are imported into the substation project, and the system configurator validates the ICD files during the importing process. If the ICD files are successfully imported into the substation project, it may be necessary to perform some additional minor steps to attach the IEDs to the substation (see the system configurator manual for details). Once all IEDs are inserted into the substation, further configuration is possible, such as: assigning network addresses to individual IEDs customizing the prefixes of logical nodes creating cross-communication links (configuring GOOSE messages to send from one IED to others)
When system configurations are complete, the results are saved to an SCD file, which contains not only the configuration for each IED in the substation, but also the system configuration for the entire substation. Finally, the SCD file is passed back to the IED configurator (vendor specific tool) to update the new configuration into the IED. The SCD file consists of at least five major sections:
GE Multilin
C-17
C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP Header Substation Communication IED section (one or more) DataTypeTemplates
APPENDIX C
The root file structure of an SCD file is illustrated below.

SCL Header (id, version, revision, toolID, nameStructure)
Substation
Communication
IED Section (IED 1)
IED Section (IED 2)
Other IED Sections
DataTypeTemplates
842791A1.CDR
Figure 06: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, SCL (ROOT) NODE Like ICD files, the Header node identifies the SCD file and its version, and specifies options for the mapping of names to signals. The Substation node describes the substation parameters:
Substation PowerSystemResource EquipmentContainer Power Transformer GeneralEquipment
EquipmentContainer VoltageLevel Bay Voltage
PowerSystemResource Function SubFunction GeneralEquipment

842792A1.CDR
Figure 07: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, SUBSTATION NODE
C-18
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
The Communication node describes the direct communication connection possibilities between logical nodes by means of logical buses (sub-networks) and IED access ports. The communication section is structured as follows.
Communication SubNetwork (name) ConnectedAP (IED 1) Address P (type) Text Other P elements GSE (IdInst, cbName) Address P (type) Other GSE elements Other P elements ConnectedAP (IED 2) Address P (type) Text Other P elements GSE (IdInst, cbName) Text
Address P (type) Text Other GSE elements Other P elements
Other ConnectedAP elements

842793A1.CDR
Figure 08: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, COMMUNICATIONS NODE The SubNetwork node contains all access points which can (logically) communicate with the sub-network protocol and without the intervening router. The ConnectedAP node describes the IED access point connected to this sub-network. The Address node contains the address parameters of the access point. The GSE node provides the address element for stating the control block related address parameters, where IdInst is the instance identification of the logical device within the IED on which the control block is located, and cbName is the name of the control block.
GE Multilin
C-19
C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP The IED Section node describes the configuration of an IED.
IED Section (IED 1) AccessPoint (name) Server Authentication (none) LDevice (inst) LN0 (InType, InClass, inst)
APPENDIX C
DataSet elements ReportControl elements
DOI elements Inputs
ExtRef (iedName, ldInst, prefix, lnClass, lnInst, doName, daName, intAddr)
Other ExtRef elements
GSEControl elements
842794A1.CDR
Figure 09: SCD FILE STRUCTURE, IED NODE C.5.6 IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP The following procedure describes how to update the G60 with the new configuration from an SCD file with the EnerVista UR Setup software. 1. Right-click anywhere in the files panel and select the Import Contents From SCD File item.
2.
Select the saved SCD file and click Open.
C-20
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C 3.
The software will open the SCD file and then prompt the user to save a UR-series settings file. Select a location and name for the URS (UR-series relay settings) file. If there is more than one GE Multilin IED defined in the SCD file, the software prompt the user to save a UR-series settings file for each IED.
4. 5. 6.
After the URS file is created, modify any settings (if required). To update the relay with the new settings, right-click on the settings file in the settings tree and select the Write Settings File to Device item. The software will prompt for the target device. Select the target device from the list provided and click Send. The new settings will be updated to the selected device.
GE Multilin
C-21
C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE C.6ACSI CONFORMANCE
APPENDIX C C.6.1 ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
SERVICES CLIENT-SERVER ROLES B11 B12 B21 B22 B23 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used SCSM: other Publisher side Subscriber side Publisher side Subscriber side
SERVER/ PUBLISHER c1 ---
UR-FAMILY
Yes
SCSMS SUPPORTED Yes
B24 B31 B32 B41 B42
GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL (GSE) O --O --Yes Yes
TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL (SVC)
NOTE
c1: shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared O: Optional M: Mandatory C.6.2 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
SERVICES IF SERVER SIDE (B11) SUPPORTED M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M7-1 M7-2 M7-3 M7-4 M7-5 M7-6 M7-7 M7-8 M7-9 M7-10 M8 M8-1 M8-2 M8-3 Logical device Logical node Data Data set Substitution Setting group control REPORTING Buffered report control sequence-number report-time-stamp reason-for-inclusion data-set-name data-reference buffer-overflow entryID BufTm IntgPd GI Unbuffered report control sequence-number report-time-stamp reason-for-inclusion
SERVER/ PUBLISHER c2 c3 c4 c5 O O O
UR-FAMILY
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
C-22
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
SERVICES M8-4 M8-5 M8-6 M8-7 M8-8 M9 M9-1 M10 M11 data-set-name data-reference BufTm IntgPd GI Logging Log control IntgPd Log Control GOOSE M12-1 M12-2 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 entryID DataReflnc GSSE Multicast SVC Unicast SVC Time File transfer O O O M O O M O O O SERVER/ PUBLISHER

UR-FAMILY
Yes Yes
IF GSE (B31/32) IS SUPPORTED
Yes
IF SVC (B41/B42) IS SUPPORTED
Yes Yes
NOTE
c2: shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared c3: shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared c4: shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has been declared c5: shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared M: Mandatory C.6.3 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT
In the table below, the acronym AA refers to Application Associations (TP: Two Party / MC: Multicast). The c6 to c10 entries are defined in the notes following the table.
SERVICES SERVER (CLAUSE 6) S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 ServerDirectory Associate Abort Release LogicalDeviceDirectory LogicalNodeDirectory GetAllDataValues GetDataValues SetDataValues GetDataDirectory GetDataDefinition TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP M M M M M M M M O M M Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes APPLICATION ASSOCIATION (CLAUSE 7) AA: TP/MC SERVER/ PUBLISHER UR FAMILY
LOGICAL DEVICE (CLAUSE 8) LOGICAL NODE (CLAUSE 9)
DATA (CLAUSE 10)
GE Multilin
C-23

SERVICES DATA SET (CLAUSE 11) S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19 S20 S21 S22 S23 GetDataSetValues SetDataSetValues CreateDataSet DeleteDataSet GetDataSetDirectory SetDataValues SelectActiveSG SelectEditSG SetSGValues ConfirmEditSGValues GetSGValues GetSGCBValues TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP M O O O O M O O O O O O Yes Yes AA: TP/MC SERVER/ PUBLISHER UR FAMILY
APPENDIX C
SUBSTITUTION (CLAUSE 12) SETTING GROUP CONTROL (CLAUSE 13)
REPORTING (CLAUSE 14) BUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK (BRCB) S24 S24-1 S24-2 S24-3 S25 S26 S27 S27-1 S27-2 S27-3 S28 S29 Report data-change (dchg) qchg-change (qchg) data-update (dupd) GetBRCBValues SetBRCBValues Report data-change (dchg) qchg-change (qchg) data-update (dupd) GetURCBValues SetURCBValues LOG CONTROL BLOCK S30 S31 S32 S33 S34 GetLCBValues SetLCBValues LOG QueryLogByTime QueryLogByEntry GetLogStatusValues GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK S35 S36 S37 S38 S39 S40 S41 SendGOOSEMessage GetReference GetGOOSEElementNumber GetGoCBValues SetGoCBValues GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK SendGSSEMessage GetReference MC TP c8 c9 Yes MC TP TP TP TP c8 c9 c9 O O Yes Yes Yes TP TP TP M M M TP TP M M TP TP c6 c6 Yes Yes TP TP TP c6 c6 c6 Yes Yes Yes Yes TP c6 Yes Yes
UNBUFFERED REPORT CONTROL BLOCK (URCB)
LOGGING (CLAUSE 14)
GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT MODEL (GSE) (CLAUSE 14.3.5.3.4)
C-24
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
SERVICES S42 S43 S44 GetGSSEElementNumber GetGsCBValues SetGsCBValues MULTICAST SVC S45 S46 S47 S48 S49 S50 S51 S52 S53 S54 S55 S56 S57 S58 S59 S60 T1 SendMSVMessage GetMSVCBValues SetMSVCBValues UNICAST SVC SendUSVMessage GetUSVCBValues SetUSVCBValues Select SelectWithValue Cancel Operate Command-Termination TimeActivated-Operate GetFile SetFile DeleteFile GetFileAttributeValues Time resolution of internal clock (nearest negative power of 2 in seconds) Time accuracy of internal clock supported TimeStamp resolution (nearest value of 2n in seconds, accoridng to 5.5.3.7.3.3) TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP MC TP TP c10 O O O O O M O O M O O M MC TP TP c10 O O AA: TP/MC TP TP TP SERVER/ PUBLISHER c9 O O

UR FAMILY
Yes Yes
TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLE VALUE MODEL (SVC) (CLAUSE 16)
C
Yes Yes Yes
CONTROL (CLAUSE 16.4.8)
FILE TRANSFER (CLAUSE 20) Yes
Yes 20
TIME (CLAUSE 5.5)
T2 T3
20
NOTE
c6: shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB) c7: shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter) c8: shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage) c9: shall declare support if TP association is available c10: shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage)
GE Multilin
C-25
C.7 LOGICAL NODES C.7LOGICAL NODES
APPENDIX C C.7.1 LOGICAL NODES TABLE
The UR-series of relays supports IEC 61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code. For example. the logical node PDIS (distance protection) is available only in the D60 Line Distance Relay. Table C1: IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODES (Sheet 1 of 3)
NODES L: SYSTEM LOGICAL NODES LPHD: Physical device information LLN0: Logical node zero P: LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION FUNCTIONS PDIF: Differential PDIR: Direction comparison PDIS: Distance PDOP: Directional overpower PDUP: Directional underpower PFRC: Rate of change of frequency PHAR: Harmonic restraint PHIZ: Ground detector PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent PMRI Motor restart inhibition PMSS: Motor starting time supervision POPF: Over power factor PPAM: Phase angle measuring PSCH: Protection scheme PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault PTEF: Transient earth fault PTOC: Time overcurrent PTOF: Overfrequency PTOV: Overvoltage PTRC: Protection trip conditioning PTTR: Thermal overload PTUC: Undercurrent PTUV: Undervoltage PUPF: Underpower factor PTUF: Underfrequency PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent PVPH: Volts per Hz PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed R: LOGICAL NODES FOR PROTECTION RELATED FUNCTIONS RDRE: Disturbance recorder function RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary RDRS: Disturbance record handling RBRF: Breaker failure RDIR: Directional element RFLO: Fault locator RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking RREC: Autoreclosing --------Yes --Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes ----------Yes --------------Yes --Yes Yes Yes --Yes ----------Yes Yes UR-FAMILY
C-26
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C Table C1: IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODES (Sheet 2 of 3)

NODES RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing C: LOGICAL NODES FOR CONTROL CALH: Alarm handling CCGR: Cooling group control CILO: Interlocking CPOW: Point-on-wave switching CSWI: Switch controller G: LOGICAL NODES FOR GENERIC REFERENCES GAPC: Generic automatic process control GGIO: Generic process I/O GSAL: Generic security application I: LOGICAL NODES FOR INTERFACING AND ARCHIVING IARC: Archiving IHMI: Human machine interface ITCI: Telecontrol interface ITMI: Telemonitoring interface A: LOGICAL NODES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL ANCR: Neutral current regulator ARCO: Reactive power control ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller AVCO: Voltage control M: LOGICAL NODES FOR METERING AND MEASUREMENT MDIF: Differential measurements MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic MMTR: Metering MMXN: Non phase related measurement MMXU: Measurement MSQI: Sequence and imbalance MSTA: Metering statistics S: LOGICAL NODES FOR SENSORS AND MONITORING SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges X: LOGICAL NODES FOR SWITCHGEAR XCBR: Circuit breaker XSWI: Circuit switch T: LOGICAL NODES FOR INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS TCTR: Current transformer TVTR: Voltage transformer Y: LOGICAL NODES FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) YLTC: Tap changer YPSH: Power shunt YPTR: Power transformer ------------Yes Yes ----------------Yes Yes ----------------------Yes ----------Yes UR-FAMILY ---
C.7 LOGICAL NODES
GE Multilin
C-27
C.7 LOGICAL NODES Table C1: IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODES (Sheet 3 of 3)
NODES Z: LOGICAL NODES FOR FURTHER POWER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT ZAXN: Auxiliary network ZBAT: Battery ZBSH: Bushing ZCAB: Power cable ZCAP: Capacitor bank ZCON: Converter ZGEN: Generator ZGIL: Gas insulated line ------------------------------UR-FAMILY
APPENDIX C
ZLIN: Power overhead line ZMOT: Motor ZREA: Reactor ZRRC: Rotating reactive component ZSAR: Surge arrestor ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component
C-28
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D APPENDIX D IEC 60870-5-104 COMMUNICATIONSD.1IEC 60870-5-104
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT
This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For ths section the boxes indicate the following: used in standard direction; not used; cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard. 1. SYSTEM OR DEVICE: System Definition Controlling Station Definition (Master) Controlled Station Definition (Slave) 2. NETWORK CONFIGURATION: Point-to-Point Multiple Point-to-Point 3. PHYSICAL LAYER Transmission Speed (control direction):
Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended if >1200 bits/s: Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27:
Multipoint Multipoint Star
100 bits/sec. 200 bits/sec. 300 bits/sec. 600 bits/sec. 1200 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec. 4800 bits/sec. 9600 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec. 4800 bits/sec. 9600 bits/sec. 19200 bits/sec. 38400 bits/sec. 56000 bits/sec. 64000 bits/sec.
Transmission Speed (monitor direction):

Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard: Unbalanced Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended if >1200 bits/s: Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27:
100 bits/sec. 200 bits/sec. 300 bits/sec. 600 bits/sec. 1200 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec. 4800 bits/sec. 9600 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec. 4800 bits/sec. 9600 bits/sec. 19200 bits/sec. 38400 bits/sec. 56000 bits/sec. 64000 bits/sec.
4.
LINK LAYER
Address Field of the Link:
Link Transmission Procedure:
Balanced Transmision Unbalanced Transmission
Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only) One Octet Two Octets Structured Unstructured
Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard
GE Multilin
D-1
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
APPENDIX D
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ADSU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority) with the indicated causes of transmission: The standard assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows: A special assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows: 5. APPLICATION LAYER Transmission Mode for Application Data: Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion stanadard. Common Address of ADSU: One Octet Two Octets Information Object Address: One Octet Structured Unstructured
Two Octets Three Octets Cause of Transmission: One Octet
Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used. Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system. Selection of standard ASDUs: For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following: used in standard direction; not used; cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard. Process information in monitor direction
<1> := Single-point information <2> := Single-point information with time tag <3> := Double-point information <4> := Double-point information with time tag <5> := Step position information <6> := Step position information with time tag <7> := Bitstring of 32 bits <8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag <9> := Measured value, normalized value <10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag <11> := Measured value, scaled value <12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag <13> := Measured value, short floating point value <14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag <15> := Integrated totals <16> := Integrated totals with time tag <17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag <18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag <19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag <20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection M_SP_NA_1 M_SP_TA_1 M_DP_NA_1 M_DP_TA_1 M_ST_NA_1 M_ST_TA_1 M_BO_NA_1 M_BO_TA_1 M_ME_NA_1 M_NE_TA_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_NE_TB_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_NE_TC_1 M_IT_NA_1 M_IT_TA_1 M_EP_TA_1 M_EP_TB_1 M_EP_TC_1 M_SP_NA_1
D-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
<21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor <30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a <31> := Double-point information wiht time tag CP56Time2a <32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a <33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a <34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a <35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a <36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a <37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a <38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a <39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a <40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104

M_ME_ND_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_DP_TB_1 M_ST_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_ME_TD_1 M_ME_TE_1 M_ME_TF_1 M_IT_TB_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TE_1 M_EP_TF_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set <30> to <40> are used. Process information in control direction
<45> := Single command <46> := Double command <47> := Regulating step command <48> := Set point command, normalized value <49> := Set point command, scaled value <50> := Set point command, short floating point value <51> := Bitstring of 32 bits <58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a <59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a <60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a <61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a <62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a <63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a <64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a C_SC_NA_1 C_DC_NA_1 C_RC_NA_1 C_SE_NA_1 C_SE_NB_1 C_SE_NC_1 C_BO_NA_1 C_SC_TA_1 C_DC_TA_1 C_RC_TA_1 C_SE_TA_1 C_SE_TB_1 C_SE_TC_1 C_BO_TA_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used. System information in monitor direction
<70> := End of initialization M_EI_NA_1
System information in control direction

<100> := Interrogation command <101> := Counter interrogation command <102> := Read command <103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard) <104> := Test command <105> := Reset process command <106> := Delay acquisition command <107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a C_IC_NA_1 C_CI_NA_1 C_RD_NA_1 C_CS_NA_1 C_TS_NA_1 C_RP_NA_1 C_CD_NA_1 C_TS_TA_1
GE Multilin
D-3
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 Parameter in control direction

<110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value <111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value <112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value <113> := Parameter activation PE_ME_NA_1 PE_ME_NB_1 PE_ME_NC_1 PE_AC_NA_1
APPENDIX D
File transfer
<120> := File Ready <121> := Section Ready <122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section <123> := Last section, last segment <124> := Ack file, ack section <125> := Segment <126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction) F_FR_NA_1 F_SR_NA_1 F_SC_NA_1 F_LS_NA_1 F_AF_NA_1 F_SG_NA_1 C_CD_NA_1
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments (station-specific parameters) In the following table: Shaded boxes are not required. Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard. Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used. X if only used in the standard direction
TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 46 UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 47 UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU 45 INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER> RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION 44
NO. <1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8> <9>
MNEMONIC M_SP_NA_1 M_SP_TA_1 M_DP_NA_1 M_DP_TA_1 M_ST_NA_1 M_ST_TA_1 M_BO_NA_1 M_BO_TA_1 M_ME_NA_1
3 X
5 X
10
11 X
12 X
13
20 to 36 X
D-4
UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION 37 to 41
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR 46
NO. <10> <11> <12> <13> <14> <15> <16> <17> <18> <19> <20> <21> <30> <31> <32> <33> <34> <35> <36> <37> <38> <39> <40> <45> <46> <47> <48> <49> <50> <51> <58> <59> <60>
MNEMONIC M_ME_TA_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_TB_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_TC_1 M_IT_NA_1 M_IT_TA_1 M_EP_TA_1 M_EP_TB_1 M_EP_TC_1 M_PS_NA_1 M_ME_ND_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_DP_TB_1 M_ST_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_ME_TD_1 M_ME_TE_1 M_ME_TF_1 M_IT_TB_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TE_1 M_EP_TF_1 C_SC_NA_1 C_DC_NA_1 C_RC_NA_1 C_SE_NA_1 C_SE_NB_1 C_SE_NC_1 C_BO_NA_1 C_SC_TA_1 C_DC_TA_1 C_RC_TA_1
10
11
12
13
20 to 36
37 to 41
44
45
REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ
INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER>
RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
D
X X X X X X
GE Multilin
D-5
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104

TYPE IDENTIFICATION CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
APPENDIX D
UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU
NO.
MNEMONIC C_SE_TA_1 C_SE_TB_1 C_SE_TC_1 C_BO_TA_1 M_EI_NA_1*) C_IC_NA_1 C_CI_NA_1 C_RD_NA_1 C_CS_NA_1 C_TS_NA_1 C_RP_NA_1 C_CD_NA_1 C_TS_TA_1 P_ME_NA_1 P_ME_NB_1 P_ME_NC_1 P_AC_NA_1 F_FR_NA_1 F_SR_NA_1 F_SC_NA_1 F_LS_NA_1 F_AF_NA_1 F_SG_NA_1 F_DR_TA_1*)
10
11
12
13
20 to 36
37 to 41
44
45
<61> <62> <63> <64> <70> <100> <101> <102> <103> <104> <105> <106> <107> <110> <111> <112> <113> <120> <121> <122> <123> <124> <125> <126>
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
6.
BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS Station Initialization: Remote initialization Cyclic Data Transmission: Cyclic data transmission Read Procedure: Read procedure
D-6
GE Multilin
REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ
INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER>
RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
BACKGROUND SCAN
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
FILE TRANSFER
SPONTANEOUS
DEACTIVATION
ACTIVATION
INITIALIZED
APPENDIX D Spontaneous Transmission: Spontaneous transmission Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous:
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a projectspecific list. Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1 Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1 Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1 Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project) Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1 Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1 Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1 Station interrogation: Global Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Clock synchronization:
Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)
Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8
Command transmission: Direct command transmission Direct setpoint command transmission Select and execute command Select and execute setpoint command C_SE ACTTERM used No additional definition Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Persistent output Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s Transmission of integrated totals: Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously Counter read Counter freeze without reset
GE Multilin
D-7
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 Counter freeze with reset Counter reset General request counter Request counter group 1 Request counter group 2 Request counter group 3 Request counter group 4 Parameter loading: Threshold value Smoothing factor Low limit for transmission of measured values High limit for transmission of measured values
APPENDIX D
Parameter activation: Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object Test procedure: Test procedure File transfer: File transfer in monitor direction: Transparent file Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment Transmission of sequences of events Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values File transfer in control direction: Transparent file Background scan: Background scan Acquisition of transmission delay:
Acquisition of transmission delay
Definition of time outs:

PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE 30 s 15 s 10 s 20 s REMARKS Timeout of connection establishment Timeout of send or test APDUs Timeout for acknowlegements in case of no data messages t2 < t1 Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state SELECTED VALUE 120 s 15 s 10 s 20 s
t0 t1 t2 t3
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):
PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE 12 APDUs 8 APDUs REMARKS Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable Latest acknowledge after receiving w I-format APDUs SELECTED VALUE 12 APDUs 8 APDUs
k w
D-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D Maximum range of values k: Maximum range of values w: Portnumber:

PARAMETER Portnumber VALUE 2404 REMARKS In all cases
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104 1 to 32767 (215 1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU 1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.
RFC 2200 suite: RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Internet. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen by the user of this standard. Ethernet 802.3 Serial X.21 interface Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected) D.1.2 IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LIST The IEC 60870-5-104 data points are configured through the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details.
IEC104 POINT LISTS
GE Multilin
D-9
D.1 IEC 60870-5-104
APPENDIX D
D-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E APPENDIX E DNP COMMUNICATIONSE.1DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE
The following table provides a Device Profile Document in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. Table E1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3) (Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section) Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin Device Name: UR Series Relay Highest DNP Level Supported: For Requests: Level 2 For Responses: Level 2 Device Function: Master Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table): Binary Inputs (Object 1) Binary Input Changes (Object 2) Binary Outputs (Object 10) Control Relay Output Block (Object 12) Binary Counters (Object 20) Frozen Counters (Object 21) Counter Change Event (Object 22) Frozen Counter Event (Object 23) Analog Inputs (Object 30) Analog Input Changes (Object 32) Analog Deadbands (Object 34) Time and Date (Object 50) File Transfer (Object 70) Internal Indications (Object 80) Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Transmitted: 292 Received: 292 Maximum Data Link Re-tries: None Fixed at 3 Configurable Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: Never Always Sometimes Configurable Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted: configurable up to 2048 Received: 2048 Maximum Application Layer Re-tries: None Configurable
GE Multilin
E-1
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT Table E1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 2 of 3) Requires Application Layer Confirmation: Never Always When reporting Event Data When sending multi-fragment responses Sometimes Configurable
APPENDIX E
Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm: Complete Appl. Fragment: Application Confirm: Complete Appl. Response: Others: Transmission Delay: Need Time Interval: Select/Operate Arm Timeout: Binary input change scanning period: Analog input change scanning period: Counter change scanning period: Frozen counter event scanning period: Unsolicited response notification delay: Unsolicited response retry delay Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs SELECT/OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Count > 1 Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Queue Clear Queue Never Never Never Never Never Never Never Never Never Always Always Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable No intentional delay Configurable (default = 24 hrs.) 10 s 8 times per power system cycle 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 100 ms configurable 0 to 60 sec. None None None None Fixed at ____ Fixed at ____ Fixed at 10 s Fixed at ____ Variable Variable Variable Variable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Always Always Always Always Always
Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable
Never Never
Always Always
Sometimes Sometimes
Configurable Configurable
Explanation of Sometimes: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is determined by the VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE settings. Both Pulse On and Latch On operations perform the same function in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the On state. If the Virtual Input is set to Self-Reset, it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. Pulse Off and Latch Off operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the Off state. Trip and Close operations both put the appropriate Virtual Input into the On state.
E-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E Table E1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 3 of 3) Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested: Never Only time-tagged Only non-time-tagged Configurable
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation requested: Never Binary Input Change With Time Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation) ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function codes supported
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses: Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change No other options are permitted.
Default Counter Object/Variation: No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) Default Object: 20 Default Variation: 1 Point-by-point list attached
Counters Roll Over at: No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 16 Bits (Counter 8) 32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9) Other Value: _____ Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses: Yes No
GE Multilin
E-3
APPENDIX E E.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the G60 in both request messages and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)
OBJECT OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION NO. NO. 1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) REQUEST FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 1 (read) 22 (assign class) QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 00, 01(start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) RESPONSE FUNCTION CODES (DEC) QUALIFIER CODES (HEX)
Binary Input
1 (read) 22 (assign class)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
Binary Input with Status
1 (read) 22 (assign class)
129 (response)
0 1
Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) request default variation) Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) Binary Input Change with Time Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 (read) 1 (read)
E
10
2 3 0
129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp.) 129 (response 130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index)
Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) request default variation)
Binary Output Status
1 (read)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
12
20
Note 1:
129 (response) echo of request 3 (select) 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 (dir. op, noack) 0 Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop) 7 (freeze) 06(no range, or all) (Variation 0 is used to request default 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08(limited quantity) variation) 9 (freeze clear) 17, 28(index) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. The default variations for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings. Refer to the Communications section in Chapter 5 for details. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size. 1 Control Relay Output Block For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the G60 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
Note 2:
Note 3:
E-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 2 of 4)

OBJECT OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION NO. NO. 20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter contd REQUEST FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 22 (assign class)
RESPONSE QUALIFIER FUNCTION CODES (HEX) CODES (DEC) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index)
QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index)
16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index)
21
22
23
Note 1:
00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 0 Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) to request default variation) 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 2 16-Bit Counter Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. The default variations for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings. Refer to the Communications section in Chapter 5 for details. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the G60 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
Frozen Counter (Variation 0 is used to request default variation)
Note 2:
Note 3:
GE Multilin
E-5
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 3 of 4)

OBJECT OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION NO. NO. 23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time contd 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 30
APPENDIX E
E
32
34
Note 1:
RESPONSE QUALIFIER FUNCTION QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) default variation) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 5 short floating point 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 06(no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08(limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28(index) 0 Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) to request default variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 5 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) without Time 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 7 short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) with Time 07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.) 0 Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) (Variation 0 is used to request default 06 (no range, or all) variation) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 1 16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index) (default see Note 1) 07, 08 (limited quantity) (see Note 2) 17, 28 (index) 2 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. The default variations for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings. Refer to the Communications section in Chapter 5 for details. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the G60 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
REQUEST FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 1 (read)
Note 2:
Note 3:
E-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E Table E2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 4 of 4)

OBJECT OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION NO. NO. 34 2 32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband REQUEST FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 1 (read)
contd
2 (write)
Short floating point Analog Input Reporting 1 (read) Deadband
50
Time and Date (default see Note 1)
1 (read) 2 (write)
QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07 (limited qty=1) 08 (limited quantity) 17, 28 (index)
RESPONSE FUNCTION CODES (DEC) 129 (response)
QUALIFIER CODES (HEX) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index) (see Note 2)
129 (response)
52 60
2 0
Time Delay Fine Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 1 (read) 20 (enable unsol) 21 (disable unsol) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 20 (enable unsol) 21 (disable unsol) 22 (assign class) 1 (read) 22 (assign class) 29 (authenticate) 25 (open) 27 (delete) 26 (close) 30 (abort) 1 (read) 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
07 (limited quantity)
(quantity = 1)
1 2 3 4 70 0
Class 0 Data Class 1 Data Class 2 Data Class 3 Data File event - any variation
06 (no range, or all) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity)
2 3 4 5 6 7 80 1
File authentication File command File command status File transfer File transfer status File descriptor Internal Indications
06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited quantity) 06 (no range, or all) 5b (free format) 129 (response) 5b (free format) 5b (free format) 5b (free format) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp.) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp.) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp.) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp.) 129 (response)
5b (free format)
5b (free format) 5b (free format) 5b (free format) 5b (free format) 00, 01 (start-stop)
28 (get file info.) 1 (read) 2 (write) (see Note 3) 13 (cold restart)
5b (free format) 00, 01 (start-stop)

(index =7)
00 (start-stop)
(index =7)
------Note 1:
No Object (function code only) see Note 3 No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart) No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.) A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. The default variations for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32 are selected via relay settings. Refer to the Communications section in Chapter 5 for details. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts the G60 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
Note 2:
Note 3:
GE Multilin
E-7
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS E.2DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E E.2.1 BINARY INPUT POINTS
The DNP binary input data points are configured through the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details. When a freeze function is performed on a binary counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding frozen counter point.
BINARY INPUT POINTS Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status), Configurable Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time), Configurable Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle Change Event Buffer Size: 500 Default Class for All Points: 1
E-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS E.2.2 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close. BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS Object Number: 10 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Default Variation reported when Variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS Object Number: 12 Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
Table E3: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

POINT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 NAME/DESCRIPTION Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input 6 Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input 8 Virtual Input 9 Virtual Input 10 Virtual Input 11 Virtual Input 12 Virtual Input 13 Virtual Input 14 Virtual Input 15 Virtual Input 16 Virtual Input 17 Virtual Input 18 Virtual Input 19 Virtual Input 20 Virtual Input 21 Virtual Input 22 Virtual Input 23 Virtual Input 24 Virtual Input 25 Virtual Input 26 Virtual Input 27 Virtual Input 28 Virtual Input 29 Virtual Input 30 Virtual Input 31 Virtual Input 32
Table E3: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS

POINT 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 NAME/DESCRIPTION Virtual Input 33 Virtual Input 34 Virtual Input 35 Virtual Input 36 Virtual Input 37 Virtual Input 38 Virtual Input 39 Virtual Input 40 Virtual Input 41 Virtual Input 42 Virtual Input 43 Virtual Input 44 Virtual Input 45 Virtual Input 46 Virtual Input 47 Virtual Input 48 Virtual Input 49 Virtual Input 50 Virtual Input 51 Virtual Input 52 Virtual Input 53 Virtual Input 54 Virtual Input 55 Virtual Input 56 Virtual Input 57 Virtual Input 58 Virtual Input 59 Virtual Input 60 Virtual Input 61 Virtual Input 62 Virtual Input 63 Virtual Input 64
GE Multilin
E-9
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E E.2.3 COUNTERS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY COUNTERS Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Change Event Object Number: 22 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time) Change Event Buffer Size: 10 Default Class for all points: 3 FROZEN COUNTERS Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Change Event Object Number: 23 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time) Change Event Buffer Size: 10 Default Class for all points: 3 Table E4: BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS
POINT INDEX 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NAME/DESCRIPTION Digital Counter 1 Digital Counter 2 Digital Counter 3 Digital Counter 4 Digital Counter 5 Digital Counter 6 Digital Counter 7 Digital Counter 8 Oscillography Trigger Count Events Since Last Clear
A counter freeze command has no meaning for counters 8 and 9. G60 Digital Counter values are represented as 32-bit integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative counter values.
E-10
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS E.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS
LISTS ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS
The DNP analog input data points are configured through the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT menu. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for additional details. It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767 for 16-bit values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement. The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bulletin 9809-001: Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change Event without Time) Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500 ms Change Event Buffer Size: 256 Default Class for all Points: 2
GE Multilin
E-11
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
E-12
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F APPENDIX F MISCELLANEOUSF.1CHANGE NOTES
F.1 CHANGE NOTES F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
Table F1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N 1601-0110-B1 1601-0110-B2 1601-0110-B3 1601-0110-C1 1601-0110-C2 1601-0110-C3 1601-0110-C4 1601-0110-C5 1601-0110-C6 1601-0110-C7 1601-0110-C8 1601-0110-C9 1601-0110-D1 1601-0110-D2 1601-0110-E1 1601-0110-E2 1601-0110-F1 1601-0110-F2 1601-0110-G1 1601-0110-G2 1601-0110-H1 1601-0110-H2 1601-0110-J1 1601-0110-K1 1601-0110-L1 1601-0110-M1 1601-0110-M2 1601-0110-N1 1601-0110-N2 1601-0110-P1 1601-0110-P2 1601-0110-R1 1601-0110-R2 1601-0110-R3 1601-0110-S1 1601-0110-S2 1601-0110-S3 1601-0110-T1 1601-0110-U1 1601-0110-U2 1601-0110-V1 G60 REVISION 2.8x 2.9x 2.9x 3.0x 3.1x 3.0x 3.1x 3.1x 3.0x 3.1x 3.0x 3.1x 3.2x 3.2x 3.3x 3.3x 3.4x 3.4x 4.0x 4.0x 4.2x 4.2x 4.4x 4.6x 4.8x 4.9x 4.9x 5.0x 5.0x 5.2x 5.2x 5.4x 5.4x 5.4x 5.5x 5.5x 5.5x 5.6x 5.7x 5.7x 5.8x RELEASE DATE 27 September 2001 03 December 2001 23 January 2001 02 July 2002 30 August 2002 18 November 2002 18 November 2002 16 January 2003 27 January 2003 27 January 2003 11 February 2003 11 February 2003 11 February 2003 02 June 2003 01 May 2003 29 May 2003 10 December 2003 30 January 2004 23 March 2004 17 May 2004 30 June 2004 23 July 2004 15 September 2004 15 February 2005 05 August 2005 15 December 2005 27 February 2006 31 March 2006 26 May 2006 23 October 2006 24 January 2007 01 July 2007 31 August 2007 17 October 2007 7 December 2007 22 February 2008 12 March 2008 27 June 2008 29 May 2009 30 September 2009 ECO URG-001 URG-002 URG-003 URG-004 URG-005 URG-006 URG-007 URG-008 URG-009 URG-010 URG-011 URG-013 URG-012 URX-084 URX-080 URX-083 URX-111 URX-115 URX-123 URX-136 URX-145 URX-151 URX-156 URX-176 URX-202 URX-208 URX-214 URX-217 URX-220 URX-230 URX-232 URX-242 URX-246 URX-251 URX-253 URX-258 URX-260 08-0390 09-0938 09-1165
GE Multilin
F-1
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F F.1.2 CHANGES TO THE G60 MANUAL
Table F2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION V1

PAGE (U2) Title 2-1 2-3 2-7 2-10 2-15 --3-10 3-23 --3-41 4-28 5-10 5-15 5-22 5-103 5-119 5-124 5-169 PAGE (V1) Title 2-1 2-3 2-7 2-10 2-15 2-19 3-10 3-24 3-41 3-62 4-28 5-10 5-15 5-22 5-104 5-119 5-124 5-169 5-174 5-197 5-202 5-205 5-205 5-225 6-14 6-21 7-10 A-1 B-8 C-3 CHANGE Update Update Update Update Update Update Add Update Update Add Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Add Add Add Update Update Update Add Update Update Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0110-V1 Updated OVERVIEW section Updated ORDERING section Updated REPLACEMENT MODULES section Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS specifications section Updated METERING specifications section Added FIELD AND STATOR GROUND MODULES specifications section Updated TYPICAL WIRING section Updated CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS section Added FIELD AND STATOR GROUND MODULES section Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE section Updated INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY section Updated ACCESS SUPERVISION section Updated SERIAL PORTS section Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL section Updated FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table Updated FLEXELEMENTS section Updated SETTING GROUP section Updated NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section Updated GENERATOR UNBALANCE section Updated STATOR GROUND section Added SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND FAULT section Added APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS FOR SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND FAULT DETECTOR section Added FIELD GROUND FAULT PROTECTION section Updated FREQUENCY OUT-OF-BAND ACCUMULATORS 1 TO 7 section Updated SOURCES section Updated FLEXELEMENTS section Added EXTERNAL DEVICE SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES section Updated FLEXANALOG ITEMS section Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section Updated PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES section
5-172 5-195 ------5-215 6-14 6-19 --A-1 B-8 C-3
Table F3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION U2 (Sheet 1 of 2)

PAGE (U1) Title 1-1 2-1 PAGE (U2) Title 1-1 2-1 CHANGE Update Update Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0110-U2 Updated INSPECTION CHECKLIST section Updated OVERVIEW section
F-2
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F Table F3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION U2 (Sheet 2 of 2)
PAGE (U1) 2-14 2-19 2-20 2-20 4-14 5-22 5-75 5-158 5-169 5-212 5-226 C-7 PAGE (U2) 2-14 2-20 2-21 2-22 4-14 5-22 5-75 5-158 5-169 5-212 5-226 C-7 CHANGE Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update DESCRIPTION Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS specifications section Updated ENVIRONMENTAL specifications section Updated TYPE TESTS specifications section Updated APPROVALS specifications section Updated LED INDICATORS section Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL section Updated DISCONNECT SWITCHES section Updated NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
Updated NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section Updated FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE section Updated VT FUSE FAILURE section Updated CONFIGURABLE GOOSE section
Table F4: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION U1 (Sheet 1 of 2)

PAGE (T1) Title 2-1 2-9 PAGE (U1) Title 2-1 2-9 CHANGE Update Update Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0110-U1 Updated OVERVIEW section Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS section for changes to underfrequency, overfrequency, rate of change of frequency, 100% stator ground, and restricted ground fault specifications, and new remote RTD specification Updated MONITORING specifications section Updated INPUTS specifications section Updated ENVIRONMENTAL specifications section Updated TYPE TESTS specifications section Updated VERTICAL UNITS sub-section Updated CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS section Updated USING SETTINGS FILES section Updated SECURITY section Updated SERIAL PORTS sub-section Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL sub-section Updated OSCILLOGRAPHY section Updated POWER SYSTEM section Updated BREAKERS section Updated DISCONNECT SWITCHES section Added USER TRIGGERING sub-section Updated FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table Updated PHASE DISTANCE sub-section Updated PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT section Updated NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section Updated RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT section Updated NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT section Updated PHASE OVERVOLTAGE section Updated 100% STATOR GROUND section
2-13 2-14 2-18 2-19 3-2 3-13 4-1 5-8 5-15 5-21 5-37 5-65 5-69 5-73 --5-101 5-123 5-147 5-153 5-160 5-164 5-176 5-191
2-13 2-14 2-18 2-19 3-2 3-14 4-1 5-8 5-15 5-22 5-39 5-67 5-71 5-75 5-90 5-103 5-126 5-151 5-158 5-165 5-169 5-181 5-196
Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Add Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update
GE Multilin
F-3
F.1 CHANGE NOTES Table F4: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION U1 (Sheet 2 of 2)
PAGE (T1) 5-211 --5-215 5-220 5-224 --------6-21 6-24 7-2 7-7 --A-1 --B-8 B-63 PAGE (U1) 5-216 5-220 5-221 5-226 5-230 5-242 5-243 5-247 6-9 6-21 6-24 7-3 7-8 8-1 A-1 A-11 B-8 B-65 CHANGE Update Add Update Update Update Add Add Add Add Update Update Update Update Add Update Add Update Update DESCRIPTION Updated SYNCHROCHECK section Added APPLICATION OF THE SYNCHROCHECK ELEMENT sub-section Updated DIGITAL ELEMENTS section Updated VT FUSE FAILURE section Updated CONTACT OUTPUTS section Added IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS section Added IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS section Added RRTD INPUTS section Added IEC 61850 GOOSE INTEGERS section Updated STATOR GROUND section Updated PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS section Updated RELAY MAINTENANCE section Updated MINOR SELF-TEST ERRORS section Added SECURITY chapter Updated FLEXANALOG ITEMS section Added FLEXINTEGER ITEMS section Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section Updated DATA FORMATS section
APPENDIX F
Table F5: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION T1
PAGE (S3) Title 2-2 ----5-20 --5-98 --5-240 --B-8
PAGE (T1) Title 2-2 3-13 5-11 5-21 5-63 5-101 5-229 5-244 6-4 B-8
CHANGE Update Update Add Add Update Add Update Add Update Add Update
DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0110-T1 Updated ORDERING section Added PROCESS BUS MODULES section Added DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS section Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL section Added REMOTE RESOURCES section Updated FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table Added REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS section Updated TEST MODE section Added REMOTE DOUBLE-POINT STATUS INPUTS section Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section
Table F6: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION S3 (Sheet 1 of 2)

PAGE (S2) Title 2-15 2-16 3-7 PAGE (S3) Title 2-15 2-16 3-7 CHANGE Update Update Update Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0110-S3 Updated COMMUNICATIONS specifications section Updated INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS specifications section Updated REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT section
F-4
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F Table F6: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION S3 (Sheet 2 of 2)
PAGE (S2) --7-6 B-8 PAGE (S3) 3-46 7-7 B-8 CHANGE Add Update Update DESCRIPTION Added ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS section Updated MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES section Update MODBUS MEMORY MAP section
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
Table F7: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION S2

PAGE (S1) Title 3-40 3-40 ----PAGE (S2) Title 3-40 3-40 3-43 3-43 CHANGE Update Update Update Add Add DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0110-S2 Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH OVERVIEW section Updated MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE section Added UPLOADING G60 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE sub-section Added SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION sub-section
Table F8: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION S1

PAGE (R3) Title 2-2 2-4 2-13 2-14 3-35 ----5-8 --5-42 5-60 ----5-87 ----B-8 PAGE (S1) Title 2-2 2-4 2-13 2-15 3-36 3-40 4-23 5-8 5-32 5-43 5-63 5-66 5-70 5-98 6-9 6-24 B-8 CHANGE Update Update Update Update Update Update Add Add Update Add Update Update Add Add Update Add Add Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0110-S1 Updated ORDERING section Updated REPLACEMENT MODULES section Updated OUTPUTS specifications section Updated COMMUNICATIONS specifications section Updated IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE section Added MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES section Added BREAKER CONTROL section Updated PASSWORD SECURITY section (now titled SECURITY) Added ETHERNET SWITCH sub-section Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS section Updated SIGNAL SOURCES section Added BREAKERS section Added DISCONNECT SWITCHES section Updated FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table Added ETHERNET SWITCH section Added PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS section Update MODBUS MEMORY MAP section for revision 5.5x
Table F9: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION R3

PAGE (R2) Title --6-23 PAGE (R3) Title 4-4 6-23 CHANGE Update Add Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0110-R3 Added EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES section Updated MODEL INFORMATION section
GE Multilin
F-5
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F

PAGE (R1) Title PAGE (R2) Title CHANGE Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0110-R2

PAGE (P2) Title 2-2 2-7 3-1 3-4 4-4 4-5 4-7 4-12 5-8 5-34 5-38 5-39 5-45 --5-65 PAGE (R1) Title 2-2 2-7 3-1 3-5 4-4 4-5 4-8 4-20 5-8 5-35 5-39 5-40 5-47 5-67 5-84 5-203 5-221 5-229 6-19 7-3 7-5 A-1 B-7 B-8 C-2 C-7 CHANGE Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Add Update Add Update Add Add Add Update Update Update Update Add Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0110-R1 Updated ORDERING section Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS specifications section Updated PANEL CUTOUT section Updated MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION section Updated FACEPLATE section Updated LED INDICATORS section Updated CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS section Updated ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS section Updated PASSWORD SECURITY section Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS section Updated CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS section Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS section Updated DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS section Added PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT section Updated FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table Added TRIP BUS section Updated RTD INPUTS section Added PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT TEST VALUES section Added PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT section Added PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ONE-SHOT section Updated RELAY SELF-TESTS section Updated FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS table Updated MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION section Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section Added GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES section Updated CONFIGURABLE GOOSE section
--5-194 ------7-3 A-1 B-7 B-8 --C-7
Table F12: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION P2 (Sheet 1 of 2)

PAGE (P1) Title 2-2 2-7 3-20 PAGE (P2) Title 2-2 2-7 3-20 CHANGE Update Update Update Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0110-P2 Updated ORDERING section Updated PROTECTION ELEMENTS specifications section Updated CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING diagram to 842765A2
F-6
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F Table F12: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION P2 (Sheet 2 of 2)
PAGE (P1) 5-139 6-16 --7-4 A-1 PAGE (P2) 5-139 6-16 6-18 7-4 A-1 CHANGE Update Update Add Update Update DESCRIPTION
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
Updated NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827839A3 Updated TRACKING FREQUENCY section Added IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES section Updated SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES table Updated FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS table
Table F13: MAJOR UPDATES FOR G60 MANUAL REVISION P1

PAGE (N2) Title 2-2 3-30 5-14 5-18 5-63 5-135 B-8 C-1 E-1 E-4 E-8 E-10 PAGE (P1) Title 2-2 3-30 5-14 5-18 5-65 5-137 B-8 C-1 E-1 E-4 E-8 E-10 CHANGE Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update DESCRIPTION Manual part number to 1601-0110-P1 Updated ORDERING section Updated TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION drawing to 831022A3 Updated DNP PROTOCOL sub-section Updated IEC 61850 PROTOCOL sub-section Updated FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table Updated PHASE OVERVOLTAGE sub-section Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP section Updated Appendix C: IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONS Updated DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE section Updated DNP IMPLEMENTATION TABLE section Updated BINARY INPUT POINTS section Updated COUNTERS section
GE Multilin
F-7
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS F.2ABBREVIATIONS

A..................... Ampere AC .................. Alternating Current A/D ................. Analog to Digital AE .................. Accidental Energization, Application Entity AMP ............... Ampere ANG ............... Angle ANSI............... American National Standards Institute AR .................. Automatic Reclosure ASDU ............. Application-layer Service Data Unit ASYM ............. Asymmetry AUTO ............. Automatic AUX................ Auxiliary AVG ................ Average BER................ Bit Error Rate BF................... Breaker Fail BFI.................. Breaker Failure Initiate BKR................ Breaker BLK ................ Block BLKG.............. Blocking BPNT.............. Breakpoint of a characteristic BRKR ............. Breaker CAP................ Capacitor CC .................. Coupling Capacitor CCVT ............. Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer CFG................ Configure / Configurable .CFG............... Filename extension for oscillography files CHK................ Check CHNL ............. Channel CLS ................ Close CLSD.............. Closed CMND ............ Command CMPRSN........ Comparison CO.................. Contact Output COM............... Communication COMM............ Communications COMP ............ Compensated, Comparison CONN............. Connection CONT ............. Continuous, Contact CO-ORD......... Coordination CPU................ Central Processing Unit CRC ............... Cyclic Redundancy Code CRT, CRNT .... Current CSA................ Canadian Standards Association CT .................. Current Transformer CVT ................ Capacitive Voltage Transformer D/A ................. Digital to Analog DC (dc)........... Direct Current DD .................. Disturbance Detector DFLT .............. Default DGNST........... Diagnostics DI.................... Digital Input DIFF ............... Differential DIR ................. Directional DISCREP ....... Discrepancy DIST ............... Distance DMD ............... Demand DNP................ Distributed Network Protocol DPO ............... Dropout DSP................ Digital Signal Processor dt .................... Rate of Change DTT ................ Direct Transfer Trip DUTT.............. Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip ENCRMNT ..... Encroachment EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute .EVT ............... Filename extension for event recorder files EXT ................ Extension, External F ..................... Field FAIL................ Failure FD .................. Fault Detector FDH................ Fault Detector high-set FDL ................ Fault Detector low-set FLA................. Full Load Current FO .................. Fiber Optic
APPENDIX F F.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS

FREQ ............. Frequency FSK................ Frequency-Shift Keying FTP ................ File Transfer Protocol FxE ................ FlexElement FWD............... Forward G .................... Generator GE.................. General Electric GND............... Ground GNTR............. Generator GOOSE.......... General Object Oriented Substation Event GPS ............... Global Positioning System HARM ............ Harmonic / Harmonics HCT ............... High Current Time HGF ............... High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT) HIZ ................. High-Impedance and Arcing Ground HMI ................ Human-Machine Interface HTTP ............. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HYB ............... Hybrid I...................... Instantaneous I_0.................. Zero Sequence current I_1.................. Positive Sequence current I_2.................. Negative Sequence current IA ................... Phase A current IAB ................. Phase A minus B current IB ................... Phase B current IBC................. Phase B minus C current IC ................... Phase C current ICA................. Phase C minus A current ID ................... Identification IED................. Intelligent Electronic Device IEC................. International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE............... Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IG ................... Ground (not residual) current Igd.................. Differential Ground current IN ................... CT Residual Current (3Io) or Input INC SEQ ........ Incomplete Sequence INIT ................ Initiate INST............... Instantaneous INV................. Inverse I/O .................. Input/Output IOC ................ Instantaneous Overcurrent IOV................. Instantaneous Overvoltage IRIG ............... Inter-Range Instrumentation Group ISO................. International Standards Organization IUV................. Instantaneous Undervoltage K0 .................. Zero Sequence Current Compensation kA................... kiloAmpere kV................... kiloVolt LED................ Light Emitting Diode LEO................ Line End Open LFT BLD ........ Left Blinder LOOP............. Loopback LPU................ Line Pickup LRA................ Locked-Rotor Current LTC ................ Load Tap-Changer M.................... Machine mA ................. MilliAmpere MAG............... Magnitude MAN............... Manual / Manually MAX ............... Maximum MIC ................ Model Implementation Conformance MIN ................ Minimum, Minutes MMI................ Man Machine Interface MMS .............. Manufacturing Message Specification MRT ............... Minimum Response Time MSG............... Message MTA................ Maximum Torque Angle MTR ............... Motor MVA ............... MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase) MVA_A ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A) MVA_B ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B) MVA_C........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)
F-8
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
MVAR ............. MegaVar (total 3-phase) MVAR_A......... MegaVar (phase A) MVAR_B......... MegaVar (phase B) MVAR_C ........ MegaVar (phase C) MVARH .......... MegaVar-Hour MW................. MegaWatt (total 3-phase) MW_A ............ MegaWatt (phase A) MW_B ............ MegaWatt (phase B) MW_C ............ MegaWatt (phase C) MWH .............. MegaWatt-Hour N..................... Neutral N/A, n/a .......... Not Applicable NEG ............... Negative NMPLT ........... Nameplate NOM............... Nominal NSAP ............. Network Service Access Protocol NTR................ Neutral O .................... Over OC, O/C ......... Overcurrent O/P, Op........... Output OP .................. Operate OPER ............. Operate OPERATG...... Operating O/S ................. Operating System OSI ................. Open Systems Interconnect OSB................ Out-of-Step Blocking OUT................ Output OV .................. Overvoltage OVERFREQ ... Overfrequency OVLD ............. Overload P..................... Phase PC .................. Phase Comparison, Personal Computer PCNT ............. Percent PF................... Power Factor (total 3-phase) PF_A .............. Power Factor (phase A) PF_B .............. Power Factor (phase B) PF_C .............. Power Factor (phase C) PFLL............... Phase and Frequency Lock Loop PHS................ Phase PICS............... Protocol Implementation & Conformance Statement PKP ................ Pickup PLC ................ Power Line Carrier POS................ Positive POTT.............. Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip PRESS ........... Pressure PRI ................. Primary PROT ............. Protection PSEL .............. Presentation Selector pu ................... Per Unit PUIB............... Pickup Current Block PUIT ............... Pickup Current Trip PUSHBTN ...... Pushbutton PUTT.............. Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip PWM .............. Pulse Width Modulated PWR............... Power QUAD............. Quadrilateral R..................... Rate, Reverse RCA................ Reach Characteristic Angle REF ................ Reference REM ............... Remote REV................ Reverse RI.................... Reclose Initiate RIP ................. Reclose In Progress RGT BLD........ Right Blinder ROD ............... Remote Open Detector RST ................ Reset RSTR ............. Restrained RTD................ Resistance Temperature Detector RTU................ Remote Terminal Unit RX (Rx) .......... Receive, Receiver s ..................... second S..................... Sensitive
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
SAT .................CT Saturation SBO ................Select Before Operate SCADA ...........Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SEC ................Secondary SEL .................Select / Selector / Selection SENS ..............Sensitive SEQ ................Sequence SIR..................Source Impedance Ratio SNTP ..............Simple Network Time Protocol SRC ................Source SSB.................Single Side Band SSEL...............Session Selector STATS.............Statistics SUPN..............Supervision SUPV ..............Supervise / Supervision SV ...................Supervision, Service SYNC..............Synchrocheck SYNCHCHK....Synchrocheck T......................Time, transformer TC ...................Thermal Capacity TCP.................Transmission Control Protocol TCU ................Thermal Capacity Used TD MULT ........Time Dial Multiplier TEMP..............Temperature TFTP...............Trivial File Transfer Protocol THD ................Total Harmonic Distortion TMR ................Timer TOC ................Time Overcurrent TOV ................Time Overvoltage TRANS............Transient TRANSF .........Transfer TSEL...............Transport Selector TUC ................Time Undercurrent TUV.................Time Undervoltage TX (Tx)............Transmit, Transmitter U .....................Under UC...................Undercurrent UCA ................Utility Communications Architecture UDP ................User Datagram Protocol UL ...................Underwriters Laboratories UNBAL............Unbalance UR...................Universal Relay URC ................Universal Recloser Control .URS ...............Filename extension for settings files UV...................Undervoltage V/Hz ................Volts per Hertz V_0 .................Zero Sequence voltage V_1 .................Positive Sequence voltage V_2 .................Negative Sequence voltage VA ...................Phase A voltage VAB.................Phase A to B voltage VAG ................Phase A to Ground voltage VARH ..............Var-hour voltage VB ...................Phase B voltage VBA.................Phase B to A voltage VBG ................Phase B to Ground voltage VC...................Phase C voltage VCA ................Phase C to A voltage VCG ................Phase C to Ground voltage VF ...................Variable Frequency VIBR ...............Vibration VT ...................Voltage Transformer VTFF...............Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure VTLOS ............Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal WDG ...............Winding WH..................Watt-hour w/ opt ..............With Option WRT................With Respect To X .....................Reactance XDUCER.........Transducer XFMR..............Transformer Z......................Impedance, Zone
GE Multilin
F-9
F.3 WARRANTY F.3WARRANTY
APPENDIX F F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY
GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY

General Electric Multilin Inc. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from date of shipment from factory. In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacement under warranty will be made without charge. Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident, incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.
GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment. For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Standard Conditions of Sale.
F-10
GE Multilin
Index
INDEX
BLOCK SETTING ............................................................... 5-5 BREAKER CONTROL control of 2 breakers ...................................................... 4-24 description ..................................................................... 4-23 dual breaker logic ................................................. 5-74, 5-75 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-105 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-22 settings ......................................................................... 5-72 BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ...................................... 5-6 BRIGHTNESS .................................................................. 5-12
Numerics
100% STATOR GROUND see also entry for STATOR GROUND FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-104 logic ............................................................................ 5-199 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-32 settings ....................................................................... 5-197 specifications ................................................................ 2-12 10BASE-F communications options ................................................. 3-24 description .................................................................... 3-26 interface ........................................................................ 3-36 redundant option ........................................................... 3-24 settings ......................................................................... 5-17
C
C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ........................... 3-37, 3-38, 3-40 C37.94SM COMMUNICATIONS ........................................ 3-39 CE APPROVALS .............................................................. 2-24 CHANGES TO MANUAL ............................... F-4, F-5, F-6, F-7 CHANNEL COMMUNICATION .......................................... 3-30 CHANNEL TESTS ............................................................ 6-10 CHANNELS banks ................................................................... 5-67, 5-68 CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS ......................... 5-231 CLEANING ....................................................................... 2-24 CLEAR RECORDS .................................................... 5-14, 7-2 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS Modbus registers .......................................................... B-58 settings ......................................................................... 5-14 CLOCK setting date and time ........................................................ 7-2 settings ......................................................................... 5-38 COMMANDS MENU ............................................................ 7-1 COMMUNICATIONS 10BASE-F ................................................... 3-24, 3-26, 5-17 channel ......................................................................... 3-30 connecting to the UR ............................................... 1-8, 1-15 CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-2 dnp .........................................................................5-18, E-1 EGD .............................................................................. 5-35 G.703 ............................................................................ 3-32 half duplex ...................................................................... B-1 HTTP ............................................................................. 5-33 IEC 60870-5-104 protocol............................................... 5-34 IEC 61850 ................................................................... 5-243 inter-relay communications ............................................. 2-22 Modbus .................................................. 5-17, 5-37, B-1, B-3 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-18 network ......................................................................... 5-17 overview ........................................................................ 1-16 RS232 ........................................................................... 3-24 RS485 ......................................................... 3-24, 3-26, 5-16 settings ............................. 5-17, 5-18, 5-23, 5-34, 5-35, 5-37 specifications ........................................................ 2-21, 2-22 UCA/MMS .................................................................... 5-245 web server ..................................................................... 5-33 COMTRADE ............................................................... B-6, B-7 CONDUCTED RFI ............................................................ 2-23 CONTACT INFORMATION .................................................. 1-1 CONTACT INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-4 dry connections ............................................................. 3-21 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-111 Modbus registers ............................... B-10, B-15, B-51, B-53 settings ....................................................................... 5-237 specifications ................................................................. 2-16 thresholds ................................................................... 5-237 wet connections ............................................................. 3-21
A
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................... F-8 AC CURRENT INPUTS ................................... 2-16, 3-13, 5-67 AC VOLTAGE INPUTS .............................................2-16, 3-14 ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-104 logic ............................................................................ 5-192 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-30 settings ....................................................................... 5-191 specifications ................................................................ 2-13 ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-17, 4-27 ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................. 5-124 ACTUAL VALUES metering ........................................................................ 6-11 product information ........................................................ 6-28 status .............................................................................. 6-4 ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-45 ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS ................................................... 2-1 APPARENT POWER ................................................2-15, 6-17 APPLICATION EXAMPLES breaker trip circuit integrity .......................................... 5-233 contact inputs .............................................................. 5-238 sensitive directional power ........................................... 5-194 APPROVALS ................................................................... 2-24 ARCHITECTURE ........................................................... 5-102 AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-104 logic ............................................................................ 5-186 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-38 settings ....................................................................... 5-186 specifications ................................................................ 2-12 AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-104 logic ............................................................................ 5-185 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-38 settings ....................................................................... 5-185 specifications ................................................................ 2-11 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL ..................................... 3-14 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING ................................... 6-16
B
BANKS ............................................................. 5-6, 5-67, 5-68 BATTERY FAILURE ........................................................... 7-8 BINARY INPUT POINTS ..................................................... E-8 BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ................................................. E-9 BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................. 1-3
GE Multilin
INDEX
CONTACT OUTPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-5 FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-111 Modbus registers .........................................B-10, B-15, B-56 settings ....................................................................... 5-240 CONTROL ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-211 CONTROL POWER description..................................................................... 3-13 specifications ................................................................. 2-18 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-104 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-58 settings ......................................................................... 5-47 specifications ................................................................. 2-14 COUNTERS actual values ................................................................... 6-7 settings ....................................................................... 5-234 CRC ALARM .................................................................... 5-62 CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-2 CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY ..................................... 2-18, 3-12 CSA APPROVAL .............................................................. 2-24 CT BANKS settings ......................................................................... 5-67 CT INPUTS ...................................................... 3-14, 5-6, 5-67 CT WIRING ...................................................................... 3-14 CURRENT BANK ............................................................. 5-67 CURRENT HARMONICS ......................................... 2-16, 6-19 CURRENT METERING actual values ................................................................. 6-15 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-11 specifications ................................................................. 2-15 CURVES definite time.......................................................5-148, 5-180 FlexCurves ...................................................... 5-79, 5-148 I2T .............................................................................. 5-148 IAC ............................................................................. 5-147 IEC ............................................................................. 5-146 IEEE ........................................................................... 5-145 inverse time undervoltage ............................................ 5-180 types ........................................................................... 5-144 DIFFERENTIAL stator ......................................................... 2-10, 5-141, 6-14 DIGITAL COUNTERS actual values ................................................................... 6-7 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-105 logic ............................................................................ 5-235 Modbus registers .................................................... B-9, B-46 settings ........................................................................ 5-234 DIGITAL ELEMENTS application example ...................................................... 5-232 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-105 logic ............................................................................ 5-231 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-40 settings ........................................................................ 5-231 DIGITAL OUTPUTS see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS DIMENSIONS ............................................................. 3-1, 3-2 DIRECT DEVICES actual values ................................................................... 6-8 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-17 settings ........................................................................ 5-247 DIRECT I/O see also DIRECT INPUTS and DIRECT OUTPUTS application example ........................................... 5-248, 5-249 configuration examples ........................ 5-56, 5-59, 5-62, 5-63 settings ..............................................5-56, 5-62, 5-63, 5-247 DIRECT INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-8 application example ........................................... 5-248, 5-249 clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-111 Modbus registers ....................... B-10, B-17, B-43, B-58, B-59 settings ........................................................................ 5-247 specifications .................................................................2-17 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS error messages ............................................................... 7-8 DIRECT OUTPUTS application example ........................................... 5-248, 5-249 clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2 Modbus registers ................................ B-10, B-43, B-58, B-59 settings ........................................................................ 5-247 DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL entries DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION ...................................... 5-154 DIRECTIONAL POWER see entry for SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER DISCONNECT SWITCH FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-110 logic ..............................................................................5-78 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-35 settings ..........................................................................5-76 DISPLAY ........................................................ 1-16, 4-23, 5-12 DISTANCE mho characteristic ............................................. 5-127, 5-128 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-33 phase ................................................................. 2-10, 5-126 settings ........................................................................ 5-125 DISTURBANCE DETECTOR internal ..........................................................................5-70 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-28 DNA-1 BIT PAIR ............................................................. 5-245 DNP COMMUNICATIONS binary counters ............................................................. E-10 binary input points ........................................................... E-8 binary output points ......................................................... E-9 control relay output blocks ............................................... E-9 device profile document ................................................... E-1 frozen counters ............................................................. E-10
D
DATA FORMATS, MODBUS .............................................B-65 DATA LOGGER clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2 Modbus .......................................................................... B-7 Modbus registers ..................................................B-10, B-20 settings ......................................................................... 5-42 specifications ................................................................. 2-15 via COMTRADE .............................................................. B-6 DATE ................................................................................. 7-2 DCMA INPUTS ................................................................. 6-25 Modbus registers ..................................................B-16, B-34 settings ....................................................................... 5-254 specifications ................................................................. 2-16 DCMA OUTPUTS description..................................................................... 3-23 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-42 settings ....................................................................... 5-261 specifications ................................................................. 2-18 DEFINITE TIME CURVE .......................................5-148, 5-180 DESIGN ............................................................................. 1-3 DEVICE ID ..................................................................... 5-243 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT ......................................... E-1 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ................................................. 3-12
ii
GE Multilin
INDEX
implementation table ....................................................... E-4 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-18 settings ......................................................................... 5-18 DUPLEX, HALF .................................................................. B-1
F
F485 ................................................................................ 1-16 FACEPLATE ............................................................... 3-1, 3-2 FACEPLATE PANELS ............................................. 4-13, 4-23 FAST FORM-C RELAY ..................................................... 2-18 FAST TRANSIENT TESTING ............................................ 2-23 FAX NUMBERS .................................................................. 1-1 FEATURES ........................................................................ 2-1 FIELD GROUND FAULT settings ............................................................ 5-207, 5-209 specifications ................................................................. 2-12 FIELD GROUND FAULT DETECTOR FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-105 FIRMWARE REVISION ..................................................... 6-28 FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2 FLASH MESSAGES .......................................................... 5-12 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS actual values .......................................................... 6-7, 6-20 Modbus registers ................................................. B-15, B-40 settings ......................................................................... 5-53 specifications ................................................................. 2-14 FLEXCURVES equation ...................................................................... 5-148 Modbus registers ................................................. B-23, B-45 settings ......................................................................... 5-79 specifications ................................................................. 2-14 table .............................................................................. 5-79 FLEXELEMENTS actual values ................................................................. 6-21 direction ...................................................................... 5-121 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-106 hysteresis .................................................................... 5-121 Modbus registers ................................................. B-42, B-44 pickup ......................................................................... 5-121 scheme logic ............................................................... 5-120 settings .................................................. 5-119, 5-120, 5-123 specifications ................................................................. 2-14 FLEXLOGIC locking to a serial number ....................................... 4-9, 8-11 FLEXLOGIC editing with EnerVista UR Setup ....................................... 4-2 equation editor ............................................................. 5-118 error messages ................................................................ 7-7 evaluation .................................................................... 5-113 example ........................................................... 5-102, 5-114 example equation ......................................................... 5-213 gate characteristics ...................................................... 5-112 locking equation entries .......................................... 4-8, 8-10 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-24 operands .......................................................... 5-103, 5-104 operators ..................................................................... 5-113 rules ............................................................................ 5-113 security .................................................................. 4-8, 8-10 specifications ................................................................. 2-14 timers .......................................................................... 5-118 worksheet .................................................................... 5-115 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR ................................ 5-118 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS Modbus registers .......................................................... B-25 settings ....................................................................... 5-119 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................ 5-266 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ......................................... 5-267 FORCE TRIGGER ............................................................ 6-26 FORM-A RELAY high impedance circuits .................................................. 3-16 outputs ........................................................ 3-15, 3-16, 3-21
E
EGD PROTOCOL actual values .......................................................... 6-9, 6-27 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-39 settings ......................................................................... 5-35 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ....................................... 2-23 ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 5-4 ENERGY METERING actual values ................................................................. 6-18 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-13 specifications ................................................................ 2-16 ENERGY METERING, CLEARING ............................. 5-14, 7-2 ENERVISTA UR SETUP creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1 event recorder ................................................................. 4-2 firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2 installation ...................................................................... 1-5 introduction ..................................................................... 4-1 oscillography ................................................................... 4-2 overview ......................................................................... 4-1 requirements ................................................................... 1-5 EQUATIONS definite time curve ............................................. 5-148, 5-180 FlexCurve ................................................................ 5-148 It curves ..................................................................... 5-148 IAC curves .................................................................. 5-147 IEC curves .................................................................. 5-146 IEEE curves ................................................................ 5-145 EQUIPMENT MISMATCH ERROR ...................................... 7-7 ETHERNET actual values ................................................................... 6-7 configuration ................................................................... 1-8 error messages ............................................................... 7-9 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-10 quick connect ................................................................ 1-10 settings ......................................................................... 5-17 ETHERNET SWITCH actual values ................................................................. 6-10 configuration .........................................................3-63, 3-64 hardware ....................................................................... 3-62 Modbus registers .................................................. B-19, B-20 overview ....................................................................... 3-62 saving setting files ......................................................... 3-64 settings ......................................................................... 5-36 uploading setting files .................................................... 3-65 EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS ...................................4-15, 4-16 EVENT RECORDER actual values ................................................................. 6-26 clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2 Modbus ........................................................................... B-7 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-16 specifications ................................................................ 2-15 via EnerVista software ..................................................... 4-2 EVENTS SETTING ............................................................. 5-5 EXCEPTION RESPONSES ................................................. B-5 EXCITATION, LOSS OF see entry for LOSS OF EXCITATION
GE Multilin
iii
INDEX
specifications ................................................................. 2-18 FORM-C RELAY outputs ................................................................. 3-15, 3-21 specifications ................................................................. 2-18 FREQUENCY METERING actual values ................................................................. 6-18 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-13 settings ......................................................................... 5-69 specifications ................................................................. 2-16 FREQUENCY OUT-OF-BAND ACCUMULATION actual values ................................................................. 6-20 clearing ........................................................................... 7-2 FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-106 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-17 settings .............................................................5-224, 5-225 specifications ................................................................. 2-13 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-106 Modbus registers ..................................................B-11, B-46 settings ....................................................................... 5-222 FREQUENCY TRACKING ........................................ 5-69, 6-20 FREQUENCY, NOMINAL .................................................. 5-69 FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-5 FUSE ............................................................................... 2-17 FUSE FAILURE see VT FUSE FAILURE
I
I2T CURVES .................................................................. 5-148 IAC CURVES .................................................................. 5-147 IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL interoperability document ................................................. D-1 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-19 settings ..........................................................................5-34 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS settings ........................................................................ 5-252 IEC 61850 GOOSE UINTEGERS settings ........................................................................ 5-253 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL device ID ..................................................................... 5-244 DNA2 assignments ....................................................... 5-246 error messages ............................................................... 7-9 Modbus registers .............. B-47, B-48, B-49, B-50, B-51, B-62 remote device settings .................................................. 5-243 remote inputs ............................................................... 5-244 settings ..........................................................................5-22 UserSt-1 bit pair ........................................................... 5-246 IEC CURVES .................................................................. 5-146 IED ................................................................................... 1-2 IED SETUP ....................................................................... 1-5 IEEE C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ................... 3-37, 3-38, 3-40 IEEE CURVES ................................................................ 5-145 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS .................................................. 1-4 IN SERVICE INDICATOR ...........................................1-17, 7-6 INCOMPATIBLE HARDWARE ERROR ................................ 7-7 INPUTS AC current ............................................................ 2-16, 5-67 AC voltage ............................................................ 2-16, 5-68 contact inputs .......................................... 2-16, 5-237, 5-266 dcmA inputs .......................................................... 2-16, 3-23 direct inputs ...................................................................2-17 IRIG-B .................................................................. 2-17, 3-27 remote inputs ................................. 2-17, 5-243, 5-244, 5-245 RTD inputs ............................................................ 2-17, 3-23 virtual .......................................................................... 5-239 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................. 1-1 INSTALLATION communications .............................................................3-25 CT inputs .............................................................. 3-13, 3-14 RS485 ...........................................................................3-26 settings ..........................................................................5-64 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE ................................ 1-2 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ..................................2-22 INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-2 INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE .................................. 5-180 IOC see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries IP ADDRESS ....................................................................5-17 IRIG-B connection .....................................................................3-27 error messages ............................................................... 7-8 settings ..........................................................................5-38 specifications ........................................................ 2-17, 2-18 ISO-9000 REGISTRATION ................................................2-24
G
G.703 .................................................... 3-31, 3-32, 3-33, 3-36 GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................. 5-147 GENERATOR UNBALANCE FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-106 logic ............................................................................ 5-174 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-31 settings ....................................................................... 5-173 specifications ................................................................. 2-11 GPM-F FAILURE ERROR ................................................. 7-10 GROUND CURRENT METERING ...................................... 6-15 GROUND IOC FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-106 logic ............................................................................ 5-164 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-28 settings ....................................................................... 5-164 GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT see entry for GROUND TOC GROUND TOC FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-106 logic ............................................................................ 5-163 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-27 settings ....................................................................... 5-163 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 GROUPED ELEMENTS .................................................. 5-124 GSSE ................................................ 5-244, 5-245, 5-246, 6-6
H
HALF-DUPLEX .................................................................. B-1 HARMONIC CONTENT ..................................................... 6-18 HARMONICS actual values ................................................................. 6-18 HARMONICS METERING specifications ................................................................. 2-16 HTTP PROTOCOL ........................................................... 5-33
K
KEYPAD .................................................................. 1-17, 4-23
iv
GE Multilin
INDEX
MODEL INFORMATION .................................................... 6-28 MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER ........................................ 6-28 MODULE FAILURE ERROR ................................................ 7-7 MODULES communications ............................................................. 3-25 CT ................................................................................. 3-14 CT/VT ..................................................................... 3-13, 5-6 direct inputs/outputs ....................................................... 3-30 insertion ................................................................... 3-6, 3-7 order codes ..................................................................... 2-7 power supply ................................................................. 3-12 transducer I/O ................................................................ 3-23 VT ................................................................................. 3-14 withdrawal ................................................................ 3-6, 3-7 MOUNTING ................................................................. 3-1, 3-2
L
LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-3 LANGUAGE ..................................................................... 5-12 LASER MODULE ............................................................. 3-30 LATCHING OUTPUTS application example ........................................... 5-241, 5-242 error messages ............................................................... 7-9 settings ....................................................................... 5-240 specifications ................................................................ 2-18 LED INDICATORS ........................ 4-14, 4-15, 4-16, 4-22, 5-45 LED TEST FlexLogic operand .................................................... 5-111 settings ......................................................................... 5-43 specifications ................................................................ 2-14 LINK POWER BUDGET .................................................... 2-22 LOGIC GATES ............................................................... 5-113 LOSS OF EXCITATION characteristics ............................................................. 5-189 FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-106 logic ............................................................................ 5-190 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-31 settings ............................................................. 5-189, 5-190 specifications ................................................................ 2-14 LOST PASSWORD ...................................... 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3
N
NAMEPLATE ...................................................................... 1-1 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC Modbus registers .......................................................... B-34 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT characteristics ............................................................. 5-171 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-106 logic ............................................................................ 5-172 settings ............................................................ 5-169, 5-172 specifications ................................................................. 2-11 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-106 logic ............................................................................ 5-184 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-29 settings ....................................................................... 5-184 specifications ................................................................. 2-12 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC Modbus registers .......................................................... B-33 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-106 logic ............................................................................ 5-162 polarization .................................................................. 5-160 settings ....................................................................... 5-158 specifications ................................................................. 2-11 NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT see entry for NEUTRAL IOC NEUTRAL IOC FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-106 logic ............................................................................ 5-157 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-27 settings ....................................................................... 5-157 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-106 logic ............................................................................ 5-183 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-38 settings ....................................................................... 5-183 specifications ................................................................. 2-12 NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT see entry for NEUTRAL TOC NEUTRAL TOC FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-106 logic ............................................................................ 5-156 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-27 settings ....................................................................... 5-156 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-106 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-45
M
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS ............................................. 7-3 MANUFACTURING DATE ................................................. 6-28 MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ...................................... B-65 MEMORY VOLTAGE LOGIC ........................................... 5-126 MENU HEIRARCHY .................................................1-17, 4-25 MENU NAVIGATION ....................................... 1-17, 4-24, 4-25 METERING conventions ...........................................................6-11, 6-12 current .......................................................................... 2-15 frequency ...................................................................... 2-16 harmonics ..................................................................... 2-16 power ............................................................................ 2-15 THD .............................................................................. 2-16 voltage .......................................................................... 2-15 METERING CONVENTIONS ............................................. 6-12 MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC .............................. 5-127 MODBUS data logger ...............................................................B-6, B-7 event recorder ................................................................. B-7 exception responses ........................................................ B-5 execute operation ............................................................ B-4 flex state parameters ..................................................... 5-54 function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-3 function code 05h ............................................................ B-4 function code 06h ............................................................ B-4 function code 10h ............................................................ B-5 introduction ..................................................................... B-1 memory map data formats .............................................. B-65 obtaining files .................................................................. B-6 oscillography ................................................................... B-6 passwords ....................................................................... B-7 read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-3 settings .................................................................5-17, 5-37 store multiple settings ...................................................... B-5 store single setting .......................................................... B-4 supported function codes ................................................. B-3 user map ..................................................... 5-37, B-10, B-23
GE Multilin
INDEX
settings ....................................................................... 5-123 specifications ................................................................. 2-14 NSAP ADDRESS .............................................................. 5-17 changing ........................................................................4-28 for settings templates ............................................... 4-5, 8-7 lost password ................................... 4-28, 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3 Modbus ........................................................................... B-7 Modbus registers ......................................... B-13, B-17, B-18 overview ........................................................................1-18 security .................................................................... 5-8, 8-1 settings .................................................................... 5-8, 8-1 PC SOFTWARE see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS .............................................. 5-179 PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-4 PHASE ANGLE METERING ..............................................6-12 PHASE CURRENT METERING .........................................6-15 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OC Modbus registers ........................................................... B-33 PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-107 logic ............................................................................ 5-155 phase A polarization ..................................................... 5-153 settings ............................................................. 5-153, 5-154 specifications .................................................................2-11 PHASE DISTANCE FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-107 logic ............................................................................ 5-132 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-33 op scheme ...................................................................5-130 settings ........................................................................ 5-126 specifications .................................................................2-10 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT see entry for PHASE IOC PHASE IOC FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-107 logic ............................................................................ 5-152 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-26 specifications .................................................................2-10 PHASE MEASUREMENT UNIT
O
ONE SHOTS .................................................................. 5-113 OPERATING TEMPERATURE .......................................... 2-22 OPERATING TIMES ......................................................... 2-10 ORDER CODES ............................. 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 6-28, 7-3 ORDER CODES, UPDATING .............................................. 7-3 ORDERING ............................................ 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7 OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING ............................. 2-23 OSCILLOGRAPHY actual values ................................................................. 6-26 clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2 Modbus .......................................................................... B-6 Modbus registers ..................................................B-15, B-20 settings ......................................................................... 5-40 specifications ................................................................. 2-15 via COMTRADE .............................................................. B-6 via EnerVista software ..................................................... 4-2 OSI NETWORK ADDRESS ............................................... 5-17 OST ...................................................................... 2-13, 5-135 OUT-OF-STEP TRIPPING ..................................... 2-13, 5-135 OUTPUTS contact outputs ............................................................ 5-240 control power ................................................................. 2-18 critical failure relay ........................................................ 2-18 Fast Form-C relay .......................................................... 2-18 Form-A relay ....................................... 2-18, 3-15, 3-16, 3-21 Form-C relay ................................................2-18, 3-15, 3-21 IRIG-B ........................................................................... 2-18 latching outputs .................................................. 2-18, 5-240 remote outputs ..................................................5-245, 5-246 virtual outputs .............................................................. 5-242 OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES .................................... 5-144 OVERCURRENT CURVES definite time................................................................. 5-148 FlexCurves ............................................................... 5-148 I2T .............................................................................. 5-148 IAC ............................................................................. 5-147 IEC ............................................................................. 5-146 IEEE ........................................................................... 5-145 OVERFREQUENCY FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-107 logic ............................................................................ 5-221 settings ....................................................................... 5-221 specifications ................................................................. 2-13 OVERFRQUENCY Modbus registers ...........................................................B-30 OVERVOLTAGE auxiliary ............................................................. 2-12, 5-186 negative sequence ....................................................... 5-184 negative-sequence ......................................................... 2-12 neutral ................................................................ 2-12, 5-183 phase ................................................................. 2-12, 5-182
see entry for SYNCHROPHASOR

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-107 logic ............................................................................ 5-182 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-32 settings ........................................................................ 5-182 specifications .................................................................2-12 PHASE ROTATION ...........................................................5-69 PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT see entry for PHASE TOC PHASE TOC FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-107 logic ............................................................................ 5-150 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-26 settings ........................................................................ 5-149 specifications .................................................................2-10 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-108 logic ............................................................................ 5-181 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-32 settings ........................................................................ 5-181 specifications .................................................................2-11 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT actual values ..................................................................6-27 PHONE NUMBERS ............................................................ 1-1 PMU
P
PANEL CUTOUT ......................................................... 3-1, 3-2 PARITY ........................................................................... 5-16 PASSWORD SECURITY .............................. 5-9, 5-10, 8-2, 8-3 FlexLogic operands ...................................................... 5-111 PASSWORDS
see entry for SYNCHROPHASOR

POWER METERING Modbus registers ........................................................... B-12 specifications .................................................................2-15 values ............................................................................6-17
vi
GE Multilin
INDEX
POWER SUPPLY description .................................................................... 3-12 low range ...................................................................... 2-17 specifications ................................................................ 2-17 POWER SWING BLOCKING ................................... 2-13, 5-134 POWER SWING DETECT FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-108 logic .................................................................. 5-139, 5-140 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-30 settings ............................................................. 5-133, 5-137 specifications ................................................................ 2-13 POWER SYSTEM Modbus registers ........................................................... B-22 PREFERENCES Modbus registers ........................................................... B-18 PROCESS BUS overview ....................................................................... 3-15 PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................ 6-28, B-8 PRODUCT SETUP ...................................................... 5-8, 8-2 PRODUCTION TESTS ..................................................... 2-23 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-4 PU QUANTITY ................................................................... 5-4 PUSHBUTTONS, USER-PROGRAMMABLE see USER-PROGRAMMBLE PUSHBUTTONS RESETTING ........................................................ 5-112, 5-246 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT actual values ................................................................. 6-23 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-108 Modbus registers ................................................. B-11, B-46 settings ....................................................................... 5-165 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 REVISION HISTORY ..........................................................F-1 RF IMMUNITY .................................................................. 2-23 RFI, CONDUCTED ........................................................... 2-23 RMS CURRENT ............................................................... 2-15 RMS VOLTAGE ................................................................ 2-15 RRTD INPUTS settings ....................................................................... 5-257 RS232 configuration .................................................................... 1-9 specifications ................................................................. 2-21 wiring ............................................................................ 3-24 RS422 configuration .................................................................. 3-34 timing ............................................................................ 3-35 two-channel application .................................................. 3-34 with fiber interface ......................................................... 3-36 RS485 communications ............................................................. 3-24 configuration .................................................................... 1-7 description ..................................................................... 3-26 specifications ................................................................. 2-21 RTD INPUTS actual values ................................................................. 6-25 Modbus registers ................................................. B-16, B-24 settings ............................................................ 5-255, 5-258 specifications ................................................................. 2-17 RTD PROTECTION FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-108 specifications ................................................................. 2-14
R
REACTIVE POWER .................................................2-15, 6-17 REAL POWER .........................................................2-15, 6-17 REAL TIME CLOCK Modbus registers ........................................................... B-20 settings ......................................................................... 5-38 REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ..................................... 3-8 RECLOSER CURVES ............................................ 5-82, 5-148 REDUNDANT 10BASE-F .................................................. 3-24 RELAY ACTIVATION ....................................................... 4-27 RELAY ARCHITECTURE ................................................ 5-102 RELAY MAINTENANCE ..................................................... 7-3 RELAY NAME .................................................................. 5-65 RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED ........................................... 1-17 REMOTE DEVICES actual values ................................................................... 6-6 device ID ..................................................................... 5-244 error messages ............................................................... 7-9 FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-112 Modbus registers ................................ B-10, B-15, B-60, B-63 settings ....................................................................... 5-243 statistics ......................................................................... 6-6 REMOTE DPS INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-5 settings ....................................................................... 5-245 REMOTE INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-4 FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-111 Modbus registers ......................................... B-10, B-15, B-60 settings ....................................................................... 5-244 specifications ................................................................ 2-17 REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA-1 bit pair ............................................................. 5-245 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-61 UserSt-1 bit pair .......................................................... 5-246 REMOTE RTD INPUTS Modbus registers .................................................. B-39, B-40 REMOTE RTD PROTECTION FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-108 REPLACEMENT MODULES ................................. 2-7, 2-8, 2-9
S
SALES OFFICE .................................................................. 1-1 SCAN OPERATION ............................................................ 1-4 SELECTOR SWITCH actual values ................................................................... 6-7 application example ..................................................... 5-218 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-109 logic ............................................................................ 5-219 Modbus registers ................................................. B-44, B-45 settings ....................................................................... 5-214 specifications ................................................................. 2-15 timing ............................................................... 5-217, 5-218 SELF-TESTS description ....................................................................... 7-6 error messages ................................................................ 7-8 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-112 Modbus registers ............................................................ B-8 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER actual values ................................................................. 6-22 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-105 logic ............................................................................ 5-195 Modbus registers ................................................. B-11, B-31 settings ............................................................ 5-193, 5-195 specifications ................................................................. 2-11 SENSTIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER characteristic ............................................................... 5-194 SERIAL NUMBER ............................................................. 6-28 SERIAL PORTS
GE Multilin
vii
INDEX
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-18 settings ......................................................................... 5-16 SETTING GROUPS .......................... 5-109, 5-124, 5-213, B-29 SETTINGS TEMPLATES description................................................................ 4-4, 8-6 editing ...................................................................... 4-4, 8-6 enabling ................................................................... 4-4, 8-6 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-65 password protection .................................................. 4-5, 8-7 removing .................................................................. 4-7, 8-9 viewing ..................................................................... 4-6, 8-8 SETTINGS, CHANGING ................................................... 4-26 SIGNAL SOURCES description....................................................................... 5-5 metering ........................................................................ 6-15 settings ......................................................................... 5-70 SIGNAL TYPES .................................................................. 1-3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM .............................................. 2-1, 2-2 SITE LIST, CREATING ....................................................... 4-1 SNTP PROTOCOL error messages ................................................................ 7-9 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-20 settings ......................................................................... 5-34 SOFTWARE installation ....................................................................... 1-5 see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................ 1-4 SOFTWARE, PC see entry for EnerVista UR Setup SOURCE FREQUENCY .................................................... 6-18 SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES .................................... 5-179 SOURCES description....................................................................... 5-5 example use of .............................................................. 5-71 metering ........................................................................ 6-15 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-22 settings ................................................................ 5-69, 5-70 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................ 2-10 SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-109 logic ............................................................................ 5-178 Modbus registers ...........................................................B-32 settings ....................................................................... 5-175 specifications ................................................................. 2-11 ST TYPE CONNECTORS ................................................. 3-26 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ............................................F-8 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL actual values ................................................................. 6-14 characteristic ............................................................... 5-141 description................................................................... 5-141 FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-109 logic ............................................................................ 5-142 Modbus registers ..................................................B-10, B-29 settings ....................................................................... 5-141 specifications ................................................................. 2-10 STATOR GROUND see also entry for 100% STATOR GROUND actual values ................................................................. 6-22 Modbus registers ..................................................B-11, B-32 settings ....................................................................... 5-196 STATUS INDICATORS ............................................ 4-14, 4-16 STORAGE TEMPERATURE .............................................. 2-22 SUB-HARMONIC STATOR GROUND FAULT FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-109 settings ....................................................................... 5-202 specifications ................................................................. 2-12 SURGE IMMUNITY .......................................................... 2-23 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS METERING ..................... 6-12 SYNCHROCHECK actual values .................................................. 6-9, 6-19, 6-22 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-110 logic ............................................................................ 5-229 Modbus registers .................................................. B-13, B-23 settings ............................................................. 5-226, 5-227 specifications .................................................................2-13 SYNCHROPHASORS actual values ..................................................................6-24 commands ...................................................................... 7-4 FlexLogic operands ........................................ 5-107, 5-108 network connection ...................................................... 5-101 phase measurement unit triggering .................................5-91 phasor measurement configuration .................................5-87 phasor measurement unit ...............................................5-86 phasor measurement unit calibration ...............................5-88 phasor measurement unit communications ......................5-89 phasor measurement unit recording ................................5-98 test values ...................................................................5-268 SYSTEM FREQUENCY .....................................................5-69 SYSTEM SETUP ..............................................................5-67
T
TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................ 7-6 TARGET SETTING ............................................................ 5-5 TARGETS MENU ............................................................... 7-6 TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................5-33 TELEPROTECTION actual values ................................................................... 6-5 clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-110 logic ............................................................................ 5-252 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-44 overview ...................................................................... 5-250 settings .................................................... 5-64, 5-250, 5-251 specifications .................................................................2-17 TEMPERATURE MONITOR .................................... 5-112, 7-10 TERMINALS ...................................................................... 3-8 TESTING force contact inputs ...................................................... 5-266 force contact outputs .................................................... 5-267 lamp test ......................................................................... 7-3 self-test error messages .................................................. 7-6 synchrophasors ............................................................ 5-268 THD Modbus registers ........................................................... B-15 THD METERING ............................................. 2-16, 6-18, 6-19 THIRD HARMONIC NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-104 logic ............................................................................ 5-201 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-31 settings ........................................................................ 5-200 specifications .................................................................2-12 TIME ................................................................................. 7-2 TIME OVERCURRENT see PHASE, NEUTRAL, and GROUND TOC entries TIMERS ......................................................................... 5-118 TOC ground ......................................................................... 5-163 neutral ......................................................................... 5-156 phase .......................................................................... 5-149 specifications .................................................................2-10 TRACEABILITY data .................................................... 4-11, 4-12, 8-13, 8-14 overview ............................................................... 4-10, 8-12
viii
GE Multilin
INDEX
rules .....................................................................4-12, 8-14 TRACKING FREQUENCY ........................................ 6-20, B-39 TRANSDUCER I/O actual values ................................................................. 6-25 settings ........................................ 5-254, 5-255, 5-257, 5-258 specifications ........................................................2-16, 2-17 wiring ............................................................................ 3-23 TRIP BUS FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-110 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-41 settings ....................................................................... 5-211 TRIP LEDs ...................................................................... 5-45 TROUBLE INDICATOR ............................................. 1-17, 7-6 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS Modbus registers .......................................................... B-21 settings ......................................................................... 5-46 USERST-1 BIT PAIR ...................................................... 5-246
V
VAR-HOURS ........................................................... 2-16, 6-18 VIBRATION TESTING ...................................................... 2-23 VIRTUAL INPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-4 commands ....................................................................... 7-1 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-111 logic ............................................................................ 5-239 Modbus registers ................................................... B-8, B-53 settings ....................................................................... 5-239 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS actual values ................................................................... 6-6 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-111 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-54 settings ....................................................................... 5-242 VOLTAGE BANKS ............................................................ 5-68 VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ................................................... 2-23 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-180 VOLTAGE HARMONICS ................................................... 6-19 VOLTAGE METERING Modbus registers .......................................................... B-11 specifications ................................................................. 2-15 values ........................................................................... 6-16 VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC ..................... 5-149 VOLTS PER HERTZ actual values ................................................................. 6-23 curves ......................................................................... 5-188 FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-110 logic ............................................................................ 5-187 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-45 settings ....................................................................... 5-187 specifications ................................................................. 2-12 VT FUSE FAILURE logic ............................................................................ 5-236 Modbus registers .......................................................... B-44 settings ....................................................................... 5-236 VT INPUTS ...................................................... 3-14, 5-6, 5-68 VT WIRING ...................................................................... 3-14 VTFF FlexLogic operands ................................................... 5-109 see VT FUSE FAILURE
U
UL APPROVAL ................................................................ 2-24 UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS commands .................................................................... 5-14 resetting .......................................................................... 7-2 UNDERFREQUENCY FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-110 logic ............................................................................ 5-220 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-38 settings ....................................................................... 5-220 specifications ................................................................ 2-13 UNDERVOLTAGE auxiliary ........................................................................ 2-11 phase .................................................................. 2-11, 5-181 third harmonic neutral .......................................... 2-12, 5-200 UNDERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS .......................... 5-180 UNEXPECTED RESTART ERROR .................................... 7-10 UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED ....................................... 5-65, 7-7 UNPACKING THE RELAY .................................................. 1-1 UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM ................................. 5-63 UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-3 URPC see entry for ENERVISTA UR SETUP USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS example ........................................................................ 5-56 invoking and scrolling .................................................... 5-54 Modbus registers .................................................. B-18, B-23 settings .................................................................5-54, 5-56 specifications ................................................................ 2-14 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT actual values ................................................................. 6-26 clearing .................................................................. 5-14, 7-2 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-15 settings ......................................................................... 5-39 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs custom labeling ............................................................. 4-22 defaults ......................................................................... 4-16 description ............................................................4-15, 4-16 Modbus registers ........................................................... B-20 settings ......................................................................... 5-45 specifications ................................................................ 2-14 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS FlexLogic operands .................................................. 5-112 Modbus registers .................................................. B-24, B-37 settings ......................................................................... 5-48 specifications ................................................................ 2-14
W
WARRANTY .....................................................................F-10 WATT-HOURS ........................................................ 2-16, 6-18 WEB SERVER PROTOCOL .............................................. 5-33 WEBSITE ........................................................................... 1-1
Z
ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE ................................ 3-14
GE Multilin
ix
INDEX
GE Multilin

G60man v1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

G60man v1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

G60man v1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title Page

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin's Quality Management System is registered to ISO9001:2000 QMI # 005094 UL # A3775

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1.5 USING THE RELAY

G60 Generator Protection System

3.3 DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS MODULES

3.4 FIELD AND STATOR GROUND MODULES

3.5 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

G60 Generator Protection System

5.3 REMOTE RESOURCES 5.4 SYSTEM SETUP

5.6 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS

G60 Generator Protection System

5.9 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

G60 Generator Protection System

TABLE OF CONTENTS 6.4 RECORDS

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION

7. COMMANDS AND TARGETS

8.1 PASSWORD SECURITY

8.2 SETTINGS SECURITY

8.3 ENERVISTA SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

9.1 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

10. APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

10.1 SETTING EXAMPLE

G60 Generator Protection System

10.2 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

A. FLEXANALOG AND FLEXINTEGER PARAMETERS

A.1 PARAMETER LISTS

B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

C. IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONS

C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION

C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION

G60 Generator Protection System

C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE

C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP

C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE

C.7 LOGICAL NODES

D. IEC 60870-5-104 COMMUNICATIONS

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104

E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.2 ABBREVIATIONS F.3 WARRANTY

G60 Generator Protection System

G60 Generator Protection System

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

G60 Generator Management Relay

G60D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A 000 830721A3 GEK-113274 MAZB98000029 D 2005/01/05

G60 Generator Protection System

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2UR OVERVIEW